main lobby renovation at river oaks recreation …...2400 sixth line, oakville, on. rft-53-2019...

Request for Tenders Main Lobby Renovation at River Oaks Recreation Centre, 2400 Sixth Line, Oakville, ON. RFT-53-2019 Contact Dawn McLeod, CPPB Intermediate Buyer [email protected] 905-845-6601, ext. 3141

Obtain documents online https://oakville.bidsandtenders.ca

Closing date On or before 2:00 p.m. Thursday, August 8, 2019

Closing location https://oakville.bidsandtenders.ca (the Bidding System)

Electronic bid submission only

of 596

The Town of Oakville (the town) invites tenders for construction services described as: Interior Alteration / Renovation of a 3,015 square foot main entrance including vestibule, corridor and lobby. Work includes architectural, structural (security grill attachment), interior finishes, and minor mechanical/electrical. To Obtain Documents Online please visit: https://oakville.bidsandtenders.ca If you subscribe to bids&tenders™ you can login into your account to download the bid document(s) without the preview watermark. You may also opt to purchase a one-time download for this opportunity. Documents are not provided in any other manner. All bidders shall have a Bidding System vendor account and be registered as a Plan Taker for this bid opportunity, which will enable the bidder to download the Request for Tender without the watermark preview, to receive addenda email notifications, download addenda and to submit their bid electronically through the Bidding System. Bidders are cautioned that the timing of their bid submission is based on when the bid is successfully received by the Bidding System, not when a bid is submitted by a bidder, as bid transmission can be delayed in an “internet traffic jam” due to file transfer size, transmission speed, etc. It is a bidder’s responsibility to deliver its bid to the proper place at the proper time, and to transmit their bid sufficiently in advance of the time set for receipt of bids to allow for timely receipt by the town. For the above reasons, the town recommends that bidders allow sufficient time to upload their bid submission and attachment(s) (if applicable) and to resolve any issues that may arise. The closing time and date shall be determined by the town’s Bidding System web clock. The town also recommends that bidders take advantage of the Bidding System feature that allows bidders to view their uploaded documents prior to submission of their bid. By doing so, a bidder may avoid an error that could occur by uploading an incorrect or unreadable file, which would render their submission non-compliant. The Bidding System will send a confirmation email to the bidder advising that their bid was submitted successfully. If you do not receive a confirmation email, contact technical support at bids&tenders™ via telephone at 1-800-594-4798, or email to [email protected]. Late Bids will not be accepted. To ensure receipt of the latest information and updates via email regarding this bid, the onus is on the bidder to create a Bidding System vendor account and register as a Plan Taker for the bid opportunity at https://oakville.bidsandtenders.ca. All inquiries must be submitted through the bidding system by utilizing the Submit Question button. The town’s Procurement Policy By-law forms part of all competitive bid documents. The By-law can be found on the Town of Oakville website at: oakville.ca/business/quotes-quotes.html -Manager of Purchasing and Risk Management

of 596

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

SECTION 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS

SECTION 3 LIABILITY AND INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 4 SCOPE OF WORK AND SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 5 SCHEDULES - TO BE COMPLETED AND/OR UPLOADED ONLINE ONLY

SECTION 6 APPENDICES

APPENDIX A SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO CCDC 2008 - STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT Note these were updated April 1, 2019

APPENDIX B PRE-RENOVATION DESIGNATED SUBSTANCE AND HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REPORT

DRAWINGS INCLUDED AS A SEPARATE DOWNLOAD ON THE BIDS AND TENDERS SITE AND FORM PART OF THIS RFT DOCUMENT

SCHEDULE OF EVENTS

THESE DATES ARE APPROXIMATE AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE Release of RFT Friday, July 19, 2019

Mandatory Site Visit 10:00am Tuesday, July 30, 2019

Close of Question Period 4:00pm Thursday, August 1, 2019

RFT Closing Date 2:00pm Thursday, August 8, 2019

Mandatory Site Visit:

Date and Time: 10:00am Local Time, Thursday, July 30, 2019

Location: River Oaks Recreation Centre, 2400 Sixth Line, Oakville, ON.

Please meet in the buildings main lobby

of 596

Section 1 Instructions to Bidders

The Corporation of the Town of Oakville REQUEST FOR TENDER # RFT-53-2019

Main Lobby Renovation at River Oaks Recreation Centre, 2400 Sixth Line, Oakville, ON.

The Town of Oakville (hereafter referred to as the town) will receive tenders for Main Lobby Renovation at River Oaks Recreation Centre, Oakville, ON. 1.1 Instructions to Bidders 1.1.1 Electronic bid submissions only, shall be received by the Bidding System, on or

before 2:00 p.m. (14:00 hours) local Oakville time, on Thursday, August 8, 2019.

1.1.2 Should the town receive a bid that is subsequently found to be from a bidder that is not registered with bids&tenders™, and the bidder did not obtain their bid document from https://Oakville.bidsandtenders.ca, the town reserves the right to remove the bid from further consideration. Bids submitted by any other method will not be accepted.

1.1.3 It is the sole responsibility of each bidder to make sure that its bid is delivered and be received by the Bidding System, on or before 2:00 p.m. (14:00 hours) local time. Tenders received after the specified closing date and time will not be accepted by the Bidding System.

1.1.4 There will not be a public opening for this tender. When tenders are opened the total tendered price(s) “As Read” bid results will be posted to the town’s Bidding System at https://oakville.bidsandtenders.ca and are typically available within 2 hours of the tender closing.

Bid results will not be provided in any other manner.

1.1.5 Following the opening, all bids will be reviewed for compliance with the tender terms and conditions. Once the determination of compliance is complete, bid results will be updated on the town’s Bidding System at https://oakville.bidsandtenders.ca if required.

1.1.6 The town shall not be liable for any costs, expenses, loss or damage incurred by any bidder in the preparation and submission of a tender, the tender process, including the evaluation and interview process (if any), in the negotiation, preparation and execution of the award, or the acceptance or non-acceptance by the town of any tender, and by submitting a bid each bidder shall be deemed to have agreed that it has no claim. The town shall not be liable for any costs, expenses, loss or damage resulting from any technical difficulty with the Bidding System, including, without limitation, a power failure or a bidder’s inability to upload a bid submission.

1.1.7 The working language of the town is English and all responses to this Request for Tender must be in English.

1.2 Site Meeting

1.2.1 Where a site meeting is mandatory, bidders must sign in prior to start of meeting. Once the meeting begins, the sign-in sheet will be removed. No late sign-in will be permitted. Bids will only be accepted from bidders who are signed in and in attendance for the entire meeting.

of 596


1.2.2 In the event that no potential bidders or only one potential bidder attends the mandatory

site meeting, the town reserves the right in its absolute discretion to re-schedule a second meeting to ensure competitive bid submissions are received in accordance with the town’s Procurement Policy By-law.

1.2.3 Before submitting a tender, bidders shall carefully examine drawings, specifications and site conditions, fully inform themselves of all existing conditions and limitations and shall include in the tender, sums to cover the cost of all work included in the tender document. The bidder shall accept sole responsibility for any error or neglect in respect to this requirement and no allowance shall be made by the town for the bidder’s failure to do so.

1.3 Clarification

1.3.1 If a bidder finds discrepancies in or omissions from the tender documents, or if a bidder is in doubt as to their meaning, questions must be submitted through the Bidding System portal by clicking on the “Submit Question” button on the bid details page for the applicable opportunity. Questions received after the deadline or via any other method are not guaranteed a response.

1.3.2 The town shall not be bound by any oral instruction, amendment, clarification, information, advice or suggestion from any town staff or consultant to the town.

1.3.3 Correspondence sent to persons other than the designated purchasing contact, including other potential bidders, with respect to the tender, may be grounds for disqualification, and the town may, in its discretion, and in addition to any other rights or remedies available at law, reject any potential or actual tender by that bidder.

1.4 Addenda

1.4.1 The town reserves the right at any time prior to the closing time:

to withdraw or cancel the Request for Tender;

to extend the time for the submission of bids; or

to modify these instructions, the schedule of prices, the specifications, or the description of the project, work or supply;

By the publication of an addendum or other notice, and the town shall not be liable for any expense, cost, loss or damage incurred or suffered by any bidder (or any other person) as a result of its so doing.

1.4.2 Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of any addenda when submitting their bid through the Bidding System. Bidders shall check the appropriate box for each addenda and any applicable attachments that have been issued. This must be done before a bidder can submit their bid submission. Addenda shall become part of the tender documents and will be considered in determining the bid price(s).

1.4.3 Addenda will be issued through the Bidding System, typically forty-eight (48) hours

prior to the closing date and time, unless otherwise approved. It is the responsibility of the bidder to have received all addendum/addenda that have been issued. Bidders should check online at https://oakville.bidsandtenders.ca prior to submitting their bid and up until bid closing date and time in the event additional addenda are issued.

of 596


1.4.4 If a bid has been submitted prior to an addendum/addenda being issued by the town,

the Bidding System shall automatically retract the bid submission. The bid submission status will be changed to an incomplete status (NOT accepted by the town). The retracted bid can be viewed by the bidder in the “MY BIDS” section of the Bidding System. The bidder becomes solely responsible for the following actions: i) make any required adjustments to their bid; and

ii) acknowledge the addendum/addenda; and

iii) Ensure the re-submitted Bid is successfully received by the Bidding System on or before 2:00 p.m. (14:00 hours) local Oakville time, on the bid closing date.

SPECIAL NOTES:

It is strongly recommended that bidders have one or more “invited” company contacts in your Bidding System vendor account with their own unique login to the Bidding System. This will permit these contacts to manage (register, submit, resubmit, edit and withdraw) bids for which your company is a Registered Plan Taker. In the event the original contact becomes unavailable, these additional contacts may act on your company’s behalf and have the authority to receive addendum notifications from the Bidding System; submit bids electronically through the Bidding System; and/or withdraw, edit, acknowledge addendum/addenda or resubmit, etc. on your behalf.

Do not invite any additional contacts that you do not want to have access to view, edit, submit, resubmit and/or withdraw or who may be in direct competition, for example a company may have two divisions that could compete for the same bid opportunity.

If you are an invited company contact, it is imperative that you create your login from the link contained in the email invitation. Do NOT go directly to the website and create a separate vendor account.

1.5 Withdrawal of Bids / Irrevocable

1.5.1 Bidders may edit or withdraw their bid submission online through the Bidding System prior to the closing date and time. However, the bidder is solely responsible to:

i) make any required changes to their bid (if applicable); and ii) in the case where the bidders wishes to re-submit a bid, it is received by the

Bidding System before the specified bid closing date and time.

1.5.2 Requests to withdraw bids received by the Bidding System will not be considered after the closing date and time.

1.5.3 A bid shall be irrevocable (i.e. open for acceptance by the town) for a period of sixty (60) days following the closing date for the tender.

1.6 Confidentiality/Non-Disclosure of Information

1.6.1 It is town practice to disclose the name of the successful bidder(s) and the total contract price. The town shall make every effort to safeguard the confidentiality of other information included in each submission; however, all submissions are subject to the provisions of the Municipal Freedom of Information and Privacy Act (MFIPPA and the Personal Information Protection and Electronic Documents Act.

of 596


1.6.2 The personal data provided by the town to the successful bidder (or collected on behalf

of the town by the successful bidder) shall be used in compliance with Section 31 of the Municipal Freedom of Information and Protection of Privacy Act (MFIFFA).

The successful bidder agrees that during and after the effective period of the contract, all information provided to the successful bidder by the town shall be treated as privileged and confidential and shall not be used by the successful bidder for any other purpose nor divulged to any third party for any reason whatsoever without the written permission of the town, and which is specifically authorized by MFIPPA.

1.6.3 The Town of Oakville logo should not be used by the bidder without express permission from the town, as the Logo is a registered trademark belonging to the Town of Oakville.

1.7 Schedule of Prices (Bid Form)

1.7.1 The amounts stipulated on the bid form is intended to cover the cost of the complete work as described in this tender.

1.7.2 All prices to be tendered in Canadian Funds, FOB Destination (town locations). HST will be extra and should not be included in bid prices.

1.7.3 The bid form may include a “Contingency” amount that has been identified for unforeseen work that may arise. Payment from this amount will be for work requested and/or approved by the town.

1.7.4 Pricing for any requests under the heading Optional Prices will not to be included in the summary table. Optional items may or may not be selected and added to the total contract amount at the sole discretion of the town.

1.7.5 Pricing for any requests under the heading Provisional Prices will be included in the summary table. Provisional items may be cancelled by the Project Manager at any time during the contract. The Contractor shall have no claim for delay and loss of overhead or profit should the Project Manager decide to delete any or all Provisional Items.

1.7.6 The person submitting the bid on behalf of the bidder shall have authority to bind the bidder.

1.7.7 All information required on forms shall be completed in full including references and subcontractors that it proposes to use for work described. Changes made to the list of nominated subcontractors after the closing of the tender, shall have prior written approval of the town’s Project Manager.

1.7.8 All price(s) submitted shall be a reasonable price for each particular item as determined by the purchasing agent and under no condition will an unbalanced tender be considered. Submissions containing prices which appear to be so unbalanced as to likely affect the interests of the town adversely will be clarified and may be rejected.

1.8 Bid Bond / Agreement to Bond

1.8.1 Each Tender must be accompanied by a 10% Bid Bond.

of 596


1.8.2 Bonds shall be from a Surety Company authorized by law to carry on business in the

Province of Ontario, in favour of the Town of Oakville. Bonds must be irrevocable and open for bid acceptance for at least sixty (60) days from the date of bid closing.

1.8.3 Each submission must be accompanied by both a digital Bid Bond and a digital Agreement to Bond. The town will only accept submissions that include both the Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond in an electronically verifiable/enforceable (e-Bond) format. For more information regarding e-Bonds bidders are encouraged to contact their surety company or visit the Surety Association of Canada at the following link:

https://www.surety-canada.com/en/ebonding/index.html

Information at this site includes;

A list of third parties that provide online surety digital bond services such as Mobile Bonds or Xenex. The town does not endorse or promote any third party digital bond service provider.

An Industry Checklist which Digital Bonds provided should meet.

1.8.4 All instruction details for accessing authentication should be included with the uploaded Bond. Note: A scanned pdf copy of a Bid Bond or an Agreement to Bond are not acceptable.

1.8.5 Where a surety provides the Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond in a single zipped file

download, bidders shall upload this file to the town’s Bidding System, in the bid submission file labelled “Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond”. Bidders are cautioned not to alter the file in any way prior to uploading as this could affect the electronically verifiable/enforceable format.

1.8.6 Where a surety provides the Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond separately, bidders

shall create a single zip file (see Bidding System instructions on how to create a zip file) containing both the Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond and upload the zipped file to the file labelled “Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond”. Do not merge electronic bond files manually.

1.8.7 Any costs associated with e-Bonds are the responsibility and cost of the bidder. No interest will be paid on any bid deposit.

1.9 Performance Bond 1.9.1 Upon award, the successful bidder shall provide a performance bond, in an original

form, issued by a reputable bonding company, licensed to carry on business in Ontario, payable to the Town of Oakville. Performance bond must be in original form, completed, duly signed and executed, and submitted to the town when requested. 50% Performance Bond and a 50% Labour and Materials Bond

1.9.2 If the successful bidder fails to provide a performance bond when requested, the town shall declare the bid deposit forfeited and the bidder will be held responsible for any increased costs or damages incurred by the town. Any bidder who fails to provide all required documents within the timelines provided, or otherwise fails to enter into an agreement with the town upon notice of being the successful bidder may be subject to suspension by the town and prohibited from bidding for a period of up the three (3) years.

of 596


1.9.3 Performance surety shall guarantee all conditions as set out in the contract, including

proper execution of the work and for all matters for which the successful bidder is responsible for throughout the one year period of maintenance and warranty.

1.9.4 Any costs associated with performance surety are the responsibility and cost of the bidder.

1.10 Brand Names

1.10.1 Any reference to the trade name, brand name or catalogue number of a particular manufacturer shall be understood to have been made solely for the purpose of establishing and describing general performance and quality levels of the item to be supplied and shall not be construed to restrict bidders to that manufacturer. Where substitutes are not being accepted the Specifications and/or the Bid Form shall indicate “No Substitutes”. It should be noted that in some cases specified products may be town Standards and may not be considered for substitution.

1.10.2 Where approved equivalents are permitted, approval must be obtained from the town, in writing, prior to acceptance. Requests must be submitted to Town of Oakville Purchasing Services, Attention Dawn McLeod via [email protected] for consideration before 4:00pm local time, Thursday, August 1, 2019.

Include brand name and model number of the substitute manufacturer. It is not necessary to submit samples unless requested, although it is the bidder's responsibility to demonstrate that the product bid meets the specifications. Contractor or Supplier shall be responsible for all costs associated with the use of the “approved equal”. The onus is on the Contractor or Supplier to provide all pertinent information in the request so the town can review and make a determination as to acceptability of the proposed substitute. Once a decision has been rendered it will not be reexamined.

The town shall be the sole judge (in its absolute discretion) as to whether an equivalent meets its specifications.

If no substitution is indicated, it will be assumed the price is for the product specified and the town will not accept substitutes after closing of the bid.

1.11 Guidelines Regarding Bid Irregularities

1.11.1 A bid irregularity is a variance between the requirements (terms, conditions, specifications, special instructions) of a bid request and the information provided by the bidder in a bid response.

1.11.2 Examples below represent the general types of bid irregularities and the resulting action. This list is not inclusive and for irregularities not listed the Manager of Purchasing shall determine the resulting action. The town shall have the right to accept or reject any or all bids, to waive minor irregularities at its sole discretion, or request a bidder rectify any deviation at the town’s sole discretion.

of 596


Late Bid Bid received after the closing date and time specified in the bid documents.

Bidding System does not accept late bids

Site Meeting

Bidder did not attend a mandatory site meeting. Bid not accepted by the Bidding System

Method of Delivery

Where the bid has been submitted via any other method other than as allowed for in the bid documents.

Bid DeclaredNon-Compliant

Format Bid not on the form supplied by the town or not in the format specified by the town.


Bid Bond Amount less than the amount indicated in the bid document.


Bid Bond / Agreement to Bond

Bond is missing, not an electronically verifiable/enforceable (e-Bond), or bonding company not licensed to conduct business in Ontario.


Qualified Bid

Where the bid has been qualified by changes to specification or major requirements and acceptance would allow an unfair advantage over competitors.


Failure to Execute

Fails to execute a contract or supply supplementary documents after Intent to Award letter has been issued.

Bid Set Aside

1.12 Reserved Privileges of the Owner

1.12.1 Without limiting or restricting any other right or privileges, the town shall have the following reserved rights and privileges, which may be exercised or waived in its absolute discretion to:

a. reject any or all bids and the lowest tender will not necessarily be accepted;

b. reject any bid where the bidder has failed to execute a Contract or provide performance surety for any awarded Contract for the town in the past;

c. reject any tender where the bidder has defaulted or failed to satisfactorily complete other work for the town in the past;

d. reject any tender that contains qualifying conditions or otherwise fails to conform to these tender documents;

e. reject any tender submitted by a company which in the opinion of the town or its professional advisors, does not possess the experience, or financial, technical, personnel or other resources that may reasonably be expected to be necessary in order to carry out the obligations that the bidder proposes to assume under the terms of its tender;

of 596


f. not accept a tender from any person or corporation which includes any non-arms

length corporation who, or which, has a claim or instituted a legal proceeding against the Town of Oakville, or against whom the Town of Oakville has a claim or instituted a legal proceeding with respect to any previous contracts, bid submissions or business transactions who is listed as either the proposed general contractor or subcontractor and/or vendor within the submitted responses; and/or

g. reject any tender submitted by a bidder or cancel the Contract awarded to that bidder without penalty, where any information provided by the bidder in its tender or as part of any pre-qualification procedure is determined to be false or otherwise misleading in any material respect.

h. In cases where the town is required to obtain permits from governing authorities and those permits are not able to be obtained in a timely manner, the town reserves the right not to award the bid.

1.12.2 Where only one tender has been received or the lowest priced compliant tender submission exceeds the town’s budgeted or estimated costs, the town may, but is not obligated to:

a. cancel the Request for Tender;

b. re-issue the Request for Tender and accept new tenders based on revised documents; or

c. enter into negotiations with the bidder with the lowest priced and compliant tender submission provided that the requirements of the tender documentation are not substantially modified, and no other bidder shall have any right to object that its tender would have been lower had the negotiated amendments been included in the original Request for Tender.

1.13 Bribery and Collusion

1.13.1 Bidders including any of their agents are prohibited from engaging in any form of political or other lobbying of any kind whatsoever to influence the outcome of the tender process and the town shall be at liberty to reject the bidder’s submission or cancel any contract in contravention of this requirement.

1.13.2 The bidder further acknowledges that its bid is made without any connection, knowledge, comparison of figures or arrangements with any other firm or person making a bid for the same work and is in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud.

1.14 Conflict of Interest

1.14.1 No employee of the town, advisors or members of Council of the town shall personally sell goods or services to the town, nor have a direct or indirect interest in a company that sells goods or services to the town, other than a de minimus passive investment in a publicly issued entity. The town may reject any bid submitted, or cancel any Contract awarded, in contravention of this requirement.

1.14.2 The successful bidder shall refrain from acting in any case where there may be any conflict of interest between it (or any of its directors, officers, or employees) and the town, and the successful bidder shall notify the town immediately of any actual or potential conflict of interest that may arise during the performance of the Contract.

of 596


1.14.3 It is imperative that any real or perceived conflict that is evident or suspected be

declared and adjudicated in order to preserve the integrity of the bid process. If the town discovers a bidder’s failure to disclose a conflict of interest, the town may disqualify the bidder or terminate any contract pursuant to this tender process.

1.15 Award Process

1.15.1 Following written notification from the town to the successful bidder, the executed Contract, performance surety and all other required documentation will be provided by the successful bidder within ten (10) calendar days or sooner if possible. The form of contract used for this tender shall be CCDC-2 2008 Stipulated Price Contract (Refer to Appendix C for Supplementary Conditions to the CCDC-2-2008 Stipulated Price Contract. A purchase order will be issued with the award and the purchase order number must be included in all requests for payment.

1.15.2 Award of the tender will be made by the town as soon as practical. Award may be subject to budget approval and will occur on approval by town officials as designated in the By-law. Once approvals are received from designated officials the award is deemed to have been made by the town.

1.15.3 Where quantities are noted as approximate, the town may, at its discretion, purchase more or less of the commodity based on the unit price bid.

1.15.4 Only contractors that the town deems as fully qualified will be considered for award of this tender. It is the bidder’s responsibility to provide satisfactory references that are relevant to the current project in scope and value. The town will also review the bidder’s prior performance on other contracts with the town and when relying on the services of a Consultant in the conduct of the project, the knowledge of that Consultant will also be considered.

1.15.5 In the event the successful bidder fails to execute the Contract as prescribed or fails to provide performance surety as applicable within ten (10) calendar days following written notification from the town to the successful bidder, the town may grant additional time to fulfill the necessary requirements, if in the opinion of town staff the extension does not compromise the interests of the town.

1.15.6 Where the successful bidder fails to execute the Contract or provide performance surety as set out in Section 1.9, the town shall declare the bid deposit forfeited and the bidder will be held responsible for any increased costs or damages incurred by the town, such amounts being a fair and reasonable estimate of foreseeable losses. The town may then make a recommendation to:

a. award the contract to the next lowest compliant bidder, or

b. cancel the Request for Tenders.

Any bidder who fails to provide all required documents within the timelines provided, or otherwise fails to enter into an agreement with the town upon notice of being the successful bidder may be subject to suspension by the town and prohibited from bidding for a period of up the three (3) years.

of 596


1.16 Bid Review Procedures

1.16.1 To maintain the integrity of the process, a bidder who believes there has been a breach of the requirements of the Canadian Free Trade Agreement (CFTA), shall take the following steps:

a. A request by a bidder for a bid review must be received by the Manager of Purchasing within ten (10) business days from the time when the basis of the dispute became known or reasonably should have become known. The request must provide sufficient detail including reference to the specific Article in the CFTA the bidder believes was breached.

b. An adhoc review committee consisting of the Manager of Purchasing, the departmental director and the town solicitor or their approved designates shall review such dispute.

c. Findings shall be issued to the bidder in writing within 90 days after filing of its dispute, unless an extension of time is warranted due to extenuating circumstances, in which case the findings will be issued within 135 days after the filing of the dispute.

d. The town and the bidder shall seek to resolve the dispute through consultations.

e. Where a bidder provides an appeal, in writing, to the review committee’s initial findings, the town will establish an arbitrator independent of the town to receive and review the appeal.

f. If the arbitrator determines that there has been a breach, compensation to the bidder is limited to the costs of the preparation of the bid submission, or the costs relating to the dispute, or both.

g. If the town and the bidder cannot agree upon the fair and reasonable amount of such costs defined under item f., their quantum may be referred to the arbitrator for determination. The costs to be borne by the party that is unsuccessful in the dispute.

of 596

Section 2 General Conditions

SECTION 2 – GENERAL CONDITIONS

2.1 Governing Codes

This Contract shall be subject to any of the following governing codes (latest edition) having jurisdiction over this project, including but not limited to:

Ontario Building Code Fire and Electrical Safety Codes Fire Marshal Act National Fire Prevention Authority Ontario Water Resources Act Gas Utilization Code Environmental Protection Act ESA (Electrical Safety Authority) Municipal Bylaws Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Regulations

2.2 Owner’s Designate

The Project Manager for this project is: Andrea Jones, Project Leader – Accessibility, Facilities & Construction Management TOWN OF OAKVILLE

The Project Manager shall inspect and oversee all work included and specified herein to the extent of ensuring that specifications are being followed and the quality of work meets the expectations of the town and shall have authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage, in his/her opinion, may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the Contract. The Project Manager shall also have authority to reject all work and materials which do not conform to the tender specifications or which are viewed as substandard, flawed or in any other way deemed not suitable for the town’s purposes, and to answer all questions which arise in the execution of the work. The town reserves the right to change the Project Manager upon written notice to the Contractor.

2.3 Order of Precedence

2.3.1 If there is a conflict within the contract documents, the order of priority of documents, from highest to lowest, shall be as follows (the original copy of the issued document and addendums, as posted in the Bidding System shall prevail).

1. Change Orders and/or Change Directives 2. Executed Agreement Between Owner and Contractor - CCDC-2-2008 3. Contractor’s Bid Submission Including Schedule of Prices 4. Addenda (as issued) 5. Special Provisions 6. Supplementary Conditions to Contract CCDC-2-2008 7. Definitions in CCDC-2-2008 Stipulated Price Contract 8. General Conditions in CCDC-2-2008 Stipulated Price Contract 9. Specifications 10. Drawings 11. Tender General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders

of 596


2.4 Scope of Work / Specifications / Record Drawings

2.4.1 It is the intent of the specifications to furnish and install all materials and equipment as hereinafter specified and/or as shown in the drawings.

2.4.2 Work area to be restricted to area shown on drawings.

2.4.3 In cases where the work necessitates a larger disturbed area, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notify the Project Manager and receive written approval for extending the area of disruption.

2.4.4 The specifications are to be considered as an integral part of the plans, which accompany them; neither the plans nor the specifications shall be used alone. Any item or subject omitted from one, but which is mentioned or reasonably implied in the other, shall be considered as properly and sufficiently specified, and must, therefore be provided. Misinterpretations of either the plans or the specifications shall not relieve the Contractor of their responsibility.

2.4.5 Construction drawings and specifications required for this project shall be issued by the Owner's representative at the contractor's request. Any additional drawings such as shop drawings, etc., shall be approved by Owner's representative.

2.4.6 All Drawings used on the site or in the shop shall bear the signature of the Owner's representative or "Approved for Construction" stamp of the owner.

2.4.7 Additional verbal instructions given by the Owner's representative shall be confirmed in writing and shall become part of this specification. Any such addition shall not alter the intent, limit, quality or quantity of the contract.

2.4.8 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining a list of the shop drawings required by the Owner.

2.4.9 Shop drawings shall be processed by the Contractor according to the manufacturer's requirements.

2.4.10 The Owner shall require two (2) copies only, of reviewed drawings as processed by the Contractor unless otherwise directed by the Owner.

2.4.11 The Owner will not review the drawings for approval, they shall only be required for the intent of installation and general information, unless otherwise directed by the Owner.

2.4.12 All shop drawings received by the Owner shall bear the Contractor's approved or reviewed stamp, and shall be received prior to manufacture of the product.

2.5 Permits, Licenses, Laws and Regulations

2.5.1 With the exception of the Building Permit, the Contractor shall apply and pay for all necessary permits and licenses, approvals and consents required for the execution of the Work. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices and pay all fees required by law and comply with all laws, by-laws, rules, regulations, and requirements relating to the work and to the preservation of public health. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all workers and equipment on the site in accordance with all applicable safety legislation passed by Federal, Provincial and Local Authorities governing construction safety.

of 596


2.5.2 The Contractor shall ensure that all persons supplying services or materials to the Project, Work or Supply hold all valid and current licenses required by law with respect to the services or materials to be supplied by them respectively. Any Contractor who is not a registered entity in Ontario shall obtain all necessary approvals, consents, permits, licences, certificates, registrations, and other authorizations prior to execution of the Contract. The Contractor shall ensure that all Subcontractors the Contractor proposes to use for carrying out any of the Work required by the Contract and who are not a registered entity in Ontario have obtained all necessary approvals, consents, permits, certificates, registrations, and other authorizations prior to execution of the subcontract.

2.5.3 The Contractor shall comply with all applicable statutes, law, by-laws, regulations, ordinances, notices, and orders of the Federal, Provincial or municipal government from time to time in effect during the course of the Contract, and where the attention of the Contractor is called to any violation thereof by the town or Consultant, the Contractor shall immediately desist from and remedy that violation.

2.5.4 At all times the Contractor and all subcontractors engaged in the Work shall comply with all requirements of the town’s Corporate Health and Safety Manual and shall confirm compliance as indicated on the bid form provided. The town’s Corporate Health and Safety Manual can be found on our website at: http://www.oakville.ca/assets/town%20hall%20-%20employee%20resources/hs-hsmanual.pdf

2.6 Scheduling and Hours of Work

2.6.1 The Contractor and all of its employees are required to identify themselves as the Contractor, or employee of the Contractor, and shall be equipped with sufficient identification for that purpose.

2.6.2 The estimated starting date for this project is October 1, 2019 (Pending Permit Approval). The successful bidder agrees to start the work on this project within seven (7) calendar days from the receipt of written notification from the town that construction can start. Start of construction may be dependent upon the receipt of final approvals from various agencies and ministries.

2.6.3 The bidder shall substantially complete this project to the satisfaction of the Project Manager by October 25, 2019. Time shall, in all respects, be of the essence. The completion date as provided for herein may be extended or abridged by an agreement in writing signed by the parties hereto.

2.6.4 Reference Section 4, Scope of Work / Specifications, Section 01 10-00, Item 1.1 Summary of Work.

Work that results in excessive dust, vibration or odour and in such negatively disrupts the activities occurring in the building, is to occur before or after building operation hours. (6:30am-10:30pm) or during weekends (in accordance with the town’s Noise By-Law.)

If the Contractor wishes to perform work on weekend, they may do so with advance notice and written permission of the Project Manager, some restrictions may apply. No claims by the General Contractor for additional payments or overtime payments will be entertained by the Owner.

of 596


2.6.5 The Project Manager may, in writing, require the Contractor to cease operations on any

day or days if the work is so located that the Project Manger deems it expedient to do so.

2.7 Code of Conduct and Behaviour

2.7.1 Each of the parties agrees to act in a manner that is consistent with the Town’s Policy HR-MNG-006 – Employee Code of Conduct and Policy G-GEN-006 – Code of Conduct for Members of Council and Local Board Members in their business dealings with the other. These policies can be found on the Town’s website at: http://oakville.ca/townhall/policies-procedures.html.

2.7.2 The Town of Oakville is committed to maintaining a healthy, safe and supportive workplace for all employees that is free from discrimination and harassment. All employees are to be treated with respect and dignity in keeping with the town’s values of accountability, dedication, honesty, innovation, respect and teamwork. The policy applies to all town employees (including but not limited to full-time, part-time, students, volunteers, temporary and interns), councillors, contractors, consultants, workers and every person accessing town property, services, events and programs. Each of the parties agrees to act in a manner that is consistent with the Town’s Policy HR-MNG-008 - Respectful Conduct, including the associated procedures. These policies and procedures can be found on the Town’s website at: http://oakville.ca/townhall/policies-procedures.html.

2.8 Accessibility

2.8.1 The Town of Oakville is committed to providing accessible programs, services and facilities to help achieve the town’s vision to be the most livable town in Canada and to comply with the Accessibility for Ontarians with Disabilities Act, 2005 (AODA). The goal of the AODA is to make Ontario accessible to people with disabilities by 2025. As required under the AODA, each time the town purchases goods, services and facilities it must incorporate accessibility design, criteria and features unless not practicable to do so.

2.8.2 The Act also requires persons who provide goods, services or facilities on behalf of the Town of Oakville to ensure training on the AODA’s Integrated Accessibility Standard Regulation and the Human Rights Code as they pertain to persons with disabilities.

2.8.3 To comply, all suppliers and contractors must provide training in accordance with the legislation to all its employees and must be able to provide proof that training has occurred. By signing the Bid Form, you certify that your firm is compliant and you are able to provide proof of training upon request.

The Province of Ontario has developed training that can be taken online and its website provides convenient tools to ensure your employees are properly trained. The Town of Oakville has also developed training materials which can be found on the town’s website at http://www.oakville.ca/business/tenders-quotes.html.

of 596


2.8.4 The Town of Oakville is committed to providing accessible facilities, programs and services and to be the most livable town in Canada. The Oakville Universal Design Standards (OUDS) was developed to help staff realize this commitment and provides an innovative and detailed approach for the design of barrier free and accessible facilities. A made-for Oakville standard, it replaces the town’s 2008 Guidelines for the Design of Accessible Facilities and its use is mandatory for all construction projects at town owned facilities or leased premises and includes new construction, additions, renovations and capital replacement.

2.9 Sustainable Purchasing

2.9.1 The procurement needs of the town represent a significant level of responsibility to demonstrate leadership and support for greener business practices. Integrating environmental performance and impact into supply chain decisions is a commitment to improvement of the environment and the quality of life of town residents.

2.9.2 Green procurement shall be viewed in the context of achieving value for money for the total life-cycle costs. It requires the inclusion of environmental impact considerations into the procurement process, including planning, acquisition, use and disposal. Value for money shall include the consideration of many environmental tangible and intangible factors when determining the total life-cycle costs and environmental impact.

2.9.3 For further information about sustainable purchasing initiatives visit the town’s website:

http://www.oakville.ca/townhall/en-gen-001.html

2.10 Environmental Protection Act

2.10.1 No persons shall use any facilities or equipment for the storage, handling, treatment, collection, transportation, processing or disposal of waste that is not part of a waste management system for which a certificate of approval has been issued and accept in accordance with the terms and conditions of such certificate in compliance with the provisions of the EPA and its Regulations. The persons or corporation shall advise the town of any spills in accordance with the Spills Response Program required under the EPA.

2.11 Extent of Work

2.11.1 The work to be performed under these specifications shall include the supply of all labour, transport, material services, and equipment necessary, and required to construct the following work as described by; or reasonably inferable from these specifications.

2.11.2 Work area to be restricted to area shown on drawings.

2.11.3 In cases where the work necessitates a larger disturbed area, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notify the Project Manager and receive written approval for extending the area of disruption.

2.12 Materials

2.12.1 The contractor shall be responsible for the supply of all materials required for the complete construction of the work as described herein and specified on the drawings unless otherwise specifically stated in writing.

of 596


2.12.2 All materials are to be delivered to the site and stored in appropriate locations with manufacturer or distributor's label intact; handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

2.12.3 All materials to be used in the work are to be new without defects. Failure of adherence or failure to comply with specifications requirements shall cause rejection of materials or replacement of same, at contractor's expense.

2.13 Site

2.13.1 The Contractor is responsible for damage caused to surrounding facilities, and for the protection of the public. Facilities and/or surroundings damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired and paid for in full by the Contractor at no cost to the town.

2.13.2 Prior to commencing any excavation work, the contractor shall establish as near as possible, the location and state of use of all utilities or services, and is responsible for damage or relocation incurred during the execution of the project.

2.13.3 The setting out of work shall rest solely with the Contractor who will be responsible for the same. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify all grades, lines, levels, and dimensions as indicated on the drawings and report any errors or discrepancies to the Project Manager before the commencement of work.

2.13.4 The Contractor shall stockpile his materials in areas approved by the Project Manager. Perishable, stainable or damageable products shall be placed above grade and adequately protected from the elements of nature.

2.13.5 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide temporary services, i.e., hydro, water and heat.

2.13.6 The Town will "NOT" permit the lighting of fires on any project; all waste must be removed from the site.

2.14 Commencement and Completion

2.14.1 The Contractor shall commence work no later than seven (7) days from contract execution date or as otherwise directed by the Project Manager. The work shall be completed according to the plans and specifications, within the time limit as established in these documents.

2.15 Assignment of Contract

2.15.1 The Contractor shall not assign the whole or any part of the resulting contract without the prior written consent of the Project Manager.

2.16 Subcontractors

2.16.1 The subcontractor form included within the Bidding System must be completed in full. If the contractor is not carrying subcontractors, check “own forces” on the form. Only those subcontractors listed on the form will be permitted to work on site unless approval in writing is obtained from the Project Manager. If this form is not completed as noted, the bid may be disqualified. The town reserves the right to reject any subcontractor so nominated.

of 596


2.16.2 The Contractor agrees to preserve and protect the rights of the parties under the

Contract with respect to work performed under subcontract, and shall enter into contracts or written agreements with their subcontractors to require them to perform their work in accordance with and subject to, the terms and conditions of the contract. Further, the Contractor shall be fully responsible to the town for acts and omissions of their subcontractors and for any persons directly or indirectly employed by them.

2.16.3 The bidder certifies that all workers and subcontractors have received proper training and carry required certifications as necessary by law in the Province of Ontario.

2.17 Changes

2.17.1 No change in the work shall proceed without the written approval of the town’s Project Manager.

2.18 Performance Evaluation

2.18.1 At project completion, the Project Manager will conduct an evaluation of the contractor’s overall performance with input from the town’s Inspectors or consultants, if applicable. Recommendations will be put forward as to the contractors overall suitability for future Town of Oakville work. It must also be noted that while overall performance is being evaluated, the Town reserves the right to suspend a bidder for continued and/or repeated inadequate performance on any issues.

2.18.2 Vendor performance is governed by the town’s Procurement Policy By-law – Section 11 – Supplier Performance Evaluation and the Supplier Performance Program. Both of these documents are available on the Town of Oakville website at:

http://www.oakville.ca/business/tenders-quotes.html

2.19 Non-Performance / Contractor’s Default

2.19.1 In the event the Contractor does not comply with the specifications, terms and conditions of the Contract, or other such act of non-performance, the town shall advise the Contractor to correct such non-performance issue within such period of time as stated.

2.19.2 If the Contractor fails to remedy the non-performance issue after being instructed to do so, the town may issue final written notice or terminate the Contract and take corrective action itself.

2.19.3 Where an act or event of default by the Contractor occurs, the town may terminate the Contract by giving written notice to that effect. Alternatively, the town may hold back any amount payable (on this or any other contract with the town) as in the opinion of the town is reasonably required to secure timely completion of the work.

Acts or events of default by the Contractor may include but not be limited to the following:

a. The Contractor fails or neglects to commence or to proceed with the Project, Work or Supply diligently and at a rate of progress that in the opinion of the town will ensure entire completion within the time provided for in the contract documents.

b. The town determines reasonably that the Contractor has abandoned the work, the determination of which the town shall be the sole judge.

of 596


c. The Contractor is adjudged bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or a petition inbankruptcy is filed against the Contractor, or where the Contractor makes anassignment for the general benefit of creditors or applies for relief under theCompanies’ Creditors Arrangement Act, or where proceedings of any type areinstituted in any jurisdiction in respect of the alleged insolvency or bankruptcy of theContractor.

d. Where any formal or informal proceeding for the dissolution of, liquidation of, orwinding up of, the affairs of the Contractor is instituted by or against the Contractor,or where a resolution is passed or any other act undertaken for the winding up ofthe Contractor.

e. The Contractor ceases or threatens to cease to carry on its business, or theContractor makes or agrees to make a bulk sale of its assets.

f. A receiver, manager or trustee is appointed in respect of the business or assets ofthe Contractor, or any part of thereof, by a court of competent jurisdiction, or underan agreement.

g. The Contractor defaults in payment of any indebtedness or liability to a bank orother lending institution, or an approved subcontractor or supplier whether securedor not.

h. The Contractor defaults in the completion of the work or the Contractor fails orrefuses to remedy any unsatisfactory or defective work or to remove anyunsatisfactory or condemned material when so ordered by the town in writing.

i. The Contractor persists in any course in violation of any of the provisions of thecontract documents after receiving written notice from the town to correct thatviolation.

Termination may occur subsequent to the town providing notificationpursuant to s. 2.19.1 or s. 2.19.2, or may be immediate without notice undereither s. 2.19.1 or s. 2.19.2 depending on the severity of the default.

2.19.4 The remedies provided in this section are in addition to all other legal, equitable or statutory remedies to which the town is otherwise entitled, and the taking of any one remedy shall not preclude the taking of any other remedy.

2.19.5 Where there is a default by the Contractor under the contract, the town may waive that default by written notice to that effect. A waiver of a default shall not extend to, or be taken in any manner whatsoever to affect the rights of the town with respect to any subsequent default, whether similar or not. The failure of the town to insist on strict performance on any provisions of the Contract shall not be construed as a waiver or relinquishment of the right to insist upon strict performance of such provisions on any future occasion.

2.20 Restoration

2.20.1 At all times, the Contractor shall keep the site free from accumulations of debris and in orderly condition during construction. Upon completion of each stage of work, remove from the site all equipment, surplus materials and waste resulting from such work.

2.20.2 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to restore the site to its original condition to the satisfaction of the owner after work has been completed. All surplus material and garbage of every description, incidental to the work, shall be cleared leaving the project neat and orderly.

of 596


2.21 Inspection

2.21.1 Inspection shall be carried out by the Project Manager, and the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the same at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the proposed inspection, confirmed in writing by the Contractor.

The owner’s representative has the right to accept or reject any work and/or materials to be used in the work that he deems to be in the best interests of the town.

2.22 Substantial Performance Publication

2.22.1 The contractor shall publish a copy of the Certification of Substantial Performance of the contract once in a Construction Trade newspaper within seven (7) days of receiving a copy of the Certificate signed by the payment certifier in accordance with the Construction Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. C.30, as amended. Where the bidder fails or refuses to publish the Certificate within twenty (20) days of the date of the Certificate, the Owner may publish a copy of the Certificate in a Construction Trade newspaper and deduct the cost thereof from the amount payable under the contract.

2.23 Application for Payment

2.23.1 Application for payment as the job progresses shall be arranged with the Project Manager.

2.23.2 The town reserves the right to request further evidence of breakdown or documentation to establish a fair and reasonable evaluation of the application. Should such information be required, the receipt date of application shall be adjusted accordingly.

2.23.3 All payments shall be made by the town within thirty (30) days of the official receipt of the application.

2.23.4 If the contract requires the submission of invoices for payment, all invoices must show the Purchase Order number issued for the project. Prior to invoicing for work, the town’s Project Manager or Designate must provide approval for all amounts to be invoiced. If invoices for payment are received by the town without a purchase order number or without prior approval of the Project Manager, the invoice will not by paid and will be returned to the contractor. Continued incidence of non-compliance to this provision will be reflected in the performance evaluation and may affect the ability to work for the town in future.

2.23.5 Invoices shall be submitted in PDF or TIF format to the following email address; [email protected]. Unless otherwise specified, terms are to be NET 30 Days. It is the policy of the town that application by a vendor for penalty charges for late payment will not be allowed.

2.24 Progress Certificate Payments (where applicable)

2.24.1 Once per month, the contractor and the Project Manager or Designate shall agree on the approximate amount of work done and material furnished and the value thereof according to the terms of the contract. The date of this determination shall be known as the "measurement date”. Failing agreement on amount of work done the decision of the Project Manager or Designate shall govern.

of 596


2.24.2 A progress certificate shall be prepared by the Project Manager or Designate based on

the work completed on each measurement date and shall be of the amount, quantity and value of the work done since the contractor commenced the performance of this contract less all stipulated forfeitures and deductions.

2.24.3 The Owner will pay to the contractor ninety percent (90%) of the amount shown on all such certificates in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Construction Act (unless another form of holdback is negotiated at the time of contract award), and only upon receipt of a Certificate of Clearance from the Workplace Safety & Insurance Board and a Statutory Declaration stating that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid all amounts due and payable to them as at the measurement date.

These payments will be made on Progress Certificates, which shall be approximate only and must not be taken or construed as an acceptance of the work so estimated or as an admission that the Owner is in any way liable to the contractor in respect thereof. The 10% holdback will be dealt with as per the terms and conditions of the Construction Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. C.30, as amended.

2.25 Final Payment

2.25.1 Final payment and release of holdback shall be released only when the following documentation, as applicable, has been received from the Contractor:

Waiver of Lien Certificate of Clearance from the Workplace Safety & Insurance Board Certificates of Guarantees Manuals if Specified Record Drawings

2.26 Changes in Government Taxes

2.26.1 Where a change in Canadian Federal or Provincial Taxes occurs after the Tender Closing date for this contract, and this change could not have been anticipated at the time of bidding, the Owner will increase or decrease contract payments to account for the exact amount of change involved. Claims for compensation for additional tax costs shall be submitted within thirty (30) days after the date of acceptance of the work.

2.26.2 Where the contractor benefits from a change in Canadian Federal or Provincial Government taxes, the contractor shall submit to the Project Manager or Designate, a statement of such benefits. This statement shall be submitted not later than thirty (30) days after the date of acceptance of the work.

2.27 Liens

2.27.1 In the event that a construction lien is registered against the Project by or through a Subcontractor or Supplier, the Contractor shall, at its own expense:

i. within ten (10) Working Days, ensure that any and all construction liens and certificates of action are discharged, released or vacated by the posting of security; and

ii. in the case of written notices of lien, ensure that such notices are withdrawn, in writing.

of 596


2.27.2 In the event that the Contractor fails to conform with the requirements of 2.27.1, the

Owner may set off and deduct from any amount owing to the Contractor, all costs and associated expenses, including the costs of borrowing the appropriate cash, letter of credit or bond as security and legal fees and disbursements. If there is no amount owing by the Owner to the Contractor, then the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all of the said costs and associated expenses.

2.27.3 Subcontractors, Suppliers and the Contractor agrees to discharge all liabilities incurred by it for labour, materials, services, subcontractors and products, used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Work, except for amounts withheld by reason of legitimate dispute and which have been identified to the party or parties, from whom payment has been withheld.

2.28 Warranty / Guarantee

2.28.1 The Contractor shall guarantee the quality of workmanship and materials for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance, and make any repairs or replacements as required by the town.

2.28.2 The Contractor agrees to correct promptly, at his own expense, defects or deficiencies in the work which appear prior to and during the period of twelve (12) months from the date of substantial performance of the work or such longer periods as may be specified for certain products or work.

2.28.3 If after seven (7) days’ notice, the Contractor fails to carry out any repairs as directed by the town, the town may proceed with such and charge the same against any monies that are outstanding to the Contractor. If no monies are being held by the town, the town reserves the right to bill such repairs back to the Contractor or to make a claim against performance security that is being held for the work in question.

2.28.4 The Contractor agrees to correct or pay for damage resulting from corrections made under the requirements of the warranty.

2.28.5 The decision of the town shall be final as to the nature and imperfection of guaranteed work, and the necessary remedy of same.

of 596

Section 3 Liability & Insurance

SECTION 3: LIABILITY & INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

3.1 Agreement with Terms

3.1.1 By submitting a bid the bidder agrees to all the terms and conditions of this Request for Tender and this document or any portion thereof, may not be used for any purpose other than the submission of bids.

3.2 Laws of Ontario

3.2.1 Any Contract resulting from this Request for Tender will be governed by and will be construed and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the Province of Ontario. The successful bidder shall abide by all relevant provisions of the Canada Labour Code and the Employment Standards Act of Ontario, as amended.

3.2.2 Any bidder awarded a contract must comply with the regulations of Ontario Regulations 213/91 as amended for construction projects, Part 1 Registration and Notices, Sections 5-7 where this regulation is applicable to this project.

3.3 Liability for Errors

3.3.1 While the town has used considerable efforts to ensure an accurate representation of information in this Request for Tender, the information contained in this Request for Tender is supplied solely as a guideline for bidders. The information is not guaranteed or warranted to be accurate by the town, nor is it necessarily comprehensive or exhaustive. Nothing in this Request for Tender is intended to relieve bidders from forming their own opinions and conclusions with respect to the matters addressed in this Request for Tender.

3.4 Insurance

3.4.1 Upon award and prior to signing of any Contract documents (including the issuance of a purchase order), the successful bidder shall obtain and maintain at its own expense, including the cost of any applicable deductible, the following policies of insurance:

Commercial General Liability Insurance, written on IBC Form 2100 or its equivalent, including but not limited to bodily injury and personal injury liability, property damage, products liability, completed operations liability, owners & contractors protective liability, blanket contractual liability, premises liability, broad form property damage, employer’s liability and voluntary compensation and contingent employer’s liability coverage, having an inclusive limit of not less than $5,000,000 per occurrence. Policy shall be endorsed to show the Town of Oakville as additional insured.

Standard Form Automobile Liability Insurance that complies with all requirements of the current legislation of the Province of Ontario, having an inclusive limit of not less than $2,000,000 per occurrence; for Third Party Liability, in respect of the use or operation of vehicles owned, operated or leased by the successful bidder for the provision of services.

of 596

Section 3 Liability & Insurance

Non-Owned Automobile Liability Insurance in standard form having an inclusive limit of not less than $2,000,000 per occurrence in respect of vehicles not owned by the bidder, that are used or operated on its behalf for the provision of services under the Contract;

3.4.2 This policy may be subject to the approval of the Town Solicitor and shall be kept in full force through the term of the contract and until the date of acceptance and maintenance period of the entire Work.

3.4.3 WSIB Certificate: The Town of Oakville requires all Contractors be in full compliance with all requirements imposed upon them by the Workplace Safety Insurance Board. All certificates of training and Safety Policies and Manuals must be available for presentation upon request.

3.4.4 At time of award and prior to release of each and every progress draw, the successful bidder will be required to provide a WSIB Certificate to the town. Such certificates shall indicate that the Contractor and any subcontractors have complied with the requirements of the Workplace Safety & Insurance Board and are in good standing with the Board.

3.5 Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System WHMIS

3.5.1 No hazardous material is to be stored or used on the town property by the contractor unless the prescribed requirements concerning labeling material safety data sheets (MSDS) and worker instruction and training are met.

3.6 Indemnification

3.6.1 The successful bidder, its agents, all workmen and persons employed by it, or under its control, will use due care that no person or persons are injured and that no property is damaged in the prosecution of the work and the successful bidder will be solely responsible for all damages to person or property, including theft, whether the property is owned by the town or any of its employees.

3.6.2 Each bidder and the successful bidder shall defend, indemnify and save harmless the town, its officers, agents and employees from any and all claims, demands, suits, actions or proceedings of any kind or nature whatsoever, including Workers' Compensation claims, in any way resulting from or arising out of this contract; provided, however, that the bidder need not indemnify or save harmless the town, its officers, agents and employees from damages resulting from the sole negligence of the town's officers, agents and employees.

of 596

Section 4 Scope of Work / Specifications

SECTION 4: SCOPE OF WORK / SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE: Bidders are to carry the following subcontractors

(as listed below) for the work stated at the rates provided.

IDEA Networks: $3,360.90 Data Outlets and new Cabling Removal and Reinstallation

George Chapman or Steve Duguay 905-790-3900, 647-637-4332 Mobile [email protected] [email protected]

DSL Security: $4,450.00 Card Readers, Electric Strikes and Door Contacts Removal and Reinstallation of existing. New Automatic Door operator & two buttons on Door G106 only. Security only relay on Sliding vestibule Automatic doors. Sliding Doors by Redundant wiring and raceways/unused cabling to be removed by Electrician. Conduit, if required will be supplied by Electrician. Power supply by Electrician.

Darren Shestowsky 905-809-1016 416-499-4767 [email protected]

PASWORD Communications: $320.00 (2 hours x 2 visits)Two (2) Panic Buttons Removal and Reinstallation

Nick Dion [email protected]

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE LOBBY RENOVATION

2400 SIXTH LINE, OAKVILLE, ON L6H 3N8

FOR

TOWN OF OAKVILLE

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND ARCHITECTURAL STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

Project Manual Issued for Tender

ward99 architects inc. Prime Consultant

VX ENGINEERING INC.

SURI & ASSOCIATES LTD. ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

of 596

ward99 architects inc. Page 1 of 3

INDEX TO PROJECT MANUAL RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE LOBBY RENOVATION

PROJECT MANUAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL,

MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Project Information Page

Professional Qualifications

List of Drawings

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Refer to front end documents issued by the Town of Oakville.

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 10 00 General Instructions

Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination

Section 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation

Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures

Section 01 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples

Section 01 35 20 Safety Requirements

Section 01 35 43 Hazardous Materials

Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements

Section 01 42 13 Abbreviations and Acronyms

Section 01 43 00 Quality Assurance

Section 01 45 00 Quality Control

Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities

Section 01 52 00 Construction Facilities

Section 01 56 00 Temporary Barriers and Controls

Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements

Section 01 73 00 Execution

Section 01 74 00 Cleaning and Waste Management

Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures

Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals

Section 01 82 19 Fire Rating and Assemblies

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 40 00 Demolition

of 596

of 3 ward99 architects inc.


DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE Section 03 35 00 Concrete Floor Finishing

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY Section 04 05 00 Masonry Procedures

Section 04 05 13 Masonry Mortar and Grout

Section 04 05 19 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement

Section 04 05 22 Concrete Unit Masonry

Section 04 05 23 Masonry Accessories

DIVISION 05 - METALS Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry

Section 06 41 13 Architectural Wood Casework and Casework Hardware

Section 06 41 19 Plastic Laminate

Section 06 61 16 Solid Surface Fabrications

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 13 00 Waterproofing

Section 07 21 13 Board Insulation

Section 07 21 16 Batt and Blanket Insulation

Section 07 84 00 Firestopping and Smoke Seal

Section 07 92 00 Sealants

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Section 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

Section 08 42 29 Automatic Entrance Doors

Section 08 80 00 Glazing

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Section 09 22 00 Non-Structural Metal Framing

of 596



Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Board

Section 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling

Section 09 51 00 Acoustic Ceilings

Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 10 22 26 Operable Partitions

DIVISION 20 - COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL Section 20 05 10 Demolition

Section 20 05 11 Mechanical General Requirements

Section 20 06 11 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

Section 20 06 17 Access Doors

Section 20 06 21 Identification

Section 20 06 22 Piping Insulation

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION Section 21 13 13 Wet Pipe Fire Suppression

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING, DRAINAGE Section 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping

Section 22 13 13 Drainage Piping and Vent

Section 22 36 13 Plumbing Specialties and Accessories

Section 22 44 13 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 23 34 33 Air Curtain

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 01 16 Electrical General Requirements

Section 26 05 19 Basic Materials and Methods

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications

of 596


PROJECT INFORMATION PAGE RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE LOBBY RENOVATION

OWNER: Town of Oakville 1225 Trafalgar Road, Oakville, ON L6H 0H3 Contact Person: Andrea Jones, Project Leader – Accessibility, Tel: 905-845-6601 x.3877 CONSULTANT: ward99 architects inc., 2053 Williams Parkway, Unit 49A, Brampton ON L6S 5T4 Contact Person: Ms. Tina Ranieri-D’Ovidio, Principal, Tel: 416-613-5880 STRUCTURAL SUB-CONSULTANT: VX Engineering inc., 2500 – 135 Marlee Avenue Toronto, ON M6B 4C6, Contact Person: Mr. Vaska Xoxa, Project Manager, Tel: 416-670-9422 MECHANICAL SUB-CONSULTANT: Suri & Associates Ltd Engineering Consultants., 1022 White Clover Way Mississauga, ON L5V 1C8, Contact Person: Mr. Rohin Suri, Project Manager, Tel: 905-290-7861 ELECTRICAL SUB-CONSULTANT: Suri & Associates Ltd Engineering Consultants., 1022 White Clover Way Mississauga, ON L5V 1C8, Contact Person: Mr. Rohin Suri, Project Manager, Tel: 905-290-7861

of 596


PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATIONSRIVER OAKS COMMUNITYCENTRE LOBBY RENOVATION

COMPANY

COMPANY

ward99 architects inc.

2053 Williams Pkwy, unit 49A Brampton, Ontario L6S 5T4

Tel: 416 613 5880 [email protected]

Certificate of Practice Number 6045

I reviewed and take responsibility for the design work on behalf of a firm registered under subsection 2.1 7.4 of the Ontario Building Code.

VX Engineering Inc.

2500 – 135 Marlee Avenue Toronto, Ontario M6B 4C6

Tel: (416) 670-9422 Fax: (289) 327-0604

Certificate of Practice Number ___________

Structural: I reviewed and take responsibility for the design work on behalf of a firm registered under subsection 2.1 7.4 of the Ontario Building Code.

100212829April 29, 2019

of 596


PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATIONS RIVER OAKS COMMUNITYCENTRE LOBBY RENOVATION

COMPANY

Suri & Associates Ltd.

1022 White Clover Way

Mississauga, Ontario

L5V 1C8

Tel: (905) 290-7861

Fax: (289) 327-3420


Mechanical:

I reviewed and take responsibility for the design

work on behalf of a firm registered under

subsection 2.1 7.4 of the Ontario Building Code.

Suri & Associates Ltd.

1022 White Clover Way

Mississauga, Ontario

L5V 1C8

Tel: (905) 290-7861

Fax: (289) 327-3420


Electrical:

I reviewed and take responsibility for the design

work on behalf of a firm registered under

subsection 2.1 7.4 of the Ontario Building Code.

100077984

100077984

of 596


LIST OF DRAWINGS RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE LOBBY RENOVATION

LIST OF DRAWINGS Architectural: A0 PROJECT INFORMATION, O.B.C. MATRIX AND LIST OF DRAWINGS A1.1 SITE PLAN/CONSTRUCTION MOBILIZATION PLAN & SITE MOBILIZATION, ACCESS &

CONSTRUCTION LEGEND A2.1 EXISTING GROUND FLOOR KEY PLAN, SITE MOBILIZATION, ACCESS &

CONSTRUCTION NOTES A2.2 EXISTING ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN - DEMOLITION A2.3 EXISTING ENLARGED CORRIDOR FLOOR PLAN - DEMOLITION AND PROPOSED A2.4 PROPOSED ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN, NOTES AND LEGENDS A3.1 EXISTING REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - DEMOLITION A3.2 PROPOSED REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A3.3 CORRIDOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - DEMOLITION & PROPOSED A3.4 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN TYPICAL DETAILS A4.1 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE, DOOR AND FRAME ELEVATION TYPES A4.2 HOLLOW METAL AND ALUMINUM DOOR FRAME DETAILS A4.3 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR HEADER DETAILS AT EXISTING VESTIBULE A5.1 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE A6.1 PROPOSED RECEPTION CUSTOMER SERVICE COUNTER PLAN AND ELEVATION A6.2 PROPOSED RECEPTION CUSTOMER SERVICE COUNTER ELEVATIONS - STAFF SIDE A6.3 MILLWORK DETAILS A6.4 MILLWORK DETAILS Structural: S1 PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN S2 SECTIONS S3 FLOOR PLAN NOTES AND DETAILS S4 TYPICAL DETAILS AND GENERAL NOTES Mechanical: M1 MECHANICAL LEGEND AND NOTES M2 FIRST FLOOR KEY PLAN M3 EXISTING & NEW PLUMBING & DRAINAGE PLAN M4 EXISTING FIRE PROTECTION PLAN M5 NEW FIRE PROTECTION PLAN Electrical: E1 ELECTRICAL LEGEND AND NOTES E2 FIRST FLOOR KEY PLAN E3 EXISTING POWER & SYSTEMS PLAN

of 596


LIST OF DRAWINGS


E4 EXISTING LIGHTING PLAN E5 NEW POWER & SYSTEMS PLAN E6 NEW LIGHTING PLAN E7 ELECTRICAL NOTES

of 596


DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 – GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS


1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK .1 The purpose of this Contract is the interior renovation of the one storey lobby in the River

Oaks Community Centre, located at 2400 Sixth Line in Oakville. Work under this Contract includes but is not limited to the following: .1 Renovation of the ground floor lobby and includes the following:

.1 Removal of existing non-load bearing walls and a display case.

.2 Provision of reconfigured customer reception area, including millwork counters, ceilings, lighting and the introduction of a new folding metal wall.

.3 Provision of new porcelain flooring.

.4 Replacement of light fixtures.

.5 Removal of existing doors and frames and introduction of new doors and frames and new automatic sliding entrance doors.

.6 Replacement of vestibule heaters and inclusion of a new air curtain.

.2 The Community Centre will be open to the public and to staff for the duration of construction. The construction will occur in three phases: .1 Phase 1: Duration of 10 days. Phase 1 includes the demolition and construction

within the main lobby, reception counter area and Corridor 74, including all architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical work. A portion of the Main Lobby 5 will be fenced off temporarily with plastic membrane to allow access to the Fitness Area on the east side of the main floor area.

.2 Phase 2: Duration of 5 days. The temporary plastic membrane is removed and the remainder of the work is completed, including all ceiling and flooring work in the east area, installation of the reception counter millwork and hollow metal doors, frame and screen and all associated mechanical and electrical work.

.3 Phase 3: Duration of 5 days. Work to occur in the main entry vestibule including removal of existing vestibule doors and frames and replacement with automatic sliding door systems, new lighting, new heaters, flooring and all other architectural, mechanical and electrical associated work.

.3 Any construction work that is required to occur within the existing building, but outside the

areas of renovation, is to occur before or after the building’s hours of operation. All removal of debris and demolished items is to occur before or after the building’s hours of operation. Any construction work that results in excessive dust, vibration or odour and in such negatively disrupts the activities occurring in the building, is to occur before or after building operation hours Any construction work that requires revision and/or upgrade to the building sprinklers, fire alarm and/or power and data systems, mechanical systems and any other life safety and electrical systems within any part of the building is to occur after building operation hours. It is the General Contractor’s responsibility to become familiar with the building hours of operation.

.4 It is the General Contractor’s responsibility to review the scope of work and confirm what

work is required to occur after the building operation hours and/or on the weekends. No claims by the General Contractor for additional payments or overtime payments will be entertained by the Owner.

.5 Existing surface mounted interior signage in the Main Lobby and in Corridor 74 is to be

removed by the Contractor to accommodate wall painting and is to be reinstalled by the Contractor once wall painting is complete. Existing surface mounted signage above the

of 596





existing customer service counter is to be removed by the Contractor and reinstalled, by the Contractor, onto the new gypsum board finished bulkhead above the new customer service counter.

.6 Pricing of extra works should conform to the pricing of the original scope of work, and to the fair market prices. Excessive pricing of extra works will have a negative impact on the contractor’s and/ or the subcontractor’s evaluation regarding bidding on future Town projects.

.7 Work that is to occur after building hours of operation is to be approved and co-ordinated with the Owner.

1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Contract documents for work under this contract consists of the following: .1 Standard Construction Document CCDC 2, 2008 .2 Supplementary Conditions (refer to Town of Oakville front end documents). .3 Specifications as listed in Index to Specifications .4 Drawings as listed in List of Drawings .5 All Addenda issued prior to closing of the tender .6 Amendments incorporated prior to the signing of the Contract, as agreed to

between the signing parties.

1.3 PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BY OWNER

Products, including appliances, indicated on the drawings as “N.I.C.”, or so noted in specifications, are not included in the Contract but will be supplied by the Owner. These are to be put in place and connected to services by the Contractor. Items indicated as S.B.O. are to be supplied by the Owner and installed by the Contractor.

The Owner will provide manufacturer's installation instructions for each such product, when available.

The Contractor's duties with respect to products supplied by the Owner include:

.1 Unload and handle at site.

.2 Remove and dispose of packaging. Inspect delivered products notify Owner and Consultant of any damage or missing components.

.3 Temporarily store products in secure and suitable storage, if they are not to be installed immediately.

.4 Install and connect to services as applicable.

.5 Coordinate with millwork subcontractor to provide trim at items installed in cabinetry.

1.4 RELATION OF TRADES

These specifications have been divided generally into sections conforming to Construction Specifications Canada Master Format 2004 for the purpose of ready

of 596





reference. They must be read as a whole. The responsibility for apportioning the work or of settling disputes related to same shall rest entirely with the Contractor.

The Contractor is responsible for coordinating all trades. He is solely responsible for determining the lines of demarcation between Contractor and/or trades. Neither the Consultant nor the Owner assume any responsibility for any such determination or for any dispute arising concerning it. No extras will be considered due to any such dispute concerning either labour or materials.

Specifications and drawings form an integral part of the Contract Documents. Any

subject or item omitted from one but which is mentioned or reasonably implied in the other, shall be considered properly and sufficiently specified and will be part to the work.

1.5 EXAMINATION OF SITE

Examine site immediately prior to commencing Work to confirm that site as received by the Contractor, including adjoining Municipal lands, conform to information on tender documents.

Notify Consultant immediately if site conditions are not acceptable. Commencement of the Work of this Contract will be taken as acceptance of site conditions. No extras will be considered unless accepted in advance of performance of the work, in writing, by Owner and Consultant.

Contractor must make himself familiar with conditions on the roadway which may affect construction ie site access, etc.

1.6 ACCEPTANCE OF WORK IN PLACE

Before starting his work and from time to time as the work progresses, each subcontractor shall examine the work and materials installed by the other subcontractors insofar as it affects his own work, and shall promptly notify the Consultant IN WRITING, if any condition exists that will prevent him from giving a satisfactory result in his own work.

Should the subcontractor start his own work without such notification, it shall be construed as an acceptance by him of all preceding work and as a waiver of all claims or questions as to its suitability for receiving his work.

All Subcontractors installing building finishes shall submit written confirmation of acceptance of existing conditions, to the Consultant, prior to commencing their work. Finishing work and landscaping work may not commence without submission of this confirmation. Receipt of this confirmation will be considered a prerequisite for certification of payment to the relevant Subcontractors.

of 596





1.7 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

All materials shall be new and the best of their respective kinds. Where a specific grade or brand is not indicated preference shall be given to materials of Canadian manufacture. Pre-packaged materials shall be delivered and stored in unopened containers.

All work performed under this Contract shall be done by mechanics skilled in their respective trades. They shall make use of such templates, jigs or special tools as may be required for the operation involved.

The Contractor is responsible for maintaining quality of workmanship. He shall report to the Consultant whenever the Work or material of any trade does not meet the required standard.

The acceptance of any materials or workmanship shall not be a bar to their subsequent rejection, if found defective.

Rejected materials and workmanship, and any work which is found defective, shall be removed and replaced or made good by the Contractor without cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

Adequate, dry storage facilities shall be provided and all stored materials shall be

protected from damage and theft.

All contractors will do Work in accordance with the best industry practice of the type of work specified, unless the Contract Documents stipulate more precise requirements, in which case, the more precise requirements shall govern.

Do Work in a neat, plumb and square manner. Ensure that various work components are properly installed, forming tight joints and appropriately aligned junctions, edges and surfaces, free of warps, twists, waves, or other such irregularities.

Wherever indicated on the drawings or specifications, or in the manufacturers’/suppliers’ written instructions, arrange to have manufacturers’/installer’s representatives inspect the Work which incorporates their materials, products or items.

Do not permit materials to come in contact with other materials such conditions may result in corrosion, staining, discolouration or deterioration of the completed Work. Provide compatible, durable separators where such contact is unavoidable.

The design of the Work is based on the full interaction of its component parts. No provisions have been made for conditions occurring during construction. Ensure that no part of the Work is subjected to a load which will endanger its safety or which might cause permanent deformation.

Conceal pipes, ducts, conduit, wiring and other such items requiring concealment preferably in, wall or ceiling construction of all finished areas. If in doubt as to method of concealment, or intent of the Contract Documents in this regard, request clarification from the Consultant before proceeding with the Work.

of 596





Lay out mechanical and electrical work well in advance of concrete placement and furring installation to allow for proper concealment. Test and inspect Work before applying pipe covering and before it is concealed.

Provide and maintain control lines and levels required for the Work. Lay out the Work in accordance with these lines and levels and dimensions indicated on the drawings.

Verify lines, levels and dimensions and report any errors or inconsistencies on the drawings to the Consultants.

Final responsibility of satisfactory completion of all the Work, however, lies with the Contractor.

1.8 SCAFFOLDING

All necessary scaffolding shall be provided and constructed according to by-law and safety regulations.

Construct and maintain scaffolding in rigid, secure and safe manner.

Erect scaffolding independent of building walls.

Avoid interference with other trades.

Move when not in use to permit installation of other work and promptly remove when no longer required.

The provision of scaffolding shall be a matter of agreement between the Contractor and Subcontractors.

1.9 PROTECTION OF OTHER WORK

Each trade shall avoid damage to other trades and shall take all measures necessary and provide all masking and materials necessary to provide adequate protection.

Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall be held responsible for all damage to work installed by others that is caused by this work or by anyone employed by him.

Patching and repairing of damaged work shall be done by the contractor who installed the work, as directed by the Consultant, but the cost of same shall be paid for by the contractor who is responsible for the damage.

1.10 FASTENINGS

All fastenings must be permanent, of same metal or compatible with any metals with which they are in contact, of adequate size and spacing to ensure permanent anchorage against load or shear.

of 596





Exposed fastenings must be evenly spaced, neatly laid out and must not mar surfaces of prefinished materials.

No ram setting or similar techniques will be permitted without prior written approval of the Consultant.

No wood plugs and no anchorages which cause spalling or cracking will be accepted.

Generally, use plain washers. Where vibration may occur, use lock type washers and where fasteners are stainless steel use resilient washers.

1.11 SUPPLY AND INSTALL

Unless specifically noted "supply only", any reference to supply intends the supply and installation of material or item so noted.

1.12 OCCUPATION BEFORE COMPLETION

If the Contractor, for any reason, does not have the job completed by the completion date and the Owner, of necessity, is forced to occupy any part of the building before the whole of the work is completed, the Contractor will not be entitled to any indemnity for interference with his operation.

1.13 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

All Subcontractors shall examine carefully all drawings and specifications to inform themselves fully of all conditions and limitations pertaining to the work of the contract.

All Subcontractors shall co-operate and co-ordinate their work for the proper completion of the work, including co-ordination of delivery dates and commencement of sub-trades work.

The responsibility for all work, including temporary structures, shoring and erection shall at all times rest with the Contractor and his Subcontractors. The Consultant will review construction methods and shop drawings for general arrangements only. The method of obtaining the results contemplated by the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Contractor.

The undertaking of periodic site review by the Consultant or Owner’s representative shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, nor make him responsible for providing a safe place for work, visit, use, access, travel, or occupancy of their employees or agents.

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for coordinating and expediting the work of all Subcontractors and shall employ the necessary and qualified personnel to provide the required quality of labour and materials and to prevent delays in the progress of the project. Each trade shall be afforded all reasonable opportunities for the installation of its work and for the storage and handling of its materials.

of 596





1.14 COORDINATION

Coordinate all work and preparation on which subsequent work depends to facilitate mutual progress, and to prevent any conflict.

Review all drawings to identify interference issues prior to commencing construction. Request and review interference drawings from all mechanical and electrical trades. Review all shop drawings, samples, product data, mock-ups, and other required submittals for potential interference issues and co-ordinate with the trades to avoid these conflicts.

Where interference issues arise during construction, correct work at no expense to the Owner where the interference could have reasonably been foreseen.

Ensure that each trade makes known, for the information of the Contractor and other trades, the environmental and surface conditions required for the execution of its work; and that each trade makes known the sequence of others' work required for installation of its work.

Ensure that each trade, before commencing work, knows requirements for subsequent work and that each trade is assisted in the execution of its preparatory work by trades whose work depends upon it.

Mechanical and electrical trades in particular, shall ensure that items, such as electrical panels, outlets, diffusers, switches, etc., are located where they will not interfere with the installation or operation of other items. .1 Check all drawings for the location of items to be installed later, such as millwork,

whiteboards, and other wall or ceiling mounted items. .2 Ensure items installed do not interfere with the operation of equipment or fittings,

such as the swinging of doors, etc.

Review all shop and layout drawings, templates, and other required submittals for coordination purposes. .1 Ensure that all information necessary for the location and installation of materials,

openings, inserts, anchors, accessories, fastenings, connections and access panels are provided by each trade whose work requires co-operative location and installation by other trades and that such information is communicated to the applicable installer.

.2 Ensure that shop drawings for aluminum and hollow metal work are coordinated with the openings for doors, frames and windows; site measurements must be indicated on the drawings.

.3 Review millwork shop drawings to ensure adequate clearance from walls, doors, windows, mechanical and electrical equipment, etc.

Deliver materials supplied by one trade to be installed by another well before the installation begins.

Trades giving installation information in error, or too late to incorporate in the work, shall be responsible for any extra work caused thereby.

of 596





Immediately remove any work which is unsatisfactory for subsequent work, as directed by the Consultant or by the appointed inspection firms.

Inform Commissioning Agent of all equipment installations and start-ups.

1.15 ACCESS TO THE PROJECT

The Contractor for this work shall at all times allow the Owner or any other contractor or their employees in the building or around the premises, undisturbed, whether union or non-union, as may be required in the execution of other portions of the building work and installation of equipment, etc.

Cooperate fully with forces carrying out any work on behalf of the Owner.

The Owner has the right to place wireless surveillance cameras in the construction area to insure a continuous safe environment and buildings codes compliance.

1.16 SUB-TRADE AWARDS

The Contractor shall, on notice of award of the contract, obtain the Consultant’s approval of a complete list of all persons or firms to which he proposes to sublet any part of the work, the trades or divisions of work which are to be sublet to each, and the amount of each trade. He shall provide to the Consultant a financial breakdown showing all divisions of the work amounting to the full sum of the contract. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall be further broken down as required by the mechanical and electrical consultants.

1.17 SAFETY DATA SHEETS

The Contractor shall submit material and safety data sheets prior to commencing installation and application of at least the following: .1 lead-free solder .2 sealants and caulking .3 resilient flooring .4 painting and finishing .5 fertilizers .6 pesticides .7 herbicides .8 all adhesives .9 any other product which may give off air borne particles after installation

The Contractor and all of his Subcontractors must note that specifically, Asbestos and

Asbestos containing materials, solder for piping containing lead, and Painting & Coatings containing lead and/or mercury must be excluded from any part of the Work.

The Contractor must submit Certificates of Compliance, prior to the application for Substantial performance, for each of the following items:

of 596





.1 An affidavit relative to the use of Lead-free solder for all domestic water lines, regardless of location.

.2 Products for which Material Safety Data Sheets have been submitted and accepted.

.3 Other Work/Products identified in the Contract Documents as requiring a Certificate of Compliance.

Each Certificate of Compliance must indicate names and addresses of the project, the Owner, the date of Issue, produce description including name, number, manufacturer, with a statement verifying that the Work/Product installed meets specified requirements and, if applicable, complies with the submitted and accepted Material Safety Data Sheets.

Each Certificate of Compliance must be issued on the trade’s letterhead, properly executed, under whose work the respective Work/Product has been provided.

Each Certificate of Compliance must be endorsed by the Contractor with his authorized stamp/signature.

The Contractor must ensure that submissions are made to allow sufficient time for review without delaying progress of scheduled completion.

WHMIS Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are required to be provided before or with the first delivery of every controlled product.

Ensure that worksite copies of MSDS's are available to workers wishing to consult them and to the health and safety representative and/or joint health and safety committee.

Ensure that workers are instructed in the purpose and content of MSDS.

WHMIS MSDS sheets to be kept on site at all times.

The completion security account will not be paid to the Contractor without submission of all required affidavits and requested material and safety data sheets.

1.18 REGULATING DOCUMENTS

Refer to Section 01 41 00, Regulatory Requirements. Conform to applicable Codes and Building By-Laws. Conform to the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, such as public utilities. Where required under The Occupational Health and Safety Act, engage a Professional Engineer to design formwork and falsework for concrete.

Provide copies of documents referred to in the Specification for joint use of Contractor and Consultant, on site.

1.19 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILTY

The Contractor will be responsible to take all necessary steps to protect personnel (workers, visitors, general public, etc.) and property from any harm during the course of

of 596





the contract. The list of Contractor’s responsibilities identified below is by no means comprehensive, nor is it in any priority or critical order. It is here, merely to identify the most often forgotten or ignored responsibilities of the Contractor and is reproduced only as a reminder. The Consultants and the Owner advise the Contractor that it is he who is responsible for all aspects and facets of the Project, from start to completion, from compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations to compliance with all codes and statutes.

The Owner may perform periodic monitoring to ensure that safety requirements are met, and that safety records are properly kept and maintained. Continued disregard for safety standards can cause the Contract to be cancelled and the Contractor removed from the site.

All work procedures and equipment shall be in accordance with Owner and Legislation standards.

All equipment shall be in safe operating condition and appropriate to the task.

Only competent personnel will be permitted on site. During the site introduction, the Owner will determine who is competent. The Contractor will cause to remove from the site any persons not observing or complying with safety requirements.

The Contractor shall comply with all Federal, Provincial and Municipal Safety Codes and Regulations and the Occupational Health and Safety Act. He shall insure that all of his Subcontractors, suppliers, installers, etc. comply with all applicable codes, regulations, and acts.

The Contractor shall supply competent personnel to implement his safety program and ensure that the Owner's standards, and those of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, are being complied with.

The Owner may hire Commissioning Agents to perform inspections of building systems at the closing stages of the work of this contract. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate the work of the Owner's Commissioning Agent on site.

The Contractor shall report to the Owner and jurisdictional authorities any accident or incident involving personnel and/or property of the Contractor, Owner, or Public, arising from the Contractor's or any of his Subcontractors, execution of the work.

Provide the Owner with a copy of each site visit report by the Ministry of Labour, as soon as the report is issued.

The Contractor shall include all provisions of this contract in any agreement with Subcontractors, and hold all subcontractors equally responsible for safe work performance.

If the Contractor is responsible for a delay in the progress of the work due to an infraction of legislation or Owner Health and Safety requirements, the Contractor will, without additional cost to the Owner, work such overtime, and acquire and use for the execution of the work such additional labour and equipment as to be necessary, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, to avoid delay in the final completion of the work or any operations thereof.

of 596





1.20 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

Unless otherwise specified, comply with manufacturer's latest printed instructions for

materials and installation methods.

Notify Consultant in writing of any conflict between these specifications and manufacturer's instructions. Consultant will clarify any such conflict when requested.

1.21 AIR, VAPOUR, AND THERMAL SEAL

Ensure that the existing vapour barrier system is not compromised by the work of this project. Maintain air-tight and vapour-tight membrane system in exterior walls, windows, floor and roof.

1.22 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Comply with safety requirements outlined in Section 01 35 20.

1.23 TRUCKING COSTS

The Contractor is responsible for all costs related to trucking required for the Contract. No extra costs will be considered for weight load or limits due to seasonal conditions or restrictions on load capacities imposed by any authorities, or any similar limitations.

1.24 INDEPENDENT TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

The Contractor shall appoint inspection firms as directed by Consultant and make payments from the cash allowances specified in Division noted, except for the following, which shall be included in the contract. .1 Inspection and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or

authorities. .2 Inspection and testing performed exclusively for Contractor's convenience. .3 Testing, adjustment and balancing of mechanical and electrical equipment and

systems. .4 Mill tests and certificates of compliance. .5 Re-testing as described in 1.29, Quality Control,

The Consultant will authorize payment of inspection services from specified cash

allowances.

Where tests or inspections reveal work not in accordance with Contract requirements, Contractor shall pay costs for additional tests or inspections as Consultant may require to verify acceptability of corrected work. In the case of soil compactions, the first retest only will be considered as part of inspection allowance.

of 596





The Contractor shall furnish labour and facilities to: .1 Provide access to work to be inspected and tested. .2 Facilitate inspections and tests. .3 Make good work disturbed by inspection and test. .4 Pour concrete test cylinders and store as directed by Inspection Firm.

Notify Inspection Firms sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for assignment of laboratory personnel and scheduling of test.

Where materials are specified to be tested, delivery representative samples in required quantity to testing laboratory

Pay costs for uncovering and making good work that is covered before required inspection or testing is completed and approved by Consultant.

1.25 CASH ALLOWANCES

Include in the Contract Price, a stipulated sum Cash Allowance in the amount of $2,000.00 (for supply and installation) to be expended as outlined below, which shall apply to the following aspects of the Work:

Applied Decorative Film and Distraction Banding for Glazing Door Hardware Inspection and Testing

Additional cash allowances, to be carried by mechanical and electrical Subcontractors, may be included the mechanical and electrical specifications.

The listing of a cash allowance in this section shall not be construed to imply the deletion from the base contract of any work which may be specified elsewhere. Where the expenditure of a cash allowance is not specifically outlined in the specifications, it shall be expended as per instructions and specifications to be provided by the Consultant at a later date.

Cash Allowances, unless otherwise specified, cover the net cost to the Contractor of services, products, construction, machinery and equipment, freight, handling, unloading, storage installation and other authorized expenses incurred in performing the Work.

The Contract Price, and not the Cash Allowance, includes the Contractor’s profit in connection with such cash allowance.

The Contract Price will be adjusted by written order by the Consultant to provide for an excess or deficit to the Cash Allowance. Any unused portion of the allowance shall be returned to the Owner at the conclusion of the Contract.

A schedule shall be prepared by the Contractor to show when items called for under Cash Allowances are required, so that the progress of the Work is not delayed.

of 596





Expend cash allowances as directed by Consultant in writing. Allowances will be adjusted to actual cost with no adjustment to Contractor's charges. Cash expenditure must identify the H.S.T. separately.

Material Allowances: .1 Material allowances shall include the following:

.1 Net cost of material

.2 Applicable taxes and duties, excluding H.S.T.

.3 Delivery to site

.2 For Material Allowance, the contract shall include: .1 Handling at site, including unloading, uncrating, storage and hoisting. .2 Protection from elements, from damage. .3 Labour, installation, and finishing. .4 Other expenses required to do cash allowance work (ie contract co-

ordination). .5 Overhead and profit.

Material and Installation Allowances: .1 Material and Installation Allowances shall include the following:

.1 Net cost of material

.2 Applicable taxes and duties, excluding H.S.T.

.3 Deliver to site

.4 Handling at site, including unloading, uncrating, storage and hoisting.

.5 Labour, installation and finishing.

.2 For Material and Installation Allowances, the contract shall include: .1 Protection from elements, from damage .2 Overhead and profit .3 Other expenses required to do cash allowance work (ie contract co-

ordination)

Testing and Inspection Allowances: .1 Testing and Inspection Allowances shall include the following:

.1 Net cost of testing and inspection firm, and laboratory services, designated and authorized by Consultant.

.2 Applicable Taxes, excluding H.S.T.

.2 For Testing and Inspection Allowances, the contract shall include: .1 Overhead and profit .2 Supply of material tested .3 Other testing and re-testing work specified .4 Other expenses required to do cash allowance work (ie contract co-

ordination)

of 596





1.26 WARRANTIES

The following is a summary of the warranties required by the contract:

# Years Entire Building, General Contract 1 Concrete Floors 3 Finish Carpentry 2 Architectural Casework 2 Plastic Laminate 2 Solid Surface Fabrications 10 Caulking and Sealants 5 Hollow Metal Doors, Frames and Screens 3 Finish Hardware 3 Glass and Glazing 10 Acoustic Ceilings 2 Automatic Entrance Doors 3 Painting 3

1.27 ADDITIONAL DRAWINGS

Consultant may furnish additional drawings to assist proper execution of the Work. These drawings will be issued for clarification only. Such drawings, however, shall have the same meaning and intent as if they were included with plans referred to in the Contract Documents.

1.28 QUALITY CONTROL

The Consultants and authorized Owner staff shall have access to all areas of the Work, including any off-site construction facilities.

The Contractor shall give timely notice requesting inspection if Work is designated for special tests, inspections, or approvals by the Consultants, or any other authorized Owner staff, or testing and Inspection Company.

If the Contractor covers, or permits to be covered Work that has been designated as outlined above, he shall uncover such work, have the inspections and tests satisfactorily completed and make good such work at no additional cost to the Owner.

The Consultants or the authorized Owner Staff may order any part of the Work to be examined, if such Work is suspected not to be according to the Contract Documents. If, upon examination, such work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, then the Contractor shall correct such Work and pay for cost of examinations and correction. If such Work is found to be in full accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay for the cost of examination and making good.

If defects are revealed during inspection and/or testing, the appointed agency may request additional inspection and/or testing to ascertain the full degree of defects. The Contractor shall correct the defects and irregularities as reported by the inspection and/or

of 596





testing agency, at no additional cost to the Owner and the Contractor shall pay all associated costs for retesting and re-inspection.

The Contractor shall provide any tools, materials or equipment that may be required by the inspection and/or testing agencies in retesting the Work.

The employment of inspection and/or testing agencies does not, in any way, affect the Contractor’s responsibility to perform the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents.

The Contractor shall remove all defective work, whether the result of poor workmanship by him or his subtrades, use of defective or damaged products, whether or not incorporated into the Work and any Work that has been rejected by the Consultants or authorized Owner Staff as failing to conform to the Contract Documents. Replacement and execution of the affected Work shall be done in full accordance with the Contract Documents, making good other trades’ work damaged by such removals or replacements at no additional charge to the Owner.

If, in the opinion of the Consultant and/or the authorized Owner Staff, it is not expeditious to correct the defective Work, or Work not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, may, at its sole discretion, deduct from the Contract Price, the difference in value between the work performed and that required by the Contract Documents, the amounts of which shall be determined by the Owner.

1.29 START-UP

Demolition work may start immediately upon receipt of Letter of Award from Owner, and Contractors submission of start-up documents and insurance.

New work cannot commence without a building permit.

1.30 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

Refer to CCDC2 2008, Stipulated Price Contract, Part 5, Payment, and amendments included in Supplementary Conditions (refer to front end documents issued by Town of Oakville).

Before submitting first request for payment, submit a Schedule of Values, which shall be a detailed breakdown of the Contract price, as directed by the Consultant and as per the Owner's format. Breakdown must equal Contract price. After approval by Consultant, cost breakdown will be used as basis for progress payments.

Notwithstanding the amounts indicated on the Schedule of Values for the various aspects of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to retain additional funds for some items, where listed in the specifications. This includes amounts to be retained for maintenance manuals and for commissioning, as outlined in the applicable specification sections.

Applications for payment shall list HST separately.

of 596





1.31 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS

Products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction included in the Contract

Documents are to be used in the execution of the Work of this Contract unless otherwise accepted by the Consultant in writing. Substitute products and materials may not be ordered or installed without written acceptance from the Consultant.

Changes proposed by the Contractor are considered requests for “Substitutions”. Requests for Substitutions are to be submitted only by the Contractor.

Submit a complete package, including information and documentation outlined below, for evaluation by the Consultant.

A Request for Substitution must include the following information: .1 Data sheets for both the specified item and the proposed substitution, enabling

side by side comparisons. .2 Complete description of the proposed alternative product or material, including:

.1 Laboratory tests results

.2 dimensions, gauges, weights, etc. .3 An explanation of how the proposed substitute differs from the specified product:

.1 in physical properties

.2 in quality and performance .4 A list of any effects the proposed substitution would have:

.1 on service connections (wiring, piping, ductwork, etc.)

.2 on the work of other trades

.3 on construction Schedules .5 Evidence that manufacturers warranties and guarantees for the proposed

substitutes are the same, or exceed those required under the Contract. .6 Information on the availability of maintenance services and replacement

materials for proposed substitute. .7 Names, addresses, and phone numbers of fabricators and suppliers for proposed

substitute(s). .8 Confirmation that the proposed substitution, if accepted, would have no cost

impact, or indication of a credit (or extra cost) associated with the substitution.

Submissions of Requests for Substitution must be received by the Consultant well prior to any shop drawing submissions. The Shop Drawing process is not an acceptable means of requesting a substitution, and submission of drawings for products that have not been accepted will result in the automatic rejection of the Shop Drawing submission.

The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution lies with the Contractor.

Substitution requests deemed incomplete or incorrect by the Consultant will be rejected.

The Consultant may require the submission of further information in order to make an informed determination on the suitability of the proposed substitution. Allow a minimum of 10 working days, upon receipt of all required information, for the Consultant’s decision. Substitutions requested too late, not allowing sufficient time for thorough review by the Consultant, will be rejected.

of 596





The Owner's decision, based upon recommendations of the Consultant, of acceptance or rejection, of a proposed substitution shall be final.

1.32 TOWN OF OAKVILLE GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 The Contractor’s staff and workers should minimise their movement outside of the work area during the building working hours. Access and circulation for staff and the public should be maintained throughout the construction period. The Contractor and all Sub-contractors are expected to understand that all areas of the building remain functional during the construction period. The Work is to be executed in such a manner as to provide the minimum interference with the use of the premises, and the maximum safety of the occupants and the public.

.2 If the time limit is not sufficient to permit completion of the work by the Contractor working

a normal number of hours each day or week on a single shift basis, it is expected that additional shifts will be required throughout the life of the contract to the extent deemed necessary by the Contractor to insure the work will be completed within the time limit specified. Any additional costs occasioned by compliance with these provisions will be considered to be included in the prices bid for the various items of work and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore.

.3 It is the General Contractor’s responsibility to review the scope of work and confirm what

work is required to occur after the building operation hours and/or on the weekends. No claims by the General Contractor for additional payments or overtime payments will be entertained by the Owner.

.4 If a shutdown is required (such as sprinkler system, electrical shutdown, and security

reconfiguration) the contractor is to inform the Project Manager that action is required with enough advanced notice to coordinate as needed. Contractor to coordinate with the company providing that maintenance service for the Town, and is responsible for all charges that the service company may apply.

.5 Any construction work that results in excessive noise, vibration or odour and in such

negatively disrupts the building operations, are to occur after building operation hours or weekends. Any construction work that requires revision and/or upgrade to the building sprinklers and/or fire alarm within any part of the building is to occur after building operation hours or weekend. The Contractor should inform the Town Project Manager if work is required to be performed during a weekend some time in advance. No claims by the General Contractor for additional payments or overtime payments will be entertained by the Owner.

.6 The Contractor should prepare a construction schedule showing the critical path and at

least one week free float time. In case of any major change that will require additional time (as approved by the Consultant), then free float can be adjusted without the need to extend the project construction schedule.

.8 Cleaning should be done daily at the end of the work hours. .9 Where the Contractor contemplates entering any occupied area of the premises to carry

out work then he shall request permission some time in advance. No Work to existing occupied areas shall be proceeded with until so authorized.

of 596





.10 Pricing of extra works should conform to the pricing of the original scope of work, and to the fair market prices. Excessive pricing of extra works will have a negative impact on the contractor’s and/ or the subcontractor’s evaluation for the purpose of future biddings. .11 Client’s computer and power requirements must not be affected at any time during construction.

.12 All air returns in the construction area should be blocked to prevent the spread of dust and odours. .13 The owner has the right to place wireless surveillance cameras in the construction area to insure a continuous safe environment and buildings codes compliance.

END OF SECTION

of 596



01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SITE SUPERVISOR

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for co-ordinating and expediting the work of all

Subcontractors and shall employ a qualified Site Supervisor who shall be in full time attendance on this project.

Prior to the Preconstruction Meeting, the Contractor shall inform the Consultant of their choice for Site Supervisors and shall provide resumes outlining qualifications and related work experiences.

Site Supervisor shall have as a minimum: .1 Recent, previous experience with renovation or addition projects involving

occupied buildings, managing occupants and pedestrian and vehicular traffic. .2 Successful completion of a multi-session Supervisor’s training course conducted

by a recognized Construction Association in Ontario.

The Supervisors must be assigned to projects for the duration of the construction period, until the buildings are fully occupied by the Owner.

The Owner and the Consultant reserve the right to reject the proposed Supervisors should they feel that they are not fully qualified to assume the responsibilities of the positions.

There shall be a minimum of one full time Site Supervisor dedicated to the site.

Site Supervisor must carry a cell phone at all times during construction with the ability to be reached directly during all work hours and the ability to have voicemail recorded during all non-work hours including weekends and holidays.

Once the Supervisors are confirmed, there will be no change permitted without the

written consent of the Consultant. 1.2 CONSULTANT/CONTRACTOR MEETING

Prior to the commencement of the Work, the Contractor together with the Consultant

shall mutually agree to a sequence for holding regular "site meetings" on same day (to be determined) of every second week.

1.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING

Immediately prior to construction, upon notification, attend at location of Owner's choice, pre-construction meeting, along with authoritative representatives of certain key Subcontractors as specifically requested by the Consultant.

Purpose of meeting is as follows:

of 596





.1 Review project communications procedures. .2 Review contract administration requirements including submittals, payment and

change order procedures. .3 Identify all critical points on Construction Schedule for positive action. .4 Identify any product availability problems and substitution requests. .5 Establish site arrangements and temporary facilities. .6 Review any items which, in the Owner's, Consultant's and Contractor's opinion,

require clarification. .7 Exchange names & addresses of all key personnel representing Owner,

Consultant, Contractor and Subcontractors. .8 Identify Consultant's inspection requirements.

1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS

Contractor shall Chair project meetings on Site, every two weeks during the course of the work and will issue minutes to Owner's Representative, Consultants, and all other affected parties.

Contractor shall take minutes of meeting showing: .1 List of persons attending. .2 Decisions taken. .3 Instructions required or issued - Allocating responsibilities to action items. .4 All matters discussed. .5 Schedule Update - Progress, Delays.

Contractor shall provide suitable on-site accommodation for meeting, attend all meetings,

arrange for attendance of all necessary Subcontractors, and distribute minutes of previous meeting to Subcontractors and Suppliers as appropriate.

The Contractor's representatives at site meetings must include the project co-ordinator as well as site Supervisor.

Contractor shall hold regular co-ordination meeting with Subcontractors and shall chair

and minute each meeting. Copies of minutes shall be distributed to relevant Trades and Consultants and Owner.

In addition to jobsite meetings, Contractor shall arrange for, chair, and record safety

meetings and regular meetings with his Subcontractors and suppliers. He shall distribute copies of the minutes of these meetings to all Subcontractors, Owner and Consultant.

1.5 ON-SITE DOCUMENTS

The Contractor shall maintain the following documents, up to date, in the site office:

.1 Contract Documents

.2 Reviewed Shop Drawings - Printed in full colour or redline

.3 All instructions and changes, i.e. Work Authorization, Jobsite Instructions, Notices of Contemplated Change, Change Orders, etc.

.4 All inspection and test reports

of 596





.5 Permit drawings and specifications

.6 Authorizations, approval documents, permits, special rulings, etc., issued for the project by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

.7 Details of tested assemblies being used on the project; ULC, cUL, etc.

.8 As-Built drawings.

Confirm with building inspector, at the commencement of construction, what documents are required for submission both during construction and for occupancy. Keep copies of such documents on site. Refer also to Section 01 41 00, Regulatory Requirements.

Documents listed above shall be printed, full size documents, not only digit format.

Maintain copies of Regulating Documents referred to in the specifications, up to date, in the site office.

Maintain a file of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all materials being used on site

and make available to all concerned, in the site office.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596



01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCHEDULE

Within ten (10) days of contract award, submit a detailed construction schedule. Base the submission on the commencement of completion dates of the Contract and indicate specified restraints and milestones, activities and durations for shop drawing submission and approval, testing, fabrication and delivery, construction sequence and timing, interdependencies and constraints. Include the procurement activities for major aluminum and hollow metal work, millwork, structural work and mechanical and electrical equipment. Ensure the participation of all major Subcontractors and Suppliers. Schedule must include reasonably detailed breakdown of mechanical, and electrical work.

Schedule shall show:

.1 Commencement and completion dates of Contract.

.2 Commencement and completion dates of stipulated stages if any.

.3 Commencement and completion dates of Trades.

.4 Order and delivery times for materials and equipment, where possible.

.5 Dates for submission of Shop Drawings, material lists and samples.

.6 Any other information relating to the orderly progress of Contract, considered by Contractor to be pertinent.

The schedule shall be reviewed and updated at every Site meeting.

Include with each update a written report of activity progress reflected in the revised Schedule, and the corrective actions which have been made or are to be taken to maintain progress on the schedule in the future, anticipated delays, resources availability, schedule changes, and work to be completed in the next 2 week period.

The Contractor to prepare a construction schedule showing at least one week free float

time. In case of any major change that will require additional time (as approved by the Consultant), then free float can be adjusted without the need to extend the project construction schedule.

1.2 UPDATING AND MONITORING

Set up format of Construction Schedule to allow plotting of actual progress against

scheduled progress. .1 Allow sufficient space for modifications and revisions to the Schedule as Work

progresses. .2 Format shall be approved by the Consultant.

Display copy of Schedule in Site office area during complete construction period and

plot actual progress weekly.

Updating:

of 596



01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION


.1 Arrange participation, on Site and off Site, with Subcontractors and Suppliers, as

and when necessary for the purpose of updating schedule and monitoring progress.

.2 Conduct reviews of progress and update schedule, distributing copies to Consultant, Owner and Sub-Trades at least once every two weeks or as directed by Consultant.

1.3 PROGRESS REPORTS

Keep a permanent written report on the Site of progress of the Work. This record to be open to review by the Consultant. A copy to be furnished to the Consultant upon request.

Indicate daily the number of persons engaged on the work (including subtrades) and the division and section of the work upon which each group of workers is engaged, in sufficient detail to record dates of construction of each particular section of work.

Record to show dates of commencement and completion of trades and parts of the work coming under the Contract, including reports on daily weather conditions, excavation work, erection and removal or forms, and other similar pertinent information.

Report delays (and potential delays) giving reason for delay and action being taken to resolve the problem.

1.4 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

Concurrently with monthly application for payment, submit 10 electronic format colour images, which shall clearly show overall progress of Work. Provide an index with printed images clearly identified with name of project, description of view and date taken.

1.5 QUALITY OF WORK / STATUS REPORTS

The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the quality of work on site. The

Contractor shall furthermore notify workers of deficient work immediately upon receipt of notification of deficiencies by the Consultant, Subconsultants and/or Owner.

The Contractor shall provide a monthly status report on the status of deficiencies

identified by the Consultant and Subconsultants. The report shall include a description of each deficiency, status of the deficiency, description of corrective action taken, value (cost) to the correct deficiency and trade (person) responsible for deficiency. The report shall be typewritten on the Contractors letterhead. A copy of the report format shall be submitted at least 2 weeks prior to the first progress draw, for review. Submit monthly status reports with each progress draw.

After Substantial Performance, the Contractor shall continue provide the deficiency

status reports on a monthly basis, including updated lists of deficiencies identified by the Owner and consultants

END OF SECTION

of 596



01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF WORK

Obtain the documents listed under this heading and supply to Consultant within the time

stipulated in the Specification, or if not so stipulated, before issue of the first Certificate. .1 Performance Bond/Labour and Material Bond. .2 Insurance Policies required under General Conditions of Contract - Insurance. .3 Certificates of good standing from the Workplace Safety & Insurance Board for

the Contractor and all Subcontractors. .4 Shop Drawing Schedule. .5 Permits required for work of Electrical Trades Divisions 26, 27 and 28. .6 Permits for temporary structures, hoists, etc. .7 Schedule of Values: Refer to General Conditions of Contract. .8 Estimate of monthly progress claims (cash flow schedule). .9 Construction Schedule. .10 Equipment Delivery Schedule.

Concurrently, with schedule of values, submit cash flow schedule broken down on a

monthly basis, indicating anticipated monthly progress billings for duration of the Contract.

Submit schedule in a format acceptable to the Consultant. Indicate anticipated

submission dates and review periods. Highlight critical items.

Submit, in a format acceptable to the Consultant, a list of manufactured equipment complete with order dates, anticipated delivery dates, and dates required on site to meet progress schedule. Update schedule every two weeks. Clearly indicate late deliveries and anticipated impact on construction schedule. Include in schedule required delivery dates for products supplied by Owner.

Schedule of Values:

.1 Before submitting first request for payment, submit a detailed breakdown of the Contract price, as directed by the Consultant and as per the Owner's format. Breakdown must equal Contract price. After approval by Consultant, cost breakdown will be used as basis for progress payments.

1.2 DOCUMENTS AND ACTION REQUIRED DURING PROGRESS OF CONTRACT

Perform the action and/or obtain the documents listed under this heading and supply to the Consultant, within the time stipulated in the Specification or, if not so stipulated, as soon as possible following Consultant's request.

Adjust Cash Allowances by award of separate Contracts, where appropriate.

Documents specified under Section 01 10 00, General Instructions and Section 01 33 23, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.

of 596



01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES


Progress photographs, submitted concurrently with monthly application for payment.

Refer to Section 01 32 00.

Any permits required from Authorities Having Jurisdiction enabling Owner to occupy the work (or part thereof) prior to Substantial Performance of the Contract.

As-Built Documents: .1 The Owner requires as-built documents for all architectural, mechanical and

electrical changes on completion of the construction. .2 The Contractor, and mechanical and electrical Subcontractors shall print a

complete and separate set of white prints of Contract Drawings and Project Manual to keep on the site at all times.

.3 The drawing prints shall be marked up by responsible personnel of the Contractor and Subcontractors to record clearly, neatly, accurately and promptly showing all locations of buried structural, mechanical and electrical work and deviations from the contract documents.

.4 The Project Manual shall be similarly marked up to reflect deviations from the Contract Documents, as well as indicate materials used, colours selected, etc.

.5 The accurate location, depth, size and type of each underground utility and service line shall be recorded before concealment to ensure accurately directed future access to these buried lines.

.6 The as-built documents will be reviewed at regular intervals by the Consultant and the quality of performance by the Contractor and Subcontractors in developing these records will be taken into consideration when reviewing the monthly applications for payment submitted by the Contractor.

.7 Prior to the date of Substantial Performance, request from the Consultant updated drawings incorporating all changes made to the building through Change Orders and Jobsite Instructions. Transfer all recordings from the white prints to these updated drawings and return them to the Consultant, as specified in Section 01 78 00, Close-out Submittals.

.8 Mark "as-built" changes in red coloured ink.

.9 Record following information: .1 Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of structure. .2 Field changes of dimension and detail. .3 Changes made by Change Order or Supplementary Instructions.

.10 Clearly mark each of the drawings, “Project As-Built Record Copy".

.11 Final completion of these Drawings shall be a condition precedent to the

issuance of Consultant's final payment certificate.

.12 Refer to Electrical and Mechanical Specification Divisions for more specific requirements regarding preparation and submission of final Record Drawings.

END OF SECTION

of 596



01 33 23 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA & SAMPLES


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCHEDULE

Within 5 working days after award of Contract, prepare and submit to Consultant for

comment, a schedule fixing the dates for the submission of all Shop Drawings, product data and samples.

Allow reasonable promptness for Consultant to review submissions, exclusive of time required for inter-office transmissions.

All shop drawings must be reviewed and stamped by the Contractor prior to submission to the Consultant.

1.2 GENERAL

Submit to Consultant, for review, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other required submittals specified.

All shop drawings and related submittals must be reviewed and stamped by the Contractor prior to submission to the Consultant.

Until submittal is reviewed, Work involving relevant product may not proceed.

Do not use for construction, Shop or setting Drawings or diagrams which do not bear Consultant's stamp and signature.

Shop drawing reviews do not authorize changes in cost or time, which may only be accomplished by an appropriate Change Order issued through the Consultant.

Shop drawings shall be for products as specified or otherwise approved by the Consultant. The shop drawing process is not a means of requesting substitutions. Refer to Section 00 73 00, Supplementary Conditions, under GC 3.8, Labour and Products, for the process for requesting approval of substitutions.

Submission and subsequent review of Shop Drawings constitute a service and does not entitle the Supplier or Subcontractor to the right to remuneration until the materials are supplied and installed on the Site in accordance with the Contract.

The Contractor must include for delivery and pick up of shop drawings to/from the Consultant by hand or courier.

The Contractor must include for reproduction of shop drawings after review by the consultants.

of 596





1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

Drawings shall be copies of original drawings prepared by Contractor, subcontractor, supplier or distributor, for the work of the Contract which illustrate appropriate portions of the Work. Shop drawing submissions shall show pertinent information for incorporation of the products and equipment, including the following, as applicable: .1 fabrication details .2 dimensioned layout drawings, including clearances, with site dimensions .3 relationship to adjacent work .4 setting or erection details .5 performance requirements .6 operating weights of equipment .7 installation instructions .8 service connection requirements, including wiring diagrams .9 single line and schematic diagrams .10 additional information as may be specified in applicable Specification Sections.

Note that some shop drawings are required to be approved by a Professional Structural

Engineer in the Contractor's employ. .1 These include: structural steel shop drawings of folding partition and other items

as required in the specifications.

Submit Shop Drawings with transmittal forms listing: .1 the project name and number .2 the names of the manufacturer, supplier, subcontractor .3 the applicable Drawing numbers .4 the number of copies .5 the names of the items included the submittals .6 number of Specification section to which the Shop Drawings refer .7 dates and revision numbers, and submission numbers

All dimensions on shop drawings must be in metric.

Where approvals are required by Authorities having jurisdiction, submit Shop Drawings to

those authorities and obtain the approvals required.

On Shop Drawings for fire rated assemblies show required fire rating and ULC design numbers.

Email Submission: .1 Submittals that are formatted for 11" x 17" (279 x 432mm) sheets or smaller may

be submitted by email, provided the total number of pages, for the entire submission, does not exceed 15.

.2 Submittals must be submitted in the same size and scale as they were originally prepared. Drawings may not be reduced in size for email transmission.

.3 If acceptable to the individual reviewers, larger format submittals and larger volume submittals may be reviewed by email submission. The Contractor must subsequently print and submit full sized, red line copies of such reviewed documents to each reviewer.

of 596





.4 Email submissions must be in pdf format and must be high quality documents, preferably generated by computer from the original documents (rather than scans of printed documents). If digital submissions are of insufficient quality, hard copies will be required.

.5 Emailed documents shall be reviewed and stamped digitally by the Contractor, or accompanied by a separate sheet from the Contractor listing the documents reviewed and bearing the Contractor’s review stamp, along with copies of any revisions made.

.6 Email submission is only used as a convenient means of distributing drawings, in lieu of sending hard copies by courier. Reviewed drawings must still be printed for job site files, record copies, etc. All site copies shall be red line prints or colour prints.

Drawings shall be of a size and quality which will be readily reproduced. Shop drawings must be certified to have been reviewed and corrected by Contractor and sub-contractor responsible for forwarding to the Consultant.

Shop drawings are to be to scale. Scale shall be large enough to adequately review details included. Provide site measured dimensions on drawings wherever possible.

All requirements for shop drawings apply also to resubmissions of shop drawings, as may be required by the Consultant.

Revise all reviewed shop drawings to incorporate Consultant’s comments. One complete set of final, revised Shop Drawings, used for construction, shall be submitted to the Consultant.

Shop Drawings are required for the following items: Door Hardware Architectural Casework Solid Surface Fabrications Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals Hollow Metal Work Automatic Sliding Entrance Systems Structural Steel Folding Partition Mechanical and electrical equipment as listed in relevant specification sections. Other items as may be requested within the specifications.

Refer also to the General Conditions of the Contract and Town of Oakville’s Front End Supplementary Conditions.

1.4 PRODUCT DATA

Certain Specification Sections specify that manufacturer's standard schematic drawings, catalogue sheets, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive data will be accepted in lieu of Shop Drawings.

of 596





The above will be accepted if they conform to the following: .1 Delete information which is not applicable to project. .2 Supplement standard information to provide additional information applicable to

project. .3 Show dimensions and clearances required. .4 Show performance characteristics and capacities. .5 Indicate operating weight of equipment. .6 Show wiring diagrams and controls. .7 Add to standard sheet the Project identification data.

1.5 SAMPLES AND MOCK-UPS

Where specified, shown or considered necessary, submit duplicate samples for

Consultant's approval.

Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit full range of samples.

Samples must correspond in every respect to materials supplied for project.

Construct field samples and mock-ups at locations acceptable to Consultant. Construct each sample or mock-up complete, including work of all trades required to finish work.

Do not proceed with fabrication or delivery of materials until samples are approved.

Reviewed samples or mock-ups will become standards of workmanship and material against which installed work will be checked on project.

Approval of samples does not imply acceptance of finished work.

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

Prior to submission to the Consultant, review all shop drawings, samples, product data, and other required submittals as follows: .1 Verify that the submission is for products as specified, or otherwise approved by

the Consultant. .2 Ensure that the submission is complete. .3 Note any potential interference issues and co-ordinate with the trades to avoid

these conflicts. .4 Verify:

.1 Field measurements.

.2 Field construction criteria.

.3 Catalogue numbers and similar data.

Coordinate each submittal with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. Refer to Section 01 10 00, General Instructions, and the subsection on Coordination.

Notify Consultant, in writing at time of submission of any deviations in submittal from requirements of Contract Documents.

of 596





Stamp, initial or sign each Drawing, certifying approval of submission, verification of field

dimensions and measurements and compliance with Contract Documents, prior to submission to the Consultant(s).

The Contractor shall be responsible for reproducing and distributing reviewed shop drawings, except for those copies required by the Architect and Consultants.

After Consultant's review, distribute copies as follows: .1 Job Site file (2 copies) - colour or redline copies .2 As-built documents file. .3 Other prime contractors. .4 Subcontractors. .5 Supplier. .6 Fabricator. .7 Authorities having jurisdiction, where required by Codes and/or By-Laws, i.e.

structural steel and sprinklers. .8 Owner’s Maintenance Manual (revised, as-built copies).

Distribute samples as directed by the Consultant.

Ensure that all samples are approved by authorities having jurisdiction, supplier for

correct application in Project, and other parties such as Owner in time to permit approval prior to ordering of quantity delivery to Site.

The Contractor shall advise all Trades, Subcontractors and suppliers of the limits of the Consultant's responsibility with respect to Shop Drawings and other submittals, as detailed below.

1.7 CONSULTANT'S RESPONSIBILITY

With reasonable promptness from the receipt of samples and Architectural shop drawings, the Consultant shall review them and return them to the Contractor. Allow 15 working days for review of shop drawings.

Review by the Consultant is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with the general design concept. This review shall not mean that the Consultant approves the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Contractor, and such review shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for information that pertains solely to the processes or techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of the work of all subtrades.

Shop drawing markings shall be interpreted as follows: .1 Shop drawings marked "REVIEWED" by Consultant and/or Subconsultants are

released for construction.

of 596





.2 Shop drawings marked "REVIEWED AS NOTED" by the Consultant or his Subconsultants are also released for construction, after revisions noted are made; with final copies sent to the Consultant.

.3 Shop drawings marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT" by the Consultant or his Subconsultants are NOT released for construction and must be resubmitted after being revised in accordance with the consultants’ comments.

.4 Shop Drawings marked with the Consultant's "RECEIVED" stamp only have not been reviewed by the Consultant.

Review by the Architect does not in any way constitute review of the design of engineering elements, which form part of the Contract Document's prepared by others.

Shop drawings for products that are not a specified item, or an approved substitution, will be rejected without being reviewed.

Shop drawings which have not been requested will be returned to the Contractor with no action taken by the Consultant.

END OF SECTION

of 596



01 35 20 - SAFETY REQUIREMENTS


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY

Observe and enforce construction safety measures required by the Ontario Building

Code, Canadian Construction Safety Code, Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act, Workplace Safety & Insurance board (WSIB) and Municipal Statutes and Authorities. .1 The Contractor is again reminded that the Contractor is responsible for

Occupational Health and Safety on this project. The items listed below are only guidelines of the Owner’s expectations in this regard and not to be construed to be comprehensive or total in nature.

In particular, the Ontario Construction Safety Act, the regulations of the Ontario Department of Labour and Ontario Hydro Safety Requirements shall be strictly enforced.

In event of conflict between any provisions of above authorities the most stringent provisions will apply.

The Owner will take every reasonable precaution to prevent injury or illness to employees

and the public, participating in Owner activities, or performing their duties. This shall be accomplished by providing and maintaining a safe, healthy working environment and by providing the education necessary to perform these activities or duties safely.

The Owner is also vitally interested in the health and safety of Contractors and their

workers performing work for the Owner. Cooperation and support of the Contractor in the protection of the workers from injury or occupational disease is a major, continuing objective of the Owner. To achieve these goals, the Owner, in concert with the Contractors, will endeavour to make every effort to ensure that the Contractors provide a work site which is a safe and healthy work environment. The Owner insists that all Contractors and their workers are dedicated to the continuing objective of reducing risk and injury.

The Contractor covenants and agrees to comply with all statutory and other obligations,

including without limitation, the provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario) and all Regulations thereto, and all amending and successor legislation, in connection with all work performed by either the Contractor, Sub-contractors, or any Other Contractor on, or in connection with, the Project.

Without limiting the foregoing, for the purposes of this Contract, the Contractor agrees

that it shall be the "constructor" of the Project within the meaning of the Act, and as such, shall assume all the obligations and responsibilities, and observe all construction safety requirements and procedures, and duties of inspection imposed by the Act on the "constructor", as therein defined, for all work and services performed by the Contractor, Subcontractors and Other Contractors on or in connection with the Project. The Contractor further covenants and agrees that the Owner and its existing and former officers, trustees, employees and agents, and their respective heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns shall be released from any obligations or liabilities otherwise imposed on the Owner, or on any of them, pursuant to the Act in connection with the Project, and that the Contractor shall assume all liability and responsibility in connection with same. The Contractor agrees to save harmless and

of 596





indemnify the Owner from any losses, damages, costs and expenses of any kind, or nature whatsoever, including all legal expenses, and all defense costs and related expert or consulting fees, incurred by the Owner, or any of them, arising in connection with the failure, default, or inability of the Contractor of the Owner, or any of them, to comply with any of the aforementioned statutory, or other legal requirements, or arising in connection with any breach by the Contractor of any of its covenants, agreements and obligations under this Contract.

The Contractor shall inform and instruct Other Contractors that they, while performing work on this project, are under the authority of the Contractor. Other Contractors are to discuss and co-ordinate with, and follow instructions from, the Contractor on all matters of site access, vehicles, deliveries, storage, temporary facilities, coordination with the work of other subcontractors, work methods, scheduling, labour conditions, construction safety, environmental protection, security and all other matters which relate to the safe and proper execution of construction work.

The Contractor shall ensure that all supervisory personnel on job site are fully aware of

the procedures and requirements outlined herein and comply with all requirements specified.

All contractors are responsible to ensure that all machinery and/or equipment are/is safe and that the workers perform their tasks in compliance with established safe work practices or procedures. Workers must receive adequate training in their specific work tasks to protect their health and safety.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all persons and companies performing work, including other Contractors, on this project, at all times, up to and including, the date of Substantial Performance of the Work. Authority for coordination and instructions relating to all matters which relate to the safe and proper execution of construction work shall rest with the Contractor. The Contract Price will include the Contractor's fees for the coordination and supervision of the work of all other contractors.

In addition to the responsibility of all contractors as outlined in 1.1.10, above, Subcontractors will be held accountable for the health and safety of workers under their supervision.

Every worker must protect his/her own health and safety by working in compliance with the law and with safe work practices and procedures established by the authorities having jurisdiction.

All sections of the Occupational Health and Safety Act for Industrial Establishments,

latest edition, and the Occupational Health and Safety Act for Construction Projects, latest edition, shall be enforced, by the Contractor, in their entirety, throughout the duration of the construction project.

The Contractor shall provide the Consultant with the telephone number where the Contractor or his representative can be reached at any time, day or night, for the duration of the contract.

Where an accident, explosion, or fire causes a person injury at the work place, and the worker is disabled from performing the usual task, the Contractor shall prepare a written

of 596





notice and shall forward same to the Ministry of Labour within four days of the occurrence with a copy to the health and safety representative or the Joint Health and Safety Committee, containing such information and particulars as may be prescribed.

.1 Where a person is killed or critically injured from any cause at the work place, the

Contractor shall immediately call the Ministry of Labour. A written notice from the Contractor shall be given to the Ministry of Labour within forty-eight hours after the occurrence, containing such information and particulars as may be prescribed, with copies to the Consultant and the Owner's Representative.

.2 The Contractor is advised that the accident scene is under the jurisdiction of the Ministry of Labour and no wreckage, articles, etc., shall be interfered with, disturbed, destroyed, altered or carried away at the scene, or connected with the occurrence, until the Ministry of Labour has given permission.

1.2 REPORT ACCIDENTS

Promptly report in writing to the Consultant all accidents which cause death, personal injury or property damage, arising out of or in connection with the performance of the work on or adjacent to the site. Where death or serious injuries or serious damages are caused, the accident shall be reported immediately by telephone or messenger to the Consultant and to the relevant public authorities.

If any claim is made by anyone against the Contractor or Subcontractor on account of any accident, the Contractor shall promptly report the facts in writing to the Consultant giving full details of the claim.

1.3 FIRST AID FACILITIES

Provide at the site the equipment and medical facilities necessary to supply first-aid service to anyone who may be injured in connection with the Work, and to conform to the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction over the Work.

1.4 FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

The appropriate clauses of the Ontario Building Code, Ontario Fire Code, National Building Code of Canada and National Fire Code relating to fire safety and protection shall be strictly followed.

Provide and maintain free access to temporary or permanent fire hydrants acceptable to local fire department.

Provide sufficient temporary standpipes and connections, fire hose, valves, temporary cabinets, extinguishers, etc. to comply with the requirements of the governing Municipal and Provincial authorities.

Make necessary adjustments and modifications to temporary fire protection as required during progress of the work. Remove such temporary work when permanent system is installed and operating.

of 596





Conform to “Guidelines for Maintaining Fire Safety During Construction in Existing Buildings”, provided by the Office of the Ontario Fire Marshal. .1 Maintain existing exits and access to exits. Where an exit must be blocked,

provide an alternate exit acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. .2 Provide minimum 45 minute rated fire separations at junction between existing

corridors in occupied spaces and new corridors under construction. Any required access through these partitions shall be with rated doors, frames with closers and latching.

.3 Maintain exiting fire department access route or provide new, or temporary, access route acceptable to the fire department.

.4 Do not store combustible materials adjacent to existing building or where such materials could pose a fire hazard to the building or the occupants.

.5 Where temporary openings are made in existing floors, pack with mineral wool insulation to create temporary fire barrier.

.6 Existing fire alarm system is to be kept operational throughout the construction period. Keep fire department informed of any temporary shutdowns and arrange for alternate fire safety measures to be implemented during that period.

.7 Refer to the Ontario Fire Code for requirements for temporary shutdown of fire protections systems, including sprinklers and standpipe systems.

.8 Modify Fire Safety Plan in accordance with the Fire Code, when required to facilitate construction. Such modifications shall be determined in cooperation with the Owner and the local fire department.

1.5 OVERLOADING

Ensure no part of Work is subjected to a load which exceeds the design live loads shown on the structural drawings. Ensure that scaffolding and false work are not overloaded. Do not cut load bearing members without approval of Consultant.

1.6 FALSEWORK

Design and construct falsework in accordance with CSA S269.1 latest version.

1.7 VISITORS

Provide hard hats for use by all visitors.

1.8 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPIED SITES

The existing building will be occupied throughout the Construction Period, additional safety requirements will apply, as outlined below:

Access Control: .1 The Contractor shall instruct all suppliers and subcontractors that they are

required to contact the Site Supervisor by cell phone prior to entering the site, and await escort.

of 596





.2 Gates and construction enclosure must remain closed and locked at all times and only opened for the time required for access/egress of personnel.

Site Communication:

.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner with an emergency contact telephone number at which the Site Supervisor or other Contractor representative can be contacted directly during work hours and with voicemail available at all other times, including weekends and holidays, which will be checked regularly.

.2 Contractor shall be in daily communication with the Owner to determine any activities which may involve safety concerns, whether building related or construction related.

1.9 SIGNAGE

Provide signage indicating " Danger - Keep Out", "Hard Hats must be worn at all times",

"Safety Shoes must be worn at all times", "No Trespassing", etc., mounted on all sides of Site, and additional signs as necessary to adequately warn the public and workmen of the inherent dangers of the site and requirements to maintain personal safety. Safety Signage is also required at all construction entrances.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596



01 35 43 - HAZARDOUS MATERIALS


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

The Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act requires the Owner to provide a list of Designated Substances to all prospective Contractors and they in turn must supply the list to their sub-trades who are likely to handle or disturb the material.

Materials that may be present in the area of construction may include any or all of the following and would be expected in normal construction: .1 Lead: in paint films, in solder or pipe for drinking water, in solder for other pipe or

electrical components. .2 Mercury : found in elemental form in an ampoule in thermostats or in electrical

soft switches, as a gas in fluorescent light tubes or in paint films and caulk. .3 Silica: primarily as Quartz, bound in building materials including but not limited to

concrete, brick and block.

In accordance with the Ontario Health and Safety Act and regulations enacted under the Act the Contractor and sub-trades shall take appropriate precautions for the building and their work force. Such precautions may include, for the substances listed, the measures outlined below.

Lead: .1 Any operation involving lead-based paints may potentially produce significant

exposures to lead if adequate controls are not provided. Exposure varies with the type of operation being employed.

.2 The presence of lead in building finishes left intact or found peeling in a few locations produces little exposure for workers to lead through contact, inhalation or ingestion.

.3 Operations involving the hand sanding and scraping of lead based paints can elevate exposure through inhalation. The use of a negative pressure respirator equipped with high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters is recommended to reduce exposure.

.4 Operations involving the machine sanding or abrasive cutting of paint and other surface coatings containing lead can elevate levels of much finer dust. The spray application of a lead bearing paint or coating produces a respirable fume. These operations increase the likelihood of exposure by inhalation. A negative pressure air-purifying respirator equipped with HEPA filters is recommended for these operations.

.5 Operations involving oxyacetylene torches or other heating operations produces the most significant exposure to lead in particular through inhalation and by contact of lead fumes solidifying on skin. A powered air-purifying respirator equipped with HEPA filters and full body covering is recommended for these operations.

.6 Lead found in solder of other pipe systems and electronic components poses no threat to the work force by inhalation, ingestion or by contact with the exception of maintenance or renovation activities. The maintenance of the pipe or electrical component may produce some exposure to lead fume during the seating on of lead solders but for a short duration of time. Inhalation is the source of entry and exposure is not very significant.

of 596



01 35 43 - HAZARDOUS MATERIALS


.7 All items identified in this section may be disposed of as regular non-hazardous waste unless concentrated. Metallic lead may be reclaimed through scrap metal dealers.

Mercury: .1 Fluorescent light tubes contain small quantities of mercury gas. These sealed

units do not pose any harm in the workplace except in the case of breakage. There are no liquid or residue present after breakage and spill cleaning is not a concern. A recommended practice is to evacuate the work area when breakage occurs. The gas will diffuse in about five to ten minutes and cleanup of the tubes can be performed. Mercury can be taken into the body by inhalation only from this source.

.2 The same precautions as those indicated for lead-based paints would apply to mercury in paints.

.3 Elemental mercury found in ampoules in electrical equipment may be disposed of as regular waste and should be turned over to the Owner for disposal through commercial recyclers. The other forms (light tubes and painted surfaces that have been concentrated) can be disposed of as regular waste.

Silica:

.1 Silica is presumed to be present in cement, cement blocks, bricks and mortar of the building. Unless the silica in these materials is reduced to respirable size (5 um or less) and the airborne concentration exceeds the time weighted average exposure of 0.2 milligrams per cubic metre in air, no adverse health effects are expected to occur. Building construction, renovation or demolition do not normally raise excessive exposure to silica with the exception of jack hammering, dry saw cutting or sand blasting. There is little likelihood for the work force to be exposed to excessive levels of respirable silica dust if the material is suppressed with water spray or flow. Respiratory protection is dependent on the type and airborne concentration of respirable silica present in the particular work environment.

.2 Prior to the disposal of building materials a leachate toxicity test in compliance with Water Management Regulation (Revised Regulation of Ontario 1990/Regulation 347) may be required by the local waster receiving site or the Ontario Ministry of Environment and Energy. Prior to disposal these authorities should be consulted with and tests performed where required.

.3 Where a friable building material enclosed in a wall, floor or ceiling such as fireproofing, insulation on pipe or ducts etc. (that is not fibrous glass) or an acoustical textured material (stucco) or a non-friable material such as cement board or cement pipe, the Contractor shall refer to the Consultant who shall contact the Owner for further direction.

END OF SECTION

of 596



01 41 00 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 REGULATING DOCUMENTS

Conform to the Ontario Building Code (Ontario Reg. 332/12), Ontario Fire Code (Ontario

Reg. 213/07), Accessibility for Ontarians with Disabilities Act (Ontario Reg. 191/11), National Building Code of Canada 2010, 2012 Canadian Electrical Code (CEC), CSA B44 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, CSA W59 - Welded Steel Construction, The Occupational Health and Safety Act, Ontario (R.S.O. 1990), the National Fire Code, the local municipal Fire Code, and all other applicable Codes and Building By-Laws. Conform to the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, such as public utilities. Where required under The Occupational Health and Safety Act, engage a Professional Engineer to design formwork and falsework for concrete.

Contract forms, codes, standards and manuals referred to in these specifications are the latest published editions at the date of close of tenders. Meet or exceed requirements of specified standards.

Provide copies of documents referred to in the Specification for joint use of Contractor and Consultant, on site.

1.2 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED BY BUILDING INSPECTOR

Confirm with building inspector, at the commencement of construction, what documents are required for submission both during construction and for occupancy. Keep copies of such documents on site.

At the time of request for occupancy, submit a complete package of all required documents to the building inspector. The package shall contain all documents required for the inspector’s sign off for occupancy, and should be expected to include the following documents: .1 Copies of Consultant’s General Review Reports .2 Copies of General Review Reports of consulting engineers .3 Consultant’s and engineers’ letters confirming project is ready for occupancy in

accordance with the provisions of the Ontario Building Code, Division C, and section 1.3.3, Occupancy of Buildings.

.4 Verification of compliance with tested designs for rated assemblies.

.5 Verification of Fire Protection Systems including: .1 Verification of engineer supervised sprinkler, standpipe and hose system

testing. .2 Material and test certificates for all work, including below ground, in

conformance with NFPA-13 and NFPA-14, as applicable. .6 Verification of Fire Alarm System as follows:

.1 Testing to CAN/ULC S537

.2 Installation to CAN/ULC S524

.3 Monitoring to CAN/ULC S561 .7 Additional documents as required by the municipality.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596



01 42 13 – ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS


A A/B ANCHORBOLT AC AIR CONDITIONING ACT ACOUSTIC CEILINGTILE ADD ADDENDUM ADJ ADJUSTABLE AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT ALM ALARM ALUM ALUMINUM ANN ANNUNCIATOR PANEL ANO ANODIZED AUTO AUTOMATIC A/V AUDIO VISUAL AVB AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER AWT ACOUSTIC WALL

TREATMENT

B BD BOARD BEV BEVELLED BF BARRIER-FREE BH BORE HOLE B/H BULKHEAD BIT BITUMINOUS BLDG BUILDING BLK CONCRETE BLOCK BM BEAM B/M BENCH MARK BN BULL NOSED BOT BOTTOM BP BEARING PLATE BRDG BRIDGING BRK BRICK BUR BUILT-UP ROOFING BV BLOCK VENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section describes abbreviations and acronyms that may be used in these

specifications and on the drawings and schedules. When references are made in these specifications to the standards, specifications, or

other published data of various international, national, regional, or local organizations, such organizations may be referred to by their acronym or abbreviation only.

The list of abbreviations and acronyms is provided to aid in the interpretation of notations in the construction documents and shall not be used to alter the meaning of notes for which the meaning is readily inferable from the context.

Abbreviations and acronyms can have more than one meaning. Their use shall be considered with respect to different subjects and disciplines where the context in which each is used makes the meaning clear. .1 Example:

.1 CB on floor plans typically refers to a chalkboard .2 CB on site plans typically refers to a catchbasin .3 CB on electrical plans typically refers to a circuit breaker

Where additional or alternate abbreviations and acronyms are listed and used on

drawings, schedules, and in the specification sections prepared by subconsultants, those shall apply to the documents on which they are noted.

Discrepancies shall be noted and brought to the Consultant's attention for interpretation.

1.2 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

The following is a list of abbreviations used in the specifications, schedules and on the drawings:

of 596





C CAB CABINET CAP CARPET CB CHALKBOARD, OR

CATCHBASIN C/B CATCHBASIN CBMH CATCHBASIN MANHOLE C/C CENTRE TO CENTRE CEM CEMENT CER CERAMIC CH CABINET HEATER CJ CONTROL JOINT CL CENTRE LINE CLF CHAIN LINK FENCE CLG CEILING CLR CLEAR CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COL COLUMN CONSTR CONSTRUCTION CONC CONTINUOUS CONTR CONTRACT OR

CONTRACTOR CONV CONVECTOR CORR CORRIDOR CP CONTROL PANEL CPT CARPET CR COAT RACK CS CONVENIENCE SHELF CT CERAMIC TILE C-UL UL TESTED FOR CANADA CTR CENTRE C/W COMPLETE WITH C/S CONCRETE, SEALED D DAM DAMPPROOFING DAT DATUM DBL DOUBLE DET DETAIL DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN DIA DIAMETER DIAG DIAGONAL DIFF DIFFUSER DIM DIMENSION DISP DISPENSER DL DOOR LOUVER DN DOWN DSP DOWNSPOUT DVTL DOVETAIL JOINT DRY DRYER DW DISHWASHER DWG DRAWING

E EF EACH FACE EJ EXPANSION JOINT EL ELEVATION ELEV ELEVATOR EQL EQUAL EQ/T EQUIVALENT THICKNESS EQPT EQUIPMENT EX EXISTING EXH EXHAUST EXP EXPANSION EXP STR EXPOSED STRUCTURE F FBD FIBREBOARD FD FLOOR DRAIN F/D FIRE DAMPER FCD FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION FDN FOUNDATION FEC FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FFL FINISH FLOOR LEVEL FH FIRE HYDRANT FHC FIRE HOSE CABINET FIN FINISH FIX FIXTURE FLG FLASHING FLEX FLEXIBLE FLUOR FLUORESCENT FPR FIRE PROTECTION RATING FR FIRE RETARDANT/RATED FRR FIRE RESISTANCE RATING FSS FIRE SEPARATION FTG FOOTING FURR FURRING G GA GAUGE GALV GALVANIZED GB GYPSUM BOARD GL GLASS GRB GRAB BAR GVL GRAVEL GYP BD GYPSUM BOARD GWG GEORGIAN WIRED GLASS H HB HOSE BIBB H/C HANDICAPPED HD HAND DRYER HM HOLLOW METAL

of 596





HRD HAIR DRYER HTD HIGH TRAFFIC DOORS HVAC HEATING, VENTILATION AND

AIRCONDITIONING HWT HOT WATER TANK HYD FIRE HYDRANT I ID INSIDE DIAMETER INS INSULATION ISOL ISOLATION

L LAB LABORATORY LAM LAMINATE LAT LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL TILE LAT -1 LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL TILE

(TYPE 1) LAV LAVATORY LBL LABEL LDBR LOAD BEARING LDG LANDING LF LIGHT FIXTURE LH LEFT HAND LHR LEFT HAND REVERSE LIB LIBRARY LINO LINOLEUM LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL LNTL LINTEL LONG LONGITUDINAL LPT LOW POINT LMC LINEAR METAL CEILING LS LIGHT STANDARD LVL LEVEL LV -1 LOUVRE (TYPE 1) LWB LIGHT WEIGHT BLOCK M M METRES MAT MINERAL ACOUSTIC TILE MAX MAXIMUM MDF MEDIUM DENSITY

FIBREBOARD MECH MECHANICAL MEMB MEMBRANE MET METAL MEZZ MEZZANINE MH MANHOLE MIN MINIMUM MIRR MIRROR MISC MISCELLANEOUS MLWK MILLWORK

MLWK MILLWORK MM MILLIMETRES MO MASONRY OPENINGS MR MOISTURE RESISTANT MTD MOUNTED MWP MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING N NAT NATURAL NBCC NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF

CANADA NFHB NON-FREEZE HOSE BIBB NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NO NUMBER NOM NOMINAL NSF NON-SLIP FLOORING NTS NOT TO SCALE O OA OVERALL OBC ONTARIO BUILDING CODE OC ON CENTRE OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER O/H OVERHEAD OPG OBSCURE PLATE GLASS OWSJ OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST OV OVEN P P PAINT PAP PREFINISHED ALUMINUM PANEL PA PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM PB PORCELAIN BASE PAR PARALELL PB PUSH DOOR OPERATOR PBD PARTICLEBOARD PC PRECAST CONCRETE PE PORCELAIN ENAMEL PERF PERFORATED PERIM PERIMETER PERP PERPENDICULAR PG PLATE GLASS PL PLASTER PLAM PLASTIC LAMINATE PLUMB PLUMBING PLYWD PLYWOOD PMF PREFINISHED METAL FLASHING PMS PREFINISHED METAL SIDING PMP PREFINISHED METAL PANEL PML PANEL POLY POLYETHYLENE OR POLYOLEFIN POR PORCELAIN TILE PR PAIR

of 596





PREFIN PREFINISHED PRELIM PRELIMINARY PT PAINT, OR PORCELAIN TILE PTD PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER PTN PARTITION PTW PRESERVATIVE TREATED

WOOD PVG PAVING PWC PLASTIC WALL COVERING Q QT QUARRY TILE R R RADIUS RA RETURN AIR RAD RADIATOR RB RUBBER BASE RD ROOF DRAIN REBAR REINFORCING BAR RCONV RECESSED CONVECTOR RCH RECESSED CABINET

HEATER REC RECESSED REF REFERENCE / REFER REFR REFRIGERATOR REINF REINFORCE/D/ING/MENT REM REMOVE/ABLE RES RESILIENT REV REVISE / REVISION RFG ROOFING RH RIGHT HAND R/H ROOF HOPPER RLG RAILING RM ROOM, OR RECESS

MOUNTED RMC REINFORCED MASONRY

COLUMN RUBB RUBBER RUH RECESSED UNIT HEATER RWL RAINWATER LEADER S S -1 STAIN (TYPE) 1 SAD SECURITY ALARM DEVICE SAN SANITARY SC SOLID CORE SCB SLIDING CHALKBOARD SCHED SCHEDULE SD SOAP DISPENSER SEC SPECIAL EPOXY COATING SF SHEET FLOORING SIM SIMILAR

SK SINK SL SLATE SND SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER SNR SANITARY NAPKIN RECEPTACLE SOG SLAB ON GRADE SP SPANDREL PANEL SPECS SPECIFICATIONS SPC SPECIAL COATING SPF SPORTS FLOORING SPKR SPEAKER SRCONV SEMI RECESSED CONVECTOR SS STAINLESS STEEL ST STEEL STAG STAGGERED STC SOUND TRANSMISSION CLASS STD STANDARD STIFF STIFFENER STOR STORAGE STR STRUCTURE SUPPL SUPPLEMENT/AL SURF SURFACE SUSP SUSPENDED SVF SHEET VINYL FLOORING SIDEWALK SWF SPECIAL WALL FINISH SYM SYMBOL T TB TACKBOARD TB TOP AND BOTTOM TBD TO BE DETERMINED TC TEACHER’S CLOSET, OR TOP OF

CURB TEC TECTUM PANEL T&G TONGUE AND GROOVE TEMP TEMPERED GLASS TERR TERRAZZO TEL TELEPHONE TEMP TEMPORARY TH TEST HOLE TM TILT MIRROR T/O TOP OF TOC TOP OF CURB TOCS TOP OF CONCRETE SLAB TOS TOP OF STEEL TPG TEMPERED PLATE GLASS TPH TOILET PAPER HOLDER TR TRANSOM TYP TYPICAL U U/C UNDERCUT U/G UNDERGROUND UH UNIT HEATER

of 596





ULC UNDERWRITER’S LABORATORIES OF CANADA

UL UNDERWRITER’S LABORATORIES (USA)

UNEX UNEXCAVATED UNF UNFINISHED UNO UNLESS NOTED

OTHERWISE U/P UNPAINTED UR URINAL U/S UNDERSIDE UTIL UTILITY V VAR VARIABLE, VARIES VB VAPOUR BARRIER VCT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VERT VERTICAL VEST VESTIBULE VT VINYL FACED VR VAPOUR RETARDER VT VINYL TILE VWP VINYL WALL PANEL

W W/ WITH WASH WASHING MACHINE WB WHITE BOARD WC WATERCLOSET (TOILET) WD WOOD WDF WOOD FLOORING WF WASH FOUNTAIN WG WIRED GLASS W/O WITHOUT WP WATERPROOFING, WORKING POINT WR WASHROOM W/R WATER RESISTANT

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596



01 43 00 – QUALITY ASSURANCE


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Refer also to the Quality Control Provisions of Section 00 10 00, General Instructions. Provide a system of quality control to ensure that the minimum standards specified herein

are attained. Bring to the attention of the Consultant any defects in the work or departures from the

Contract Documents which may occur during construction. The Consultant will decide upon corrective action and state recommendations in writing.

The Consultant's general review during construction and inspection by independent inspection and testing agencies reporting to the Consultant are both undertaken to inform the Owner of the Contractor's performance and shall in no way augment the Contractor's quality control or relieve him of contractual responsibility.

1.2 NOTIFICATION

Give the Consultant advance notice of shop fabrication, field erection and other phases of the work so as to afford him reasonable opportunity to inspect the work for compliance with contract requirements. Failure to meet this requirement may be cause for the Consultant to classify the work as defective.

1.3 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

Where factual evidence exists that defective workmanship has occurred or that work has been carried out incorporating defective materials, the Consultant may have tests, concrete cores, inspections or surveys performed, analytical calculation of structural strength made and the like in order to help determine whether the work must be replaced, Test, inspections or surveys carried out under these circumstances will be made at the Contractor's expense, regardless of their results, which may indicate that, in the Consultant's opinion, the work may be acceptable.

All testing shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of the Ontario Building Code, except where this would, in the Consultant's opinion, cause undue delay or give results not representative of the rejected material in place. In this case, the tests shall be conducted in accordance with the standards given by the Consultant.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596



01 45 00 – QUALITY CONTROL


PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

Inspection and testing, administrative and enforcement requirements.

Tests and mix designs.

Mock-ups.

Mill tests.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submission of samples to confirm product quality.

Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Material and workmanship quality, reference standards.

1.3 INSPECTION

Refer to GC 2.3 - REVIEW AND INSPECTION OF THE WORK. The Contractor shall prepare agenda for meetings.

Inspection and Testing is specified in the following Sections:

Cast-in-Place Concrete – Refer to Structural Drawings. Section 03 35 00 Concrete Floor Finishing Section 04 05 00 Masonry Procedures Section 04 05 13 Masonry Mortar and Grout Section 04 05 22 Concrete Unit Masonry

Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel

Section 07 84 00 Firestopping and Smoke Seal

Section 09 91 00 Painting

1.4 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AGENCIES

Independent inspection and testing agencies will be engaged by the Owner for the purpose of inspecting and testing portions of the Work.

of 596





Costs of inspection and testing will be paid by Owner.

The Contractor shall provide equipment, tools, and materials that may be required for executing re-inspection and re-testing the Work by the appointed agencies.

Employment of inspection and testing agencies does not relax the responsibility to

perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Inspection and testing agencies shall act on a professional and unprejudiced basis and carry out inspection and testing functions to establish compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents.

Inspection and testing agencies shall review work as it progresses and prepare reports

stating results of tests and conditions of work and indicate in each report whether specimens tested conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, specifically noting deviations.

If defects are revealed during inspection or testing, the appointed agency will request

additional inspection and testing to ascertain the full degree of deficiencies. The Contractor shall correct defects and irregularities as advised by the Consultant at no cost to the Owner. The corrected work will be retested and reinspected by the same inspection and testing agency and the costs shall be paid by the Contractor.

Failure by the independent testing agency to detect defective work or materials shall not in any way prevent later rejection, when such defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate the Owner for final acceptance.

The independent inspection and testing specified in this Section is not meant to replace

or supplement the Contractor's own quality control nor relieves the Contractor of his contractual obligation to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.

The independent testing agency is not authorized to amend or release any requirements

of the Contract Documents, nor to approve or accept any portion of the Work. 1.5 ACCESS TO WORK

Allow inspection and testing agencies access to the Work and off site manufacturing and

fabrication plants.

Co-operate to provide reasonable facilities for such access. 1.6 PROCEDURES

Notify the appropriate agency and the Consultant 48 hours in advance of the requirement for tests, in order that attendance arrangements can be made without causing delay in work.

of 596





Submit samples or materials required for testing, as specifically requested in the specifications. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as not to cause delay in the Work.

Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and materials on site. Provide

sufficient space to store and cure test samples.

1.7 DEFECTIVE WORK

Refer to GC 2.4 - DEFECTIVE WORK.

1.8 REPORT DISTRIBUTION

Submit 1 copy of inspection and test reports to the Owner.

Submit 2 copies of inspection and test reports to the Consultant within 10 Working Days

of the date of the subject inspection or test.

Provide 2 copies of inspection and test reports to the Contractor.

Provide 1 copy of inspection and test reports to Subconsultants affected.

Provide 1 copy of inspection and test report to Subcontractor of work being inspected or tested.

Provide 1 copy of inspection and test reports to Municipal Building Department.

1.9 TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS

Furnish test results and mix designs as may be requested.

The cost of tests and mix designs beyond those called for in the Contract Documents or

beyond those required by the law of the Place of Work shall be appraised by the Consultant and may be authorized as recoverable.

1.10 MOCK-UPS

Prepare mock-up for work specifically requested in the specifications. Include for work of

all Sections required to provide mock-ups.

Construct in locations acceptable to the Consultant or as specified in specific Section.

Prepare mock-up for Consultant's review with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence, so as not to cause any delay in the Work. Construct mock-up from the specified materials and assemblies.

of 596





Make revisions to mock-up as required by the Consultant.

Mock-ups reviewed and approved by the Consultant shall become the standard against which installed work will be evaluated.

Do not proceed with the work until the associated mock-up has been approved by the

Consultant.

Failure to prepare mock-up in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

If requested, the Consultant will assist in preparing a schedule fixing the dates for

preparation.

Specification section identifies whether the mock-up may remain as part of the Work or must be removed.

1.11 MILL TESTS

Submit mill test certificates as may reasonably be requested by the Consultant or as

specified in Specification Sections.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 – EXECUTION Not Used.

END OF SECTION

of 596



01 51 00 – TEMPORARY UTILITIES


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE

.1 Install and pay for all telephone services for Contractor’s own use. .2 Refer to Section 01 52 00, Construction Facilities, for mobile site phone.

1.2 POWER AND WATER SUPPLY

Provide all temporary light and power complete with all wiring, lamps and similar

equipment as required for completion of the Work. Provide adequate lighting for all workmen, sufficient for safety and for execution of good workmanship, taking particular care to observe all safety requirements. Adequate temporary lighting will be insisted upon. The Owner will not be liable for any loss, damage, delay, or claims for extra costs resulting from lack of services.

Existing building services may be used, as available. This does not include emergency generators or batteries. All costs resulting from the use of these services are the responsibility of the Contractor.

Water supply: The existing building water service may be used to supply potable water for construction use.

1.3 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION

Furnish heating apparatus and fuel for heating the temporary offices and sheds.

Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful accumulations of hazardous

substances into atmosphere of occupied areas. Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in harmful exposure to persons.

Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous or volatile materials. Continue operation of ventilation and exhaust system for time after cessation of work process to assure removal of harmful elements. Store paints & solvents in secure, locked, ventilated room at all times.

Protect existing ducting system with filters, inspect daily and replace weekly or more

frequently as necessary. Finally vacuum clean ducting system and replace filters at completion of the Work.

Maintain strict supervision of operation of temporary heating and ventilating equipment. Contract documents for work under this contract consists of the following: .1 Enforce conformance with applicable codes and standards. .2 Enforce safe practices. .3 Prevent abuse of services. .4 Prevent damage to finishes.

of 596



01 51 00 – TEMPORARY UTILITIES


.5 Vent direct-fired combustion units to outside.

1.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

An adequate number of ABC type fire extinguishers shall be provided for the protection of the work during construction.

1.5 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES

Remove temporary utilities from site when directed by Consultant and/or at the completion of the project

END OF SECTION

of 596



01 52 00 – CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACTOR'S SITE OFFICE

Provide and maintain a site office within the area of work, sufficient in size to

accommodate 10 persons for site conference and job meetings.

The site office shall be furnished with the following as a minimum requirement: .1 Desk and chair .2 File cabinets as required for storage .3 Plan file for storage of drawings .4 Table and stacking chairs to provide seating at job meetings

Mobile telephone is required for access to the site at all times. The contact number for

the site must be available at all times when construction personnel are on site.

A printer and computer is to be provided on site.

Locate site office in a suitable location to approved of the Consultant.

The Contractor shall maintain the following documents, up-to-date, in site office: .1 Contract Documents .2 Reviewed shop drawings .3 All instructions and change documents, ie Work Authorizations, Jobsite

Instructions, Notices of Contemplated Change, Change Orders .4 All inspection and test reports .5 Permit drawings and specifications .6 As-built drawings

1.2 STORAGE SHEDS

Provide adequate weather-tight sheds with raised floors, for storage of materials, tools and equipment which are subject to damage by weather.

Storage sheds shall be painted and doors shall be fitted with locks.

Locate storage sheds adjacent to building in the mobilization area.

Material stored on site must be protected by tarpaulins until enclosed in building.

1.3 SANITARY FACILITIES

Workers are permitted to use the public washrooms in the building. Maintain these washrooms in a sanitary and clean condition.

of 596



01 52 00 – CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES


1.4 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES

Remove temporary facilities from site when directed by Consultant and/or at the completion of the project.


END OF SECTION

of 596



01 56 00 – TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND CONTROLS


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 PROTECTION

Supply, install and maintain all guard rails, barriers, night lights, sidewalk and curb protection as may be necessary or as the by-laws may require.

Supply, install and maintain all necessary temporary doors, screens and coverings to protect work areas. All such work shall be neatly painted. Doors shall have hasp and substantial padlock. Owners representative shall have key or combination where access is required.

Protect existing asphalt and concrete paving and curbs from damage and make good any

damage at completion of project.

Properly protect floors and roofs from any damage. Take special precautions when moving heavy loads or equipment over floors and roofs.

Keep floors free of oils, grease or other such materials likely to discolour them and/or

affect bonding of applied surfaces.

Protect glass and other finishes against heat, slab and weld splatters, using appropriate protective shields and covers.

Provide and maintain, in good working order, appropriately labelled ULC fire

extinguishers, to the approval of Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

Provide a minimum of two safety helmets on site at all times for the use of any other Owner authorized visitors to the site. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that any such visitors wear the protective headgear and any other safety gear which may be necessary at that particular time of construction.

Should the job be stopped for any cause, the Contractor shall be responsible for and

provide all necessary protection to prevent damage by weather or other cause until the cause of stoppage has been cleared.

The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for supervision of project and for protection

of public from vehicles in movement, stockpiled materials and construction.

The Contractor is responsible for the prevention of vandalism and theft of all tools, equipment and materials.

Any damage to roadways must be repaired immediately, to municipal standards.

The Contractor is responsible for snow removal as required for access to site.

Any damage to site by the Contractors forces, delivery vehicles, etc., must be made good

at the end of the job. Similarly any damage to curbs, sidewalks, or other municipal property shall be made good by the Contractor.

of 596



01 56 00 – TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND CONTROLS


1.2 TEMPORARY PARTITIONS .1 Supply and install plastic dust proof partitions in the existing Main Lobby as shown on the

architectural drawings and at doorways and wall openings abutting work areas prior to any work taking place.

.2 Dust proof partitions shall be 10MIL polyethylene sheets installed in continuous lengths

from top of existing finished ceiling to top of finished floor. Lap sheets a minimum of 300mm and seal and tape all gaps between sheets and sheets and adjacent surfaces. Provide openings in dust proof partitions that are held in place with continuous velcro and ensure there are no gaps or openings.

.3 Dust proof partitions shall be erected outside of building operating hours and shall remain

in place until the new Work is ready for occupancy, and accepted by the Owner. 1.3 SECURITY AND SITE MOBILIZATION AREA

The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for supervision of project and for protection

of public from vehicles in movement, for stockpiled materials and construction. Vehicular parking and stockpile materials must be maintained on the construction staging area only. No street parking or stockpiling will be allowed on the Municipal streets.

The Contractor is responsible for the prevention of vandalism and theft of all tools, equipment and materials until date of Substantial Performance of Contract.

An area for site mobilization and staging will be provided for use by the General Contractor as required for storage of materials. Temporary construction fencing is to be erected by the Contractor to enclose the construction staging area and to keep this area separate from the site and to prevent the public access to this area. Construction fencing is to remain on site for the duration of construction. The Contractor is to keep this area organized and free from debris at all times. Any damage to this area due to its occupation and use by the General Contractor and subcontractors is to be repaired and made good before construction is completed. Provide the following temporary construction fencing as required: sturdy, heavy-duty galvanized chain link panels with a minimum height of 6’-0” and secured with sturdy steel ground stands and u-clamps. Chain link panels manufactured by Fast Fence Inc. or equivalent manufacturer that can provide the same product as indicated.

The site mobilization area and location is to be confirmed and approved by the Owner.

1.4 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY BARRIERS

Remove temporary barriers and enclosures from site when directed by Consultant and/or

at the completion of the project.

END OF SECTION

of 596



01 60 00 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


PART 1 – GENERAL


Reference standards.

Product quality, availability, storage, handling, protection, transportation.

Manufacturer's instructions, inspection, and certification.

Workmanship, coordination and fastenings.

Existing facilities.


Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control: Quality control and inspection of the Work

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

Within the text of the specifications, reference may be made to standards or documents published by the following organizations: AA - The Aluminum Association. AAMA-Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada. ACI - American Concrete Institute. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction. ANSI -American National Standards Institute. APA - American Plywood Association. ASTM -American Society for Testing and Materials. AWMAC -Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada. BIA - Brick Institute of America. CEMA - Canadian Electrical Manufacturer's Association. CGSB - Canadian General Standards Board. CISC - Canadian Institute of Steel Construction. CLA - Canadian Lumberman's Association. CNTA - Canadian Nursery Trades Association. CPCA - Canadian Painting Contractors' Association. CPCI - Canadian Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute. CRCA - Canadian Roofing Contractors Association. CSA - Canadian Standards Association. CSDMA - Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association.

of 596





CSSBI - Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute. FGMA - Float Glass Manufacturers Association. FM - Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation. GANA - Glass Association of North America IBC - Insurance Bureau of Canada IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. IGMAC - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association of Canada. IPCEA - Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association. MTO - Ministry of Transportation of Ontario. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association. NFPA- National Fire Protection Association. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association. NLGA- National Lumber Grades Authority. NRCC - National Research Council of Canada. OAA - Ontario Association of Architects. OGCA - Ontario General Contractors Association. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. SWI - Sealant and Waterproofer's Institute. TTMAC - Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada. ULC - Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada. WH - Warnock Hersey (Intertek ETL Semko).

Conform to these standards, in whole or in part as specifically requested in the specifications.

In addition to the standards and documents issued by the above listed organizations,

reference may be made to the following codes and documents:

CEC - Canadian Electrical Code (published by CSA). OBC - Ontario Building Code, latest edition. OPS - Ontario Provincial Standards NBC - National Building Code of Canada, latest edition.

If there is question as to whether any product or system is in conformance with applicable standards, the Consultant reserves the right to have such products or systems tested to prove or disprove conformance.

of 596





The cost for such testing will be born by the Owner in the event of conformance with

Contract Documents or by the Contractor in the event of non-conformance.

Conform to latest date of issue of referenced standards in effect on date of submission of bids, except where a date or issue is specifically noted, including all amendments or revisions applicable at bid submission date.

1.4 QUALITY

.1 Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as Products throughout the specifications) incorporated in the Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of the best quality (compatible with specifications) for the purpose intended. If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of Products provided.

.2 Unless otherwise specified, Products supplied shall be of Canadian manufacture.

.3 Defective Products, whenever identified prior to the completion of Work, will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility but is a precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective Products at own expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.

.4 Should any dispute arise as to the quality or fitness of Products, the decision rests strictly

with the Consultant based upon the requirements of the Contract Documents.

.5 Unless otherwise indicated in the specifications, maintain uniformity of manufacture for any particular or like item throughout the building.

.6 Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on Products are not acceptable in

prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in mechanical or electrical rooms.

The acceptance of any Product, material or workmanship shall not be a bar to their

subsequent rejection if found defective.

1.5 AVAILABILITY AND SUBSTITUTIONS

.1 Provide products as specified in these specifications or as identified on drawings. Where

several proprietary products are specified for an item, and they are not identified as alternatives, then any one of the several is acceptable.

.2 Except as noted below, no substitutions to specified products will be accepted after the Contract has been signed.

.3 Immediately upon signing the Contract, review Product delivery requirements and anticipate foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of Products are foreseeable, or if it is found that specified materials have become unavailable for incorporating into the Work, notify the Consultant of such, in order that substitutions or

of 596





other remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delays in the performance of the Work.

.4 In the event of failure to notify the Consultant at the commencement of the Work and

should it subsequently appear that the Work may be delayed for such reason, the Consultant reserves the right to substitute more readily available products of similar character, at no increase in the Contract Price. In every case the Contractor shall be responsible for changes in space requirements regarding substituted products.

1.6 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION

Handle and store Products in a manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions when applicable.

Store packaged or bundled Products in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging or bundling until required in the Work.

Store Products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.

Store cementitious Products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from walls.

Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean and dry. Store sand on wooden platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during inclement weather.

Store sheet materials and lumber on flat, on solid supports and keep clear of ground.

Slope to shed moisture.

Store and mix paints in a heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other combustible debris from site daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent spontaneous combustion.

Remove and replace damaged Products at own expense and to the satisfaction of the

Consultant.

1.7 TRANSPORTATION

Pay costs of transportation of Products required in the performance of the Work.

Transportation cost of Products supplied by the Owner will be paid for by the Owner.

Unload, handle and store such Products.

1.8 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS, INSPECTION, AND CERTIFICATION

Unless otherwise indicated in the Specifications, apply, install, connect, erect, use, clean, and condition Products, systems, and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's

of 596





instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with Products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.

Notify the Consultant in writing, of conflicts between the Specifications and manufacturer's instructions, so that the Consultant may establish the course of action. Where specified requirements are more stringent than the manufacturer's directions, comply with specified requirements.

Improper installation or erection of Products, due to failure in complying with these requirements, authorizes the Consultant to require removal and re-installation at no increase in the Contract Price.

Manufacturers' Inspection and Certification:

.1 Whenever indicated on the Drawings, in the Specifications, or in manufacturers'

or Suppliers' written instructions, manufacturers' representatives shall inspect work that incorporates their materials or Products.

.2 When manufacturer inspection is required, the manufacturer's representative shall be on site at the start of work that incorporates the manufacturer's Products, in order to verify that the correct Products are installed and proper installation procedures are followed.

.3 When the work incorporating the manufacturer's Products is completed, the manufacturer's representative shall carry out a final inspection in order to verify that the work as installed complies with the Contract Documents and the approved Shop Drawings.

.4 After the manufacturer's final inspection, the manufacturer shall prepare a letter of certification of inspection. This letter shall be submitted to the Contractor for inclusion with the documentation required in Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures.

.5 The letter of certification of inspection shall be dated and include the following: .1 Name of Project and the Consultant's Project number. .2 Name of Subcontractor. .3 Name of manufacturer's contact person, and on-site representative if

different, with telephone and fax numbers. .4 Dates of on-site inspections, including start-up and final inspection. .5 Certification that the work as installed incorporates the correct materials

and Products and satisfies the requirements of the Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings.

1.9 WORKMANSHIP

Workmanship shall be the best quality, executed by workers experienced and skilled in

the respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify the Consultant if the required work is such as to make it impractical to produce the required results.

Do not employ any unfit person or anyone unskilled in their required duties. The Consultant reserves the right to require the dismissal from the site, workers deemed incompetent, careless, insubordinate or otherwise objectionable.

of 596





Decisions as to the quality or fitness of workmanship in cases of dispute rest solely with

the Consultant, whose decision is final.

1.10 CO-ORDINATION

Insure cooperation of workers in laying out Work. Maintain efficient and continuous supervision.

Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves and accessories.

1.11 CONCEALMENT

In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings, except

where indicated otherwise.

Before installation, inform the Consultant if there is a contradictory situation. Install as directed by the Consultant.

1.12 REMEDIAL WORK

Perform remedial work required to repair or replace the parts or portions of the Work identified as defective or unacceptable. Coordinate adjacent affected Work as required.

Perform remedial work by specialists familiar with the materials affected. Perform in a

manner to neither damage nor endanger any portion of the Work.

1.13 LOCATION OF FIXTURES

Consider the location of fixtures, outlets, and mechanical and electrical items indicated on the Contract Documents, but not dimensioned, as approximate.

Inform the Consultant of a conflicting installation. Install as directed.

1.14 FASTENINGS

Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish as adjacent materials, unless indicated otherwise.

Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals and materials.

Use non-corroding hot dip galvanized steel fasteners and anchors for securing exterior work, unless stainless steel or other material is specifically requested in the affected specification Section.

of 596





Space anchors within their load limit or shear capacity and ensure they provide positive

permanent anchorage. Wood, or any other organic material plugs are not acceptable.

Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space evenly and install neatly.

Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are not acceptable.

Powder actuated, ram setting or similar techniques will not be permitted without the prior written approval of the Consultant.

1.15 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS

Adequately protect work completed or in progress with suitable protective coverings. Work damaged or defaced due to failure in providing such protection shall be removed and replaced, or repaired, as directed by the Consultant, at no increase in Contract Price.

Protect work during periods of suspension, regardless of reason for suspension.

Prevent overloading of any part of the building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve any load bearing structural member, unless specifically indicated without written approval of Consultant.

1.16 EXISTING UTILITIES

When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute work at times directed by local governing authorities, with a minimum of disturbance to the Work, building occupants, and pedestrian and vehicular traffic.

Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When services are encountered, cap off in a manner approved by the authority having jurisdiction, stake and record location of capped service.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596



01 73 00 – EXECUTION


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING

Before cutting, drilling or sleeving load-bearing elements, obtain approval of location and

method.

Do not endanger work or property by cutting, digging, or similar activities. No trade shall cut or alter the work of another trade who has installed it unless approved by that trade.

Cut and drill with true smooth edge to minimum suitable tolerances.

Fit construction tightly to ducts, pipes and conduit to stop air movement completely. The

trade performing work that penetrates a fire, air, vapour, moisture, thermal or acoustic separation element of the building shall pack voids tightly with insulation, rated where required; seal air, vapour and moisture barriers; and caulk joints as may be required to ensure that no air movement through the penetration is possible.

Cutting, drilling and sleeving of work shall be done only by the trade who has installed it.

The trade requiring drilling and sleeving shall inform the trade performing the work of the location and other requirements for drilling and sleeving. The Contractor shall directly supervise performance of cutting and patching.

Replace and/or make good damaged work.

Patching or replacement of damaged work shall be done by the subcontractor under

whose work it was originally executed, and at the expense of the subcontractor who caused the damage.

1.2 CONCEALMENT

Conceal all pipes and wiring in finished areas except where indicated otherwise. This

includes new work in existing building.

Where furring out is required, use material similar to adjacent surfaces except where indicated otherwise.

All new horizontal runs of ducts, pipes and conduits shall be concealed in ceiling spaces.

All new pipe and conduit drops and risers shall be buried in walls. New devices in walls shall be recessed.

1.3 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Mechanical and Electrical services must be temporarily capped or terminated to permit renovation in existing areas to proceed.

of 596



01 73 00 – EXECUTION


Cutting of holes up to 100mm in size in the existing structure and surfaces required by the trades shall be by those Subcontractors. Cutting and patching of openings greater than 100mm in size shall be by the Contractor in co-ordination with the trades. PATCHING OF ALL HOLES IN EXPOSED FINISHED SURFACES SHALL BE BY THE CONTRACTOR. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall do their own coring of existing slabs as required.

1.4 GENERAL NOTES

Refer to the Room Finish Schedule, and the general notes below.

Junction of different floor finishes shall occur on centre line of doors.

All masonry and drywall shall be extended to u/s steel deck or slab above, unless noted

otherwise. Where walls run parallel and under OWSJs the OWSJs shall be enclosed both sides with gypsum board to provide sound barrier between rooms. Fill with minimum 100 mm batt insulation.

H.M. doors and frames shall be prepared for card access devices and handicapped door

operators.

END OF SECTION

of 596



01 74 00 – CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances, anti-pollution

laws, and recommendations of Construction Safety Association.

Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily.

Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.

Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.

Provide instructions designating proper methods and materials to be used in final cleaning of Work.

Do not burn any rubble, waste or packaging, or surplus materials. No dumping of waste,

such as oil or paint, into sewers will be permitted. 1.2 MATERIALS

Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned, and

as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

1.3 POLLUTION CONTROL .1 Cover dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris.

Prevent dust nuisance to existing building and general public by taking appropriate

pollution control measures as directed by Consultant.

1.4 FIRES

Fires and burning of rubbish on Site are not permitted.

1.5 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION

Maintain entire site and adjoining municipal and/or private property free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish. Do not allow rubbish to accumulate in work under construction or on roofs. Clean site daily.

Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials, and rubbish. Empty containers on a regular basis in conformance with Municipal and Provincial Regulations.

of 596





Cleaning operations shall include those areas used for temporary site access or used on a temporary basis to facilitate the Work.

Broom clean and vacuum areas as required for application of finishes. Continue to clean

on an “as needed” basis and insure that areas which receive paint, floor tile and other critical finishes are kept dry, dust free, and at acceptable temperatures.

Keep all areas of the Work clean and orderly, free from accumulation of dirt, debris,

garbage, oily rags, excess material, or such other trash items. Remove such items from all areas of the Work on a daily basis.

Vacuum and/or broom interior building areas when ready to receive painting and other finishes. Continue cleaning on an “as needed” basis until the building is ready for inspection and take-over.

Schedule cleaning operations so that resulting dust and other contaminants do not affect

wet, newly painted surfaces, or newly installed equipment, or devices. 1.6 CLEANING AT COMPLETION OF WORK

In addition to the progressive removal of rubbish from the entire building and Site, and

leaving the buildings broom clean, the Contractor shall perform the following work in preparation for Substantial Performance.

Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from all exposed interior and exterior finishes, including glass and other polished surfaces. Clean glass both sides, and replace broken glass. Vacuum inside all cabinets and drawers and leave millwork ready for use. Remove paint spots and smears from all surfaces, including hardware.

Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorated work, electrical and mechanical fixtures, and the like. Remove protective materials.

Remove all protective film from switchplates and hardware, particularly kick plates. Clean hardware, aluminum, stainless steel and the like.

Clean resilient wall base.

Clean lighting reflectors, lenses and other lighting surfaces.

Replace heating, ventilation and/or air conditioning filters at Substantial Performance,

whether or not the units were operated during construction operations.

Vacuum clean all building interiors affected by construction operations before occupancy.

Broom clean paved surfaces and rake clean other disturbed surfaces in the area of the Work, to remove site debris caused by the Work of this Contract. Inspect for damages and make good.

Clean exterior walkways, driveways and the like.

of 596





Conduct final inspection of interior and exterior surfaces, and concealed spaces.

Leave premises ready for immediate occupation without further cleaning, all to the

Consultant's approval.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596



01 77 00 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES


PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 TAKEOVER PROCEDURE

Subject to detailed instructions included in these specifications, conform to OAA/OGCA

document 100, Take-Over Procedures.

1.2 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

Review occupancy with the building inspector well in advance of required occupancy date, and ensure that the requirements are met for occupancy, including all document submissions. Refer also to Section 01 41 00, Regulatory Requirements.

An occupancy permit is required for any project that is not deemed complete prior to the date of occupancy.

Refer to OBC Division C, section 1.3.3, Occupancy of Buildings, for occupancy requirements. The designated building official is required to issue an occupancy permit only under the conditions outlined therein.

In addition to the OBC requirements for occupancy, the spaces must be complete for the

purposes of occupancy by the Owner.

The issue of an occupancy permit shall not imply Substantial Performance of the Contract. Determination of Substantial Performance is defined by lien legislation.

1.3 ACTION REQUIRED AT OCCUPANCY

When of the opinion that the Occupancy Requirements have been met, perform an

inspection of the work, accompanied by the major subcontractors. Submit an inspection report, confirming that the occupancy requirements have been met, to the Consultant and the Owner.

Arrange for and pay related fee for all necessary inspections required for occupancy such as Hydro, Fire Department and Building Department.

Confirm with the building inspector that the occupancy requirements of the municipality have been met, and submit evidence of such to the Consultant and Owner.

Next, arrange for a review of the Work with the Consultants and Owner. The Consultant

will determine whether the Work is Fit for Occupancy.

Request letters confirming General Review from Consultant, and Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Engineers, for submission to Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

of 596





Upon receipt of the required documents, confirm that occupancy of the Work is accepted by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Submit evidence of the permission for occupancy to the Consultant and Owner.

When partial occupancy of uncompleted project is required by the Owner, co-ordinate the Owner’s uses, requirements and access with the construction requirements to complete project.

1.4 ACTION REQUIRED AT SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE

Perform the actions listed below prior to issue of the Certificate of Substantial

Performance of the Contract.

Submit the documents and material detailed in section 01 78 00, Closeout Submittals. Deliver all required submittals to the Consultant for approval PRIOR to Substantial Performance of the Work. Final payment will not be made until all these items have been received and approved.

Prior to applying for a Certificate of Substantial Performance, perform an inspection in accordance with OAA/OGCA Document 100, Stage 2, Contractor’s Inspection for Substantial Performance. Submit a copy of the deficiency list to the Consultant.

Ensure all sub-systems ie fire alarm, security, E.M.S., are fully operational prior to

Substantial Performance.

When of the opinion that the requirements for Substantial Performance have been met, submit an application for a Certificate of Substantial Performance to the Consultant. The application shall be as outline for Stage 3 of the OAA/OGCA Take-Over Procedures.

Expedite and complete deficiencies and defects identified by the Consultant. Final

Certificate for Payment will not be issued until all deficiencies are satisfactorily corrected, inspected, and approved by the Consultant, and all documentation has been handed to the Consultant.

Remove all protection erected, and make good all damage to the Work and adjoining

Work due to the lack or failure of such protection. In addition, all debris, surplus materials tools equipment shall be removed from the work areas and the site, and the Project shall be left clean and tidy to the full and complete satisfaction of the Consultant and Owner.

Perform final adjustment of Cash Allowance, specified in Section 01 10 00, General

Instructions.

At time of Substantial Performance, instruct the Owner’s personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of equipment and systems, using operation and maintenance manuals as the basis for instruction.

Prior to final site review, start up and demonstrate operation of all systems to the Owner

and the Consultant.

Review cash allowances in relation to contract price, change orders, hold-backs and other contract price adjustments.

of 596





Review inspection and testing reports to verify conformance to the intent of the

documents.

Review condition of all equipment, which has been used in the course of the Work to ensure turnover at completion in “as new condition” with warranties, dated and certified from time of Substantial Performance of the Contract.

When partial occupancy of uncompleted project is required by the Owner, co-ordinate the

Owner’s uses, requirements and access with the construction requirements to complete project.

Provide on-going review, inspection, and attendance to building call back, maintenance

and repair problems during the warranty periods.

Continue to submit monthly deficiency status reports, as specified in Section 01 32 00, Construction Progress Documentation.

1.5 TOTAL PERFORMANCE

Upon completion of all items noted on the deficiency list, clean all areas, surfaces, and

components affected by corrections and completion of deficient items.

Ensure that all services, equipment, and apparatus are properly tested and adjusted.

Letter of Completion:

.1 Submit a Letter of Completion to the Consultant stating that the Contract is complete, that all deficiencies identified by the Consultant, Subconsultants, Inspectors and Owner have been rectified, and requesting final reviews by Consultant and Subconsultants.

.2 Sign and return deficiency lists, issued by Consultant and Subconsultants, to confirm completion of all deficiencies identified thereon.

Final Site Review: .1 Consultant will conduct one site review for Total Performance, within ten (10)

working days of the request by the Contractor. Should the Contractor fail to provide the Letter of Completion, the Consultants will be under no obligation to perform a site review within the above noted time.

.2 Additional site reviews, as requested by the Contractor or as necessitated due to the Contractor's failure to complete work as required, shall be paid for by the Contractor at a rate of $500 per visit, per consultant, plus the cost to prepare additional site review reports at per diem rates (rates as recommended by the OAA or PEO, or as negotiated in advance).

Submit a final request for payment, incorporating all approved changes to the Contract price, and adjustments to the Cash Allowance.

of 596





Final Certificate for Payment will not be authorized until all deficiencies are satisfactorily corrected, reviewed and signed off by the Consultant, and required submittals have been completely and accurately provided.

1.6 WARRANTY PERIOD

The Warranty Period on this Project will expire twelve (12) months from the date of

Substantial Performance of the Work, except for extended warranties as called for throughout the Specifications or equipment not certified by Consultant at time of Substantial Performance.

END OF SECTION

of 596



01 78 00 – CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED FOR OCCUPANCY

Refer to Section 01 41 00, Regulatory Requirements for documents required to be

submitted to Authorities having Jurisdiction, for occupancy.

1.2 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED AT SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE

Prior to Substantial Performance of the Contract, perform the actions detailed in section 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures, and submit the following documents and materials:

.1 Deficiency list prepared by Contractor for all areas of the project. .2 Certificates of good standing from the Workplace Safety & Insurance Board for

the Contractor and all Subcontractors .3 Operations and Maintenance Manuals, including warranties .4 One complete set of final approved Shop Drawings (bound separately) indicating

corrections and changes made during fabrication and installation, plus one digital copy of the same (on CD).

.5 Keys and construction cores

.6 Maintenance materials

.7 As-Built Documents as specified in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures

.8 Electrical panel directories (typed and mounted in panels); refer to electrical specifications.

.9 Balancing Report for Ventilation System.

.10 Inspection Certificates required by Provincial, Municipal and other authorities having jurisdiction.

Deliver all required submittals to the Consultant for approval prior to Substantial Performance of the Work. Final payment will not be made until all these items have been received and approved. These submittals include:

1.3 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

At Substantial Performance submit to Consultant two (2) printed copies, and one digital copy, of Architectural, Mechanical, and Electrical Operations Data and Maintenance Manuals made up as follows: .1 Bind printed data in vinyl hard covered, three-ring loose leaf binder for 212.5mm

x 275mm (8-1/2" x 11") size paper. .2 Enclose title sheet, labelled "Operation Data and Maintenance Manual -

Architectural", project name, date and list of contents. Enclose similar sheet labelled Mechanical and Electrical in applicable manuals. Include the following information:

.1 name of project .2 name of Owner

of 596





.3 name of Consultant

.4 name of Contractor

.5 date of Substantial Performance.

.3 Organize contents into applicable sections of work to parallel project specification break-down. Mark each section by labelled tabs protected with celluloid covers fastened to hard paper dividing sheets.

.4 All data related to a section of work or product shall be grouped together, except for shop drawings, unless otherwise requested by the Owner. Confirm method of organization with Owner prior to assembling manuals. Typically, each section shall be organized, as applicable, as follows: .1 General information; identify section of work, subcontractor(s)

responsible .2 Warranty .3 Guarantees, Bonds .4 Schedules (hardware, paint) .5 Product data sheets .6 Material safety data sheets (MSDS) .7 Operating manual .8 Maintenance instructions .9 Receipts for maintenance materials, keys, etc., .10 Maintenance contracts (applicable to elevator, wheelchair lift, planting,

sod, etc.) .11 Inspection and testing reports

Provide one copy of each of the following in the first binder:

.1 Contractor’s final statutory declaration on CCDC form 9A-2001

.2 Major Subcontractor’s final statutory declarations on CCDC form 9B-2001

.3 Workers' Compensation and Insurance Board (WSIB) certificate

.4 certificates of approval of the work by the Building Department (if available)

Provide a memory stick containing all construction progress photos submitted; refer to Section 01 32 00. Provide an index with printed images clearly identified with name of project, description of view and date taken. Disks are to be clearly labelled.

Include the following information, plus any additional data required within the specifications. .1 List of all Subcontractors, major suppliers, and local equipment service

representatives, their addresses and telephone numbers. .2 Date of Substantial Performance (commencement of warranty periods) and

termination dates of warranties. .3 Operating manuals including lubricating, repair and other instructions to keep all

mechanical and electrical/electronic equipment in good working order. Reviewed shop drawings of same. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Specifications for further requirements.

.4 Door and Frame Schedule (as-built); insert in front of Division 08 section in manuals.

.5 Final hardware schedule, revised to include all changes during construction, including local manufacturer's descriptive and service literature. Include AHC’s final inspection report.

.6 Final finish/colour schedule; insert in front of Division 09 section in manuals.

of 596





.7 Provide paint schedule indicating paint brand and formulas used.

.8 Maintenance instructions for all types of floor finish and other special finishes. Include instructions for cleaning, repairing, refinishing and freshening, and warnings of damaging or dangerous practices where necessary.

.9 Maintenance and service instructions and manufacturer's literature for all special architectural features: i.e. windows, patent glazing, handicapped lift etc.

.10 Description, operations and maintenance instructions for equipment and systems, including complete list of equipment and parts list.

.11 All warranties, guarantees, bonds, etc., properly completed and signed, which extend beyond the general warranty period, for all work and equipment as specified or as otherwise supplied and installed, from manufacturers and trades. Warranties, guarantees and bonds shall include: .1 Name and address of project. .2 Warranty commencement date. .3 Duration of warranty. .4 Clear indication of what is being warranted and what remedial action will

be taken under warranties. .5 Signature and seal of Contractor.

List additional material used in project showing name of manufacturer and source of

supply.

Neatly type lists and notes. Use clear drawings, diagrams or manufacturer's literature.

Supply copies of inspection and testing reports, inspection and acceptance certificates, balancing reports, all bound in all three copies of manuals.

Supply Operations and Maintenance manuals, and other required documentation as

specified for Mechanical and Electrical work.

Manuals must bear seal and signature of Contractor.

Maintenance Manuals must be delivered, complete and in one package, to Consultant. The final Certificate for payment will not be issued until ALL documentation has been received, reviewed, and approved, by Consultant.

Due to the high value to the Owner of these manuals, for the purpose of project

administration and calculation of Substantial Performance, the manuals will be assigned a value of $1,500.00 (architectural / mechanical / electrical).

1.4 SHOP DRAWING MANUAL

Provide one complete set of final approved Shop Drawings, bound separately. Shop

drawings shall be the drawings reviewed and stamped by the consultants. Mark-up shop drawings to indicate corrections and changes made during fabrication and installation.

Provide a complete set of the same documents in digital format also.

Refer to the Index to Shop Drawing Manual included in the Appendix to this Project Manual.

of 596





1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

Where supply of maintenance materials is specified, deliver items as follows:

.1 Materials in unbroken cartons or, if not supplied in cartons, they shall be strongly packaged.

.2 Clearly mark as to content.

.3 If applicable give colour, room number of area where material used.

.4 Obtain signed receipt from the Owner’s designated representative and store in an assigned, lockable room.

Copies of signed receipts for maintenance materials are to be included in the maintenance manuals.

Replacement materials are for the sole use of the Owner and must not be used by Contractor to replace deficient work.

1.6 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND RECORD DOCUMENTS

Provide As-Built Drawings, as specified in Section 01 33 00, and Record Documents

(electronic files).

Prior to the date of Substantial Performance, request updated drawings from the Consultant. Transfer all “as-built” markups from the on-site drawings to these updated drawings and return them to the Consultant for preparation of architectural Record Drawings.

Record documents shall consist of the original documents altered to reflect all changes and information indicated on as-built documents.

Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Specification Divisions for specific requirements

regarding preparation and submission of final mechanical and electrical Record Drawings.

1.7 REVIEW OF MANUALS BY CONSULTANT

Submit all manuals for review by the Consultant. Mechanical and electrical manuals may

be forwarded directly to the consulting engineers for review. The Contractor is responsible for confirming the completion of the manuals prior to

forwarding to the Consultant for review. If any items are outstanding, provide tabs at the appropriate locations and indicate the nature of the outstanding documents to be inserted.

Do not submit partially complete manuals to the Consultant; only documents which cannot be provided at the time of Substantial Performance are permitted to be flagged for later insertion. The Consultant will review manuals once for completion and will then review only one resubmission. If additional reviews are required, the Contractor will be invoiced for the Consultant’s time at a rate of $180/hour.

END OF SECTION

of 596



01 82 19 – FIRE RATING AND ASSEMBLIES


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

Test methods used to determine fire hazard classification and fire endurance rating shall be as required by Ontario Building Code.

Upon request, furnish the Consultant with evidence of compliance to fire protection requirements as noted in documents or specified codes, etc.

Materials and components used to construct fire rated assemblies and materials requiring

fire hazard classification shall be listed and labelled, or otherwise approved, by fire rating authority. Labelled materials and their packaging shall bear fire rating authorities label showing product classification.

Construct fire rated assemblies in accordance with applicable fire test report information

issued by fire rating authority. Deviation from fire test report will not be allowed.

Construct fire rated assemblies as continuous, uninterrupted elements except for permitted openings. Extend fire rated walls and partitions from floor to underside of structural deck above.

Materials which have a fire hazard classification shall be applied or installed in

accordance with fire rating authority’s printed instructions.

Provide firestopping as specified in Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping and Smoke Seals. .1 Firestopping shall be a tested system consisting of non-combustible materials,

smoke sealant, and means of support, used to fill gaps between fire-rated separations or between fire separations and other assemblies, and used around items that penetrate a fire separation.

.2 Fill and patch voids and gaps around openings and penetrations in and at perimeter of assemblies so as to maintain continuity and to produce a fire resistant, smoke tight seal, acceptable to jurisdictional authorities.

Provide fire blocks to compartmentalize concealed spaces as required by the OBC.

.1 Fire block means a material, component or system that restricts the spread of fire within a concealed space or from a concealed space to an adjacent space.

.2 Fire blocks are also referred to as fire stops in the OBC.

The Contractor shall ensure that all fire safety features called for in the Contract Documents are supplied and installed to meet fire safety standards established by those authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall ensure that the work of Subcontractors is properly coordinated to achieve the intent of this Specification.

Nothing contained in the Drawings or Specifications shall be construed as to be in conflict with any law, by-law, or regulations of municipal, provincial, or other authorities having jurisdiction. Work shall be performed in conformity with all such laws, by-laws, and regulations.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596


DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 40 00 – DEMOLITION


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK

Temporary Barriers and Controls Section 01 56 00 Execution Section 01 73 00

1.2 REFERENCES

Conform to all laws, By-Laws and regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction and, in particular, the Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act; The Environmental Protection Act; The Ontario Building Code, Ontario Regulation 332/12; The Ontario Fire Code; The National Building Code, 2010; and the National Fire Code.

CSA S350-M, code of practice for safety in demolition of structures.

Ontario regulations under the Environmental Protection Act: .1 O.Reg. 102/94 Waste Audits and Waste Reduction Work Plans .2 O.Reg. 103/94 Industrial, Commercial and Institutional Source Separation

Programs .3 O.Reg. 347/90 General - Waste Management; refer to "Definitions"

Ontario regulations under the Occupational Health and Safety Act:

.1 O.Reg. 213/91 Construction Projects

.2 All regulations regarding “Designated Substances”

.3 O.Reg. 860/90 Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)

Conform to “Guidelines for Maintaining Fire Safety During Construction in Existing Buildings”, provided by the Office of the Ontario Fire Marshal.

RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings 1.3 EXAMINATION OF EXISTING SITE AND STRUCTURE

Examine the existing site and building before tendering to be familiar with the detailed

extent of demolition, dismantling, relocation and reassembly required.

Examine all drawings and include all costs associated with scheduling of the work, including after-hours work and remobilization costs. All demolition work and removal of construction debris and items to be disposed of off-site is to occur before or after building operation hours. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to become familiar with the building’s hours of operation.

No allowance will be made for failure to obtain complete information prior to close of

tenders. No claims by the General Contractor will be entertained with regards to payments related to overtime work.

of 596





1.4 SUMMARY OF WORK

Carry out all alteration and demolition work required to accommodate new work indicated

on drawings. Make good any damage caused by alterations required.

Remove HVAC equipment, electrical fixtures and all other items so noted on drawings as required for the addition, unless otherwise noted.

Unless noted otherwise, building materials resulting from demolition under this contract shall become the property of the Contractor, and shall be removed by the Contractor.

Supply and install temporary dust proof partitions at junctions with work area, as

indicated on the drawings. Dust proof partitions shall be erected outside of the building’s operating hours and shall remain in place until the work is fully commissioned and accepted by the Owner.

1.5 SCHEDULE OF WORK

.1 Safety and required exiting from the existing building must be maintained at all times,

particularly during operating hours and scheduled events. Work must be suspended if the Owner advises that construction work that results in excessive noise, dust, vibration or odour is interfering with the building operation.

.2 Any construction work that results in excessive noise, dust, vibration or odour and in such negatively disrupts the activities occurring in the building, is to occur before or after building operation hours.

.3 Any construction work that requires revision and/or upgrade to the building sprinklers, fire alarm and/or power and data systems, mechanical HVAC and electrical systems and any other life safety systems within any part of the building is to occur before or after building operation hours.

Dust proof partitions must be installed prior to any work being undertaken.

Refer to drawings for scope of work.

The General Contractor must complete the work within the timeline of the described project schedule. If the described schedule is not sufficient to permit completion of the work by the Contractor within regular daytime work hours each day or week on a single shift basis, it is expected that additional shifts will be provided throughout the life of the contract to the extent deemed necessary by the Contractor to ensure that the work will be completed within the time limit specified. Any additional costs endured by compliance with these provisions is considered to be included in the prices bid for the various items of work and no additional compensation will be accepted in this regard.

of 596





1.6 PROTECTION

Protect adjacent properties against damage which might occur from falling debris or other cause. Make good damage to adjacent public or private properties resulting from Work of this Contract.

Protect existing building from damage and contamination during demolition activities. Provide temporary barriers, dust control measures, security controls, supports, and such additional protection as may be required by specific demolition work.

Provide dust screens to limit spread of dust generated during demolition operations. Refer to drawings for location of dust screens. Install additional dust screens as required between the area of work and the main public/occupied areas of the building.

Prevent movement, settlement, and damage to existing building to remain, including services, paving, landscaped areas to remain, and adjacent structures. Provide temporary supports, including shoring and bracing, as required. All shoring must be designed by a professional engineer licensed in the Province of Ontario.

Employ licensed rodent and vermin exterminators to destroy all discovered vermin and rodents.

Remove contaminated and dangerous material from the site and dispose of safely and

legally. Meet all M.O.E. requirements.

Take precautions to guard against movement or settlement of adjacent land, existing building, and remaining services and utilities. Provide and place bracing or other means of support.

Take precaution against contamination of air and adjacent properties.

1.7 MAINTAINING FIRE SAFETY IN EXISTING BUILDING

Maintain all required exiting for safe operations within the existing building. Where an exit is closed off due to construction activities, provide alternate exit acceptable to both the Consultant and to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Any temporary exits must be clearly identified with appropriate signage.

Maintain access roadways for fire department vehicles, acceptable to the fire department. Access must be approved prior to commencement of construction activities.

Store all combustible materials in accordance with the Fire Code and the Occupational Health and Safety Act. Do not store combustible materials within the existing building or against the building. All combustibles shall be stored in a manner which minimizes risks to building and occupants.

Maintain dust proof partitions and protection at openings, as specified above, with fire

separation ratings as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

of 596





.5 Maintain fire alarm system in operating condition in existing building. Notify the fire department and Owner of any temporary shutdowns of service and provide alternative measures during such periods of time.

Coordinate with Owner and Authorities Having Jurisdiction for all changes to fire

emergency procedures as may be required during construction. 1.8 SERVICES

Seal and cap mechanical and electrical services in order to facilitate removals indicated

on drawings. Mark location and type of service of all capped services at the site. Submit record drawing showing locations and dimensions of all capped services.

All air returns in the construction area should be blocked to prevent the spread of dust and odours.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Not Used

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

of 596





of 596





existing

END OF SECTION

of 596


DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

03 35 00 –CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING


PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTIONS INCLUDES

Finishing concrete floor surfaces.


Division 1- General Requirements. Cast in Place Concrete Refer to Structural Drawings Finish Carpentry Section 06 10 00 Waterproofing Section 07 13 00 Sealants Section 07 92 00 Ceramic Tiling Section 09 30 00

1.3 REFERENCES

ACl-302.lR-96, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.

ASTM-C171-97a, Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.

ASTM-C309-98a, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for

Curing Concrete.

CSA-A23.1/A23.2-00, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction I Methods of Test for Concrete.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Submit Product data and Shop Drawings under provisions of Section 01 33 00 -

Submittals.

Provide list of Products proposed for use on Project where such Products are not specified by trade name or where Specification permits choice or alternatives. Include descriptive manufacturer or Supplier literature.

Include application instructions for concrete curing compound.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Conform to CSA-A23.1/A23.2 and ACI 302.lR.

1.6 QUALIFICATION

Concrete Finishes Company specializing in commercial floor finishing with a minimum of

five years documented experience, approved by the Consultant.

Submit references 2 months before concrete work commences.

of 596





1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Deliver Products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Store and protect Products under provisions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Take delivery of and store packaged materials on site in original undamaged condition

with manufacturers' packing, labels and seals intact. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Temporary Lighting: Minimum one 200 W light source, placed 2.5m above the floor

surface, for each 40m2 of floor being finished.

Temporary Heat: Ambient temperature of 10 degrees C minimum.

Ventilation: Sufficient to prevent carbon monoxide or high levels of carbon dioxide and other injurious gases from affecting concrete.

Electrical Power: Sufficient to operate equipment normally used.

Work Area: Water tight protection against rain and detrimental weather conditions.

1.9 WARRENTY

Provide a warranty for the work of this section in accordance with the General Conditions

but for a period of three years.

The warranty shall cover defects in concrete floor finishing due to faults in workmanship or materials provided in this section.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Water: clean, potable and not detrimental to quality of concrete.

Concrete Materials: Conform to Cast in Place Concrete on the structural drawings.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

of 596





3.2 PREPARATION

Steel trowel concrete slabs left exposed or to receive carpeting, resilient flooring, and applied floor finishes.

Where concrete slabs are to receive ceramic tile, screed off to true lines and levels and leave ready to receive finish. Depress slabs to accommodate finish thickness.

Where floor drains occur, floors shall be level around walls with a minimum 5mm per

meter uniform pitch to drains, unless indicated otherwise. 3.3 FINISHING CONCRETE FLOORS

CURING

of 596





3.5 TOLERANCES

Exposed High Wear Resistance Surface Dense Trowelled: 6mm in 3000mm.

Exposed Smooth Non-slip Surface Trowelled and Broomed: 8mm in 3000mm.

Level concrete slab to achieve the following tolerances: .1 Under thin-set ceramic tile - 3mm in 3000mm and 1.5mm in 305mm maximum

Correct defects in the floor only by grinding or removal and replacement of the defective

slabs. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified by the Consultant. Re-measure corrected areas. Costs of corrective work shall be borne by the Contractor.

of 596





PROTECTION

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596


DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

04 05 00 – MASONRY PROCEDURES


PART 1 – GENERAL


Procedures for unit masonry work.

Procedures for incorporating products to be built into unit masonry.


General Requirements Division 01 Cast-in-Place Concrete Refer to Structural Drawings Masonry Mortar and Grout Section 04 05 13 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement Section 04 05 19 Concrete Unit Masonry Section 04 05 22 Masonry Accessories Section 04 05 23 Structural Steel Section 05 10 00 Board Insulation Section 07 21 13 Firestopping and Smoke Seals Section 07 84 00

Sealants Section 07 92 00

1.3 REFERENCES .1 CAN/CSA-A179-04(R2009) Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry .2 CAN/CSA-A371-04(R2009) Masonry Construction for Buildings

1.4 SAMPLES

Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals.

Submit samples:

.1 One of each type of masonry unit specified.

.2 One of each type of masonry accessory specified.

.3 One of each type of masonry reinforcement, tie and connector proposed for use.

.4 As required by inspection and testing company for testing purposes. 1.5 TEST REPORTS

Submit laboratory test reports in accordance with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.

Submit laboratory test reports certifying compliance of masonry units and mortar

ingredients with specification requirements.

For clay units, in addition to requirements set out in referenced CSA and ASTM Standards include data indicating initial rate of absorption.

of 596





1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND JOB MOCK-UP

Masonry work shall be carried out by experienced masons under the continuous

supervision of a competent foreman with a minimum of 5 years’ experience with work of similar size and complexity.

Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Construct mock-up panel stepped-back to expose each material used.

Construct mock-up panel of exterior masonry wall construction 1600mm high by 2400mm wide showing masonry colours and textures, use of reinforcement, ties, through-wall flashing, air barrier membrane, insulation, weep holes, vent holes, jointing, coursing, mortar and workmanship.

Construct mock-up panel where directed by the Consultant.

Allow 48 hours for inspection of mock-up panel by the Consultant before proceeding with work.

When accepted, mock-ups will demonstrate minimum standard for this work. The approved mock-up panels may remain as part of the finished work.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Deliver materials to job site in dry condition.

Keep materials dry until use except where wetting of bricks is specified.

Store under waterproof cover on pallets or plank platforms held off ground by means of plank or timber skids.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Cold Weather Requirements: Supplement Clause 5.16.2 of CAN/CSA-A371 with following requirements: .1 Maintain temperature of mortar between 5°C and 50°C until batch is used. .2 Protect masonry work from cold weather in accordance with clause 5.16.3 of

CAN/CSA-A371, but for a minimum of 72 hours after construction.

Hot Weather Requirements: Protect freshly laid masonry from drying too rapidly, by means of waterproof, non-staining coverings.

Keep masonry dry using waterproof, non-staining coverings that extend over walls and

down sides sufficient to protect walls from wind driven rain, until masonry work is completed and protected by flashings or other permanent construction.

of 596





Protect masonry and other work from marking and other damage. Protect completed

work from mortar droppings. Use non-staining coverings.

Provide temporary bracing of masonry work during and after erection until permanent lateral support is in place.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Masonry materials are specified in related Sections indicated in Article 1.03. PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Do masonry work in accordance with CAN/CSA-A371 except where specified otherwise.

Build masonry plumb, level, and true to line, with vertical joints in alignment.

Layout coursing and bond to achieve correct coursing heights, and continuity of bond

above and below openings, with minimum of cutting.

Extend walls and partitions to underside of deck or slab unless noted otherwise on Drawings.

Construct portions of walls and partitions above doors, screens, windows and other openings to match adjacent wall and partition construction unless noted otherwise on Drawings.

Refer to Structural Drawing for load-bearing masonry structural requirements.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION

Exposed Masonry: Remove chipped, cracked, and otherwise damaged units in exposed masonry and replace with undamaged units.

Jointing: .1 Allow joints to set just enough to remove excess water, then tool with round

jointer to provide smooth, true to line, compressed, uniformly concave joints unless other jointing is indicated or specified.

.2 Where raked joints are indicated allow joints to set just enough to remove excess water, then rake joints uniformly to 6mm depth and compress with square tool to provide smooth, compressed, raked joints of uniform depth.

of 596





.3 Strike flush all joints concealed in walls and joints in walls to receive plaster, tile, insulation, or other applied material except paint or similar thin finish coating.

.4 Wall surfaces and joint treatment for concealed portions of walls above ceilings and behind wall mounted fitments shall match exposed surfaces.

Cutting:

.1 Cut out for electrical switches, outlet boxes, and other recessed or built-in objects.

.2 Make cuts straight, clean, and free from uneven edges.

Building-In: .1 Build in items required to be built into masonry. .2 Prevent displacement of built-in items during construction. Check for plumb,

location and alignment frequently, as work progresses. .3 Where structural steel members penetrate masonry walls fill-in spaces with

neatly cut pieces of masonry units set in event mortar beds with tooled joints. Do not use rubble or broken pieces and mortar combinations as in-fill.

Wetting of Bricks: .1 Except in cold weather, wet bricks having an initial rate of absorption exceeding

1g/minute/1000mm², wet to uniform degree of saturation, 3 to 24 hours before laying, and do not lay until surface dry.

.2 Wet tops of walls built of bricks qualifying for wetting, when recommencing work on such walls.

Support of Loads: .1 Use concrete specified in Section 03 30 00 –Cast-in-Place Concrete, where

concrete fill is used instead of solid units. .2 Use grout to CAN/CSA-A179 where grout is used instead of solid units. Cells

with reinforcement shall be grouted. .3 Install building paper below voids to be filled with concrete or grout; keep paper

25mm back from faces of units.

Provision for Movement: .1 Leave 10mm space below shelf angles. .2 Leave 25mm space between top of non-load bearing walls and partitions and

structural elements. Do not use wedges. .3 Build masonry to tie in with stabilizers, with provision for vertical movement.

Loose Steel Lintels: Install loose steel lintels supplied by Section 05 10 00 – Structural

Steel Framing. Centre over opening width.

Bearing Plates and Anchors: Install loose steel bearing plates and anchors supplied by Section 05 10 00 - Structural Steel Framing.

Control Joints for Non-loadbearing Masonry Walls:

.1 Construct continuous full height control joints as indicated.

.2 Fill void at control joint with 20 MPa concrete grout to form continuous key.

.3 Locate exterior wall control joints as indicated on elevations.

of 596





.4 Locate interior wall control joints at a maximum spacing of 6000mm, and where

non-loadbearing walls meet loadbearing walls.

Provide control joints in loadbearing masonry walls only at locations approved by the structural consultant or where shown on Structural Drawings.

Expansion Joints: Build-in continuous expansion joints as indicated.

3.3 SITE TOLERANCES

Tolerances in notes to Clause 5.3 of CAN/CSA-A371 apply.

3.4 RE-INSTALLATION

Cut openings in existing work as indicated. Openings in walls to be approved by Consultant. Make good existing work. Use materials to match existing.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Inspection and testing of masonry work will be carried out by an inspection and testing company designated by the Consultant.

Cost of masonry inspection and testing will be paid by the Owner.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596



04 05 13 – MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT


PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Mortar for Unit Masonry


1. General Requirements Division 01 2. Cast in Place Concrete Refer to Structural Drawings 3. Masonry Procedures Section 04 05 13 4. Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement Section 04 05 19 5. Concrete Unit Masonry Section 04 05 22

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 CAN/CSA A179 Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry .2 CAN/CSA A371 Masonry Construction for Buildings .3 CSA A3000 Cementitious Materials Compendium .4 ASTM C 780 Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction

Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry .5 ASTM C 1357 Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength

1.4 SAMPLES .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures .2 Submit two 75mm size samples of each mortar type and colour.


Mortar prepared on-site based on proportion specifications: .1 Prior to the commencement of masonry work prepared on-site, under the

supervision of the inspection and testing company, mortar mixes for each mortar type specified.

.2 The inspection and testing company will sample and test the mortar mixes to determine a site aggregate/cement ratio Control Value for each mortar type.

.3 Once Site Control Values are established these will form the basis of acceptance for all subsequent Sample Ratio Tests conducted during the course of the work.

Mortar prepared off-site based on property specifications:

.1 Prior to the commencement of masonry work the inspection and testing company will sample and perform laboratory test for each mortar type prepared off-site to verify compliance with the specifications.

.2 Testing shall consist of the determination of: .1 Aggregate/cement ratio. .2 Water retention.

of 596





.3 Compressive strength. .4 Air Content .3 Once acceptable values are established these will form the basis of acceptance

for tests conducted during the course of the work.

Arrange for representative of mortar manufacturer to meet with mason on site prior to commencement of masonry work, to review proper mixing procedures of mortar. Mixing must conform to instructions from supplier of pre-mixed mortar materials.

Submit test data as specified below.

1.6 COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS

During cold weather, lower than 5oC, when danger of freezing exists, heat all masonry materials using methods accepted in the industry, in conformance to CSA-A371, and approved by the Consultant.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

Submit three (3) copies of performance data sheet for mortar mixtures. Indicate related standards and mortar properties in terms of compressive strength, water retention and air content. Provide all test certificates required for mortar mixture lots delivered to site.

1.8 WARRANTY

Mason shall warrant that only mortar containing integral water-repellent mortar admixture, added at the manufacturer’s recommended rate, has been placed in exterior concrete masonry walls.

1.9 TESTING

Testing of mortar materials will be carried out by Testing Laboratory designated by

Consultant.

Inspection and testing to be paid by Owner.

Submit samples of sand and water for testing to ensure that mortar will not produce efflorescence.

Test for compliance with the performance requirements for integral mortar water-

repellence. Mortar shall be capable of achieving a Class E Rating when evaluated using ASTM E 514 with the test extended to 72 hours, using the rating criteria specified in ASTM E 514.

Perform compressive strength tests on all mortar and grout in accordance with the

requirements of CSA S304.1. Compressive strengths must conform to the property specifications of CSA-A179.

of 596





Perform tests for flexural bond strength of masonry in accordance CSA S304.1. Flexural bond strengths shall not be less than 0.20MPa, in conformance with CSA-A179.

PART 2 – MATERIAL

2.1 MATERIALS

Sand: fine grain aggregate, graded in accordance with CSA A179 Water: potable, free off ice and any contaminants, to CSA A179. Portland cement: to CAN/CSA-A5 normal Type 10 Hydrated lime: type ‘S’, in accordance with ASTM C207

2.2 MORTER

Mortar: .1 Betomix Plus by Daubois or bulk preblended silo mix as supplied by Max-Mix, or

equal approved by Consultant. Colourants to be premixed with mortar materials. Colour to be selected by Consultant.

Mortars for clay brick and concrete unit masonry to be Portland cement/ hydrated lime/ sand mortars to the property standards of CSA A179. Colour to be selected by consultant to match the selected clay brick.

Mortar for masonry foundations, load bearing walls and partitions to be Type ‘S’ as per

property specifications of CSA A179.

Mortar for non-load bearing walls and partitions to be Type ‘N’ as per property specifications of CSA A179, unless indicated otherwise on the Structural Drawings.

Compressive strengths of mortars shall conform to the values indicated on Tables 8 and

9, for solid brick and concrete block respectively, of CSA Standard A179. Compressive strength of mortars must not exceed the compressive strength of the masonry units with which they are being used.

Except where specified otherwise, the basis of acceptance for mortar prepared on-site

shall be the proportion specifications in CAN/CSA-A179

The basis of acceptance for mortar prepared off-site shall be the property specifications in CAN/CSA-A179

2.3 GROUT

Grout: .1 Coarse grout to CSA A179, with maximum aggregate size of 12.5mm.

of 596





.2 Use fine grout where least dimension of void is less than 50mm. .3 All grout to CSA A179, with sufficient water to produce pouring consistency

without segregation of ingredients, but to retain cohesiveness. .4 Slump is to be 200mm to 250mm. Minimum compressive strength is to be 20

Mpa. Refer to structural drawings for additional grout requirements at reinforcing steel.

2.4 SOURCES

Use same manufactured brands and sources of mortar materials for entire project, in order to ensure uniformity of mix and coloration.

2.5 PARGING

Cement mortar parging: 1 part cement, 1 part lime to 6 parts sand by volume with sufficient water for a trowelable mix.


3.1 CONSTRUCTION .1 Do masonry mortar work in accordance with CAN/CSA-A179 except where specified

otherwise.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 As masonry work progresses, the inspection and testing company will test and report on

mortar properties as follows: .1 Mortar prepared in accordance with proportion specifications: Aggregate/Cement ratio. .2 Mortar prepared in accordance with property specifications: compressive strength. .2 Provide six 50mm by 50mm by 50mm mortar samples taken at random for each test

when requested by inspection and testing company.

3.3 MIXING OF MORTARS

Mason to review mixing procedures with mortar manufacturer.

Mix mortar thoroughly, in quantities only as needed for immediate use.

Mix mortar in mechanical mixer operated until homogeneously blended, but not less than 3 minutes after all materials are in mixer.

of 596





Obtain manufacturer’s approval for any additives.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596



04 05 19 – MASONRY ANCHORAGE AND REINFORCEMENT


PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Reinforcement for masonry walls and lintels .2 Connectors for masonry walls


General Requirements Division 01 Masonry Procedures Section 04 05 00 Masonry Mortar and Grout Section 04 05 13 Concrete Unit Masonry Section 04 05 22 Masonry Accessories Section 04 05 23 Structural Steel Section 05 10 00

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM-A153/A153M-95 Standard Specified for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. .2 CAN/CSA-A23.1-04 Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction. .3 CAN/CSA-A370-04 (R2009) Connectors for Masonry .4 CAN/CSA-A370-04 (R2009) Masonry Construction for Buildings .5 CAN/CSA-G30.18-M92 (R2007) Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .6 CSA-S304.1-04 Design of Masonry Structures .7 CSA-W186-M1990 (R2007) Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .1 Seismic Loads: Design size and spacing of masonry reinforcement and masonry veneer

connectors to withstand seismic loads in accordance with the Ontario Building Code, Subsection 4.1.8.

.2 Structural Design of masonry reinforcement and masonry veneer connectors shall be by a qualified Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario

1.5 SUBMITTALS

Submit product data sheets for all reinforcement types proposed for use in this project, in

accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

Include a copy of the data sheets in the shop drawing manual at the conclusion of the project.

of 596





Submit samples of anchors, ties, and fasteners for approval of Consultant.

1.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Upon request, provide the Consultant with a certified copy of mill test report of

reinforcement steel and connectors, showing physical and chemical analysis, minimum 5 weeks prior to commencing reinforcement work.

.2 Upon request inform Consultant of proposed source of material to be supplied.

1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. .2 Shop Drawings shall consist of bar bending details, lists and placing drawings. .3 On placing Drawings, indicate sizes, spacing, location and quantities of reinforcement

and connectors. .4 Shop Drawings shall bear the seal and signature of the Professional engineer providing

structural design for reinforcement and connectors.

PART 2 – MATERIAL 2.1 REINFORCEMENT

Bar reinforcement: to CAN/CSA-A371 and CAN/CSA-G30.18.

Wire Joint Reinforcement - Single Wythe Walls: to CAN/CSA-A371, ladder type, 4.76mm

diameter wire, size to suit wall thickness. .1 Blok-Lok Limited: BL-10 Ladder Reinforcement. .2 Dur-O-Wal: DA3200 Single Wythe Ladur.

.3 Corrosion Protection for Wire Joint Reinforcement: galvanized to ASTM-A153/A153M.

.1 Exterior Wall: Hot dip galvanized, Class 82, 458g/m 2 minimum coating.

.2 Interior Wall: Mill galvanized.

.3 Foundation Walls: Hot dip galvanized, Class 82, 458g/m2 minimum coating.

of 596





2.1 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate reinforcing in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1 and Reinforcing Steel Manual

of Standard Practice by the Reinforcing Steel Institute of Ontario. .2 Fabricate connectors in accordance with CAN/CSAA-370. .3 Obtain the Consultants approval for locations of reinforcement splices other than those

shown on placing drawings. .4 Upon Consultants approval, weld reinforcement in accordance with CSA-W186. .5 Ship reinforcement and connectors, clearly identified in accordance with drawings.


3.1 GENERAL .1 Do masonry connector and reinforcement work in accordance with CAN/CSA-A370,

CAN/CSA-A371, CAN/CSA-A23.1 and CSA-S304.1 unless indicated otherwise. .2 Accurately place reinforcement, support, and secure against displacement as indicated

on structural drawings and in accordance with CAN/CSA-A371 .3 Prior to placing grout, obtain Consultant’s approval of placement of reinforcement and

connectors. .4 Do additional reinforcement of masonry as indicated. .5 Supply dovetail anchor slots for casting into concrete work where required as indicated

on the structural drawings and specifications.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY ANCHORAGE AND REINFORCEMENT

Refer to Section 04 05 19 for installation of masonry anchorage and reinforcement.

Refer to structural drawings for additional requirements. All reinforcing shall conform to structural requirements as a minimum. Where structural requirements differ from these specifications, the most stringent requirements shall apply.

Note that “solid wall” describes a masonry wall consisting of 1 or more wythes of brick and/or block (which may be solid or hollow core) with mortar joint only between wythes - no air space.

Install reinforcement as indicated above for the materials specified, in conformance with

structural drawings and manufacturer’s instructions.

For single wythe interior masonry walls, truss type reinforcing is required at every second course for walls 190mm wide or less, and ladder type reinforcing is required at each course at walls wider than 190mm.

of 596





Provide and install prefabricated tees and corners at wall corners and intersections.

Install ties in accordance with Ontario Building Code.

Pre-drill for anchors using appropriate type and size of bit. Provide two anchors per tie

with minimum embedment of 25mm. Conform to manufacturers specifications.

Test at least two anchors to failure. Test must be carried out by a Professional Engineer and must certify tension load test to anchor failure. Cost of test will be paid by the Owner.

of 596





3.3 JOINT REINFORCEMENT .1 Locations of Joint Reinforcement: .1 Concrete masonry unit wythe in cavity walls. .2 Single wythe masonry walls and partitions. .2 Install joint reinforcement horizontally at 400mm on centre vertical spacing, unless

indicated otherwise. .3 Place additional reinforcement extending 600mm beyond jambs in courses 200mm,

400mm and 800mm above and below wall openings. .4 Lap joint reinforcement 300mm at splices. .5 Reinforce and grout loadbearing masonry walls as shown on the Structural Drawings.

3.4 BONDING AND TYING .1 Foundation Walls: .1 Bond foundation walls of two or more wythes with the specified wire joint reinforcement. .2 Install joint reinforcement at 400mm on centre vertical spacing, unless indicated otherwise. .2 Bond walls of two or more wythes using wire joint reinforcement and metal connectors in

accordance with the OBC, CSA-S304.1, CAN/CSA-A371 and as indicated. .3 Tie masonry veneer to backing in accordance with OBC, SCA-S304.1, CAN/SCA-A371

and as indicated. .4 Install continuous single wire brick joint reinforcement connected to brick ties.

3.5 REINFORCED LINTELS AND BOND BEAMS .1 Reinforce masonry lintels and bond beams as indicated on Structural Drawings. Make

joints in lintels and bond beams to match adjacent walls. .2 Place and grout reinforcement in accordance with CAN/CSA-A371, and the Structural

Drawings.

3.6 GROUTING .1 Grout masonry in accordance with SCA-S304.1 and as indicated on Structural Drawings.

of 596





3.7 METAL ANCHORS .1 Do metal anchor work as indicated.

3.8 LATERAL SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE .1 Do lateral support and anchorage in accordance with SCA-S304.1 and as indicated. .2 Lateral Support Anchors (for attachment to structural steel): Blok-Lok, Flex-o-Lok.

3.9 CONTROL JOINTS .1 Terminate reinforcement 25mm short of each side of control joints unless otherwise

indicated.

3.10 FIELD BENDING .1 Do not field bend reinforcement and connectors except where indicated or authorized by

the Consultant. .2 When field bending is authorized, bend without heat, applying a slow and steady

pressure. .3 Replace bars and connectors which develop cracks or splits.

3.11 FIELD TOUCH-UP .1 Touch-up damaged and cut ends of epoxy coated or galvanized reinforcement steel and

connectors with compatible finish to provide continuous coating.

END OF SECTION

of 596



04 05 22 – CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK

Masonry Mortar and Grout Section 04 05 13 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement Section 04 05 19


.1 CAN/CSA-A165 Series CSA Standards for Concrete Masonry Units .2 CAN/CSA-S304.1 Design of Masonry Structures .3 CAN/CSA-A371 Masonry construction for Buildings .4 CAN/CSA-A370 .5 National Concrete Masonry Association

1. NCMA TEK 10-2C Control Joints for Concrete Masonry Walls - Empirical Method 2. NCMA TEK-3A Control and Removal of Efflorescence 3. NCMA TEK-3A Cleaning Concrete Masonry

1.3 PROTECTION

Protect adjacent surfaces from marking or damage due to masonry work. PART 2 – MATERIAL 2.1 MATERIALS

Concrete blocks:

.1 to CAN/CSA-A165 Series, metric modular, Type H/15/A/M in concealed spaces, and H/15/D/M lightweight for exposed walls.

.2 Provide block of higher compressive strength where indicated on structural drawings.

.3 Blocks for fire rated partitions to have required percentage of solid material necessary to provide rating.

.4 Sizes as indicated on drawings.

Curing of lightweight block: .1 Autoclave or low-pressure steam curing is acceptable, provided that masonry

units comply with linear shrinkage and moisture content requirements of CSA A165.1 for type M units at time of delivery to site.

.2 Age all units, prior to delivery to site, as follows: .1 Autoclaved units: minimum 7 days. .2 Low pressure steam cured units: minimum 28 days

of 596





Special Shapes:

.1 Bond beam, lintel beam, corner and other shapes as required or indicated on drawings.

.2 Provide external corner units as a single unit, with required architectural face appearance on one side and one end.

Metal Anchors: Conforming to Ontario Building Code and Section 04 05 19.

Control Joint Filler: Blok-Lok “Exp-Joint”, closed cell neoprene expansion joint material.

2.2 EXPOSED MASONRY FACES

Notwithstanding visual inspection requirements of CSA standards, masonry units shall be free of surface indentations, surface cracks due to manufacture, or chipping. Units so delivered shall be culled from use for exposed purposes but may be used where concealed.

Concrete masonry units exposed both sides, such as at interior partitions walls, must be visibly uniform in width, so that both faces of the wall are smooth, with all block faces in plane. Total variation in width must not exceed 2mm. Mason shall reject blocks which do not conform to this size requirement.


3.1 WORKMANSHIP

Build masonry work true-to-line, plumb, square and level, with vertical joints in proper alignment.

Assume complete responsibility for dimensions, plumbs and levels of this work and constantly check same with graduated rod.

Masonry courses to be of uniform height, and both vertical and horizontal joints to be of equal and uniform thickness.

Extend non-loadbearing partitions to underside of floor structure above, providing 25mm

deflection clearance. Install lateral support angles, as specified on the structural drawings, and acoustic insulation filler at top of wall.

Carry wall up in uniform manner, no one portion being raised more than 1200mm above

another at any time. Build no more than 1500mm of wall measured vertically in any one day.

Buttering corners of units, throwing mortar into joints, deep or excessive furrowing of bed

joints not permitted. Do not shift or tap units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustments must be made after mortar has started to set, remove mortar and replace with fresh supply.

of 596





Where new masonry abuts old or fully set masonry, clean existing surfaces and dampen

if necessary to obtain bond.

Evidence of noncompliance with Contract Documents including the following will require replacement and/or repair: .1 Shrinking .2 Curling .3 Spalling .4 Poor colour blend .5 Poor texture blend .6 Discolouration of mortar .7 Chipping

3.2 BLOCKWORK

Lay concrete block in running bond, except as noted on Drawings, with thicker end of face shell upward. Standard coursing to be modular 200mm for one block and one joint.

Use lightweight concrete blocks for exposed interior surfaces of walls and partitions. Regular concrete blocks may be used for concealed surfaces.

Use special shaped, and finished units where indicated, specified or required. Use bull-nosed units for exposed external corners, window jambs, etc. Exposed open cells not permitted.

Concrete masonry units shall have face shells and their end joints fully filled with mortar,

and joints squeezed tight. Also fill webs at cores, to be reinforced and grouted, and strike flush at core taking care to prevent mortar from falling into core.

Tie intersecting non-bearing walls together with masonry reinforcing every second

course.

Do not tie intersecting bearing walls together in masonry bond, except at corners.

Exercise special care laying up concrete block in locations where plastic wall coating finish is indicated. Block walls in these locations shall be plumb with joints tooled, concave.

Where resilient base is indicated, tool the joints to within 100mm of the floor. Cut joints

flush behind the base.

3.3 MORTAR AND POINTING

Mortar is specified in Section 04 05 13.

Make all joints uniform in thickness, straight, in line, with mortar compressed to form concave joints.

Strike joints flush where walls are to receive insulation, ceramic tile, or similar finishes.

of 596





Point faced blockwork by filling holes and cracks in exposed mortar joints. Cut out

defective joints, refill solidly with mortar and tool to form neat concave joint.

3.4 BUILDING IN COMPONENTS

Build in door, screen, and window frames, steel lintels, sleeves, anchor bolts, anchors, nailing strips and other items to be built into masonry.

Do not distort metal frames. Bed anchors of frames in mortar and fill frame voids with mortar or grout as wall is erected.

3.5 BEARING POINTS

Fill concrete block solid with 20 MPa concrete grout at the following locations: .1 for two courses below bearing points of structural members; .2 behind wall-hung mechanical fixtures; .3 and elsewhere as indicated on drawings.

Install building paper over wire mesh reinforcing in the beds below solid block section.

Use 100% solid concrete blocks where indicated.

3.6 CONTROL JOINTS

Provide continuous vertical control joints in concrete block and brick partitions and walls at locations indicated, and at maximum 4.0m O.C. Control joints may be at 6.0m O.C. for autoclaved block only.

Control joints are required at changes in wall height, at pilasters and changes in wall thickness, at movement joints in foundations and floors and roofs, at one side of door or window openings under 1.8m wide, on both sides of openings over 1.8m wide, and adjacent to corners.

Confirm all control joint locations with the Consultant prior to wall construction. Provide drawings marked up to show locations of all control joints.

Form control joints as detailed. Stop masonry reinforcing each side of joints; except

where structural reinforcing is required, such as at bond beams.

Provide bond breaker at each control joint, of building paper or black polyethylene. Continue bond breaker over lintels at openings.

3.7 HORIZONTAL REINFORCING

Cavity wall and concrete block walls shall be continuously reinforced and tied together

with horizontal masonry reinforcing in every second block bed joint.

of 596





Additionally, place masonry reinforcing in first and second bed joints above and below

openings. Reinforcing in first bed joint shall be continuous. Second bed joint reinforcing shall extend 600 mm beyond each side of opening.

Place continuous reinforcing in second bed joint below top of wall.

Lap reinforcement minimum of 150mm at splices. Supply & install prefabricated sections at corners and intersection of walls to insure continuity of reinforcing.

3.8 FIRE-RATED PARTITIONS

Block shall be of density required to achieve fire rating, in accordance with the Ontario

Building Code.

At door openings in fire rated masonry partitions, fill concrete block solid with 20 MPa concrete for a distance of 400mm at each side and 400mm above openings.

3.9 REINFORCED MASONRY WALLS

Construct reinforced masonry walls to conform to the requirements of the Ontario Building Code and CSA-A371, and as indicated on Structural drawings.

Lay units so as to maintain an unobstructed vertical continuity in the cells. All walls and cross webs shall be fully bedded. No over-hanging mortar or debris shall be allowed inside the reinforced cells unless otherwise on the drawings.

Vertical reinforcing shall be provided full length without splicing. It may be installed after

the first 1200mm of masonry is erected. Locate rods accurately in the cells as shown on the Drawings. Hold in position top and bottom. Fill cells containing reinforcement solidly with 20 MPa concrete grout, unless noted otherwise on Structural drawings. Consolidate by puddling when placing and again reconsolidate before plasticity is lost. Place concrete grout in lifts not exceeding 1200mm. Stop each lift 38mm below the top of a masonry unit.

Refer to Structural and Architectural drawings for locations and grout strength.

3.10 CUTTING MASONRY

Cutting of masonry units exposed in finished work shall be done with approved type

power saw. Where electrical conduit outlet or switch boxes occur, grind and cut units before services installed. Quick saw not permitted for cutting block above grade.

Obtain Consultants approval before cutting any part or area which may impair appearance or strength of work.

Patching of masonry not permitted without Consultants approval.

of 596





3.11 BOND BEAMS

Install concrete block bond beams where indicated and where required for bearing of

structural members.

Unless more stringent requirements are noted on Structural drawings, make bond beams of special channel blocks with two 15M reinforcing bars placed in bottom, and filled with 20 MPa concrete grout. Extend a minimum length of 200mm, each side of structural member.

3.12 REINFORCED LINTELS

Install reinforced concrete block lintels at openings where steel lintels are not indicated.

Cast and cure lintels on a plank. Set special channel lintel blocks using specified mortar. Place wood stops at each end of lintel to prevent movement.

Refer to Structural drawings for lintel sizes and dimensions. As a minimum, place 25mm of 20 MPa concrete grout in voids, lay in two 15M reinforcing bars and place concrete to level of block sides. Rod and tamp concrete well without disturbing reinforcing. Allow lintels to cure 7 days before loading.

3.13 COORDINATION

Provide openings in masonry walls where required or indicated. Provide reinforced lintels

over all openings in both loadbearing and non-loadbearing walls.

Accurately locate chases and openings, and neatly finish to required sizes. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical drawings and co-operate with all trades.

Where masonry encloses conduit or piping, bring to proper level indicated and as

directed. Do not cover any pipe or conduit chases or enclosures until advised that work has been inspected and tested.

Build in frames and anchor bolts, and metal brackets for vanities, benches, counters, etc.

3.14 CLEANING

On completion, remove excess mortar and smears using wood paddles or scrapers.

Point or replace defective mortar to match existing, as required or directed.

Clean concrete masonry walls exposed in the finished work in accordance with

manufacture’s recommendations and NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-4A.

Remove dirt and stains from masonry walls exposed in the finished work in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-2A.

of 596





Remove efflorescence from masonry walls exposed in the finished work in accordance

with manufacturer’s recommendations and NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-3A.

Repeat cleaning operations until work is satisfactory.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596



04 05 23 – MASONRY ACCESSORIES


PART 1 – GENERAL


Masonry accessories. Masonry flashing.


General Requirements Division 01 Masonry Procedures Section 04 05 00 Masonry Mortar and Grout Section 04 05 13 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement Section 04 05 19 Concrete Unit Masonry Section 04 05 22 Firestopping and Smoke Seals Section 07 84 00

1.3 REFERENCES

CAN/CSA-A371-04 (R2009), Masonry Construction for Buildings.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Horizontal Control Joint Filler: purpose-made elastomer for minimum compression of 25% of uncompressed size. Emseal Corporation: Greyflex.

Vertical Control Joint Filler: preformed expanding elastomer for minimum compression of 25% of uncompressed size. Emseal Corporation: Greyflex.

Lap Adhesive: recommended by masonry flashing manufacturer. Compressible Joint Filler at Penetrations and Top of Masonry Partitions:

.1 AD Fire Protection System Inc.: A/D Firebarrier Mineral Wool Firestopping Insulation.

.1 Fibrex Insulations Inc.: Fibrex Safing Insulation.

.2 Roxul Inc.: RXL Safe Fire Stop Batt.

Mechanical Fasteners: stainless steel, self-tapping.

of 596



04 05 23 – MASONRY ACCESSORIES



3.1 INSTALLATION

Install continuous control joint fillers in control joints at locations indicated and under shelf

angles.

Install compressible joint filler at the top of masonry partitions that are not fire separations. Refer to Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping and Smoke Seals for joint treatment and fire separations.

Install compressible joint filler and acoustical sealant at penetrations through walls and partitions between classrooms, both above and below ceilings.

END OF SECTION

of 596

VX Engineering Inc. Page 1 of 15

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE LOBBY RENOVATION TOWN OF OAKVILLE

DIVISION 05 – METALS

05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

.1 Coordinate this work with the work of the steel joist supplier. Provide all necessary dimension and structural steel shop drawings to the steel joist supplier for the completion of their work.

1.2 WORK FURNISHED AND INSTALLED

.1 Separate column base plates .2 Columns, beams, purlins, and girts .3 Bracing .4 Steel framing around roof and floor openings .5 Diagonal supports at columns for deck or slabs .6 Stair landing beams and hangers for steel stairs .7 Structural steel door frames and sill angles .8 Hoist beams .9 Weldable reinforcing steel bars attached to structural steel .10 Field connections to concrete and masonry

1.3 WORK FURNISHED AND NOT INSTALLED

.1 Anchor bolts .2 Connection assemblies set in concrete .3 Loose angle lintels that bear on concrete or masonry .4 Shelf angles/plates and wall plates that bear on or are attached to concrete or masonry

1.4 WORK INSTALLED ONLY

.1 Installation of steel joists and steel bridging 1.5 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED SHEWHERE

.1 Grouting under base plates, Section 03 30 00. .2 Supply of steel joists, Section 05 21 00. .3 Steel deck, Section 05 31 00. .4 Metal fabrications, Section 05 50 00. .5 Cementitious Fireproofing, Section 07 81 16.

1.6 REFERENCES

.1 CAN/CSA G40.20/G40.21, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Quality Steel /

of 596

of 15 VX Engineering Inc.


TOWN OF OAKVILLE



Structural Quality Steels.

.2 CAN/CSA G164, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. .3 CAN/CSA S16.1, Limit States Design of Steel Structures.

.4 CSA S136, North American Specifications for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. .5 CSA W47.1, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. .6 CSA W48.1, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding. .7 CSA W59, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). .8 CAN/CGSB 1.171, Inorganic Zinc Coating. .9 CAN/CGSB 1.181, Ready Mixed Organic Zinc Coating. .10 CISC/CPMA 1.73a, A Quick-Drying One-Coat Paint for Use on Structural Steel. .11 CISC/CPMA 2.75, A Quick-Drying Primer for Use on Structural Steel. .12 ASTM A53/A53M, Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and

Seamless. .13 ASTM A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished. .14 ASTM A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 psi Tensile

Strength. .15 ASTM A325, Standard Specification for Bolts for Steel, Heat Treated 120/105 ksi

Minimum Tensile Strength. .16 ASTM A570/A570, Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural

Quality. .17 SSPC, Steel Structures Painting Council.


Structural steel fabrication shall be carried out by a firm that has been in structural steel business (for buildings) for at least five years and that is certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau under the requirements of CSA W47.1, Division 1 or 2.

Erection of the structural steel and steel joists shall be carried out by the steel fabricator's

own forces, unless written permission to sublet the Work is obtained from the Consultant. Welding shall be carried out by CWB approved welders under the supervision of a CWB approved firm.

Engage a Professional Engineer to be responsible for the design, detailing and

installation of all connections related to structural steelwork. Before submitting shop drawings, submit a letter signed and sealed by that Engineer stating that he has been engaged to undertake the responsibility for the above. Also submit a copy of that Engineer’s Certificate of Authorization, and proof of his liability insurance When requested, submit calculations signed and sealed by that Engineer. On completion of erection, submit a letter signed and sealed by that Engineer to certify that Work has been completed in accordance with all shop drawings reviewed by the Consultant and the Structural Engineer.

Before the start of fabrication, supply the independent inspection and testing agency with

mill test certificates or producer’s certificates satisfactorily correlated to the materials or products to which they pertain. The onus for ensuring that the materials and products can be properly identified according to grade or specification rests with the Contractor.

of 596





Do not splice sections without the prior acceptance of the Consultant and the submission of pertinent shop drawings. Accepted splices will be required to develop the section. Each splice shall be given a non-destructive test by an independent inspection company acceptable to the Consultant. Testing shall be at the Contractor's expense. Evaluate results in accordance with CSA W59 and report to the Consultant.

1.8 TOLERANCES .1 Conform to the fabrication and erection tolerances of CAN/CSA S16. .2 In addition if more stringent tolerances are specified elsewhere to suit interfacing

materials, the latter shall govern in such cases. 1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS

Refer to Section 01 33 00 - Submittals. "Shop drawings" means erection diagrams and shop details. Shop drawings received after noon will be date-stamped as received the following working day.

Submit to the Consultant for review before fabrication, 4 white prints of erection

diagrams. Leave room on drawings for the stamps of the Consultant and the Structural Engineer. Check and sign before submission. Only 2 copies will be returned to General Contractor. The first submission of the erection diagrams to include a complete materials list indicating steel grades, paints, etc.

Show orientation of bearing plates on erection drawings.

In addition to beam designation marks, show beam sizes on erection drawings.

Submit to the Consultant for review before the start of Work, 4 white prints of shop

drawings. Leave room on drawings for the stamps of the Consultant and the Structural Engineer. Check and sign before submission. Only 2 copies will be returned to General Contractor.

All shop drawings shall bear the seal and signature of the Professional Engineer

responsible for designing the connections.

The Professional Engineer designing the connections shall hold a Certificate of

Authorization, and shall carry min. $1,000,000.00 in liability insurance.

It is advisable to submit erection diagrams for review before preparing shop details. Include details of special conditions. Make erection diagrams. Copies of section details developed by VX Engineering Inc. will not be accepted as erection diagrams. If required, structural plans will be available “as-is” for use in the preparation of shop drawings provided that the title blocks are removed and provided that the Owner and the Owner’s

of 596



TOWN OF OAKVILLE



Consultants are not held responsible for any errors or omissions on the drawings. CAD files of the structural sections, elevations and schedules will not be made available for the preparation of shop drawings.

Show the sizes, spacing and the locations of structural steel, connections, attachments,

reinforcing and anchorage. Include all necessary plans, elevation and details. Indicate size and type of fasteners. For welded connections use welding symbols in compliance with CISC and indicate clearly the length of weld. Prepare shop drawings using metric sizes and units. All documents shall carry the seal of a Registered Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario, who shall be responsible for the design of connections and details, and the fabrication, temporary shoring and erection of all structural steel. Show also vent holes required for galvanizing process.

Review of shop drawings by the Consultant and Structural Engineer is a precaution against oversight or error and solely to review conformance with general design intent. It is not a detailed check and must not be construed as relieving the Contractor of responsibility for making the Work accurate and in conformity with the Contract Documents. Design for which the Contractor is responsible under the Contract will not be reviewed. Work done prior to the receipt of the reviewed drawings will be at the risk of the Contractor. Review comments are not authorization for changes to the Contract price.

Provide the office preparing shop drawings with a complete set of Contract Drawings and

Specifications plus all Addenda and Change Orders.

Do not release column shop details for fabrication before establishing on site the final elevations of the tops of supporting piers.

Make corrections required by previous review before resubmitting drawings. Clearly indicate all changes and additions to previous submission. Do not add new details to drawings which have been stamped as reviewed or noted.

After review, erection diagrams will be returned to the Contractor stamped to show one of the following: .1 Reviewe - Reviewed with no comments. .2 Note - Reviewed with comments noted on drawing. Submit two final record prints

as soon as corrections are made. .3 Resubmit - Reviewed with comments noted on drawing. Correct and resubmit for

review. Conform to the requirements of each authority that has reviewed the drawings.

Allow a minimum of 15 working days for review of each submission of shop drawings in

the Structural Engineer’s office. Allow more time when large quantities of shop drawings are submitted. Submit in general conformity with the sequence of construction intended. Co- ordinate with the Consultant. Shop drawings received after noon will be date-stamped as received the following working day.

Keep on site at all times a set of shop drawings bearing the review stamps of the Consultant and the Structural Engineer and use only these drawings and the Structural Drawings to erect structural steel. Neatly mark on the Structural Drawings changes issued during the course of construction.

of 596





Show details by which steel assemblies, which are set in concrete, are to be connected to the formwork.

If additional instructions are required from the Consultant, allow a minimum of five working days for the Structural Engineer to review and respond to the request for instruction.

1.10 SUBSITUTIONS .1 Submit all proposals for substitutions to the Consultant in writing in advance of shop

drawings. Identify each item clearly. Do not proceed with a proposed change unless it is accepted in writing

.2 Substitution of alternative sections will be allowed provided the new members have equal

or greater capacity and stiffness and are of dimensions acceptable at proposed locations. 1.11 SITE CONDITIONS .1 Determine any potential interference with existing services and protect from disruption

and damage.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

Rolled shapes and plates.

.1 Wide flange sections: CAN/CSA G40.21, Grade 350W.

.2 Hollow structural sections: CAN/CSA G40.21, Grade 350W, Class C.

.3 Channels, angles and plates: CAN/CSA G40.21, Grade 300W

.4 Cold formed shapes: ASTM A570/A570M Grade 50, Fy=345MPa

.5 Standard S beams: ASTM A992, A572, Grade 50, Fy=345 MPa

.6 Structural pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B, Fy=241 MPa

Welded wide flange shapes: CAN/CSA G40.21, Grade 350W.

Weldable reinforcing steel: weldable steel, grade 400W, deformed bars to CSA G30.18.

Arc welding electrodes and equipment: CSA W48.1. Electrode Classification Number: E480XX.

High-strength bolts: ASTM A325M and CAN/CSA S16. Bolts shall be identifiable by their head markings and galvanized whenever used to connect members which are galvanized or painted with zinc-rich paint.

of 596



TOWN OF OAKVILLE



Machine bolts: ASTM A307.

Anchor bolts: CAN/CSA G40.21, Grade 300W

Stud anchors, headed: ASTM A108, Grades 1010 through 1020, Fy=345 MPa (50 ksi). Lengths of studs given on drawings are the lengths after welding.

Load indicating washers: Coronet - Cooper + Turner

Cast-in-place concrete anchor with threaded bolt: Structural Connection Insert Type EC-2FW - Acrow - Richmond.

Drilled concrete anchor: .1 Kwik-Bolt 3 – Hilti Carbon steel anchors to be used unless otherwise noted.

Drilled masonry anchor:

.1 Hilti HIT HY20 with threaded HIT-A Rods and screen tube (for hollow masonry).

.2 Hilti HIT HY150 with HAS –E Standard rods (for solid of grouted masonry).

Joint filler for exposed steelwork: Epoxy resin.

Shop primer paint for steel receiving finish coat of paint on site: CISC/CPMA 2-75 except no lead- based paints allowed.

Shop primer paint for steel receiving intumescent paint on site: Primer compatible with intumescent paint to be used. See Section 07800 (Fireproofing).

Shop paint for steel without finish coat: CISC/CPMA 1-73a except no lead-based paints allowed.

Zinc-rich primer and touch-up paint: .1 inorganic: CGSB 1-GP-171M, or .2 organic, ready mixed: CAN/CGSB 1.181-92.

Ensure compatibility with specified topcoat.

Galvanizing: CAN/CSA G164

Grating: Galvanized safety grating. Minimum thickness of material 2mm. Banded ends. Bolted connections. Capacity 4.8 kPa unless noted otherwise on drawings. Maximum deflection 1/180th of span. Provide: .1 Type W/F by Borden Products (Canada) Ltd. .2 Type 19-2 by Fisher and Ludlow

Checker plate: CAN/CSA G40.21, Grade 300W. Plate with rolled-in embossments to provide non- slip surface.

Sliding bearing assembly: Galvanized top steel plate with a type 304 stainless steel highly polished lower surface and bottom elastomeric pad with a polytetrafluoroethylene (Teflon) upper surface. Static and kinetic coefficients of friction not to exceed 5% under 7MPa to 14MPa working stress. Assembly to have a working stress capacity of 7 MPa)

of 596





on lower pad. Elastomeric bottom pad to allow a 2% rotation of upper plate and still maintain a substantially uniform bearing pressure between plate and pad. . Manufactured by: .1 Fabreeka Canada Ltd. .2 Goodco Ltd. .3 Structural Tech Corp. Ltd.

Elastomeric bearing pad: Structural grade 50 durometer neoprene.

Zinc-Rich Shop Primer Paint: CAN/CGSB-1.132.

2.2 CONNECTIONS

Design connections to conform to CAN/CSA S16. Conform also to the CISC Handbook of Steel Construction, except as otherwise required by the specifications.

Retain a Professional Engineer to be responsible for the design of all connections.

In general, make shop and field connections with high-strength bolts or by welding. Use machine bolts only for secondary connections and at slotted holes with finger-tight bolts that are intended to accommodate movement.

Pretension all high-strength bolts used in: .1 wind bracing connections; .2 connections where bolts are subject to tensile loadings; .3 connections using oversized or slotted holes unless finger-tight bolts are required

to accommodate movement; and .4 connections required by CAN/CSA S16 to be pretensioned.

Design non-composite beam connections for an end reaction due to the uniformly

distributed load capacity of the member unless a greater reaction is noted on the Drawings.

Use double angle headers or end connection plates whenever possible. Do not use single angle headers for beams greater than 530mm deep. Make minimum depth of headers and end plates one-half the beam depth. Provide seated beam connections with top clip angles. Cantilevered plate connections will only be accepted for secondary members carrying minor loads. Provide all eccentrically loaded spandrel beams with top and bottom flange connections for torsional restraint.

Provide connections designed for a pass-through force equal to the smaller axial force where axial forces occur in beams framing in on opposite sides of a supporting member. Axial force is centred in smaller beam if beam sizes differ.

Install web and flange stiffener plates at moment connections as required by connection design and detail but in every case when indicated on the drawings. If the shear generated in column web exceeds its shear capacity, reinforce the web.

Provide at least one stiffener plate each side of web of beams continuous over columns unless another type of stiffener is shown on the Drawings.

of 596



TOWN OF OAKVILLE



Design gusset plates at compression members for the force equivalent to twice the

specified compression member force, or provide stiffeners to prevent gusset plate buckling.

Provide moment connections at splices to maintain continuity of cranked beams. Provide stiffener plates to resist unbalanced flange forces at splices.

Provide all wall supporting members (shelf angles, hangers, stubs, back braces, etc) which are attached to floor beams with adjustable connections capable to compensate for the deflection of the floor beams due to self-weight of concrete slabs. Anticipate beam deflection to be 20 mm. Alternatively, fabricate based on actual deflected shape of the beams as measured after concrete slabs are installed.

Complete welded shop connections prior to galvanizing.

Where slotted holes are required to accommodate deflection, provide slotted holes long enough to allow for deflection indicated plus construction tolerance assuming bolts are in centre of slots. Use A307 bolts. Bolts are to be finger-tight with burred threads to allow for movement during life of structure without bolts loosening.

Where indicated on the drawings, connect to concrete using cast-in weld plates with headed stud anchors. Design and supply assemblies. Determine capacity of each anchor group considering edge distance, spacing and embedment.

Connect new steel members to masonry or concrete using drilled anchors. Design, supply and install anchors. Determine the capacity of each anchor group considering edge distances, spacing, and a factor of safety of 4 minimum against failure. Activate wedge type anchors by applying pre-determined torque recommended by the manufacturer. Do not use epoxy anchors unless approved by Consultant. Do not field weld at connections with epoxy anchors.

Where drilled anchors are shown on the drawings, but the embedment length is not shown, provide manufacturer’s standard embedment length.

2.3 FABRICATION

Conform to CAN/CSA S16 and CSA W59.

Orientate straight beams, which have cambers within allowable mill tolerances so that the resulting beam camber is up.

Install stud anchors in the shop with end welds in accordance with the recommendations of the stud manufacturer. Lengths of studs given on drawings are the lengths after welding. Replace studs that crack in the weld or shank.

Increase thickness of curved sections at no extra cost where necessary to fabricate and

galvanize the required curvature or fabricate curved sections from plates at no extra cost where necessary to accommodate the required curvature.

Reinforce holes through webs of beams as indicated on drawings or in accordance with

design procedure set forth in the CISC Handbook of Steel Construction provided calculations are submitted as part of the shop drawings.

of 596





Provide 16 mm diameter weep holes in base plates at all HSS columns, which are not

made watertight or that are to be exposed to temperature changes.

Provide vent holes in HSS sections where required for galvanizing process. Holes are not to exceed 16 mm diameter and are to be located so that any water inside HSS will drain away when HSS is in its final position. After galvanizing, fill vent holes with weld material, grind smooth and touch-up with two coats of zinc-rich paint.

Where shop inspection is required, do not ship material to the site before it has been

inspected.

2.4 LINTLS

Structural Drawings do not show all lintels required. Refer to lintel notes and Typical Details on the Drawings.

Provide lintels with a minimum of 150 mm bearing at each end but not less than the length of any specified bearing plate.

.Weld or bolt together multiple member lintels. Provide spacers if separated. If angle seats are at different elevations provide steel packing.

.Connect ends of suspended lintels to the structure and/or build into masonry to provide adequate restraint.

.Connect ends of steel lintels to columns where openings are adjacent to columns.

2.5 PLATES AND ANCHORS

Provide beams bearing on walls with bearing plates and wall anchors as specified.

Weld steel members to bearing plates as required.

Where bearing plate sizes are not noted on the Drawings, design bearing plates for a maximum factored bearing pressure of 1.65 MPa (240 psi) on masonry and 7.5 MPa (1100 psi) on concrete.

Set beam bearing plates 12 mm back from edge of support.

Extend beams for full length of bearing plates.

2.6 SUPPORTS AT COLUMNS

Provide cap plates at tops of columns where required for support of deck, slab, joists or beams.

Provide diagonal or cantilevered angles at sides of columns where required for support of deck or slab.

of 596



TOWN OF OAKVILLE



Provide seat angles for support of masonry lintels above openings adjacent to columns. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, provide 76 x 76 x 9.5 steel angles attached to sides of columns. Length of seat to equal width of lintel minus 25 mm.

Provide additional angle welded to column for support of precast or deck interrupted by

column.

2.7 PAINTING AND GALVANIZING

Clean steelwork prior to application of paint. Refer to CAN/CSA S16.

Surface preparation in shop for paints shall be as follows: .1 Shop paint CISC/CPMA 1-73a: Clean off all grease and oil to SSPC SP1 and

remove all loose rust, loose scale, dirt, weld flux, etc. by any suitable method. .2 Shop primer paint CISC/CPMA 2-75: Clean off all grease and oil to SSPC SP1.

Clean steel to SSPC SP7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. .3 Zinc-rich primer paint and intumescent paint: Clean off all grease and oil to SSPC

SP1. Clean steel to SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning, to an average surface profile of 0.04 mm (1.5 mils) or more.

Apply paint under cover. Steel shall be dry when painted and paint shall be dry before loading for shipment.

Apply zinc-rich primer paint not more than 24 hours after blast cleaning, but prior to any visible rust occurring on the surfaces. Do not apply when relative humidity exceeds 80%. Apply to achieve a dry film thickness of 0.08 mm (3 mils).

Apply one coat of shop paint CISC/CPMA 1-73a to steelwork in the shop with the exception of: .1 Members to receive a finish coat of paint on site for which a CISC/CPMA 2-75

shop primer is required .2 Members to receive intumescent paint on site for which a compatible shop primer

is required .3 Members for which zinc-rich paint is specified .4 Galvanized members .5 Surfaces encased in or in contact with cast-in-place concrete including top

flanges of beams supporting slabs .6 Surfaces and edges to be field welded for a distance of 50 mm from the joint. .7 Contact surfaces of slip-resistant type joints assembled with high-strength bolts. .8 Surfaces to receive spray fireproofing

Unless otherwise noted, apply one coat of primer paint (CISC/CPMA 2-75) in the shop for steel to receive a finish coat of paint on site.

Unless otherwise noted, apply one coat of compatible primer paint in the shop for steel to receive intumescent paint on site.

Only paints tested to ASTM E736 and approved by the spray fireproofing supplier may be used for steel which will receive spray fireproofing.

Apply galvanizing to: .1 Shelf angles and hangers in exterior walls .2 Lintels in exterior walls .3 Exposed exterior steel members .4 Other steel noted on the Drawings

When welding after galvanizing is in place, grind away galvanizing at areas to be welded. Touch up with two coats of zinc-rich paint.

of 596





Apply primer paint to architecturally exposed surfaces without runs or sags. Sand down and repaint areas not acceptable to the Consultant.

Apply touch-up paint after erection to all areas which have been missed, field welded, scraped or chipped using the same paint as the shop coat or primer.

Clean surfaces down to bare metal and apply two coats of zinc-rich touch-up paint to any galvanized surface, which has been damaged or field welded, and which is accepted by the Consultant as being capable of repair without galvanizing.

Clean and prepare surfaces of bolts, which will receive a finished coat of paint in the same manner as the connected steelwork.

At exposed exterior structural steel framing members which are to receive a fire-resistant coating, as specified in Section 09 96 43, apply one coat of zinc-rich primer paint, compatible with specified coating. Over zinc-rich primer, apply "Carboguard 888" primer supplied under Section 09 96 43. Comply with product manufacturer's printed instructions for preparation of steel, application of product (over zinc-rich primer), and handling after application.

2.8 EXPOSED STEEL

Conform to the requirements of the A.I.S.C. Specification for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel and to the additional requirements given below when fabricating and erecting steel members which will remain permanently exposed to view.

Remove all imperfections which are unsightly from members permanently exposed to view. Remove mill and shop marks.

Provide continuous welding at exposed joints or fill between welds with an approved epoxy resin filler finished to the same profile as the adjacent weld. Joint shall be weathertight and suitable for painting.

Exposed welds shall be smooth. Hide bolts in bolted connections. Where exposed bolted connections are permitted, adjacent bolt heads shall be on same side and extensions of shank beyond nuts shall be uniform and not exceed 20 mm.

Do not mark surface with marks that are visible after painting. PART 3 – EXEXUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW

General Review during Construction by the Consultant and Structural Engineer and the services of the independent inspection and testing agencies appointed by the Owner are undertaken so that the Owner may be informed as to the quality of the Contractor's performance and for the protection of the Owner. They will be carried out by examination of representative samples of the Work.

The Contractor will receive copies of the construction review reports and the results of material tests. He will thereby be informed of any defects or deficiencies found. The provision of this information does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the performance of the Contract and he shall implement his own supervisory and quality control procedures.

of 596



TOWN OF OAKVILLE



Bring to the attention of the Consultant and Structural Engineer any defects or

deficiencies in the Work, which may occur during construction together with a proposal for remedy. The Structural Engineer will decide what corrective action may be taken. The Consultant will issue the necessary instructions.

3.2 COOPERATION

Cooperate with all engaged on the Project. Exchange with related trades shop drawings and other data required to coordinate and schedule Work. Deliver material for installation by other trades when required.

Provide where shown or required, holes and copings for connection and clearance of the Work of other trades. Show on shop drawings before submitting for review. Holes in members shall not cause any appreciable reduction in strength.

Do not cut holes in the field unless sizes and locations are accepted by the Consultant in each case. Accepted field cutting and welding shall be undertaken by this Trade.

Supply and install framing around openings in steel roof and steel floor decks in

accordance with Typical Details and Drawing Notes.

Maintain horizontal bracing and its connections below the underside of the deck so as not to interfere with the seating of the latter.

3.3 EXAMINATION OF WORK

Do not begin operations before making a thorough examination of existing conditions and the Work of related trades. Report inconsistencies before proceeding.

3.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING

The Consultant will appoint an independent inspection and testing agency. Notify the Consultant two weeks in advance of the date when the first Work will be ready for inspection.

Pay for the cost of inspection from the Cash Allowance.

Assist the agency in its work. Do not commence fabrication until details of inspection have been worked out with the inspection agency.

Work will be inspected when erected. Items to be cast into concrete will be inspected on

site before being installed. The inspection agency will submit reports to the Consultant, Structural Engineer,

Contractor and Municipal Authorities covering the Work inspected and provide details of errors or deficiencies observed.

Inspection will include: .1 Checking that the mill test certificates or producer’s certificates are satisfactorily

correlated to materials and products supplied for the project or that legible

of 596





markings were made on the material and products by the producers in accordance with the applicable material or product standards. Where this is not possible, notify the Structural Engineer and carry out sample tests as described below when required by the Structural Engineer.

.2 Confirming that all materials meet specifications.

.3 Sampling fabrication and erection procedures for general conformity with the requirements of the Contract.

.4 Checking welders' CWB Certification.

.5 Checking fabricated members against specified member shapes.

.6 Checking fabricated members against allowable sweep and camber.

.7 Checking fabricated members against specified camber.

.8 Visual inspection of all welded connections including spot checking of joint preparation and fit up.

.9 Sample checking bolted joints.

.10 Sample checking stud anchors.

.11 Sample checking of drilled concrete and masonry anchors.

.12 Sample checking that tolerances are not exceeded during erection including fit-up of field welded joints.

.13 Inspection of field cutting.

.14 Shop paint, including surface preparation, and field touch-up.

.15 Galvanizing and field touch-up.

.16 Grouting under base plates and bearing plates.

Arrange for the inspector to be present during the welding of 25% of moment connections and 25% of butt welds in direct tension.

Sample testing: When required, test coupons will be taken and tested in accordance with CSA G40.20 to establish identification. Cut samples from member locations selected by Structural Engineer and provide to inspection and testing agency. Make good the locations if requested, at no extra cost, by adding new plates and welds acceptable to the Structural Engineer. The agency will have the samples tested for mechanical properties and for chemical composition and will classify the steel as to specification.

Arrange for the inspector to start field inspection as soon as each section of the Work is

completed, plumbed, bolts tightened and field welding finished.

The inspector will check high-strength bolts in a representative 10% of bolted connections by torque testing each bolt. He will torque test 10% of the remaining bolts at random, but not less than 2 bolts in each connection. He will remove nuts from 1% of all bearing bolts and check that thread is excluded from the shear planes.

The inspector will randomly select and pull test 5% of all types and sizes of drilled in

anchors installed on a weekly basis, but not less than one anchor of each type and size. Pull test to twice the design tension capacity of the anchor given by the manufacturer. Submit reports to Consultant within one week of testing. Reports to indicate each anchor location, test load and mode of failure, if applicable. Notify Consultant immediately if any anchor fails the pull test.

The inspector will visually check all the adjustable connections at wall supporting

members to ensure the connections have been finalized after the concrete is poured. 3.5 FILED MEASUREMENTS

of 596



TOWN OF OAKVILLE



Make field measurements necessary to ensure the proper fit of members.

Identify on shop drawings dimensions, which have been obtained by field measurement.

3.6 ERECTION

Comply with the requirements of CAN/CSA S16.

Submit a description of proposed erection methods and sequence to the Consultant for his records if requested.

Make adequate provision for all loads acting on the structure during erection. Provide erection bracing to keep the structure stable, plumb and in true alignment until the completion of masonry Work and the completion of floor and roof decks which together provide the permanent bracing. Prepare erection bracing drawings signed and sealed by a professional engineer and keep these drawings on site until erection bracing is no longer required.

Set column base plates with levelling screws to the proper elevation ready for grouting.

Lift base plates for inspection when so directed.

Column base plates and beam bearing plates shall be grouted as soon as steelwork is completed. Do not add load on steelwork until grouting is completed and grout strength has reached at least 20 MPa.

Do not make permanent connections until as much of the structure as will be stiffened

thereby has been properly aligned.

Adjust and finalize connections at wall supporting elements affected by floor beam deflections after concrete is poured.

Report ill-fitting connections to the Consultant before taking corrective measures.

Do not weld in an ambient temperature below -17oC. Preheat material adjacent to

welding areas when ambient temperature is between -17oC and +4oc.

Remove slag from all completed welds so that they may be visually inspected.

3.7 DRILLED ANCHORS

Conform to requirements of manufacturer. Use hammer drill to make holes. Turn off hammer when drilling masonry with voids. Hole diameters must never exceed those required by manufacturer. Tighten all expansion anchors using a torque wrench unless finger-tight is required by the Drawings to allow for movement. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, provide manufacturer’s standard embedment length into solid concrete.

of 596





Do not cut reinforcement to accommodate anchors. Relocate anchors, at no extra cost to the Contract, when obstructions prevent drilling holes to required depth in locations specified. Obtain Consultant’s approval of new location before drilling hole. Fill all abandoned holes with grout.

Arrange for manufacturer’s technical representative to be present during installation of first few anchors of each size and type. Submit site reports by manufacturer to Consultant within one week of each visit. Reports to indicate anchor sizes and types installed, locations, and names of those present during installation.

3.8 SUSPENDED LOADS

Do not overstress members supporting suspended loads. Hanger loads shall not exceed one kN (220 pounds). Loads from mechanical and heavy electrical services suspended from the steelwork shall not exceed the load allowance provided for such services and shall be distributed uniformly. Prevent torsion from hangers connected to beams by alternating their positions on either side of members. Do not apply twisting loads to joists and make attachment using U-bolts with double hangers or other devices that will centre the hanger load on the joist. Loads shall only be suspended directly at the panel points of joists, unless the chords of the joists have been specifically designed to support the concentrated loads.

Steel Beams: Vertical loads must be applied so that they do not cause twisting of the beams or excessive bending of the flanges. Lateral loads are not to be applied to beams unless approved in writing by the Consultant’s structural engineer.

3.9 REJECTED WORK

Do not deliver to the site materials, which are known not to meet the requirements of the Specifications. If rejected after delivery, remove immediately from site.

Where review reveals materials or workmanship which appear to have failed to meet the specified quality or tolerances, the Consultant shall have the authority to order tests made of materials; to order detailed field surveys and measurements; to order a structural analysis of the existing elements and to load test the structure. All such Work will be carried out in order to assist in determining whether the structure may, in the opinion of the Consultant, be accepted, with or without strengthening or modification. Testing shall meet the requirements of the Ontario Building Code. All expense incurred shall be chargeable to the Contractor regardless of the results.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596


DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 – ROUGH CARPENTRY


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK

1. Plastic Laminate Work Section 06 41 19 2. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 11 13 3. Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 4. Painting and Coating Section 09 90 00 5. Electrical Division 26, 27, 28

1.2 REFERENCES 1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Do not deliver materials until they are required for incorporation into the work.

Protect materials, under weatherproof cover, both in transit and on site.

All exterior and interior finish materials shall, upon delivery, be neatly stored in a dry

place and shall be protected from damage due to weather, water, or any other cause. 1.4 PROTECTION

Protect fire-retardant materials against high humidity and moisture.

Protect countertops and cabinets with 6 mm plywood or other suitable sheet material.

Protect installed hardware from damage and blemishes.

PART 2 – MATERIALS 2.1 MATERIALS

Wood materials: straight, sawn square, true, dressed four sides, properly sized and

shaped to correct dimensions from nominal sizes indicated or specified.

1. CAN/CSA O80-Series Standards for Wood Preservation 2. CSA O121 Douglas Fir Plywood 3. CSA O141 Softwood Lumber 4. CSA O151 Canadian Softwood Plywood 5. CSA B111 Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples. 6. National Lumber Grading Authority (NGLA), Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber

of 596





Lumber grade and moisture content: .1 Comply with the official grading rules of NLGA for the particular lumber and

grade, and structurally complying with the latest requirements of the Ontario Building Code.

.2 Comply with CSA Standard O141 Softwood Lumber. Use only grade marked lumber.

All wood materials: .1 well-seasoned NLGA, free from defects which impair strength and durability. .2 Moisture content limit:

.1 S-GRN: Unseasoned

.2 S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content

.3 KD: Maximum 15% moisture content

Pressure Treated Lumber to CSA O80.

Blocking, nailing strips:

.1 NLGA No. 2 Ontario White Pine, No. 2 Red Pine, all complying with the grading rules of the NLGA for Construction,

.2 Douglas Fir dense complying with COFI standard grading and dressing rules.

Douglas Fir plywood: .1 comply with CSA Standard O121, COFI Exterior. .2 Western softwood plywood - comply with CSA Standard O151, COFI Waterproof

glue WSP. Exposed two sides shall be grade G2S, and exposed one side shall be grade G1S.

Wood preservative .1 Pentox Green preservative and Osmose Cut End preservative, as manufactured

by Osmose Pentox Inc.; Pentox Conservator Clear for painted wood. .2 For painted surfaces use clear type and for concealed surfaces use green tinted

type.

Fire Retardant Treatment: To ULC S102; flame spread rating 25 or less.

Rough hardware: .1 Nails, screws, bolts, lag screws anchors, special fastening devices and supports

as required for the erection of all carpentry items. .2 For preservative treated wood, use only stainless steel hardware, with the

following exception: .1 Where galvanized steel items, such as gates, flashings, etc., are being

attached to wood, galvanized steel fasteners shall be used. .3 Do not mix stainless steel with galvanized steel; contact of these dissimilar

metals can cause galvanic corrosion. .4 Stainless steel hardware to be type 317. .5 Galvanized hardware must be hot-dipped galvanized as follows:

.1 fasteners meeting CAN/CSA-G164 minimum zinc coating of 600 g/m2 (ASTMA153 Class A or B1 G 185)

of 596





.2 connectors meeting CAN/CSA-G164 minimum zinc coating of 600 g/m2 (ASTM A653 Class G-185 sheet) or better.

.3 Electroplated galvanized hardware is not permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Examine surfaces to receive the work of this Section and proceed only when conditions are satisfactory for a proper installation.

Lay out work carefully and to accommodate work of other trades. Accurately cut and fit; erect in proper position true to dimensions; align, level, square, plumb, adequately brace, and secure permanently in place. Join work only over solid backing.

3.2 INSTALLATION – GENERAL

Provide running members of the longest lengths obtainable.

Slowly feed machine-dressed members using sharp cutters. Provide finished members free from drag, feathers, slivers or roughness of any kind. Remove machine marks by sanding.

Machine sand surfaces exposed in the finished work and hand sand to an even smooth surface free of scratches.

Properly frame material with tight joints and rigidly secure in place. Use glue-blocks were

necessary.

Design construction methods for expansion and contraction of the materials.

Conceal joints and connections wherever possible. Locate prominent joints only where directed.

Match joints made on the site with joints made in the shop.

Unless otherwise specified glue and blind screw or nail all work. Set and fill and plug surface screws using matching wood plugs.

Accurately scribe, cope and mitre members where required to produce hairline joints.

Erect work plumb, level, square and to the required lines.

Do not regard blocking, strapping and other rough carpentry indicated as complete or

exact. Provide rough carpentry items required for the installation of the Work of other Sections.

The use of pressure treated wood is required for the following:

.1 Wood in direct contact with the ground.

of 596





Aluminum must not be in direct contact with pressure treated wood. Provide minimum 6mm spacing between aluminum products and treated wood, with10mil polyethylene barrier and polyethylene or nylon spacers.

3.3 INSTALLATION - ROUGH CARPENTRY

1. Blocking and Grounds: Fasten wood nailers, blocking, bucks, grounds curbs, copings

and strapping solidly to supporting materials in true planes so that they will remain straight and not be loosened by work of other Trades.

2. Framing: Do all wood framing in accordance with the Ontario Building Code -latest version, and to CAN 3 086 as applicable.

3. Preservative: .1 Apply preservative to all cut ends of pressure treated wood.

.2 Preserve all other wood indicated to be preserved. Use clear preservative for items to be painted.

.3 Preserve wood by immersing in preservative for at least one hour.

END OF SECTION

of 596



06 41 13 - ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK AND HARDWARE


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

Provide all casework indicated on drawings. Casework shall have plastic laminate finish except where noted otherwise.

Counter tops to be of solid surface fabrications. Refer to Section 06 61 16.

1.2 RELATED WORK 1. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 2. Plastic Laminate Work Section 06 41 19 3. Solid Surface Fabrications Section 06 61 16 4. Glazing Section 08 80 00 5. Painting and Coating Section 09 90 00 6. Electrical Work Division 26, 27, 28

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 All Work to conform to minimum standard for premium Grade Work as specified in Quality Standards for Architectural Woodwork prepared by Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada.

1.4 INTENT

The intent of this Section is that the casework shall be manufactured and finished at the plant, delivered to the Site and immediately installed by this Section including provision of necessary strapping, backings, bearers, rough hardware and finish hardware. Touch up finish immediately prior to completion of the Work and leave in perfect condition.

It is also the intent of this Section that all casework be manufactured with low or no VOC products, to minimize VOC emissions in the finished products.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

Submit Shop Drawings of all finish carpentry and in accordance with Section 01 30 00.

Draw Shop Drawings in related and/or dimensional positions with sections. Scale minimum 1:10.

Shop Drawings shall show fabrication details, materials, jointing, description of anchorage and hardware. Dimensions shall be based on actual measurements taken at the Site.

of 596





Provide details and dimensions for all fittings and the like for mechanical and electrical connections to this work.

Submit product data for all finishes.

Submit samples of materials, construction method and finishes for Consultant's approval. The colour of stain shall be selected by the Consultant; submit prepared 300mm x 300mm finished samples for approval.

Submit samples of all hardware.

Submit one full size sample of proposed units of Type selected by Consultant prior to proceeding with the remainder of cabinet work.

1.6 CO-OPERATION

Co-operate with other Sections and do all cutting, fitting and making good of own work for all Sections as may be necessary to carry out the true intent of the Drawings and Specifications. Examine the work and materials installed by others insofar as it affects this Work, and report to Consultant any such work not done properly.

1.7 OWNER'S EQUIPMENT

Confirm the following standard appliance dimensions with the OWNER prior to fabrication.

1.8 MEASUREMENTS

Take necessary measurements at the Building of spaces and conditions to which work must conform or through which access is required. Take such measurements prior to fabrication of the Work of this Section and in ample time to avoid delays in the Work.

1.9 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Do not deliver finished material during rain or damp weather or until "Wet Trades" have completed their work and windows are glazed or covered. Carefully protect from damage of any kind.

1.10 WARRANTY

Provide an extended Warranty to the General Conditions of the Contract to two (2) years from date of Substantial Performance of the Contract.

The warranty shall cover replacing, reworking and/or refinishing to make good defects in architectural woodwork due to faulty workmanship or defective materials, which appear

of 596





during this two (2) year period. Work showing defects during this period shall be replaced or made good without delay and at no cost to Owner.


1. All wood must be straight and true, dressed 4 sides and conform to details. It must

conform to official grading rules of Canadian Lumberman's Association for quality and moisture content. It must conform to NBC Structural requirements and be grade stamped according to CSA Standards 0140 or 0151. Stained woods and plywoods must be selected for colour and grain uniformity.

2. All materials shall be low VOC products. 3. Softwood Lumber: Conform to CAN/CSA 0141 and National Lumber

Grades Authority requirements. 4. Hardwood Lumber:

Conform to National Hardwood Lumber Association

(NHLA) requirements. Provide stain finish to AWMAC Premium Grade. Select white hard maple moisture content 7% or less in accordance with:

.1 National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) .2 AWI/AWMAC premium grade, moisture content as specified.

5. Hardwood Plywood: Conform to CSA 0115 and AWMAC. Select white hard maple, plain sliced and bookmathed face veneer core as specified. Exposed faces to be natural grade per AWMAC. Interior of cupboard and closet doors to be classified as exposed faces.

6. Canadian Softwood Plywood: Veneer plywood conforming to CSA 0151. 7. Douglas Fir Plywood: Veneer plywood conforming to CSA 0121. 8. Poplar Plywood: Veneer plywood conforming to CSA 0153. 9. Wood Particleboard:

Conform to CAN3-0188.1. fabricated from 100% recycled or recovered wood fibre, containing no added

urea formaldehyde, and certified by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC). Conform to ANSI A208.1/Grade M-2, with formaldehyde emissions of 0.09 ppm or less. .1 Nu Green 2 Particleboard as manufactured by Uniboard, or equal by

Panolam Industries or Flakeboard. 10. Hardboard: Conform to CGSB 11-GP-3M. 11. Nails and Staples: Conform to CSA B111. 12. Plastic Laminate: Refer to Section 06 41 19 for plastic laminate work. 13. Glue:

Waterproof synthetic resinous glue, of approved type for general carpentry work and thermo-setting type for plastic laminate work, low VOC emitting. Adhesives shall be free of urea formaldehyde. All adhesives to conform to CSA 0112 Series.

of 596





14. Stainless steel millwork base moulding at Service Counter:

.1 Finish: Brushed stainless steel sheet. .2 Thickness: 0.030 inches, 22 gauge. .3 Length: 3050mm, cut to suit the lengths indicated on the drawings. .4 Height: Height of 100mm as indicated on the drawings. .5 Corners: Mitred corners. .6 Back: Plain to accept construction adhesive. .7 Acceptable Product: Base Moulding MX manufactured by diamond life. .8 Adhesive: As recommended by the manufacturer; Liquid Nails Polyurethane Construction Adhesive.

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE

The hardware specified herein is to be provided as listed. Any proposed substitutions

must be submitted to the Consultant for approval prior to shop drawing submission. Proposed substitutions must be equal or better quality than the specified items and will be considered at the Consultant’s discretion. Hinges must be as specified.

Furnish and install all hardware to custom millwork as follows:

Hardware for 19mm thick cupboard doors Finish Hinges Hettich Selekta Pro 2000 619 Roller Catches Richelieu Selekta Pro 2000 603 Pulls, recessed Richelieu 3100-

310075160174 630

Cupboard Deadbolt Lock

Hafele

235.08.358 Polished nickel

complete with lock cores 210.04.606 and cylinder rosettes 210.04.062

Strike Plates Hafele gable catch: 239.61.319 bottom slot: 239.08.705

black

Elbow Latch & Strike Richelieu

Hardware for drawers Slides Knape & Vogt MuV+34HD soft-

close with 3D Release

Zinc

Pulls, recessed Richelieu 3100-310075160174

630

Drawer locks Hafele 235.08.303 nickel complete with lock cores 210.04.606 and cylinder rosettes 210.04.062

Strike Plate Hafele 239.08.705 Black

of 596





Hardware for Adjustable Shelves Pilaster Strips Knape & Vogt 255 ZC Steel Zinc Shelf Clips Hardware for 19mm thick Door at Folding Partition Chase

Knape & Vogt *Refer to hardware above for 19mm thick cupboard doors, except provide continuous piano hinge.

255 ZC Steel Zinc

Other Accessories: .1 Drawer Hanging File System: Hafele Frame for Drawers for letter width and legal

width including the following; .1 File Frame Kit for Letter Width Size: Item No. 422.74.310 .2 File Frame Kit for Legal Width Size: Item No. 422.74.320 .3 Rails: Item No. 422.72.381 in colour black. .4 Rail Clip: Item No. 422.73.300 in colour black. .5 Hanging File Bracket: Item No. 424.31.300, in black oxide and 424.31.310

in black oxide. .6 Hanging File Cross Rail: Item No.422.74.900.

.7 Refer to drawings for location and quantity of letter and legal size drawer hanging file system.

.2 Cable Grommets: Hafele, two piece, plastic with brush, silver, 80mm diameter,

No. 631.35.214. Refer to drawings for location. Provide a minimum of four (4) grommets. Locations of grommets to be confirmed on site.

.3 Continuous Piano Hinge at 19mm thick door at folding partition: Richelieu,

continuous steel piano hinge in nickel. Finish with 26mm minimum flange and length to suit. Acceptable manufacturer is Richelieu, Model 891NB or equivalent.

Keying: .1 All locks in a room to be keyed alike. .2 Provide 6 extractor keys.

2.3 FABRICATION – GENERAL

Check job dimensions and conditions and notify the Consultant in writing of unacceptable conditions. Do not proceed until remedial instructions are received.

As far as practical, assemble work at the shop and deliver to the job ready for installation. Leave ample allowance for fitting and scribing on the job.

Fabricate work square and to the required lines. Recess and conceal fasteners and anchor heads. Fill with matching wood plugs. All fixed elements must be glued and screwed or dowelled to ensure rigid construction.

Comply with glue manufacturer's recommendations for lumber moisture content, glue life,

pot life, working life, mixing spreading, assembly time, time under pressure and ambient temperature.

of 596





Provide exposed end grain of solid members and edges of exposed plywood and

particleboard with matching solid hardwood edging at least 6.4mm thick.

Make all necessary cut-outs in the millwork for grommets, electrical switch and outlet boxes and pre-drill all mounting holes for faucets, fittings and outlet boxes. Refer to electrical drawings and specifications.

Provide and install pipe covers, scribing pieces, top, bottom and/or and closures and filler

panels where necessary, including wherever units require furring out or blocking to existing conduits, pipes, etc.

Service cover panels to be provided at all kneehole drawer units, kneehole front rails and

knee drawer table assemblies. End closing panels to be provided at all exposed ends of service strips and island/peninsula assemblies. Front filler panels to be provided where called for on Drawings and as required by field conditions.

2.4 BASE CABINET CONSTRUCTION

All cabinet work shall be factory assembled in modular, unitized construction. Carefully

machine with dovetailed mortised and tenoned or blind dado joints. Each unit shall be self supporting and designed to be bolted together with fasteners inside units with plastic plugs over fasteners. All joints to be securely glued. Fabricate units as per Drawings and as specified.

.2 Casework shall be plastic laminate veneer. Plastic laminate work shall conform to Section 06 41 19.

.3 All doors and drawer fronts, and all shelving in open shelving units, shall be high pressure laminate. Interiors and concealed gables in plastic laminate cabinetry may be thermofused melamine panels. Melamine must match plastic laminate. Pattern will be in colour to be selected by the Consultant.

.4 All exposed edges of melamine panels to have 3mm PVC edging, in colour to match laminate. All other edges to be sealed and moisture proofed before assembly.

.5 Exposed edges of high pressure laminate panels (HPL) with matching HPL edges.

.6 Gables to be 19mm thick panels, with PVC edging on all exposed edges. .7 Provide top front, top back rails and posts of solid hardwood 19mm x 50mm framing

members, tongue and grooved together and dadoed to gables.

.8 Bottoms to be 19mm melamine panels, with PVC edging. .9 Provide all base cabinets with minimum 100mm high toe space of 19 mm material set

back from front face of cabinets 100 mm minimum. Provide one coat of sealer to toe space where ceramic floor base is to be installed. Ensure compatibility with ceramic base grout. Prepare base as required to install stainless steel base moulding as noted under 2.1 Materials above, paragraph 2.1.14.

of 596





.10 Doors generally to be flush overlay 19mm minimum particle board with plastic laminate

finish at fronts, backs and edges all four sides of colour to match door face. Interior face of door to be considered a finished face.

.11 Refer to detail Drawings.

.12 Doors generally to be flush overlay 19mm plastic laminate faced panels with matching

edges all four sides.

.13 Back panels shall be minimum 13mm thick melamine panels, removable within unit where access is required behind. Removable panels to have PVC edge trim, four sides. Where back panels are exposed to view, they shall be 19mm plastic laminate faced panels.

.14 Drawer Construction

.3 Fronts - 19mm HPL panels with PVC edges on all four sides, secured to front of drawer box with minimum 5 screw nails.

.4 Drawer boxes - 13mm solid birch or maple all glued and dovetailed together. Back and front to be tenoned to sides.

.5 Drawer bottom to be 6mm tempered hardboard grooved into sides, back and front members.

.6 Provide all drawers with spring hinged stops to prevent accidental removal of drawer. Provide guides and slides for all drawers as specified above, sized for depth of drawer. Top hung drawer slides or grooved drawer sides for runners are not acceptable.

.7 Install file frame system where noted on the drawings.

.15 Shelves to be 19mm HPL panels, finished both sides, with HPL edging on all four edges. Shelving in cabinets with solid doors may be melamine panels, with PVC edging on all four edges.

.16 Sit all adjustable shelves on pilaster clips. Pilasters to be recessed into gables and fastened with screws.

.17 Shelving in upper cabinets to be generally 300mm deep unless specifically noted. Provide

centre pilaster to all shelves 1200mm long or over.

.18 Provide extended top, bottom and exposed gables where furring out of upper cupboards is required due to pipes, conduits, exhaust ducts, and the like behind to provide a flush face at walls. Extend enclosure to ceiling where necessary to conceal ducts, pipes, etc..

.19 Shelves - 19mm. minimum hardwood plywood with melamine finish, front and back.

2.5 FOLDING PARTITION DOOR CHASE AND WALL PANELS

.1 Supply door chase and decorative wall panels on both sides of door as high pressure

laminate with HPL edges, except where noted otherwise. Pattern will be in colour to be selected by the Consultant.

.2 Panels to be secured to new gypsum board finished walls with adhesive and concealed fasteners secured to continuous concealed wood framing at minimum 400mm O.C.

of 596





Continuous wood perimeter framing to have plastic laminate finish to match door and decorative panels.

2.6 COUNTERTOPS

Supply and install counter tops of types noted on drawings and herein specified. Refer to Section 06 61 16 – Solid Surface Fabrications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Set and place all materials and components in place, rigid, plumb and secure.

Provide heavy duty fixture attachments for wall mounted cabinets.

Install all shelving.

Use draw bolts in countertop joints.

Apply water resistant building paper over wood framing members in contact with masonry

or cementitious construction.

After installation, fit and adjust operating hardware for wood cabinet doors, drawers and shelves.

END OF SECTION

of 596



06 41 19 - PLASTIC LAMINATE WORK


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

Provide all plastic laminate work indicated on the drawings. Coordinate with millwork

subtrade.

For counters, refer to specifications Section 06 61 16 – Solid Surface Fabrications.

1.2 RELATED WORK

1. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 2. Architectural Wood Casework Section 06 41 19 3. Solid Surface Fabrications Section 06 61 16 4. Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 5. Electrical Work Division 26, 27, 28

1.3 SUBMITTALS


Submit two 300 x 300mm samples of all materials to the Consultant for approval. The samples shall be identified by the project number, date and the name of the contractor the samples shall show colours and details of edging, forming and construction. The materials used in the building shall correspond to the approved samples.

Shop Drawings:

.1 Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices and other components.

.2 Show full-size details, edge details, attachments, etc.

.3 Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and reinforcement required.

.4 Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers and other items installed in countertops.

Submit data sheets for particle board, plywood, adhesives, joint sealants, and sealers.

Maintenance Data and Materials: .1 Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaning

instructions. Include in project closeout documents. .2 Provide maintenance kit for finishes.

1.4 PROTECTION

Refer to General Instructions Section 01 10 00.

of 596





Handle and store countertops in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

Countertop surfaces shall be covered with heavy kraft paper, or tops shall be put in cartons for protection during shipment.

If protective film is provided, do not remove until counters have been installed.

Remove any stickers immediately after installation

Protect installed countertop surfaces with heavy kraft paper secured in position with masking tape. Do not remove until final inspection.

Comply with the printed directions, issued by the material manufacturers. 1.5 WARRANTY

Plastic laminate work shall be warranted against warping or delamination for a period of

two (2) years from the date of Substantial Performance of the Contract.

Work showing defects during the warranty periods shall be replaced or made good without delay and at no expense to the Owner.

PART 2 – MATERIALS 2.1 MATERIALS - PLASTIC LAMINATE WORK

Plastic laminate:

.1 Conforming to CAN3-A172; by Wilsonart Premium Laminate as indicated below.

.2 1.6mm (.062") thick, general purpose grade for flatwork and 1.25mm (.050") thick standard postforming grade for shaped profiles and bends; finishes to be sued. Balancing sheet shall be the same thickness as surface sheet and shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.

.3 Plastic Laminate selections are as follows: PL1: Wilsonart, Phantom Pearl, 8211K-28. Provide vertical grain direction at all surfaces with PL1 finish. PL2: Wilsonart, Silver Alchemy, 4860K-07. Provide vertical grain direction at all surfaces with PL1 finish.

Cores .1 Wood products shall be FSC certified, manufactured with no added urea

formaldehyde. .2 Particle board shall be NuGreen 2 NAUF particle board, as manufactured by

Uniboard, meeting the requirements of ANSI A208.1 Grade M-2. Surface shall be smooth, dense, and free from loose particles, or defects which will telegraph through the laminate.

of 596





.3 Plywood core - fir core, poplar faced, 3, 5, or 7 ply, exterior grade veneer plywood, urea-formaldehyde free. Faces and second ply shall be without voids, or fir plywood conforming to CSA 0121, graded solid faces, 3, 5, or 7 ply.

.4 Provide waterproof cores in countertops with sinks and in all other areas where moisture is possible.

Adhesives:

.1 Formulated for use in decorative laminate fabrication and to suit the conditions of

application without failure. .2 Adhesive conforming to CSA 0112 Series, no added urea formaldehyde;

Greenguard Children & Schools certified low emitting products. .3 Adhesive for countertops where sinks will be installed is to be water resistant. .4 Adhesive shall be acceptable to the laminate manufacturer. .5 Plastic Laminate adhesives applied onsite and used within the weatherproofing

system must have a VOC content equal to or less than 20 g/L as per section 01 67 00.

Sealant - approved water-resistant sealer or glue, low VOC.

Draw bolts - mechanical devices of approved manufacture which can be recessed into

the core of decorative laminated panels and used to draw two parts together for permanently tight joints. Fixing clips - 1.6mm. (16 ga.) steel, galvanized (or prime painted), as detailed.

2.2 FINISH SCHEDULES

Refer to room finish schedule and drawings for details of countertop work.

2.3 PLASTIC LAMINATE WORK

All units shall be shop fabricated. Plastic laminate shall be applied to an approved underlayment with a thermosetting adhesive.

Build work plumb, true and square. Arrange adjacent parts of continuous laminate work to match in colour and pattern.

Obtain the governing dimensions before fabricating items which are to accommodate or

abut appliances or equipment.

Veneering of plastic laminate to core material shall be done according to the laminate manufacturer's directions. All veneered work shall be backed with a balancing sheet except where exposed in the finished work, then face veneer to be applied to all exposed surfaces.

Where fabrication is done at the site, laminate and core materials shall be stored in the

work area for not less than 48 hours for preconditioning before bonding together.

of 596





Form shaped profiles and bends as detailed, using postforming or bending grade according to manufacturer's recommendations. Core and laminate profiles shall coincide to provide continuous support and bond over the entire surface.

Self Edging.

.1 Straight self edging shall be decorative laminate 1.6mm thick.

.2 Curved self edging shall be postformed material or bending grade.

.3 Chamfer exposed edges of laminate uniformly, at approximately 15mm.

.4 Do not mitre the decorative laminate sheet at edges.

Joints: .1 Locate joints where indicated, where not indicated at approximately 2440 or

3660mm centres also include joints at corners, and changes in superficial area.

.2 Accurately fit decorative laminate together to provide tight, flush, butt joints. Joints in cored. panels shall be made with 6mm blind splines and draw bolts, one draw bolt for widths up to 150mm, two or more draw bolts at maximum 450mm o.c. for widths exceeding 150mm.

.3 Seal the core at joints with sealer. 2.4 CUTOUTS

Provide cutouts as required for hardware, fixtures, electrical devices etc.. Radius the

internal corners, chamfer the edges, and seal the core.

Provide face finish, to match panel material, at cutouts.

2.5 EXAMINATION OF SURFACES AND CONDITIONS

Refer to General Instructions 01 10 00.

Surface and ambient temperatures shall be minimum of 20 degrees C at a relative

humidity between 20 to 80%. PART 3 - EXECUTION


Install all work plumb, true and square, neatly scribed to adjoining surfaces.

Make allowances around periphery and where fixed objects pass through or project into

panel faces, to permit normal movement without restriction.

Secure work by concealed means in an approved manner (or as detailed). Fasteners shall not be more than 600mm o.c. and 150mm from edges and ends. Where concealed

of 596





fastening is not possible use stainless steel trim threaded screws with matching cup washers or other approved means.

Sand or chamfer site cut edges of the laminate free from chips. Radius any internal angle

cuts. Seal core edges.

Isolate decorative laminate panels from direct contact with exterior metal frames.

Upon completion of installation remove identification marks and clean surfaces. Protect as specified in 1.4 above.

3.2 TRIM

Decorative laminate door chase and adjacent decorative wall panels shall be as detailed

with butt joints where indicated. Joints shall be kept to the minimum, with none occurring in lengths under 3000mm. Slightly bevel the laminate edges of joints. Secure trim with adhesive.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596



06 61 16 - SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

Provide solid polymer counters and front and side waterfall panels, as detailed on

drawings.

1.2 RELATED WORK

1. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 2. Architectural Casework Section 06 41 13 3. Plastic Laminate Work Section 06 41 19

1.3 SUBMITTALS


Submit samples of solid surfacing materials to the Consultant for colour selection. The materials used in the building shall correspond to the approved samples.

Shop Drawings: .1 Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale

details, attachment devices and other components. .2 Show full-size details, edge details, attachments, etc. .3 Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and

reinforcement required. .4 Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets,

soap dispensers and other items installed in solid surface.

Maintenance Data and Materials: .1 Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaning

instructions. Include in project closeout documents. .2 Provide maintenance kit for finishes.

1.4 PROTECTION

Refer to General Instructions Section 01 10 00.

Countertop surfaces shall be covered with heavy kraft paper, or tops shall be put in cartons for protection during shipment.

Protect installed countertop with heavy kraft paper secured in position with masking tape. Do not remove until final inspection.

Comply with the printed directions, issued by surface manufacturers.

of 596





1.5 WARRANTY

Solid surface countertops work shall be warranted against warpage or manufacturing

defects for a period of ten (10) years from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work. Work showing defects during this period shall be replaced or made good without delay and at no expense to the Owner.


Solid surfacing material shall be cast, nonporous, filled polymer, with through body

colours, Greenguard certified; Corian as manufactured by DuPont. .1 Thickness: 12.7mm .2 Finish: Semi-gloss .3 Edge: as detailed .4 Colours as follows:

SP1: DuPont, Corian, “Natural Gray” (at low counter and high counter). SP2: DuPont, Corian, “Antarctica” (at high counter public facing side).

Joint adhesive: Manufacturer’s standard one- or two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, nonporous joints.

Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard mildew-resistant, FDA-compliant, NSF 51-compliant, ULC or cUL listed silicone sealant in colours matching components.

Conductive tape: Manufacturer’s standard aluminum foil tape, with required thickness, for use with cutouts near heat sources.

Insulating felt tape: Manufacturer’s standard for use with conductive tape in insulating

solid surface material from adjacent heat source.

2.2 SHOP ASSEMBLY

Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s printed instructions and technical bulletins. Provide products in the largest pieces available.

Form joints between components using manufacturer’s standard joint adhesive without conspicuous joints. Reinforce with strip of solid polymer material, 50mm wide.

Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and accessories as indicated on the drawings.

of 596





Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns.

.1 Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template. .2 Smooth edges.

2.3 CUTOUTS .1 Provide cutouts as required for hardware, fixtures, electrical devices etc.. Radius the

internal corners, chamfer the edges, and seal the core.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION OF SURFACES AND CONDITIONS

Refer to “Examination of Work in Place” in Section 01 10 00, General Instructions.

Surface and ambient temperatures shall be minimum of 20 degrees C at a relative

humidity between 20 to 80%, for a minimum of 72 hours prior to installation and continually following installation.


Install work plumb, true and square, neatly scribed to adjoining surfaces.

Make allowances around periphery and where fixed objects pass through or project into

countertops to permit normal movement without restriction.

Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. Exposed joints/seams shall not be allowed.

Reinforce field joints with solid surface strips extending a minimum of 25mm on either

side of the seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top.

Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns.

Rout radii and contours to template.

Anchor countertops and fascia securely to base cabinets or other supports.

Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations using adhesive in colour to match countertop.

Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface.

Install countertops with no more than 3 mm sag, bow or other variation from a straight

line.

of 596





At junction of counter back and side splashes and adjacent wall finishes, apply small

bead of sealant.

Upon completion of installation remove identification marks and clean all surfaces. Protect as specified above.

END OF SECTION

of 596


DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 13 00 - WATERPROOFING


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

Surface preparation. Underslab vapour retarder.


1. Division 1 - General Requirements. 2. Cast in Place Concrete: surface preparation. Refer to Structural Drawings. 3. Concrete Floor Finishing. Section 03 35 00 4. Rough Carpentry. Section 06 10 00

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

Submit Product data for the Products specified in this section. Include manufacturer's printed application recommendations and certificate stating that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.


Apply self-adhering sheet waterproofing at substrate temperatures of +4°C or above. Do

not apply to frozen concrete.


Submit in writing, a certificate stating that the applicator of the waterproofing membranes specified in this section is recognized by the manufacturer as suitable for the execution of the work.

Install the Products of this section in accordance with the printed instructions of the membrane manufacturer and these specifications.

Maintain one copy of the manufacturer's instructions on site.

The membrane manufacturer's representative shall visit the Place of the Work to provide instructions for and supervision of the work of this section prior to the commencement of the work and during its execution.

Waterproofing components shall be produced by one manufacturer, including sheet

membranes, liquid sealants, primers, mastics and adhesives.

of 596





1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING

Store self-adhering membrane on pallets and cover if left outside. Keep materials away

from sparks and flames. Store where temperature will not exceed 32 °C for extended periods of time.

Stack rigid panel waterproofing and protection board on smooth surface or pallets to prevent deformation before application. Do not pile pallets more than 2m high.

Store adhesives and primers at temperatures of 5C and above.

Protect materials from direct sunlight until ready for use.

1.7 WARRANTY

Provide a warranty for waterproofing work in accordance with the Contract Requirements,

but for the following time periods.

The applicator shall warrant that the waterproofing system shall stay in place and remain watertight for a period of two years.

The manufacturer shall warrant that the waterproofing system shall remain watertight and shall not leak as a result of faulty materials for a period of five years.

Warranties shall be issued to the Owner within two (2) Working Days following the date of Substantial Performance of the Work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 UNDERSLAB VAPOUR RETARDER AND ACCESSORIES

Underslab Vapour Retarder: .1 Stego Industries, LLC: Stego Wrap Class A Vapour Retarder. .2 W.R. Meadows of Canada, Sealtight Perminator, 0.254mm thick (10mil).

Joint Tape:

.1 Stego Industries, LLC: StegoTape

.2 W.R. Meadows of Canada, Sealtight Perminator Tape, 100mm wide.

of 596






3.1 EXAMINATION

Verify substrate surfaces are sound, durable, and free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system, clean, dry, smooth and free of voids.

Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.

Verify that the floor slab base course is in place and compacted prior to commencing installation of underslab vapour retarder.

Verify that concrete is cured at least 14 days.

Commencement of the work shall mean acceptance of the prepared substrate.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

Protect adjacent surfaces not designated-to receive waterproofing.

Clean and prepare surfaces to receive membranes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.

Patch all holes and voids and smooth out any surface misalignments. Remove all sharp

protrusions.

3.3 APPLICATION: UNDERSLAB VAPOUR RETARDER

Lay vapour retarder over prepared underslab base course.

Lap sides and ends of sheets 150mm and seal with joint tape.

Seal junctures with walls by folding sheet up for full slab thickness and sealing to wall with joint tape.

Seal around all protrusions.

Where vapour retarder is damaged, patch with a piece of vapour retarder overlapping

damaged area by 150mm in all directions. Seal all edges with joint tape.

.6 Install under Ground Floor slab-on-grade. 3.4 INSPECTION AND REPAIR

Inspect and repair vapour retarder system immediately before covering.

of 596





Cover tears and inadequate overlays with detail strip and seal the patch edges with pointing mastic.

END OF SECTION

of 596


DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 21 13 – BOARD INSULATION


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTIONS INCLUDES

Under Slab Rigid Insulation where existing concrete floor is trenched to provide for electrical and mechanical work.


General Requirements Division 01 Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 Waterproofing Section 07 13 00 Mechanical Division 22 and 23 Electrical Division 26 and 27

1.3 REFERENCES

ASTM-E96-95, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapour Transmission of Materials. CGSB 71-GP-24M-77, Adhesive, Flexible, for Bonding Cellular Polystyrene Insulation. CAN/ULC-S701-1997, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering. CAN/ULC-S702-1997, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Submit 200mm by 300mm samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

If requested by Consultant, submit under provisions of Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, manufacturer’s certificate stating that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

Convene a pre-installation meeting one week prior to commencing work of this section.

Request attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section.

Review conditions of installation, installation procedures, procedure for inspection and coordination of work with related sections.


Store, handle and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Minimize the time polystyrene insulation products are stored or exposed to sunlight at project site.

Store products away from construction activity and sources of ignition.

of 596





Protect products from damage during handling, installation and at point of installation.

1.7 WARRANTY .1 Submit a warranty for in accordance with the Contract Requirements, but for a period of two

(2) years. .2 The warranty shall cover defects in materials, installation, and workmanship. .3 Warranties shall be issued to the Owner within two (2) Working Days following the date of

Substantial Performance of the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION

Under Slab Insulation:

.1 Extruded polystyrene to CAN/ULC-S701, Type 4, thickness as indicated on architectural drawings.

.2 Thermal Resistance: RSI Value of 0.87 per 25mm thickness.

.3 Dow Chemical Canada Inc.: Styrofoam SM.

.4 Owens Corning Canada Inc.: Celfort 300.

2.2 ADHESIVES

Adhesive (for polystyrene): to CGSB 71-GP-24. Bakor Inc.: Air-Bloc 21.


3.1 EXAMINATION

Verify that building substrate surfaces, adjacent materials and installation conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. Ensure insulation materials and surfaces are dry.

Verify that substrate is flat, sound, clean and free of objectionable air surface voids, fins, irregularities, and materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond.

Notify Consultant upon completion of installation of vapour retarder and air seal to allow inspection before insulating material is installed or work is obscured.

Beginning of installation shall mean acceptance of substrate.

3.2 PREPARATION

Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation.

of 596






.1 Use boards of largest possible dimensions to reduce the number of joints. Boards with chipped and broken edges are unacceptable.

Offset both vertical and horizontal joints in multiple layer applications

Apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Attach boards prior to skinning of adhesive.

3.4 CONCRETE SLABS

Place insulation under slabs on grade where indicated and after base for slab is complete.

Lay boards on level compacted fill.

Extend boards where indicated minimum 600mm in from perimeter foundation wall.

Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to insulation plane.

Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing slab.

3.5 PROTECTION

Protect insulation and vapour retarders under provisions of Section 01 56 00 - Temporary Barriers and Controls.

Do not permit work to be damaged prior to covering insulation. Protect from harmful

weather exposures and physical abuse.

Provide temporary coverings or enclosures when insulation will be subject to damage and cannot be protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596



07 21 16 – BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDED

Acoustical Batt Insulation.


1. Division 01 - General Requirements. 2. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 10 3. Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals Section 07 84 00 4. Non-Structural Metal Framing Section 09 22 00 5. Division 20 - Mechanical

1.3 REFERENCES

CAN/ULC-S702-1997, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

INSULATION .1 Acoustical Batt Insulation:

.1 Mineral fibre to CAN/ULC-S702, thickness as indicated.

.2 Acceptable Products: .1 CGC: Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets. .2 CertainTeed Insulation Canada Inc.: Sustainable Insulation Noise

Reducer Sound Attenuation Batts. .3 Owens Corning Canada Inc.: EcoTouch Quiet Zone Pink Fibreglass Acoustic Insulation. .4 Roxul Inc.: Acoustical Fire Batt (AFB).

ACCESSORIES

Insulation Clips: Impale type, perforated 50mm by 50mm cold rolled galvanized carbon steel 0.8mm thick, spindle of 2.5mm diameter annealed steel, length to suit insulation, 25mm diameter washers of self-locking type.

Retaining Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh.

of 596



07 21 16 – BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION


PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

Verify that substrate surfaces, adjacent materials and installation conditions are rec1dy to

accept the work of this section. Ensure insulation materials and surfaces are dry.

Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate and conditions.

3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION

Supply insulation to Section 06 10 10 - Rough Carpentry as required for building-in to work of that section.

Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal protection and acoustical separation of building elements and spaces.

Fit insulation closely around electrical boxes, pipes, ducts, frames and other objects in or

passing through insulation. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces.

Do not compress insulation to fit into spaces. Install in spaces without gaps or voids.

Install friction fit insulation tight to framing members.

On sloping surfaces or in ceiling applications retain insulation in place with impale type fastener spaced at 600mm on centre. Adhere fastener to substrate with adhesive compatible with fastener and substrate.

In unfinished unexposed applications retain insulation in place with wire mesh secured to

framing members with fasteners appropriate for framing material.

Keep insulation minimum 75mm from heat emitting devices such as recessed light fixtures.

Notify the Consultant upon completion of insulation installation to allow for inspection

before work is enclosed and obscured.

3.3 PROTECTION

Protect insulation under provisions of Section 01 56 00 -Temporary Controls.

Protect insulation from harmful weather exposures and physical abuse.

Provide temporary coverings or enclosures when insulation will be subject to damage and cannot be protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION

of 596



07 84 00 – FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEAL


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDED

Firestopping of Penetrations in Rated Assemblies.

Fire Resistive Joint Systems.

Perimeter Fire Containment Systems.

Firestopping of Penetrations in Fire Blocking Compartments.

Smoke Seals

It is the intent of this section of the specifications to establish a single, competent source

to be responsible for providing all labour, materials, products, equipment and services, to supply and install firestopping and smoke seals for the area of work, including at the following locations:

.1 Openings in fire rated walls, floors and roofs both empty and those containing

penetrations. .2 Gaps between fire rated floor slabs and exterior curtain walls. .3 Gaps between fire rated walls and exterior curtain walls. .4 Gaps located within expansion joints. .5 Openings at each floor level in fire rated shafts or stairwells. .6 Gaps between the tops of fire rated walls and underside of fire rated floor or roof

assemblies. .7 Penetrations through construction enclosing compartmentalized concealed areas

(fire blocks), involving both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.

.8 Penetrations through smoke barriers.

Note: It is not the intention of this section to delete firestopping work fully specified in the mechanical and electrical specifications. Coordinate with all mechanical and electrical sections to ensure the complete firestopping of the area of work. All firestopping not specifically called for in the mechanical and electrical specifications is to be included under this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK

Fire blocking of concealed spaces: .1 Fire separation of concealed spaces shall be provided under applicable

specification sections, and as indicated on drawings.

Non-Rated Openings through Floors and Walls: .1 Non-rated openings through floors and walls shall be sealed under applicable

architectural, mechanical, and electrical specification sections.

of 596





Metal sleeves for fire rated openings through floors and walls shall be provided under

applicable mechanical and electrical specification sections.

Firestopping and smoke seals within mechanical (i.e. inside ducts, dampers) and electrical assemblies shall be sealed under applicable mechanical and electrical specifications sections and only in accordance with the equipment or device manufacturers’ installation instructions.


Concrete Unit Masonry Section 04 22 00 Sealants Section 07 92 00 Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00 Mechanical work requiring firestopping Division 20, 22 Electrical work requiring firestopping Division 26, 27, 28

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS/DOCUMENTS

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC):

Intertek: WH Mark Product Directory

Factory Mutual Approval Guide

.1 ASTM E814

.2 ASTM E 2174

.3 ASTM E 2393

.4 ASTM E 2307 .5 ASTM C 920

Test Method of Fire tests of Through Penetration Firestops Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stop Joint System. Standard Test Method for Determining the Fire Endurance of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using the Intermediate-Scale, Multi Story Test Apparatus (ISMA) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants systems

.1 UL .2 UL 263 .3 ANSI/UL 1479 .4 ANSI/UL 2079:

Fire Resistance Directory Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials Fire Tests Of Through-Penetration Firestops Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems

.1 ULC

.2 CAN/ULC-S101

.3 CAN/ULC-S115

List of Equipment and Materials, Firestop Systems and Components Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems

of 596





1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Provide firestopping systems of sufficient thickness, width and density to provide and

maintain a fire resistance rating, as indicated on drawings and in accordance with ULC, cUL or WH design numbers.

Provide a seal completely filling all annular spaces to prevent the passage of flame, smoke and gases through the opening in the fire separation in which it is installed.

Provide materials which are compatible with all materials used in the system including materials used in or on penetrating items as well as all construction materials used in conjunction or contiguous with the system.

Accessories:

.1 Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials.

.2 Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire resistance rated systems.

.3 Accessories include but are not limited to the following items: .1 Permanent forming/damming/backing materials temporary forming

materials .2 substrate primers .3 collars .4 steel sleeves

Provide products that upon curing, do not re-emulsify, dissolve, leach, and breakdown or

otherwise deteriorate over time from exposure to atmospheric moisture, sweating pipes, ponding water or other forms of moisture characteristic during and after construction.

Provide firestop sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate motion such as pipe vibration, water hammer, thermal expansion and other normal building movement without damage to the seal.

Pipe insulation shall not be removed, cut away or otherwise interrupted through wall or floor openings. Provide products appropriately tested for the thickness and type of insulation utilized.

Openings within walls and floors designed to accommodate voice, data and video cabling shall be provided with re-enterable products specifically designed for retrofit.

Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor-ceiling assemblies contained within chase wall assemblies shall be protected with products tested by being fully exposed to the fire outside of the chase wall.

Provide fire-resistive joint sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate movement such as thermal expansion and other normal building movement without damage to the seal.

of 596





Provide fire-resistive joint sealants designed to accommodate a specific range of

movement and tested for this purpose in accordance with a cyclic movement test criteria as outlined in Standard ANSI/ UL 2079.

Provide through penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems subjected to an air leakage test conducted in accordance with Standards, ANSI/UL1479 and ANSI/ UL2079, respectively, with published L-Ratings for ambient and elevated temperatures as evidence of the ability of the through penetration firestop system or fire-resistive joint system to restrict the movement of smoke. Provide fire-resistive joint systems subjected to an air leakage test conducted in accordance with Standard, ANSI/ UL2079 with published L-Ratings for ambient and elevated temperatures as evidence of the ability of the fire-resistive joint system to restrict the movement of smoke.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

Manufacturer’s Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer’s specifications, installation instructions and product data

for each material required, in accordance with Section 01 33 23. .2 Include ULC, cUL, or WH tested systems or designs, to show compliance with

the Contract Documents.

Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing typical installation details, including reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings and method of installation for each type of firestopping condition.

Samples: If requested, submit samples of each type of firestopping systems, smoke seals and accessories. Indicate location where material/system shall be utilized.

Qualifications: Submit certificate indicating qualifications of installer.


Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall be one of the approved manufacturers listed below.

Applicator: Company having a minimum of three (3) years’ experience in the installation of materials specified herein, on projects comparable to this project, who is certified, licensed or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install firestop products in accordance with the specified requirements. Installer shall be certified by ULC, or other approved agency.

1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Conform to the Ontario Building Code for fire resistance ratings.

Provide materials, accessories and application procedures which have been listed by

ULC, cUL, or tested by a nationally recognized independent testing agency in accordance with ASTM E814, ANSI/UL 1479, CAN4-S115 or ANSI/UL 2079 to achieve the required fire protection rating(s).

of 596






Do not proceed with the installation of firestopping materials when temperatures or weather conditions exceed the manufacturer’s recommended limitations for installation.

Ventilate solvent based and moisture-cure firestopping per firestopping manufacturer’s instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, by forced air circulation.


Deliver materials to Site in manufacturer’s sealed, undamaged containers, with labels intact. Labels shall identify product and manufacturer, date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, qualified testing and inspection agency's classification marking, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

Handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 1.11 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

Comply with manufacturer’s recommended requirements for temperature, relative humidity and substrate moisture content during application and curing of materials.

Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of materials.

Do not install firestopping products when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1.12 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.

Do not install firestopping system until Work within opening has been completed.

Coordinate with other applicable Sections.

Schedule installation of safing materials in linear opening at curtain wall prior to construction that limits access to safing slot.

Schedule work of other trades so that firestopping applications can be inspected prior to

being covered by subsequent construction.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

Provide firestopping silicone sealants, water-based sealants, intumescent sealant,

mortars, or firestop devices from one of the following manufacturers:

of 596





.1 A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. .2 Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group .3 Hilti (Canada) Corporation .4 Nuco Inc., Self-Seal Firestops

2.2 MATERIALS

Firestop systems: .1 Provide a complete system of asbestos-free firestop systems capable of

maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of CAN4-S115, ASTM E814, ANSI/UL 1479, or ANSI/UL 2079, and listed by ULC, cUL, or Warnock Hersey, and approved by jurisdictional authorities and the Consultant.

.2 Comply with applicable Building Code requirements for locations and ratings.

Materials specified below are as manufactured by A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. Equivalent products manufactured by one of the approved manufacturers listed above are acceptable.

Silicone Sealants: .1 Primerless, single component silicone sealant, curing to durable, flexible, silicone

rubber; to ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, class 25; A/D Fire barrier Silicone Sealant or equivalent.

.2 For use in: openings with penetrating items subject to high movement; multiple penetration systems; for combustible pipes up to 2-in. diameter; in control joints; in curtain wall joints; expansion joints; floor/wall joints; wall/wall joints; head of wall joints; and as a sealant for smoke barrier construction.

Pourable Sealant: .1 Single component, water based, elastomeric sealants, forming durable, flexible,

watertight bonds; A/D Firebarrier Seal (pourable) and Seal NS (non-slumping) or equivalent.

.2 Use non-slumping type for vertical applications.

.3 Water based firestop sealants for use with: control joints; head of wall joints; floor/wall joints; wall/wall joints; multiple penetration systems; plumbing; mechanical; electrical; and where sprayed sealant application is required or desired.

Intumescent Caulk: .1 Single component, water based, elastomeric sealant for use in interior building

locations; A/D Firebarrier Intumescent Caulk or equivalent. .2 For general use as a firestop sealant with: insulated pipes; pipes; electrical

cables and conduit; ducts. Mortar:

.1 Non-combustible, fibre reinforced, foamed cement mortar; A/D Fire barrier Mortar or equivalent.

.2 For use in: large openings; static non-moving penetrations such as cable trays; for multiple penetration systems; electrical and communication bundles; conduits; non-combustible sleeves; and insulated pipes.

Collars:

of 596





.1 Steel collars with intumescent silicone strip, in diameters to suit pipe sizes; A/D

Firebarrier Collar or equivalent. .2 For use in openings with single combustible pipe penetrations greater than

50mm diameter; confirm maximum pipe diameter (for applicable tested assemblies) with manufacturer.

Pillows: .1 Self-supporting, sealed polyethylene bags containing intumescent materials and

non-combustible insulation; A/D Firebarrier Pillows or equivalent. .2 For use in openings with: cable tray; multiple cable penetrations; where

retrofitting of penetrating items is anticipated; and as a temporary firestop system.

Mineral Wool: .1 Non-combustible, semi-rigid, preformed mineral wool strips and sheets; A/D

Firebarrier Mineral Wool or equivalent. .2 For use in tested firestop systems, as fire barrier and forming material.

Additional Materials:

.1 All materials shall be by the manufacturer’s listed above and shall be components of tested assemblies, acceptable to local authorities having jurisdiction, for the fire rating required.

.11 Fire Stopping: .1 Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective barrier

against flame and heat in compliance with requirements of CAN4-S115 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended.

.2 Acceptable Products: .1 A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.: A/D Firebarrier Mineral Wool Fire Stopping

Insulation. .2 Roxul Inc.: RXL Safe Fire Stop Batt.

.12 Smoke Seals: fire resistant material capable of maintaining an effective barrier against

smoke and gases. .1 Fire Rated Sealant - Type 1 (for joints in vertical surfaces): non-sagging, fire rated

silicone listed for use in fire separations: .3 Hilti (Canada) Corporation: CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant. .4 3M Canada Inc.: Firebarrier 2000. .5 Tremco Construction Products: TREMstop Fyre-Sil.

.2 Fire Rated Sealant - Type 2 (for head of wall applications): sprayable single component, water-based, acrylic fire stop sealant.

.6 Hilti (Canada) Corporation: CP672 Firestop Joint Spray.

.7 3M Canada Inc.: 3M FireDam Spray.

.8 Tremco Construction Products: TREMstop Acrylic SP. .3 Fire Rated Sealant - Type 3 (for joints in horizontal surfaces): self-leveling, fire rated

silicone, listed for use in fire separations. .1 Hilti (Canada) Corporation: CP604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant. .2 3M Canada Inc.: Firebarrier 2003. .3 Tremco Construction Products: TREMstop Fyre-Sil Self Leveling

of 596





2.3 ACCESSORIES

Damming and backup materials, supports and anchoring devices: Non-combustible, to

manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with the tested system being installed, and as acceptable to local authorities having jurisdiction.

Primers: As required by firestopping manufacturer and compatible with selected system and contiguous materials.

Water: Potable.

Tape: Pressure sensitive masking tape as recommended by the firestopping manufacturer.

Fasteners: Provide suitable fasteners, for applicable substrates, for all collars and other

field fastened firestopping components.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

Examine substrates, openings, voids, adjoining construction and conditions under which

the Work is to be installed. Confirm compatibility of surfaces scheduled to receive firestopping.

Verify that penetrating elements are securely fixed and properly located with the proper space allowance between penetrations and surfaces of openings.

Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

Surfaces to receive firestopping shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, rust, loose materials, form release agents, frost, moisture or any other matter which would impair the bond of firestopping material to the substrate of penetrating item(s).

Prime substrates in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions or recommendations. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto exposed surfaces.

Do not apply firestopping and smoke seals to surfaces previously painted or treated with sealers, curing compounds, water repellent or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required.

Ensure that anchoring devices, back-up materials, clips, sleeves, supports and other

related materials used in the actual fire tests are provided.

Mask where necessary to prevent firestopping materials from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping seal with substrates.

of 596





Installation is not to proceed until submittals have been reviewed and returned by the Consultant.

3.3 INSTALLATION

Manufacturer’s Instruction:

.1 Comply with ULC, cUL, or Warnock Hersey listings and manufacturer’s

instructions for the type of material and condition of opening in each case. .2 Consult with the manufacturer’s technical representative to determine proper

procedure for conditions not fully covered by printed instructions. .3 Record in writing any oral instructions received, with copy to manufacturer.

Firestopping for vertical applications: Non-sag caulk or spray grade sealants, Mortar,

Collars or Pillows.

Firestopping for horizontal applications: Non-sag caulk or self-levelling or spray grade sealants, Mortar, Collars or Pillows.

Firestopping for overhead applications: Non-sag caulk or spray grade sealants or Mortar.

Install firestopping with sufficient pressure to properly fill and seal openings to ensure an effective smoke seal. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces. Remove excess firestopping material promptly as the Work progresses and upon completion.

Damming: Provide leak-proof dams as required to seal openings and contain liquid

sealants, putty or mortar until cured. Install damming in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Damming Boards: Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of type required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of through-penetration firestop systems.

.1 Combustible Type: For temporary dams only. Remove after firestopping material

has cured. .2 Non-Combustible Type: For temporary or permanent dams. Provide non-

combustible type wherever damming material cannot be removed after applying firestopping materials.

Void Filler: Use materials recommended by the firestopping manufacturer to seal gaps created by non-combustible type damming boards and to seal around cables, conduits, pipes and where void filler material becomes part of the fire rated assembly.

Sealant:

.1 Install damming material or mineral wool as required.

.2 Apply sealant so air voids are not present and sealant is in full contact with penetrating items. Tool sealant to ensure substrate contact.

of 596





.3 Remove excess sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

Mortar:

.1 Install damming material as required. .2 Mix mortar in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. .3 Pump, trowel or hand pack mortar through openings to minimum thickness as

recommended by manufacturer and as listed by ULC, or cUL, to achieve required fire rating.

Firestopping Mineral Wool: .1 Install firestopping by compressing material to the minimum required by ULC,

cUL, or WH listing. .2 Apply firestopping in sufficient thickness, depth and density so as to achieve the

required fire resistance rating. .3 Use impaling clips to support and secure firestopping where required by tested

system.

Where joint application is exposed to the elements, fire-resistive joint sealant must be approved by manufacturer for use in exterior applications.


Notify Consultant when completed installations are ready for inspection prior to concealing or enclosing an area containing firestopping materials.

Arrange for inspections by the Owners independent inspection and testing company, appointed and paid for by Owner.

Following field inspections, provide all repair as required to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents.

Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by authorities having jurisdiction

3.5 SCHEDULE

.1 Fire stop for full depth or thickness of the assembly or component being fire stopped. .2 Apply smoke seal material to both sides of vertical assemblies required to have smoke seals.

This applies to all fire separations, whether rated or unrated. .3 Fire Stop and Smoke Seal At:

.1 Penetrations through vertical fire separations of masonry, concrete, or gypsum board construction.

.2 Edge of floor slabs at curtain wall and precast concrete panels.

.3 Top of fire separations of masonry construction at underside of fluted steel deck assemblies: .1 Option No. 1: cUL Design No. HW-D-0098.

.1 Fire stopping: all specified fire stopping Products.

.2 Smoke seal: Hilti Type 2 fire rated sealant. .2 Option No. 2: ULC Design No. HW23.

of 596





.1 Fire stopping: all specified fire stopping Products. .2 Smoke seal: 3M Type 2 fire rated sealant.

.3 Option No. 3: cUL Design No. HW-D-0092. .1 Fire stopping: all specified fire stopping Products. .2 Smoke seal: Tremco Type 2 fire rated sealant.

.4 Top of fire separations of gypsum board construction at underside of fluted steel deck assemblies: .1 Option No. 1: cUL Design No. HW-D-0042.


.2 Smoke seal: Hilti Type 2 fire rated sealant. .2 Option No. 2: ULC Design No. HW21.


.2 Smoke seal: 3M Type 2 fire rated sealant. .3 Option No. 3: ULC Design No. HW71.


.2 Smoke seal: Tremco Type 2 fire rated sealant. .5 Intersection of fire separations of masonry or gypsum board construction. .6 Control joints in fire separations of masonry construction.

.1 Option No. 1: ULC Design No. JF83. .1 Fire stopping: all specified fire stopping Products. .2 Smoke seal: Hilti Type 1 fire rated sealant.

.2 Option No. 2: ULC Design No. JF 13 .1 Fire stopping: all specified fire stopping Products. .2 Smoke seal: 3M Type 1 fire rated sealant.

.3 Option No. 3: ULC Design No. JF 18 .1 Fire stopping: all specified fire stopping Products. .2 Smoke seal: Tremco Type 1 fire rated sealant.

.7 Control joints in fire separations of gypsum board construction: ULC Design No. JF 70. .1 Fire stopping: all specified fire stopping Products. .2 Smoke seal: 3M Type 1 fire rated sealant.

.8 Joints in horizontal fire separation assemblies - concrete floor slabs: .1 Option No. 1: ULC Design No. JF82.


.2 Smoke seal: Hilti Type 3 fire rated sealant. .2 Option No. 2: ULC Design No. JF13.


.2 Smoke seal: 3M Type 3 fire rated sealant. .3 Option No. 3: ULC Design No. JF18.


.2 Smoke seal: Tremco Type 3 fire rated sealant. .9 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs, and

horizontal fire separations. .10 Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire separations. .11 Mechanical assemblies penetrating fire separations: Refer to Division 23 - Heating,

Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC). .12 Electrical assemblies penetrating fire separations: Refer to Division 26 - Electrical.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed openings to be free of excess firestopping materials

and soiling as work progresses.

of 596





Upon completion of this work, remove all materials, equipment and debris from the site. Leave work area and adjacent surfaces in a condition acceptable to the Consultant.

Leave installed work with sufficient protection to enable it to remain untouched until

project turnover.

END OF SECTION

of 596



07 92 00 – SEALANTS



.1 Sealants and caulking for exterior wall openings and joints.

.2 Sealants and caulking for interior wall openings and joints.

.3 Sealants and caulking for floor joints. 1.2 RELATED WORK

Architectural Wood Casework Section 06 41 13 Plastic Laminate Section 08 41 19 Firestopping and Smoke Seal Section 07 84 00 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 11 13 Automatic Entrance Doors Section 08 42 29

1.3 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

The products of the following manufacturers are approved for use subject to meeting the specifications for the particular type of sealants listed below. However, this is not an approval to substitute another type of sealant for those specified unless the material manufacturer requests change in his product in writing to the Consultant. .1 Canadian General Electric Company Ltd. .2 Dow Corning Canada Inc. .3 Tremco

Material manufacturers must be willing to review Shop Drawings and drawing details, visit

the site to review sealant installation and provide written reports to the Consultant.

1.4 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

Sealants and caulking shall be installed by a specialized Subcontractor, having skilled mechanics thoroughly trained and competent in all aspects of caulking work, with minimum 5 years’ experience.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

Submit samples of each sealant, in conformance with Section 01 33 23.

Provide colour cards for Consultants selection.

Submit written adhesion and compatibility approval from the sealant manufacturer for all materials to be sealed.

of 596





1.6 WARRANTY

Extend Contractor’s warranty to five (5) years, in writing. Warranty shall commence on

the date of Substantial Performance.

Defective work shall include, but not be restricted to, joint leakage, cracking, crumbling, melting, running, loss of adhesion, loss of cohesion, or staining of adjacent surfaces.

Provide manufacturer’s project-specific 20 year non-staining warranty and 10 year weather seal warranty for “Type A” sealant listed below.


2.2 MATERIALS

Sealant Type A: For exterior locations. Non-Staining, primer less, silicone weather-

proofing sealant: .1 SilPruf SCS9000 NB, manufactured by Canadian General Electric Company

Limited, Dow Corning 756 SMS, manufactured by Dow Corning Canada Inc., or .2 Spectrem 3, manufactured by Tremco Ltd., and .3 conforming to the product properties published.

Sealant Type B: For interior locations. Non-staining, primer less, silicone hybrid sealant:

.1 SCS7000, manufactured by Canadian General Electric Company Limited.

.2 Dow Corning 756 SMS, manufactured by Dow Corning Canada Inc., or

.3 Spectrem 3, manufactured by Tremco Ltd., and

Sealant Type C: For interior locations where conditions of high humidity exist such as washrooms, showers, Mildew resistant, one component silicone conforming to CGSB 19-GP.22M and ASTM C920: .1 CGE SCS1700 Sanitary Sealant, .2 Dow Corning 786, or .3 Tremco Tremsil 200 White

Sealant Type D: For interior locations. Paintable, non-staining, primer less, silicone

hybrid sealant: .1 SCS7000, manufactured by Canadian General Electric Company Limited.

Sealant Type E:

.1 Multi-component, epoxidized polyurethane sealant conforming to CAN/CGSB-19.24, Type 2, Class B, SWRI Certified.

.2 Dymeric 240, manufactured by Tremco Ltd.

.3 Contractors Weatherproofing Sealant (CWS) Contractors Concrete Sealant by Dow Corning.

of 596





Colours of sealants and caulking when exposed in the finished work to later selection by

the Consultant. Allow different colours for different situations and materials. Allow for custom colours for exterior sealants.

Primers for sealing: As manufactured or recommended by the manufacturer of the sealing materials for the specific applications.

Joint backing material:

.4 Circular foam strips, of approved manufacture, compatible with sealant and 50% greater width than joint width;

.5 Vertical Surfaces: extruded polyolefin foam, Sof Rod by Tremco Ltd.

.6 Horizontal Surfaces: closed cell polyethylene foam, Standard Backer Rod by Tremco.

Bond Breaker: pressure sensitive plastic tape backing material, which will not bond to sealant; 3M #226 or #481, or Valley Industries #40.

.10 Acoustical Sealant. .1 To CAN/CGSB-19.21. .2 Acceptable Product: Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing, Tremco

Acoustical Sealant.

.11 Air Barrier Foam Sealant - One Part. .1 One part polyurethane insulating foam sealant, to CAN/ULC-S710.1. .2 Acceptable Products:

.1 Adfast Inc.: ADFOAM 1885-2

.2 Dow Chemical Canada ULC: GREAT STUFF PRO Gaps & Cracks Insulating Foam Sealant.

.3 Zerodraft Products Inc.: Zerodraft Foam Sealant.

.12 Air Barrier Foam Sealant - Two Part. .1 Two part polyurethane insulating foam sealant, to CAN/ULC-S711.1. .2 Acceptable Products:

.1 Dow Chemical Canada ULC: FROTH-PAK Foam Sealant. .2 Zerodraft Products Inc.: Zerodraft Insulating Air Sealant. .13 Preformed Compressible and Non-Compressible Back-up Materials.

.1 Polyethylene, Urethane, Neoprene or Vinyl Foam. .1 Extruded closed cell foam backer rod. .2 Size: oversize 30 to 50%. .2 Neoprene or Butyl Rubber: Round solid rod, Shore A hardness 70.

.3 High Density Foam: Extruded closed cell polyvinyl chloride (PVC), extruded polyethylene, closed cell, Shore A hardness 20, tensile strength 140 to 200kPa, extruded polyolefin foam, 32kg/m; density, or neoprene foam backer, size as recommended by manufacturer.

.4 Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene bond breaker tape which will not bond to sealant.

.14 Cleaning material for surfaces to receive sealant to be as recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant.

of 596





PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 LOCATIONS

Seal all exterior junctions and joints wherever required to close gap and wherever sealant

is essential to maintain the continuity of air barrier, water barrier, or non-rated smoke separation of wall with Sealant Type A. Areas to be caulked include: .1 Concrete to metal, masonry, concrete and precast concrete. .2 Masonry to metal, concrete, precast concrete, and masonry. .3 Metal to metal, masonry, concrete, and precast concrete. .4 Around pipes and conduit through foundation walls. .5 Between hollow metal frames and screens and adjacent materials. .6 Between metal panels and adjacent materials. .7 Between window and louvre frames and sills and adjacent materials. .8 At all control and expansion joints.

Seal all interior junctions and joints wherever required to close gap and wherever sealant

is essential to maintain the continuity of air barrier, water barrier, or non-rated smoke separation of wall with Sealant Type B. Areas to be caulked include: .1 Concrete to metal, masonry, concrete and precast concrete. .2 Masonry to metal, concrete, precast concrete, and masonry. .3 Metal to metal, masonry, concrete, and precast concrete. .4 Around pipes and conduit through walls. .5 Between hollow metal frames and screens and adjacent materials. .6 Between window and louvre frames and sills and adjacent materials. .7 At all joints between millwork and masonry, to provide neat junction. .8 At junction between all counters and/or splashbacks and adjacent substrate with

neat 3mm bead. .9 At all control and expansion joints.

Seal with Sealant Type C at the following locations:

.1 Around access panels in ceramic tile faced walls with a neat 3mm bead.

.2 Around perimeter of piping penetration at tile work.

.3 At junctions between all counter tops and/or splashbacks and adjacent substrate in washrooms, with neat 3mm bead.

.4 At junctions of lavatories, toilets, and other plumbing fixtures and adjacent substrate.

Seal with Sealant Type D at all interior non-moving joints to be painted.

Seal at all other vertical and horizontal joint locations with Sealant Type E.

Refer to Section 07 84 00, Firestopping and Smoke Seal, for location of fire stopping and fire-resistant caulking.

Refer to Section 09 29 00, Gypsum Board, for acoustic sealant work.

of 596





3.2 SUPERVISION .1 Unless specified otherwise herein comply with the recommendations and directions of the

manufacturer whose materials are being used on the work.

.2 Arrange for the sealant manufacturer's technical representatives to visit the site prior to the commencement of the sealing to meet with the Contractor and the Consultant.

.3 Sealant manufacturer to visit site periodically and to provide written reports to Consultant ensuring sealant is in accordance with good trade practice, the manufacturer's recommendations and the intent of this Specification.

3.3 PROTECTION

.1 Protect installed work of other trades from staining or contamination. 3.4 PREPARATION

.1 Install sealants only when surfaces and ambient temperatures are suitable for the

material used, as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

.2 Clean all joints and spaces to be sealed.

.3 Ensure that surfaces are structurally sound, free from grease, chalk or other contaminants which may adversely affect the adhesion of the sealing materials. Use dry oil free clean compressed air stream if necessary to clean out the joint.

.4 Clean surfaces with a solvent or cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the

sealant materials.

.5 Remove chalk lines completely. Do not place clear sealant over coloured chalk lines.

.6 Test materials for indications of staining or poor adhesion before any sealing is commenced.

.7 Submit colour chart to Consultant and obtain his written instructions for colours and

locations of colours.

3.5 PRIMING .1 If recommended by the manufacturer of the sealing materials, prime joints to prevent

staining, or to assist the bond, or to stabilize porous surfaces.

.2 Apply primer with a brush which will permit the priming of all joint surfaces.

of 596





3.6 BACKUP MATERIAL

.1 Apply bond breaker tape where required to manufacturer’s instructions. .2 Install joint back-up to achieve correct joint depth and shape, with approximately 30%

compression.

3.7 MIXING

.1 Mix materials in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions. 3.8 MASKING

.2 Where necessary to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces, mask the areas

adjacent to the joints with masking tape.

3.9 INSTALLATION .1 Install joint backing materials at all locations as detailed or where required by sealant

manufacturer's printed directions.

.2 Install a bond breaker tape or packing over asphalt impregnated fibre board as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

.3 Ensure that the correct sealant depth is maintained.

.4 Finished joints shall be free of wrinkles, sags, air pockets, ridges and embedded impurities.

.5 Tool all sealant surfaces to produce a smooth surface.

.6 Remove droppings and excess sealant as work progresses and before material sets.

.7 Sealing materials shall be gun grade or tool grade consistency to suit the joint conditions.

.8 Commence sealing only after all adjacent surfaces have been painted under Painting

Section. 3.10 CLEANING

Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave work neat and clean. Remove excess

sealant and droppings using recommended cleaners as work progresses. Remove masking after joint tooling.

END OF SECTION

of 596


DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

08 11 13 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES



Sealants Section 07 92 00 Glazing Section 08 80 00 Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00 Painting and Coating Section 09 90 00 Electrical Division 26, 27, 28

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

Supply and install all hollow metal products including doors, frames, screens and sidelight assemblies with provision for glazed, paneled or louvered openings, fire labelled and non-labelled, as scheduled or shown on the Drawings.

Work shall include the following: .1 Door cutouts, complete with reinforcing, stops and closers required for glazing. .2 Reinforcing for Finishing Hardware. .3 Supply all necessary fastening and anchoring devices for above items. .4 Steel closure pieces at metal panels, steel columns, horizontal members, and

hollow metal frames and screens. Refer to Drawings. .5 Metal panels in hollow metal frames. .6 Provision of zinc-rich coating on all exterior steel doors, frames and screens. .7 Fire rated and labelled doors, frames, & screens where noted on schedule. .8 Supply and install HSS and channel reinforcing members where shown at

screens and door frames/sidelights. .9 Supply and installation of transfer grilles and door louvres, where indicated on

Door and Frame Schedule; fire labelled where door rating is indicated. .10 Supply and install door silencers on metal frames.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 CAN4-S104 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies .2 CAN4-S105 Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Meeting

the Performance Required by CAN4-S104 .3 CAN4-S106 Standard Method for Fire Tests of Window and Glass

Block Assemblies .4 Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association (CSDMA)

.1 Recommended Specifications for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames

.2 Recommended Dimensional Standards for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames

.3 Recommended Specifications for Sound Retardant Steel Doors and Frames

.4 Canadian Fire Labelling Guide for Commercial Steel Door and Frame Products

.5 Guide Specification for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames .5 CGSB 82.5 Insulated Steel Doors .6 CSA A101 Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation for Buildings

of 596





.7 CSA W59 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)

.8 ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated Zinc Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

.9 ANSI A250.4 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors Frames and Frame Anchors

.10 ANSI A115.IG Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware

.11 ANSI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames

1.4 PERFORMANCE

Doors and frames covered by this specification shall be certified as meeting Level “A” acceptance criteria when tested in strict conformance with ANSI-A250.4-2011. Swing Test duration shall be 1,000,000 cycles. For door twist tests maximum deflection is not to exceed 32mm (1¼”) when loaded to 136kg (300 lbs), and permanent deflection is not to exceed 3.2mm (1/8"). Tests shall be conducted by an independent nationally recognized accredited laboratory.

Fire labelled product shall be provided for those openings requiring fire protection and temperature rise ratings, as determined and scheduled by the Consultant. Doors, frames, transom frames and sidelight assemblies shall be tested in strict accordance with CAN4-S104. Product shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories of Canada under an active Factory Inspection Program and shall be constructed as detailed in Follow-Up Service Procedures issued to the manufacturer.

Should any door or frame specified by the Consultant to be fire rated, not qualify for labelling due to design, hardware, glazing or any other reason, advise the Consultant before manufacturing commences.

Product quality shall meet standards set by the Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers

Association. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Supply all steel door and frame product from one manufacturer Member Company of the

CSDMA.

CSDMA Specification 08 11 13 “Commercial Steel Doors and Frames” is the minimum fabrication standard for this section, as if printed in its entirety herein, except where specified otherwise.

Handle and install product in strict compliance with CSDMA 08 11 13, DHI A115.IG and

NFPA 60.

A cash allowance is included in the tender price to cover cost of an independent inspection company, to be selected by Consultant. Allowance is the responsibility of the Contractor and any ensuing deficiency correction costs are the responsibility of the supplier and/or the installer(s), as determined by the inspection report. The Owner

of 596





reserves the right to have inspection include manufacturing facilities, and work in progress for this project, prior to award of contract or Substantial Performance of the contract.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

Submit confirmation that the manufacturer can label all fire rated doors, frames, and screens, glazed with the fire rated glass to be used on the project, for the fire separation required.

Prepare and submit shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 23, and show the following: .1 Door and frame schedules, identifying each unit, with door numbers referencing

the numbering in the contract documents. .2 Provide columns for Stock Code Numbers for both doors and frames. .3 Typical and special details; including mortises, reinforcements, anchorages,

locations of exposed fasteners, openings (glazed, panelled or louvered) and arrangement of hardware.

.4 Materials and finishes; including steel, core, material thickness.

.5 Hardware preparation.

.6 Frame anchorage details.

.7 Submit manufacturer's standard catalogue data for specified products demonstrating compliance with referenced standards.

.8 Other pertinent information

Submit information on standard shop drawing sheets as approved by the Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers Association.

Shop drawings for hollow metal screens over 8m2 in size, and for all screens which are required by code to be designed as guards at variations in floor level, must be sealed by a professional engineer, registered in the Province of Ontario.

Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

Operation and Maintenance Data: Include methods for maintaining installed products

and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.

1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING

Matchmark doors, panels, frames and windows with Stock Code Numbers as shown on

the Door Schedule. If Stock Code Numbers are not shown on the Schedule, matchmark with Door Numbers.

Deliver, store and handle components so as to prevent damage, distortion and corrosion.

Store Steel Frames under cover, raised on wood skids at least 100mm above grade, and as required to prevent damage and rusting. Store assembled frames in an upright position. Stack frames to prevent twisting; maximum 5 units per stack. Provide minimum

of 596





6mm airspace between frames to permit air circulation. Covers must be vented so as to avoid a build-up of humidity within.

Doors to be delivered to site immediately prior to installation. Store doors protected at corners to prevent damage or marring of finish. Store in upright position, in enclosed, dry space, in a manner to prevent rust and damage. Use vented covers.

1.8 WARRANTY

Provide an extended warranty of three (3) years from date of Substantial Performance

against defects of workmanship including failure of welded seams or of reinforced hinge anchorage plates. Work showing defects during this period shall be repaired or replaced without cost to the owner.


General: All materials shall be new and suitable for their various purposes and shall be

free from flaws and imperfections.

All doors, frames, and screens shall be from one manufacturer. Only the following manufacturers will be accepted: .1 Manufacturers:

.1 Fleming Baron Door Products (Assa Abloy)

.2 Daybar Industries Ltd.

.3 All Steel Doors

.4 Gensteel Doors

.5 Trillium Steel Doors

.6 Vision Hollow Metal

.2 Manufacturers must be able to provide and label the fire rated doors, frames, and screens required for this project, using the fire glass specified. If the manufacturer carried in the tender is not capable of providing the fire labelled products, the Contractor will be required to use one of the other listed manufacturers for the work, at no additional cost to the Owner.

.3 Sheet Steel: .1 General: cold rolled, carbon steel, stretcher levelled. Steel to have

hardness of Rockwell 'B' maximum 65 (ASTM E103) suitable for forming and bending without metal or coating fracture.

.2 ASTM A65 3/A653M commercial grade tension levelled hot-dipped galvannealed steel sheet, coating designation Z275

.4 Steel Thicknesses: .1 Doors:

of 596





.1 1.6mm (16 ga) for exterior, high use and oversize doors

.2 1.3mm (18 ga) for other interior doors .2 Panels: 1.3mm (18 ga) .3 Frames: 1.6mm (16 ga) .4 Hinge Reinforcement: 3.5mm (10 ga)

.5 Door Materials:

.1 Other interior doors and panels up to 3m2 and maximum width of 1200mm or maximum length of 3000mm: .1 Doors to be Fleming D-Series, 18 gauge. .2 Interior Doors to be reinforced with continuous interlocking steel

ribs.

.6 Door Reinforcement: Reinforce all steel doors with 20 ga. vertical interlocking weld steel stiffeners at 150mm o.c., spot welded to face sheets.

.7 Frame reinforcement: .1 Reinforce frames for high frequency hinge preparation. .2 Stiffen all mullions and hinge jambs with continuous 3.5mm channel

where continuous hinges are required. .3 Reinforce and provide cut outs and boxes for security devices. .4 Reinforce for overhead stops.

.8 Exterior Top Caps: galvanized steel caps, flush with top of door. .9 Zinc Rich Coating: ZRC 221 Cold Galvanizing Compound by ZRC Worldwide,

low VOC coating, or equivalent approved by the Consultant. .10 Metal Filler: Two component epoxy type. .11 Primer: Rust inhibitive primer .12 Glass Stop Screws: Oval head, cadium plated, self-tapping steel screws. Other

mechanical locking methods may be used but shall be detailed on Shop Drawings for review.

.13 Door Silencers: Rubber - Ives SR64 or approved equal.

2.2 FABRICATION

General .1 Dissimilar metals in contact, or metals which will be in contact with concrete or

masonry when installed, shall be insulated one from another by methods and materials required for such results, as approved by the Consultant.

.2 Components shall be the types and sizes shown on the Drawings.

.3 Reinforce components, where required, for the installation of Finishing Hardware. Drill and tap to suit templates.

.4 Prepare doors and frames for the installation of the security system. Confirm requirements with Consultant.

.5 Ensure adequacy of anchoring devices.

.6 No patching, plugging, skimming or other such means of overcoming defects, discrepancies or errors shall be resorted to without written permission of the Consultant.

of 596





.7 Fabricate components from clean steel, free of rust and scale, which has been thoroughly degreased.

.8 The dimensions shown on the Drawings are the full rebate size of the frame.

.9 In addition to specified requirements for hollow metal doors and frames, fire doors and frames shall comply with the Underwriters Laboratories requirements for the specified rating and be provided with the appropriate labels.

.10 All areas where shop applied zinc-rich coating has been damaged on site shall immediately be cleaned and touched up with the same zinc-rich coating product.

.11 Steel framed doors, screens and windows are to be glazed as specified in Section 08 81 00. Exterior and acoustic doors and screens are to be prepared for double glazed units.

Edge Clearances

.1 Unless otherwise specified, allow edge clearances in accordance with Canadian Manufacturing Specifications for Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers Association.

.1 Where hardware items are to be attached to, or mortised into, bottom edges of doors, provide proper clearance between door and floor or threshold to accommodate such hardware.

Hardware Preparation .1 Refer to Hardware Schedule, included in Section 08 71 00, and prepare doors for

hardware listed. .2 Templated hardware: prepare work in accordance with templates supplied in

Section 08 71 00. Prepare doors for mortice locksets according to Hardware Schedule

.3 Reinforce doors and frames for concealed, mortised and surface mounted hardware in accordance to "Thickness of Steel for Component Parts" in the "Canadian Manufacturing Standards for Steel Doors and Frames", published by the Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association.

.4 Prepare doors and frames for security system where noted.

.5 At oversized door locations, provide minimum 4 butt hinge preparations.

.6 Prepare all exterior doors and vestibule doors and frames for four hinges.

Hollow Metal Doors and Panels .1 Doors and panels shall be of seamless, continuously welded construction with no

visible seams or joints on faces. Doors to be 44.4mm minimum thickness. .2 Secure edge seams with suitable continuously welded seams to the approval of

the Consultant. .3 Interlocking seams for doors shall be fully seam welded, for full length of door. All

welding to be ground smooth. .4 Core construction:

.1 All interior doors shall have steel reinforcing.

.2 Temperature Rise Rated (TRR): Solid slab core of non-combustible, inorganic composite to limit temperature rise on the “unexposed” side of door to 250(C at 30 or 60 minutes, as required by governing building code requirements and determined and scheduled by the Consultant

.5 Welds shall be ground, filled, and dressed smooth to provide an invisible joint and smooth flush surface.

.6 Fully reinforce doors as required for specified hardware.

of 596





.7 Close top and bottom edges of doors with a continuous, recessed, minimum 1.5mm thick steel channel, extending full width of door and welded to both faces. At exterior doors, provide an additional flush closing channel at top edge and, where required for attachment of weather stripping, a flush closure at bottom edge. Provide similar closure channel at all stair doors.

.8 Surround openings in doors with minimum 1.5mm thick steel edge channels, welded to both face sheets.

.9 Vertical edge profile for single acting swing doors: bevelled 3mm in 50mm.

.10 Glazing Stops: .1 Equip glazed doors with minimum 0.9mm steel glazing stops, mitred and

welded at corners. Where least dimension of stop is less than 12mm, make stop from solid square bar.

.2 Glazing stops at outside of exterior doors and at secure side of interior doors shall be rendered non-removable by welding to door. Secure removable stops with screws.

.3 Glazing stops may be mechanically locked in place, providing details have been reviewed on Shop Drawings.

.4 Glazing stops at fire rated doors and screens shall conform to the requirements of the tested assemblies.

.11 Fabricate exterior panels with a full width steel drip on the outer, lower edge.

.12 Doors for installation in channel frames shall be double-depth mortised to accommodate both butt flanges.

Steel Frames .1 Frames shall be of sheet steel, formed profiles shown on the Drawings. Fleming

D Series for interior, Fleming H Series for exterior. .2 Fabricate frames in sections as large as practicable to minimize field jointing.

Internally reinforce all mullions and hinge jambs with 1.3mm channel. .3 Steel thickness: 1.6mm (16 ga.) galvanized steel. .4 Glazing stops shall be as specified for doors above. .5 Sidelight framing shall be of same metal and thickness as adjacent door frame. .6 Assemble components with accurately cut joints. Mitre outside corner joints of

frames. Continuously weld joints on inside of profile; grind welds flush and sand to smooth uniform surface. Provide semi-rigid insulation to exterior frames.

.7 Tack weld two (2) removable 1.2mm steel spreader channels to inside faces of door frames at base, for protection during shipping.

.8 Provide adjustable base clips at bottom of each door jamb for anchorage to floor.

.9 Provide button type rubber silencers; three per strike jamb of single doors: two per head member of double door frames.

.10 Prepare door frames for ANSI strike, where doors to be fitted with latchsets or lockets.

.11 Anchors: Provide clip angles at base of jambs for anchoring to floor. Provide mullion floor anchors for base of all vertical mullions. Jamb and mullion anchors shall be of appropriate design, location and quantity to comply with fire protection rating requirements of all frames. Provide appropriate jamb anchors for type of wall construction as detailed. Locate anchors immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement directly opposite on the strike jamb and spaced as follows.

.12 Masonry Anchors: .1 At interior frames, provide masonry anchors of 1.5mm galvanized

corrugated tee anchors or 3mm diameter galvanized wire anchors -

of 596





supplied loose, at rate of 3 per jamb up to 2.2m high; one additional per jamb for each 0.6m over 2.2m high. Frames for observation windows shall be provided with 2 anchors per jamb.

.13 Gypsum Board Anchors: .1 At interior frames, provide 4 anchors for frame opening height up to

2300mm and 5 anchors for frame opening height from 2300 to 2450mm. Frame opening height over 2450mm, provide 5 anchors plus one additional anchor for each 600mm or portion thereof over 2450mm.

.2 At interior frames, provide channel stud anchors of 1.5mm galvanized Fleming Combination Steel Stud Anchors.

.14 Provide two 38mm by 38mm by 4.8mm thick steel stiffening angles in the head member of frames for two or more doors totalling over 1980mm, wide. Provide necessary vertical stiffeners where required and carry to structure above. Provide stiffener angles in all exterior door jamb with sidelights and in all centre mullions between doors.

.15 Mounting bars for sidelights shall be as detailed on the Drawings and shall be completely filled with glass fibre insulation.

2.3 INTERIOR WINDOWS AND SCREENS

Supply and install steel windows where indicated on drawings. Window frames shall be similar to door frames and as detailed on drawings.

Steel framed windows are to be glazed as specified in Section 08 81 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

Store doors and frames as specified under item, Product Handling, above.

Silencers, gaskets, etc., are to be installed in holes in frames prior to installation of frames; so to avoid filling these holes with grout during installation.

Keep steel surfaces free of grout, tar, other bonding materials, and sealers; clean surfaces immediately following installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Frame and Screen Installation .1 Remove all steel spreaders, which are provided to avoid damage during

shipping. Provide wood spreaders at base and midpoint of frames. Wood spreaders to be min. 38 x 89mm lumber, notched to clear frame stops; width to be equal to opening between jambs at header level. Wood spreaders to remain in place until frames are set permanently in walls.

.2 Set frames and screens plumb, square, aligned, without twist and at correct elevation. Maximum allowable limits of distortion shall be as follows:

of 596





.1 Plumbness: Not more than 1.6 mm out of plumb, measured using a line from the intersection of vertical members and the head to the floor.

.2 Squareness: Not more than 1.6 mm difference between diagonal measurements between corners.

.3 Alignment: Not more than 1.6 mm, measured on jambs, through a horizontal line parallel to the plane of the wall.

.4 Twist: Not more than 1.6 mm, measured at face corners of jambs, on parallel lines perpendicular to the plane of the wall.

.3 After installation, fill countersunk screw heads flush with frame and sand smooth ready for painting. Fill exterior frames with glass fibre batt insulation. Cooperate with masonry trade to fill interior frames with mortar.

.4 Where large screens are assembled on site, they must be joined by continuously welded seams, ground smooth. Provide formed covers for structural columns built into screens.

Door Installation .1 Install hollow metal doors plumb and true. .2 Co-ordinate installation of hardware. .3 Adjust operable parts to ensure proper operation. Lubricate using a suitable

lubricant compatible with door and frame coatings. .4 Install hollow metal panels with concealed fastenings.

3.3 TOUCH UP

Remove rust, clean and touch up any damaged galvanizing with "ZRC 221" coating.

Remove rust, clean and touch up any damaged paint with approved rust inhibitive primer.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before Owner's acceptance.

Remove construction debris associated with this work from project site, and dispose of in accordance with applicable laws.

Protect installed products and finished surfaces from damage during construction.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596



08 42 29 – AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS



This section includes automatic entrance door systems comprising the following:

.1 Sliding doors, frames and adjoining screens and transoms for the exterior entrance and for the interior vestibule entrance secured to the new aluminum curtain wall frame.

.2 Glass and glazing.

.3 Door hardware.

.4 Operator equipment.

.5 Control system.

.6 Perimeter sealant.


General Requirements Division 01 Sealants: Sealant materials and installation requirements. Section 07 92 01 Electrical: Electrical conduit, wiring, boxes and wiring devices. Division 26

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Automatic Door Equipment: Electro-Mechanically operated with motion detector, presence sensor and integral sensing device.

Type of Door Operations: Fully automatic sliding doors with emergency release hardware allowing active leaves to swing in the direction of egress.

Door: Single Sliding.

Traffic Movement: Two-way traffic. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Design automatic entrance doors as emergency egress and to comply with the OBC.


Automatic door equipment to accommodate high frequency pedestrian traffic and weight of doors.

Operator Equipment: CSA approved.

Operating Hardware: ULC listed and labeled.

of 596





Design framing members to withstand their own weight, weight of glass, and loads

imposed by motion of operable elements.

Provide expansion joints to accommodate movement in door, door frame and screen framing system, and between system and building structure, caused by structural movements, and dynamic loading and release of loads, without permanent distortion, damage to infills, racking of joints, or breakage of seals.

Provide for dimensional distortion of components during operation.

Provide manual operation for opening and closing of doors during electrical power failure

and when power is manually switched off.

Provide fully adjustable operators for opening and closing speeds.

Provide framing members and finished metal sheets with uniform appearance and colour. 1.6 SUBMITIALS

Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit Shop Drawings under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.

.2 Indicate on Shop Drawings, layout, dimensions, elevations, detail sections of members and sill conditions, materials, finishes, recesses, hardware including mounting heights, anchors and reinforcements, provisions for expansion and contraction, methods of joining sheet metal and joint locations, glass types and glass thicknesses, glazing details, types of sealants, details of other pertinent components of the work, and adjacent construction to which work of this section is attached. Identify installation tolerances required, assembly conditions, routing of service lines, locations of operating components, controls and boxes. Indicate door signs.

.3 Provide manufacturer's technical Product data for door units, framing systems and operators for each type of entrance required. Include fabrication methods, finishing, hardware and operator sizes, roughing-in and wiring diagrams, parts lists, accessories and other components. Include data substantiating that system will perform as specified.

Samples: .1 Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00 - Submittals. .2 Submit two samples of each required aluminum finish on 300 mm long sections

of extrusions and 150 mm by 150 mm sheet/plate. Where colour and texture variations are anticipated, include two or more units in each set of samples indicating limits of variations.

.3 Submit two 300 mm by 300 mm samples of each type of glass.

Manufacturer's Instructions: .1 Submit manufacturer's templates, diagrams and installation instructions under

provisions of Section 01 33 00 - Submittals. Furnish accepted data to fabricators and installers of related work, as necessary for coordination of the installation.

of 596





1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section

01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

Include manufacturer's parts lists, servicing frequencies, instructions for adjustment and operation applicable to each type of component or hardware, and name, address and telephone number of nearest authorized service representative.


Drawings indicate sizes, spacings of members, profiles and dimensions required. Minor

deviations will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's standard Products when deviations do not materially detract from the design concept or intended performance, as instructed by the Consultant.

1.9 QUALIFICATIONS

Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of automatic entrance door operating equipment and framing assemblies.

Installer: Company which is an authorized representative of the automatic entrance door manufacturer for both the installation and maintenance of the type of units specified and with three years documented servicing and installing experience.

1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Conform to OBC requirements for automatic release of control drive unit to permit manual operation of emergency exit doors.

1.11 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

Convene a pre-installation conference one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01 31 00 - Project Management.

Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section.

Review conditions of installation, installation procedures, and coordination with related work.

of 596





1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Deliver doors and related components to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Cover exposed metal surfaces with pressure sensitive heavy protection paper or strippable plastic coating. Do not use materials of the type which will become bonded when exposed to the sun or leave residue. Use padded blankets or other approved protective wrapping for decorative metal work and other similarly finished exposed elements.

Do not deliver door units until work is ready for their installation.

Store and protect doors and related components under provisions of Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements.

Store inside building in dry protected area away from construction activity.

Protect finish surfaces from damage during handling, erection and at point of installation.

1.13 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

Field measure openings and clearances before fabrication to ensure proper fitting of

work; show measurements on final Shop Drawings.

Coordinate fabrication with construction progress to avoid delay.

If necessary, proceed with fabrication of non-critical items until measurements can be taken.

1.14 WARRANTY

Provide a warranty for automatic entrance doors in conformance with the General

Conditions, but for period of five years.

Warranty: Include coverage of repair or replacement of components or entire units which fail in materials or workmanship. Failures include but are not necessarily limited to, structural failures including excessive deflection, faulty operation of operators and hardware, deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

1.15 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Furnish complete service and maintenance of operating equipment for one year from date of Substantial Performance of the Work.

of 596





1.16 EXTRA MATERIALS .1 Provide wrenches and tools required for maintenance of equipment.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

Exterior and Interior Automatic Entrance Door Systems:

.1 Assa Abloy Entrance Systems, Besam SL500, Overhead Concealed Full Breakout Narrow Stile Bi-Part Sliding Door System with fixed sidelites.

.2 Model: SL500 OC2-16. .2 Size: Overall Frame Width 4876.80mm, Door Opening Clearance 2133.60mm.

.3 Standard Height of 2279.70mm.

.4 Install into existing exterior door opening and interior door opening where existing aluminum door and frames were removed.

2.2 MATERIALS

Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by producer or finisher for type of use and finish indicated, Aluminum Association designation 6063-TS alloy. Provide frame extrusions with minimum 3 mm wall thickness, and door extrusions with minimum 3 mm wall thickness unless otherwise indicated; glazing stops and other applied trim extrusions with minimum wall thickness of 1.6 mm.

Aluminum Sheets: Alloy and temper recommended by producer or finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, cadmium plated steel, or other non-corrosive metal fasteners compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other items being fastened. For exposed fasteners (for hardware only), provide Phillips flat head screws with finish matching item being fastened.

Sealants and Gaskets:

.1 Types recommended and guaranteed by manufacturer to remain permanently elastic, non-shrinking and non-migrating, and required for fabrication and assembly of screen and door framing.

.2 Exposed Sealants and Backup Required for Installation on Site: In accordance with Section 07 92 01 - Sealants.

2.3 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

Doors and Adjacent Lights: clear, single pane of laminated glass.

Glass Thicknesses: Conform to OBC requirements, 6 mm minimum. Provide double insulated glazing units at exterior and interior automatic sliding door systems.

of 596





2.4 DOOR HARDWARE

Provide door manufacturer's standard heavy duty hardware items as indicated,

scheduled or required for operation of each door, of sizes, number and type recommended by manufacturer, for type of service indicated.

Deadlocks for Sliding Doors: Hookbolt type for sliding entrance doors with standard five pin tumbler mortise cylinder. Key cylinder to building keying system. Provide two point latching action with deadbolt into stile of opposing sliding pane and bottom bolt into threshold, for bi-parting doors. Finish to match door. Operation by key on outside, thumb turn inside.

Hinging and Latching Device for Break Away Sliding Door Panels: Type as recommended by door manufacturer.

Door Closers: Concealed spring closing device to return break away sliding panels to

closed position.

2.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATORS

Overhead operator for accommodating door action.

Fully adjustable without removal of doors. Provide adjustable speed control for checking opening and closing cycles and length of time door remains open.

Five Position Switch: Off - Exit Only - Auto - Reduced Opening - Hold Open switch at inside of sliding doors.

Emergency Operation: Break away swing feature to sliding doors with spring closing

device.

Emergency Stop: Equip operators with sensing device which shall cause the door to stop should the door encounter an obstruction.

Provide connections for power and control wiring.

Provide for manual operation when power is off.

Equip operators with current characteristics to suit building's electrical service.

2.6 OPERATOR POWER UNITS

Operation: Power open and power close operation.

Electro-Mechanical Type: self-contained, belt driven.

of 596





2.7 DOOR OPERATOR CONTROL SYSTEMS

Provide controls with detection patterns and sensitivity, for both operation and safety, of sizes and quantities required to suit Project.

Motion Detecting Control System: .1 Motion Detector: Manufacturer's standard, self-contained, sensing device to

activate door operator, mounted on both sides of sliding door header. Finish housing to match doors.

.2 Presence Sensor: Manufacturer's standard, self-contained, on both sides to prevent door from closing until door is clear of traffic, and to recycle sliding doors in openings interrupted by stalled or slow moving traffic. Finish housing to match doors.

.3 Electrical Interfaces: Provide devices which prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched or bolted.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

Door Signs: .1 Sign Material: Self-adhesive type for mounting on glass. .2 . 2 Provide "IN EMERGENCY PUSH TO OPEN" sign on power operated sliding

doors with breakaway swinging leaves; red background with contrasting letters. .3 Provide "AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR" sign on each side of power operated

sliding door leaves; red horizontal background strip with minimum 25mm high contrasting letters, each end of horizontal strip with arrow pointing toward nearest door stile. Locate sign centrally on door leaf 900mm to 1.5 m above floor.

2.9 FABRICATION

Prefabricate automatic entrance doors as packaged units complete with doors, sidelights, frames, transoms where indicated, door operators and related components, hardware, and accessories. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware applications and other work before shipment to project site.

Construct doors, transom panels, frames and screens to profiles and maximum face sizes indicated.

Provide reinforcement for strength, stiffness and connections. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with non-metallic separators to prevent lock-up of joints. Use structural steel channel sections within void space of framing sections as required.

Fit intersecting members to flush hairline joints and mechanically fasten or weld together, except where indicated otherwise. Grind welds smooth, flush and finish to match adjacent surfaces. Reinforce mechanically joined corners of doors by welding and spigotting or by one piece cast aluminum angle to produce sturdy door unit.

of 596





Conceal fastenings from view. Exposed fastenings where specified or indicated.

Form cut-outs, recesses, mortising or milling for finishing hardware and operators.

Reinforce with aluminum or galvanized steel.

Field apply isolation coating to aluminum, galvanized steel or prime coated steel in contact with dissimilar metals, and cementitious materials. Touch-up damaged or scratched surfaces or steel with appropriate primer.

Manufacturer's nameplates on doors, frames, screens are not permitted. Place

manufacturer's name plates in semi-concealed locations.

Fabricate doors, frames and screens by same manufacturer.

Provide interlocking snap-in type glazing stops for dry glazing.

Shop install hardware, except surface mounted hardware. Remove only as required for final finishing operations, and for delivery and installation of work at project site.

2.10 FINISHES

Finish exposed surfaces of aluminum components in accordance with Aluminum

Association Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. Anodic Finish: Designation AA-A41. Colour to be clear.

Exposed Operator and Components: Finish matching door and door hardware finish.

Steel Brackets and Reinforcing Steel and Steel Anchors: One coat of steel primer for interior conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

Verify surfaces, openings, and recesses are ready to receive work, and opening

dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings.

Verify power supply is available and rouged-in to power operated devices.

Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION

Install doors, frames, and screens in accordance with Shop Drawings and manufacturer's

instructions.

of 596





Coordinate installation of components with related and adjacent work.

Set work plumb, square, level, free from warp, twist and superimposed loads.

Securely anchor work in required position.

Brace frames rigidly for building-in. Provide temporary horizontal spreaders at third points

of door openings to maintain frame width. Vertically support at centre, heads of openings over 1.2 m wide. Remove temporary bracing after framing is set.

Apply isolation coating to separate aluminum and primed or galvanized steel surfaces at

points of contact with cementitious materials.

Maintain clearances between head members and structure to ensure that structural loads are not transmitted to frames.

Install hardware using templates provided by hardware supplier.

Install door operator system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including

controls and control wiring.

Set tracks, header assemblies, operating brackets, rails and guides level and true to location, with adequate anchorage for permanent support.

Install glass using dry glazing method.

Secure interior automatic sliding door assembly to new curtain wall framing. Framing

clips by curtain wall manufacturer as required to secure frame. 3.3 SEALANT APPLICATION

Install perimeter sealant and backup materials, in compliance with requirements of

Section 07 92 01 - Sealants.

3.4 ADJUSTING

After repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days of use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles), readjust door operators and controls for optimum, smooth operating condition and safety. Lubricate hardware, operating equipment and other moving parts.

3.5 CLEANING

Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Exercise care to avoid damage to coatings.

of 596





Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces.

Wash exposed surfaces with mild solution of detergent and warm water, using soft, clean wiping cloths. Remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.

Remove excess sealant by moderate use of solvent, of type acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

Demonstrate operation, operating components, adjustment features, and lubrication requirements to Owner under provisions of Section 01820 - Demonstration and Training.

3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01 56 00 - Temporary Controls.

END OF SECTION

of 596

ward99 architects Page 1 of 9


08 80 00 – GLAZING



.1 Glazing for hollow metal doors and screens

.2 Glazing for interior and exterior sliding doors and screens. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

General Requirements Division 01 Sealants Section 07 92 00 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 11 13 Automatic Entrance Doors Section 08 42 29

1.3 REFERNCES .1 ASTM-D2240-97, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. .2 ASTM-E84-98, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials. .3 ASTM-E330-97, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. .4 CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90, Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass. .5 CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91, Flat, Clear Float Glass. .6 CAN/CGSB-12.8-M90, Insulating Glass Units. .7 CAN/CGSB-12.9-M91, Spandrel Glass. .8 CAN/CGSB-12.11-M90, Wired Safety Glass. .9 CAN/CGSB-12.20-M89, Structural Design of Glass for Buildings. .10 CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One-Component, Elastomeric Chemical Curing. .11 CAN/CSA-A440.2-09, Fenestration Energy Performance. .12 Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA), Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating

Glass Units, 1997. .13 Glass Association of North America (GANA), Glazing Manual, 2005. .14 NFRC-100-2010, Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors. .15 NFRC-200-2010, Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible

Transmittance at Normal Incidence. .16 NFRC-400-2010, Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Air Leakage.


Glass and glazing work of this section shall conform to good glazing practice as

described in the IGMA-North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use and the GANA Glazing Manual.

Submit all documentation specified to show that all Products used meet or exceed the

requirements of these Specifications.

of 596

of 9 ward99 architects


08 80 00 – GLAZING


All glass shall bear manufacturer's labels identifying glass type and thickness. Labels

shall remain on glass until final cleaning.

Insulating glass manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of IGMA, and be prepared to submit evidence of current membership to the Consultant on demand.

Glazing Subcontractor shall be member in good standing of the Architectural Glass &

Metal Contractors Association or the Ontario Glass & Metal Association, and have a minimum of five years uninterrupted experience in successfully carrying out projects of similar size.

Energy performance calculations shall be prepared by qualified practitioners who are

prepared to submit evidence of their training and qualifications on demand.


Structural Design of Glass:

.1 Glass thickness: .1 Specified glass thicknesses are minimums. .2 Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service

conditions. .3 Provide glass lights in the thicknesses required to meet or exceed these

requirements, but not less than the minimum thickness specified. .2 Size glass units and glass thickness in accordance with CAN/CGSB-12.20. .3 Size glass to withstand wind loads, dead loads and positive and negative live

loads as measured in accordance with ASTM-E330. .4 Limit glass deflection to 1/175 of span to a maximum of 15mm with full recovery

of glazing materials. .5 Probability of Breakage:

.1 Vertical glazing – typical: 8 lights per 1000 for lights set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical.

Thermal and Optical Performance:

.1 Maximum centre-of-glass U-factor values for glazing Products shall be as specified in Part 2 of this section and shall be determined in conformance with CAN/CSA-A440.2 and NFRC-100.

.2 Maximum solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC) and minimum visible transmittance (VT) for glazing Products shall be as specified in Part 2 of this section and shall be determined in conformance with CAN/CSA-A440.2 and NFRC-200.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.

Submit all documentation and samples for review by Consultants at one time, prior to ordering glass products.

of 596



08 80 00 – GLAZING


Certification:

.1 Submit signed report and documentation, prepared by an independent CSA accredited agency, certifying compliance with specified thermal, optical, and air leakage requirements.

.2 Documentation shall include the following parameters for each exterior glazing system configuration: .1 Centre-of-glass coefficient of heat transfer (U-factor). .2 Solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC). .3 Visible transmittance (VT).

.3 Certification shall be based on full size sample testing and measurement or computer simulation and calculation in accordance with referenced standards.

.4 Submit specified certification documentation together with Shop Drawings.

Shop Drawings: .1 Submit Shop Drawings for the work of this section. .2 Shop Drawings shall include glass type, thicknesses, sizes, shapes, accessories,

locations, and glazing methods. .3 Shop Drawings shall include a glazing schedule listing glass types and

thicknesses for each size opening and location. .4 Shop Drawings shall identify the insulating glass unit (IGU) supplier. .5 Shop Drawings shall bear the seal and signature of the Professional Engineer

providing glazing design for the Glazing Subcontractor. .6 Submit a General Review Commitment Certificate for the work of this section as

may be required by the municipality or any authority having jurisdiction. .7 Letter of Compliance: Submit the necessary documentation indicating

compliance with the requirements of the Building Code and the approved drawings which formed the basis of the General Review Commitment Certificate.

Samples:

.1 Submit samples of spandrel glass colours for selection by the Consultant. Submit 300mm by 300mm size samples of each type of glass specified.

Product Data: .1 Submit Product data for the work of this section. .2 Provide the manufacturer’s transmittance, reflectance, and thermal

performance data for insulating glass units. .3 Submit letter from insulating glass fabricator stating current IGMA

compliance number and identifying the types of edge construction covered by that number.

.4 Manufacturers’ certification: .1 The respective manufacturers of specified glass products shall

submit with the window and curtain wall assembly Shop Drawings, written certification stating that all glass and glazing materials and requirements as detailed and specified on the Shop Drawings have been reviewed and approved for use relative to their specific application, dimensional design and profile parameters, and conformance to all requirements as detailed and as specified in the Drawings and Specifications.

.2 Certification shall indicate the Shop Drawings reviewed by enumerating sheet number, dates and revisions.

of 596



08 80 00 – GLAZING


.3 Identify any specified requirements that are in error or cannot

legitimately be met, and provide alternates that meet the intent of the Specifications for the Consultant’s approval.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION

Do not install any glazing until all nearby welding, grinding, sandblasting, waterproofing, mortar work and acid etching are complete.

Schedule activities such as welding, sandblasting and grinding of steel or concrete, mortar work, acid etching and any other work harmful to glass, to be completed before start of glass installation. When such activities must be carried out in the vicinity of stored or installed glass, provide hoarding or other suitable protection recommended by Glazing Subcontractor.

Report to the Consultant in writing any defects in existing work, or unsatisfactory site conditions. Start no work until conditions are satisfactory. Starting work shall imply acceptance of existing conditions and surfaces.

Glaze with compounds, sealants, or tapes only when glazing surfaces are at

temperatures recommended by the tape or sealant manufacturer, and when the substrates are free of moisture.

When temperature of glazing surfaces is below that recommended by sealant

manufacturer, obtain Consultant’s approval for glazing methods and protective measures which are to be used under these conditions.

Cooperate with other Subcontractors and with framing Supplier(s) to ensure the work of

this section is completed as specified.

1.8 WARRANTY

Warranty all glass to be free from defects in workmanship and materials of any kind for a period of ten (10) years.

Replace (including removal and installation) all glass found to be defective.


Float Glass:

.1 Conform to CAN/CGSB-12.3, Annealed glazing quality.

.2 6mm thick unless specified or indicated otherwise and 9.5mm thick where glass units span more than 1220mm in width.

Tempered Safety Glass (TGL):

of 596



08 80 00 – GLAZING


.1 Type 2 – tempered. .2 Class B – Float glass. .3 Category 1. .4 Minimum 6mm thick clear tempered glass conforming to CAN/CGSB 12.1.

Sealed Insulated Glazing (IGU) at exterior automatic entrance doors:

.1 Insulating glass units shall be IGMAC certified and labeled.

.2 IGU Seal: dual seal comprised of polyisobutylene primary seal with a secondary seal of silicone, butyl, polysulphide, or urethane.

.3 IGU Spacers: warm-edge spacer, comprised of rolled stainless steel and integral desiccant. Thermal conductivity of the spacer shall not be greater than 13.63 W/m∙K.

.4 Insulating Glass Units (IGU): to CAN/CGSB-12.8, double unit, 25mm minimum overall thickness. .1 Glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.1. .2 Glass thickness (minimum): 6mm each light. .3 Inner-cavity space thickness: 13mm, 90% Argon/10% air-filled. .4 Outer Pane: Tempered safety glass with low “E” coating on glass surface

number 2, clear. .1 AGC Flat Glass North America Ltd.: Comfort Ti-AC 36. .2 Cardinal Glass Industries: LoĒ2-272. .3 Guardian Industries: Sunguard Super Neutral 68. .4 PPG Canada Inc.: Solarban 60.

.5 Inner Pane: Tempered safety glass, clear.

.6 U-V Transmittance: maximum 32%.

.7 Visible Transmittance (VT): minimum 65%.

.8 Total Solar Energy Transmittance: maximum 35%.

.9 Total Solar Energy Reflectance: minimum 29%.

.10 Shading Coefficient (SC): maximum 0.46.

.11 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): maximum 0.40.

.12 Light to Solar Gain (LSG): minimum 1.75.

.13 Coefficient of Heat Transfer – U-factor (W/m2$K): .1 Winter nighttime: maximum 1.42. .2 Summer daytime: maximum 1.25.

Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM-D2240, to suit

glazing method, glass light weight and area.

Spacer Shims: Neoprene 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM-D2240, 75mm long by one half height of glazing stop by thickness to suit application. Self-adhesive on one face.

Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device,

10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM-D2240; coiled on release paper; size to suit glazing method, black colour.

Sealant: One-part neutral cure silicone to CAN/CGSB-19.13, custom colour selected by

the Consultant. .1 Dow Corning Corporation: 795 Silicone Building Sealant. .2 General Electric Canada Inc.: Silpruf Sealant.

of 596



08 80 00 – GLAZING


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Ensure fabricated glass will fit openings and that all required clearances to framing will be maintained.

Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.

Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. Ensure surfaces are free of moisture and frost.

Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect materials, before and after installation, from lime, mortar, water run-off from concrete or copper, careless handling of tools, weld spatter, acids, roofing tar, solvents, abrasive cleaners, and other items that could damage the glass surfaces. Do not rely on use of protective plastic films to protect materials.


Install all materials according to manufacturers’ instructions and reviewed Shop Drawings and best practices as described in IGMA and GANA glazing manuals. Ensure each material used is compatible with the material which it contacts.

Adjust operating sash before glazing. Glaze operating sash in the closed position. Sash to remain closed, and not be opened by any trade, until glazing materials have properly cured.

Provide specified edge and face clearances and glass bite.

Ensure all vent and weep holes and passages remain free of obstructions.

Follow sealant manufacturer's recommendations for proper joint design, including use of

joint fillers, primers, and bond breakers, as required to suit jobsite conditions.

Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances from glass and adjacent surfaces at completion of glazing work.

Provide safety markings to installed glass by attaching streamers or tape to face of sash. Do not apply tape directly to the glass. Do not mark glass with paint or any other substance that is hard to remove or could leave permanent stains.

Replace all defective glass products and glass damaged during installation at no cost to

the Owner.

of 596



08 80 00 – GLAZING


3.3 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND GASKET)

Glaze in accordance with window manufacturer's standard methods and as specified here.

Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 6 mm below sight line. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with sealant.

Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners.

Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of glass unit.

Install removable stops with gasket inserted between glazing and applied stops.

3.4 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT)

.1 Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 6mm below sight line Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with sealant.

.2 Apply heel bead of sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full

perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete continuity of air and vapour seal . .3 Place setting blocks at ¼ points, with edge block maximum 150mm from corners. .4 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel head of sealant with

sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of light or glass unit. .5 Install removable stops with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops

6mm below sight line. .6 Fill gap between glazing and stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing,

maximum 9mm below sight line. .7 Apply cap head of sealant along void between stop and glazing, to uniform line, flush with

sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.

3.5 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR- WET METHOD (SEALANT AND SEALANT)

.1 Place setting blocks at ¼ points and install glazing light or unit. .2 Install removable stops with glazing centered in space by inserting spacer shims both

sides at 600mm intervals, 6mm below sight line. .3 Fills gaps between glazing and stops with sealant to depth of bite on glazing, maximum 9

mm below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continue air and vapour seal. .4 Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.

of 596



08 80 00 – GLAZING


3.6 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR- DRY METHOD (GASKET AND GASKET)

.1 Glaze in accordance with aluminum door, entry screen and curtain wall manufacturer’s standard method.

3.7 INSTALLATION: INTERIOR - DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)

Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1.5mm above sight line.

Place setting blocks at 1/3 points, with edge block maximum 150mm from corners.

Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of light or unit.

Cut glazing tape to length and place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing, projecting 1.5 mm above sight line.

Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full

continuous contact.

Knife trim protruding tape. 3.8 PROTECTION

Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect stored glass and installed

glass, from lime, mortar, water run-off from concrete or copper, weld spatter, acids, roofing tar, solvents, abrasive cleaners, careless handling of tools, and any other activities by building trades that could permanently damage the glass surfaces.

Install protective cover to glazing where there is a high risk of damage. Use plywood, heavy Kraft paper or non-staining transparent plastic sheet. Do not let protective materials contact surface of glass. Consult with Glazing Subcontractor to determine appropriate protective measures.

Do not rely on use of adhesive plastic films to protect installed glass. When plastic sheeting is used, it must be transparent, suspended away from the surface of the glass, and be provided with adequate ventilation holes to prevent heat build-up.

3.9 GLAZING SCHEDULE

Hollow Metal Doors and Sidelites: .1 Specified in Section 08 11 13. .1 Glazed by this section. .2 Method (interior): Interior Dry (tape and tape).

Aluminum Automatic Entrance Doors (interior and exterior):

.3 Specified in Section 08 42 29.

.4 Glazed by Section 08 42 29.

of 596



08 80 00 – GLAZING


.5 Method: Exterior Dry (gasket and gasket).

3.10 CLEANING

As work progresses clean all glass, including fittings. Remove all setting and glazing compounds from adjacent surfaces. Remove all finger and hand prints and other soil.

Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances during construction.

Clean and wash glass by methods recommended by glass manufacturers.

All glass shall be cleaned immediately prior to the Consultant’s review for Substantial Performance and again immediately prior to occupancy of the building by the Owner.

Remove all protective materials, glazing materials, and other deposits from finished

surfaces.

Remove labels after work is complete.

Do not use vigorous cleaning methods. Avoid scratching glass.

Clean and restore stained or damaged surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Replace glass if cleaning is impossible.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596


DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

09 22 00 – NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 11 13 Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00 Acoustic Ceilings Section 09 51 00

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 CSA S136 North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

.2 CAN/ULC-S101 Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials

.3 AISI North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Product Data

ASTM International .1 A653/A653M

Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

.2 A641/A641M Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire

.3 A792/A792M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

.4 A1003 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members

.5 C645 Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members

.6 C754 Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products

.7 C840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board

.8 C841 Standard Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring

.9 C844 Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Base to Receive Gypsum Veneer Plaster

.10 C1002 Standard Specification for Steel-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs

.11 ASTM E90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements

.12 ASTM E413 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation

.13 E488 Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements

of 596





.14 E1190 Standard Test Methods for Strength of Power-Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members

Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute (CSSBI:

.1 Lightweight Steel Framing Technical Bulletin Volume 7, Number 1, Maximum Height Tables for Interior Non-Loadbearing Partitions.


Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: .1 For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-loadbearing interior

steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to CAN/ULS-S101.

.2 STC-Rated Assemblies: .1 For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413.

.2 Ensure that seismic performance and structural loading meet the requirements of the OBC and local authorities.


Handle and store materials carefully to prevent damage.

Obtain approval of proposed locations for stockpiling material. Provide any necessary temporary covers, skids and the like.

Do not install damaged or deteriorated material but remove from Site. 1.5 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES

Coordinate with other trades for the locations of items to be framed in and framed

around.

Co-ordinate with mechanical and electrical Trades to ensure that all services are installed prior to application of wall board.

Coordinate with mechanical and electrical trades for locations of access panels. Install access doors and panels supplied by those trades.

of 596






Metal framing shall be as manufactured by Bailey Metal Products or approved alternate;

to ASTM C645.

Metal Studs and Track: minimum 0.455mm (18 mils) thick steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM-A924/A924M, for screw attachment of gypsum board and with service access holes. Stud size/depth as indicated on drawings.

Metal Furring Channels: minimum 0.455 (18 mils) sheet galvanized steel channel and

accessories as manufactured by Bailey Metal Products, or approved alternate; to ASTM C645.

Cold Rolled Furring Channel: 20mm, x 12.7mm zinc coated channel weighing minimum

0.446 kg per m.

Cold Rolled Carrying Channel: 38mm x 15mm zinc coated channel weighing min 0.707 kg per m.

Hanger wire: minimum 3.77mm (9ga) galvanized steel wire.

Tie Wire: minimum 1.5mm (16 ga) galvanized soft annealed steel.

CGC Brand Screws (or approved equal) of type recommended by the board

manufacturer.

Thermal Break: Permanent adhesive faced rubberized cork, 3 mm thick by width of stud on channel to be used between masonry in exterior wall and metal furring channels.

Ceiling Anchors: Self drilling tie wire anchors, Phillips "Red Head" T-32 or approved

equal.

Floor and Ceiling Tracks: to ASTM-C645, in widths to suit stud sizes, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM-A924/A924M. .1 Typical Track: 32mm minimum flange height. .2 Shaft stud track: “J” shaped track with 57mm and 25mm legs. .3 Long-leg track: 50mm minimum flange height.

.12 Metal Channel Stiffener: 38mm by 19mm in size, 1.4mm thick cold rolled steel, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM-A924/A924M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERALS

Provide plumb, straight, level, rigid, and secure installation. Failing to achieve this result shall be cause for rejection and reinstallation of this work.

of 596





Where walls run parallel and under steel joists, the joists shall be framed both sides and

enclosed with gypsum board to provide sound barrier between rooms.

3.2 CEILING SUSPENSION

Do not regard grillage system indicated on drawings as exact or complete. The Specification for metal framing contained in CGC Gypsum Construction Handbook and ASTM C840 shall govern installation conditions not covered by this Specification. The more stringent specifications shall apply.

Hangers: .1 Install hangers for suspended wallboard ceilings to support the grillage

independent of walls, columns, pipes, ducts and the like. Erect plumb and securely anchor to the structure. Submit details of proposed method to the Consultant for approval. If so requested, test hangers to prove that anchorage is adequate to support the proposed loading. Erect hangers plumb and securely anchor to structural steel or support channels fastened to structural steel (DO NOT FASTEN TO STEEL DECK).

.2 Space hangers at 1200mm maximum o.c. along the carrying channels and not more than 150mm from ends (or as required to conform with fire tested assemblies where applicable).

Carrying Channels:

.1 Space channels at 1200mm maximum o.c. (or as required to conform with fire tested assemblies where applicable).

.2 Run channels transversely to structural framing members.

.3 Where splices are necessary, lap members at least 200mm and wire each end with two laps; avoid clustering or lining up splices.

.4 Attach to hangers by bending hanger under runner and securely wire in place with a saddle tie.

.5 Provide 25mm clearance between channels and abutting walls and partitions.

Cross Furring .1 Install drywall screw channels transversely across runner channels, joists or

other supports. .2 Space drywall screw channels at 600mm o.c. and not more than 150mm from

perimeter walls. Provide 25mm clearance between channels and abutting walls and partitions. Use closer spacing if so noted on drawings.

.3 Secure drywall screw channels to each support with approved clip or attachment; splice joints by messing minimum 200mm and tying channels together with double strand 16 gauge tie wire.

.4 Level drywall screw channels to a maximum tolerance of 4mm over 3600mm.

.5 Drywall shall not be fixed directly to open web steel joists and the like. Provide cross furring as specified.

Openings

of 596





.1 Frame openings with suitable channels; check clearances with respective Trades. Provide support for edges of boards at all cut-outs and openings in ceilings.

.2 Provide all additional hangers and supports for fixtures as required.

.3 Provide additional hangers and framing for enclosure of radiant heating panels.

Bulkheads .1 Fur out bulkheads in areas indicated and as required to conceal mechanical,

electrical or other services in rooms where drywall finishes are scheduled, and elsewhere if called for on drawings.

.2 Use methods and materials as previously specified in this section.

3.3 STEEL STUD SYSTEM (PARTITION) INSTALLATION

Conform to the guidelines for metal framing contained in The Gypsum Construction Handbook, CSA A.82.31, and these specifications. The most stringent requirements shall apply.

Attach metal runners at floor and ceiling to structural elements with suitable fasteners located 50mm from each end and spaced 600 mm. o.c. with toggle or molly bolts spaced 400mm o.c.

Position studs vertically, engaging floor and ceiling runners, and spaced 400mm o.c.,

unless otherwise noted on drawings. When necessary, splice studs with 200mm nested lap and one positive attachment per stud flange. Place studs in direct contact with door frame jambs, abutting partitions, partition corners and existing construction elements.

Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls install rubberized cork strip

between studs and wall surfaces to provide thermal break.

Anchor studs for shelf-walls and those adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections and corners to ceiling and floor runner flanges with an approved crimping tool. Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door or borrowed-light frames by bolt or screw attachment. Over metal door and borrowed-light frames, place horizontally a cut-to-length section of runner, with a web-flange bent at each end, and secure with one positive attachment per flange. Position a cut-to-length stud (extending to ceiling runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header.

Stiffen partitions exceeding 3m long or 2.7m high with 19mm. cold rolled channels. Fix

horizontally and provide the number of rows necessary to ensure a rigid installation. Provide other partition reinforcing necessary to support wall hung components, cupboards, closets and the like. Use 2 studs at jambs of openings and corners.

Where horizontal runs of service lines are to be installed within the partition, erect studs

with web openings aligned.

Provide reinforcing and necessary stiffeners to support hollow metal frames and screens. Reinforcing to be capable of supporting screens rigidly and solid without deflection.

of 596





3.4 CHASE WALL INSTALLATION

Align two parallel rows of floor and ceiling runners spaced apart as indicated. Attach to concrete slabs with concrete stub nails or power driven anchors 600 mm o.c. Attach to suspended ceilings with toggle or molly bolts 400mm o.c. Attach to wood framing with suitable fasteners 600mm o.c.

Align metal studs vertically in runners, 200mm o.c. with flanges in the same direction and with studs on opposite sides of chase directly across from each other. Anchor studs to floor and ceiling runner flanges with an approved metal crimping tool.

Cut cross bracing to be placed between rows of studs from gypsum panels, 400mm high by chase wall width. Space braces at quarter points not to exceed 600mm o.c. vertically and attach to stud webs with six 25mm screws 200mm o.c. maximum on each side.

Bracing with 64mm metal studs may be used in place of gypsum panels. Anchor web at

each end of metal brace to stud web with two 10mm pan head screws. When chase wall studs are not opposite, install metal stud cross braces 400mm o.c. horizontally and securely anchor each end to a continuous horizontal 64mm runner screw-attached to chase wall studs with the cavity.

Adapt cross bracing as necessary to avoid interference with service.

3.5 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION

Direct Furring Channel Attachment - Attach metal furring channels, vertically or

horizontally spaced 400mm o.c. to masonry or concrete surfaces with hammer-set ro power-driven fasteners or concrete stub nails staggered 600mm o.c. on opposite flanges. Nest channels 200mm at splices and anchor with two fasteners in each wing. Where furring channel is installed directly to exterior wall, install thermal break strip between furring channel and wall. For horizontally placed channels attach maximum 100mm from floor and ceiling.

Bracketed Furring Channel Attachment: .1 Attach adjustable wall furring brackets with serrated edges up, 900mm o.c.

horizontally, 1200mm o.c. vertically, within 100mm of columns or other abutting construction, within 150mm of floor and ceiling, and as required above and below openings. Use 50mm cut nails in mortar joints of brick or clay tile or concrete block, or in field of lightweight aggregate blocks; use 16mm concrete stub nails or power driven nails or other suitable fasteners in monolithic concrete. Place fastener in top hole of bracket.

.2 Lay cold-rolled channels horizontally with flanges down, on furring brackets, plumb with other channels, and tie with double strand 16 ga. or triple strand 18 ga. wire at each junction with cold rolled channel.

Free Standing Furring - In locations where wall furring is indicated as self-supporting, use steel studs and furring channels installed to provide a rigid frame to receive wall board.

of 596





3.6 CONSTRUCTION OF SOUND ATTENUATED PARTITIONS

Where sound insulated drywall partitions are indicated on the drawings, provide double stud wall, offsetting studs and wrapping acoustic insulation between studs.

3.7 CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE RATED PARTITIONS

Where fire rated construction is required, the framing shall be governed by rating required and material used in approved assemblies.

Provide 1 hour rated beam enclosures, where required, to ULC design.

3.8 CONSTRUCTION OF SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS

Apply gypsum panels of maximum practical length with long dimension at right angles to drywall furring channels. Position end joints over furring channel web and staggered in adjacent rows.

Fasten panels to drywall furring channels with screws spaced a maximum of 300mm o.c. in field of panels and along abutting ends and edges.

Provide framing and drywall finish in stairwells, where required to enclose underside of stairs and landings.

Where noted on plans, provide bulkheads with steel framing and drywall finish.

END OF SECTION

of 596



09 29 00 – GYPSUM BOARD



Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 11 13 Acoustic Ceilings Section 09 51 00 Painting and Coating Section 09 90 00

1.2 REFERENCES

ASTM International:

.1 ASTM C1396 Standard Specification for Gypsum Board

.2 ASTM C840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum board

.3 ASTM C1629 Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and Fibre-Reinforced Cement Panels

CAN/ULC-S101 Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building

Construction and Materials

Gypsum Association: .1 GA-214 Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish .2 GA-216 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products

The Gypsum Construction Handbook - CGC Inc.


Handle and store materials carefully to prevent damage. Materials must be delivered to site in their original, unopened packages.

Obtain approval of proposed locations for stockpiling material. Materials must be stored in an enclosed shelter providing protection from exposure to the elements. Provide any necessary temporary covers, skids and the like.

Store all panels flat.

Do not install damaged or deteriorated material but remove from Site.

Materials as delivered shall bear manufacturer's name, brand name of material and where applicable, ULC designation.

of 596





1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Do not apply gypsum board or joint filler to surfaces that are damp or contain frost.

During gypsum panel application and joint finishing, temperatures within work areas shall be within the range 12oC. to 25oC.

Provide adequate ventilation to carry off excess moisture 1.5 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES

Co-ordinate with mechanical and electrical Trades to ensure that all services are installed

prior to application of wall board.

Coordinate with mechanical and electrical trades for locations of access panels. Install access doors and panels supplied by those trades.

Co-ordinate with forces installing insulation and vapour barrier in exterior soffits. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

All materials to conform to ASTM C1396 unless specified otherwise. Except where noted

otherwise, products listed herein are produced by Canadian Gypsum Company (CGC). Equivalent products from Georgia Pacific (GP) and Certainteed will be accepted, subject to acceptance of equivalency by the Consultant.

Gypsum panels: .1 Typical panels to be 16mm thick abuse resistant and mould resistant, to ASTM

C1629. Sheetrock Mold Tough Abuse Resistant Firecode Core gypsum panels or GP ToughRock Fireguard X Mold-Guard Abuse Resistant gypsum board.

.2 Panels in gypsum board ceilings at high ceilings may be 13mm thick mould resistant panels; CGC Sheetrock Mold Tough or GP ToughRock Mold-Guard.

Metal Studs and Channels: minimum 0.455mm (26 ga) galvanized steel as manufactured by Bailey Metal Products or approved alternate; to ASTM C645.

Metal Furring Channels: minimum 0.455 (26ga) sheet galvanized steel channel and

accessories as manufactured by Bailey Metal Products, or approved alternate; to ASTM C645.

Cold Rolled Furring Channel: 20mm, x 12.7mm zinc coated channel weighing minimum

0.446 kg per m.

Cold Rolled Carrying Channel: 38mm x 15mm zinc coated channel weighing min 0.707 kg per m.

of 596





Cold Rolled Carrying Channel: 28 ga. galvanized steel with perforated flanges; one piece

per location.

Control Joint: CGC No. 093.

Hanger wire: minimum 3.77mm (9ga) galvanized steel wire.

Tie Wire: minimum 1.5mm (16 ga) galvanized soft annealed steel.

Screws: CGC Brand Screws (or approved equal) of type recommended by the board manufacturer.

Thermal Break: Permanent adhesive faced rubberized cork, 3 mm thick by width of stud

on channel to be used between masonry in exterior wall and metal furring channels. Joint Treatment Material:

.1 Joint compound, topping compound, laminating compound; to ASTM C474 and C475.

.2 Use material recommended by board and tape manufacturer for the proposed use.

.3 CGC Sheetrock or Durabond Setting-Type, for use with CGC fibreglass drywall tape.

Reinforcing Tape: .1 Paper or fibreglass mesh tape, as recommended by the panel manufacturer for

the panel type.

Finish materials .1 Over surface of glass mat faced boards, use level 5 finisher such as CGC Tuff

Hide.

Acoustic sealant: Quietseal Pro as manufactured by Quietrock, or equivaltent as manufactured by CGC, Tremco or Presstite Division of Interchemical Corporation for acoustic partitions.

Acoustic Insulation: AFB acoustic fire batt by Roxul or Thermafiber SAFB Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets (unfaced) from Owens Corning, to thickness shown on drawings, and as required to obtain required S.T.C. rating.

Ceiling Anchors: Self drilling tie wire anchors, Phillips "Red Head" T-32 or approved equal.

Drywall Reveals: Fry Reglet, reveal mouldings and “F” reveal mouldings, 13mm wide,

with baked on finish, as follows: .1 DRM-625-50 and DRM-50-50 .2 Aluminum alloy 6063 T5 with chemical conversion coating. .3 Colour to be selected by the Consultant.

Access Panels: Refer to mechanical and electrical. Rigidly secure frames to furring or

framing systems.

of 596





Stainless Steel Corner Guards:

.1 Gauge: Minimum16 gauge stainless steel wall guards in satin finish.

.2 Size: Flange width of 50mm and 1220mm in height.

.3 Type and Finish: Type 304 alloy with #4 satin finish.

.4 Mounting: Adhered to wall. Provide concealed fastening only.

.5 Acceptable product: Construction Specialties or equivalent product.

.6 Quantity and Location: Supply and install two (2) corner guards. Locations to be confirmed by the Consultant at exposed gypsum board finished corners in the area of the new reception counter.

.23 Isolation Hangers: Refer to Section 09 51 00 – Acoustic Ceilings. 24. Partition Clips: Provide partition clips to secure interior partitions to underside of

suspended acoustic ceiling assemblies. Acceptable Product to be provided by Armstrong.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

Provide plumb, straight, level, rigid, and secure installation. Failing to achieve this result shall be cause for rejection and reinstallation of this work.

Conform to The Gypsum Construction Handbook, ASTM C840, and these specifications. The most stringent requirements shall apply.

Where walls run parallel and under steel joists, the joists shall be enclosed both sides with gypsum board to provide sound barrier between rooms. Fill with minimum 100 mm acoustic batt insulation.

Install access panels supplied by mechanical and electrical contractors. Rigidly secure

panel frames to furring or framing systems. 3.2 CEILING SUSPENSION

Do not regard grillage system indicated on drawings as exact or complete. The

Specification for metal framing contained in CGC Gypsum Construction Handbook and ASTM C840 shall govern installation conditions not covered by this Specification. The more stringent specifications shall apply.

Hangers .1 Install hangers for suspended wallboard ceilings to support the grillage

independent of walls, columns, pipes, ducts and the like. Erect plumb and securely anchor to the structure. Submit details of proposed method to the Consultant for approval. If so requested, test hangers to prove that anchorage is adequate to support the proposed loading. Erect hangers plumb and securely anchor to structural steel or support channels fastened to structural steel (DO NOT FASTEN TO STEEL DECK).

of 596





.2 Space hangers at 1200mm maximum o.c. along the carrying channels and not more than 150mm from ends (or as required to conform with fire tested assemblies where applicable.

Carrying Channels .1 Space channels at 1200mm maximum o.c. (or as required to conform with fire

tested assemblies where applicable). .2 Run channels transversely to structural framing members. .3 Where splices are necessary, lap members at least 200mm and wire each end

with two laps; avoid clustering or lining up splices. .4 Attach to hangers by bending hanger under runner and securely wire in place

with a saddle tie. .5 Provide 25mm clearance between channels and abutting walls and partitions.

Cross Furring

.1 Install drywall screw channels transversely across runner channels, joists or other supports.

.2 Space drywall screw channels at 600mm o.c. and not more than 150mm from perimeter walls. Provide 25mm clearance between channels and abutting walls and partitions. Use closer spacing if so noted on drawings.

.3 Secure drywall screw channels to each support with approved clip or attachment; splice joints by messing minimum 200mm and tying channels together with double strand 16 gauge tie wire.

.4 Level drywall screw channels to a maximum tolerance of 4mm over 3600mm.

.5 Drywall shall not be fixed directly to open web steel joists and the like. Provide cross furring as specified.

Opening .1 Frame openings with suitable channels; check clearances with respective

Trades. Provide support for edges of boards at all cut-outs and openings in ceilings.

.2 Provide all additional hangers and supports for fixtures as required.

.3 Provide additional hangers and framing for enclosure of radiant heating panels.

Bulkheads .1 Furr out bulkheads in areas indicated and as required to conceal mechanical,

electrical or other services in rooms where drywall finishes are scheduled, and elsewhere if called for on drawings.

.2 Use methods and materials as previously specified in this section. Drywall panels at bulkheads shall be as specified for walls.

3.3 STEEL STUD SYSTEM (PARTITION) INSTALLATION

Conform to the guidelines for metal framing contained in The Gypsum Construction Handbook, CSA A.82.31, and these specifications. The most stringent requirements shall apply.

of 596





Attach metal runners at floor and ceiling to structural elements with suitable fasteners located 50mm from each end and spaced 600 mm. o.c. with toggle or molly bolts spaced 400mm o.c.

Position studs vertically, engaging floor and ceiling runners, and spaced 400mm o.c., unless otherwise noted on drawings. When necessary, splice studs with 200mm nested lap and one positive attachment per stud flange. Place studs in direct contact with door frame jambs, abutting partitions, partition corners and existing construction elements. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls install rubberized cork stip between studs and wall surfaces to provide thermal break.

Anchor studs for shelf-walls and those adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections and corners to ceiling and floor runner flanges with an approved crimping tool. Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door or borrowed-light frames by bolt or screw attachment. Over metal door and borrowed-light frames, place horizontally a cut-to-length section of runner, with a web-flange bent at each end, and secure with one positive attachment per flange. Position a cut-to-length stud (extending to ceiling runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header.

Stiffen partitions exceeding 3m long or 2.7m high with 19mm. cold rolled channels. Fix horizontally and provide the number of rows necessary to ensure a rigid installation. Provide other partition reinforcing necessary to support wall hung components, cupboards, closets and the like. Use 2 studs at jambs of openings and corners.

Where horizontal runs of service lines are to be installed within the partition, erect studs with web openings aligned.

Provide reinforcing and necessary stiffeners to support hollow metal frames and screens. Reinforcing to be capable of supporting screens rigidly and solid without deflection.

3.4 CHASE WALL INSTALLATION

Align two parallel rows of floor and ceiling runners spaced apart as indicated. Attach to

concrete slabs with concrete stub nails or power driven anchors 600 mm o.c. Attach to suspended ceilings with toggle or molly bolts 400mm o.c. Attach to wood framing with suitable fasteners 600mm o.c.

Align metal studs vertically in runners, 200mm o.c. with flanges in the same direction and with studs on opposite sides of chase directly across from each other. Anchor studs to floor and ceiling runner flanges with an approved metal crimping tool.

Cut cross bracing to be placed between rows of studs from gypsum panels, 400mm high by chase wall width. Space braces at quarter points not to exceed 600mm o.c. vertically and attach to stud webs with six 25mm screws 200mm o.c. maximum on each side.

Bracing with 64mm metal studs may be used in place of gypsum panels. Anchor web at each end of metal brace to stud web with two 10mm pan head screws. When chase wall studs are not opposite, install metal stud cross braces 400mm o.c. horizontally and securely anchor each end to a continuous horizontal 64mm runner screw-attached to chase wall studs with the cavity.

of 596





Adapt cross bracing as necessary to avoid interference with service.

3.5 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION

Direct Furring Channel Attachment - Attach metal furring channels, vertically or horizontally spaced 400mm o.c. to masonry or concrete surfaces with hammer-set ro power-driven fasteners or concrete stub nails staggered 600mm o.c. on opposite flanges. Nest channels 200mm at splices and anchor with two fasteners in each wing. Where furring channel is installed directly to exterior wall, install thermal break strip between furring channel and wall. For horizontally placed channels attach maximum 100mm from floor and ceiling.

Bracketed Furring Channel Attachment

.1 Attach adjustable wall furring brackets with serrated edges up, 900mm o.c. horizontally, 1200mm o.c. vertically, within 100mm of columns or other abutting construction, within 150mm of floor and ceiling, and as required above and below openings. Use 50mm cut nails in mortar joints of brick or clay tile or concrete block, or in field of lightweight aggregate blocks; use 16mm concrete stub nails or power driven nails or other suitable fasteners in monolithic concrete. Place fastener in top hole of bracket.

.2 Lay cold-rolled channels horizontally with flanges down, on furring brackets, plumb with other channels, and tie with double strand 16 ga. or triple strand 18 ga. wire at each junction with cold rolled channel.

Free Standing Furring - In locations where wall furring is indicated as self-supporting, use steel studs and furring channels installed to provide a rigid frame to receive wall board.

3.6 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD

Do not apply gypsum board until bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work are approved.

Apply all gypsum board parallel to framing. Position all ends over studs. Use maximum practical lengths to minimize end joints. Fit ends and edges closely, but not forced together.

Stagger joints on opposite sides of partition.

Apply single, double or triple layers of gypsum board to metal furring as indicated using screw fasteners.

Maximum screw spacing for single-ply gypsum board and face ply of 2-ply gypsum board

to be 300mm o.c.

Maximum spacing of screws for base-ply of 2-ply gypsum board over steel framing to be 300mm o.c. along edges of the gypsum board and 600mm o.c. into stud or furring channel in the field of the gypsum board.

of 596





Use cement board as backer board wherever tile is to be installed to walls of shower partitions.

3.7 ADHESIVE APPLICATION

Where gypsum board is called to be laminated to masonry walls, application shall

conform to Gypsum Association Publication GA-216-2013, Section 11, “Adhesive Application of Gypsum Panel Products to Interior Masonry, Concrete, or Brick Walls”.

Do taping and filling, as specified below, for paint finish.

3.8 CONSTRUCTION OF SOUND ATTENUATED PARTITIONS

Where sound insulated drywall partitions are indicated on the drawings, provide double stud wall, offsetting studs and wrapping acoustic insulation between studs. Apply one layer of specified soundproof wallboard, on both faces of wall.

Install sound attenuation batts to completely fill void between studs.

A 6mm continuous bead of acoustical sealant around perimeter of wall at web of top and bottom tracks and end studs. Lay gypsum board into position forcing caulking bead to fill space between gypsum board and structure.

Seal full perimeter for cut-outs around electrical boxes and ducts with acoustical sealant.

3.9 CONSTRUCTION OF SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS

Apply gypsum panels of maximum practical length with long dimension at right angles to

drywall furring channels. Position end joints over furring channel web and staggered in adjacent rows.

Closely fit together, ends and edges but not forced together.

Fasten panels to drywall furring channels with screws spaced a maximum of 300mm o.c. in field of panels and along abutting ends and edges.

Provide control joints in ceilings as noted but maximum 7500 mm o.c. each way or at change in direction.

Provide framing and drywall finish in stairwells, where required to enclose underside of stairs and landings.

Where noted on plans, provide bulkheads with steel framing and drywall finish.

3.10 WALL FURRING

of 596





Apply gypsum panels parallel to framing. Position all edges over drywall furring channels with joints staggered in successive courses.

Use maximum practical lengths to minimize end joints. Fit ends and edges closely, but not forced together.

Fasten panels to channels with screws spaced a maximum 300mm oc. 3.11 APPLICATION OF ACCESSORIES

Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane. Use full length

pieces where practical. Joints shall be made tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured.

Reinforce all vertical and horizontal exterior corners with cornerbead fastened with screws 200mm oc on both flanges along entire length of bead.

Where assembly terminates against masonry or other dissimilar material, apply ledge trim over panel edge and fasten with screws or staples spaced 300 mm. oc.

Power drive screws at least 9mm. from edges or ends of panel to provide uniform dimple

0.8mm deep. Where recessed reglets are noted on drawings, built into drywall assembly to provide

edges flush with drywall. 3.12 TAPING AND FILLING

Finish in accordance with GA-214, as follows:

.1 Exposed gypsum board to Level 5 finish, suitable for finish painting with semi-glass and gloss coatings. Use full skim coat of joint compound over entire surface to achieve smooth and uniform appearance.

.2 Concealed gypsum board to minimum Level 1 finish. Where a fire-resistance rating is required, finishing level must conform to ULC rated assembly design.

Finish face panel joints and internal angles with joint system consisting of self-adhering cross-fibre fibreglass joint tape and joint compound installed according to manufacturer's directions and feathered out into panel faces. Note: If self-adhering joint tape is not used, taping compound will be required.

Be sure drywall surface is dry and clean.

Center and apply CGC Fiberglass Drywall Tape directly over joint, pressing firmly to ensure even adherence to surface. Eliminate wrinkles by pressing entire length of tape with drywall knife. Avoid overlapping tape at intersections. Cut tape with drywall knife.

Cover taped joint with a layer of setting-type joint compound, forcing compound through the tape with a drywall knife or trowel to completely fill and level the joint. Allow joint to dry, and sand lightly. Apply second coat of setting-type or drying-type joint compound, feathering approximately 50mm beyond first coat. Let dry and sand lightly as required.

of 596





To finish inside corners, bend tape with to form a “U” shape. Apply tape along one side only. Press tape into corner for approximately 30mm, then apply the other side. Work downward, alternating sides in this manner until tape is pressed firmly in place. Apply setting-type joint compound as specified above, first on one side for the length of the corner and then repeating the process on the second side.

Finish fastener heads, corner bead and trim as required with two to three coats of joint

compound, feathered out onto panel faces and sanded to a smooth surface.

Provide skim coat over entire face of boards to ensure smooth surface for painting.

Fill screw head depressions to bring flush with adjacent surface of gypsum board so as to be invisible after painting is completed.

Sand dried taping compound lightly to remove burred edges and other imperfections.

Avoid sanding adjacent surface of board.

Completed installation to be smooth, level or plumb, free from waves and other defects and ready for painting.

Painting shall be done in accordance with Section 09 90 00

END OF SECTION

of 596

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 30 13 – CERAMIC TILING



PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS .1 General Requirements Division 01

.2 Concrete Finishing Section 03 35 00

.3 Concrete Unit Masonry Section 04 22 00

.4 Joint Sealants Section 07 92 00

.5 Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Ceramic Tile Institute (CTI)

.1 ANSI A108.1-99, Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Includes ANSI A108.1A-C, 108.4-.13, A118.1-.10, ANSI A136.1).

.2 CTI A118.3-92, Specification for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive (included in ANSI A108.1).

.3 CTI A118.4-92, Specification for Latex Cement Mortar (included in ANSI A108.1).

.4 CTI A118.5-92, Specification for Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortars and Grouts for Tile Installation (included in ANSI A108.1).

.5 CTI A118.6-92, Specification for Ceramic Tile Grouts (included in ANSI A108.1).

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)

.1 ASTM C144-04, Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

.2 ASTM C207-06, Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.

.3 ASTM C847-06, Specification for Metal Lath.

.4 ASTM C979-05, Specification for Pigments for Integrally Coloured Concrete.

.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

.1 CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86(R1988) , Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction.

.2 CGSB 71-GP-22M-78(AMEND.), Adhesive, Organic, for Installation of Ceramic Wall Tile.

.3 CAN/CGSB-75.1-M88, Tile, Ceramic.

.4 CAN/CGSB-25.20-95, Surface Sealer for Floors.

.4 CSA Group (CSA)

.1 CSA A123.3-05, Asphalt Saturated Organic Roofing Felt.

.2 CAN/CSA-A3000-03(R2006), Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and A3005).

.5 South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State

.1 SCAQMD Rule 1168-05, Adhesives and Sealants Applications.

.6 Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada (TTMAC)

.1 Tile Specification Guide 09 30 00 2006/2007, Tile Installation Manual.

of 596


Page 2 of 9 ward99 architects inc.


.2 Tile Maintenance Guide 2000.

1.3 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS .1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00- Submittal Procedures.

.2 Provide product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00- Submittal Procedures.

.1 Include manufacturer's information on: .1 Ceramic tile, marked to show each type, size, and shape required. .2 Chemical resistant mortar and grout (Epoxy and Furan). .3 Cementitious backer unit. .4 Dry-set cement mortar and grout. .5 Divider strip. .6 Elastomeric membrane and bond coat. .7 Reinforcing tape. .8 Levelling compound. .9 Latex cement mortar and grout. .10 Commercial cement grout. .11 Organic adhesive. .12 Slip resistant tile. .13 Waterproofing isolation membrane. .14 Fasteners.

.3 Provide samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00- Submittal Procedures.

.1 Base tile: submit, 300 x 300 mm sample panels of each colour, texture, size, and pattern of tile.

.2 Floor tile: submit, 300 x 300 mm sample panels of each colour, texture, size, and pattern of tile.

.3 Trim shapes, bullnose cap and cove including bullnose cap and base pieces at internal and external corners of vertical surfaces, each type, colour, and size.

.4 Adhere tile samples to 11 mm thick plywood and grout joints to represent project installation.

.4 Closeout Submittals in accordance with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

.1 Submit three (3) copies of TTMAC Hard Surface Maintenance Guide, for inclusion in maintenance manuals.

.2 Provide document listing specific warnings of any maintenance products or practices that could possible damage the finish work.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Quality Assurance Submittals:

.1 Manufacturer's Instructions: manufacturer's installation instructions.

.2 Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's field reports specified.

.3 The work of this section shall be carried out by a company that is a member in good standing of the Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada.

.4 This work shall be done under proper supervision by person’s skilled in the methods following the recommendations of the manufacturer of the Products involved and having a minimum of two years proven experience.

of 596




.5 The ceramic tile Subcontractor shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least two years proven experience.

.6 Epoxy grout installation shall be carried out only by an installer experienced in the use of this Product with strict conformance to the manufacturer’s installation and cleaning recommendations.

.7 The epoxy grout manufacturer/supplier shall visit the site prior to commencement of grouting to review installation and cleaning procedures with the ceramic tile Subcontractor.

.8 Prevent any traffic over completed floors for a period of 72 hours after completion.

.9 Provide protection of finished floors subject to construction traffic.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .1 Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:

.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Manufacturer’s written instructions.

1.6 AMBIENT CONDITIONS .1 Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at ceramic tile installation area

above 12 degrees C for 48 hours before, during, and 48 hours after, installation.

.2 Do not install tiles at temperatures less than 12 degrees C or above 38 degrees C.

.3 Do not apply epoxy mortar and grouts at temperatures below 15 degrees C or above 25 degrees C.

1.7 MOCK-UPS .1 Construct mock-up panels in accordance with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.

.2 Construct mock-up panels of finished ceramic tile work, 2.5m by 2.5m in size, of each ceramic tile type.

.3 Construct mock-up panels where directed by the Consultant.

.4 The procedure for Cleaning the grout from the tile shall be carried out in the presence of the Owner’s representative, the Consultant, and the Contractor for a minimum of three washes.

.5 Allow 48 hours for inspection of mock-up panels by the consultant before proceeding with work.

.6 When accepted, mock-up panels will demonstrate minimum standard for this work. The approved mock-up panels may remain as part of the finished work.

1.8 MAINTENANCE .1 Extra Materials:

.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals.

.2 Provide minimum 2% of each type and colour of tile required for project for maintenance use. Store where directed.

.3 Maintenance material same production run as installed material.

of 596




.2 Provide four copies of the TTMAC Maintenance Guide, latest edition, for inclusion in the Maintenance Manual.

.3 Give specific warning of any maintenance practice or material which may damage or disfigure the finish work or alter the coefficient of friction (i.e. slip resistance) of the finished surface.

1.9 WARRANTY .1 Provide a warranty for ceramic tile work in accordance with the General Conditions, but

for a period of three (3) years.

.2 The warranty shall cover the complete installation provided under this section against defective material and workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR TILE AND BASE .1 Porcelain Floor Tile and Wall Base (POR): to CAN/CGSB-75.1, Type 4, Class MR 1,

square edges, slip resistant surface. A DCOF value of ≥0.42 is the standard for tiles specified for wet areas with minimal footwear spaces expected to be walked upon when wet, as stated in ANSI A137.1-2012, Section 9.6. All curves, and other cuts where indicated on the drawings shall be laser cut by the tile manufacturer and shall be delivered ready for setting. All materials to match corner interior and exterior trims and shapes. Refer to Architectural Finishes Drawings for location of Anti-slip porcelain floor tile (POR).

.1 Exhibition series, unpolished, colourbody porcelain; Supplied by Daltile.; Tel: 905- 738-2099 .1 POR 1; Field Tile - Size: 30cm x 30cm; Colour; Dark Grey; EX04,

Unpolished .2 POR 2; Accent Tile - Size: 30 cm x 60cm; Colour; Black; EX05,

Unpolished

2.2 BASE TILE .1 Base: All materials to match porcelain floor tile, interior and exterior corners, trims and

shapes indicating field colour or accent bands as indicated on drawings.

2.3 TRIM SHAPES .1 Conform to applicable requirements of adjoining floor and wall tile.

.2 Use slip resistant trim shapes for horizontal surfaces of showers, and drying area curbs.

.3 Use trim shapes sizes conforming to size of adjoining field wall tile, including existing spaces, unless specified otherwise.

.4 Internal and External Corners: provide trim shapes as follows where indicated.

.1 Bullnose shapes for external corners including edges.

.2 Coved shapes for internal corners.

.3 Special shapes for: .1 Base to floor internal corners to provide integral coved vertical and

horizontal joint.

of 596




.2 Base to floor external corners to provide bullnose vertical edge with integral coved horizontal joint. Use as stop at bottom of openings having bullnose return to wall.

.3 Wall top edge internal corners to provide integral coved vertical joint with bullnose top edge.

.4 Wall top edge external corners to provide bullnose vertical and horizontal joint edge.

2.4 MORTAR, ADHESIVE MATERIALS AND MIXES .1 Cement: to CSA-A5, type 10.

.2 Sand: to ASTM C144, passing 16 mesh.

.3 Hydrated lime: to ASTM C207.

.4 Latex additive: formulated for use in cement mortar and thin set bond coat.

.5 Water: potable and free of minerals and chemicals which are detrimental to mortar and grout mixes.

.6 Adhesives: to be supplied by grout supplier.

.1 Maximum VOC limit 65 g/L to SCAQMD Rule 1168.

.7 Mortar Bed for Floors: 1 part Portland cement, 4 parts sand, 1 part water. Adjust water volume depending on water content of sand. Use latex additive in modification of mortar bed. Alternatively use Flextile Ltd., 4:1 Dry Pack Mortar and No.44 Latex Additive. Or Flextile Ltd., 4:1 Dry Pack Mortar and No. 43 Latex Additive.

.8 Levelling coat: 1 part Portland cement, 4 part sand, minimum 1/10 part latex additive, 1 part water including latex additive. Alternatively use Flextile Ltd., No.59 Flex-Flo or No.5900 Flex-Flo Plus.

.9 Measure mortar ingredients by volume.

.10 Dry Set Mortar: mix to manufacturer’s instructions.

2.5 BOND COAT .1 Dry set cement mortar: to ANSI A108.1.

.2 Organic adhesive: to ANSI A136.1 CGSB 71-GP-22M.

.1 Maximum VOC limit 65 g/L to SCAQMD Rule 1168.

.3 Latex Cement mortar: to ANSI A108.1, two-component universal dry-set mortar.

.4 Epoxy bond coat: non-toxic, non-flammable, non-hazardous during storage, mixing, application, and when cured. To produce shock and chemical resistant mortars having the following physical characteristics:

.1 Compressive Strength: 246 kg/cm2.

.2 Bond Strength: 53 kg/cm2.

.3 Water Absorption: 4.0% Max.

.4 Ozone Resistance, 200 hours @ 200 ppm: no loss of strength.

.5 Smoke Contribution Factor: 0.

.6 Flame Contribution Factor: 0.

.7 Finished mortar and grout to be resistant to urine, dilute acid, dilute alkali, sugar, brine and food waste products, petroleum distillates, oil and aromatic solvents.

of 596




.8 Bond Coat: maximum VOC limit 65 g/L to SCAQMD Rule 1168.

.5 Chemical-Resistant Bond Coat:

.1 Epoxy Resin Type: CTI A118.3.

.2 Furan Resin Type: CTI A118.5.

.3 Bond Coat: maximum VOC limit 65 g/L to SCAQMD Rule 1168.

2.6 GROUT .1 Colouring Pigments:

.1 Pure mineral pigments, limeproof and nonfading, complying with ASTM C979.

.2 Colouring pigments to be added to grout by manufacturer.

.3 Job coloured grout are not acceptable.

.4 Use in Commercial Cement Grout, Dry-Set Grout, and Latex Cement Grout.

.2 Cement Grout: to ANSI A108.1.

.1 Use one part white cement to one part white sand passing a number 30 screen.

.3 Commercial Cement Grout: to CTI A118.6.

.4 Dry-Set Grout: to CTI A118.6.

.5 Latex Cement Grout: to ANSI A108.1, fast curing, high early strength, polymer-modified, stain resistant, sanded mix for floors, unsanded mix for walls and floors with polished tiles commercial tile grout.

.6 Chemical-Resistant Grout:

.1 Epoxy grout: to ANSI A108.1, having quality, colour and characteristics to match epoxy bond coat. Adhesive and grout by same manufacturer.

.2 Furan grout: to CTI A118.5.

2.7 ACCESSORIES .1 Reinforcing mesh: 50 x 50 x 1.6 x 1.6 mm galvanized steel wire mesh, welded fabric

design, in flat sheets.

.2 Divider strips:

.1 Laminated strips, core 32 x 3 mm black neoprene, outsides (both sides) brass 32 x 1.29 mm complete with anchors, both sides spaced at 150 mm on centre.

.3 Cleavage plane: polyethylene film to CGSB 51-34.

.4 Metal lath: to ASTM C847 galvanized finish, 10 mm rib at 2.17 kg/m2

.5 Transition Strips: purpose made metal extrusion; anodized aluminum type.

.1 Porcelain Tile to Resilient Flooring: Satin anodized profile with sloped exposed surface, 4mm high leading edge, integrated trapezoid-preforated anchoring leg. Schluter-RENO-U, size to suit tile thickness

.6 Reducer Strips: purpose made metal extrusion; anodized aluminum type; maximum slope of 1:2.

.7 Junction Strips: Schulter Systems products, for junctions with other floor coverings. Finish: Satin finish anodized aluminum. Profiles as follows:

.1 Reno-V: Sloped transition to low flooring.

of 596




.2 Schiene: Tile edge at surface of equal height.

.3 Deco: Transition at tile and hard surface of equal height.

.8 Prefabricated Movement Joints: purpose made, having a Shore A Hardness not less than 60 and elasticity of plus or minus 40 percent when used in accordance to TTMAC Detail 301EJ.

.1 Control joints: Schluter Systems “Dilex-AKWS” movement joint, 6mm wide, with aluminum anchors perforated for bonding into mortar and PVC movement material forming joint surface. Colour to be selected by Consultant, to match grout as closely as possible.

.9 Sealant: in accordance with Section 07 92 00- Joint Sealants.

.1 Sealants: maximum VOC limit 250 g/L to SCAQMD Rule 1168.

.10 Floor sealer and protective coating: to tile and grout manufacturers recommendations.

2.8 MIXES .1 Cement:

.1 Scratch coat: 1 part cement, 1/5 to 1/2 parts hydrated lime to suit job conditions, 4 parts sand, 1 part water, and latex additive where required. Adjust water volume depending on water content of sand.

.2 Slurry bond coat: cement and water mixed to creamy paste. Latex additive may be included.

.3 Mortar bed for floors: 1 part cement, 4 parts sand, 1 part water. Adjust water volume depending on water content of sand. Latex additive may be included.

.4 Mortar bed for walls and ceilings: 1 part cement, 1/5 to 1/2 parts hydrated lime to suit job conditions, 4 parts sand and 1 part water. Adjust water volume depending on water content of sand. Latex additive may be included.

.5 Levelling coat: 1 part cement, 4 parts sand, minimum 1/10 part latex additive, 1 part water including latex additive.

.6 Bond or setting coat: 1 part cement, 1/3 part hydrated lime, 1 part water.

.7 Measure mortar ingredients by volume.

.2 Dry set mortar: mix to manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Organic adhesive: pre-mixed.

.1 Adhesives: maximum VOC limit 65 g/L to SCAQMD Rule 1168.

.4 Mix bond and levelling coats, and grout to manufacturer's instructions.

.5 Adjust water volumes to suit water content of sand.

2.9 PATCHING AND LEVELLING COMPOUND .1 Cement base, acrylic polymer compound, manufactured specifically for resurfacing and

leveling concrete floors. Products containing gypsum are not acceptable.

.2 Have not less than the following physical properties:

.1 Compressive strength - 25 MPa.

.2 Tensile strength - 7 MPa.

.3 Flexural strength - 7 MPa.

.4 Density - 1.9.

of 596




.3 Capable of being applied in layers up to 50 mm thick, being brought to feather edge, and being trowelled to smooth finish.

.4 Ready for use in 48 hours after application.

2.10 CLEANING COMPOUNDS .1 Specifically designed for cleaning masonry and concrete and which will not prevent bond

of subsequent tile setting materials including patching and leveling compounds and elastomeric waterproofing membrane and coat.

.2 Materials containing acid or caustic material are not acceptable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS .1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,

including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2 WORKMANSHIP .1 Do tile work in accordance with TTMAC Tile Installation Manual 2006/2007, "Ceramic

Tile", except where specified otherwise.

.2 Apply tile or backing coats to clean and sound surfaces.

.3 Fit tile around corners, fitments, fixtures, drains and other built-in objects. Maintain uniform joint appearance. Cut edges smooth and even. Do not split tiles.

.4 Maximum surface tolerance 1:800.

.5 Make joints between tile uniform and approximately 1.5 mm wide, plumb, straight, true, even and flush with adjacent tile. Ensure sheet layout not visible after installation. Align patterns.

.6 Lay out tiles so perimeter tiles are minimum 1/2 size.

.7 Sound tiles after setting and replace hollow-sounding units to obtain full bond.

.8 Make internal angles square, external angles bullnosed.

.9 Use bullnose edged tiles at termination of wall tile panels, except where panel abuts projecting surface or differing plane.

.10 Install divider strips at junction of tile flooring and dissimilar materials.

.11 Allow minimum 24 hours after installation of tiles, before grouting.

.12 Clean installed tile surfaces after installation and grouting cured.

.13 Make control joints at 5.5m maximum in each direction or a length to width ratio of 2.5 to 1. Make joint width same as tile joints. Fill control joints with sealant in accordance with Section 07 92 00- Joint Sealants. Keep building expansion joints free of mortar and grout.

3.3 WALL TILE .1 Install in accordance with TTMAC detail

of 596




3.4 FLOOR AND BASE TILE .1 Install in accordance with TTMAC detail

3.5 FLOOR SEALER AND PROTECTIVE COATING .1 Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Manufacturer's Field Services:

.1 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.7 CLEANING .1 Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 00- Cleaning .

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596



09 51 00 – ACOUSTIC CEILINGS



Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00 Mechanical Equipment Division 20, 22 Electrical Equipment Division 26, 27, 28

1.2 CEILING SYSTEMS

This Specification includes the ceiling systems listed below, noted in schedules and shown on reflected ceiling plans.

.2 Ceiling systems shall be 610mm x 1220mm lay in exposed Tee system, non- rated.


.1 ASTM C635 Specifications for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical

Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. .2 ASTM C636 Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems

for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. .3 CAN/CGSB 92.1

.4 ASTM-E580/E580M-11a

Sound Absorptive Prefabricated Acoustical Units

Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions.

1.4 DESIGN .1 N.R.C. Range: Unless otherwise noted under description of ceiling system

the N.R.C. Range shall be 60-65 (Table 1 of CAN/CGSB 92.1).

.2 Ceiling S.T.C.: Unless otherwise noted under description of ceiling system the S.T.C. rating shall be 35 or better.

.3 Light Reflectance: Unless otherwise noted under description of ceiling system, panels shall have a light reflectance co-efficient designation of L.R.1 (0.75 minimum). Table 3 of CAN/CGSB 92.1 refers.

of 596





.4 Maximum Deflection: 1/360th of span to ASTM-C635 deflection test.

.5 Installation Tolerances: To ASTM-C636.

.6 Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads in accordance with the Ontario Building Code, Subsection 4.1.8. Structural Design of ceiling assembly and components shall be By a qualified Professional Engineer licensed for practice in the Province of Ontario.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

Reflected ceiling plans indicate proposed layout but this shall not relieve Contractor of

responsibility for co-ordination of the work and provision of Shop Drawings where field conditions call for variation from proposed layout.

Shop drawings shall bear the seal and signature of the Professional Engineer providing structural design of acoustical ceiling assemblies and components.

Accurately locate lighting fixtures, ventilating grilles, sprinkler heads, exit lights and other ceiling fittings.

Conform to Section 01 33 23.

1.6 SAMPLES

Upon award of the Contract submit full size sample panels proposed for installation in the

project. All panels subsequently used on the job shall match the approved sample.

Submit samples of suspension system members for approval prior to commencement of installation.

Ceiling system sample shall show basic construction and assembly, treatment at walls, seismic perimeter clips, recessed fixtures, splicing, interlocking, finishes and acoustical unit.


Transport, handle and store material in manner to prevent warp, twist and damage to tile and board edges and surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Any warped and/or damaged boards, tile and trim shall be rejected and be replaced by new, straight, undamaged and acceptable materials at no cost to the Owner.

Store material in warm, dry place away from water and the elements. Protect against undue loading stresses and shock.

of 596





All packaged material shall be delivered in original manufacturers' wrappers and containers with labels and seals intact.

1.8 PROTECTION

Exercise care in the execution of work under this Section to prevent damage to finished

surfaces and adjacent work, and mechanical and electrical installations.

1.9 SPECIAL CLEANING

Clean, repair or replace dirty, discoloured or defective units or exposed suspension members to Consultant's satisfaction.

1.10 ENVIRONMENT

Commence installation after building enclosed and dust- generating activities completed.

Permit wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation.

Maintain uniform minimum temperature of 15 deg. C. and humidity of 20% to 40% prior to, during and after installation.

1.11 WARRANTY

The Warranty stipulated in the General Conditions of the Contract shall be deemed to include the following definition regarding Work specified in this Section. The following will be considered defects without being limited thereto: .1 Failure of the suspended ceiling to remain water level. .2 Lifting or sagging of tile and board between supports. .3 Staining and discolouration of factory finishes. .4 Development of corrosion of galvanized ferrous metal. .5 Development of cracks, splits and other surface deterioration in acoustic panels. .6 Failure of hanging wire anchorage.

The warranty period shall be two (2) years, commencing on the date of Substantial

Performance of the Work. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - LAY-IN SYSTEM

Acoustic Ceiling Panels (ACT, NEW ACT):

.1 Supplied by the Owner and Installed by the General Contractor.

of 596





Suspension .1 Suspension system; Two directional exposed tee-bar grid, double web,

intermediate duty system to ASTM-C635. .2 Acceptable products:

1. CGC Interiors: Donn “DX” Exposed Grid Suspension System 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation: Seismic 1200 (Stab) Suspension System 3. Armstrong World Industries Canada Ltd.: Prelude XL Exposed Tee

System 4. CertainTeed Ceilings: Classic Stab System

.1 Exposed interlocking tee grid system, formed out of cold rolled zinc-bond steel 0.54mm thick. Provide fire rated grid where fire ratings noted.

.2 Main Tees: 43mm high double web rectangular bulb top with 25mm rolled cap on exposed face. Provide capping plate in pre-coat baked-on white paint finish and incorporating holes for hangers and slots for connecting pieces, and capable of supporting 12.5 kg per 1200mm. for continuous spans and 6.5 kg per 1200mm span for single span without exceeding a deflection of 1/360 of the span.

.3 Standard Cross-Tees: 43mm high, double web, rectangular bulb top, capping plate in pre-coated white baked-on finish, capable of supporting 11.3 kg per 600mm span without exceeding a deflection of 1/360 of span, and with positive interlock with main tees. Web extended to form positive interlock with main tee webs; lower flange extended and offset to provide flush intersection; wall moulding, 22mm wide by 22mm high.

.4 Structural Cross-Tees as main tees, but with crimped ends for lapping bottom flange of main tees and interlocking tack ends to engage slots in main tees.

.5 Accessories: Splice plate, clips, screws, etc. as required to complete the installation.

All galvanized finish. .6 Concealed flat spline: 0.71mm flat steel spline. .7 Edge Trim:

0.635mm zinc bonded, cold rolled steel mould. Trim shall be minimum 22mm x 22mm angles. Provide 50mm wide shadowline trim at perimeter of corridor ceilings.

.8 Finish to tees and edge trim: flame resistant white baked enamel satin finish to match panel finish, 2 coats on exposed surfaces, 1 coat elsewhere.

.9 Carrying Channels: 38mm deep with 19mm flanges, 1.2mm cold rolled galvanized steel channel weighing 1.042 kg per metre.

.10 Tie Wire: 3.6mm minimum diameter, galvanized soft annealed steel wire.

.11 Hangers: 3.6mm minimum diameter, galvanized soft annealed steel wire with hanger inserts purpose made.

.12 Screws: Corrosion resistant, self-tapping Philips truss head, of length and gauge to suit installation.

.13 Ceiling Hanger Pins (for fixing to metal): capacitor discharge ceiling hanger pins, by Continental Studwelding Ltd., or approved equivalent, of type approved by Consultant.

.14 Suspension System Accessories; splices, bull nose corner caps, wire ties, retainers and typical flush wall moulding, to complement suspension system components, as recommended by system manufacturer.

.15 Seismic Perimeter Clips: Manufactured from commercial quality steel sized to fit ceiling grid component and clip to wall angle supports.

.16 Isolation Hangers:

of 596





.1 Welded steel housing with anti-rust paint, and colour-coded stable elastomer springs. .2 Spring static deflection shall be no less than 6mm and shall provide 50% overload capacity. Brackets shall be designed to carry 500% overload without failure. .3 Hanger assembly shall be equipped with bottom eye bolt. .4 Manufacturer/Product: BVA Systems Ltd.: Model HD Hangers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

Installation: in accordance with ASTM-C636 except where specified otherwise.

Install suspension system to manufacturer’s instructions and certification organization’s tested design requirements where referenced.

Do not erect ceiling suspension system until work above ceiling has been reviewed by

the Consultant team.

Employ mechanics skilled in this Trade and install work in strict accordance with the system manufacturer's printed directions to produce a first class, true finish, free from dropping, warpage, soiled or damaged tile.

Make provisions for thermal movement.

Do not secure hangers to fluted steel floor or roof deck. Secure hangers to overhead structure using attachment methods as required for particular structure and as recommended by manufacturer. Where structural spacing exceeds ceiling hanger spacing, provide double carrying channels nested and placed perpendicular to and on top of bottom flange of steel beams or on top of the lower chords of the open web steel joists, and secured to each joist with three loops of 1.2mm galvanized soft steel wire.

Locate hangers directly over Main Tees and as close to intersections as possible. Secure

hangers firmly to concrete inserts, steel joists and beams, bracing, etc. Do not install hangers to metal deck, provide separate grid off joists if required.

Erect ceiling grid plumb and square with accurately fitted locked-in joints in true

alignment, secure and rigid and with provision for thermal movement. Water level ceiling to tolerance of 1mm in 1m and maximum deviation of 4mm. from mean level.

Frame around recesses fixtures, diffusers, grilles, and the like and provide heavier

section hangers and supports as necessary to support same. Provide hanger within 150mm. of each fixture corner.

Consult with Electrical and Mechanical Trades for requirements and provide access to

valves and switches.

Ensure that all hangers and carrying members are designed and spaced to support entire ceiling system including recessed lighting fixtures. Note, weight of fixtures is approximately 9-13.5 kg.

of 596





Install panels only after all mechanical and electrical equipment, conduits, piping,

telephone distribution, etc. are in place.

Where obstructions interfere with the placement of ceiling hangers, provide double carrying channels nested and hung from the structure above on both sides of the obstruction.

Provide isolation hangers at all hangers.

Install hangers on main tees spaced at maximum 1200mm centres and within 150mm

from ends of main tees and tee splices.

Lay out with border units not less than 50% of standard unit width and according to reflected ceiling plans.

Ensure suspension system is co-ordinated with location of related components.

Install typical wall moulding to provide correct ceiling height.

Completed suspension system shall support super-imposed loads, such as lighting

fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers and other ceiling mounted fixtures. Support all light fixtures and diffusers with additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150mm of each corner at maximum 600mm around perimeter of fixture.

At all light fixtures, air diffusers, other penetrations and partitions, install suspension

system in accordance with ASTM-E580-E580M requirements for Category D, E, and F.

Interlock cross member to main runner to provide rigid assembly. Ensure all main tee splices and cross tee end clips are fully engaged.

Support and locate all perimeter tees and attach to wall moulding using seismic perimeter

clips. Install grid fixed to two adjacent walls and with floating 10mm clearance at opposite walls.

Frame at openings for light fixtures, air diffusers, speakers and at changes in ceiling

heights.

Provide lateral bracing designed in accordance with OBC article 4.1.8.17.

Finished ceiling system shall be square with adjoining walls and level within 6mm in 3000mm.

Expansion Joints:

.1 Supply and install “Z” shaped metal trim pieces at each side of expansion joint. Design to accommodate plus or minus 25mm movement and maintain visual closure.

.2 Finish metal components to match adjacent exposed metal trim. Provide backing plates behind butt joints.

of 596





3.2 INSTALLATION OF LAY-IN SUSPENSION SYSTEM

Generally, hangers shall be spaced at not more than 1200mm o.c. directly above main

runner tees, except at fixtures, where they shall be 600mm o.c. or closer as required to adequately support fixtures. Locate hangers as close as possible to tee junctions. Locate first hanger within 300mm of perimeter wall.

Install main tee runners continuous at 1200mm o.c. with interlocking structural cross-tees each side of fixtures at right angles to main tees. Install standard cross-tees generally at 90 degrees to main tees and as required to achieve pattern shown on reflected ceiling plans. Secure joints by web of tees; snaplock into place forming rigid connections. Main tees shall be as long as possible with butt ends joined by means of splice plates locked into webs.

Frame up around light fixtures, grilles, diffusers, speakers, openings, etc. as required.

Secure edge moldings to walls, bulkheads and other vertical surfaces at perimeter edges of acoustic ceilings. Note special moldings required.

Securely fix hangers to tees by bending ends 90 degrees at the correct height and

inserting through holes in top of main tees, then wiring around open side at least 3 turns twisting ends together. Flats shall be bolted to tees. Secure to concrete inserts in similar manner.

3.3 LAY-IN PANEL INSTALLATION

End panels shall not be less than half full size and installation in each area shall be

symmetrical, with end tiles and abutting opposite vertical wall surface to be of the same width. Do all necessary cutting and fitting neatly and accurately to suit grid openings and accommodate fixtures, grilles, detectors, speakers and the like located on the ceiling panels.

Lay directionally patterned acoustic panels in one direction, parallel to the longest direction of the grid concerned.

Place panels between tees so that edges bear evenly on flanges.

Confirm with reflected ceiling plans.

Provide fire rated enclosures as required around light fixtures and mechanical equipment in fire rated ceilings, according to applicable ULC Design Criteria.

Where mechanical equipment is located above the ceiling, panels shall be suitably and inconspicuously marked by the use of small colour-coded stickers. Mechanical equipment to be located shall include valves, dampers, heat exchangers, heat pumps, VAV boxes, electrical disconnects, as applicable, and other such equipment not visible from below.

of 596





3.4 CLEANING

Upon completion, clean acoustic tile of all finger marks and other defacements.

Remove all accumulated rubbish and excess materials from the site.

Clean acoustic tile and replace any damaged tiles immediately before occupation of building by Owner.

Clean with non-solvent based commercial cleaners.

Remove all excess material and debris when work of this section is completed.

END OF SECTION

of 596



09 90 00 – PAINTING



1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

With exceptions specified above or specifically called for in other Sections of the

Specification, all paintwork is included in the scope of this Section of the Specification. Colours will be specified at a later date by the Consultant.

In locations where Drawings do not call for paint or similar finish on walls and/or ceilings, the intent of this Specification is that items, new work and existing surfaces in areas affected by the Work of this project, including miscellaneous metal work, shall be painted.

Work includes moisture testing and surface preparation of substrates as required for acceptance of paint, including cleaning, small crack repair, patching, caulking, and making good surfaces, and specific pre-treatments, sealing, and priming of surfaces.

Check conditions of all existing surfaces to be repainted before commencing new work, including assessing the level of degradation of the surface, the type of coating existing, and the thickness of the existing coating. Perform adhesion tests on all existing coatings to be repainted to ensure that surfaces are sound and well adhered before applying new coatings. It is expected that the Contractor will have visually assessed the existing conditions during the pre-tender site visit, and no contract extras will be considered for addressing conditions which were readily apparent at that time.

Paint all new exterior surfaces which normally require painting, including hollow metal doors, screens, galvanized steel lintels, ladders and hardware.

Perform interior painting called for in Room Schedule and Door Schedule and noted on drawings. Paint all new walls, ceilings, bulkheads, tectum, and all surfaces which normally receive a paint finish, whether noted on schedules, or not noted. Walls shall be completely painted before installation of tackboards, millwork, etc.

All heating units, recessed convectors, grilles, pipes, access panels, hangers and miscellaneous exposed metal work (other than stainless steel, anodized aluminum and baked enamel) to be painted to match the surfaces on which they occur, unless otherwise directed by Consultant.

For special painted graphics, colour changes, accent stripes, etc. see drawings.

.1 Rough Carpentry

.2 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

.3 Gypsum Board System

.4 Shop Priming Specified in various Sections of the Specification.

.5 Factory applied paint coatings unless otherwise specified.

.6 Mechanical

.7 Electrical

Section 06 10 00 Section 08 11 13 Section 09 29 00 Division 20, 22 Division 26, 27, 28

of 596





In all renovated areas, paint affected walls as specified for new construction. All other

walls in the room are to be cleaned and painted with one coat. If more than one colour is used in the room, confirm colours with Consultant.

Paint exposed drywall and the like in locations where finish is not otherwise specified or noted. Do not paint such surfaces in mechanical shafts, unless specifically noted.

Paint all exposed structural steel and mechanical ducts in finished areas.

Paint exposed structure and metal deck in all mechanical and storage rooms, except Water Meter and Electrical Room.

Paint pipes, conduit, ducts and related thermal insulation and all prime painted mechanical and electrical equipment and supports located in mechanical and electrical rooms and in all locations where Drawings call for paint or similar finish on walls and/or ceilings. Paint all mechanical equipment exposed on the roof. Exposed pipes shall be painted to Owner’s Colour Coding/Piping schedule to suit use (i.e. hot water, etc.), included below.

Paint all gas piping, inside and out, whether exposed or concealed. Do not paint other pipe, conduit, ducts, insulation and the like where concealed above ceilings or in service shafts.

Make good paint finish on shop coated work where damaged.

Paint visible portions of steel shelf angles, lintels and structural steel.

Paint edges and all faces of metal doors.

Paint entirely, including all top and bottom edges, of all wood doors.

Interior of ducts and diffusers visible from exterior on room side.

Painting, as referred to herein shall include paint, enamel, stain, varnish and other finishes herein specified and normally applied to the various materials by the painting Subcontractor.


Do painting and finishing to CAN/CGSB-85-GP series standards including Appendix A and to material manufacturer's instructions and to The Master Painters Institute (MPI) Architectural Painting Specification Manual and Maintenance Repainting Manual, except where specifically specified otherwise. The most stringent standards shall apply.

All coatings must conform to Regulation SOR/2009-264, Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Concentration Limits for Architectural Coatings Regulations, and the VOC limits set therein.

of 596





All paints and coatings used must conform to Green Seal Standard GS-11 for paints and

coatings based on performance requirements and reduced use of hazardous substances and reduced volatile organic compounds:

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

The Painting Subcontractor must be a member in good standing of the Ontario Painting Contractors’ Association.

1.5 INSPECTION

A cash allowance has been included for independent painting inspections. The cost of the painting inspection is to be paid from the Cash Allowance included in the Contract. Refer to Section 01 10 00.

Painting shall not commence until the inspection company has been notified and the Inspector makes the initial site visit.

Supply the Inspector with a schedule of materials intended for use on the job at the commencement of the painting.

The Inspector will issue Inspection Reports during the Project. On completion of the job, the final Inspection Report will be issued.

1.6 WORK ENVIRONMENT

Do not apply paint finish in areas where dust is being generated.

Maintain environmental conditions within limits recommended by manufacturer, for

optimum results. Do not apply coatings under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

Conform to requirements of MPI Architectural Specification Manual including recommendations for surface preparation.

1.7 ACCEPTANCE OF WORK IN PLACE

Submit written confirmation of acceptance of existing conditions, to the Consultant, prior

to commencing painting work. Painting may not commence without submission of this confirmation.

Receipt of this confirmation will be considered a prerequisite for certification of payment for this work.

Notify the Consultant, in writing, immediately if any existing condition is encountered that will prevent the attainment of satisfactory results in this work

of 596





1.8 SUBMITTALS

Samples:

.1 Submit triplicate samples consisting of 300mm x 200mm panels of each type of

paint finish specified. .2 Panels shall be of same material as that on which sample coatings are to be

applied in the field where possible. .3 Identify each sample as to job, name of paint manufacturer, finish, colour, name

and number, sheen and gloss units and name of Contractor. .4 Retain one set of approved samples on site until completion of the Work.

Submit manufacturer’s data sheets for each paint product, including:

.1 Product characteristics .2 Surface preparation instructions and recommendations Primer requirements and

finish .3 specifications .4 Storage and handling recommendations .5 Application methods .6 Cautions .7 VOC data

Submit written confirmation of acceptance of existing conditions, as specified above.

1.9 STORAGE AND HANDLING

Store paint and painter's materials in clean, dry locations approved by the Consultant.

Store materials in an area that is within the acceptable temperature range, per manufacturer’s instructions. Protect from freezing.

All paint shall be in unopened containers, labelled with: .1 manufacturer’s name, .2 product name, product type, .3 instructions for surface preparation and product application, .4 VOC content, .5 environmental issues, .6 batch date, and .7 colour name and number.

Provide C02 fire extinguisher minimum 9 kg capacity in paint storage area.

Dispose of materials in accordance with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

of 596





1.10 SIGNS

Provide legible signs throughout the Work reading "WET PAINT" in prominent positions

during painting and while paint is drying.

Use 75mm high letters on white card or board.

1.11 TEMPORARY COVERS AND PROTECTION

Protect floors and other surfaces with temporary covers such as dust sheets, polyethelene film or tarpaulins. All to Consultant's approval.

Mask identification plates occurring on equipment, switch boxes, and fire rating labels, etc. which require painting.

Protect, remove and replace hardware, accessories, lighting fixtures, and similar items as required except primed for paint door closers which shall be painted. Light switches and electrical communication outlet plates to be removed and reinstalled on completion of painting.

Keep oily rags, waste and other similar combustible materials in closed metal containers; take every precaution to avoid spontaneous combustion, remove waste and combustible materials daily.

Clean surfaces soiled by spillage of paint, paint spattering and the like. If such cleaning

operations damage the surface, repair and replace damaged work at no cost to the Owner.

1.12 RETOUCHING

Do all retouching, etc. to ensure that the building may be handed over to the Owner in

perfect condition, free of spatter, finger prints, rust, watermarks, scratches, blemishes of other disfiguration.

After fully decorating and retouching a room or other area, notify Consultant. After inspection and final approval by Consultant post sign 'DECORATING COMPLETE - NO ADMITTANCE WITHOUT PERMISSION'.

1.13 TEST AREAS

In areas to be repainted, test existing coatings for adhesion before applying new coatings, in accordance with the recommended practices in the MPI Repainting Specification Manual. Check for loose paint using a scraper and check for adhesion by cutting through the coatings and performing duct tape tests, or other acceptable means of testing adhesion. Once adequate adhesion is confirmed, apply a test section of the proposed new coating, allow to dry, and perform adhesion tests in area of new coating to confirm compatibility with existing coatings before proceeding with repainting work. Perform tests in all areas and on all surface types to ensure positive repainting results. Advise Consultant of any areas in which existing or new coatings fail adhesion tests. Do

of 596





not proceed with the work until a recommended course of action is agreed upon by all parties. Commencement of work will signify acceptance of existing conditions.

In areas of new construction, A room or area in the building will be designated by the Consultant as a test area to establish standard of workmanship, texture, gloss and coverage.

Prior to any painting being started, request a meeting on Site between Consultant, Contractor, and Subcontractor and Inspector to review conditions, surfaces, anticipated problems and to clarify quality of workmanship acceptable to Consultant.

Apply finishes to each type of surface within room with correct material, coats, colour, texture and degree of gloss in sample area and have same approved prior to providing Work of this Section.

Retain test area until after completion of Work. Test area to be minimum standard for the

Work.

Failure to comply with the above will be cause for Consultant to request all Work previously painted to be repainted.


Provide one sealed can, one litre capacity, of each product in each colour used in the Work for Owner's use in maintenance Work.

Container to be new fully labelled with manufacturer's name, type of paint, and colour.

1.15 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE

Provide a warranty valid for three (3) years from date of Substantial Performance, or from date of completion of Work if work is not complete at date of Substantial Performance, will be required.

Subcontractor shall warrant that the work has been performed in accordance with the standards and requirements of the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual, most recent edition.


Paint and finishing materials - highest grade, first line quality, low VOC products provided

by any of the following manufacturers: .1 Benjamin Moore & Co. .2 The Sherwin-Williams Company .3 Dulux Paint

of 596





Paints, enamels, fillers, primers, varnishes and stains - ready mixed products of one of

the manufacturers listed. Substitutes will not be allowed.

Thinners, cleaners - type and brand recommended by the paint manufacturer, or Inspector.

Only products manufactured by paint manufacturer stated at time of submission of

samples will be allowed on Site unless other materials specifically specified herein. No painting to be performed until paint manufacturer identified and acceptance received from the Consultant and Inspector.

Deliver materials to Site in original unbroken containers bearing brand and maker's

name. The presence of any unauthorized material or containers for such, on Site shall be of sufficient cause for rejection of ALL paint materials on Site at that time, and all previous painted work repainted with proper material.

2.2 COLOUR SCHEDULE

Consultant will provide detailed colour schedule at a later date. Conform to schedule including patterns, colours, and locations for all finishes.

A minimum of five (5) paint colours may be selected by the Consultant.

Refer to room finishing notes for detailed application instructions. 2.3 FINISHING SYSTEMS

Interior Work:

.1 Drywall:

INT 9.2M Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish 1 coat Primer; MPI #149 Walls: 2 coats MPI #147 Ceilings: 2 coats of one of the following:

.1 2 coat Dulux Lifemaster Interior Acrylic Ceiling Flat # 59170 Zero VOC

.2 or equal by one of the approved manufacturers. All drywall, whether requiring finish painting or not, must receive prime

coat.

.2 Concrete Block, paint:

INT 4.2E (modified), Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish, 4 coat system

2 coats latex blockfiller; MPI #4 2 coats finish; MPI #147 Provide gloss finish, MPI #148, where noted as “gloss” in Room Finish

Schedule.

of 596





.3 Woodwork (Opaque Finish):

INT 6.4T Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish 1 coat latex primer MPI #39 2 coats institutional low VOC latex finish; MPI #147

.4 Stain Finish:

LEED Complaint Stain Coats Varnish, Water Based, clear gloss; MPI #130

.5 Ferrous Metal:

INT 5.1S Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish 1 coat MPI #107 2 coats MPI #147

.6 Shop Primed Ferrous Metal:

INT 5.1S Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish Confirm type of shop primer used with structural steel supplier. Confirm compatibility of all coatings with manufacturers. Touch up prime coat where damaged, with compatible primer, type

MPI#107. 2 coats interior latex, MPI #147

.7 Galvanized Metal:

Includes all hollow metal doors, frames and screens. INT 5.3N Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish 1 coat galvanized Primer MPI #134 2 coats Acrylic Semi-Gloss MPI #147

.8 Insulation on Pipes & Ducts:

INT 6.8F Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish 1 coat Primer MPI #17 2 coats Acrylic Semi-Gloss MPI #147

.9 Mechanical Equipment:

Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish As specified for metal types.

.10 Piping, Conduit & Ductwork (uncoated):

INT 5.3N Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish 1 coat galvanized Primer MPI #134

of 596





2 coats Acrylic Semi-Gloss MPI #147

.11 NOTE: Use heat resistant paint where required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

Prepare surfaces in accordance with the following standards and to MPI Architectural

Specification Manual Chapters 2 and 3; the most stringent requirements shall apply. Preparation of surfaces must be reviewed with painting inspector. Prepared surfaces must be inspected before application of prime coat. .1 Prepare wood surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-lM. Use CAN/CGSB 1.126 vinyl sealer

over knots and resinous areas. Use CGSB 1-GP -103M wood paste filler for nail holes. Tint filler to match.

.2 Touch up damaged spots of shop paint primer on steel with CAN/CGSB 1.40M to CGSB 85-GP-14M.

.3 Prepare galvanized steel and zinc coated surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-16M. This includes wiped coated steel surfaces.

.4 Prepare masonry and concrete surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-31M.

.5 Prepare wallboard surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-33M. Fill minor cracks with plaster

patching compound for stained woodwork.

.6 Prepare concrete floors to CGSB 85-GP-32M.

.7 Prepare copper piping and accessories to CGSB 85-GP-20M.

.8 Apply prime coat on wood scheduled for paint finish before installation.

.9 Back prime wood scheduled for transparent finish. Do not prime surfaces scheduled for transparent finish.

.10 Remove all surface contamination such as oil, grease, loose paint, mill scale, dirt,

foreign matter, rust, mould, mildew, mortar, efflorescence, and sealers from existing surfaces to assure sound bonding to tightly adhering old paint.

.11 Scape peeling paint off existing masonry surfaces and apply a compatible

masonry sealer, approved for use by the paint manufacturer, before applying new coatings.

.12 Glossy surfaces must be clean and dull before repainting. Wash with abrasive cleanser, or, wash thoroughly and dull by sanding.

.13 Spot prime any existing bare areas with an appropriate primer.

of 596





.14 Check for compatibility between existing and new coatings by applying a test

patch of the recommended coating system, covering at least 2 to 3 square feet. Allow surface to dry one week before testing adhesion per ASTM D3359. If the coating system is incompatible, complete removal is required.

.15 NOTE: ABOVE NOTED SURFACES MAY NOT ALL BE APPLICABLE TO THIS

PROJECT. 3.2 APPLICATION

Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

Use suitable, clean equipment in good condition.

Maintain dust-free suitable conditions on the surfaces free from machine, tool or

sandpaper marks, insects, grease, or any other condition liable to impair finished work to prevent production or good results.

At all hollow metal doors and frames, prime coat must be inspected and signed off by

painting inspector before painting work may proceed.

Apply evenly, uniform in sheen, colour and texture, free from brush or roller marks, well brushed or rolled in and free of crawls, runs, join marks or other defects.

Permit paint to dry between coats. Touch up uneven spots after applying first coat. Tint

various coats of multiple coat work in light shades of the final colour selected, to distinguish between coats.

Give Consultant and Inspector due notice and sufficient opportunity (minimum 48 hours)

to inspect each coat. Do not proceed with subsequent coat until preceding coat approved. Consultant reserves the right to order complete retreatment if this condition is not observed.

Painting coats are intended to cover surfaces perfectly; if in painter's opinion, formula

specified is inadequate to provide a first class finished surface, report to the Consultant and have formulas rectified before commencing work. Surfaces imperfectly covered shall receive additional coats at no additional cost. Provide additional coat where ever dark colours are used.

Use paint unadulterated. Use same brand of paint for primer, intermediate and finish

coats. Factory mix all paints.

Paint finish shall be applied by roller except in the case of wood trim, door frames, base board and similar work of small surface area which shall be painted by brush. Do not use roller for applying finish other than paint.

Spray painting will not be permitted unless specifically approved in writing by the

Consultant in each instance. Consultant may withdraw approval at any time and prohibit spray painting for reasons such as carelessness, poor masking or protection measures, drifting paint fog, disturbance to other Trades, or failure to obtain a dense, even, opaque

of 596





finish. Spray painting shall be full double coat, i.e. at least two passes for each coat. Do not use spray or roller on wood or metal surfaces, brush only unless approved in writing by Consultant.

Paint entire surfaces, including areas where millwork or other items are to be installed.

Finish edges of doors with paint or stain treatment as required to match face of door.

Seal hidden edges of wood doors with one coat of shellac and one coat gloss varnish or two coats paint. Repaint tops and edges of wood doors after fitting.

Even up stained woodwork in colour as required by nature of wood and as directed by

Consultant. Apply same finish on trim, fitments cupboards and other protecting ledges as on surrounding work, disregard sight lines.

Carefully hand smooth and sandpaper wood between coats (including priming). Apply

one coat sealer before applying first coat paint filler to knots or sap blemishes on wood surfaces to receive paint or stain finish.

After first coat, fill nail holes, splits and scratches, using putty coloured to match finish.

Remove rust, oil, grease and loose shop paint from metal work by brushing or with wire

brushes and make good shop coat before proceeding with final finish. Feather out edges to make touch up patches inconspicuous.

Clean castings with wire brush before application of first paint coat.

Do not etch galvanized metal. Use zinc rich primer. This includes metal door frames and

the like with wiped zinc coating.

Note that primer is required on all hollow metal doors, frames and screens. Three coat system is required. Sand between all coats.

Remove form oil or parting compounds from concrete surfaces. Use Xylol or approved

compound.

Paint interior of pipe spaces, ducts, etc. visible through grilles or through linear metal ceilings in black matt finish.

Conform with Consultant's colour schedule and exactly match approved samples.

Mechanical and Electrical Pipes, Ducts and Conduits:

.1 Commence Work when piping installation is complete in the area concerned. .2 Do not paint plated or other prefinished surfaces, unless otherwise noted. .3 Paint conduit in same colour as background paint. .4 Apply formulae specified even though surface prime painted at shop prior to

delivery. Touch up shop priming where damaged. .5 Use heat resistant epoxy paint on pipes and surfaces where operating surface

temperature exceeds 65 degrees C.

of 596





3.3 REPAIRS

Cracks occurring in walls or ceilings requiring patching during "Warranty Period" shall be

repainted in such a way that the patch is not visible at a distance of 1m.

If patch painting is not acceptable, repaint entire wall, or ceiling.

END OF SECTION

of 596


DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10 22 26 – OPERABLE PARTITIONS



Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00 Structural Steel Section 05 12 00

1.2 WORK REQUIRED BY CONTRACTOR

Provide all headers, blocking, support structures, jambs, track enclosures, surrounding insulation, and sound baffles as required in quality assurance.

Coordinate pre-punching of support structure in accordance with approved shop drawings.

Prepare opening for operable partitions; notes as the privacy screen at the Customer

Service Area. Any deviation of site conditions contrary to approved shop drawings must be called to the attention of the Consultant.

Paint or otherwise finishing all trim and other materials adjoining head and jamb of

operable partitions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 23. Drawings to note complete

construction details, dimensions, locations of supports, etc. Indicate loading which will be placed on structural support. Show imbedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support beam punching template. Show details of track, trolleys, hardware, anchorage, caulking, finishes, writing boards, and accessories. Indicate method of stacking.

Submit samples of all materials as required by the Consultant.

Two operating handles shall be provided to owner’s representative. Obtain signed receipt; submit copy of receipt with maintenance data.

Provide operations and maintenance data for inclusion in Maintenance Manuals specified

in Section 01 70 00.

Shop Drawings must bear the seal of a registered professional engineer, who shall be responsible for the design of the partition suspension, from the building structure. Refer to Section 05 41 00 Load-bearing Steel Stud System for the framing structure required to support the curtain and track system.

of 596






Comply with all National and Local Building By-Laws and Regulations, and all Fire

Marshall requirements, applicable to the Work of this Section.

Install in accordance with ASTM E557. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Preparation of the opening shall conform to the criteria set forth per ASTM E557

Standard Practice for Architectural Application and Installation of Operable Partitions.

1.6 PROTECTION

Protect the Work of this Section and that of other trades from damage due to these operations. This Contractor shall make good any such damage at his own expense and to the approval of the Consultant.

1.7 WARRANTY

Extend the Warranty of the Work of this Section for a period of five (5) years from completion and acceptance of work.

1.8 TRAINING

Installer shall demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to owner’s representative.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PARTITION

.1 Operable Folding Partition (privacy screen/gate) acceptable product for supply and installation: .1 Folding aluminum closure model “SYSTEM S-525”as manufactured by

MobilFlex Inc. Contact: TEL 418-831-6652 (1-800-501-FLEX-3539). .2 Height from underside of new gypsum board bulkhead to top of finished floor.

.2 Curtain/Privacy Screen:

of 596





.1 The top and bottom of each section is fitted with an aluminum panel 4”

(102mm) high. This panel consists of an aluminum extrusion 1/16” (1,6mm) thick and composed of modules with a 15° angle between them to facilitate the operation of the closure.

.2 The curtain is constructed of vertical rods of 5/16” (8mm) diameter spaced out at every 3“(76mm).

.3 Vertical rods are linked together by 2” (51mm) modules spaced vertically every 14” (356mm), by aluminum sleeves of 1/2” (13mm) in diameter.

.3 Locking:

.1 Lead post shall be equipped with a hook bolt lock with MobilFlex cylinders each side.

.2 Lead post shall engage a full height wall jamb.

.3 Trailing post shall be self-locking at the top and bottom inside the storage pocket.

.4 Free floating intermediate posts shall be at recommended intervals of 10 feet (3m). Intermediate posts shall be equipped with self- adjusting spring loaded drop bolts activated from the inside only. Drop bolts shall engage dustproof stainless steel receptacles.

.4 Track:

.1 Curtain shall be hung from an overhead track 1-5/16” (33mm) wide by 1-9/16” (40mm) high.

.2 Track shall be tempered aluminum alloy 6351-T6. .5 Stacking:

.1 Stacking shall not exceed a depth of 1.15” per foot of closure width plus 3” for each post (lead, end or intermediate). (95mm/lin. m + 76mm per post). Full egress doors add 7” (176mm). Confirm that the indicated pocket stacking layout indicated on the architectural drawings and adjust the proposed layout as required to ensure the pocket for the curtain is large enough.

.6 Finishes:

.1 Curtain, frame and track shall be standard clear anodized.

2.2 OPERATION

Panels shall be manually operated, top supported, moved individually from the storage area, positioned in the opening, and seals set.

Partition Door Closure:

.1 19mm plywood door with plastic laminate finish PL2. Refer to Section 06 41 13 and Section 06 41 19.

.2 For panel door hardware, refer to Section 06 41 13.

of 596






3.1 EXAMINATION AND MEASUREMENT

When the job is sufficiently advanced to permit the installation of folding partition, visit the

Site and check the actual conditions where the partition is to be installed, to ascertain whether or not the preparation work by the preceding trades is acceptable.

Check and record all dimensions which effect the manufacture and installation of the units. Incorporate these dimensions into the Shop Drawings.

3.2 CLEANING

Wipe all track and panel surfaces clean and free of handprints, grease, and soil.

Remove packing and other installation debris from the job site. .3 Clean and adjust the stacking pocket to ensure smooth operation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

Do all installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, reviewed Shop Drawings and ASTM-E557.

Installer must be approved by manufacturer. .3 Prior to installation: Refer to Section 05 41 00 Load-bearing Steel Stud System for the

framing structure required to support the curtain and track system. Provide engineered shop drawings of the supporting load-bearing steel stud system stamped and signed by a professional engineer.

3.4 TRAINING

Installer shall demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to Owner's representative.

END OF SECTION

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 20 00 01 LOBBY RENOVATION MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

Suri & Associates Ltd. Page 1 of 1

CONTENT

SECTION TITLE

DIVISION 20 - COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL

20 05 10 Demolition

20 05 11 Mechanical General Requirements

20 06 11 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

20 06 21 Identification

20 06 17 Access Doors

20 06 21 Identification

20 05 22 Piping Insulation

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 13 13 Wet Pipe Fire Suppression

DIVISION 22 PLUMBING, DRAINAGE

22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping

22 13 13 Drainage Piping and Vent

22 36 13 Plumbing Specialities and Accessories

22 44 13 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim

DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING

23 34 33 Air Curtain

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 20 05 10 LOBBY RENOVATION DEMOLITION


PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDING IN THIS SECTION

.1 Refer to drawings for detailed demolition scope of work.

.2 All existing building services not affected by this work shall be maintained in operation during and after the demolition work is complete. Any accidental interruption of existing building services not required by this project will be promptly repaired at no additional cost to the Owner

.3 Prior to removing any piping, ensure the system is completely isolated and is not live.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Work of this section shall be executed by trades personnel having a minimum of five years of experience in the demolition field and capable to deploy adequate equipment to complete the work in an efficient and orderly manner.

1.3 EXAMINATION

.1 Examine existing property. Determine the nature of materials to be removed. 1.4 SALVAGE

.1 The Owner Representative will review the Site prior to commencement of demolition and instruct the Contractor, in writing, as to the items to be retained for re-use or be turned over to the Owner. In the absence of such specific instructions, materials from demolition shall become property of Mechanical Contractor who shall promptly remove all salvageable material and debris from Site.

.2 Remove and store indicated items for future use by the Owner. Remove, handle and

transport such items to storage area designated by the Owner Representative. Perform such work carefully and with diligence to prevent any damage to the items during removal and in storage. Store material to be salvaged, neatly on wooden pallets, where directed by Owner.

1.5 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC

.1 Maintain and preserve Owner's access requirements within, to and from existing building in areas where demolition and removal work is being carried out.

.2 Do not close, obstruct, place or store material in Owner's driveways and passageways.

Conduct operations with minimum interference with roads, streets, driveways, user traffic and passageways.

1.6 HAULING OPERATIONS

.1 Maintain roadways and paving in the hauling areas clean on a daily basis and as required by Municipal Authorities.

of 596



1.7 INTERRUPTIONS TO OWNER’S OPERATIONS

.1 There will be absolutely no interruptions to the User Group’s schedule during demolition work. Therefore, it is imperative that operations and machine and equipment movements, deliveries and removals are executed at time or times that will permit uninterrupted Owner's operations in and around the Property, including parking, receiving areas, deliveries and site and access and egress.

.2 Where interruptions of domestic cold and hot water are necessary, coordinate with the

Owner’s Representatives the timing and duration of such interruptions. 1.8 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Coordinate posting of danger signs conspicuously around property. Close doorways and thoroughfares giving access to area of demolition with barricades.

.2 Provide a competent, experienced supervisor in charge of the Work and on Site while work

is in progress.

.3 Should any suspect designated substance not already identified, be encountered, cease work in the immediate area and immediately report, to the Owner. Owner is responsible for removal of designated substances.

1.9 PROTECTION

.1 Prevent movement, settlement or damage of adjacent structures, services, walks, paving, and parts of existing building to remain. Make good any collateral damage caused by demolition.

.2 Take precautions to support affected structures and, if safety of building being demolished

or adjacent structures or services appears to be endangered, cease operations and notify the Owner.

.3 Prevent debris from blocking drainage systems (floor drains) or other mechanical and

electrical systems that must remain in operation.

.4 Protect building floors against damage from demolition work. Use ½” plywood covers over floor where lifting, moving, rolling of removed equipment is anticipated. Be responsible for repairing any damage to flooring caused by the work defined in this section. Execute repairs to the satisfaction of the Owner at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable.

of 596



PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DEMOLITION

.1 At the end of each day’s work, leave site in a safe condition and erect safety barriers and lights as required. Ensure that no parts of the existing building are in danger of collapsing.

.2 Review the requirements of new equipment to be installed. Perform all demolition work

required to allow for the new equipment to be installed, whether shown on the drawings or not.

.3 Control dust and dirt produced during demolition.

.4 Provide any additional labour, materials and services not specifically indicated on the

drawings but required to complete the work.

.5 Dispose of demolished materials in accordance with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

.6 At the end of demolition work, leave site in broom-clean condition. Clean existing surfaces

specified to receive new applied finishes to ensure proper adherence.

.7 Do not disturb adjacent structures or equipment designated to remain in place.

.8 Confine operations and workers to those parts of the building which are defined on the drawings and exercise great care not to damage existing construction beyond that necessary for the carrying out of new work. Make good any such damage in every respect, to the satisfaction of the Owner.

END OF SECTION

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 20 05 11 LOBBY RENOVATION MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

.1 This section of the specification is an integral part of the Contract Documents and shall be read accordingly.

.2 Where applicable, all portions of the Mechanical Supplementary Tender Form shall be

submitted by bidders. 1.2 DUTIES OF MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR

.1 The mechanical contractor shall assume the responsibilities and duties including, but not limited to, the ones described below.

.2 Superintendence

1. Provide full time on-site superintendent personnel and supporting staff with proven

experience in project of similar value and complexity.

2. Site superintendent shall have over-all authority to speak for and represent the mechanical contractor.

.3 Coordination

1. Coordinate the work with all the sub-trades involved to ensure that the work will be

carried out on schedule and in proper sequence.

2. Take complete responsibility for all remedial work that results from failure to coordinate any aspect of the mechanical work prior to its fabrication and/or installation.

3. Take responsibility for the delivery of equipment necessary to complete the work in

accordance with the approved schedule. .4 Staffing and Scheduling

1. Within seven days after the award of the contract, the Mechanical Contractor shall

provide to the Owner’s representative the following information:

a. Appointment of official representatives in the project. b. Schedule of work. c. Delivery schedule for specified equipment. d. Requirements for temporary facilities, site signs, storage, etc.

.5 Work Completion Meeting

1. Prior to application for Substantial Performance of the Work, the mechanical contractor

shall participate in the take-over meeting. Agenda to include the following: a. Review of outstanding deficiencies. b. Submission of maintenance manuals, warranties and as-built drawings.

of 596



c. Results of performance tests and described further in this section. d. Scheduling of training to Owner’s personnel.

1.3 INTENT

.1 Bidders for this work shall include for all labor, material, equipment and all other related cost including all applicable taxes (except HST) and fees to provide the work as indicated on the drawings.

.2 Misinterpretation of any requirement of the drawings and specifications will not relieve the

Mechanical Contractor of responsibility. If in any doubt, the Mechanical Contractor shall contact the Consultant for written clarification prior to submitting a bid for the Work.

1.4 INTERFERENCE

.1 The mechanical drawings do not show all the architectural and structural details, and any information involving accurate measuring of the building shall be taken from the building drawings or at the building. Make without additional change, any necessary changes or additions to the runs of drains, pipes, ducts, etc., to accommodate the above conditions. The location of equipment may be altered without charge providing the change is made before installation and does not necessitate major additional material.

.2 Wherever differences occur between specifications, riser diagrams or schematics and

drawings, the maximum conditions shall govern and the bid shall be based on whichever information indicates the greater cost.

.3 Field verifications of dimensions on plans shall be made since actual locations, distances,

and levels will be governed by actual field conditions.

.4 Discrepancies between different plans, or between plans and actual field conditions, or between plans and specifications shall promptly be brought to the attention of the Consultant for a decision.

.5 Install all mechanical services including but not exclusive to drains, pipes, and ducts, to

conserve headroom and interfere as little as possible with the free use of the space through which they pass. All drains, pipes, ducts, etc., particularly those which may interfere with the inside treatment of the building, or conflicting with other trades, shall be installed only after the locations have been approved by the Consultant. Special care shall be taken in the installation of all mechanical services including, but not exclusive to drains, pipes, and ducts, which are to be concealed, to see that they come within the finished lines of floors, walls, and ceilings. Where such drains, pipes, ducts, etc., have been installed in such a manner as to cause interference, they shall be removed and re-installed in suitable locations without extra cost to the Owner.

.6 Before commencing work, check and verify all grade and invert elevations, stacks, levels,

and dimensions, to ensure proper and correct installation of the work.

.7 In every place where there is space indicated as reserved for future or other equipment, leave such space clear, install blank offs, shut off valves with blind flanges and other work

of 596



so that the necessary connections can be made without any stoppages to the system. Consult with the Consultant whenever necessary for this purpose.

.8 In addition to the work specifically mentioned in the Specifications and shown on the

drawings, provide all other items that are obviously necessary to make a complete working installation, including those required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction over the work.

.9 The mechanical plans show approximate locations for wall mounted devices. Obtain

Consultant's approval of mounting heights and locations before commencement of work. 1.5 EXAMINE SITE

.1 Examine the site and the local conditions affecting the work. Examine carefully all drawings and the complete specifications to ensure that the work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown. No allowance will be made later for any expenses incurred through the failure to make these examinations or to report any such discrepancies in writing to the Consultant.

1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR’S SHOP

.1 Provide Job site office, work-shop, tools, scaffolds, material storage, etc., as required to complete the work.

1.7 CLEANING

.1 During the performance of the work and on the completion, remove from the place of the work all debris, rubbish and waste materials caused by the performance of the work. Remove all tools and surplus materials after completion and acceptance of the work.

.2 All equipment shall be thoroughly vacuumed out at the time of final acceptance of the

work. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Protection of Equipment:

1. Equipment and material placed on the job site shall remain in the custody of the Contractor until phased acceptance, whether or not the Owner has reimbursed the Contractor for the equipment and material. The Contractor is solely responsible for the protection of such equipment and material against any damage.

2. Place damaged equipment in first class, new operating condition; or, replace same as

determined and directed by the Consultant. Such repair or replacement shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

3. Protect interiors of new equipment and piping systems against entry of foreign matter.

Clean both inside and outside before painting or placing equipment in operation.

of 596



4. Existing equipment and piping being worked on by the Contractor shall be under the custody and responsibility of the Contractor and shall be protected as required for new work.

.2 Cleanliness of Piping and Equipment Systems

1. Exercise care in storage and handling of equipment and piping material to be

incorporated in the work. Remove debris arising from cutting, threading and welding of piping.

2. Piping systems shall be flushed, blown or pigged as necessary to deliver clean systems.

3. Clean interior of all tanks prior to delivery for beneficial use by the Owner.

4. Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs, damage, and delay arising from

failure to provide clean systems.

1.9 INSTALLATION OF WORK

.1 Be responsible for:

1. The layout of the work shown on the drawings and specified herein, and for any damage caused to the Owner by improper location or carrying out of this work.

2. The prompt installation of the work in advance of concrete pouring or similar work.

3. The condition of all material and equipment supplied and for the protection and

maintenance of work completed. .2 Coordinate with other trades and schedule all work to suit the date for the substantial

performance established in the construction contract.

.3 Furnish items to be "built-up" in ample time and give necessary information and assistance in connection with the building in of the same.

.4 Proceed with the work as quickly as practical so that construction may be completed in as

short a time as possible and in accordance with the building schedule.

.5 Ensure that all equipment and material is ordered in time to meet the building schedule. Provide a schedule of equipment deliveries to the Owner within the time limit stipulated.

.6 Furnish promptly information required for the construction schedule.

.7 Manufactured products supplied with instructions for their installation shall be installed in

strict accordance with those instructions.

of 596



1.10 CODES, PERMITS, FEES, AND CONNECTIONS

.1 Conform to Federal, Provincial and Municipal regulations and perform work in accordance with requirements of By-Laws and Regulations in force in area where the building is to be erected.

.2 Apply for, obtain, and pay for all permits, fees and service connections for the work and the

inspections required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction in the area where the building is to be erected.

.3 In particular, coordinate with and pay for the local gas supply company to

adjust/modify/replace the existing gas meter assembly and PRV as required to ensure that the available gas pressure is adequate for all gas fired equipment to operate simultaneously at maximum capacity. The minimum gas pressure at the boiler shall not be less than 8" w.g. under simultaneous maximum operating condition of all gas-fired equipment.

.4 For information, a specific code or standard might be mentioned. This information must not

be taken as the only code or standard applicable.

.5 When part of equipment does not bear the required CSA label, the contractor shall obtain from CSA or Hydro Electric Power Commission, when that part of the equipment is an electric component, a special approval and pay the applicable fees.

.6 Furnish necessary certificates as evidence that the work installed conforms to laws and

regulations of Authorities having jurisdiction. Changes in work requested by an Authority having jurisdiction shall be carried out without charge.

1.11 MATERIALS

.1 Where materials, equipment, apparatus, or other products are specified by the manufacturer, brand name, type or catalogue number, such designation is to establish standards of desired quality style or dimensions and shall be the basis of the Bid. Materials so specified shall be furnished under this Contract, unless changed by mutual agreement. Where two or more designations are listed, the contractor shall choose one of those listed and state the choice made on the Bid Form or Supplementary Tender Form (where applicable).

1.12 EQUIVALENTS AND ALTERNATIVES

.1 Unless requests for changes in base bid specifications are received and approved min. 5 days prior to the opening of the bids, the Contractors will be held to furnish specified items under the base bid. After the Contract is awarded changes in specifications will be made only as defined in this section (see Material Substitutions below).

.2 Equipment of the Contractors' choice may be offered as alternates to the items named in the

specifications. Alternate proposals must be accompanied by full descriptive and technical data on the article proposed, together with a statement of the amount of addition or deduction from the base bid if the alternate is accepted. Prior approval from the Consultant is not required on submitting alternative items, but the decision on acceptance of the alternate(s) will rest with the Consultant and the Owner Representative.

of 596



.3 Unspecified materials and/or rejected alternates built into the work shall be replaced with specified or accepted materials at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.13 MATERIAL SUBSTITUIONS

.1 After execution of the Contract, requests for substitution of materials of makes other than those specifically named in the Contract Documents may be approved by the Consultant, subject to Owner’s review and acceptance of the financial credits involved.

.2 In the absence of such express approval by the Consultant, the Mechanical Contractor will

be held to furnish specified items under the base bid. 1.14 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES

.1 Submit to the Consultant detailed dimension shop drawings and installation wiring diagrams for all mechanical equipment. Further details and special requirements called for in these specifications shall be shown on the shop drawings.

.2 Ensure that copies of all reviewed shop drawings are available on the job site for reference.

.3 Provide samples of mechanical equipment as requested in the specification at the same time

as the shop drawing submission. 1.15 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

.1 Maintain up to date “as built” drawings on site.

.2 At the conclusion of the project, the Consultant will forward to the Contractor a set of electronic files of the project. The Contractor shall modify the files as required, to reflect the as-built conditions, mark them conspicuously in the title block as “as-built drawings” and submit the modified files to the Consultant for review.

.3 Upon certifications by the Consultant that the as-built files are correct, the files shall be

transferred on a CD and handed over to the Owner as part of the Operations and Maintenance manuals.

.4 Any subsequent changes found by the Consultant shall remain the responsibility of the

Contractor at no charge to the Owner. 1.16 TEMPORARY AND TRAIL USAGE

.1 After any part of the work has been completed, the Consultant will make an inspection, and performance tests of such parts shall be carried out under the direction of the Consultant. If deficiencies are found, they shall be immediately rectified to the satisfaction of the Consultant. After such deficiencies have been rectified, the work shall be placed in service at such time and in such order as the Consultant may direct. If, in placing a portion of the equipment in service, it is necessary to make temporary connections in the wiring in order to obtain proper operation, such connections shall be provided to the extent and in the manner required by the Consultant.

of 596



.2 Temporary or trial usage of any mechanical devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment or materials shall not be construed as evidence of the acceptance of same.

.3 No claims for damage will be considered for injury to, or the breaking of any parts of such

work which may be used. 1.17 CONSULTANT’S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 During construction the Consultant will issue such instructions as may be necessary for verification and corrections of the work. These instructions shall be binding as part of the specification.

1.18 ADDITIONAL WORK AND CHANGES

.1 Unless a written order, reviewed by the Consultant and countersigned or otherwise approved by the Owner Representative, no additional work shall be undertaken by the Contractor.

1.19 WARRANTY

.1 The Mechanical Contractor shall guarantee all work and apparatus installed under his contract against all defects of workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year after the Substantial Performance of the Work, unless otherwise mentioned in the Specifications, and shall make good any and all defects developing during such time without expense to the Owner. Any materials shall be further guaranteed as may be called for in these specifications. Where warranties on equipment extend beyond one (1) year the Mechanical Contractor shall honor the extended warranty.

1.20 SCHEDULING OF WORK

.1 For all work to be performed under this contract, adhere to Construction Schedule agreed upon with the Owner Representative.

1.21 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATION

.1 Permit equipment maintenance and disassembly by use of unions or flanges to minimize disturbance to connecting piping and duct systems and without interference from building structure or other equipment.

.2 Provide accessible means for lubricating equipment including permanent lubricated

bearings.

.3 For all base mounted boilers, pumps, compressors, air handling units, fans and other rotating equipment, provide chamfered edge housekeeping pads a minimum of 4" high and 4" larger than equipment dimensions all around. Work shall be performed by the trades specializing in this work.

.4 Pipe drain lines, overflows and safety relief vents to drains. If the horizontal drains present

a tripping hazard, use aluminum checkered plate covers.

of 596



.5 Line-up equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items with building walls wherever possible.

1.22 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS

.1 Provide equipment with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in its normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that might be encountered, without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering and braking of load.

1.23 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

.1 General

1. Pipe Supports: Comply with MSS SP 58. Type Numbers specified refer to this standard. For selection and application comply with MSS SP 69.

.2 Attachment to Concrete Building Construction

1. Concrete insert: MSS SP-58, Type 18.

2. Self-drilling expansion shields and machine bolt expansion anchors: Permitted in

concrete not less than 102 mm (four inches) thick when approved by the Consultant for each job condition.

3. Power driven fasteners: Permitted in existing concrete or masonry not less than 102

mm (four inches) thick when approved by the Resident Engineer for each job condition.

.3 Attachment to Steel Building Construction

1. Welded attachment: MSS SP 58, Type 22.

2. Beam clamps: MSS SP-58, Types 20, 21, 28 or 29. Type 23 C clamp may be used for

individual copper tubing up to 23mm (7/8 inch) outside diameter. .4 Attachment to Metal Pan or Deck

1. As required for materials specified Steel Decking section of the specification.

.5 Attachment to Wood Construction

1. Wood screws or lag bolts.

.6 Hanger Rods

1. Hot rolled steel, ASTM A36 or A575 for allowable load listed in MSS SP 58. For

piping, provide adjustment means for controlling level or slope. Types 13 or 15 turn buckles shall provide 38 mm (1 1/2 inches) minimum of adjustment and incorporate locknuts. All thread rods are acceptable.

of 596



.7 Hangers Supporting Multiple Pipes (Trapeze Hangers)

1. Galvanized, cold formed, lipped steel channel horizontal member, not less than 41 mm by 41 mm (1 5/8 inches by 1 5/8 inches), 2.7 mm (No. 12 gage), designed to accept special spring held, hardened steel nuts. Not permitted for steam supply and condensate piping.

2. Allowable hanger load: Manufacturers rating less 91kg (200 pounds).

3. Guide individual pipes on the horizontal member of every other trapeze hanger with 6

mm (1/4 inch) U bolt fabricated from steel rod. Provide Type 40 insulation shield, secured by two 13mm (1/2 inch) galvanized steel bands, or preinsulated calcium silicate shield for insulated piping at each hanger.

.8 Supports for Piping Systems

1. Select hangers sized to encircle insulation on insulated piping. To protect insulation,

provide Type 39 saddles for roller type supports or preinsulated calcium silicate shields. Provide Type 40 insulation shield or preinsulated calcium silicate shield at all other types of supports and hangers including those for preinsulated piping.

.9 Piping Systems (MSS SP 58)

1. Standard clevis hanger: Type 1; provide locknut. 2. Riser clamps: Type 8. 3. Wall brackets: Types 31, 32 or 33. 4. Roller supports: Type 41, 43, 44 and 46. 5. Saddle support: Type 36, 37 or 38. 6. Turnbuckle: Types 13 or 15. Preinsulate. 7. U bolt clamp: Type 24. 8. Copper Tube:

a. Hangers, clamps and other support material in contact with tubing shall be

painted with copper colored epoxy paint, plastic coated or taped with non-adhesive isolation tape to prevent electrolysis.

b. For vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps.

c. For supporting tube to strut: Provide epoxy painted pipe straps for copper tube or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.

9. Insulated Lines:

a. Provide pre-insulated calcium silicate shields sized for copper tube.

10. Supports for plastic or glass piping: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer with

black rubber tape extending one inch beyond steel support or clamp.

.10 Piping with Vertical Expansion and Contraction

of 596



1. Movement up to 20 mm (3/4 inch): Type 51 or 52 variable spring unit with integral turn buckle and load indicator.

2. Movement more than 20 mm (3/4 inch): Type 54 or 55 constant support unit with

integral adjusting nut, turn buckle and travel position indicator. .11 Heat Exchanger and Expansion Tank Hangers

1. May be Type 1 sized for the shell diameter. Insulation where required will cover the

hangers. 1.24 PIPE PENETRATIONS

.1 Install sleeves during construction for other than blocked out floor openings for risers in mechanical bays.

.2 To prevent accidental liquid spills from passing to a lower level, provide the following:

1. For sleeves: Extend sleeve 25 mm (one inch) above finished floor and provide sealant

for watertight joint.

2. For blocked out floor openings: Provide 40 mm (1 1/2 inch) angle set in silicone adhesive around opening.

3. For drilled penetrations: Provide 40 mm (1 1/2 inch) angle ring or square set in silicone

adhesive around penetration. .3 Penetrations are not allowed through beams or ribs, but may be installed in concrete beam

flanges. Any deviation from these requirements must receive prior approval of Consultant.

.4 Sheet Metal: Provide for pipe passing through floors, interior walls, and partitions, unless brass or steel pipe sleeves are specifically called for below.

.5 Cast Iron or Zinc Coated Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through exterior walls

below grade. Make space between sleeve and pipe watertight with a modular or link rubber seal. Seal shall be applied at both ends of sleeve.

.6 Galvanized Steel or an alternate Black Iron Pipe with asphalt coating Sleeves: Provide for

pipe passing through concrete beam flanges, except where brass pipe sleeves are called for. Provide sleeve for pipe passing through floor of mechanical rooms. Except in mechanical rooms, connect sleeve with floor plate.

.7 Brass Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through quarry tile, terrazzo or ceramic tile

floors. Connect sleeve with floor plate.

.8 Sleeves are not required for wall hydrants for fire department connections or in drywall construction.

.9 Sleeve Clearance: Sleeve through floors, walls, partitions, and beam flanges shall be one

inch greater in diameter than external diameter of pipe. Sleeve for pipe with insulation shall

of 596



be large enough to accommodate the insulation. Interior openings shall be caulked tight with fire stopping material and sealant to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases.

1.25 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

.1 Furnish, and turn over to the Owner, special tools not readily available commercially, that are required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and machinery furnished.

.2 Grease Guns with Attachments for Applicable Fittings: One for each type of grease

required for each motor or other equipment.

.3 Tool Containers: Hardwood or metal, permanently identified for intended service and mounted, or located, where directed by the Owner.

.4 Lubricants: A minimum of 0.95 L (one quart) of oil, and 0.45 kg (one pound) of grease, of

equipment manufacturer's recommended grade and type, in unopened containers and properly identified as to use for each different application.

1.26 WALL, FLOOR, AND CEILING PLATES

.1 Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type with concealed hinge, with set screw for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit tight around pipes, cover openings around pipes and cover the entire pipe sleeve projection.

.2 Thickness: Not less than 2.4 mm (3/32 inch) for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates,

not less than 0.64 mm (0.025-inch) for up to 80 mm (3 inch pipe), 0.89 mm (0.035-inch) for larger pipe.

.3 Locations: Use where pipe penetrates floors, walls and ceilings in exposed locations, in

finished areas only. Use also where insulation ends on exposed water supply pipe drop from overhead. Provide a watertight joint in spaces where brass or steel pipe sleeves are specified.

1.27 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

.1 Grade the bottom of the pipe trench excavation as required.

.2 In firm, undisturbed soil, lay pipes directly on the soil, and shape soil to fit the lower one-third segment of all pipes and pipe bells. Ensure even bearing along the barrels. Backfill excess excavation with 25 mPa concrete.

.3 Where rock or shale is encountered, arrange to have this excavated and removed. After

excavation, backfill with a bedding of 10 mm crushed stone.

.4 Prepare new bedding under the pipe in unstable soil, in fill, and in all cases where pipe bedding has been removed in earlier excavation, particularly near perimeter walls of buildings, at manholes and catch basins. Compact to maximum possible density and support the pipe by 200 mm (8 inches) thick firm supports. Install reinforcing steel in cradle or construct piers every eight feet or closer, down to solid load bearing strata. Provide a minimum of one pier per length of pipe. Use same method where pipes cross.

of 596



.5 Where excavation is necessary in proximity to and below the level of any footing, backfill with 25 mPa concrete to the level of the highest adjacent footing. Proximity is determined by the angle of repose as established by the Consultant.

.6 Provide support over at least the bottom one third segment of the pipe in all bedding

methods.

.7 Do not open trench ahead of pipe laying and backfilling more than weather will permit. Keep walls of trenches straight to at least 450 mm (18") above the top of the pipe to keep the diameter load within the pipe design limits. Have excavations inspected at least once a week by authorities.

.8 Before backfilling, obtain approval. Remove all shoring during backfill.

.9 Backfill trenches within building, with clean sharp sand or gravel in individual layers of

maximum 150 mm (6") thickness, compacted to a density of 100% Standard Proctor. Hand compact the first layers up to a compacted level of minimum 300 mm (12") above the top of pipe. Hand or machine compact the balance up to grade, using approved equipment.

.10 Backfill trenches outside buildings, not under roads, parking lots, or traffic areas, up to a

compacted level of 450 mm (18") above the pipes with individual layers of material 150 mm (6") thick, hand compacted to a density of 95% Standard Proctor, using approved 10 mm (3/8") crushed stone. Backfill the balance with 150 mm (6") layers of approved excavated material, compacted to 95% Standard Proctor, using approved equipment.

.11 Backfill all other trenches outside buildings with 150 mm (3/8") crushed stone in layers not

exceeding 6" thickness, compacted to 100% Standard Proctor density up to grade level. Manual compaction up to 450 mm (18") above the pipe with approved equipment for the balance.

.12 Fill all depressions to a correct grade level with appropriate material. After a period has

passed adequate to reveal any settlement, use maximum possible compaction. Pay all costs required to make good all damages caused by settlement.

.13 Dispose of excavated materials in accordance with the requirements of the Authorities

having Jurisdiction. 1.28 TESTS

.1 Do not insulate or conceal work until tested and approved. Follow construction schedule and arrange for tests.

.2 Conduct tests in presence of Consultant.

.3 Bear costs including retesting and making good.

.4 Pipe pressure:

1. Hydraulically test piping systems at 1.5 times system operating pressure or minimum

125 psi, whichever is greater.

of 596



2. Maintain test pressures without loss for 4 hours unless otherwise specified.

3. Test natural gas systems to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and as per Ontario Gas Utilization Code O.Reg. 452/89.

4. Test drainage, waste and vent piping to code.

.5 Prior to tests, isolate all equipment or other parts which are not designed to withstand test

pressures. 1.29 PAINTING

.1 Apply at least one coat of corrosion resistant primer paint to supports, and equipment fabricated from ferrous metals.

.2 Touch-up paint all damaged equipment with products matching original finish in quality

and appearance.

.3 Paint the entire gas line where with two coats of yellow paint. 1.30 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS

.1 Furnish spare parts as follows:

1. One set of packing for each pump. 2. One glass for each gauge glass installed. 3. One set of v-belts/bolts for each piece of machinery. 4. One spare set of filters for each filter bank installed.

.2 Upon completion of project and immediately before hand-over, replace all filters.

1.31 DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS

.1 Provide wherever pipes of dissimilar metals are joined.

.2 Provide insulating unions for pipe sizes larger than 2" diameter and under; same for flanges of pipe sizes over 2" diameter.

.3 Cast brass adapters may be used on domestic water systems and where approved by the

Consultant.

.4 Provide rubber gaskets to prevent dissimilar metals contact. 1.32 INSTRUCTION OF OPERATING STAFF

.1 Supply certified personnel to instruct Owner operating staff on operation of new mechanical equipment. Supply maintenance specialist personnel to instruct operating staff on maintenance and adjustment of mechanical equipment and any changes or modification in equipment made under terms of guarantee.

of 596



.2 Provide minimum 6 hrs of instruction time during regular work hours prior to acceptance and turn-over to operating staff for regular operation.

.3 Use operation and maintenance data manual for instruction purposes. On completion of

instruction, turn manuals over to the Consultant.

.4 Scheduling of the timing for the training of the operating staff shall be arranged 10 days prior to the completion of the project.

.5 For training on controls, refer to Section 15900.

1.33 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

.1 Provide minimum of three (3) copies of Mechanical Maintenance Manuals, in accordance to the following:

1. Mechanical Maintenance Manuals to be delivered to the Consultant’s office 10 days

prior to the substantial completion of the Contract.

.2 Manuals to be bound in a hard cover neatly labeled: "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS".

.3 The Maintenance Manuals shall be divided into sections with neatly labeled and tabbed

dividers between each section. The sections to be included in the manual are:

1. Section I - General 2. Section II - Piping and Pump Systems, Plumbing Fixtures and Accessories 3. Section III - Boilers, Heat Exchangers, Pool Filters and Accessories 4. Section IV - Automatic Controls 5. Section V - Air and Water Balancing

.4 The following information shall be contained within the sections:

1. SECTION I: A list giving name, address and telephone number of the Consultant,

Engineers, General Contractor, Mechanical Trade and Controls Trade. Written guarantees for the Mechanical Systems. A copy of the Valve directory giving number, valve location, normal valve position, and purpose of valve (a framed copy of Valve Directory to be hung in Boiler Room). Equipment lists and certificates shall be provided - certificates shall be signed and sealed by the appropriate suppliers.

2. SECTION II, III: A copy of all pressure tests and operational tests. A copy of Gas

Operational Tests for gas fired equipment. A list giving name, address and telephone number of all suppliers. Details of chemical treatment equipment and substances. A copy of all reviewed Shop Drawings for all mechanical equipment and ancillary devices (valves, expansion tanks, pumps, strainers, plumbing, etc.). Copies of warranties.

3. SECTION IV: Complete Control Diagrams, Wiring Diagrams and description of

Control system and the functioning sequence of the system. Also refer to section 15900.

of 596



4. SECTION V: For balancing reports and formats, refer to section 15015 of these specifications.

1.34 CONCRETE

.1 All concrete work required to complete this project, whether shown on the drawings or not, shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

.2 Refer to this specification section for requirements for housekeeping pad.

1.35 METALS

.1 All steel construction required for the completion of this project, whether shown on the drawings or not, shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

1.36 CUTTING, PATCHING, ROOFING, AND X-RAY

.1 All cutting, patching, roofing and X-Rays required for the completion of this project whether shown on the drawings or not, shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. The cutting and patching work shall be performed in accordance with the following:

1. All cutting and patching shall be done by the trades specializing in the materials to be

cut.

2. All flashing and equipment supports on the roof shall be done in strict accordance with the Owner standards by Owner-approved roofing contractors only.

.2 Should any cutting, roofing and/or repairing of finished surfaces be required, the Sub-trade

contractor for the Contractor shall employ the particular trades engaged on the site for this type of work to do such cutting and/or repairing. Obtain the approval of the Consultant before doing any cutting. In the event that tradesmen required for particular cutting and/or repairing are not already on the site, bring to the site tradesmen to do this work.

.3 Supporting members of any floor, wall or the building structure shall be cut only in such a

location and manner as approved by the Consultant.

.4 Where slabs in the portions of the building which are existing must be saw-cut or core drilled, all locations shall be x-rayed prior to saw-cutting or core-drilling. All x-raying shall be done by personnel qualified in the use of the type of equipment required to x-ray the saw-cuts shall be permitted to perform this work on the site. No allowance will be made later for expenses incurred through the failure of performing these x-rays.

1.37 MECHANICAL PROJECT COMPLETION

.1 Ten (10) days prior to substantial performance of work obtain documentation and/or prepare certification of the following items and submit them to the Owner's representative:

1. All inspection certificates including drainage, Plumbing, and refrigeration. 2. Guarantee certificates as called for under "Warranty". 3. Record drawings.

of 596



4. Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 5. Test certifications as called for under "Testing". 6. Provide a signed statement to the effect that all tests for mechanical systems and

equipment have been completely carried out in the Trade Sections of these Specifications and to the manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.

1.38 PERFORMANCE TESTS AND EQUIPMENT START-UP

.1 After all equipment has been installed, adjusted, balanced and started up, subject equipment to a series of performance tests, as soon as conditions permit.

.2 The timing of the tests shall be arranged to suit the convenience of the Consultant, and the

manner and duration shall be as the Consultant deems necessary. Record the daily start and stop times, operating hours and functions performed. Ensure that the performance tests are witnessed by the Consultant.

.3 All major equipment including but not limited to boilers, pumps, sand filters are to be

inspected by the manufacturer to ensure that the equipment has been installed in accordance with their recommendations.

.4 Operate equipment under varying load conditions, demonstrate start-up sequence, normal

shutdown, simulated emergency shutdown, operation of temperature, etc., and safety controls. Operate switches and electrical devices for correct wiring sequences. Adjust components to achieve a proper functional relationship among all the components of all the systems. Repeat these functions as many times as deemed necessary by the Consultant to achieve reliable operation.

.5 Repair defects and repeat tests as necessary. During test maintain lubrication schedule, set,

align and tension drives.

.6 At the successful completion of Performance Tests and all testing and balancing, make the systems ready for final inspection and subsequent acceptance of the Owner. Replace and clean filters, flush out lines and equipment, remove and clean strainers, fill liquid systems and purge air. Provide water treatment to pipes and report in accordance to Section 15602. Disinfect all domestic water as required by current by-laws and Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

.7 Conduct tests to demonstrate operation and ability to meet requirements of all equipment

and freedom from undue noise and vibration at the time of final inspection, having ensured that it has previously been subjected to Performance Tests.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Applicable.

END OF SECTION

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 20 06 11 LOBBY RENOVATION TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING


PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

.1 Testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of heating and ventilating systems. TAB includes the following:

1. Systems Inspection Report.

2. Balancing air and water distribution systems; adjustment of total system to provide

design performance.

3. Recording and reporting results.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 TAB: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing; the process of checking and adjusting HVAC systems to meet design objectives.

.2 AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

.3 Hydronic Systems: Includes heating hot water, domestic hot water recirculation, chilled

water, condenser water, and glycol water systems, as applicable to the project.

.3 Air Handling Systems: Includes all central and distributed air handling equipment that provide outside air, supply air, return air, exhaust air, and relief air to and from the building, as applicable to the project.

.4 Air distribution systems: Includes all grilles, diffusers, terminal units (bypass/VAV).

.5 Flow rate tolerance: The allowable percentage variation, minus to plus, of actual flow rate

from values (design) in the contract documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Qualifications:

1. TAB Agency: The TAB agency shall be a subcontractor of the Mechanical Contractor and shall report to and be paid by the Mechanical Contractor.

2. The TAB agency shall be either a certified member of AABC or NEBB to perform

TAB service for HVAC and water balancing equipment. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the agency loses subject certification during this period, the General Contractor shall immediately notify the Consultant and the Owner and submit another TAB firm for approval.

3. TAB Specialist: The TAB specialist shall be either a member of AABC or an

experienced technician of the Agency.

of 596



.2 TAB Agency shall be identified by the General Contractor within 60 days after the award of the contract.

.3 The TAB specialist will be coordinating, scheduling and reporting all TAB work and

related activities and will provide necessary information as required by the Consultant. The responsibilities would specifically include:

1. Shall directly supervise all TAB work.

2. Shall sign the TAB reports that bear the seal of the TAB Agency. The reports shall be

accompanied by report forms and schematic drawings required by the TAB standard, AABC.

3. Would follow all TAB work through its satisfactory completion.

4. Shall provide final markings of settings of all HVAC adjustment devices.

5. Permanently mark location of duct test ports.

.4 Test Equipment Criteria: The instrumentation shall meet the accuracy/calibration

requirements established by AABC National Standards and or by the instrument manufacturer.

.5 Tab Criteria:

(a) Air Filter resistance during tests, artificially imposed if necessary, shall be at least 90

percent of final values for pre-filters and after-filters.

(b) Flow rate tolerance:

a. Air handling unit and all other fans, cubic meters/min (cubic feet per minute): Minus 5% to plus l0%.

b. Grilles, diffusers and air terminal units (maximum values): -5% to +l0%. c. Exhaust hoods/cabinets: 0 % to + l0 %. d. Minimum outside air: 0 % to +10 %. e. Individual room air outlets and inlets, and air flow rates not mentioned above: -

5 % to + 10 % except if the air to a space is 100 CFM or less the tolerance would be 0 to plus 5 %.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit the following for review to the Consultant:

1. Systems inspection report on equipment and installation for conformance with design.

2. Final TAB reports covering flow balance and adjustments, performance tests.

3. Include in final reports uncorrected installation deficiencies noted during TAB and applicable explanatory comments on test results that differ from design requirements.

of 596



1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

.1 The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. In text the publications are referenced to by the acronym of the organization.

.2 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

(ASHRAE): HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.

.3 Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.

.4 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): HVAC

Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUGS

.1 Provide plastic plugs to seal holes drilled in ductwork for test purposes. 2.2 INSULATION REPAIR MATERIAL

.1 Coordinate with the mechanical Contractor the TAB activity such that it does take place before the insulation is installed on ductwork and piping.

.2 In the absence of such coordination, the mechanical contractor shall be responsible for the

repair to the ductwork and or piping insulation removed for TAB purposes, including the integrity of the vapor barrier material and the insulation jacket.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

.1 Obtain applicable contract documents and copies of approved submittals for HVAC equipment and automatic control systems.

3.2 SYSTEMS INSPECTION REPORT

.1 Inspect equipment and installation for conformance with design.

.2 The inspection and report is to be done after air distribution equipment is on site and duct installation has begun, but well in advance of performance testing and balancing work. The purpose of the inspection is to identify and report deviations from design and ensure that systems will be ready for TAB at the appropriate time.

.3 Verify that all items such as ductwork piping, ports, terminals, connectors, etc., that is

required for TAB is installed. Provide a report to the Consultant.

of 596



.4 Reports: Follow check list format developed by AABC or SMACNA, supplemented by narrative comments, with emphasis on air handling units and fans. Check for conformance with submittals. Verify that diffuser and register sizes are correct. Check air terminal unit installation including their duct sizes and routing.

3.3 TAB REPORT

.1 Format to be in accordance with referenced standard listed above, but using design drawing units.

.2 Produce "as-built" full system schematics. Use as-built drawings for reference.

.3 Submit 1 copy of preliminary TAB reports, each in “D" ring binders, complete with index

tabs for verification and approval of Consultant.

.4 Submit copies of final TAB reports after approval by the Consultant, to be incorporated into the Maintenance and Operations Manual, as indicated in section 15010.

.5 The Contractor, utilizing a TAB Agency approved by these specifications, shall

perform a pre-airflow check across all supply air grilles/diffusers, return air ducts and fan-powered boxes (total of 7) shown on Drawing M1.1. The pre-airflow check shall be conducted prior to the start of any construction work on site and shall be sent to the Consultant for their review prior to commencing any construction on site. Results presented shall include the CFM values outputted through each fan powered box, supply air grille/diffuser and the return air CFM through the main return air ductwork in the space.

.6 At the conclusion of all construction work, the Contractor, utilizing a TAB Agency

approved by these specifications, shall perform balancing and/or adjustments of all new diffusers/grilles, return air ducts and fan-powered boxes to meet values directed by the Engineer (note that the value depicted on the drawings may change based on results from the pre-airflow check). Obtain instruction/direction from the Consultant prior to scheduling the final balancing/adjustment. Allow for the balancing and adjustment of all new and existing (not being modified or impacted by the intended scope of work) diffusers, grilles, fan-powered boxes and return air ductwork shown on Drawing M2.1.

3.4 PROCEDURES

.1 Tab shall be performed in accordance with the requirement of the Standard under which TAB agency is certified.

.2 Start final TAB only when building is essentially completed, including:

1. Installation of ceilings, doors, windows and other construction affecting TAB.

2. Application of sealing, caulking and weather-stripping.

3. Normal operation of mechanical systems affecting TAB.

of 596



.3 General: During TAB all related system components shall be in full operation. Fan and pump rotation, motor loads and equipment vibration shall be checked and corrected as necessary before proceeding with TAB. Set controls and/or block off parts of distribution systems to simulate design operation of variable volume air or water systems for test and balance work.

3.5 AIR BALANCE AND EQUIPMENT TEST

.1 Include all air handling units, fans, terminal units, fan coil units, room diffusers/outlets/inlets, as applicable to this project.

.2 Adjust fan speeds to provide design air flow.

.3 Test and balance systems in all specified modes of operation, including variable volume,

economizer, and fire emergency modes. Verify that dampers and other controls function properly.

.4 Parameters to be measured:

1. Air flow. 2. Air velocity. 3. Static pressure. 4. Velocity pressure. 5. Temperature.

a. Wet bulb. b. Dry bulb.

6. Cross-sectional area. 7. Fan’s RPM. 8. Electrical power.

a. Voltage. b. Current draw.

.5 Locations of measurements:

1. Inlet and outlet of each:

a. Fan. b. Coil. c. Filter. d. Balancing damper. e. Other auxiliary equipment.

2. Main ducts. 3. Main branch ducts. 4. Sub-branch ducts. 5. Each supply, exhaust, and return air inlet and outlet. 6. Before and after the silencers.

3.6 WATER BALANCE AND EQUIPMENT TEST:

.1 Include all circulating pumps, heat exchangers, boilers, coils, as applicable to this project.

.2 Adjust flow rates for equipment to the values indicated on the drawings and schedules. Set

of 596



balancing valves and circuit setters to the values on indicated on the equipment schedules

.3 Record final measurements for hydronic equipment on performance data sheets. Include entering and leaving water temperatures for heating and cooling coils, and for heat exchangers. Include entering and leaving air temperatures (DB/WB for cooling coils) for air handling units and reheat coils. Make air and water temperature measurements at the same time.

.4 Parameters to be measured

.1 Water/Glycol Flow (as applicable to the project) .2 Pressure. .3 Temperature. .4 Specific gravity. .5 Pumps RPM .6 Electrical power:

.1 Voltage

.2 Current draw.

.5 Locations of Measurements .1 Inlet and outlet of each

.1 Balancing valve.

.2 Automatic control valves 3.7 VERIFICATION

.1 Reported measurements shall be subject to verification by Consultant. Provide instrumentation and manpower to verify results of up to 30 % of all reported measurements. Number and location of verified measurements to be at discretion of Consultant.

.2 Bear costs to repeat TAB, as required, to satisfaction of Consultant.

3.8 MARKING OF SETTINGS

.1 Following approval of TAB final Report, the setting of all HVAC adjustment devices including balancing valves, splitters and dampers shall be permanently marked by the TAB Specialist so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Style and colors used for markings shall be coordinated with the Consultant.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION OF TEST PORTS

.1 The TAB Specialist shall permanently and legibly identify the location points of duct test ports. If the ductwork has exterior insulation, the identification shall be made on the exterior side of the insulation. All penetrations through ductwork and ductwork insulation shall be sealed to prevent air leaks and maintain integrity of vapor barrier.

END OF SECTION

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 20 06 17 LOBBY RENOVATION ACCESS DOORS



.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 20 05 11 – Mechanical General Requirements.

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010 – Mechanical General Requirements.

.2 Submit for approval, manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation and

fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

.1 Supply access doors to the relevant building trade to provide access in furred ceilings for the following:

1. Servicing equipment. 2. Access to plumbing cleanouts. 3. Access to shut-off valves. 4. Inspection of life safety equipment. 5. Service of operating devices. 6. All locations where periodic maintenance is required.

.2 Access door sizes shall be as follows:

1. Body Entry: 24” x 24” (600 x 600 mm) 2. For Hand Entry: 18” x 18” (450 x 450 mm) 3. For Viewing Only: 12” x 12” (300 x 300 mm)

.3 All doors shall open 180 degrees and have rounded safety corners.

.4 For fire rated ceilings or wall provide a fire rated access door that will match the fire rating

of the wall that the access door is installed in. The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing the drawings and providing fire rated access doors where they are required.

.5 Where body access is possible the access doors shall be provided with a releasing

mechanism on both sides of the door.

.6 Refer to Section 08310 of the specification. 2.2 RECESSED ACCESS DOOR FOR DRYWALL APPLICATIONS

.1 Door shall be 16 gauge steel. Mounting frame shall be 14 gauge galvanized steel.

of 596



.2 Door shall be provided with a 25 mm (1”) recess or 14 mm (5/8”) to suit the thickness of

the drywall ceiling.

.3 The frame shall be provided with a galvanized steel drywall taping bead on all sides.

.4 The hinge shall be a concealed pivoting rod.

.5 The latch shall be a flush to the surface, screwdriver operated cam latch.

.6 The steel finish shall be 5 stage iron phosphate preparation with prime coat of grey baked enamel.

.7 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor DW-5015, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers.

2.3 RECESSED ACCESS DOOR FOR PLASTER APPLICATIONS

.1 Door shall be 16 gauge steel. Mounting frame shall be 14 gauge galvanized steel.

.2 Door shall be provided with a 14 mm (5/8”) recess and shall be lined with self-furring galvanized lath.

.3 The frame shall be provided an expansion casing bead with 75 mm (3”) wide galvanized

lath, recessed 20 mm (3/4”) to receive plaster.

.4 The hinge shall be a concealed pivoting rod.

.5 The latch shall be a flush to the surface, screwdriver operated cam latch.

.6 The steel finish shall be 5 stage iron phosphate preparation with prime coat of grey baked enamel.

.7 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor AP-5010, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers.

2.4 FLUSH ACCESS DOORS FOR TILED WALL APPLICATIONS

.1 For doors 400 x 400 mm (16” x 16”) and smaller the door shall be 16 gauge with 18 gauge mounting frame.

.2 For doors over 400 x 400 mm (16” x 16”) the door shall be 14 gauge with 16 gauge

mounting frame.

.3 Door shall be flush to frame with rounded safety corners.

.4 The frame shall be one piece welded to the mounting frame.

.5 The hinge shall be a continuous concealed hinge.

.6 The latch shall be a stainless steel screwdriver cam latch.

.7 The finish shall be type 304 #4 satin polish stainless steel.

of 596



.8 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor UF-5000, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers.

2.5 FIRE RATED ACCESS DOORS

.1 Door shall be constructed of 20 gauge steel with a 16 gauge mounting frame.

.2 Door shall be filled with 50 mm (2”) thick fire rated insulation.

.3 The door frame shall be provided with a 25 mm (1”) wide flange and mounting frame to have anchor straps.

.4 The hinge shall be concealed and shall be provided with a spring closer.

.5 Door shall be UL/ULC rated for 1 ½ hour “B” label with 250 degree F temp rise in 30

minutes.

.6 The latch shall be a universal self-latching bolt, operated by either a knurled knob.

.7 The steel finish shall be 5 stage iron phosphate prepared with a prime coat of grey baked enamel.

.8 Door shall be provided with an interior latch release.

.9 For drywall applications, provide a galvanized steel drywall taping bead flange.

.10 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor FB-5060, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers.

2.6 FIRE RATED ACCESS DOOR WITH INSIDE LATCH RELEASE

.1 Door shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel with a 16 gauge mounting frame.

.2 Door shall be flush to frame with reinforced edges.

.3 The door frame shall be provided with a 25 mm (1”) wide flange and shall be provided with anchor straps.

.4 The hinge shall be concealed and shall be provided with a spring closer.

.5 The door shall be UL/ULC rated for 1 ½ hour “B” label or 2 hour “B” label as required

where temperature rise is not a factor.

.6 The latch shall be a universal self-latching bolt, operated by either a knurled knob.

.7 The steel finish shall be 5 stage iron phosphate prepared with a prime coat of grey baked enamel.

.8 Door shall be provided with an interior latch release.

.9 For drywall applications provide a galvanized steel drywall taping bead flange.

of 596



.10 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor FB-5060, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers. 2.7 VALVE BOX – SURFACE MOUNT

.1 Door shall be stainless steel in public areas and steel in mechanical rooms and service areas.

.2 Door and box shall be 16 gauge steel.

.3 The door shall overlap the box, providing a tight and secure fit.

.4 The box shall be fully enclosed, attached to the door.

.5 The hinge shall be a continuous piano hinge.

.6 The door shall be provided with a cylinder lock and key.

.7 For steel doors the finish shall be 5 stage iron phosphate preparation with prime coat of

grey baked enamel.

.8 Stainless steel doors shall be #4 satin finish.

.9 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor ASVB, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers. 2.8 VALVE BOX – RECESSED

.1 Door shall be stainless steel in public areas and steel in mechanical rooms and service areas.

.2 Door and box shall be 16 gauge steel.

.3 The door shall be flush to the frame with rounded safety corners.

.4 The box shall be fully enclosed, completely attached to the frame.

.5 The hinge shall be a continuous concealed hinge.

.6 The door shall be provided with a cylinder lock and key.

.7 For steel doors the finish shall be 5 stage iron phosphate preparation with prime coat of

grey baked enamel. .8 Stainless steel doors shall be #4 satin finish.

.9 Standard of Acceptance: Acudor ARVB, Mifab, Zurn, Watrous, Williams Brothers.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

of 596



.1 On some drawings, access door locations have been indicated for coordination. The drawings do not show all access doors required.

.2 The Division 15 Contractor shall provide a set of drawings showing locations and types of

all access doors located in public areas to the Consultant for approval, prior to commencing the installation of any piping or ductwork within these areas.

.3 Access doors shall be turned over to the building trade that is responsible for finishing the

wall or ceiling where the access door is required.

.4 The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for providing the access doors required to be installed in ductwork. Refer to section 15820 for requirements.

END OF SECTION

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 20 06 21 LOBBY RENOVATION IDENTIFICATION



.1 This section includes:

1. Valve tags. 2. Pipe Markers/Arrow Tape above ground. 3. Underground Piping Warning Tape. 4. Mechanical Equipment and HVAC Controls Identification. 5. Safety Signs. 6. Isolation Valves Numbering.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 Exposed Areas

1. Finished areas and other areas used by personnel in normal use of building, such as equipment rooms and storage rooms.

.2 Concealed Areas

1. Duct or pipe tunnels, duct or pipe chases, spaces above accessible ceilings, and crawl

spaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE

.1 W. H. Brady Co. catalogue numbers are used as a basis of identification.

.2 Stock catalogue numbers are listed in these specifications. Subcontractor is responsible to review schedules and provide required markers. In some instances, "non-stock" markers (special) may be required.

2.2 MANUFACTURER’S NAMEPLATES

.1 Manufacturer’s nameplates:

1. Provide metal nameplate on each piece of equipment, mechanically fastened with raised or recessed letters.

2. Provide Underwriters' Laboratories or CSA registration plates, as required by

respective agency.

3. Manufacturers nameplate to indicate size, equipment model, manufacturer's name, serial number, voltage, cycle, phase and power of motors.

4. Locate nameplates so that they are easily read. Do not insulate or paint over plates.

of 596



2.3 VALVE TAGS

.1 Metal Tags: Brass or aluminium with stamped or engraved letters; tag sizes minimum 2” (round, square, or rectangle) with smooth edges. Thickness 19 gauge (0.040”) minimum.

.2 Beaded Chain: Size 6, brass or aluminium, 4-1/2” long with locking link.

2.4 PIPE MARKERS/ARROW TAPE ABOVE GROUND

.1 Colour: Conform to ANSI A13.1.

.2 Self-Sticking Pipe Markers/Arrow Tape: Material B-946, flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive permanent adhesive backing and printed markings.

.3 Suitable for indoor/outdoor application.

.4 Temperature range: Minus 40 degrees to 180 degrees F.

2.5 UNDERGROUND PIPING WARNING TAPE

.1 Tracer wire and test station(s) required when burying cast iron, ductile iron, or non-metallic piping.

.2 Tracer Wire: #10AWG THHN/THWN, yellow, solid copper.

.3 Tracer Wire Test Station: C.P. Test Services. Test Station: Plastic Pipe, cast iron cover, 2-

point terminal box. 2.6 CONTROLS IDENTIFICATION

.1 Not applicable. 2.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

.1 Labelling shall be furnished and installed by the contractor.

.2 Engraved signs shall be dark letters on light background.

.3 Identify mechanical equipment and HVAC controls, e.g., air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, water treatment devices, controls instruments, stationary tanks/containers, and similar items, with nameplates or tags.

.4 Provide engraved nameplates made of rigid plastic laminate in which coloured top and

bottom layers of the material are thermoset with a contrasting colour core. Minimum thickness 0.062”.

.5 Size: Minimum 1” x 3”.

.6 Material Colour: White background/black lettering.

of 596



.7 Manufacturer: Brady, No. B-1.

.8 Provide lettering as follows:

1. Size: 10 point minimum. 2. Spacing: 1/4” from top, 1/8” from bottom, 1/16” between lines. 3. Provide nameplate with component nomenclature as noted in the Equipment

Schedules. Coordinate with the controls sub-contractor.

.9 As a minimum, identify the system, e.g., HVAC (heating, ventilating, and air conditioning), the component, e.g., FGF (furnace, gas fired), and the sequence number.

2.8 SAFETY SIGNS

.1 Colours associated with specific words such as "Danger," "Warning," "Caution," or "Notice" shall conform to ANSI Z35.1.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Valve Tags:

1. Install with brass beaded chain. 2. Steel stamp or engrave valve tag in accordance with schedule herein. 3. Letter style block, 1/4" height minimum. 4. Tag all valves in concealed or exposed areas except isolation and by-pass valves

installed adjacent to the equipment they serve. 5. Provide typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location. Frame under glass and

hang where directed.

.2 Pipe Markers above Ground:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Seal markers with clear lacquer. 3. Identify piping in exposed or concealed areas in accordance with schedule herein. 4. Pipe marker consists of pipe contents identification with flow direction arrow tape.

Provide consistent colour scheme, unless otherwise noted. 5. Wrap arrow tape completely around pipe at both ends of pipe markers. 6. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. 7. Label piping at intervals of not more than 20 feet on horizontal and vertical runs, at

each branch connection, and where pipe penetrates walls, ceilings and floors (both sides).

8. Size of label depends on outside diameter (OD) of pipe. Pipe OD includes insulation or protective coating.

9. Minimum length of marker, including arrows:

of 596



a. 2” diameter pipe or smaller: 8” b. 2” to 8”: 12” c. 8” to 10” 24” d. Over 10” 32”

.3 Safety Signs

1. Install in clear view.

END OF SECTION

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 20 06 22 LOBBY RENOVATION PIPING INSULATION



.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of Section 20 05 11.


.1 Comply with OBC and NFPA 90A requirements, particularly paragraphs pertaining to the maximum flame spread index (currently set at 25) and maximum smoke development index (currently set at 50).

.2 All materials shall be compatible and suitable for service temperature and shall not

contribute to corrosion or otherwise attack surface to which applied in either the wet or dry state.

.3 Every package or standard container of insulation or accessories delivered to the job site

for use must have a manufacturer's stamp or label giving the name of the manufacturer and description of the material.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data in accordance with Section 15010.

.2 Provide the following:

1. Insulation materials: Specify each type used and state surface burning characteristics.

2. Insulation facings and jackets: Each type used. Make it clear that white finish will be furnished for exposed ductwork, casings and equipment.

3. Insulation accessory materials: Each type used.

4. Manufacturer's installation and fitting fabrication instructions for flexible unicellular

insulation.

1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIAL

.1 Store materials in clean and dry environment, pipe covering jackets shall be clean and unmarred. Place adhesives in original containers. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions as required by printed instructions of manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and finishing cements.

1.5 STANDARDS OF ACCEPTANCE

.1 Knauf Fiber Glass

.2 Owens/Corning Fiberglass

of 596



.3 Armstrong

.4 Johns Manville

.5 Rockwool Manufacturing PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

.1 K-factors (thermal conductivity) shown are expressed in BTU•in/hr•ft2•F. 2.2 FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION

.1 Insulation

1. Rigid molded in compliance with ASTM C547, Class 1, minimum density 3.5 pounds/cubic foot, K-factor of approximately 0.24 at 75°F, suitable for temperatures from -20°F to 450°F.

.2 Vapor Barrier

1. Factory applied vapor barrier all-service type with self-sealing lap and butt strips.

.3 Valves and Fitting Covers

1. Pre-molded PVC covers with fiber glass insert. Manufacturers: Proto Corp., Ceelco.

.4 Applications

1. All domestic cold water piping.

2. All hot water heating piping.

3. All domestic hot water supply and recirculation piping.

2.3 INSULATION THICKNESS

PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS Service Fluid Design

Operating Temperature

Range (°F)

Nominal Pipe Size Insulation Thickness

Runouts Up To 2 1 & Less 1-3/4 To 2 2-1/2 To 4

Dom. Hot Water &

Recirc. Piping & Tempered

Water

Up to 140°F (60°C) 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm) 1.5"

(40mm)

of 596



Hot Water Heating

(all sizes) 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm)

Domestic Cold Water 40°F to 50°F 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm) 1" (25mm)

2.4 ADHESIVE, MASTIC, CEMENT

.1 ASTM C449: Mineral fiber hydraulic setting thermal insulating and finishing cement.

.2 Other: Insulation manufacturers' published recommendations. 2.5 MECHANICAL FASTENERS

.1 Wire: 1.3 mm thick (18 gage) soft annealed galvanized or 1.9 mm (14 gage) copper clad steel or nickel copper alloy.

.2 Bands: 20 mm (3/4 inch) nominal width, brass, galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless

steel. 2.6 CANVAS JACKETING

.1 Apply in concealed areas, compact, firm ULC listed heavy plain weave, cotton fabric at 220 g/m sq.

2.7 PVC JACKETING

.1 Apply in exposed areas on piping with operating temperatures less than 180°F (80°C).

.2 Piping: ULC listed PVC moulded type jacketing material, gloss white complying with 25 Flame Spread and 50 Smoke Developed ratings.

.3 Fittings: ULC listed PVC, gloss white, 1-piece, pre-moulded fittings complying with

25 Flame Spread and 50 Smoke Developed ratings.

.4 PVC Application: strictly in accordance with the requirements of Authorities having jurisdiction.

.5 Ultraviolet resistant.

.6 Fastenings: To manufacturer’s standard(s). 2.8 METAL JACKETING

.1 At all locations where the pipe is located outdoors or in heavy abuse areas, use metal jacketing to protect piping or ductwork insulation.

.2 Jacketing: Aluminum, 0.016” thick, embossed surface with factory bonded moisture

barrier.

of 596



.3 Valve and Fitting Insulation Covers: Fabricate from same material as jacketing or use prefabricated insulation covers made in two matching halves.

.4 Metal Jacketing Bands: 0.5” wide, aluminum or stainless.

2.9 PROTECTION SADDLES AND SHIELDS

.1 Provide factory engineered galvanized steel hanger shields on horizontal insulated pipe complying with MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-59 standards for gauge and length of saddle.

2.10 SADDLES (PIPING/TUBING UP TO 2 INCHES)

.1 Use 180 degree saddle on systems utilizing teardrop type hangers.

.2 Use 360 degree saddle on systems utilizing trapeze hangers or clamps. 2.11 INSERTS AND SHIELDS (PIPING/TUBING OVER 2 INCHES)

.1 Use 360 degree calcium silicate insert with a 180 degree shield on systems utilizing clevis or teardrop type hangers.

.2 Use 360 degree calcium silicate with a 360 degree shield on systems utilizing trapeze

hangers or clamps.

.3 The unit shall have an integral moisture barrier consisting of a tri-laminate All-Service Jacket equal and similar to the jacketing on the adjoining insulation.

.4 Insert: Calcium silicate, minimum density 9 psi.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify that items to be insulated have been pressure tested and approved before applying insulation material.

.2 Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.


.1 Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Required pressure tests of piping joints and connections shall be completed and the work approved by the Consultant for application of insulation. Surface shall be clean and dry with all foreign materials, such as dirt, oil, loose scale and rust removed.

.3 Except for specific exceptions, insulate entire specified equipment, piping (pipe, fittings,

valves, accessories). Insulate each pipe and duct individually. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where a full length section will fit.

of 596



.4 Insulation materials shall be installed with smooth and even surfaces, with jackets and facings drawn tight and smoothly cemented down at all laps. Insulation shall be continuous through all sleeves and openings, except at fire dampers and duct heaters (NFPA 90A). Vapor retarders shall be continuous and uninterrupted throughout systems with operating temperature 16°C (60°F) and below. Lap and seal vapor barrier over ends and exposed edges of insulation. Anchors, supports and other metal projections through insulation on cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed for a minimum length of 150 mm (6”).

.5 Install vapor stops at all insulation terminations on either side of valves, pumps and

equipment and particularly in straight lengths of pipe insulation.

.6 Insulation on hot piping and equipment shall be terminated square at items not to be insulated, such as access openings and nameplates. Cover all exposed raw insulation with white sealer or jacket material.

.7 Protect all insulations outside of buildings with aluminum jacket using lock joint or other

approved system for a continuous weather tight system. Access doors and other items requiring maintenance or access shall be removable and sealable.

.8 Piping work not to be insulated:

1. In hot piping: Unions, flexible connectors, control valves, PRVs, safety valves and

discharge vent piping, vacuum breakers, thermostatic vent valves, exposed piping through floor for convectors and radiators. Insulate piping to within approximately 75 mm (3 inches) of uninsulated items.

.9 Plumbing work not to be insulated:

1. Piping and valves of fire protection system.

2. Chromium plated brass piping.

3. Piping in pipe basement serving wall hydrants.

4. Small horizontal cold water branch runs in partitions to individual fixtures may be

without insulation for maximum distance of 900 mm (3 feet). .10 Work shall be performed by qualified insulation journeymen.

.11 Apply insulation and coverings on hot piping while surface is between 50 to 60°C.

.12 Vapor barriers and insulation to be complete over full length of pipe or surface, without

penetration for hangers, and without interruption at sleeves, pipe and fittings.

.13 Do not insulate factory-insulated equipment.

.14 Do not insulate nameplates.

.15 Fit insulation tightly against surface to which it is applied.

of 596



.16 For non-fire rated barriers (e.g., wall, floor, ceiling, or roof) continue insulation and vapor barrier through penetrations. For fire rated barriers, provide ULC/FM approved through penetration stop systems.

.17 Weatherproof outdoor installations of piping or ductwork covered with aluminum jacket.

Provide watershed lap joints and seal with mastic as required.

.18 Do not install metal jacketing with raw edges; provide a safety edge. 3.3 INSTALLATION – PIPING

.1 On exposed piping located in finished areas, locate cover seams in least visible area.

.2 Provide continuous insulation through pipe hangers or supports. Do not notch insulation. Provide shields or saddles to prevent crushing insulation.

.3 Where insulation terminates, taper to pipe and finish with insulating cement or acrylic

mastic.

.4 Cover insulated pipes located outdoors or in utility tunnels with aluminum jacket. Secure with aluminum bands and screws as required.

.5 Tape circumferential joints of pipe insulation with 3” wide white vinyl tape.

.6 Insulate fitting and valves where required with same material thickness as specified for

adjacent pipe.

.7 Insulate potable and non-potable cold water piping within walls, chases, or ceiling plenums where return air is present.

.8 Insulate potable and non-potable cold water piping in equipment rooms.

.9 Do not insulate unions, flanges and valves in potable or non-potable piping systems of

140°F or less, except for chilled water.

.10 Vertical pipe over 3" diameter: use insulation supports welded or bolted to pipe directly above lowest pipe fitting. Thereafter locate on 12 feet centers and at each valve and flange.

.11 Expansion joints: Terminate single layer and each layer of multiple layers in straight cut.

Leave space of 1" between terminations. Pack void tightly with glass wool. Protect joints with aluminum sleeves.

.12 Use factory fabricated, easily disassembled insulation, for valves, fittings and process

equipment requiring periodic maintenance of parts and sub-assemblies listed or indicated.

END OF SECTION

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 21 13 13 LOBBY RENOVATION WET PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the

requirements of Section 20 05 11.

.2 The Sprinkler Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of a complete sprinkler

system. The Sprinkler Contractor shall be responsible for all of the work associated with this

system from first isolation valve on the sprinkler system.

1.2 PREQUALIFIED CONTRACTORS

.1 The sprinkler system shall be provided by one of the following Contractors. If the

Mechanical Contractor would like to include an additional Sprinkler Contractor they shall

make that request during the tender period for the project. No additional Sprinkler

Contractor’s will be considered after the close of the tender period.

.2 Acceptable Contractors are as follows:

.1 Grinnell

.2 Viking

.3 Vipond

.4 Classic


.1 Do work in accordance with the following except where specified otherwise.

.1 Ontario Building Code

.2 Ontario Fire Code

.3 The Town of Oakville

.4 NFPA 13

.5 NFPA 20

.6 I.A.O

.7 Factory Mutual.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010, NFPA 13,

working drawings and design requirements.

of 596


.2 Provide hydraulic calculations for all zones, most remote location, highest location and all

specialty areas including window sprinklers, close spaced sprinklers, and deluge systems.

Hydraulic calculations and submissions to be in accordance to NFPA 13 and this

specification.

.3 Obtain approval from authority having jurisdiction prior to fabrication and installation of the

system. Bear all costs associated with such approval.

1.5 SAMPLES

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 20 05 11.

.2 Submit samples of following:

.1 Each type of sprinkler head.

.2 Signs.

1.6 ENGINEERING DESIGN CRITERIA

.1 Design system to the following (Spec Writers Choose One or more of the Following):

.1 NFPA 13

.2 Factory Mutual

.3 I.A.O.

.2 Zoning

.1 Refer to Drawings for system zoning requirements.

.3 Hazard

Space Hazard

Mechanical Rooms (Pump, etc.) Medium Hazard

.4 Pipe size and sprinkler layout:

.1 Pipe size shall be determined using hydraulic design. The hydraulic design shall be for

the most extreme case.

.2 Provide sprinkler head layout in strict conformance to Division 15 layout drawings,

architectural reflected ceiling plans, and NFPA 13. Where conflict exists, the

contractor shall notify the consultants in writing for a decision.

.3 Extra Large Orifice Heads (ELO) shall not be utilized unless they are indicated on the

drawings. Drawings that are submitted which do not conform to the layout shown on

the Division 15 Drawings and reflected ceiling plan will be rejected without further

review.

of 596


.4 For light hazard applications the sprinkler system hydraulic design must allow for two

hose cabinets operating at 100 US GPM simultaneously in addition to the sprinkler

requirements.

.5 Hydraulic design in office areas shall have the capacity to serve a minimum of ten (10)

additional heads at the most remote 1,500 SQ. FT. area of application and/or to serve

office areas with 30% increase in sprinkler heads. The hydraulic design shall be for the

most extreme case.

.6 Minimum discharge pressure for any sprinkler head shall be as required by the

sprinkler head.

.7 Maximum velocity in sprinkler pipe distribution piping shall be 7.62 m/sec. (25 ft/sec.).

.8 Provide for sprinklers required above and below obstructions such as ductwork and

other building interferences.

.5 Provide non-standard temperature rating sprinkler heads in accordance to code, including:

.1 Sprinkler heads in proximity to unit heaters: intermediate classification 225 F (107 C).

.6 Water supply:

.1 The sprinkler contractor shall conduct a flow and pressure test of water supply from the

nearest hydrant in the vicinity of the project to obtain the basis of design in accordance

to NFPA. Flow test shall be conducted during the working week and at peak water

flow periods to establish base line.

.2 The Sprinkler Contractor shall allow a minimum safety factor of 10 psi on all hydraulic

calculations.

.7 Pipe locations:

.1 Sprinkler lines may have been shown on the drawings. Sprinkler lines are shown for

purposes of coordination, indication of available space, and aesthetics. Do not deviate

from sprinkler pipe layout shown without prior approval.

1.7 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 15010.


.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01830 - Maintenance Materials,

Special Tools and Spare Parts.

.2 Provide spare sprinklers and tools as required by NFPA 13, in main sprinkler room. Spare

parts to be provided in an organized box designed for that purpose.

of 596


1.9 CERTIFICATES

.1 Provide certificate indicating that the sprinkler installation conforms to NFPA requirements

and specified sprinkler coverage.

1.10 ALLOWANCE

.1 N/A

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, FITTING AND VALVES

.1 Pipe:

.1 As indicated in Section 15300 and NFPA 13. Where Section 15300 is more stringent

than NFPA 13 Section 15300 shall be the minimum standard.

.2 For dry pipe systems pipe and fittings shall be a minimum of Schedule 40 and shall be

both internally and externally galvanized.

.2 Fittings and joints:

.1 Screwed, soldered, welded, flanged or rolled grooved as indicated in Section 15300

and NFPA 13. Where Section 15300 is more stringent than NFPA 13 Section 15300

shall be the minimum standard.

.3 Valves:

.1 UL or ULC listed for fire protection service.

.2 Bronze to NPS 2, cast iron over NPS 2.

.3 Threaded to NPS 2, flanged or rolled grooved over NPS 2.

.4 For shut off service: OS & Y gate.

.5 Swing check valves.

.6 Ball drip.

.4 Pipe hangers:

.1 UL listed for fire protection as specified in Section 15010 and in accordance with

NFPA 13.

2.2 SPRINKLER HEADS

.1 General: to NFPA 13 and UL listed for fire service.

.2 All heads utilized in light hazard occupancies shall be quick response heads.

of 596


.3 Provide head type in accordance to legend and as indicated on the drawings.

.4 Standard head activation temperature shall be 165o F(74 C).

.1 Where indicated on the drawings: Upright: Brass

.2 Side Wall: Chrome, link and lever type with escutcheon.

.3 Where indicated on the drawings: Provide fully concealed sprinkler head.

.4 Where indicated on the drawings: Provide semi recessed sprinkler head.

.5 Provide wire guards on all heads located in:

.1 Storage rooms, mechanical rooms.

.2 Sprinkler heads within 6 ft 6" (2.0 m) of finished floor.

.3 Areas shown on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install and test to acceptance in accordance with NFPA 13. At the completion of all sprinkler

work, provide a sealed letter from a Professional Engineer in Ontario confirming completion

of all work in accordance with the Contract Documents and all applicable codes in the area of

work. The Cost of the Engineer and his/her sealed letter shall be included for in the tender

price.

.2 Install excess pressure pump across alarm valve in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

.3 Testing to be witnessed by or authorities having jurisdiction.

.4 Provide interference drawings as required to coordinate work with other trades. Refer to

details on drawings and locate sprinkler lines to avoid interference with lights, ductwork and

other equipment in the ceiling space.

.5 Locate sprinkler heads as shown on architectural reflected ceiling plans and at center lines of

panels as required to produce orderly and symmetrical patterns with other ceiling-mounted

devices and to meet or exceed the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

.6 All sprinkler piping shall be installed so that all parts of each system may be thoroughly

drained, preferably at the main drain valve. All trapped heads in excess of five heads shall be

provided with drain valves and cast iron plug. Low points where more than twenty heads are

trapped shall be provided with an auxiliary drain valve.

.7 Provide sprinkler head guards in mechanical rooms, shafts, elevator machine rooms, storage

rooms, and as specified or as shown on the drawings.

of 596


.8 Installation of sprinkler mains in exposed areas shall be in accordance with main locations

shown on the mechanical drawings.

.9 Main sprinkler lines have been shown to show routing of pipes in congested areas. Refer to

sections for the elevation assigned for the sprinkler piping. Work closely with the Division

15 Contractor to prepare interference drawings.

.10 Provide test and drain connections to meet NFPA 13. Pipe discharge lines as shown on the

drawings or to floor drains or service sinks. Do not discharge to the building exterior.

END OF SECTION

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 22 11 16 LOBBY RENOVATION DOMESTIC WATER PIPING



.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed by the requirements outlined in Section 20 05 11.

.2 All valves must have a valid CRN Number. Statutory declaration must be provided on

request. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Do the work in accordance with the Ontario Building Code Plumbing Code and local authority having jurisdiction.

.2 ASTM B62-09 - Specifications for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

.3 ANSI/ASME B16.5-2005 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

.4 ANSI/ASME B16.11-2009 - Forged Fittings, Socket Welding.

.5 ASTM B88-03 - Specifications for Seamless Copper Water Tube.

.6 CSA B242-M80 - Groove and Shoulder Type Mechanical Pipe Couplings.

.7 MSS SP 67-2002 - Butterfly Valves.

.8 MSS SP 70-2006 - Cast Iron Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.

.9 MSS SP 71-2005 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends.

.10 MSS SP 80-2003 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 15010.

.2 Indicate the following: Valves.

.3 Provide shop drawings for all grooved end components.

.4 All grooved end components shall be provided by one manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS

of 596



2.1 PIPING

.1 Domestic hot, cold and recirculating tubing, within building:

1. Above ground: Copper tube, hard drawn, Type L: to ASTM B88M.

2. Buried: Copper tube, soft annealed, Type K: to ASTM B88M. .2 All piping shall have certification markings for compliance with ASTM B88.

2.2 FITTINGS

.1 Brass or bronze flanges and flanged fittings: to ANSI B16.24.

.2 Brass or bronze threaded fittings: to ANSI B16.15.

.3 Cast bronze to ANSI B16.18- 1984 or wrought copper and bronze to ANSI B16.22. 2.3 JOINTS

.1 Rubber gaskets, 0.063" (1.6 mm) thick: to AWWA C111-95.

.2 Bolts, nuts, hex head and washers: to ASTM A307-92a-07b, heavy series.

.3 For installation of the potable water system only lead free solder shall be used in accordance with Ontario Building Code Standards.

.4 Solder, tin antimony, 95:5: to ASTM B32.

2.4 GROOVED COPPER METHOD

.1 Application

1. Grooved piping system may be used in lieu of flanged or sweated copper in size 2" (50 mm) and larger. Couplings shall be designed with angle bolt pads to provide a rigid joint, complete with EPDM flush seal gasket suitable for temperatures from -30°F to 230°F (-34°C to 110°C).

.2 Fittings

1. Housing: ductile iron conforming to ASTM-A536, Grade 65-45-12.

2. Coating: rust inhibiting lead free paint.

3. Bolts and nuts: heat treated, zinc electroplated carbon steel oval-neck track bolts

conforming to ASTM A-183 and zinc electroplated carbon steel heavy hex nuts conforming to ASTM A-563.

4. Hinge Pin: carbon steel.

of 596



5. Gaskets: in accordance with ASTM D-2000. Grade E: EPDM rated for service between -30°F and 230°F (-34°C to 110°C).

6. Copper Fittings: Copper per ASTM B-75 and ASTM B-584.

7. When connecting dissimilar metals in liquid systems from grooved end steel (IPS) to

Copper (CTS) provide a dielectric waterway between the two materials. .3 Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic, Anvil.

2.5 GROOVED END BUTTERFLY VALVES

.1 NPS 2 1/2 and over, grooved ends: 1. Class 300, bubble tight shut off to 300 psi (2065 kPa) bronze body. 2. Operators:

a. NPS 4 and under, lever handle. b. NPS 6 and over, gear operated.

3. Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic Series 608, Grinnell. Mueller. 2.6 GATE VALVES

.1 Gate valves shall only be utilized where specifically noted on the drawings. For all other shut off valve applications utilize ball valves for 2" (50 mm) or smaller and butterfly valves for 2.6" (65 mm) and larger.

.2 NPS 2 and under, soldered:

1. Non-rising stem to MSS SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, screw-in or bolted bonnet.

2. Standard of Acceptance: Jenkins, Crane, Toyo 281, Kitz 41, Grinnell.

.3 NPS 2 and under, screwed: 1. Rising stem: to MSS SP-80, class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, solid wedge disc. 2. Standard of Acceptance: Jenkins, Crane, Toyo 293, Kitz 24, Grinnell.

.4 NPS 2-1/2 and over, in mechanical rooms, flanged:

1. Rising stem: to MSS SP-70, class 125, 860 kPa, FF flange, cast-iron body, OS&Y bronze trim.


.5 NPS 2-1/2 and over, other than mechanical rooms, flanged: 1. Non-rising stem: to MSS SP-70, class 125, 860 kPa, FF flange, cast-iron body, bronze

trim, bolted bonnet. 2. Standard of Acceptance: Jenkins, Crane, Toyo 415, Kitz 75, Grinnell.

2.7 GLOBE VALVES

.1 NPS 2 and under, balancing, soldered: 1. To MSS SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, renewable composition disc,

screwed over bonnet. 2. Lockshield handles: as indicated.

of 596




.2 NPS 2 and under, balancing, screwed: 1. To MSS SP-80, class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, screwed over bonnet, renewable

composition disc. 2. Lockshield handles: as indicated. 3. Standard of Acceptance: Jenkins, Crane, Toyo 220, Kitz 09, Grinnell.

2.8 SWING CHECK VALVES

.1 NPS 2 and under, soldered: 1. To MSS SP-80, class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap,

regrindable seat. 2. Standard of Acceptance: Jenkins, Crane, Toyo 237, Kitz 23, Grinnell.

.2 NPS 2 and under, screwed:

1. To MSS SP-80, class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap, regrindable seat.


.3 NPS 2-1/2 and over, flanged: 1. To MSS SP-70, class 125, 860 kPa, cast iron body, FF flange, regrind renewable seat,

bronze disc, bolted cap. 2. Standard of Acceptance: Jenkins, Crane, Toyo 435, Kitz 78, Grinnell.

2.9 BALL VALVES

.1 NPS 2 and under, branch isolators, screwed: 1. 600 WOG, bronze body, solid chrome plated bronze ball, with Teflon seal. 2. Ball valves shall have full port opening. 3. Standard of Acceptance: Jenkins, Crane, Toyo 5044A, Kitz 58, Grinnell, Apollo.

2.10 AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES

.1 Circuit balancing valves shall be of the automatic variety. Manual circuit balancing valves will not be accepted.

.2 Circuit Balancing Valves are required on the domestic hot water recirculation system.

.3 Provide the following sizes:

1. Provide 0.032 l/s (0.5 gpm) for 12 mm pipe size. 2. Provide 0.063 l/s (1.0 gpm) for 20 mm pipe size.

.4 Product Warranty and Performance Guarantee

1. Valves shall be warranted by the manufacturer to be free of defects in material and

workmanship for a period of five years.

2. Valves shall control flow to within plus/minus 5 percent of design over an operating differential range of at least 14 times the minimum required for control. Four operating

of 596



pressure ranges shall be available with the minimum range requiring less than 3 psid to actuate the mechanism.

3. The valve flow curve shall be smooth over its entire nominal control range. Gaps,

bumps and dips in flow curves shall not be acceptable. .5 Shop Drawing Submission

1. The Balancing Valve Manufacturer shall submit a complete list of balancing valves,

their location and their performance.

2. The Balancing Valve Manufacturer shall mark up a set of full size plans showing the location of each balancing valve and assign an appropriate identification tag for the balancing valve.

3. The Balancing Valve Manufacturer shall submit these drawings for the Consultant to

review, incorporate any comments from the Consultant and then submit copies of this drawing to the Mechanical Contractor, Mechanical Consultant, Architect and Construction Manager.

4. All balancing valves shall be shipped to site with this tag number firmly attached to the

valve and the full size drawings shall be utilized to identify the location where they are to be installed.

.6 Valve Flow Control Cartridge (typical for all valves)

1. The non-adjustable flow control cartridge shall be 100% stainless steel. Parts made of

soft metals such as brass with only a coating of hard metal such as nickel shall not be allowed. Rubber based materials whose properties change with temperature and pressure shall not be allowed.

2. The cartridges shall have segmented ports through which water can pass, rather than a continuous large port, to eliminate noise and full travel linear coil spring.

3. The cartridge movement shall result in a shearing action that will dislodge or shear any

particle that may tend to get stuck in a port.

4. Cartridge shall be removable from the housing and shall be held in place in the housing without adhesive.

` 5. All flow control cartridges shall be warranted by the manufacturer for five years from

the date of sale. .7 Sizes 40 mm and smaller

1. Valves shall have forged brass bodies and stainless steel cartridge assembly rated for a

minimum of 230 psi/250°F.

.8 Valve end connections shall be either female sweat or FPT.

of 596



.9 Valves shall be provided with two pressure/temperature taps.

.10 Valves shall be provided with a union tailpiece and built in isolation valve.

.11 The body design shall allow for inspection or removal of the cartridge without disturbing piping connections.

.12 The valve shall come fully assembled and shall be permanently marked to show direction

of flow and shall have a body tag to indicated flow rate and model number.

.13 Provide a shut off valve upstream of the valve to allow the system to be shut off and the balancing valve to be removed without shutting down the entire heating system.

.14 Standard of Acceptance: Griswold Isolator R valve.


.1 Connect to fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

.2 Install tubing close to building structure to minimize furring, conserve headroom and space. Group exposed piping and run parallel to walls.

.3 Cut square, ream and clean tubing and tube ends, clean recesses of fittings and assemble

without binding.

.4 Lay buried tubing in accordance with AWWA Class "B" bedding.

.5 Isolate equipment, fixtures and branches with ball valves.

.6 New or repaired potable water systems shall be purged of deleterious matter and disinfected prior to utilization. The method to be followed shall be that prescribed by the health authority having jurisdiction or in the absence of a prescribed method as follows:

1. The pipe system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until dirty water does not

appear at the points of outlet.

2. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million (50 mg/L) of chlorine, and the system or part thereof shall be valved off and allowed to stand for 24 hours; or the system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million (200mg/l) of chlorine and allowed to stand for three (3) hours.

3. Following the required standing time, the system shall be flushed with clean potable

water until the chlorine is purged from the system.

4. The procedure shall be repeated where shown by a bacteriological examination that contamination remains present in the system.

of 596



.7 Compression fittings are not acceptable.

.8 All valves packing shall be asbestos free.

.9 Provide isolation valves on all main branch feeds to each washroom group.

.10 Install all grooved end components as per manufacturer’s latest recommendation.

END OF SECTION

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 22 13 13 LOBBY RENOVATION DRAINAGE PIPING AND VENT



.1 This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and shall be governed by the requirements outlined in Section 20 05 11 of this specification.


.1 Do the work in accordance with the Ontario Building Code - Plumbing Code and local authority having jurisdiction.

.2 CSA B70 – 2006 - Specifications for Cast Iron Soil Pipe Fittings and Means of Joining

.3 CSA B125 – 2005 - Specifications for Plumbing Fittings

.4 ASTM B32 – 2008 - Specifications for Solder Metal

.5 ASTM B306 – 2009 - Specifications for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)

.6 ANSI B16.29

.7 ASTM B88, ASTM B88M – 2003 - Specifications for Seamless Copper Water Tube

.8 ASTM A74 – 2009 - Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

.9 ASTM C564 – 2009 - Specification for Rubber Gasket for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

.1 For all above grade vent, sanitary, and storm piping, Type DWV to:

1. ASTM B306 - Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).

2. CSA B158 for cast brass fittings.

3. ANSI B16.29 for wrought copper fittings.

4. Solder: tin-lead, 50:50, to ASTM B32, type 50A - Specification for solder metal.

5. ASTM B88.

6. ASTM C564.

2.2 CAST IRON PIPING AND FITTINGS

of 596



.1 For above grade storm, sanitary and vent piping, minimum NPS 3, to CSA B70, ASTM A74 with heavy bituminous coating.

.2 For above grade storm, sanitary and vent piping 4" (100 mm) size and larger: Cast iron.

.3 For storm, sanitary and vent piping joints.

1. Mechanical Joints.

a. Neoprene of butyl rubber compression gaskets for all pipe connections: to ASTM C564-2009.

b. SS Clamps. 2.3 PUMPED DRAINAGE

.1 Pumped drains shall be galvanized steel. 2.4 SANITARY DRAINAGE AND VENTS

.1 Piping and fittings.

.2 For buried sanitary, storm, and vent piping:

1. ASTM D2665, ASTM D2949, ASTM B251. 2. ASTM D3034, ASTM F891.

3. CAN/CSA- B181.2 for PVC DWV or

4. CAN/CSA B182.1- for plastic DWV.

.3 Joints

1. Solvent weld for PVC: to ASTM D2564.

2. Solvent weld for ABS: to ASTM D2235.

3. For sizes above 4” (100 mm), provide Ring-Tite joints Canron Ring-Tite joints PVC

DR35 gravity sewer pipe, with locked in rubber ring sealing feature providing tight flexible seal. Spigot ends to be supplied complete with bevel.

.4 All PVC piping below grade shall be a minimum of SDR 35.


of 596



.1 Install piping parallel and close to walls to conserve space, and to grade indicated, and to suit installation of related work.

.2 Apply two coats of asphalt paint to pipe laid in, or passing through concrete.

.3 Where piping passes through floor or wall below grade pack and seal in concrete complete

with Link Seal in accordance with Section 15010.

.4 PVC piping shall not be utilized above grade. The PVC piping shall convert to cast iron/copper prior to the point where it penetrates the floor slab.

.5 Provide venting to plumbing fixtures and fixture groups in accordance with the Ontario

Building Code - Plumbing Code and local authorities having jurisdiction.

.6 Install buried pipe on 6" (150 mm) bed of clean sand, shaped to accommodate hubs and fittings, to line and grade as indicated. Backfill with clean sand.

.7 Install piping parallel and close to walls to conserve space and to grade indicated, and to

suit the installation of related work.

.8 Apply solvent to male end of joints only.

.9 Pipe installation: Pipe shall be installed as specified and indicated on the drawings.

.10 The piping system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s current published installation procedures.

.11 Where piping passes through floor or wall below grade pack and seal in concrete in

accordance with Section 15010.

.12 Provide venting to all plumbing fixtures and fixture groups in accordance to the Ontario Building Code - Plumbing Code and local authorities having jurisdiction.

.13 If tests are required by an authority having jurisdiction, perform tests in presence of each

governing authority and obtain certification. Repeat tests as often as necessary to obtain certification.

.14 Test pressure shall not exceed 1-1/2 times the maximum rated pressure of the lowest

related element in the system.

.15 Remove all fittings which do not withstand test pressure, replace and retest.

.16 Eliminate leaks, or remove and refit defective parts. 3.2 TESTING

.1 The drainage and vent system shall be tested in accordance with the Ontario Building Code - Plumbing Code and tested in accordance with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction, perform tests in the presence of each governing authority and obtain certification. Repeat tests as often as necessary to obtain certification.

of 596



.2 Perform tests before piping is covered or concealed.

.3 Remove all fittings which will not withstand test pressure, and replace after test.

.4 Eliminate leaks, or remove and refit defective parts.

END OF SECTION

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 22 36 13 LOBBY RENOVATION PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES



.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1, as applicable.

.2 Conform to Section 20 05 11 – Mechanical General Requirements, as applicable. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim: Section 22 44 13 1.3 REFERENCES

CAN3-B79-94 Floor Drains and Trench Drains PDI-G101 Testing and Rating Procedure for Grease Interceptors with

Appendix of Sizing and Installation Data PDI-WH201 Water Hammer Arrestors

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 15010 - Mechanical General Requirements.

.2 Indicate dimensions, construction details and materials for the following: floor drains,

cleanouts, water hammer arrestors, strainers, traps, trap seal primers. 1.5 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements.

.2 Data to include:

1. Description of plumbing specialties and accessories, giving manufacturers name, type,

model, year and capacity.

2. Details of operation, servicing, and maintenance.

3. Recommended spare parts list.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

.1 Furnish plumbing and drainage specialties. Ancon catalogue numbers are specified to indicate quality and features required. Furnish sizes as shown on Drawings.

.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Ancron, Zurn, Empoco.

of 596



2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

.1 New floor drain shall be Zurn ZN415R (or approved equal from Wade and Jay R. Smith) c/w clamping devices and suitable for proposed floor installation. Complete installation shall be in accordance with flooring manufacturer’s instructions.

2.3 FLOOR DRAIN TRAPS AND PRIMERS

.1 Furnish each floor drain installation with a deep seal "P" trap unless otherwise shown.

.2 Furnish trap seal primer valves Ancon No. M3-810 with cast brass body, vacuum breaker and NPS 1/2 sweat connections.

.3 Where a floor drain trap is not within a reasonable distance from a plumbing fixture,

furnish an automatic flush tank for priming of trap, Crane No. 7-170 1/2 L, or American Standard No. AF-4104L, complete with automatic syphon, tank liner, concealed top cover, bottom supply and screw driver stop.

.4 As an alternative to automatic flush tanks for remote floor drains, furnish ZURN Model

Z1022 trap primers and distribution units, as supplied by S-M-S Ltd. 2.4 DRAINAGE CLEANOUTS

.1 Furnish drainage cleanout fittings in drainage piping at locations indicated on the Drawings, at base of each vertical stack or rainwater leader, and as required to comply with applicable plumbing code.

.2 For buried piping furnish flush floor type cast iron ferrule cleanout with push-on, MJ,

inside caulked or spigot connection outlet, closure plug and nickel brass frame and cover suitable for type of floor in which it is to be installed, e.g. tile, terrazzo, carpet, concrete, etc.

2.5 SHOCK ABSORBERS

.1 Size shock absorbers in accordance with P.D.I.-WH201.

Ancon “Shok-Gard” Zurn Z-1700 Enpoco HT Series


.1 Install in accordance with Canadian Plumbing Code, provincial codes and local authority having jurisdiction except where specified otherwise.

.2 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.

of 596



3.2 CLEANOUTS

.1 In addition to those required by code, and as indicated, install at base of all soil and waste stacks and rainwater leaders and where indicated.

.2 Bring cleanouts to wall or finished floor unless serviceable from below floor.

.3 Building drain cleanout and stack base cleanouts: line size to maximum NPS 4.

3.3 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

.1 Install on branch supplies to each fixture or group of fixtures and where indicated.

.2 Hot and cold water fixture outlets provided with a vertical air chamber, a minimum of 450 mm long. Air chamber of the same pipe dimension as the branch pipe diameter leading to the fixture, and located as close to the fixture as possible.

.3 Hot and cold water main branches 75 mm (3") diameter and under to 25 mm (1") diameter:

Provided with vertical air chambers of sizes and dimensions specified above, located at points where the pipe line changes direction through 90 degrees in horizontal plane, and at the top of all hot and cold water risers.

3.4 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

.1 Install trap seal primer valve in cold water supply line to nearest plumbing fixture (preferably a water closet) and run NPS 1/2 Type K copper piping to primer connection on floor drain body. Obtain Minister's Designee's approval for location of primer valves prior to installation.

.2 Install trap primer tank in truss space or other suitable location as directed by ORC

Designee, or as shown on Drawings.

.3 (Install in access pit as indicated). 3.5 COMMISSIONING

.1 After start-up, test, adjust and prove operation as indicated, to suit conditions.

.2 Clean out strainers periodically until clear.

.3 Clean out and prime all floor drain traps using trap seal primers or other means acceptable to the Canadian Plumbing Code.

.4 Prove freedom of movement of cleanouts.

END OF SECTION

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 22 44 13 LOBBY RENOVATION PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM


1 GENERAL

1.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable.

1.1.1 Conform to General Mechanical Requirements, Section 15010 as applicable.


1.2.1 Plumbing specialties and accessories: Section 22 36 13

1.3 REFERENCES

CAN/CSA-B45 Series-02 CSA Standards on Plumbing Fixtures.

CAN/CSA-B125-01 Plumbing Fittings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1.4.1 Product Data

1.4.1.1 Submit product data in accordance with General Requirements.

1.4.1.2 Indicate dimensions, construction details and roughing-in dimensions for all fixtures and trim.

1.4.2 Maintenance Data

1.4.2.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in General Requirements.

1.4.2.2 Data to include:

- Description of plumbing fixtures and trim giving manufacturers name, type, model, year

capacity and flow.

- Details of operation, servicing and maintenance.

- Recommended spare parts list.

1.5 FIXTURES AND TRIM

1.5.1 Manufacture plumbing fixtures in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 Series. Conform to latest

code requirements for water saving features noted in the Ontario Building Code.

1.5.2 Manufacture plumbing fittings in accordance with CAN/CSA-B125.

1.5.3 Architectural drawings to govern in determination of number and location of fixtures.

1.5.4 Trim in any one washroom or location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type, unless

otherwise noted.

1.5.5 Exposed plumbing to be chrome plated.

1.5.6 The type number and letter allocated to each style of fixture identifies that particular fixture on

Mechanical Drawings.

of 596



2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DRIKING FOUNTAIN, DF-1

2.1.1 Drinking Fountain: Elkay Model LZSG8WSSK. Elkay ezH2O® Bottle Filling Station & Single

ADA Cooler, High Efficiency Filtered 8 GPH Stainless. Chilling Capacity of 8.0 GPH (gallons

per hour) of 50 F drinking water, based on 80 F inlet water and 90 F ambient, per ASHRAE

18 testing. Features shall include Hands Free, Visual Filter Monitor, Filtered, High Efficiency,

Green Ticker™, Laminar Flow, Antimicrobial, Real Drain. Furnished with FlexiGuard

StreamSaver bubbler. Electronic Bottle Filler Sensor With Electronic Front And Side Bubbler

Pushbar activation. Product shall be Wall Mount (On Wall), for Indoor applications, serving 1

station(s). Unit shall be certified to UL 399 and CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 120. Unit shall be lead-

free design which is certified to NSF/ANSI 61 & 372 (lead free) and meets Federal and Provincial

low-lead requirements. Voltage: 115V, 60Hz. Dimensions: 18-3/8” x 19” x 39-1/16”. Mount at

barrier free height as per local code requirements. Unit shall be barrier free compliant as per

OBC. Connect to the water supply using dielectric coupling and utilize the furnished non-metallic

strainer. Designed to operate on a 20 psi to 105 psi supply line pressure. Provide cleaning and

run-through of the unit prior to handover to ensure clean drinking water supply.

2.1.2 Supplies: McGuire #LFHST11LK, Drinking Fountain Supply, chrome plated polished brass,

straight stops, 10 mm (3/8") I.P.S. Inlet, V.P. Loose key. The cooler is furnished with a non-

metallic strainer. The drain trap shall also be plastic to isolate the cooler from building plumbing

system. Provide trap.

2.1.3 Carrier/Wall-Support: Mount on the solid masonry. Provide a hanger bracket and install for a

heavy-duty, sturdy install. Make allowance for modification of existing piping in the pipe chase

at no extra cost to the Contract to suit installation of the drinking fountain.

2.1.4 Spare Components:

Provide the following:

1. 4 x 51300C - WaterSentry Plus Replacement Filter (Bottle Fillers). Handover to the Building

Operator.

2. LKAPREZL - Elkay Cane Apron for EZ Gray.

3. MLP100 - Accessory - In Wall Carrier (Single) for single EZ, LZ, EMABF, LMABF, VRC,

LVRC models.

4. 4 x WSF6000R-2PK - WaterSentry Fresh 6000 CTO Filter - Replacement (2pack)

3 EXECUTION

3.1 FIXTURE INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Install wall hung lavatory brackets supplied with fixtures to wall by means of a manufactured

chair carrier of MIFAB, Smith, Watts or Zurn.

3.1.2 Install wall-hung water closets with chair carriers of MIFAB, Smith, Watts or Zurn manufacturer,

and of type and model recommended by manufacturer for each particular installation with due

regard to construction and piping details.

3.1.3 Rough-in and install plumbing fixtures and drinking fountains at the recommended height for

of 596



normal or handicapped use as applicable to location and to comply with OBC & NBCC. Measure

mounting height from finished floor.

3.1.4 Insulate exposed indirect waste of barrier free usage lavatory & sink with McGuire #PW-

2000WC for basin & #PW-2000 for sink "Pro-Wrap" sanitary covering for covering all exposed

piping per local codes (to protect against heat/ contusions)

3.1.5 Adjust flush valves to limit the quantity of water per flush cycle allowed by code. Consult

manufacturer for adjustment procedures.

3.2 ADJUSTMENT

3.2.1 Verify maximum settings of thermostatic mixing valves.

3.2.2 Clean out aerator screens and strainers after lines have been flushed.

END OF SECTIONs

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 23 34 33 LOBBY RENOVATION AIR CURTAIN


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 – General Requirements

apply.


A. New Electric Air Curtain – QUANTITY: 1

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Mechanical Drawings & Other Specification Sections

B. Electrical Drawings & Specifications.

C. Architectural Drawings & Specifications.


A. Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (ARI):

1. ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.

B. Air Movement & Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA):

1. AMCA 211 - Certified Ratings Program - Product Rating Manual for Fan Air

Performance.

2. AMCA 220 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Air Curtains for Aerodynamic Performance

Ratings.

3. AMCA 222 - Application Manual for Air Curtain Units.

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. UL 507 - Electric Fans.

2. UL 2021 - Fixed and Location-Dedicated Electric Room Heaters.

3. UL 1995 – Heating and Cooling Equipment

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 20 05 11:

B. Product Data: Submit for the following information for the Air Curtain:

1. Rated capacities.

2. Operating characteristics.

3. Accessories.

4. Options.

of 596



C. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings: For air curtain components not adequately described by

product data. Show configuration of non-standard units. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.

1. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, clearances required, location and size of field

connections.

2. Provide wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air curtains to include in maintenance manuals.

E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

F. Do not order the air curtain or any related components without submission and approval of shop

drawings. Specifications are subject to changed based on the Engineer’s discretion.

G. Provide dimensioned drawings prepared in coordination with all other trades on site illustrating

the exact mounting location in reference to the vestibule construction. Show all clearances

required by the Manufacturer and all other details required to properly assess the proposed and

most suitable location of mounting for the air curtain. Dimensioned drawing shall be reviewed

by the Manufacturer to ensure all necessary clearances are being met and proper performance of

the unit.

H. Furnish a letter from the Manufacturer, if requested by the Consultant, confirming the air curtain

unit selection is suitable and recommended by the Manufacturer given the construction details

of the new vestibule (sliding door width, height, etc.).

I. Provide a minimum of three (3) painted and finished sample paint chips for the custom colour

for the housing. Painting o the custom colour shall be done by the Manufacturer.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air curtains of the types and sizes

required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10

years. Provide air curtains produced by a manufacturer listed in this section.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of air curtain through one (1) source from a single

manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with AMCA 220, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Air Curtains for Aerodynamic

Performance Ratings," for airflow rate, average outlet velocity, outlet velocity uniformity,

velocity projection, and power rating.

E. Certification:

1. Test units in accordance with AMCA 220. Provide units with AMCA Certified Ratings

Seal.

2. UL and cUL listed to comply with applicable United States and Canadian standards.

of 596




A. Deliver air curtains in factory labeled packages.

B. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions and

recommendations.

C. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperature, and construction operations.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

components of air curtains that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.

1. Two-year limited warranty for heated units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: The design for air curtains is based on products manufactured

by Berner International Corporation, 111 Progress Avenue, New Castle; PA, Telephone: 724-

658-3551; Toll-Free Telephones: 800-245-4455 (U.S.), 800-242-4455 (Canada); Fax: 724-652-

0682; email: [email protected]; Website: www.berner.com.

B. Substitutions will be considered under provisions of Section 23 34 33 and only if submitted to

the Engineer in writing before tender close and approved by the Engineer in writing before

tender close..

2.2 AIR CURTAINS

A. Acceptable Products:

Berner Commercial Architectural High Performance ARD12-2108E-Q-120-R-WCA-CC.

The remote display location will be determined on site in coordination with all stakeholders.

Provide all necessary wiring and raceways (up to 100’ from the air curtain location).

B. Construction: Provide factory-assembled units of sufficient structural strength to be supported

from ends without intermediate support. Ship units completely assembled.

C. Cabinet:

1. Material and Finish: Minimum 16-gauge aluminized steel base frame with welded

construction and custom colour finish (to be advised during the shop drawing stage)

powder coated finish. Consultant reserves the right to go with custom colour or stainless

at no extra to the Contract. Exact selection to be advised during Construction. Tamper-

resistant construction; parts cannot be disassembled without special tool provided by

manufacturer.

2. Dimensions: Not to exceed 12.25 in (31.1cm) high by 22 in (55.9 cm) deep.

3. Mounting: Provide for suspended mounting.

4. Service Access: Removable screen and removable bottom access panel.

of 596

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.berner.com/



D. Motors: 1/2-HP, 1680 rpm, single phase, 3-speed, ODP, direct drive, resilient mounted,

continuous duty, with internal thermal-overload protection and permanently lubricated sealed

ball bearings.

E. Fans: Balanced forward curved type, double inlet, mounted in matched fan housings with

aerodynamically formed air inlet venturis. Manufacture wheels and housing from galvanized

steel.

F. Discharge Nozzles:

1. Provide uniform velocity across width of air curtain.

2. Aperture: 2.5 in (6.4 cm) slot by width of air curtain.

G. Vanes: 1.5 in (3.8 cm) minimum height; constructed of airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions;

adjustable plus or minus 20 degrees to deflect airflow.

H. Inlet:

1. Location: Front.

2. Screen: Perforated pattern constructed of the same material and finish used for the

cabinet.

I. Air Inlet Filter: Flat faced fire-rated re-cleanable aluminum with integral filter brackets.

2.3 HEATING ELEMENTS

A. Electric Heating Coil: UL-approved, factory-mounted, factory-wired, thermally-protected, in

galvanized steel frame.

1. Venturi mounted helical coil with point suspended elements, three phase circuit.

2. Thermal Cutout: Locks out electric heater when prolonged abnormal over-temperature

conditions exist.

3. Factory mount coil within blower fan venturi inlet.

2.4 CONTROLS

A. Controller:

1. UL listed, industrial type, pre-wired, with solid-state control switch.

2. Factory-mounted and wired IntelliswitchTM digital programmable controller with the

following features:

a. 5 volt DC output for control circuit.

b. Lock and Unlock tamperproof feature.

c. Motor and switching suitable for 10 fan speed settings.

d. Programmable fan start and fan stop time with provisions to set the start and stop

times for any of the week.

e. Programmable settings for all user controlled options.

f. Adjustable time delay from 0 to 10 minutes.

g. Five (5) preset and three (3) customizable programs - On, Off, Automatic, Deluxe,

Comfort Plus, Program 1, Program 2, and Program 3.

h. Fan fail lockout.

i. Built-in capillary style thermostat for heated units with temperature settings of 34

degrees F to 90 degrees F (one (1) degree C to 32 degrees C).

j. Two (2) heating modes, one (1) call for heat and one (1) call for fan and heat.

of 596



k. Emergency stop.

l. Clock with lighted display.

m. Ability to be operated via Mobile App with Wi-Fi Controller option.

B. Unit mounted display.

C. Door Switch: NEMA 4 plumber magnetic style door switch.

D. Remote control: Infrared controller for use with Intelliswitch digital programmable controller.

E. Thermostat: Prevents operation of heater when inside air temperature exceeds desired

temperature. Install remote of the air curtain unit within the vestibule as advised by the

Consultant during Construction.

F. Disconnect Switch: Provide two remote mounted lockable non-fused toggle disconnects – one

for each circuit serving the air curtain.

G. Sequencing: See Drawings for the required Sequence of Operations. Sequence of Operations

are subject to change based on the Consultant’s direction on site during construction. The

Manufacturer shall include for a visit to site to program the Controller based on non-standard

Sequence of Operations as advised by the Consultant (i.e. Customizable Mode of Operation).

All costs of programming shall be included for in the Contract Price. All parameters are to be

advised by the Consultant a minimum of 5 days prior to on-site arrival to commission.

2.5 MOUNTING ACCESSORIES

A. Provide brackets and other mounting accessories as required to permit installation and proper

functioning of air curtain to meet project conditions of use.

B. Provide heavy duty mounting accessories suitable for the weight of the unit and upper structure

of fastening. Suspend from and span existing structural members on site. Provide specialized

and custom fabricated mounting hardware to complete the install. Provide anchors to support

the Air Curtain.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that the door frame and adjacent construction are installed correctly and are ready to

receive work of this Section.

B. Verify that utilities are in correct location and are of correct capacities for specified products.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install air curtains where indicated on Drawings and accordance with shop drawings and

manufacturer’s instructions. Provide clearance to permit servicing and maintenance.

of 596



B. Securely install air curtains plumb, level, and as close as practical to top of opening and face of

wall as per the Manufacturer’s Recommendations.

C. Install switches where indicated on Drawings or noted in the specifications.

D. Provide rubber vibration gaskets as advised by the Manufacturer.

E. Supply and install a remote thermostat and locking cover in the Vestibule. Exact location is to

be advised on site by the Consultant. Provide all necessary wiring and raceways. Conceal wiring

where feasible. Thermostat shall be supplied by the Air Curtain Manufacturer.

F. Supply a handheld remote control.

G. Install the air curtain in strict accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect air curtain to utilities as specified in other Division 16 sections.

B. Interlock the air curtain with the operation of the exterior door set. Provide all necessary relays,

wiring, magnetic door contacts/switches and all other hardware required for a fully operational

system.


A. Provide a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and

equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Test and operate air curtain to be sure that it performs as intended.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust motor and fan speed to prepare installed products to perform properly.

B. Adjust discharge nozzles to deflect air outward unless otherwise required.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean air curtain prior to commissioning.

B. Repair or repaint damage to finishes on exposed-to-view surfaces.

3.7 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Test and operate air curtains to ensure that they perform as intended. Adjust discharge nozzles

to deflect air outward unless otherwise required.

of 596



3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate for Owner’s maintenance personnel how to adjust, operate, and maintain air

curtains.

END OF SECTION

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 26 00 11 LOBBY RENOVATION ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX


CONTENT

SECTION TITLE

26 01 16 Electrical General Requirements

26 05 19 Basic Materials and Methods

27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications

See ‘Town of Oakville – Communication Specification’ (attached herein) for all standards and

requirements applicable to the Communications scope of work for this project.

END OF SECTION

of 596

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 26 01 16 LOBBY RENOVATION ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Division 1, General Requirements, is a part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here.

1.2 APPLICATION

.1 This section applies to and is a part of all Sections of Division 26. 1.3 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Sections of these Electrical Specifications are not intended to delegate functions nor work and supply to any specific trade and the work shall include all labour, materials, equipment and tools required for a complete and working installation as described.

1.4 INTENT

.1 Mention herein or indication on drawings of articles, materials, operations or methods requires: supply of each item mentioned or indicated, of quality, or subject to qualifications noted; installation according to conditions stated and; performance of each operation prescribed with furnishing of necessary labour, equipment and incidentals for Electrical Trade, Division 26.

.2 Supplementary to definitions established are: `Supply' shall mean furnishing to site in

location required or directed complete with accessory parts. `Install' shall mean set in place and secured or affixed to building structure as noted or directed. `Provide' shall mean supply and install as each is described.

.3 Where used, wordings such as "approved, to approval, as directed, permitted, permission,

accepted, acceptance", shall mean: approved, directed, permitted, and accepted, by authorized representative of the Owner.

.4 Equipment and installation provided under this Division shall conform to applicable

standards and regulations of the following organizations: Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) Ontario Electrical Safety Code (OESC) Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) Ontario Building Code (OBC) 1.5 WORKMANSHIP

.1 Workmanship and method of installation shall conform to best standards and practice. Where required by local or other By-Laws and Regulations, tradesmen shall be licensed in their trade.

of 596



1.6 TEMPORARY & TRIAL USAGE

.1 Temporary or trial usage of any equipment or materials shall not be construed as evidence of acceptance of same and no claim for damage shall be made for injury to or breaking of any part of such work which may be so used.

1.7 BY-LAWS & REGULATIONS

.1 Work shall conform to the latest rules, regulations and definitions of the Canadian Electrical Code and applicable Municipal and Provincial Codes and Regulations, and with requirements of other authorities having jurisdiction in the area where work is to be performed. Minor changes required by an authority having jurisdiction shall be carried out without change to the Contract amount. Standards established by drawings and specifications shall not be reduced by applicable codes or regulations.

1.8 PERMITS & FEES

.1 File Contract Drawings with proper authorities and obtain their approval of installation and permits for same before proceeding with work. Prepare and submit necessary detailed shop drawings as required by Authorities.

.2 Pay all fees in connection with examination of drawings, permits, inspections and final

certificate of approval. 1.9 CERTIFICATES

.1 Finish necessary certificates as evidence that work installed conforms to laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.10 GUARANTEE-WARRANTY

.1 Guarantee and warranty requirements of the Contract shall apply except for incandescent lamps which shall be guaranteed for a period of ninety days after acceptance by the Owners.

1.11 SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND JOB CONDITIONS

.1 Electrical Drawings do not show structural and related details. Take information involving accurate measurement of building from building drawings, or at building. Make, without additional charge, any necessary changes or additions to electrical work or equipment locations to accommodate structural conditions. Equipment locations may be altered by Engineer without extra charge provided change is made before installation and does not necessitate major additional material.

.2 Examine site and local conditions. Examine carefully all drawings and complete

specifications to ensure that work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown. Before commencing work, examine the work of other Sections and report at once any defect or interference affecting the work, its completion or warranty. No allowance will be make later for any expense incurred through failure to make these examinations or to report any such discrepancies in writing.

of 596



.3 Relocate equipment and/or material installed but not coordinated with work of other Sections as directed, without extra charge.

.4 Furnish "built-in" items in ample time and give necessary information and assistance in

connection with building-in of same. Notify Section concerned in writing of size and location of recesses, openings and chases at least 48 hours before walls are erected, floors poured and similar work.

1.12 TENDER & SUBSTITUTIONS

.1 Tender shall be submitted based on specified manufacturer or "approved manufacturers" and equipment only.

.2 Substitutions for materials may be proposed by submitting details with Supplementary

Tender Form together with price difference to Stipulated Sum Tender amount under the following conditions:

1. Product name shall be stated together with price difference, if any, to stipulated sum for

each substitution proposed.

2. Material or equipment substituted shall not exceed space requirements allocated. Extra charges will not be allowed for any additional installation cost resulting from acceptance of proposed substitutions.

3. If an item of material specified is unobtainable or unavailable to meet proposed

completion, state in tender the proposed substitute and amount to be added or deducted for its use. Extra charges will not be allowed for substitutions after the Contract has been awarded.

1.13 INTERFERENCE DRAWINGS

.1 Prepare and submit composite interference drawings if required to avoid and/or resolve conflict of trades and to co-ordinate work of Electrical Division with all other trades.

.2 Interference drawings shall indicate exact arrangements, of all areas and equipment to scale

with dimensions.

.3 Co-operate with work of Division 15 and provide data requested and as required in the preparation of interference drawings for the work of Division 15.

.4 Make interference drawings in conjunction with all parties and trades concerned showing

sleeves and openings and passage of electrical work through building structure. Drawings shall also show inserts, special hangers and other features to indicate routing through confined spaces, installation of equipment in such areas.

.5 Provide detail drawings, fully dimensioned, of equipment in Boiler and Mechanical

Equipment Rooms, Electrical Rooms, Fan Rooms, etc. Base equipment drawings on approved Shop Drawings and include, but do not necessarily limit to, details pertaining to access, clearances, sleeves, connections, etc.

of 596



.6 Provide detailed drawings of pulling pits, equipment bases, anchors, floor and roof curbs, etc., pertaining to Electrical work.

1.14 SHOP DRAWING MATERIAL & LISTS

.1 Prepare and submit shop drawings and lists of materials for review in accordance with Architectural Sections. Make submittals of more than two pages in booklet form. Individual and loose drawings will not be accepted for review.

.2 Prior to equipment fabrication, delivery or installation, submit complete lists of materials

proposed, indicating manufacturer, catalogue numbers and complete performance data.

.3 Review of Shop Drawings by Consultant is for sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with general design concept. This review shall not mean that Architect and/or Engineer approves detail design inherent in Shop Drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with Contractor and such review shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of work with all trades.

.4 Shop drawings transmitted via facsimile (fax) machines, or copies of same, will not be

accepted for review. 1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS

.1 Conform to General Requirements. Maintain at least 2 sets of documents and clearly mark on same as job progresses, changes and deviations from work shown so that on completion Owner will have records of exact location of ducts and equipment and record of material and equipment changes.

.2 Record all homerun conduits, junction boxes for complete lighting, power and systems on

As-Built Drawings.

.3 Contractor shall obtain clean set of prints from Consultant at start of Contract Work and shall keep these prints up-to-date at jobsite, accurately recording all changes made on project and locating all services, equipment, etc. which may have been shown only diagrammatically on Contract Documents.

.4 Contractor shall ensure that as-built information is accurately recorded and shall check same. As-Built drawings shall be reviewed with Consultant at each jobsite meeting.

.5 Upon completion of Contract Work, prior to Substantial Performance inspection and after

final review with Consultants, Contractor shall neatly transfer recorded information and make final As-Built submission to Consultant in the following form:

• One (1) set of clean, legible prints. • Updated ACAD R2010 drawings.

of 596



.6 Consultants shall be responsible for reviewing As-Built information provided by Contractor. Revise drawings to suit any comments until acceptable for submission to owner.

1.16 JOB SITE WORK SHOP AND STORAGE

.1 Supply job site office, workshop, tools, scaffolds and material storage as required to complete the work of this Division. Location of temporary buildings, use of space on site or within building shall be to later direction.

1.17 PROTECTION

.1 Securely plug or cap open ends of electrical raceways or equipment to prevent entry of dirt, dust, debris, water, snow or ice. Clean all equipment inside and outside before testing.

.2 Equipment stored on site shall be protected from weather and kept dry and clean at all

times. Take care to avoid corrosion of metal parts.

.3 Protect work installed from damage. Secure all unfinished or loose work to prevent movement.

1.18 INSTRUCTIONS TO OPERATOR

.1 Instruct Building Operators in repair, maintenance and operation of Electrical Systems and associated equipment.

.2 Supply three (3) full Operation and Maintenance Instructions each in stiff cover, three-ring

binder suitably indexed, separated and labeled. Operate each item of equipment in presence of Operators to ensure understanding of working parts and function of each item of equipment. Supply one complete set of "Reviewed" Shop Drawings in separate hard cover binder suitably separated and labelled for Owner's use.

.3 Operation and maintenance manuals shall be carefully prepared in co-operation with

equipment manufacturers and include miscellaneous parts necessary for proper, efficient operation of all equipment.

.4 Manuals shall also include spare parts list for each type of equipment, component, control

and device installed together with manufacturer's name and address so such items can be suitably identified and purchased. Include list of recommended spares.

1.19 CLEANING, LUBRICATION AND ADJUSTMENT

.1 Immediately prior to completion of work:

1. Remove all dust, dirt and other foreign matter from internal surfaces of enclosed electrical apparatus and equipment.

2. Remove all temporary protective coverings and coatings, temporary labels.

of 596



3. Clean, repair, lubricate and adjust all mechanism and moveable parts of apparatus and equipment leaving it in new condition and operating properly.

4. Balance demand loads for service and distribution feeders within 5 percent upon

completion of work and after the building is in full operation.

1.20 INSPECTION & TESTING

.1 Systems, equipment, and all major items of material shall be tested to the satisfaction of the Architect, and as required to establish compliance with plans and specifications, and with the requirements for the Supply and Inspection Authorities.

.2 Faulty and defective equipment shall be replaced with new materials. Conductors which are

found to be shorted or grounded, or to have less than proper insulation resistance, shall be replaced with new conductors.

.3 Tests shall include but are not limited to the following:

1. Test of secondary voltage cables shall include megger tests to establish proper

insulation resistance, and phase-to-ground resistance of cables.

2. Proper functioning of all systems.

3. Polarity tests - to establish proper polarity connections to all sockets and receptacles.

4. Test of system neutral to establish proper insulation resistance and isolation of neutral from ground except for required ground connection at Service.

1.21 CERTIFICATE OF TESTS

.1 When work is complete submit three copies of test results and a signed statement listing all tests that have been performed as required by specifications and manufacturer's instructions.

1.22 COMPLETION

.1 Provide receipts from designated representative of Owner for portable and loose materials (e.g. spare fuses, fixture re-lamping equipment and the like).

.2 Provide copy of final inspection certificate from Electrical Inspection Authority and fire

alarm verification report.

.3 Provide manufacturers corrected "as built" shop drawings for all major electrical items and systems, including all shop drawings returned for modifications.

1.23 ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING BUILDING

.1 Note that certain alterations and structural changes are to be made to existing building. Architectural drawings and site are to be examined to determine extent of alterations affecting existing electrical systems. Where existing conduits and wires run through areas

of 596



to be altered, to feed other parts of existing building, they shall be re-routed and reconnected to maintain their original function. Drawings do not necessarily indicate outlets, switches, receptacles, and the like, and other electrical equipment which are required to be relocated or abandoned. Provide decorative blank cover plates for obsolete outlet boxes remaining.

.2 Electrical services and auxiliary services (fire alarm, P.A. intercom, and the like) shall be

maintained continuously without interruption. Interruptions to services shall be confined to periods of time to be designated by Architect, and/or Owner’s designated representative. Include in tender for temporary connections, overtime labour charges, and such related allowances in order to conform to these conditions.

.3 The Electrical Contractor is responsible for removal, reinstallation, cutting and patching of

ceiling and walls as required in the existing building.

.4 Cutting directly related to electrical work, regardless of whether such work occurs in new or existing construction, shall be coordinated and paid for by Electrical Subcontractor involved, under supervision of Contractor.

.5 Where existing electrical items or systems are demolished and removed from existing

construction assemblies, Electrical Subcontractor involved shall be responsible for infilling entire hole left after removal of item or system with new construction assembly to match existing. Where new electrical items or systems are installed through existing construction assemblies, Electrical Subcontractor involved shall be responsible for properly sized and accurate cutting of existing construction assembly to allow installation of new work.

1.24 PROJECT SPECIFIC NOTES

.1 Obtain all approvals from public authorities having jurisdiction prior to commencing any work. Include, in the tender price, for all ESA permit and inspection fees. Arrange for and attend all inspections required as per requirements of the electrical safety authority and the building department.

.2 Examine architectural drawings and specifications and all contract documents before

proceeding with the work. Any discrepancies between the drawings and specifications of all disciplines must be referred to the architect before any affected work is commenced.

.3 The electrical contractor shall furnish all labour, material, tools, equipment, etc. required to

complete all work shown on the drawings and as specified in the contract documents. The work shall be performed in accordance with rules and regulations of all authorities having legal jurisdiction over the work. This contractor shall provide any small items of work not specifically called for but required to complete the intended installation and/or required to achieve the desired intent or functional utility.

.4 Perform all work in full accordance with the Ontario building code, Ontario electrical safety code, TDSB standards and good practices and the requirements of all other authorities having jurisdiction. All work performed by this division shall be done in accordance with all manufacturer's recommendations. Obtain all available manufacturer's recommendations and comply.

of 596



.5 All cutting, patching, coring, scanning, xraying, making good and fire stopping required for the work of this division shall be carried out by this division. The electrical contractor is responsible for and shall pay for any and all damage to the building and/or surrounding area incurred by work of this division.

.6 Review the designated substances survey provided by the Owner in detail prior to commencing any work.

.7 The electrical contractor must review and submit shop drawings for the proposed door hardware in conjunction with the general contractor to the architect and electrical consultant prior to ordering. Order only upon receipt of approval. Order, supply and install as per all comments.

.8 All materials used throughout shall be new, of best quality, C.S.A. approved, and of one manufacturer. Wherever trade names are not used to describe materials, these materials shall be of the best available quality. Obtain and pay for special ESA inspections of specified non-C.S.A. electrical equipment.

.9 Provide all wiring, raceways, electrical boxes, and such components as required for a complete and operational installation.

.10 All conduit shall be rigid steel or EMT with steel set screw couplings and connectors with insulated throats as required by Ontario Electrical Safety Code based on application, unless otherwise noted. Exposed raceways in finished areas shall be wiremold channels installed neatly in appearance, run parallel to building lines, and concentric right angle bends only shall be used. Exterior exposed conduit shall be rigid galvanized steel. Supply and install access doors as necessary due to the proposed work. All access panel ratings shall match that of the surface in which it is being installed.

.11 All wiring shall be of minimum #12 gauge copper, except as otherwise noted. All wiring shall be 600 volt type rw90. All wiring shall be run in conduit from the source to the load. BX cable may be used where permitted by code in ceiling space for final connections only and for a maximum length of 5'. Maximum voltage drop shall not exceed 2 percent.

.12 Coordinate with all other trades present on site throughout the full course of construction. Lay out of all work so as not to conflict with the work of other trades. Carry out work promptly which may interfere with the work and/or schedule of any other trades.

.13 After completion of the work, provide the consultant with a set of 'as-built' record drawings in pdf format prior to submission to the owner. Incorporate all changes in the pdf drawings.

.14 Alterations and additions: contractors shall note that this contract is an alteration to an existing building and as such the contractor shall thoroughly investigate the existing electrical installation and electrical, mechanical, structural, and architectural conditions prior to pricing and construction.

.15 Demolition: remove all exposed conduits, branch wiring, outlets, etc. from surfaces being demolished.

of 596



.16 Cleanup and garbage: the contractor is responsible for maintaining as clean of a work area as possible during construction. The contractor is responsible to clean-up and remove tools from the site at the end of every working day. Disposal of all redundant materials, devices, and equipment is the responsibility of the contractor on a daily basis.

.17 All work shall be done with minimum possible interruption to the existing building systems

and in the time schedule permitted by the Owner. Consult with the project supervisor prior to pricing. Complete the project within the allocated schedule.

.18 Paint all exposed conduit and backboxes, inside and outside of the building, to match the surrounding colour. Minimize exterior conduit run where feasible.

.19 All backboxes installed indoors shall be wiremold or approved equal. All backboxes installed outside shall be of cast aluminum finish.

.20 For all panels where new circuits are added, provide a new typed panel directory based on the new loads. Incorporate all existing circuit information from the existing panel directory on site in the new panel directory.

END OF SECTION

of 596

RIVER OAKS COMMUNITY CENTRE 26 05 19 LOBBY RENOVATION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS


PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Conform to Section Electrical General Requirements. 1.2 MATERIALS

.1 Materials shall be new, of Canadian manufacture where available, first quality and uniform throughout. Submit tender based on the use of materials and equipment specified, or on the listed acceptable alternate equipment as further detailed.

.2 Electrical materials shall be C.S.A. approved and be so labeled. Material not C.S.A.

approved shall receive acceptance for installation by Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) Special Inspections Branch before delivery, and modifications and charges required for such acceptance shall be included in work of this Section. Material shall not be installed or connected to the source of electrical power until approval is obtained.

.3 Confirm capacity, ratings and characteristics of equipment items being provided to supply

power to equipment provided under other Sections of the work. Resolve discrepancies before such items are purchased.

1.3 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE

.1 Acceptance of materials installed presumes that materials have not been damaged or exposed to conditions that would adversely affect performance and life expectancy.

.2 If in the opinion of the Consultant, materials have sustained damage, or have been exposed

to abnormal conditions it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to have such tests performed as deemed necessary by the Consultant to establish condition and therefore, acceptability of installed materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS

.1 Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall comply with CSA Specification C22.2 No. 45.

.2 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall comply with CSA Specification C22.2 No. 83. Connectors and couplings to be forged steel and rain tight in sprinklered areas. Connectors to have factory-installed insulated throats.

.3 Rigid PVC conduit shall comply with CSA Specification C22.2 No. 136.

.4 Watertight flexible conduit: "Sealtite" PVC jacketed flexible steel with Hubbell-Kellum

strain relief grips; shall comply with CSA Standard C22.2 No. 56.

.5 Surface wall-mounted raceways shall be Wiremold No. 4000 metallic type complete with two channels and all necessary fittings, closers, device modules, etc. Wiremold or approved equal only.

of 596



2.2 WIRE & CABLE

.1 Branch wire and cable shall comprise copper conductors, sized as noted, rated 75 deg. C., 600 volt minimum flame retardant insulation, and CSA approved for application.

.2 Wire and cable installed in conduit shall be PVC insulated Type TWH - Flame retardant

and comply with CSA Specification C22.2 No. 75.

.3 Use Electrovert "Z-Type" code markers for control & communication conductors.

.4 All branch wiring shall be RW90. 2.3 DEVICES

.1 Wiring devices unless otherwise specified herein, or noted, shall be as manufactured by Hubbell, Leviton or Pass & Seymour.

.2 Switches for 120 volt branch lighting circuits, generally shall be A.C. "Quiet Type" rated

20 Ampere, 120 Volt, totally enclosed phenolic housing Hubbell 1200 Series, beige toggle handle.

.3 Double Pole lighting switches shall be connected to 2 pole circuit breakers.

.4 Key-operated switches shall be Hubbell 1221-L Series of the types listed above, except

key-operated, and shall be keyed-alike.

.5 Standard 15 Ampere, 125 volt duplex receptacles generally shall be specification grade Hubbell Cat. No.5262, beige, CSA #5-15R.

.6 Receptacles with integral ground fault interrupter shall be Hubbell No. GF-5252 or

approved equal.

.7 Service receptacle shall be Hubbell No. 5262-RD. 2.4 DEVICES-SPECIALIZED

.1 Flush floor boxes shall be Hubbell Cat. No. 3SFB-SSC 3-service box complete with devices shown on drawings.

.2 Provide low-voltage lighting control, as detailed.

2.5 DEVICE COVER PLATES

.1 Switch and receptacle and other device faceplates for flush mounted devices, generally shall be single or multi-gang as required, type 301, stainless steel, #4 brushed finish with removable protective covering.

.2 Weatherproof enclosures for outdoor receptacles shall be P & S 4600 with 4600-26

Mounting Plate, duplex ground fault receptacles and two #4609 Keys.

of 596



.3 Cover plates for other devices such as flush fan controls, telephone, etc., shall be stainless steel to match above.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS

.1 Approximate locations of electrical equipment, fixtures switches, outlets, and the like, are given on the drawings. Refer to the architectural drawings and room elevations for application. In absence of definite detail exact location of outlets shall be determined on site as work progresses.

.2 Device plates shall cover opening left for outlet box, and plates shall be attached to boxes

in an approved manner. Outlets and fixtures are to be located symmetrically, (i.e. centered in wall panels, ceiling panels or tiles, columns, between and above doors and the like).

.3 The right is reserved to alter the location of equipment and outlets a distance of up to 3

metres without involving a change to the Contract amount, providing notice is given prior to installation.

3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

.1 Mounting heights of outlets, top of outlet to finished floor, except for exposed masonry construction, shall generally be as follows:

Lighting/Exhaust Fann Switches - 1100 mm (to the center of the switch) Receptacles - 400 mm above finished floor Television Outlets - 400 mm Telephone Outlets - 400 mm Manual Fire Alarm Stations - 1200 mm Automatic Fire Alarm Stations - ceiling Panelboards - 2000 mm to top of trim for standard panels. Clocks - 2000 mm or 300 mm below ceiling. Thermostats - 1200 mm Fire Alarm Audible Temporal Pattern Horn/Strobes – 2300 mm 3.3 HOLES & DRILLING

.1 Pneumatic hammers and percussion drills are prohibited.

.2 Where not sleeved, make holes through concrete walls and floors by core-drill only. Obtain Architect's approval before drilling.

.3 Seal holes and sleeves through floors to serve as water dam.

3.4 CUTTING & PATCHING

.1 Layout and install work in advance of other Sections for all new work. Bear all costs resulting from failing to comply with this requirement.

of 596



.2 Pay for cutting and patching and making good as required for work of this Division by reason of faulty or late work. Employ appropriate trades already engaged on the site to perform such cutting, patching and making good existing walls, floor, ceiling, etc. Before commencing, obtain Architect's approval for extent and nature of cutting. Make good, disturbed surfaces to the Architect's approval.

3.5 HANGERS & INSERTS

.1 Provide necessary hangers and inserts for work of this Division.

.2 Fasten to cast-in place concrete by suitable drilled or cast-in inserts.

.3 Fasten to structural steel using bolts or welded fasteners.

.4 Do not use wood, chain, wire lashings, strap or grappler bar hangers except where noted or detailed.

.5 Support fixtures independently of ceiling suspension systems. Provide additional supports

as required, which shall be fastened to building structure steel members, joists, beams, etc., but not metal pan or roof decking. Material for additional supports and their installation shall comply with requirements of U.L.C. Refer to "List of Equipment and Materials" Vol. 2, and "Supplement" for application to rated assemblies.

.6 Support outlet and junction boxes independently of the conduits running to them where

required by electrical code and where deemed necessary by the Architect, use steel angle brackets or steel rods to support outlets and fixtures, to the building structure.

.7 Drilled fastenings to concrete shall be self-drilling concrete anchors, Phillips 'Red-Head' or

approved equal. The maximum weight per fastening shall not exceed 25% of manufacturer's 'pull-out' load data.

.8 Surface mounted or stem suspended fixtures fastened to non-removable ceilings, 2 hr. fire

rated ceiling assemblies, or mounted between metal suspension of exposed T-grid ceilings, shall be provided with minimum of two points of attachment for each 300 mm x 1200 mm (1' x 4') luminaire, using metal `channel-bar' fastened to building structure. Attach luminaires to `channel-bar' by means of threaded steel rods. Channel-bar shall be adequately supported and of a construction to prevent deflection under load, as selected from manufacturer's published data, and to Architect's approval. `Channel-bar' shall be Unistrut, Burndy, Flexibar, Cantrough, or Canadian Strut Products or approved equal.

.9 Use support clips (e.g. Caddy Type IDS) for suspension of fixtures attached to exposed

T-grid ceilings. Clips shall be supported directly from building structure and not from suspended ceiling system.

.10 Provide recessed fluorescent fixtures with support frames, and plastering frames where

applicable.

.11 Chain where permitted and specified for the installation of fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be No. 4, 2 mm (.080") Tenso Pattern coil steel chain, plated with a strength of 82 kg (180 lbs.) as manufactured by Dominion Chain Co. Ltd. or approved equal. Where 'S'

of 596



hooks are used with chain, they shall be No. 6 type with open strength of 82 kg (180 lbs.) minimum. Attachment of chain at both ends of support shall develop full strength of chain.

.12 Support outlet boxes, junction boxes, conduit and the like, mounted on exposed steel deck

roofing by means of self-tapping minimum #10 gauge screws, secured through bottom member of deck corrugation. Do not pierce top of steel deck.

3.6 PAINTING

.1 Hangers, support framing and all equipment fabricated from ferrous metals which are not protected with zinc or other suitable corrosion-resistant finish shall have at least one coat of a corrosion-resistant paint applied before shipment or immediately on arrival at the site.

.2 After installation, touch up all scratches, chips, other damage and defects in paint, using

zinc chromate primer or paint or special enamels as necessary to match the original.

.3 Finish and colour of all equipment shall be coordinated to provide uniform appearance.

.4 Painting of conduits and supports and other exposed surface work will be done under Painting Section except as noted. Install materials in time to be painted together with mounting surfaces.

.5 Do not paint over nameplates.

.6 Refer to other Sections for special paint finishes of equipment.

3.7 NAMEPLATES & SCHEDULES

.1 Identify electrical equipment supplied under this Division with 3 mm thick black laminated plastic nameplate to indicate equipment controlled to provide instruction or warning. Fasten each plate with two chrome plated screws. Lettering shall be 6 mm high for small devices such as control stations and at least 13 mm high for all other equipment. Submit a list of proposed nameplates for approval before manufacture.

.2 Provide panelboards with typewritten schedules identifying outlets and equipment

controlled by each branch circuit including existing panels being changed. Protect schedules with non-flammable clear plastic.

.3 Identify junction boxes, pull boxes, cover plates, conduits and the like, provided for future

extension, indicating their function (e.g. power, fire alarm, communication).

.4 Verify room names and numbers prior to listing on nameplates and schedules. 3.8 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING & FEEDER CABLES

.1 Provide branch circuit wiring, conduits and feeders as required for Lighting, Power and Auxiliary Systems. Separate conduit systems shall be provided for feeder, lighting and power systems, for exit light system and auxiliary communication systems.

of 596



3.9 CONDUIT, RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS

.1 Wire and cable shall be installed in conduit as follows:

Rigid galvanized steel conduit with threaded IPS fittings to be used: 1. Where noted and required by regulations. 2. Where subject to mechanical damage. 3. For all exposed conduit work.

.2 Conduit embedded in concrete or buried below grade floors shall be CSA approved rigid

PVC type.

.3 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) may be used in place of rigid conduit in dry locations subject to governing regulations, embedded in masonry walls, and concealed above suspended ceilings. Connectors shall be provided with factory-installed insulated throats.

.4 Use flexible metallic conduit for connections to chain suspended and recessed fixture

drops, motors and similar equipment to prevent transmission of vibration. A code-gauge green grounding conductor shall be provided for all such connections. Use "Sealtite" conduit with Hubbell-Kellum Sealtite conduit strain relief grips for all such connections at motors.

.5 Fasten every conduit and cable to structure by means of approved conduit clamps or clips.

Wire lashing is not acceptable.

.6 Conceal conduits and wiring except where noted. Run exposed conduits parallel to building lines and to other conduits. Provide every empty conduit with a pull rope (3 mm polypropylene rope) and identify to designate its function (Power, Telephone, Fire Alarm and the like).

.7 Where conduit is installed in concrete slabs, obtain general approval, prior to commencing

the work, on both maximum dimension and cross-overs which may be used therein.

.8 Install conduits in such a manner as to conserve head room and interfere as little as possible with free use of space through which they pass. Obtain approval for routing of same. Keep conduits at least 150 mm clear high temperature work.

.9 Conduits installed at the roof level of exposed structures, shall be run tight to roof deck,

above purlins and beams.

.10 Conduit and cables for electrical work in demountable type and drywall type partitions shall enter from above, from a junction box concealed in the ceiling above and shall comprise a flexible conduit connection.

.11 All branch wiring shall be provided with a separate code gauge supplementary grounding

conductor run in each conduit or duct, terminating at ground block at panelboards.

of 596



.12 Run conduit exposed in mechanical equipment rooms, electrical rooms, fan rooms, and the like, and installed after mechanical and other equipment is completed. Install fixtures, outlets, starters, etc., to clear and to suit application.

.13 Wiring, boxes, conduit fittings, etc., in hazardous areas shall conform to the Ontario

Electrical Code, covering explosion-proof areas. Provide conduit seals where required by these regulations.

.14 Provide housekeeping curbs around exposed conduits feeding panels, disconnect switches,

starters, etc. penetrating floors in front of walls. 3.10 WIRE & CABLE

.1 Wire and cable shall not be installed at temperatures below 20oC unless "minus 40" type is used. Wiring to heating equipment shall be rated 90oC minimum, the ampacity of which shall be limited to 75oC value.

.2 Conductors used for all auxiliary systems (e.g. Fire Alarm) shall be tagged and/or

colour-coded, and where applicable shall agree with manufacturer`s wiring diagrams.

.3 Minimum wire size for power wiring shall be No. 12 AWG gauge unless specified otherwise. Minimum wire size for "Common" neutral conductors shall be No. 10 AWG. Control wiring shall be #14 AWG red insulation. Maximum voltage drop between furthest outlet of any circuit, when fully energized, and panel to which it is connected shall not exceed two percent except for electric heating circuits which shall not exceed one percent.

.4 Cables shall be terminated with moisture-proof connectors, clamped to sheet metal

enclosure by a single non-ferrous locknut and grounding bushing.

.5 Sheaths of multi-conductor cables shall be grounded at both cable ends.

.6 Sheaths of single conductor cables shall be grounded at supply end only. Provide a Code Gauge Grounding Conductor with each feeder cable run.

.7 Numbers of wires indicated for lighting and power, motor and motor control, alarm, signal,

communications, and auxiliary systems is intended to show general scheme only. The required number and types of wires shall be installed in accordance with equipment manufacturer's diagrams and requirements, and with requirements of the installation, except that specification standards shall not be reduced.

.8 Solderless connectors with nylon-jacketed "Vibration-proof" screw-on wire connectors

ideal "Wing Nuts", rated 600 volts shall be used for joints in Branch Wiring.

.9 Use compression joints and terminals for all control wiring; and all conductors #4 AWG and larger. Mechanical connections are acceptable at panelboards and circuit breakers where these are part of factory-assembly.

.10 Wire or cables in feeders, sub-feeders and branch circuits shall be colour-coded in

accordance with Ontario Electrical Safety Code. Each end of feeder terminations (e.g. in

of 596



Switchboard, Panelboards, switches, splitters and the like) Code Phase A - Red, Phase B - Black, Phase C - Blue, Neutral – White.

.11 Use C.G.E. Vulcan X-Link insulated cables for circuits protected by ground fault circuit

interrupters.

.12 Include in each conduit, tubing and raceway, a code gauge green supplementary grounding conductor which shall be connected to suitable ground bus in equipment.

.13 Armoured or sheathed cables may be used only for wiring within demountable and dry wall

type partitions and if additionally specified or detailed; however it shall not be directly buried in or below concrete slabs. Once out of the wall, the run shall not exceed 5’-0”. All wiring after transition shall be run in conduits c/w junction boxes. No exposed run of BX cables in finished or unfinished areas will be acceptable.

3.11 OUTLET, JUNCTION, & PULL BOXES

.1 Use suitable electrical boxes for terminations and junctions on conduit work. Install pull boxes where necessary to permit installation of conductors. Support pull boxes, outlet boxes, panels and other cabinets independently of conduit.

.2 Provide each light switch, wall receptacle and other device with an outlet box of suitable

dimensions and a faceplate. Outlet boxes shall be adapted to their respective locations.

.3 "Thruwall" and "Utility" type boxes shall not be used.

.4 Electrical boxes and panels shall be CSA approved, code-gauge sheet metal, galvanized or with suitable protective treatment. Secure covers with screws or bolts.

.5 Outlet boxes shall not be installed "Back-to-Back" in walls; separate by a minimum of 150

mm.

.6 Use "Masonry Type" outlet boxes for flush installation in masonry walls as detailed on standard Detail Drawings attached hereto. Standard sectional boxes, 1004, 1104 and the like, shall not be used.

.7 Install surface mounted devices, in cast conduit fittings, with threaded hubs and suitable stainless steel faceplates.

.8 Main pull and junction boxes (excluding obvious outlet boxes) shall be clearly identified by

painting the outside of the cover in accordance with the following schedule:

• Lighting Yellow • Power Blue • Fire Alarms Red • Telephone Cream • Control Brown • Intercom & Sound Green

of 596



.9 In addition, each box shall be identified with a system and service designator of logic reference to the service.

3.12 ACCESS DOORS & ACCESS MARKERS

.1 Supply access doors for installation under the work of other Division where electrical equipment requiring maintenance or adjustment or inspection is located above ceilings, within walls or behind furring; except ceilings of lay-in removable panel type.

.2 Access doors shall be 12 gauge hinged metal Stelpro Ltd. or equal #722 flush type,

minimum size 300 mm x 300 mm (12" x 12") "Reach-in" 300 mm x 600 mm (12" x 24") "Crawl-in", with prime coat finish, concealed hinges, screwdriver lock and plaster key. Access doors in finished masonry or drywall construction shall be #722 less plaster key. Access doors shall be #726 in acoustic tile ceilings; #704 in drywall ceiling and #726E in plaster ceilings.

.3 Access doors in fire rated ceiling assemblies, all fire rated walls, duct shaft or in corridor

walls shall be UL, ULC or WHI listed 1-1/2 hour fire rated access doors equal to LeHage #L1010 or Acudor #150B with screwdriver lock.

.4 Where lay-in removable panel ceilings requiring hold-down clips are used, access doors are

not required but panels shall be secured with accessible hold-down clips and marked with Buildemup #6 RH brass paper fasteners inserted through acoustic panel and bent over. Paint heads with blue enamel before installation.

.5 Obtain approval for sizes and locations.

3.13 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR OTHER DIVISIONS

.1 Examine Architectural and Mechanical (Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning) plans and specifications to determine extent of electrical work in connection with these Divisions which is to be done under the work of the Electrical Division.

.2 In general, all loose motor starters and associated controls for mechanical equipment will

be supplied under Division 26 for installation and connection to both source and load side of the equipment.

.3 Co-ordinate the exact location and verify characteristics of electrical provisions for the

work of the Mechanical Division.

.4 Coordinate locations of starters, motors and associated equipment with the work of the Mechanical Trade Sections to ensure proper location of equipment. The exact locations of conduit terminations at Mechanical units shall be determined from equipment manufactures' approved shop drawings. Conduits must be installed to enter only in the locations designated by equipment manufactures.

.5 Provide safety switches required for disconnection of remotely controlled motors, and

where required at motors by C.E.C. regulations whether shown on the drawings or not. Where required at fan motors, they shall be concealed in the fan housing if possible.

of 596



.6 Provide for the 120 volt mechanical equipment where noted, all necessary wiring and connections including wiring and installation of starters, thermostats, aquastats, speed controllers and time switches controlling equipment.

.7 Where motor starters, switches and the like, are grouped together, a suitable 19 mm (3/4")

thick plywood panelboard shall be provided to which all such equipment shall be secured. Provide all necessary angle iron supports for support of panelboard and paint entire assembly with two coats of fire retardant type enamel acceptable to Building Inspection Department.

.8 Provide weatherproof un-fused safety disconnect switches, fastened to exterior of roof

mounted units, to approval.

.9 Connect high temperature thermostats "Firestats" provided in ductwork by Mechanical Division, to exhaust fan systems, to provide fan shutdown on activation.

3.14 GROUNDING – GENERAL

.1 Ground all electrical systems in accordance with provisions of the Ontario Electrical Code.

.2 Provide a grounding electrode in accordance with Section 10 of the Canadian Electrical Code.

.3 Install grounding conductors to permit the shortest and most direct path from equipment to

ground. Install grounding conductors in rigid galvanized conduit with both conductor and conduit bonded at both ends. Provide bonding jumpers with approved clamps to maintain ground continuity of metallic raceway systems at all expansion joints.

.4 Ground connections to grounding conductors shall be accessible for inspection and made

with approved solderless connectors bolted to the equipment of structure to be grounded. Clean contact surface prior to making connections to ensure proper metal to metal contact. Connections shall be of the type that grounds both conduit and conductor, and cap screws, bolts, nuts and washers shall be silicon bronze.

3.15 FIREPROOFING & SEALING

.1 Make watertight seal at sleeves and other openings through floors above grade. Sleeves to extend minimum 25 mm (1 inch) above finished floors.

.2 Provide Fireproofing protection of openings through floors and fire rated walls. Refer to

Architectural Drawings for rated surfaces.

.3 Caulk spaces between conduit, cables, bus ducts, raceways, and cable trays with "Cerafibre" 2300 F packing to Building Department approval. Pack and seal both sides of openings with Electrovert "Flameseal" putty, minimum thickness 25 mm (1"). Install in accordance with Electrovert Instruction Bulletin #3601.

END OF SECTION

of 596

Tom Drouillard

INFORMATION SYSTEMS DEPARTMENT [Company address]

TOWN OF OAKVILLE FIBRE & COPPER CABLING

SPECIFICATIONS 2019

of 596

Town of Oakville - COMMUNICATION SPECIFICATION General Requirements

Revision 06/06/2019 Page 1 of 48

Table of Contents

27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications ............................................................... 4

27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems ........................................................ 4 1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................... 4

2.1. Grounding Electrode System ............................................................................................................................... 4 2.2. Wall-mount Busbars ............................................................................................................................................ 4 2.3. Bonding Accessories ............................................................................................................................................ 4

27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems ............................................................................... 6 1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................... 6

1.1. Telecom Outlets (TO) ........................................................................................................................................... 6 1.2. Horizontal Distribution Systems .......................................................................................................................... 6 1.3. Station Conduits................................................................................................................................................... 8 1.4. Junction Box Requirments For Station Conduits .................................................................................................. 9 1.5. Service Entrance Conduits ................................................................................................................................... 9 1.6. Pathway Requirments For Entrance Conduits ..................................................................................................... 9 1.7. Riser Conduits .................................................................................................................................................... 10 1.8. Firestopping ....................................................................................................................................................... 10

27 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems ......................................................... 12 1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 12

1.1. Acceptable Manufacturers ................................................................................................................................ 12 1.2. References ......................................................................................................................................................... 12 1.3. Non-continuous Cable Support Systems ............................................................................................................ 12 1.4. Finishes .............................................................................................................................................................. 14

27 05 32 Firestopping for Telecommunications Systems .................................................................. 15 1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 15

1.1. Acceptable Manufacturers: ............................................................................................................................... 15 1.2. General .............................................................................................................................................................. 15 1.3. Caulking ............................................................................................................................................................. 15 1.4. Firestop .............................................................................................................................................................. 15 1.5. Penetration Seals ............................................................................................................................................... 15

27 05 33 Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems ..................................................... 17 1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 17

1.1. Approved Products ............................................................................................................................................ 17 27 05 36 Cable Trays for Communications Systems .......................................................................... 18

1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 18 1.1. Manufacturers ................................................................................................................................................... 18 1.2. Materials And Finishes: ...................................................................................................................................... 18 1.3. Cable Tray Supports & Accessories .................................................................................................................... 19 1.4. Equipment Grounding Conductor Function & Grounding ................................................................................. 19

27 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems ..................................... 20 27 05 53 Identification for Communications Systems ....................................................................... 21

1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 21 1.1. Manufacturers ................................................................................................................................................... 21

of 596



1.2. Labels ................................................................................................................................................................. 21

27 10 00 Structured Cabling ...................................................................................................... 22

27 10 10 General Requirements ........................................................................................................ 22 27 10 10 Manufacturers .................................................................................................................... 22 27 10 20 Systems Testing and Documentation ................................................................................. 23

27 10 20.10 Copper Cabling System Testing ............................................................................................... 23 27 10 20.20 Optical Fiber Cable Testing ..................................................................................................... 24 27 10 20.30 Test Documentation................................................................................................................ 25

27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings ............................................................... 27

27 11 19 Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels ..................................................... 27 1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 27

1.1. Patch Panels ........................................................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined. 27 11 23 Communications Cable Management and Ladder Rack/Tray ............................................. 29

1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 29 1.1. Ladder Rack/Tray, Supports, And Accessories ................................................................................................... 29

27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling ........................................................................... 31

27 13 13 Communication Copper Backbone Cabling......................................................................... 31 1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 31

1.1. Intra-Building Copper Backbone for Analog/Voice only ........................................ Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.2. Building entrance protection ............................................................................................................................. 31 1.3. Voice backbone cables ....................................................................................................................................... 31 1.4. Protector Panels ................................................................................................................................................ 31 1.5. Copper Termination Hardware .......................................................................................................................... 31

27 13 23 Communication Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling ................... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.6. Cable Performance Specfications .......................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.7. General - Multimode Fiber .................................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.8. OM3 Multimode Fiber Specification ...................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.

1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 33 1.1. Intra Building Backbone (ISP) ............................................................................................................................. 33 1.2. Intra Building Backbone Indoor/outdoor(ISP/OSP) ........................................................................................... 33 1.3. Approved Manufacturer .................................................................................................................................... 33

27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling ......................................................................... 35

27 15 13 Communication Copper Horizontal Cabling ........................................................................ 35 1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 35

1.1. Data Communications Horizontal Cabling (Category 5e/Class D) .......................... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.2. Data Communications Horizontal Cabling (Category 6/ClassE) ......................................................................... 35

27 15 23 Communication Optical Fiber Horizontal Cabling ............................................................... 38 1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 38

1.1. Indoor UL Rated, Tight Buffered Distribution Cable .......................................................................................... 38 27 15 43 Communications Faceplates and Connectors ..................................................................... 39

of 596



27 15 43.10 Communications Copper Jack/Information Outlets and Connectors ................................. 39 1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 39

1.1. General .............................................................................................................................................................. 39 1.2. Category 5 Enhanced (5e)/Class D Outlets ............................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.3. Category 6/Class E Outlets ................................................................................................................................. 40

27 15 43.15 Communications Fiber Connectors, Adapters and Adapter Panels .................................... 41 1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 41

1.1. General .............................................................................................................................................................. 41 1.2. LC Fiber Connectors ........................................................................................................................................... 41

27 15 43.25 Work Area Faceplate/Wall Plates and Surface Mount Boxes ............................................. 42 1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 42

1.1. Faceplates and Surface Mount Boxes (SMB) ..................................................................................................... 42 1.2. Dust Covers for Faceplates and Surface Mount Boxes (SMB) ............................................................................ 42

27 16 00 Communications Connecting Cords, Devices and Adapters ...................................... 43

27 16 19 Communications Patch Cords, Station Cords, and Cross-Connect Wire............................. 43 27 16 19.02 Copper Patch Cords ............................................................................................................. 43

1. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 43 1.1. Category 5 Enhanced (5e) Cords ............................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.2. Category 6 /Class E Patch Cords......................................................................................................................... 43

27 16 19.03 50 Micron Multimode Optical Fiber Cords and Pigtails ......... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1. PRODUCTS ................................................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.

1.1. Optical Fiber Patch Cords and Pigtails ................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.2. Termination types: ................................................................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.

27 16 19.05 Single-mode Optical Fiber Cords and Pigtails .................................................................... 45 2. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................ 45

1. Work Includes .................................................................................................................................................... 45 2. Scope of Work .................................................................................................................................................... 45 3. Quality Assurance .............................................................................................................................................. 45 4. Submittals .......................................................................................................................................................... 46 5. Coordination ...................................................................................................................................................... 46

2. PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................. 46 1. Optical Fiber Patch Cords and Pigtails ............................................................................................................... 46 2. Termination types: ............................................................................................................................................. 46

Summary of Part Numbers .......................................................................................................... 47

Copper products ..................................................................................................................................... 47 Fiber products ......................................................................................................................................... 47 Other products ....................................................................................................................................... 47

of 596



27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications

27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems

1. PRODUCTS

2.1. Grounding Electrode System

A. Grounding Electrode System

1. When required the Grounding Electrode System shall meet the following a. Active grounding system constantly replenishing moisture into the soil b. Provide low resistance to ground c. Provide season to season stability d. Be maintenance-free for 30 years e. Contain no hazardous materials or chemicals

2.2. Wall-mount Busbars

A. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB)

1. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) shall be constructed of .25” (6.4 mm) thick solid copper bar.

2. The busbar shall be 4” (100 mm) high and 20” (510 mm) long and shall have 30 attachment points (two rows of 15 each) for two-hole grounding lugs.

3. The hole pattern for attaching grounding lugs shall meet the requirements of ANSI-J-STD – 607-A and shall accept 27 lugs with 5/8” (15.8 mm) hole centers and 3 lugs with 1” (25.4) mm) hole centers.

4. The busbar shall include wall-mount stand-off brackets, assembly screws and insulators creating a 4” (100 mm) standoff from the wall.

5. The busbar shall be UL Listed as grounding and bonding equipment.

A. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB)

1. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) shall be constructed of .25” (6.4 mm) thick solid copper bar.

2. The busbar shall be 2” (50 mm) high and 12” (300 mm) long and shall have 9 attachment points (one row) for two-hole grounding lugs.

3. The hole pattern for attaching grounding lugs shall meet the requirements of ANSI-J-STD – 607-A and shall accept 6 lugs with 5/8” (15.8 mm) hole centers and 3 lugs with 1” (25.4 mm) hole centers.

4. The busbar shall include wall-mount stand-off brackets, assembly screws and insulators creating a 4” (100 mm) standoff from the wall.

5. The busbar shall be UL Listed as grounding and bonding equipment.

2.3. Bonding Accessories

A. Two Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block

1. Ground terminal block shall be made of electroplated tin aluminum extrusion. 2. Ground terminal block shall accept conductors ranging from #14 AWG through 2/0. 3. The conductors shall be held in place by two stainless steel set screws. 4. Ground terminal block shall have two 1/4” (6.4 mm) holes spaced on 5/8” (15.8 mm)

centers to allow secure two-bolt attachment to the rack or cabinet. 5. Ground terminal block shall be UL Listed as a wire connector.

of 596



B. Compression Lugs

1. Compression lugs shall be manufactured from electroplated tinned copper. 2. Compression lugs shall have two holes spaced on 5/8” (15.8 mm) or 1” (25.4 mm)

centers, as stated below, to allow secure two bolt connections to busbars. 3. Compression lugs shall be sized to fit a specific size conductor, sizes #6 to 4/0, as stated

below. 4. Compression lugs shall be UL Listed as wire connectors.

C. Antioxidant Joint Compound

1. Oxide inhibiting joint compound for copper-to-copper, aluminum-to-aluminum or aluminum-to-copper connections.

D. C-Type, Compression Taps

1. Compression taps shall be manufactured from copper alloy. 2. Compression taps shall be C-shaped connectors that wrap around two conductors

forming an irreversible splice around the conductors; installation requires a hydraulic crimping tool

3. Compression taps shall be sized to fit specific size conductors, sizes #2 AWG to 4/0, as stated below.

4. Compression taps shall be UL Listed.

E. Pedestal Clamp With Grounding Connector

1. Pedestal clamp shall be made from electroplated tinned copper or bronze. Installation hardware will be stainless steel.

2. Pedestal clamps shall be sized to fit a specific size conductor, size #6 and/or 2/0, as stated below.

3. Pedestal clamp installation hardware shall be sized to attach to round and/or square raised access floor pedestals that are 1-1/8” to 1-3/4” in diameter, as stated below.

4. Pedestal clamp shall provide straight (in-line) or cross (intersection) support for up to two conductors.

5. Pedestal clamp shall be UL Listed as grounding and bonding equipment.

F. Pipe Clamp With Grounding Connector

1. Pipe clamp shall be made from electroplated tinned bronze. Installation hardware will be stainless steel.

2. Pipe clamp shall be sized to fit up to two conductors ranging in size from #6 to 250 MCM; conductors must be the same size.

3. Pipe clamp installation hardware shall be sized to attach to pipes, sizes 1” to 6” (.75” to 6.63” in diameter), as stated below.

4. Pipe clamp shall be UL Listed as grounding and bonding equipment.

G. Equipment Ground Jumper Kit

1. Kit includes one 24”L insulated ground jumper with a straight two hole compression lug on one end and an L-shaped two hole compression lug on the other end, two plated installation screws, an abrasive pad and a .5 once tube of antioxidant joint compound.

2. Ground conductor is an insulated green/yellow stripe #6 AWG wire 3. Lugs are made from electroplated tinned copper and have two mounting holes spaces

.5” to .625” apart that accept 1/4” screws. 4. Jumper will be made with UL Listed components

of 596



END of SECTION

27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems

1. PRODUCTS

1.1. Telecom Outlets (TO)

A. New construction TO consists of one (1) 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep flush mounted box. Each outlet box shall have a EMT conduit stubbed above the drop ceiling or extended into the hallway cabletray. Conduits size is as follows:

1. For Outlets with 3 or less cables, use a 1” EMT conduit 2. For Outlets with 3-6 cables, use a 1.25” EMT conduit 3. For all other sizes, calculate fill ratio at 40% for proper sized conduit

A. Existing surface-mounted construction TO typically consists of surface-mounted raceway including base, cover, end fitting, entrance end fitting, and (2) 1" EMT conduits stubbed out top of entrance end fitting to above ceiling or out to nearest hallway distribution system. Size of the raceway is site dependent based on number of conductors to be installed.

B. The intent of the installation of the TOs which consist of the raceway is as follows:

1. Where ceilings are accessible, the raceway and entrance end fitting shall extend above the ceiling and the conduits installed above the ceiling in the room to the nearest hallway distribution system.

2. Where ceilings are partially accessible, or if the Drawings and/or Specifications indicate installation of access panels, the raceway shall extend above the ceiling and the conduits installed above the ceiling in the room to the nearest hallway distribution system.

3. Where ceilings are inaccessible or no ceilings exist, the raceway shall extend up as close to the ceiling as practical to allow installation of conduits as high as possible to the nearest hallway distribution system.

1.2. Horizontal Distribution Systems

A. Conduit System (Renovations only, where conduit exists)

1. Provide conduits secured to wall above corridor ceilings as shown on the Drawings or as specified herein for installation of telecommunications cables. Any exposed conduit

2. Corridor conduits shall be 4" EMT, furnished in 10 foot lengths wherever possible, with no sharp edges, reamed as necessary, evenly supported at two locations per 10 foot section spacing. Conduits shall be sized and quantified to account for handling cables in all TO conduits at 40% fill back to the TR and/or ER rooms. Verify size prior to installation. Bushings and/or connectors on ends of EMT are required.

3. All conduits shall be installed stacked and attached to walls unless conditions exist which prohibit this type of installation. When this condition exists, mount conduits side-by-side supported with 3/8” rod attached to building structure

of 596



utilizing unistrut channel to form a trapeze. Double nut the top and bottom at the unistrut. Utilize conduit clamp to secure conduits to unistrut.

4. Provide measured pull line in each conduit rated at 1200 lbs. minimum. Increments must be in 12” steps.

5. Grounding of conduits is not required per NEC #250-33, Exception No. 2. shall be painted except conduit above suspended ceilings or in mechanical, electrical or telecommunication rooms. Color to match that of surface installed upon or as directed by Owner’s Representative. Coordinate with other trades prior to painting.

6. Provide restorable fire stops inside and around conduits as recommended by UL1479 or ASTM E814 for all conduits penetrating fire-rated construction. Fire rated construction to be verified with AHJ. See Section 27 05 32 for more firestopping information.

B. Corridor Cable Tray System

1. Complete wall mounted or suspended aluminum cable tray system and necessary accessories shall be provided as shown on plans. Install entire cable tray system in accordance with manufacturer’s minimum installation practices and all local governing codes.

2. Coordinate installation of cable tray with other trades to allow a minimum of 12” above, 12” in front, and 12” below of clearance from piping, conduits, ductwork, etc. Allowance must be provided for access to the tray with reasonable room to work. Obstructions to the tray must be minimized and cannot block more than 6 feet of the tray at any point in the run.

3. Submittal drawings, in the form of 8 ½”x 11” catalog cut sheets, shall be provided for the following items: cable tray, fittings, accessories and load data.

4. Cable tray shall not be loaded beyond 60% of manufacturer’s recommended load capacity.

5. Install wall mounted cable tray on both sides of hallway as shown on drawings and where applicable.

6. Where a new cable tray distribution system encounters a wall, install sufficient 4” EMT sleeves through the wall so cabling does not exceed 20% fill.

7. Where cable tray is exposed below ceiling, install the appropriate solid bottom inserts to conceal cables.

8. Install cable tray dropouts where large quantities of cables exit the distribution system.

9. Cable tray must be sized to facilitate sufficient growth capacity for migration cable plant to coexist in same tray as existing cable plant, wherever possible.

10. Manufacturer of cable tray in corridors and telecom rooms shall be:

C. Telecommunication Room Cable Tray System

1. TR cable tray shall completely wrap all walls within the room. Cable tray shall extend over all equipment frames.

2. Cable tray shall be a minimum width of 2” high x 12” wide. Cable tray may be sized upwards if fill ratio requirements need to be met based on cable quantities.

of 596



3. Manufacturer of tubular ladder type cable tray in telecommunication rooms shall be CommScope.

4. Cable tray shall be 12 inch cable runway. 5. Rectangular steel tubing cross members welded at 12-inch intervals. Finish in

black enamel. CommScope, Part Number CR-SLR-10L-12W or equivalent. a. 12-inch Wall Angle Assembly Kit – CommScope Part Number CR6-12WRSK

or equivalent. b. 3-inch Channel Rack–To-Runway Mounting Plate - CommScope Part Number

CRR2RRMK or equivalent. c. End Closing Tube - CommScope Part Number CRPECK or equivalent. d. Corner Clamp - CommScope Part Number CRTJSK or equivalent (2 required

per End Closing Tube to complete assembly).

D. All open pathway/trays shall be installed a minimum of six (6) inches away from any light fixture or other source of EMI (Electromagnetic Interference).

E. All pathways shall be grounded per NEC Article 250.

F. Provide external grounding strap at expansion joints, sleeves and crossover and at other locations where pathway/tray continuity is interrupted.

G. Support all pathways from building construction. Do not support pathways from ductwork, piping, or equipment hangers.

H. Install cable tray level and straight unless noted on the construction drawings

1.3. Station Conduits

Station conduit is defined as conduit that originates at the TO and rises within the walls or is exposed from a raceway and extends up into the drop ceiling or over to the hallway distribution system.

A. Provide station conduits from TOs to above the drop ceiling or extend over to the hallway distribution systems consisting of 1” EMT minimum or appropriate size as shown on the Drawings or as specified herein for installation of telecommunications cables.

B. Provide an insulating press fit bushing on all telecommunications conduits including interconnecting nipples and stub to distribution system. To prevent conflicts with other cables or conduits to cable tray, the conduit shall be stubbed not less than 6" above or below conduit/cable tray center line. Where space permits, every effort shall be made to bend station conduits down such that the flow of installed cables promotes the minimum length back to the TR and the least amount of bends in the cables. Bushings must be rated to be used in an environmental air handling space (Plenum).

C. Manufacturer of insulating bushing on all telecommunication conduits shall be:

D. Provide measured pull line in 12” increments in each empty conduit to hallway distribution system.

E. Indelibly mark station conduit at hallway distribution end with Room # that conduit serves.

of 596



F. The use of 90 degree electrical pulling elbows is prohibited.

G. Do not include more than two 90 degree bends between pulling points when installing station conduit runs. If the path of the station conduits requires more than 180 degrees of total bends, installation of an appropriate sized junction box is required. See section 2.4 for junction box requirements.

H. Place an appropriate sized junction box in each individual station conduit run that exceeds 100 feet in length.

I. The use of a third bend in a conduit is only acceptable if:

1. The total conduit run is reduced by 15%. 2. The conduit size is increased to the next trade size. 3. One of the bends is located within 12” of the cable feed end.

1.4. Junction Box Requirments For Station Conduits

A. If the station conduit route exceeds the 180 degree of total bends limitation, an appropriate sized junction box is required within a straight section of the conduit run.

B. Each station conduit run requires a separate junction box. The sharing of a junction box by multiple conduits is prohibited.

C. A junction box shall not be used in place of a bend. All junction boxes in station conduit paths shall be installed within a straight section of the conduit run.

1.5. Service Entrance Conduits

A. Minimum of (4) 4” IMC conduits shall be installed from the nearest utility tunnel on outside of the building as shown on the Drawings. Terminate entrance conduits entering ER rooms from below grade to extend 4" above finished floor. Location of entrance conduits shall be within 12” of room corners.

B. Terminate entrance conduits entering ER rooms from above ceiling height to extend 4" below finished ceiling or 12” above cable tray.

C. Terminate entrance conduits entering an ER rooms from below ceiling height to extend 4" into the room.

D. Entrance conduits shall be continuous into the building and to the ER. Securely fasten all entrance conduits to the building to withstand any cable placing operation. Do not include more than two 90 degree bends between pulling points when installing entrance conduits.

E. On exterior wall penetrations, seal both sides of the wall around outside of conduit with hydraulic cement to prevent water from entering the building. Seal the inside of the conduit on both sides with conduit plugs, water plugs, or duct sealer to prevent water, vapors, or gases from entering the building.

1.6. Pathway Requirments For Entrance Conduits

A. If the entrance conduits exceeds the 180 degree of total bends limitation, an appropriate sized junction box, manhole, or handhole is required.

of 596



B. As-built drawings of entrance conduit path required to be submitted to Owner’s Representative before covered with soil.

1.7. Riser Conduits

Riser conduits shall only be used when noted on the Construction Documents for special applications only. Riser conduits are not required as a general rule for the riser system. However, when required:

A. Minimum of (2) 4” conduits shall be installed between the ER room and each TR room as shown on the Drawings.

B. Conduits entering ER and TR rooms shall be reamed or bushed and terminated not more than 4" from entrance wall and within 12” of room corners.

C. Conduits entering ER and TR rooms from below floor shall be terminated not more than 4" above finished floor.

D. Conduits for riser cables shall be continuous and separate from all other conduit or enclosed raceway systems. Do not include more than two 90 degree bends between pulling points when installing riser conduits. Where junction boxes are required, locate in accessible areas, such as above suspended ceilings in hallways.

E. Conduits shall not be less than 4" trade size and be equipped with a measured pull line at 12” increments rated at a minimum 1200 pound test.

F. Provide restorable fire stops inside and around conduits as recommended by UL1479 or ASTM E814 for all conduits penetrating fire-rated construction. Fire-rated construction to be verified with AHJ. See Section 27 05 32 for more firestopping information.

G. Provide an insulating press fit bushing on all telecommunications riser conduits. Bushings must be rated to be used in an environmental air handling space (Plenum).

1. Manufacturer of insulating bushing on all telecommunication conduits shall be Arlington or equal.

H. Riser conduits shall not be used for the distribution of horizontal cables.

1.8. Firestopping

A. In all buildings, floor/ceiling assemblies, stairs, and elevator penetrations must be sealed with a 2-hour fire stop assembly at a minimum, unless otherwise noted.

B. Contact Owner’s Representative to identify walls which are fire-rated construction. Walls must be sealed with a 2-hour fire stop assembly at a minimum.

C. Communication pathways requiring fire stopping shall utilize removable/re-usable fire stopping putties for ease of Moves, Adds, and Changes.

D. All fire stopping penetrations shall conform to the recommended practices listed in UL1479 or ASTM.

E. See Section 27 05 32 - Firestopping for Telecommunications Systems

END OF SECTION

of 596



of 596



27 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems

1. PRODUCTS

1.1. Acceptable Manufacturers

A. Subject to compliance with these specifications, non-continuous cable supports shall be as manufactured by:

1.2. References

ASTM B633 Standard Specification for Electro-deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel ASTM B 695-90 Standard Specification for coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron

and Steel ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products ASTM A924/A924M Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,

Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A109 Standard Specification for Steel, Strip, Carbon, Cold-Rolled ASTM A167 Standard Specification for Stainless and heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip ASTM A480/A480M Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled

Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. ASTM A568 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy

Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled A653 G60-Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-coated

(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip process ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar ASTM A682 Standard Specification for Steel, Strip, High-Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Spring Quality ASTM A879 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for

Applications Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on Each Surface ASTM B117 Standard Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing ASTM D610 Standard test Method for Evaluating Degree of Rusting on Painted Steel Surfaces UL 2043 - Standard for Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products

and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces. ANSI/ TIA-568 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, current revision

level. ANSI/ TIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces,

current revision level. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code®

1.3. Non-continuous Cable Support Systems

A. Non-continuous cable supports 1. Non-continuous cable supports shall provide a bearing surface of sufficient width to

comply with required bend radii of high-performance cables; cULus Listed. 2. Non-continuous cable supports shall have flared edges to prevent damage while

installing cables. 3. Non-continuous cable supports sized 1 5/16” and larger shall have a cable retainer strap

to provide containment of cables within the hanger. The cable retainer strap shall be removable and reusable and be suitable for use in air handling spaces.

of 596



4. Non-continuous cable supports shall have an electro-galvanized or G60 finish and shall be rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments.

5. Stainless Steel non-continuous cable supports are intended for indoor and outdoor use in non-corrosive environments or where only mildly corrosive conditions apply.

6. Non-continuous cable supports shall be as manufactured by:

B. Adjustable non-continuous cable support sling 1. Constructed from steel and woven laminate; sling length can be adjusted to hold up to

425 4-pair UTP; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments. Rated to support Category 5e and higher cable, or optical fiber cable; cULus Listed.

2. Adjustable non-continuous cable support sling shall have a static load limit of 100 lbs. 3. Adjustable non-continuous cable support sling shall be suitable for use in air handling

spaces. 4. If required, assemble to manufacturer recommended specialty fasteners including beam

clips, flange clips, C and Z purlin clips. 5. Acceptable products:

C. Multi-tiered non-continuous cable support assemblies 1. Multi-tiered non-continuous cable support assemblies shall be used where separate

cabling compartments are required. Assemblies may be factory assembled or assembled from pre-packaged kits. Assemblies shall consist of a steel angled hanger bracket holding up to six non-continuous cable supports, rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments; cULus Listed.

2. If required, the multi-tier support bracket may be assembled to manufacturer recommended specialty fasteners including beam clamps, flange clips, C and Z purlin clips.

3. The multi-tiered support bracket shall consist of: D. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from tee bar

1. Tee bar support bracket with one non-continuous cable support, factory or jobsite assembled; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments; cULus Listed.

2. Acceptable products: E. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from drop wire/ceiling

1. Fastener to wire/rod with one non-continuous cable support, factory or jobsite assembled; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments; cULus Listed.

2. Acceptable products: F. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from beam, flange

1. Fastener to beam or flange with one non-continuous cable support, factory or jobsite assembled; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments; cULus Listed.

2. Acceptable products: G. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from C & Z Purlin

1. Fastener to C or Z purlin with one non-continuous cable support, factory or jobsite assembled; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments, cULus Listed.

2. Acceptable products: H. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from wall, concrete, or joist

1. Fastener to wall, concrete, or joist with one non-continuous cable support, factory or jobsite assembled; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments, cULus Listed.

2. Acceptable products: I. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from threaded rod

1. Fastener to threaded rod with one non-continuous cable support, factory or jobsite assembled, rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments, cULus Listed.

2. The multi-tiered support bracket shall have a static load limit of 300 lbs. 3. U-hooks and Double J-hook shall attach directly to threaded rod using standard nuts. 4. Acceptable products:

of 596



J. Raised floor non-continuous cable support assemblies 1. Fastener to raised (access) floor pedestal with one non-continuous cable support,

factory or jobsite assembled, rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments; cULus Listed.

2. Acceptable products: K. Cantilever-Mounted cable supports

1. U-hook shall be able to be assembled to a wide variety of wall mount brackets. 2. Spacing of individual U-hooks as needed, max of 4’ to 5’ apart. 3. U-hooks may have the optional attachment of a cable roller for ease in pulling cables. 4. Acceptable products:

L. Installation accessories for non-continuous cable supports 1. Cable Pulley

a. Non-continuous cable supports may be used as an installation tool when a removable pulley assembly is included. The pulley shall be made of plastic and be without sharp edges. The pin and bail assembly must be able to be secured to the J-Hook during cable installation. The pulley must remain secured while cables are being pulled.

b. The pin and roller assembly must be removed after cables are installed. c. Acceptable products:

2. Cable Protector a. The protective steel tube shall fit over threaded rod and be at least 4” in length. b. The tube shall prevent damage to cables placed in or pulled through CAT-CMTM U-

hooks. The tube shall not inhibit the pulling of cables. c. Acceptable products:

1.4. Finishes

A. ASTM B633 Standard Specification for Electro-deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel ASTM B 695 Standard Specification for coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A924/A924M Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

B. Non-continuous cable supports used where only mildly corrosive conditions apply shall be stainless steel, AISI type 304.

END of SECTION

of 596



27 05 32 Firestopping for Telecommunications Systems

1. PRODUCTS

1.1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

A. Materials and products required for work of this section shall not contain asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB).

B. Manufacturer and Firestopping System must be approved by the local AHJ before purchase or installation.

1.2. General

Provide and install firestopping materials to meet applicable codes and installation requirements for each firestopping application. Products using caulking, putties, wrap strips, mortars, composite boards and/or mechanical devices shall be used as appropriate for the specific condition.

1.3. Caulking

When caulking is used, provide and install flexible caulking materials. Cured firestop materials 1/8 thick shall be able around a 1” mandrell without breaking.

1.4. Firestop

Do not use any firestop products which re-emulsify, leach active intumescent ingredients or dissolve when placed in water after curing. Product must withstand the passage of cold smoke, either as inherent property of the system or by the use of a separate product included as part of the UL system or device, and designed to perform this function.

1.5. Penetration Seals

A. General:

1. Penetration seals (firestopping material) shall be asbestos-free and capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of ASTM E814 and UL 1479.

2. Materials shall meet and be acceptable for use by all three model building codes, Basic/National Building Code, Building Code and Standard Building Code, per National Evaluation Service, Inc. report # NER-243.

3. Materials shall meet requirements of NFPA 101 and NFPA 70. 4. Materials shall be suitable for the firestopping of penetrations made by steel, glass,

plastic and insulated pipe, conduit, bus duct, noninsulated pipe and ductwork. 5. On insulated pipe, fire-rating classification must not require removal of insulation. 6. The rating of penetration seals shall not be less than the rating of the time-rated floor or

wall assembly. 7. Systems shown below are examples and other equal systems may be approved or

required by the AHJ.

B. 2-hour Rated Concrete Floor:

1. Penetrants: Multiple pipes. 2. Firestop as manufactured by: 3. UL System: No. 93.

of 596



C. 2-hour Rated Concrete Floor:

1. Penetrants: Maximum 30” dia. Metal pipe/conduit. 2. Firestop as manufactured by: 3. UL System: No.319

D. 1-2 –Hour Rated Gypsum Board Wall:

1. Penetrant: Metal pipe/conduit. 2. Firestop as manufactured by: 3. UL System: No. 147

E. 2-Hour Rated Gypsum Board Wall:

1. Penetrant: Metal pipe/conduit. 2. Firestop as manufactured by: 3. UL System: No. 147.

F. 3-Hour Rated Concrete Wall:

1. Penetrant: Metal duct, maximum 2’ square and maximum dimension of 30”. 2. Firestop as manufactured by: 3. UL System: No. 105.

G. Walls Below Grace:

1. Penetrants: Pipe sleeves. 2. Seal: Thunderline “Link Seal” casing seal.

END OF SECTION

of 596



27 05 33 Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems

1. PRODUCTS

1.1. Approved Products

A. Dry location device boxes: Manufacturer shall be: Equivalent products by other manufacturers may be used where approved in writing by Owner's Representative.

B. Wet location boxes: Manufacturer shall be: Equivalent products by other manufacturers may be used where approved in writing by Owner's Representative.

END of SECTION

of 596



27 05 36 Cable Trays for Communications Systems

1. PRODUCTS

1.1. Manufacturers

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1.2. Materials And Finishes:

A. Cable Tray Materials:

Carbon steel wire, ASTM A 510, Grade 1008. Wire welded, bent, and surface treated after manufacture.

A. Cable Tray Finishes:

Finish for Carbon Steel Wire after welding and bending of mesh; 1. Electrodeposited Zinc Plating: ASTM B 633, Type III, SC-1. 2. Powder-Coated Trays – UL classified Black powder-coated surface treatment over

Electrodeposited Zinc Plating (or plain steel) using ASA 61 black polyester coating.

B. Cable tray will consist of continuous, rigid, welded steel wire mesh cable management system, to allow continuous ventilation of cables and maximum dissipation of heat, with UL Classified splices where tray(including UL Classified painted tray) acts as Equipment Grounding Conductor (EGC). Wire mesh cable tray will have continuous Safe-T-Edge T-welded top side wire to protect cable insulation and installers.

C. Provide splices, supports, and other fittings necessary for a complete, continuously grounded system.

Mesh: 2 x 4 inches (50 x 100 mm). Straight Section Lengths: 118 inches (3,000 mm). Wire Diameter: Patented design includes varying wire sizes to meet application load

requirements; to optimize tray Strength; and to allow tray to remain lightweight. Safe-T-Edge: Patented Safe-T-Edge technology on side wire to protect cable insulation

and installers’ hands. Fittings: Wire mesh cable tray fittings are field-fabricated from straight tray sections, in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and Item 2.3.

D. CF Series Cable Tray Size:

1. Depth: Cable tray depth will be 4 inches 2. Width: Cable tray width will be 6 ,12, 18, or 24 inches as shown on Telecommunications

Drawings: 3. Length: Cable tray section length will be 118 inches (3000mm) unless otherwise shown

on drawings. 4. Fill Ratio: Cable tray may be filled to total fill capacity per NEC. Minimum 20% spare

capacity recommended to accommodate future cabling changes or additions. 5. Load Span Criteria: 6. Cable tray will be capable of carrying a uniformly distributed load of 50 pounds per foot

on an 8 ft support span, according to load tests of standard shown in Item A above.

of 596



1.3. Cable Tray Supports & Accessories

A. Fittings/Supports: Wire mesh cable tray fittings are field-fabricated from straight tray sections, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Supports will include the FAS (Fast Assembly System) where possible so that screws, bolts, and additional tools are not required for cable tray mounting; installation time is reduced; and tray path can adapt to installation obstacles without the need for additional parts. Place supports so that support span does not exceed that shown on the drawings.

1. FAS System support methods to mount from ceiling and wall structures with 1/4”, 3/8” or 1/2” threaded rod, if applicable

2. Splices, including those approved for electrical continuity (bonding), as recommended by cable tray manufacturer. Select one of the following splicing methods, if applicable: a. UL Classified EDRN Fast Splice: No hardware required b. UL Classified SWK Splice Washer Kit: Swaged set for splicing, turns, bends, tees c. UL Classified ED Universal Splice Bar: Cut & bend to fit any configuration d. Preclick Splice: Bolted connection optional e. UL Classified EDT Splice Plate: Bolted connection f. UL Classified CE 25 & CE 30 Square Splice Washers: Use with EZ BN ¼” Nut & Bolt g. UL Classified CE 40 Square Splice Washer: Use with EZ BN ¼” to splice trays on bends,

adjustable tees h. FASLock Splice: For sweeps and bends with tray 12” (300mm) and wider. i. UL Classified EZ T 90 kit: For Tees and 90s j. UL Classified RADT90 kit: For 5-1/2” radius Tees and 90s

E. Accessories: As required to protect, support, and install a cable tray system. Select from the following accessories, if applicable:

1. Cable Routing Accessories:

F. Support Accessories:

1.4. Equipment Grounding Conductor Function & Grounding

A. UL Classified cable trays (including painted tray) may act as Equipment Grounding Conductors.

G. Use UL Classified splicing methods to ensure cable tray is electrically continuous and bonded as recommended.

Ground cable trays at end of continuous run.

H. Test cable tray system per NFPA70B, Chapter 18 to verify grounding less than 1 ohm.

I. Ground cable trays against fault current, noise, lightning, and electromagnetic interference by mounting grounding wire to each 10’ cable tray section with grounding clamp.

END of SECTION

of 596



27 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems A. Outdoor telecommunications pathways connect building, pedestals, maintenance

holes, handholds, and towers. These pathways consist of underground, direct-buried or aerial. Underground or direct-buried are generally preferred over aerial because of aesthetics and security. Generally, underground duct banks are preferred over direct-buried because of security, ease of future cable installation and maintenance.

A. Conduit Types

Examples of conduit types include: — EB-20 – For encasement in concrete; — EB-35 – For encasement in concrete; — DB-60 – For direct burial or encasement in concrete; — DB-100 – For direct burial or encasement in concrete; — DB-120 – For direct burial or encasement in concrete; — Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit Schedule 40 – For direct burial or encasement in

concrete; — Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit Schedule 80 – For direct burial or encasement in

concrete; — Multiple Plastic Duct (MPD) – For direct burial or installation in conduit; — Rigid Metallic Conduit – For direct burial or encasement in concrete; — Intermediate Metallic Conduit – For direct burial or encasement in concrete; — Fiberglass Duct – For direct burial or encasement in concrete; — Innerduct Polyethylene (PE) – For direct burial or installation in conduit; — Innerduct Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) – For direct burial or installation in conduit

B. Installation

1. The length of conduit between pulling points shall not exceed 600 ft (183m). 2. Manufactured bends should be used whenever possible. No section of conduit shall

contain more that two 90-degree bends, or equivalent between pull points. 3. Conduits should be installed such that a slope exists to allow drainage and prevent the

accumulation of water. 4. When conduits connect maintenance holes, a slope of .125 in per foot (10 mm per

meter) should exits from the middle of the span to each maintenance hole. 5. Conduits must be buried at a minimum depth of 18 in. (45.7 cm).

END of SECTION

of 596



27 05 53 Identification for Communications Systems

1. PRODUCTS

1.1. Manufacturers

1.2. Labels

A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969.

B. Shall be preprinted or computer printed type. Hand written labels are not acceptable.

C. Where insert type labels are used provide clear plastic cover over label.

D. Outside plant labels shall be totally waterproof even when submerged.

E. Equipment Room Copper, Fiber, and Coax Backbone Cable Labels

F. Equipment Room Copper, Fiber, and Coax Horizontal Cable Labels

G. Work Area Copper, Fiber, and Coax Riser Cable Labels

H. Patch Panel Labels

END of SECTION

of 596



27 10 00 Structured Cabling

27 10 10 General Requirements A. Transmission performance of structured cabling varies with length, connecting

hardware, cords and total number of connections. The installer must take care to properly install the cabling components. To ensure that the installed structured cabling solution meets or exceeds the required performance it must be ‘tested’ or ‘certified’.

A. The requirements for each category of cabling (Cat5e, Cat6, or Cat6A) and optical fiber optics links are located in the ANSI/TIA-568 series standards.

B. Test equipment must meet the requirements set forth in the ANSI/TIA-568 series Standard for Field Test Equipment. All Copper testers shall be Level III. All fiber testers shall meet the requirements in ANSI/TIA-568.

C. Field Power Meters shall meet the following:

Accuracy ± 0.2 dB

Resolution 0.01 dB

Precision ± 0.15 dB

D. The Field light source shall meet the following:

Accuracy ± 0.01 dB

Wavelength 850 ± 30 nm

1300 ± 50 nm

1310 ± 30 nm

1550 ± 30 nm

E. The calibration on all test equipment shall be current.

F. The software in all test equipment shall be current.

27 10 10 Manufacturers The following manufacturer’s testers are approved.

A. FLUKE

1. DTX1800 2. OptiFiber OTDR 3. DTX-CLT CertiFiber Optical Loss Test Set

B. Ideal

4. LanTEK II 5. LANTEK 6/6A/7G 6. FIBERTEK

C. Or other test equipment approved by the Owner

of 596



27 10 20 Systems Testing and Documentation

27 10 20.10 Copper Cabling System Testing

A. General: Copper cabling shall be tested and certified after installation as follows and as required for cable manufacturer’s warranty. Twisted-pair copper cable channels shall be tested for continuity as specified below, presence of ac/dc voltage, and performance. All cabling shall be tested for conformance to horizontal cable specifications as outlined herein, and shall be tested according to test set manufacturer’s instructions utilizing latest firmware and software. Testing shall include all of electrical parameters as specified under Product. All cables and termination hardware shall be 100 percent tested by installation contractor for defects in installation and to verify cable performance under installed conditions. All conductors of each installed cable shall be verified useable by Contractor prior to system acceptance. All cables shall be tested according to contract documents, manufacturer’s warranty provisions, and best industry practices. If any of these are in conflict, Contractor shall comply with most stringent requirements. All defects in cabling system installation shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100 percent useable conductors in all cables installed, at no additional cost to Owner.

B. Continuity: Each pair of each installed cable shall be tested using a test unit that shows opens, shorts, polarity and pair-reversals, crossed pairs and split pairs. The test shall be recorded as pass/fail as indicated by test unit according to manufacturers’ recommended procedures, and referenced to appropriate cable identification number and circuit or pair number. Any faults in wiring shall be corrected and cable re-tested prior to final acceptance.

C. Length: Each installed cable link shall be tested for installed length using a TDR type device. The cables shall be tested from patch panel to patch panel, block to block, patch panel to outlet or block to outlet as appropriate. The cable length shall conform to maximum distances set forth in TIA/EIA-568-C standards and all other applicable standards specified in Appendix 1: Codes, Standards, and Informative References. Cable lengths shall be recorded, referencing cable identification number and circuit or pair number. For multi-pair cables, shortest pair length shall be recorded as length for cable.

D. Factory testing: Every reel of cable shall be tested by cable manufacturer for all characteristics specified for cable type in this section. This testing shall be performed using a sweep test method and include frequencies specified for cable. A test report shall be available electronically, at no additional cost, for a minimum of five (5) years from the date of manufacture. The test report shall include the reel number, the date of the test, the Lot number, and test results for Return Loss (RL), Insertion Loss (Attenuation), Pair-to-Pair NEXT, and Power Sum NEXT Pair-to-Pair ELFEXT and Power Sum ELFEXT. The test report shall show the “Worst Case Margin” for the listed transmission characteristics.

E. Test results: Test results shall be automatically evaluated by equipment, using most up-to-date criteria from TIA/EIA-568-C standards and all other applicable standards specified in Appendix 1: Codes, Standards, and Informative References, and result shown as pass/fail. Test results shall be printed directly from test unit or from a

of 596



download file using an application from test equipment manufacturer. The printed test results shall include all tests performed, expected test result and actual test result achieved.

F. Test reports: Test reports for all factory testing and field test reports for copper cabling installation shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative and manufacturer prior to commissioning voice and data system and final contract payment. Refer to Submittals in this Section.

27 10 20.20 Optical Fiber Cable Testing

A. General: Optical fiber cabling shall be tested and certified after installation as described below and as required for cable manufacturer’s warranty. Fiber testing shall be performed on all fibers in completed end to end system. Testing shall consist of a bi-directional end to end test in accordance with applicable standards in 27 02 20.20, or a bi-directional end to end test performed by EIA/TIA-455-53A and all other applicable standards in 27 02 20.20. The system loss measurements shall be 1310 and 1550 nanometers for single-mode type glass. These tests shall also include continuity checking of each fiber. For spans greater than 90 meters, each tested span must test to a value less than or equal to value determined by calculating a link loss budget. For horizontal spans less than or equal to 90 meters, each tested span must be less than or equal to 2.0 decibels. The insertion loss for each mated optical fiber connector pair shall not exceed 0.40 decibels.

B. Pre-installation testing: Test all optical fiber cable for all fibers prior to installation of cable.

C. Performance testing: Where links are combined to complete a circuit between devices, Contractor shall test each link from end to end to ensure performance of system. Only a basic link test is required. Contractor can optionally install patch cords to complete circuit and then test entire channel. The test method shall be same used for test described above. The values for calculating loss shall be those defined in applicable TIA/EIA standards in Appendix 1: Codes, Standards, and Informative References.

D. Attenuation testing: Attenuation testing shall be performed with a stable launch condition using two-meter jumpers to attach test equipment to cable plant. The light source shall be left in place after calibration and power meter moved to far end to take measurements.

E. Loss budget: All fiber cabling shall be tested at both wavelengths 1300 nm and 1550 nm for single mode.

1. The link attenuation shall be calculated using: a) The CommScope Fiber Performance Calculator for CommScope installations b) The following calculation for other installations:

Link Attenuation Allowance (dB) + Cable Attenuation (dB) + Connector loss (dB) = Splice Insertion Loss (dB)

Where: Cable attenuation (dB) = Cable attenuation (dB/km) X Length (km) Connector loss (dB) = Number of Connector pairs X Allowable connector loss (dB) Splice Insertion Loss (dB) = Number of Splices X Allowable Splice loss (dB)

of 596



F. Link loss: A mated connector to connector interface shall be considered a single connector. Loss numbers for installed link shall be calculated by taking sum of bi-directional measurements and dividing that sum by two. All links not meeting requirements of standard shall be brought into compliance by Contractor, at no additional cost to Owner.

G. Documentation: Following final documentation shall be submitted to the owner’s representative prior to commissioning data system and final contract payment according to Submittals in this section.

H. Test results: Test results shall be automatically evaluated by equipment, using most up-to-date criteria from all applicable standards specified in 27 02 20.20 and result shown as pass/fail. Test results shall be printed directly from test unit or from a download file using an application from test equipment manufacturer. The printed test results shall include all tests performed, expected test result and actual test result achieved.

I. End to End Loss Data: final documentation shall be submitted to the owner’s representative.

J. As Installed/ As Built Diagrams: Final documentation shall be submitted to the owner’s representative.

27 10 20.30 Test Documentation

A. Electronic Format – if required

6. Certification Test Reports shall be submitted in electronic format using the appropriate software supplied by the test equipment manufacturer. The data format should be that of the test report software (i.e. *.flw files for Fluke). The contractor shall provide any necessary software to view and evaluate the test data.

7. The following list is provided as a reference: Tester Test Report Software Fluke LinkWare

Ideal LanTek Reporter 8. One electronic copy of the Test Reports shall be provided.

B. Paper Format – if required

1. Provide test documentation in 3-ring binders within 2 weeks after completion of project testing. Binders shall be clearly marked on outside front cover and spine with words Test Results, project name, and date of completion (month and year). Major heading tabs, Horizontal and Backbone, shall divide binder. Each major heading shall be further sectioned by test type. Within horizontal and backbone sections, divide by tabs scanner test results by category, optical fiber attenuation test results, and continuity test results. Present test data within each section in sequence listed in administration records.

2. Provide test equipment by name, manufacturer, model number and last calibration date at the end of document. Unless manufacturer specifies more frequent calibration cycle, annual calibration cycle shall be required on all test equipment used for this installation.

3. Test document shall detail test method used and specific settings of equipment during test. Scanner tests shall be printed on 8 1/2 by 11 inches. Hand written test results (attenuation results and continuity results) shall be documented on a suitable test form.

of 596



4. When repairs and re-tests are performed, note problem found and corrective action taken, and collocate in binder both failed and passed test data.

END OF SECTION

of 596



27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings

27 11 19 Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels

1. PRODUCTS

A. Category 6/Class E Patch Panels

1. General specifications: Patch panel shall be constructed of high strength steel with satin chrome finish and designed for wall or 19-inch rack mounting.

2. Panels shall be available in 24-port and 48-port configurations, with height of 1 Rack Unit (RU) of 44.5 millimeters (1.75 inches) for each group of 24 ports.

3. Removable rear mounted cable management bar and front and rear identification labels.

4. Patch panels must be capable of connection to the CommScope Intelligent Patching solution or upgradable to connection to the CommScope Intelligent Patching Solution.

5. Patch panels shall support 5 meter cables in 3 and 4 connector channels, 3 meter cables in 2 connector channels and cross connect cords down to 1 meter.

6. Comply with the standards for Category 6/Class E patch panels listed in the TIA/EIA-568 Series Standards and ISO/IEC 11801.

7. Approved Manufacturer: a. CommScope SYSTIMAX Patch Panels 360-PM-GS3-2U (760102244)

360-PM-GS3-2U-48P (760117366)

A. Fiber Optic Shelf Panels

1. General specifications: Shelves shall be constructed of high strength steel with black powder finish and designed for wall or 19-inch rack mounting.

2. Shelves shall be available in multi U configurations, with height of 1 Rack Unit (RU) 44.5 mm (1.75 in), to 4 RU 177.8 mm (7 in).

3. Removable rear mounted cable management bar, door or cover and front and rear identification labels.

4. Comply with the standards for patch panels listed in the TIA/EIA-568 Series Standards and ISO/IEC 11801.

5. Fiber Shelf Panels shall accept ST, SC or LC modular adapter panels. 6. Approved Manufacturer 1U shelves:

a. CommScope SYSTIMAX 1U Sliding Modular Cassette Fiber Shelf HD-1U-SP (760231506)

7. Approved Manufacturer 2U shelves: a. CommScope SYSTIMAX G2 2U Sliding Modular Cassette Fiber Shelf

HD-2U-SP (760231514)

8. Approved Manufacturer 4U shelves: a. CommScope SYSTIMAX 360G2 Sliding Modular Cassette Fiber Shelf

HD-4U-SP (760231522)

of 596

https://www.commscope.com/catalog/cabinets_panels_enclosures/product_details.aspx?id=84882&sayt=1

https://www.commscope.com/catalog/cabinets_panels_enclosures/product_details.aspx?id=84883

https://www.commscope.com/catalog/cabinets_panels_enclosures/product_details.aspx?id=84884



END of SECTION

of 596



27 11 23 Communications Cable Management and Ladder Rack/Tray

1. PRODUCTS

1.1. Ladder Rack/Tray, Supports, And Accessories

A. Ladder Rack / Tray

1. Ladder rack/tray shall be manufactured from tubular steel. Stringers (sides) will be made from 3/8” wide by 1-1/2” high tubular steel with .065” wall thickness. Cross members (rungs) will be made from 1” wide by ½” high tubular steel with .065” wall thickness.

2. Ladder rack/tray cross members will be welded in between stringers on 9” centers. There will be 8” of open space in between each cross member.

3. Design Make: CommScope example part numbers

CR-SLR-10L12W (760085647) 10ft long, 12” wide, Black



B. Horizontal 90° Turns (Cable Runway E-Bend)

1. Horizontal 90° turns shall be manufactured from 3/8” wide by 1-1/2” high tubular steel with .065” wall thickness.

2. Stringers (sides) will be formed in a 90° arc. Cross members will be welded in between stringers on approximate 23° increments so that there are 5 cross members per turn. The welded assembly will have an inside radius that will create a smooth horizontal 90° turn.


CR90FCB-12W (760085530) 12 inch (305 mm) W

CR90FCB-18W (760085548) 18 inch (457 mm) W

CR90FCB-24W (760085555) 24 inch (610 mm) W

C. Ladder Rack/Tray Splices

1. Splice kits will provide a method of mechanically connecting ladder rack/tray sections and turns together end-to-end or side-to-end to form a continuous pathway for cables.


CRBSK (760083899) Butt Splice Kit

CRTJSK (760084046) Junction Splice Kit

D. Ladder Rack/Tray Accessories

1. Cable straps used for attaching cable bundles to the ladder rack/tray cross members must be reusable with a hook and loop-style closure, at least ¾” wide, and sized for cable bundles that are 2”, 3” or 4” in diameter.

2. Cable retaining posts used to keep cable from falling off of the side of the ladder rack/tray shall be manufactured from 1” by ½” tubular steel with .065” wall thickness. Cable retaining posts will be 8” high and will attach to the side stringer of the ladder rack/tray with included hardware. The top of the cable retaining posts will be fitted with a rubberized end cap to protect cables.

of 596

http://www.google.com/search?ie=UTF-8&oe=UTF-8&sourceid=navclient&gfns=1&q=760085647%20



http://www.google.com/search?ie=UTF-8&oe=UTF-8&sourceid=navclient&gfns=1&q=760085530


http://www.commscope.com/catalog/systimax/product_details.aspx?id=26623&tab=3





3. End caps used to cover the ends of ladder rack/tray will be manufactured from a black fire-retardant rubberized material. End caps will be sized for 3/8” wide by 1-1/2” high side stingers and will be sold in pairs.

4. Radius drops or “waterfalls” used to maintain the bend Radius of the ables as they exit or enter the ladder rack/tray will be manufactured from aluminum extrusion. The extrusion will be formed in a 90° arc with a minimum bend radius of 3”. Radius drops will attach to either the side stringer or the cross member of the ladder rack/tray using a clevis pin. Radius drops will include 1-1/2” high cable spools that attach to the top of the radius drop to guide cables.

5. Auxiliary support brackets used to support cables that should be physically separated from the cables in the ladder rack/tray will be made from 1/8” x 1” steel bar. The bracket will be L-shaped and will attach to the side stringer of the ladder rack/tray. The bracket will hang below the ladder rack/tray a minimum of 4”. The bracket support surface will be 4” long. The bracket will be zinc plated with a gold chem. finish.

6. Unless otherwise noted, finish on all metal components shall be epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat (paint) in the color(s) specified below. Hardware will be zinc plated with a gold chem. finish.


CRRP-8H (760083980) Cable retaining posts

CRPECK (760084012) Ladder rack end caps

CRDK-12W (760083956) Radius Drops

END of SECTION

of 596

http://www.commscope.com/catalog/enterprise/2147486212/product_details.aspx?id=26646





27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling

27 13 13 Communication Copper Backbone Cabling

1. PRODUCTS

A. All cable shall be listed for use per the National Electrical Code (NFPA-70).

B. Cable shall meet one of the following, per bid document:

1. UL-listed CMR cable: Solid copper conductors with high-density polyolefin insulation and overall low smoke PVC jacket to achieve riser (i.e., non-plenum) rating by UL standards

2. UL-listed CMP cable: Solid copper conductors with FEP insulation and overall low smoke PVC jacket to achieve plenum rating by UL standards

3. LSZH cable: Solid copper conductors with non-halogen HDPE insulation and low smoke, zero halogen, compound jacket to achieve LSZH rating by:

IEC 60754—Part 2. IEC 61034—Part 2. IEC 60332—Part 1. Def Stan 713.

C. Cable shall meet the requirement of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 series Standards for Category 3 performance.

D. Approved Manufacturer:

1. CommScope 1010 025 (106824329) 25 Pair Riser Rated

1010 050 (106824378) 50 Pair Riser Rated

1010 100 (106824469) 100 Pair Riser Rated

2010 025 (107765992) 25 pair Plenum Rated



1.1. Building entrance protection

Building entrance protection for copper cabling shall be installed utilizing a two (2) foot fuse link between outside plant cable plant splice and the protector module with IDC-type input and output terminals, 100 pair-pair capacity and female mounting base, equipped with 230 volt solid state protector modules. Sufficient protector modules shall be provided to completely populate all building entrance terminals.

1.2. Voice backbone cables

Voice backbone cables shall have a minimum 10-foot service loop when terminated in the ER and TR, and at any splice points in telecommunications manholes.

1.3. Protector Panels

1.4. Copper Termination Hardware

E. Main Cross Connect (MC) and Entrance Facility (EF)

of 596









1. Approved Manufacturer: a. Belden BIX 10A

BIX 1A

BIX 1A4

END of SECTION

of 596



1. PRODUCTS

1.1. Intra Building Backbone (ISP)

A. Indoor Cables - All cable shall be listed for use indoors per the National Electrical Code (NFPA-70) and shall meet one of the following, per bid document.

1. Indoor Riser Rated Tight Buffer - UL-listed OFNR: Tight buffer optical fibers, aramid strength yarn, and riser-rated outer jacket.

2. Indoor Plenum Rated Tight Buffer UL-listed OFNP cable: Tight buffer optical fibers, aramid strength yarn, and plenum-rated outer jacket.

3. Indoor Low Smoke/Zero Halogen Riser Rated Tight Buffer LSZH cable: Solid copper conductors with non-halogen HDPE insulation and low smoke, zero halogen, compound jacket to achieve LSZH rating.

4. Indoor Armored Riser Rated Tight Buffer - UL-listed OFCR: Tight buffer optical fibers, aramid strength yarn, a riser-rated jacket, aluminum interlocking armor with an overall riser-rated sheath jacket to provide additional protection and security.

5. Indoor Armored Plenum Rated Tight Buffer UL-listed OFCP cable: Tight buffer optical fibers, aramid strength yarn, a plenum-rated outer jacket, aluminum interlocking armor with an overall plenum-rated sheath jacket to provide additional protection and security.

1.2. Intra Building Backbone Indoor/outdoor(ISP/OSP)

A. Indoor/OutdoorCables - All cable shall be listed for use indoors per the National Electrical Code (NFPA-70) and shall meet both of the following, per bid document.

1. Indoor Riser Rated Tight Buffer - UL-listed OFNR: Tight buffer optical fibers, aramid strength yarn, and riser-rated outer jacket.

1.3. Approved Manufacturer

A. Basis for Design Specifications: CommScope SYSTIMAX, in strand-count identified on Telecommunications Drawing and/or the Bid Document, and with the appropriate jacket material [OFNR] for the pathway in which the cable will be routed.

1. Approved Manufacturer:

i. CommScope

OM4

D-006-LN-5K-FO6NS (760054270) 6 Fiber, Gel Free, Outdoor Loose Tube Fiber Cable, OM4

D-012-LN-5K-F12NS (760054288) 12 Fiber, Gel Free, Outdoor Loose Tube Fiber Cable, OM4

D-024-LN-5K-F12NS (760054296) 24 Fiber, Gel Free, Outdoor Loose Tube Fiber Cable, OM4

OS1

of 596



D-006-LN-8W-FO6NS (760053835) 6 Fiber, Gel Free, Outdoor Loose Tube Fiber Cable, OS2

D-012-LN-8W-F12NS (760053843) 12 Fiber, Gel Free, Outdoor Loose Tube Fiber Cable, OS2





OS1 ARMORED

D-006-LA-8W-FO6NS (760053835) Armored, 6 Fiber, Gel Free, Outdoor Loose Tube Fiber Cable, OS2

D-012-LA-8W-F12NS (760053843) Armored, 12 Fiber, Gel Free, Outdoor Loose Tube Fiber Cable, OS2





END of SECTION

of 596



27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling

27 15 13 Communication Copper Horizontal Cabling

1. PRODUCTS

1.1. Data Communications Horizontal Cabling (Category 6/ClassE)

A. Category 6/Class E Unshielded Twisted-Pair (UTP) Cable

1. All Cables shall be of round construction 2. Each cable shall contain 4 color coded pairs 3. Cable shall be listed for the environment where it will be installed (Plenum,

Riser, LSZH, etc.) 4. Approved Manufacturer:

a. CommScope SYSTIMAX 2071 4 pair (700214372) Plenum Cat 6

B. Category 6 horizontal cabling shall provide the following Margin to the specification when installed in a 4 connector Channel:

Electrical Parameter (1-250MHZ)

Guaranteed Margins to Category 6 Class E Channel Specifications

Insertion loss 5% NEXT 6 dB PSNEXT 7.5 dB ELFEXT 6 dB PSELFEXT 8 dB

Rerturn Loss 4 dB

C. Category 6 horizontal cabling shall meet or exceed the performance specifications listed in the following table when installed in a 4 connector Channel.

Guaranteed Channel Performance Specifications for 4-Connection GigaSPEED XL7 U/UTP Systems

Freq (MHz)

Insertion Loss (dB)

NEXT (dB)

ACR (dB)

PSNEXT (dB)

PSACR (dB)

ELFEXT (dB)

PSELFEXT (dB)

Return Loss (dB)

Delay (ns)

Delay Skew (ns)

1.0 2.0 71.0 69.0 69.5 67.5 69.3 68.3 23.0 580 30 4.0 3.8 69.0 65.2 68.0 64.2 57.2 56.2 23.0 562 30 8.0 5.4 64.2 58.8 63.1 57.7 51.2 50.2 23.0 557 30

10.0 6.0 62.6 56.6 61.5 55.5 49.3 48.3 23.0 555 30 16.0 7.6 59.2 51.6 58.1 50.4 45.2 44.2 22.0 553 30 20.0 8.6 57.6 49.1 56.5 47.9 43.2 42.2 21.5 552 30 25.0 9.6 56.0 46.4 54.8 45.2 41.3 40.3 21.0 551 30

31.25 10.8 54.4 43.6 53.2 42.4 39.4 38.4 20.5 550 30

of 596




62.5 15.6 49.4 33.7 48.1 32.4 33.3 32.3 18.0 549 30 100.0 20.2 45.9 25.7 44.6 24.3 29.3 28.3 16.0 548 30 200.0 30.0 40.8 10.8 39.4 9.4 23.2 22.2 13.0 547 30 250.0 34.1 39.1 5.0 37.7 3.5 21.3 20.3 12.0 546 30

1. The table provides reference values only. All parameters comply with the governing equations over the entire frequency range.

2. All values and equations apply to worst-case channels utilizing four-pair 71E series cables with full cross-connects, consolidation points and work area outlets (4 connectors in a channel) for any channel lengths up to 100 meters.

D. Category 6 horizontal cabling shall provide the following Margin to the specification when installed in a 6 connector Channel

Electrical Parameter (1-250MHZ)

Guaranteed Margins to Category 6 Class E Channel Specifications

Insertion loss 4% NEXT 4 dB PSNEXT 5.5 dB ELFEXT 4 dB PSELFEXT 6 dB

Rerturn Loss 2 dB

E. Category 6 horizontal cabling shall meet or exceed the performance specifications listed in the following table when installed in a 6 connector Channel.

Guaranteed Channel Performance Specifications for 6-Connection GigaSPEED XL7 U/UTP Systems

Freq (MHz)

Insertion Loss (dB)

NEXT (dB)

ACR (dB)

PSNEXT (dB)

PSACR (dB)

ELFEXT (dB)]

PSELFEXT (dB)

Return Loss (dB)

Delay (ns)

Delay Skew (ns)

1.0 2.1 69.0 66.9 67.5 65.4 67.3 66.3 21.0 580 30 4.0 3.9 67.0 63.2 66.0 62.1 55.2 54.2 21.0 562 30 8.0 5.4 62.2 56.7 61.1 55.7 49.2 48.2 21.0 557 30

10.0 6.1 60.6 54.5 59.5 53.4 47.3 46.3 21.0 555 30 16.0 7.7 57.2 49.5 56.1 48.4 43.2 42.2 20.0 553 30 20.0 8.7 55.6 47.0 54.4 45.8 41.2 40.2 19.5 552 30 25.0 9.7 54.0 44.3 52.8 43.1 39.3 38.3 19.0 551 30

31.25 10.9 52.4 41.5 51.2 40.3 37.4 36.4 18.5 550 30 62.5 15.8 47.4 31.6 46.1 30.3 31.3 30.3 16.0 549 30

100.0 20.4 43.9 23.5 42.6 22.1 27.3 26.3 14.0 548 30 200.0 30.3 38.8 8.5 37.4 7.1 21.2 20.2 11.0 547 30

250.0 34.5 37.1 2.6 35.7 1.2 19.3 18.3 10.0 546 30

of 596



1. The table provides reference values only. All parameters comply with the governing equations over the entire frequency range.

2. All values and equations apply to worst-case channels utilizing four-pair 71E series cables with up to 6 embedded connections in a channel for any channel lengths up to 100 meters.

END of SECTION

of 596



27 15 23 Communication Optical Fiber Horizontal Cabling

1. PRODUCTS

1.1. Indoor UL Rated, Tight Buffered Distribution Cable

A. Basis for Design Specifications: CommScope SYSTIMAX optical fiber cable, in strand-count identified on the bid document, and with the appropriate jacket material (OFNR, OFNP) for the global region in which the cable will be installed.

B. Cable construction:

1. Tight buffer optical fibers, aramid strength yarn, and UL rated outer jacket. 2. Available in either Plenum or Riser 3. Sheath color-coded to optical fiber type and printed with relevant cable

information on cable

C. Approved Manufacturer: CommScope SYSTIMAX

Example Catalog/Manufacturer Part Number P-006-DS-5K-FSUAQ (Plenum 6 fiber)

P-012-DS-5K-FSUAQ (plenum 12fiber)

of 596



27 15 43 Communications Faceplates and Connectors

27 15 43.10 Communications Copper Jack/Information Outlets and Connectors

1. PRODUCTS

1.1. General

A. All products will be compliant to RoHS 2002/95/EC

B. All products will be designed, manufactured and/or distributed under this quality management system: ISO 9001:2008

C. Telecommunications jacks shall be 8-position/8-conductor modular outlets accepting industry standard modular RJ45 type plugs and insulation displacement conductor (IDC) terminations.

D. The Universal design shall support T568A and T568B wiring and shall have universal wiring labels, including color-coded insert identification labels to ensure accurate identification.

E. Color shall be specified or selected by Owner's Representative from manufacturer's standard colors.

F. Provide crosstalk cancellation with compensation and alien crosstalk mitigation using printed wiring board materials and compensation technology.

G. Jack shall be backward compatible with lower category cords and cables.

H. Low-profile wire cap shall protect against contamination and secure connection. Jacks shall be suitable for:

1. Modular patching applications or as modular TO 2. Installation without special faceplates at either 45- or a 90-degree angle

in manufacturer's modular faceplates and frames, including those on surface-mounted boxes

I. Dimensions

1. Depth: 30.48 mm (1.20 in) 2. Height : 20.32 mm (0.80 in) 3. Width : 20.32 mm (0.80 in)

J. Electrical Specifications

1. Contact Resistance Variation, maximum: 20 mOhm 2. Contact Resistance, maximum: 100 mOhm 3. Current Rating : 1.5 A @ 20 °C, 1.5 A @ 68 °F 4. Dielectric Withstand Voltage, RMS, conductive surface : 1500 Vac @ 60 Hz 5. Dielectric Withstand Voltage, RMS, contact-to-contact : 1000 Vac @ 60 Hz 6. Insulation Resistance, minimum : 500 MOhm

K. Environmental Specifications

1. Flammability Rating: UL 94 V-0

of 596



2. Operating Temperature: -10 °C to +60 °C (+14 °F to +140 °F) 3. Relative Humidity : Up to 95%, non-condensing 4. Safety Standard: cUL , UL 5. Storage Temperature: -40 °C to +70 °C (-40 °F to +158 °F)

L. Mechanical Specifications

1. Conductor Type: Solid, Stranded (7 strands) 2. Material Type: Copper alloy, High-impact, flame retardant, thermoplastic 3. Outlet/Module Contact Plating: Precious metals 4. Plug Insertion Life, minimum: 750 times 5. Plug Insertion Life, test plug: IEC 60603-7 compliant plug 6. Plug Retention Force, minimum: 30 lbf, 133 N 7. Rear Termination Contact Plating: Precious metals 8. Rear Termination Type: IDC 9. Wiring: T568A or T568B 10. Can be mounted either at 90 degrees (straight) or 45 degrees (angled) 11. Angled feature eliminates the need for special faceplates

1.2. Category 6/Class E Outlets

A. GigaSPEED® XL MGS400 Series Category 6 U/UTP Information Outlet

B. Electrical performance guaranteed to meet or exceed TIA/EIA 568-C.2 Category 6 and ISO/IEC Category 6/Class E specifications.

C. Optional Plastic Icons (M61A) and Dust Covers (M20A) available in several colors

D. Backward compatible with Category 5e, 5 and 3 cords and cables, however optimal performance achieved when used with GigaSPEED XL GS8E patch cords.

E. Can support network line speeds in excess of 1 gigabit per second.

F. Qualifies for a 25-year product and applications assurance warranty when included as part of a certified SYSTIMAX GigaSPEED XL channel.

G. Approved Manufacturer:

a. CommScope SYSTIMAX MGS400-003 – Cat 6 Black

END of SECTION

of 596

http://www.google.com/search?ie=UTF-8&oe=UTF-8&sourceid=navclient&gfns=1&q=MGS400-003%20



27 15 43.15 Communications Fiber Connectors, Adapters and Adapter Panels

1. PRODUCTS

1.1. General

A. All products will be:

1. Compliant to RoHS 2002/95/EC 2. Designed, manufactured and/or distributed under this quality management

system: ISO 9001:2008

1.2. LC Fiber Connectors

A. Single-mode Connector for use with G.652.D or G.652.D, OS2 fiber

1. Color – Blue 2. Ferrule Geometry - Pre-radiused 3. Ferrule Material - Zirconia 4. Performance meets or exceeds ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2 standard 5. Insertion Loss, typical - 0.20 dB 6. Return Loss, minimum - 55.0 dB 7. Insertion Loss Change, mating - 0.30 dB 8. Insertion Loss Change, temperature - 0.30 dB 9. Approved Manufacturer:

a. CommScope SYSTIMAX SFC-LCF-09-8X 760117895 TeraSPEED Fiber QWIK II – LC Connector, blue.

END of SECTION

of 596



27 15 43.25 Work Area Faceplate/Wall Plates and Surface Mount Boxes

1. PRODUCTS

1.1. Faceplates and Surface Mount Boxes (SMB)

A. Approved Manufacturer:

a. CommScope M13FP-262 – Single Gang Flexible Frame White

M102SMB-B-262 – 2 port surface mount box white

M104SMB-B-262 – 4 port surface mount box white

1.2. Dust Covers for Faceplates and Surface Mount Boxes (SMB)

A. Dust Covers shall be dual purpose blank covers designed for use with modular outlets and faceplates. They shall be used to cover the outlet opening of all empty faceplate openings and unpopulated jacks to protect the wires from collecting dust.

B. Approved Manufacturer:

a. CommScope M20AP-262 107067928 White cover for empty faceplate openings

END of SECTION

of 596

http://www.google.com/search?ie=UTF-8&oe=UTF-8&sourceid=navclient&gfns=1&q=M13FP-262%20

http://www.google.com/search?ie=UTF-8&oe=UTF-8&sourceid=navclient&gfns=1&q=M102SMB-B-262%20

http://www.google.com/search?ie=UTF-8&oe=UTF-8&sourceid=navclient&gfns=1&q=M104SMB-B-262%20



27 16 00 Communications Connecting Cords, Devices and Adapters

27 16 19 Communications Patch Cords, Station Cords, and Cross-Connect Wire

27 16 19.02 Copper Patch Cords

1. PRODUCTS

1.1. Category 6 /Class E Patch Cords

A. The Modular Patch Cords shall meet or exceed TIA ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Category 6 and ISO/EIC Category 6/Class E specifications and shall be fully backward compatible with Category 5e and 5 connectors.

Approved Manufacturer: a. CommScope SYSTIMAX CPC3312-0ZF007 GigaSPEED XL® GS8E Stranded Cordage Modular Patch Cord

CPC3312-0ZF010 GigaSPEED XL® GS8E Stranded Cordage Modular Patch Cord

of 596

http://www.google.com/search?ie=UTF-8&oe=UTF-8&sourceid=navclient&gfns=1&q=CPC3312

http://www.google.com/search?ie=UTF-8&oe=UTF-8&sourceid=navclient&gfns=1&q=CPC3312



of 596



27 16 19.05 Single-mode Optical Fiber Cords and Pigtails

2. GENERAL

1. Work Includes

Provide all labor, materials, and equipment for the complete installation of all Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cords and Pigtails into the approved patch panels called for in the Bid Documents.

2. Scope of Work

B. This section includes the minimum requirements for Fiber Patch Cords. C. All Patch/Equipment Cords shall be new. D. On new installations, Patch/Equipment Cords shall be made by the same

manufacturer as the Horizontal Cable used in the new installation. E. Patch/Equipment Cords shall be available in multiple colors. Colors required are to

be detailed in the Bid Documents. F. All Patch/Equipment Cords shall be factory manufactured and tested for compliance

to the appropriate standards and performance. G. Patch/Equipment Cord length shall be determined by the end user. H. Patch/Equipment Cords shall be installed using proper cable management. I. Minimum bend radius shall not be exceeded.

3. Quality Assurance

J. All cable and equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner or Owner Representative.

K. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where “approved equal” is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval.

L. Strictly adhere to all Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI), Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) and Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) recommended installation practices when installing communications/data cabling.

M. Material and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of the current adopted revision of the following:

ANSI/TIA – 568 Series Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, TIA – 569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, ANSI/TIA – 606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of

Commercial Buildings ANSI-J-STD – 607 Joint Standard for Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and

Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications NFPA 70 – National Electric Code BICSI – Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual ANSI/ICEA S-87-640, Standard for Optical Fiber Outside Plant Communications Cable Telcordia, GR-20-CORE, Generic Requirements for Optical Fiber and Optical Fiber Cable

of 596



4. Submittals

Provide product data for the following: Manufacturers cut sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all products (submit with bid).

5. Coordination

Coordinate layout and installation of Fiber Cords and Pigtails with other trades.

2. PRODUCTS

1. Optical Fiber Patch Cords and Pigtails

To maintain channel integrity, optical fiber patch cords and pigtails shall be fabricated to meet the performance parameters corresponding to the optical fiber cable approved product type specified below. Patch cord and pigtail plug connectors shall be equipped with boots, and shall have same colors as related optical fiber backbone cables, unless specified or indicated otherwise. Optical fiber patch cords and pigtails shall be available with the following options as indicated on the bid document.

2. Termination types:

N. LC Patch cord outside diameters: 1. Simplex: 1.6 mm (0.063 in)2. Duplex: 1.6 mm x 3.3 mm (0.063 in x 0.130 in)3. Pigtails: Ruggedized and tight-buffered optical fiber, 0.9 mm (0.035 in) outside diameter

O. Lengths: As specified in the bid document P. Basis for Design Specifications: CommScope SYSTIMAX TeraSPEED Single-mode

optical fiber, OFNR Q. Approved Manufacturer

4. CommScopeFEWLCLC42-JXMxxx – A 2 fiber optic jumper, riser, TeraSPEED Single mode glass, with LC connectors on both ends. Substitute xxx in part number with actual length in meters. part number with actual length in meters.

760109496 – 360G2 Cartridge 120LC-SM-BL-Pigtails. 360G2 Cartridge 12 LC TeraSPEED Blue with Pigtails iPatch Ready.

OR

FAWLCUC0A-XXF010 - TeraSPEED® LC to Unconnectorized, Fiber Pigtail, 0.9 mm Tight Buffer, 6-fiber Kit, Blue - White (1-6), 10 ft

FAWLCUC0B-XXF010 - TeraSPEED® LC to Unconnectorized, Fiber Pigtail, 0.9 mm Tight Buffer, 6-fiber Kit, Red - Aqua (7-12), 10 ft

WITH

360DP-12LC-SM - 360G2 Singleimode Distribution Adapter Pack 12 LC Blue iPatch Ready

360DP-24LC-SM - 360G2 Singlemode Distribution Adapter Pack 24 LC, Blue

END of SECTION

of 596

http://www.google.com/search?ie=UTF-8&oe=UTF-8&sourceid=navclient&gfns=1&q=FEWLCLC42-



Summary of Part Numbers

Copper products

SEE FOLLOWING LIST OF ALL APPROVED PRODUCTS

Fiber products


Other products


of 596

SUBMITTED BY: CommScope Canada ATTN: Matthew Macklin 505 Consumers Rd Toronto ON M2J 4V8 Canada

DATE: May 29, 2019 Telephone: 289-795-8730 E-mail: [email protected]

Cabinets, Panels and Enclosures Copper Panels, Modules and Cassettes

Part Number Description Quantity760102244 | 360-PM-GS3-2U SYSTIMAX 360™ GigaSPEED XL® PATCHMAX® GS3 Category 6 U/UTP Patch

Panel, 24 port 1

760117366 | 360-PM-GS3-2U-48P SYSTIMAX 360™ GigaSPEED XL® PATCHMAX® GS3 Category 6 U/UTP Patch Panel, 48 port

1

760152561 | 360-IPR-1100-E-GS3-1U-24 SYSTIMAX 360™ GigaSPEED XL® 1100GS3 Evolve Category 6 U/UTP Patch Panel, 24 port

1

760206797 | 1100-U-GS3-24 1100 GS3 PANEL - 24 PORT 1

Fiber Panels and Cassettes Part Number Description Quantity

760027714 | PNL-BK-012-SFA-SC02-BL Adapter Pack, Black, 1000-Type, with 6 TeraSPEED® SM duplex SC adapters, blue

1

760031856 | RS-4AF-16SF RoloSplice Kit with 4 fusion splice trays 1

760039867 | RS-2AF-16SF RoloSplice Kit with 2 fusion splice trays 1

760109389 | 360DP-12LC-SM 360G2 Singleimode Distribution Adapter Pack 12 LC Blue iPatch Ready 1

760115915 | 360DP-24LC-SM 360G2 Singlemode Distribution Adapter Pack 24 LC, Blue 1

760148254 | PNL-BK-012-SFA-LC12-BL Adapter Pack, Black, 1000-Type, with 1 TeraSPEED® 12 fiber, SM LC ganged adapter, blue, shuttered

1

760148361 | PNL-BK-024-SFA-LC02-BL-NS Adapter Pack, Black, 1000-Type, with 12 TeraSPEED® SM duplex LC adapters, blue, no shutter

1

760149351 | PNL-BK-012-SFA-LC02-BL-NS Adapter Pack, Black, 1000-Type, with 6 TeraSPEED® SM duplex LC adapters, blue, no shutter

1

760209940 | HD-1U High Density 1U modular cassette sliding Panel, accepts (4) InstaPATCH® 360 modules or MPO panels, providing up to 48 duplex LC ports, or up to 32 MPO ports

1

760209957 | HD-2U High Density 2U modular cassette sliding Panel, accepts (8) InstaPATCH® 360 modules or MPO panels, providing up to 96 duplex LC ports or up to 64 MPO ports

1

760209965 | HD-4U High Density 4U modular cassette sliding Panel, accepts (16) InstaPATCH® 360 modules or MPO panels, providing up to 192 duplex LC ports or up to 128 MPO ports

1

760221705 | PNL-CS-24LCW-PT TeraSPEED® Splicing cassette, 24LC , 900µm 1

760221747 | PNL-CS-12LCW-PT TeraSPEED® Splicing cassette, 12LC , 900µm 1

Oakville COPPER - FIBRE - OTHER PRODUCTS LIST 2019

page 1 of 83 May 29, 2019

©2019 CommScope, Inc. All rights reserved. All trademarks identified by ® or ™ are registered trademarks, respectively, of CommScope.All specifications are subject to change without notice. See www.commscope.com for the most current information. Revised: December 19, 2018 of 596

760231506 | HD-1U-SP High Density 1U Sliding fiber Panel, accepts (4) InstaPATCH® 360 modules or MPO panels, providing up to 48 duplex LC ports, or up to 32 MPO port, accepts splice wallets, RoloSpice trays and stackable splice trays

1

760231514 | HD-2U-SP High Density 2U Sliding Fiber Splice Panel, to accommodate a maximum of 96 single fusion splices when using the Splice Wallet® or 64 single fusion splices when using the RoloSplice® splice tray organizers

1

760231522 | HD-4U-SP High Density 4U Sliding Fiber Splice Panel, to accommodate a maximum of 192 single fusion splices when using the Splice Wallet® or 128 single fusion splices when using the RoloSplice® splice tray organizers

1

Wall Boxes and Accessories Part Number Description Quantity

760147504 | WBE-EMT-BK-4P-PNL Ready™ Wall Mount Building Enclosure, 4P, black 1



Cable Assemblies Fiber Cable Assemblies

Part Number Description QuantityFAWLCUC0A | FAWLCUC0A-XXF010 TeraSPEED® LC to Unconnectorized, Fiber Pigtail, 0.9 mm Tight Buffer, 6-fiber Kit,

Blue - White (1-6), 10 ft 1

FAWLCUC0B | FAWLCUC0B-XXF010 TeraSPEED® LC to Unconnectorized, Fiber Pigtail, 0.9 mm Tight Buffer, 6-fiber Kit, Red - Aqua (7-12), 10 ft

1

FEWLCLC42 | FEWLCLC42-JXF007 TeraSPEED® LC to LC, Fiber Patch Cord, 1.6 mm Duplex, Riser, yellow jacket, 7 ft 1

Twisted Pair Cable Assemblies Part Number Description Quantity

CPC3312-01F007 GS8E-BK-7FT 1

Cables Fiber Cables

Part Number Description Quantity760053272 | D-006-LA-8W-F06NS TeraSPEED® Single Jacket/Single Armor, Gel-Free, Outdoor Stranded Loose Tube

Cable 1

760053298 | D-024-LA-8W-F12NS TeraSPEED® Single Jacket/Single Armor, Gel-Free, Outdoor Stranded Loose Tube Cable

1


1


1


1

Oakville 2019

page 2 of 83 May 29, 2019


760053835 | D-006-LN-8W-F06NS TeraSPEED® Single Jacket All-Dielectric, Gel-Free, Outdoor Stranded Loose Tube Cable

1


1


1


1


1

Twisted Pair Cables Part Number Description Quantity

700211931 | 1071E SLT C6 4/23 U/UTP W1000 GigaSPEED XL® 1071E ETL Verified Category 6 U/UTP Cable, non-plenum, slate

jacket, 4 pair count, 1000 ft (305 m) length, WE TOTE® box 1

700214372 | 2071E SLT C6 4/23 U/UTP W1000 GigaSPEED XL® 2071E ETL Verified Category 6 U/UTP Cable, plenum, slate jacket,

4 pair count, 1000 ft (305 m) length, WE TOTE® box 1

Connectors RJ45 Jacks

Part Number Description Quantity

700206667 | MGS400-003 GigaSPEED XL® MGS400 Series Category 6 U/UTP Information Outlet, black 1

Oakville 2019

page 3 of 83 May 29, 2019


GigaSPEED XL® 1071E ETL Verified Category 6 U/UTP Cable, non-plenum, slate jacket, 4 pair count, 1000 ft (305 m) length, WE TOTE® box

Product ClassificationPortfolio SYSTIMAX®

Brand GigaSPEED XL®

Product Type Twisted pair cable

Regional Availability Asia | Australia/New Zealand | EMEA | Latin America | North America

Cross Section Drawing

Construction MaterialsJacket Material PVC

Conductor Material Bare copper

Insulation Material Polyolefin

Separator Material Polyolefin

700211931 | 1071E SLT C6 4/23 U/UTP W1000

page 4 of 83 May 29, 2019


DimensionsCable Length 305 m | 1000 ft

Cable Weight 25.60 lb/kft

Diameter Over Jacket, nominal 5.893 mm | 0.232 in

Jacket Thickness 0.559 mm | 0.022 in

Electrical SpecificationsANSI/TIA Category 6

dc Resistance Unbalance, maximum 5 %

dc Resistance, maximum 7.61 ohms/100 m

Mutual Capacitance 5.6 nF/100 m @ 1 kHz

Nominal Velocity of Propagation (NVP) 69 %

Operating Frequency, maximum 300 MHz

Operating Voltage, maximum 80 V

Transmission Standards ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 | CENELEC EN 50288-6-1 | ISO/IEC 11801 Class E

Dielectric Strength, minimum 1500 Vac | 2500 Vdc

Environmental SpecificationsEnvironmental Space Non-plenum

Flame Test Method CMG | CMR

Installation Temperature 0 °C to +60 °C (+32 °F to +140 °F)

Operating Temperature -20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to +140 °F)

UL Temperature Rating 75 °C | 167 °F

General SpecificationsCable Type U/UTP (unshielded)

Packaging Type WE TOTE® box

Pairs, quantity 4

Cable Component Type Horizontal

Jacket Color Slate

Product Number 1071E

Conductor Gauge, singles 23 AWG

Conductor Type, singles Solid

Conductors, quantity 8

Ordering Note Not available in Europe, the Middle East, or Africa

Separator Type Bisector

Mechanical Specifications

700211931 | 1071E SLT C6 4/23 U/UTP W1000

page 5 of 83 May 29, 2019


Regulatory Compliance/Certifications

Pulling Tension, maximum 11 kg | 25 lb

Agency ClassificationRoHS 2011/65/EU CompliantISO 9001:2015 Designed, manufactured and/or distributed under this quality management system

700211931 | 1071E SLT C6 4/23 U/UTP W1000

page 6 of 83 May 29, 2019


GigaSPEED XL® 2071E ETL Verified Category 6 U/UTP Cable, plenum, slate jacket, 4 pair count, 1000 ft (305 m) length, WE TOTE® box



Product Type Twisted pair cable


Cross Section Drawing

Construction MaterialsJacket Material PVC

Conductor Material Bare copper

Insulation Material FEP | Polyolefin

Separator Material Flame retardant polyolefin

700214372 | 2071E SLT C6 4/23 U/UTP W1000

page 7 of 83 May 29, 2019


DimensionsCable Length 305 m | 1000 ft

Cable Weight 29.00 lb/kft

Diameter Over Jacket, nominal 5.740 mm | 0.226 in

Jacket Thickness 0.559 mm | 0.022 in


dc Resistance Unbalance, maximum 5 %

dc Resistance, maximum 7.61 ohms/100 m

Mutual Capacitance 5.6 nF/100 m @ 1 kHz

Nominal Velocity of Propagation (NVP) 71 %

Operating Frequency, maximum 300 MHz

Operating Voltage, maximum 80 V

Transmission Standards ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 | CENELEC EN 50288-6-1 | ISO/IEC 11801 Class E

Dielectric Strength, minimum 1500 Vac | 2500 Vdc

Environmental SpecificationsEnvironmental Space Plenum

Smoke Test Method CMP

Flame Test Method CMP

Installation Temperature 0 °C to +60 °C (+32 °F to +140 °F)


UL Temperature Rating 75 °C | 167 °F


Packaging Type WE TOTE® box

Pairs, quantity 4

Cable Component Type Horizontal

Jacket Color Slate

Product Number 2071E

Conductor Gauge, singles 23 AWG

Conductor Type, singles Solid

Conductors, quantity 8

Separator Type Bisector

Mechanical Specifications

700214372 | 2071E SLT C6 4/23 U/UTP W1000

page 8 of 83 May 29, 2019



Pulling Tension, maximum 11 kg | 25 lb


700214372 | 2071E SLT C6 4/23 U/UTP W1000

page 9 of 83 May 29, 2019


GigaSPEED XL® MGS400 Series Category 6 U/UTP Information Outlet, black



Product Type Modular jack


DimensionsDepth 30.48 mm | 1.20 in

Height 20.32 mm | 0.80 in

Width 20.32 mm | 0.80 in


Contact Resistance Variation, maximum 20 mOhm

Contact Resistance, maximum 100 mOhm

Current Rating 1.5 A @ 20 °C 1.5 A @ 68 °F

Dielectric Withstand Voltage, RMS, conductive surface 1500 Vac @ 60 Hz

Dielectric Withstand Voltage, RMS, contact-to-contact 1000 Vac @ 60 Hz

Insulation Resistance, minimum 500 MOhm

Environmental SpecificationsFlammability Rating UL 94 V-0

Operating Temperature -10 °C to +60 °C (+14 °F to +140 °F)

Relative Humidity Up to 95%, non-condensing

Safety Standard cUL | UL

Storage Temperature -40 °C to +70 °C (-40 °F to +158 °F)

General SpecificationsCable Type Unshielded

Color Black

700206667 | MGS400-003

page 10 of 83 May 29, 2019



Package Quantity 1

Mechanical SpecificationsConductor Gauge, solid 22 AWG | 24 AWG

Conductor Gauge, stranded 22 AWG | 24 AWG

Conductor Type Solid | Stranded

Contact Plating Material Precious metals

Material Type Copper alloy | High-impact, flame retardant, thermoplastic

Plug Insertion Life, minimum 750 times

Plug Insertion Life, test plug IEC 60603-7 compliant plug

Plug Retention Force, minimum 30 lbf | 133 N

Termination Contact Plating Nickel

Termination Type IDC

Wiring T568A | T568B


700206667 | MGS400-003

page 11 of 83 May 29, 2019


SYSTIMAX 360™ GigaSPEED XL® PATCHMAX® GS3 Category 6 U/UTP Patch Panel, 24 port

l Available for use with the DYMOAvailable for use with the DYMO® ® labeling solutionlabeling solution


Brand GigaSPEED XL® | PATCHMAX® | SYSTIMAX 360™

Product Type RJ45 patch panel


DimensionsDepth, with cable management 266.70 mm | 10.50 in

Diameter Over Dielectric, maximum 1.168 mm | 0.046 in

Diameter Over Dielectric, minimum 0.762 mm | 0.030 in


Width 482.60 mm | 19.00 in











General SpecificationsIntelligence Type iPatch® ready

Total Ports, quantity 24

760102244 | 360-PM-GS3-2U

page 12 of 83 May 29, 2019



Cable Type Unshielded

Color Cool gray | Satin chrome

Modules, quantity 4

Package Quantity 1

Rack Type EIA 19 in

Rack Units 2.0

Mechanical SpecificationsPanel Style Straight

Conductor Gauge, solid 22 AWG | 24 AWG




Material Type High-impact, flame retardant, thermoplastic | Powder-coated steel








760102244 | 360-PM-GS3-2U

page 13 of 83 May 29, 2019


SYSTIMAX 360™ GigaSPEED XL® PATCHMAX® GS3 Category 6 U/UTP Patch Panel, 48 port

l Available for use with the DYMOAvailable for use with the DYMO® ® labeling solutionlabeling solution


Brand GigaSPEED XL® | PATCHMAX® | SYSTIMAX 360™







Width 482.60 mm | 19.00 in














760117366 | 360-PM-GS3-2U-48P

page 14 of 83 May 29, 2019




Modules, quantity 4

Package Quantity 1

Rack Type EIA 19 in

Rack Units 2.0














760117366 | 360-PM-GS3-2U-48P

page 15 of 83 May 29, 2019


SYSTIMAX 360™ GigaSPEED XL® 1100GS3 Evolve Category 6 U/UTP Patch Panel, 24 port









Weight 0.86 kg | 1.90 lb

Width 482.60 mm | 19.00 in













760152561 | 360-IPR-1100-E-GS3-1U-24

page 16 of 83 May 29, 2019





Modules, quantity 4

Package Quantity 1

Rack Type EIA 19 in

Rack Units 1.0














760152561 | 360-IPR-1100-E-GS3-1U-24

page 17 of 83 May 29, 2019


1100 GS3 PANEL - 24 PORT



Regional Availability Asia | Australia/New Zealand | Latin America | North America





Width 482.60 mm | 19.00 in











General SpecificationsTotal Ports, quantity 24


Color Black

Modules, quantity 4

Package Quantity 1

Rack Type EIA 19 in

760206797 | 1100-U-GS3-24

page 18 of 83 May 29, 2019



Rack Units 1.0

Mechanical SpecificationsConductor Gauge, solid 22 AWG | 24 AWG







Plug Retention Force, minimum 133 N | 30 lbf





760206797 | 1100-U-GS3-24

page 19 of 83 May 29, 2019


Adapter Pack, Black, 1000-Type, with 6 TeraSPEED® SM duplex SC adapters, blue


Product ClassificationPortfolio CommScope®

Brand TeraSPEED®

Product Series 1000-style

Product Type Fiber adapter pack


Construction MaterialsFiber Mode Singlemode

General SpecificationsInterface SC

Body Style Duplex

Interface Feature Standard

Adapter Color Blue

Adapter Cutout, quantity 6

Adapters, quantity 6

Application Used in conjunction with panels and enclosures (rack, wall, and floor mount) that accept 1000 style panels | Used in conjunction with SD Panels



760027714 | PNL-BK-012-SFA-SC02-BL

page 20 of 83 May 29, 2019


360G2 Singleimode Distribution Adapter Pack 12 LC Blue iPatch Ready

This product will be discontinued on: June 30, 2019

Replaced By:

760230946760230946 360DPis360DPis--12LC12LC--SMSM

SYSTIMAX 360 Distribution Adapter Pack 12 LC TeraSpeedSYSTIMAX 360 Distribution Adapter Pack 12 LC TeraSpeed® ® BlueBlue






General SpecificationsInterface LC

Body Style Ganged


Adapter Color Blue

Shuttered No

Application Used in conjunction with G2 1U, 2U and 4U MOD panel shelves, surface mount and raised floor enclosures

Intelligence Type iPatch® ready



760109389 | 360DP-12LC-SM

page 21 of 83 May 29, 2019


Included Products 760049809760049809 | | SFASFA--LC12LC12--BLBL--SHUTTEREDSHUTTERED — TeraSPEEDTeraSPEED® ® LC Multiport Shuttered Adapter, Blue, Single PackLC Multiport Shuttered Adapter, Blue, Single Pack

760109389 | 360DP-12LC-SM

page 22 of 83 May 29, 2019


360G2 Singlemode Distribution Adapter Pack 24 LC, Blue

This product will be discontinued on: June 30, 2019

Replaced By:

760216762760216762 360DPis360DPis--24LC24LC--SMSM

SYSTIMAX 360 Distribution Adapter Pack 12 LC TeraSpeedSYSTIMAX 360 Distribution Adapter Pack 12 LC TeraSpeed® ® BlueBlue







Body Style Ganged


Adapter Color Blue

Shuttered Yes

Application Used in conjunction with G2 1U, 2U and 4U MOD panel shelves, surface mount and raised floor enclosures

Intelligence Type iPatch® ready



760115915 | 360DP-24LC-SM

page 23 of 83 May 29, 2019


Adapter Pack, Black, 1000-Type, with 1 TeraSPEED® 12 fiber, SM LC ganged adapter, blue, shuttered



Brand TeraSPEED®






Body Style Ganged


Adapter Color Blue

Shuttered No






760148254 | PNL-BK-012-SFA-LC12-BL

page 24 of 83 May 29, 2019


Adapter Pack, Black, 1000-Type, with 12 TeraSPEED® SM duplex LC adapters, blue, no shutter



Brand TeraSPEED®






Body Style Duplex


Adapter Color Blue

Shuttered No






760148361 | PNL-BK-024-SFA-LC02-BL-NS

page 25 of 83 May 29, 2019


Adapter Pack, Black, 1000-Type, with 6 TeraSPEED® SM duplex LC adapters, blue, no shutter

l Uniprise panels for Ready shelves and wall mount enclosures come in SC and LC configurations. Any Uniprise panels for Ready shelves and wall mount enclosures come in SC and LC configurations. Any

combination of adapter panels can be used in the enclosures, up to the maximum number of openings.combination of adapter panels can be used in the enclosures, up to the maximum number of openings.



Brand TeraSPEED®






Body Style Duplex


Adapter Color Blue

Shuttered No






760149351 | PNL-BK-012-SFA-LC02-BL-NS

page 26 of 83 May 29, 2019


TeraSPEED® Splicing cassette, 24LC , 900µm



Brand TeraSPEED®

Product Type Fiber cassette with pigtails


Construction MaterialsFiber Type G.652.D and G.657.A1 , TeraSPEED® | OS2

Total Fibers, quantity 24



Pigtail Length 1.5 m | 4.9 ft

Width 104.65 mm | 4.12 in

Environmental SpecificationsSafety Standard UL

General SpecificationsInterface, front LC

Adapter Color Blue

Interface Feature, front Standard

Package Quantity 1

Total Ports, quantity, front 12

Optical PerformanceInsertion Loss, typical 0.25 dB

Return Loss, minimum 55.0 dB

Agency Classification

760221705 | PNL-CS-24LCW-PT

page 27 of 83 May 29, 2019


RoHS 2011/65/EU ISO 9001:2015 Designed, manufactured and/or distributed under this quality management system

760221705 | PNL-CS-24LCW-PT

page 28 of 83 May 29, 2019


TeraSPEED® Splicing cassette, 12LC , 900µm



Brand TeraSPEED®

Product Type Fiber cassette with pigtails






Pigtail Length 1.5 m | 4.9 ft

Width 104.65 mm | 4.12 in


General SpecificationsInterface, front LC

Adapter Color Blue

Interface Feature, front Standard

Package Quantity 1

Total Ports, quantity, front 6

Optical PerformanceInsertion Loss, typical 0.25 dB

Return Loss, minimum 55.0 dB

Agency Classification

760221747 | PNL-CS-12LCW-PT

page 29 of 83 May 29, 2019


RoHS 2011/65/EU ISO 9001:2015 Designed, manufactured and/or distributed under this quality management system

760221747 | PNL-CS-12LCW-PT

page 30 of 83 May 29, 2019


TeraSPEED® Single Jacket/Single Armor, Gel-Free, Outdoor Stranded Loose Tube Cable

l Corrugated steel tape armor is strong yet flexible, providing additional crush and rodent protectionCorrugated steel tape armor is strong yet flexible, providing additional crush and rodent protection


Product Type Fiber OSP cable


Standards And QualificationsCable Qualification Standards ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 | EN 187105 | Telcordia GR-20

Representative Image

General SpecificationsCable Type Stranded loose tube

Construction Type Armored

Subunit Type Gel-free

Construction MaterialsFiber Type Solution G.652.D and G.657.A1 , TeraSPEED® | OS2

Jacket Material PE

Total Fiber Count 6

760053272 | D-006-LA-8W-F06NS

page 31 of 83 May 29, 2019


Armor Type Corrugated steel

Fiber Type G.652.D and G.657.A1, TeraSPEED® | OS2

Fiber Type, quantity 6

Fibers per Subunit, quantity 6

Jacket Color Black

Jacket UV Resistance UV stabilized

DimensionsBuffer Tube/Subunit Diameter 2.50 mm | 0.10 in

Cable Weight 110.0 kg/km | 74.0 lb/kft

Diameter Over Jacket 11.50 mm | 0.45 in

Filler, quantity 4

Subunit, quantity 1

Physical SpecificationsMinimum Bend Radius, loaded 17.3 cm | 6.8 in

Minimum Bend Radius, unloaded 11.5 cm | 4.5 in

Tensile Load, long term, maximum 800 N | 180 lbf

Tensile Load, short term, maximum 2700 N | 607 lbf

Vertical Rise, maximum 740.0 m | 2429.0 ft

Environmental SpecificationsEnvironmental Space Aerial, lashed | Buried

Installation Temperature -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to +158 °F)



Mechanical Test SpecificationsCompression 44 N•m | 250 lb/in

Compression Test Method FOTP-41 | IEC 60794-1 E3

Flex 35 cycles

Flex Test Method FOTP-104 | IEC 60794-1 E6

Impact 4.41 N-m | 3.25 ft lb

Impact Test Method FOTP-25 | IEC 60794-1 E4

Strain See long and short term tensile loads

Strain Test Method FOTP-33 | IEC 60794-1 E1

Twist 10 cycles

Twist Test Method FOTP-85 | IEC 60794-1 E7

760053272 | D-006-LA-8W-F06NS

page 32 of 83 May 29, 2019



Included Products

* Footnotes

Water Penentration 24 h

Water Penentration Test Method FOTP-82 | IEC 60794-1 F5

Environmental Test SpecificationsCable Freeze -2 °C | 28 °F

Cable Freeze Test Method FOTP-98 | IEC 60794-1 F15

Heat Age -40 °C to +85 °C (-40 °F to +185 °F)

Heat Age Test Method IEC 60794-1 F9

Low High Bend -30 °C to +60 °C (-22 °F to +140 °F)

Low High Bend Test Method FOTP-37 | IEC 60794-1 E11

Temperature Cycle -40 °C to +70 °C (-40 °F to +158 °F)

Temperature Cycle Test Method FOTP-3 | IEC 60794-1 F1


CSCS--8W8W--LTLT (Product Component (Product Component——not orderable)not orderable) — TeraSPEEDTeraSPEED® ® OS2 Singlemode FiberOS2 Singlemode Fiber

Operating Temperature Specification applicable to non-terminated bulk fiber cable

760053272 | D-006-LA-8W-F06NS

page 33 of 83 May 29, 2019













Jacket Material PE

Total Fiber Count 24

760053298 | D-024-LA-8W-F12NS

page 34 of 83 May 29, 2019






Jacket Color Black





Filler, quantity 3

Subunit, quantity 2












Flex 35 cycles






Twist 10 cycles


760053298 | D-024-LA-8W-F12NS

page 35 of 83 May 29, 2019



Included Products

* Footnotes














760053298 | D-024-LA-8W-F12NS

page 36 of 83 May 29, 2019













Jacket Material PE


760053314 | D-048-LA-8W-F12NS

page 37 of 83 May 29, 2019






Jacket Color Black





Filler, quantity 1

Subunit, quantity 4












Flex 35 cycles






Twist 10 cycles


760053314 | D-048-LA-8W-F12NS

page 38 of 83 May 29, 2019



* Footnotes













760053314 | D-048-LA-8W-F12NS

page 39 of 83 May 29, 2019













Jacket Material PE


760053348 | D-096-LA-8W-F12NS

page 40 of 83 May 29, 2019






Jacket Color Black





Subunit, quantity 8










Mechanical Test SpecificationsCompression 44 N/mm | 250 lb/in


Flex 35 cycles






Twist 10 cycles



760053348 | D-096-LA-8W-F12NS

page 41 of 83 May 29, 2019



* Footnotes












760053348 | D-096-LA-8W-F12NS

page 42 of 83 May 29, 2019













Jacket Material PE


760053355 | D-144-LA-8W-F12NS

page 43 of 83 May 29, 2019






Jacket Color Black





Subunit, quantity 12












Flex 35 cycles






Twist 10 cycles



760053355 | D-144-LA-8W-F12NS

page 44 of 83 May 29, 2019



Included Products

* Footnotes













760053355 | D-144-LA-8W-F12NS

page 45 of 83 May 29, 2019


TeraSPEED® Single Jacket All-Dielectric, Gel-Free, Outdoor Stranded Loose Tube Cable







Construction Type Non-armored



Jacket Material PE

Total Fiber Count 6

760053835 | D-006-LN-8W-F06NS

page 46 of 83 May 29, 2019





Jacket Color Black





Filler, quantity 4

Subunit, quantity 1










Mechanical Test SpecificationsCompression 22 N/mm | 125 oz/in


Flex 35 cycles






Twist 10 cycles



760053835 | D-006-LN-8W-F06NS

page 47 of 83 May 29, 2019



* Footnotes












760053835 | D-006-LN-8W-F06NS

page 48 of 83 May 29, 2019












Jacket Material PE


760053850 | D-024-LN-8W-F12NS

page 49 of 83 May 29, 2019





Jacket Color Black





Filler, quantity 3

Subunit, quantity 2












Flex 35 cycles






Twist 10 cycles



760053850 | D-024-LN-8W-F12NS

page 50 of 83 May 29, 2019



* Footnotes












760053850 | D-024-LN-8W-F12NS

page 51 of 83 May 29, 2019












Jacket Material PE


760053876 | D-048-LN-8W-F12NS

page 52 of 83 May 29, 2019





Jacket Color Black





Filler, quantity 1

Subunit, quantity 4












Flex 35 cycles






Twist 10 cycles



760053876 | D-048-LN-8W-F12NS

page 53 of 83 May 29, 2019



Included Products

* Footnotes













760053876 | D-048-LN-8W-F12NS

page 54 of 83 May 29, 2019












Jacket Material PE


760053900 | D-096-LN-8W-F12NS

page 55 of 83 May 29, 2019





Jacket Color Black





Subunit, quantity 8












Flex 35 cycles






Twist 10 cycles




760053900 | D-096-LN-8W-F12NS

page 56 of 83 May 29, 2019



Included Products

* Footnotes












760053900 | D-096-LN-8W-F12NS

page 57 of 83 May 29, 2019












Jacket Material PE


760053918 | D-144-LN-8W-F12NS

page 58 of 83 May 29, 2019





Jacket Color Black





Subunit, quantity 12












Flex 35 cycles






Twist 10 cycles




760053918 | D-144-LN-8W-F12NS

page 59 of 83 May 29, 2019



* Footnotes











760053918 | D-144-LN-8W-F12NS

page 60 of 83 May 29, 2019


High Density 1U modular cassette sliding Panel, accepts (4) InstaPATCH® 360 modules or MPO panels, providing up to 48 duplex LC ports, or up to 32 MPO ports



Product Series HD

Product Type Fiber patch panel


Construction MaterialsMaterial Type Steel



Width 482.60 mm | 19.00 in

Material Thickness 19.0 ga | 0.9 mm




Rack Units 1.0

Shelf Movement Sliding

Application Accepts four G2 modular cassettes

Color Black | Silver

Package Quantity 1

Agency ClassificationRoHS 2011/65/EU ISO 9001:2015 Designed, manufactured and/or distributed under this quality management system

760209940 | HD-1U

page 61 of 83 May 29, 2019


760209940 | HD-1U

page 62 of 83 May 29, 2019


High Density 2U modular cassette sliding Panel, accepts (8) InstaPATCH® 360 modules or MPO panels, providing up to 96 duplex LC ports or up to 64 MPO ports



Product Series HD






Width 482.60 mm | 19.00 in





Rack Units 2.0


Application Accepts eight G2 modular cassettes


Package Quantity 1


760209957 | HD-2U

page 63 of 83 May 29, 2019


760209957 | HD-2U

page 64 of 83 May 29, 2019


High Density 4U modular cassette sliding Panel, accepts (16) InstaPATCH® 360 modules or MPO panels, providing up to 192 duplex LC ports or up to 128 MPO ports



Product Series HD





Height 177.80 mm | 7.00 in

Width 482.60 mm | 19.00 in


Weight 11.25 kg | 24.80 lb



Rack Units 4.0


Application Accepts sixteen 360 modules, 360G2 cartridges or MPO panels


Package Quantity 1


760209965 | HD-4U

page 65 of 83 May 29, 2019


760209965 | HD-4U

page 66 of 83 May 29, 2019


High Density 1U Sliding fiber Panel, accepts (4) InstaPATCH® 360 modules or MPO panels, providing up to 48 duplex LC ports, or up to 32 MPO port, accepts splice wallets, RoloSpice trays and stackable splice trays


Product Series HD

Product Type Fiber splice panel





Width 450.85 mm | 17.75 in



General SpecificationsRack Units 1.0



Color, front Silver

Color, rear Black

760231506 | HD-1U-SP

page 67 of 83 May 29, 2019


High Density 2U Sliding Fiber Splice Panel, to accommodate a maximum of 96 single fusion splices when using the Splice Wallet® or 64 single fusion splices when using the RoloSplice® splice tray organizers


Product Series HD






Width 450.85 mm | 17.75 in






Color, front Silver

Color, rear Black

760231514 | HD-2U-SP

page 68 of 83 May 29, 2019


High Density 4U Sliding Fiber Splice Panel, to accommodate a maximum of 192 single fusion splices when using the Splice Wallet® or 128 single fusion splices when using the RoloSplice® splice tray organizers


Product Series HD





Height 177.80 mm | 7.00 in

Width 450.85 mm | 17.75 in






Color, front Silver

Color, rear Black

760231522 | HD-4U-SP

page 69 of 83 May 29, 2019


TeraSPEED® LC to LC, Fiber Patch Cord, 1.6 mm Duplex, Riser



Brand TeraSPEED®

Product Type Fiber patch cord, duplex




DimensionsCord Length, maximum 325 ft | 99 m

Cord Length, minimum 2 ft | 1 m


Ordering Note For lengths greater than 999 ft (304 m), orders must be in meters | Minimum length may vary based on cable configuration

Environmental SpecificationsEnvironmental Space Riser


General SpecificationsConstruction Type Duplex patch cord

Interface, connector A LC/UPC

Interface, connector B LC/UPC

Color, connector A Blue

Color, connector B Blue

Mechanical SpecificationsCable Retention Strength, maximum 4.40 lb @ 90 °

11.24 lb @ 0 °


FEWLCLC42

page 70 of 83 May 29, 2019


Included Products

l CSCS--8W8W--TBTB (Product Component (Product Component——not orderable)not orderable) — TeraSPEEDTeraSPEED® ® Singlemode FiberSinglemode Fiber

RR--002002--ZCZC--8W8W--F16F16 (Product Component (Product Component——not orderable)not orderable) — TeraSPEEDTeraSPEED® ® 1.6mm Riser Zipcord Cable1.6mm Riser Zipcord Cable

460125206460125206 (Product Component (Product Component——not orderable)not orderable) — TeraSPEEDTeraSPEED® ® PrePre--Radiused LC Connector duplex for 1.6 mm Fiber, singleRadiused LC Connector duplex for 1.6 mm Fiber, single--modemode

FEWLCLC42

page 71 of 83 May 29, 2019


TeraSPEED® LC to Unconnectorized, Fiber Pigtail, 0.9 mm Tight Buffer, 6-fiber Kit, Blue - White (1-6)



Brand TeraSPEED®

Product Type Fiber pigtail, multi-fiber









General SpecificationsConstruction Type Pigtail kit


Interface, connector B Unterminated



1.00 lb @ 90 °


FAWLCUC0A

page 72 of 83 May 29, 2019


FAWLCUC0A

page 73 of 83 May 29, 2019


TeraSPEED® LC to Unconnectorized, Fiber Pigtail, 0.9 mm Tight Buffer, 6-fiber Kit, Red - Aqua (7-12)



Brand TeraSPEED®

Product Type Fiber pigtail, multi-fiber









General SpecificationsConstruction Type Pigtail kit


Interface, connector B Unterminated



1.00 lb @ 90 °


FAWLCUC0B

page 74 of 83 May 29, 2019


Included Products

460125289460125289 (Product Component (Product Component——not orderable)not orderable) — Behind The Wall PreBehind The Wall Pre--Radiused LC Connector for 0.9 mm Fiber, singleRadiused LC Connector for 0.9 mm Fiber, single--modemode

l CSCS--8W8W--TBTB (Product Component (Product Component——not orderable)not orderable) — TeraSPEEDTeraSPEED® ® Singlemode FiberSinglemode Fiber

XX--TBTB--8W8W (Product Component (Product Component——not orderable)not orderable) — TeraSPEEDTeraSPEED® ® 900900µµm Tight Buffered Fiberm Tight Buffered Fiber

FAWLCUC0B

page 75 of 83 May 29, 2019


RoloSplice Kit with 4 fusion splice trays



Product Type Fiber splice wallet


General SpecificationsApplication For G2 1U shelves and surface mount enclosures

Splice Tray Capacity, quantity 4

Splice Trays Included

Splicing Capacity, maximum 64


760031856 | RS-4AF-16SF

page 76 of 83 May 29, 2019


RoloSplice Kit with 2 fusion splice trays



Product Type Fiber splice wallet


General SpecificationsApplication For G2 1U shelves and surface mount enclosures

Splice Tray Capacity, quantity 2

Splice Trays Included

Splicing Capacity, maximum 32


760039867 | RS-2AF-16SF

page 77 of 83 May 29, 2019


GigaSPEED XL® GS8E Stranded Cordage Modular Patch Cord, Black Jacket



Product Type Twisted pair patch cord


DimensionsCord Length, maximum 30 m | 100 ft

Cord Length, minimum 1 m | 1 ft


dc Resistance, maximum 0.30 ohm

Safety Voltage Rating 300 V

Environmental SpecificationsEnvironmental Space Non-plenum

Flammability Rating UL 94 V-0


Safety Standard Anatel | cETL | ETL


Interface, connector A RJ45 plug

Interface, connector B RJ45 plug

Jacket Color Black

Interface Feature, connector A Standard

Interface Feature, connector B Standard

Package Quantity 1

Pairs, quantity 4

Mechanical SpecificationsConductor Type Stranded


CPC3312-01 | GS8E-BK

page 78 of 83 May 29, 2019



Included Products

Material Type Copper alloy | Polycarbonate


Plug Retention Force, minimum 133 N | 30 lbf

Wiring T568B

Wiring Diagram


860014141860014141 | | 1074E BLK C6 4/24 SR U/UTP RVAR1074E BLK C6 4/24 SR U/UTP RVAR (Product Component (Product Component——not orderable)not orderable) — GigaSPEED XLGigaSPEED XL® ® 1074E Category 6 U/UTP 1074E Category 6 U/UTP Cable, nonCable, non--plenum, black jacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reelplenum, black jacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reel

CX884040444/BUCX884040444/BU | | CC6CMCC6CM--CEX BLK C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULKCEX BLK C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULK — GCC6CMGCC6CM--CEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, nonCEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, non--plenum, black plenum, black jacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reeljacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reel

CX884039244/BUCX884039244/BU | | CC6CMCC6CM--CEX BLU C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULKCEX BLU C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULK — GCC6CMGCC6CM--CEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, nonCEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, non--plenum, blue plenum, blue jacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reeljacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reel

CX884027444/BUCX884027444/BU | | CC6CMCC6CM--CEX GRN C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULKCEX GRN C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULK — GCC6CMGCC6CM--CEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, nonCEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, non--plenum, green plenum, green


page 79 of 83 May 29, 2019


jacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reeljacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reel

CX884041744/BUCX884041744/BU | | CC6CMCC6CM--CEX GRY C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULKCEX GRY C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULK — GCC6CMGCC6CM--CEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, nonCEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, non--plenum, gray plenum, gray jacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reeljacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reel

CX884022444/BUCX884022444/BU | | CC6CMCC6CM--CEX LBL C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULKCEX LBL C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULK — GCC6CMGCC6CM--CEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, nonCEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, non--plenum, light plenum, light blue jacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reelblue jacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reel

CX884039444/BUCX884039444/BU | | CC6CMCC6CM--CEX ORG C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULKCEX ORG C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULK — GCC6CMGCC6CM--CEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, nonCEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, non--plenum, orange plenum, orange jacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reeljacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reel

CX884038744/BUCX884038744/BU | | CC6CMCC6CM--CEX RED C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULKCEX RED C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULK — GCC6CMGCC6CM--CEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, nonCEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, non--plenum, red plenum, red jacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reeljacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reel

CX884036544/BUCX884036544/BU | | CC6CMCC6CM--CEX SGR C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULKCEX SGR C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULK — GCC6CMGCC6CM--CEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, nonCEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, non--plenum, spring plenum, spring green jacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reelgreen jacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reel

CX884034444/BUCX884034444/BU | | CC6CMCC6CM--CEX WHT C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULKCEX WHT C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULK — GCC6CMGCC6CM--CEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, nonCEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, non--plenum, white plenum, white jacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reeljacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reel

CX884042544/BUCX884042544/BU | | CC6CMCC6CM--CEX YEL C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULKCEX YEL C6 4/24 U/UTP RL 5KFT BULK — GCC6CMGCC6CM--CEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, nonCEX Category 6 U/UTP Cable, non--plenum, yellow plenum, yellow jacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reeljacket, 4 pair count, variable length, reel


page 80 of 83 May 29, 2019


Ready™ Wall Mount Building Enclosure, 4P, black


Product ClassificationPortfolio Uniprise®

Brand Ready™

Product Type Fiber wall box

Regional Availability North America



Height 279.40 mm | 11.00 in

Width 330.20 mm | 13.00 in


General SpecificationsApplication Accepts four RFE-type adapter panels or ReadyPATCH® modules | Accepts Splice Wallet with splice trays

Color Black


760147504 | WBE-EMT-BK-4P-PNL

page 81 of 83 May 29, 2019





Brand Ready™





Height 279.40 mm | 11.00 in

Width 330.20 mm | 13.00 in


General SpecificationsApplication Accepts eight RFE-type adapter panels or ReadyPATCH® modules | Accepts Splice Wallet with splice trays

Color Black



page 82 of 83 May 29, 2019





Brand Ready™





Height 154.94 mm | 6.10 in

Width 142.24 mm | 5.60 in

Environmental SpecificationsEnvironmental Space Indoor

Safety Standard UL

General SpecificationsApplication Accepts one PNL-type adapter if splicing | Accepts one ReadyPATCH® module | Accepts one splice

tray | Accepts two PNL-type adapters if using pre-terminated cable

Color Black



page 83 of 83 May 29, 2019



Revision 06/06/2019 Page 48 of 48 of 596

Appendix A

CommScope Warranty and Installation Requirements

Registration Requirements

Authorized BusinessPartner personnel listed in the registration of a CommScope installation must have successfully completed the relevant CommScope Design & Engineering and Installation & Maintenance training courses for the CommScope Solution being registered (see relevant sections below).

The CommScope registration procedure is detailed in the Design and Installation training courses and includes the following:

• Explanation of the 20 Year Extended Product Warrantyand Applications Assurance Program.

• Review of the registration procedure and relevantdocuments.

• Business issues and implications concerning the 25 YearExtended Product Warranty and Applications AssuranceProgram.

• Liabilities of parties concerning the 25 Year ExtendedProduct Warranty and Applications Assurance Program.

• Escalation procedures in rectifying any claims madeconcerning the 25 Year Extended Product Warranty andApplications Assurance Program.

of 596

Designer Responsibilities

• Initial cabling design must be performed and/or validatedby a designer holding a valid Design and Engineeringtraining certificate and ID badge (where applicable) for theCommScope Solution being registered, and havingcompleted any required updates.

• The designer is responsible for pre-installation sitesurveys, verification of component selection, cablepathway selection and installation quality.

• The designer is responsible for site audits, including pre-installation visit, ongoing installation audit(s) and finalaudit before applying for site registration.

• The designer (or a designated administrator) mustcomplete and submit the online registration request.

• The designer must arrange for site visits by CommScopepersonnel as required.

Installer Requirements

CommScope: • cable handling• placing• routing

Must be supervised by personnel having a validCommScope installation training certificate and ID badge(including required updates) for the CommScope Solution.

Certified Installers performing copper and fiber optic cableterminations must have a valid installation trainingcertificate and ID badge, and must have attended anyrequired updates.

of 596

Use of Sub-Trades

CommScope Partners may make use of Sub-Contractors or sub-trades where the work which needs to be completed is outside their professional training (ex. Installing Outside Plant cable to Hydro Poles, or completing cable installs across highways). In these types of situations, a properly trained provider may be used to complete the work. The work is the responsibility of the sub-trade to meet the Health and Safety requirements as well as proper cable installation standards. The CommScope partner will be responsible for proper testing.

Outside Plant Fibre cable testing

As per TIA/ANSI standards and a requirement of the CommScope warranty, all outside plant must be tester bi- directionally with an OTDR, and test results submitted as part of the warranty submission.

of 596

APPENDIX B LABELING CONVENTIONS

Above photo is an example of the fiber panel and indication of how the box is represented. Each slot will have a number 1-12 on each panel corresponding to the tray inside the box. Below photo is a working example of how they will be labelled outside of the box and inside of the box.

At every box, cable and every Handwell must have a sticker, tag and purple spiral strip around the cable (Town provided)

of 596

APPENDIX B LABELING CONVENTIONS

Naming convention for fiber pedestals and patch cables: Buffer # _ Pedestal_ Site Name

of 596

Section 5 Schedules

SECTION 5: SCHEDULES

Schedules are posted separately and will need to be completed online only through the Bidding System by the bidder as part of your bid submission. Please note that the Schedules are subject to change/addition/deletion by addendum(s) issued by the town. Following the issuance of each addendum, such changes will be reflected in the electronic Schedules to be completed online only. The revised Schedules (in pdf format) will be uploaded to the Bidding System as a separate document. It is the bidder’s responsibility to review all addendums and ensure that the bid is submitted based on the most current requirements. For greater certainty, the bidder shall submit their bid by completing all Schedules and fields in the online Bidding System. Any bid submitted on the basis of the preview Schedules may, in the town’s sole discretion, be disqualified on the basis of being incomplete.

of 596

Section 6 Appendices

APPENDIX A - Supplementary Conditions to Contract CCDC 2-2008 Revised: April 1, 2019

SC 1. GENERAL

These Supplementary Conditions presuppose the use of the Standard Construction Document CCDC 2-2008 Stipulated Price Contract, English version. These “Supplementary Conditions” void, supersede or amend the “Agreement”, “Definitions” and “General Conditions” as hereinafter provided, as the case may be. Where a Definition, a General Condition or paragraph of the Agreement or a General Condition of the Stipulated Price Contract is deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the numbering of the remaining Agreement, Definitions, General Conditions or paragraphs shall remain unchanged, and the numbering of the deleted item will be retained, unused, unless noted otherwise. SC 2. ARTICLE A-1 THE WORK 1. After the words “in the year __” in the last line of the Paragraph 1.3 - add the words:

“, and attain Total Performance of the Work within thirty (30) calendar days of attaining Substantial Performance of the Work or as otherwise stated in the tender document or as agreed in writing between the Owner, Consultant and Contractor”.

SC 3. ARTICLE A-3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1. Add documents to the existing list of Contract Documents in paragraph 3.1 as follows:

Addenda, as issued the Special Provisions Supplementary Conditions to Contract CCDC 2-2008 Contractor’s Bid Submission Including Schedule of Prices the Specifications Drawings

SC 4. ARTICLE A-5 PAYMENT 1. Delete paragraphs 5.2 and 5.3 in their entirety and replace with the following paragraphs

5.2, 5.3 and 5.4:

5.2 As such payments become due, the Contractor shall, in accordance with the terms of its agreements with any Subcontractors, Suppliers and workers, pay all of its Subcontractors, Suppliers and workers in full on account of work properly performed or Products properly supplied, as applicable, less any holdback monies retained in compliance with the Construction Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. C.30 (Ontario) as amended.

5.3 In the event of loss or damage occurring where payment becomes due under the

property and boiler insurance policies, payments shall be made to the Contractor in accordance with the provisions of GC 11.1 - INSURANCE.

5.4 Interest

.1 Should either party fail to make payments as they become due under the terms of the Contract or in an award by arbitration or court, interest on such unpaid amounts shall also become due and payable until payment, at the rate as prescribed in the Construction Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. C.30 (Ontario) as amended.

of 596


.2 Interest shall apply at the rate and in the manner prescribed by paragraph 5.4.1 of this Article on the settlement amount of any claim in dispute that is resolved either pursuant to Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION or otherwise, from the date the amount would have been due and payable under the Contract, had it not been in dispute, until the date it is paid.

SC 5. ARTICLE A-9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 1. Add new Article A-9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST as follows:

9.1 The Contractor, all of the Subcontractors, and any of their respective advisors, partners, directors, officers, employees, and agents shall not engage in any activity or provide any services where such activity or the provision of such services creates a conflict of interest (actually or potentially, in the sole opinion of the Owner) with the provision of the Work pursuant to the Contract. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that a conflict of interest includes the use of Confidential Information where the Owner has not specifically authorized such use.

9.2 The Contractor shall disclose to the Owner, in writing, without delay any actual or

potential situation that may be reasonably interpreted as either a conflict of interest or a potential conflict of interest, including the retention of any Subcontractor or Supplier that is directly or indirectly affiliated with or related to the Contractor.

9.3 The Contractor covenants and agrees that it will not hire or retain the services of

any employee or previous employee of the Town of Oakville where to do so constitutes a breach by such employee or previous employee of the Owner’s conflict of interest policy, as it may be amended from time to time.

9.4 It is of the essence of the Contract that the Owner shall not have direct or indirect

liability to any Subcontractor or Supplier, and that the Owner relies on the maintenance of an arm's-length relationship between the Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers. Consistent with this fundamental term of the Contract, the Contractor will not enter into any agreement or understanding with any Subcontractor or Supplier, whether as part of any contract or any written or oral collateral agreement, pursuant to which the parties thereto agree to cooperate in the presentation of a claim for payment against the Owner, directly or through the Contractor, where such claim is, in whole or in part, in respect of a disputed claim by the Subcontractor or Supplier against the Contractor, where the payment to the Subcontractor or Supplier by the Contractor is agreed to be conditional or contingent on the ability to recover those amounts or a portion thereof from the Owner, failing which the Contractor shall be saved harmless from all or a portion of those claims. The Contractor acknowledges that any such agreement would undermine the required arm's-length relationship and constitute a conflict of interest.

9.5 Notwithstanding paragraph 7.1.2 of GC 7.1 - OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK, TERMINATE THE CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO CONTINUE WITH THE WORK, SUSPEND THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT as amended, a breach of this Article by the Contractor, any of the Subcontractors, or any of their respective advisors, partners, directors, officers, employees, agents, and volunteers shall entitle the Owner to terminate the Contract, in addition to any other rights and remedies that the Owner has in the Contract, in law, or in equity.

of 596


SC 6. ARTICLE A-10 CONFIDENTIALITY

1. Add new Article A-10 CONFIDENTIALITY as follows:

10.1 The Contractor agrees to ensure that it shall, both during or following the term of the Contract, maintain the confidentiality and security of all Confidential Information and Personal Information, and that it shall not directly or indirectly disclose, destroy, exploit, or use any Confidential Information or Personal Information, except where required by law, without first obtaining the written consent of the Owner. The Contractor may disclose any portion of the Contract Documents or any other information provided to the Contractor by the Owner to any Subcontractor or Supplier if the Contractor discloses only such information as is necessary to fulfill the purposes of the Contract and the Contractor has included a commensurate confidentiality provision in its contract with the Subcontractor or Supplier. The Contractor acknowledges that it will comply with all requirements of the Personal Information Protection and Electronic Documents Act. The Contractor acknowledges that the Owner is bound by the provisions of the Municipal Freedom of Information and Protection of Privacy Act (“MFIPPA”). The Contractor further acknowledges that the Owner may be required to disclose any or all of the Confidential Information and Personal Information in the event that it is compelled to do so by law, through a request under MFIPPA, or by the rules of any applicable regulatory authority.

SC 7. ARTICLE A-11 SEVERABILITY

1. Add new Article A-11 SEVERABILITY as follows:

11.1 If any provision of this Contract is found to be invalid or unenforceable in any circumstances, the remainder of this Contract, and the application of such provision in any other circumstances, shall not be affected.

SC 8. ARTICLE A-12 TIME IS OF ESSENCE

1. Add new Article A-12 TIME IS OF ESSENCE as follows:

12.1 Time shall be of the essence of the Contract and under all Contract Documents. SC 9. DEFINITIONS

1. Delete Definitions 6, 8 16 and 25 and replace with new definitions as follows:

6. Contract Documents – the Contract Documents consist of those documents listed in Article A-3 of the Agreement - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and amendments agreed upon in writing between the parties.

8. Contract Time – The Contract Time is the time stipulated in paragraph 1.3 of Article A-

1 of the Agreement - THE WORK from commencement of the Work to the date of Substantial Performance of the Work.

16. Provide – Provide means to supply and install or supply, install or connect as

applicable, complete and in place, including accessories, finishes, tests, services required to render each item so specified complete and ready for use. Provide has this meaning whether or not the first letter is capitalized.

25. Work – The Work means the total construction, Product, installation, Commissioning,

checkout, start-up testing and related services required by the Contract Documents.

of 596


2. Add new definitions as follows:

27. Applicable Laws – Applicable Law and Applicable Laws means all public laws, statutes, regulations, transactions, codes, acts, orders, by-laws, rules, judgments, decrees, treaties, governmental consents, notices, protocols, binding policies and guidelines, and requirements of all Governmental Authorities, which now or hereafter, may be applicable to and enforceable against the Work or any part thereof, including those relating to employment, zoning, building, life/safety, environment and health, and includes, where appropriate, any interpretation of a rule, statute, regulation, order, decree, treaty or other requirement having the force of law by any person having jurisdiction over it, or charged with its administration or interpretation.

28. As-Built Drawings - As-Built Drawings means the Drawings and Specifications

revised by the Contractor during the Work, showing any and all changes or variations to the Work from the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications.

29. Authorities Having Jurisdiction - The phrase Authorities Having Jurisdiction or the

term Authorities means those Authorities Having Jurisdiction under Applicable Laws over the Work or parts thereof.

30. Commissioning - Commissioning refers to the procedure which includes checking, balancing, testing, adjusting and measuring Work performed by the Contractor to demonstrate and verify to the Owner and Consultant, the satisfactory installation, operation and performance of all components of the Work and that the Project is ready for use.

31. Confidential Information - Confidential Information means all the information or

material of the Owner that is of a proprietary or confidential nature, whether it is identified as proprietary or confidential or not, including but not limited to information and material of every kind and description such as Drawings which is communicated to or comes into the possession or control of the Contractor at any time, but Confidential Information shall not include information that:

(1) is or becomes generally available to the public without fault or breach on the part of the Contractor, including without limitation breach of any duty of confidentiality owed by the Contractor to the Owner or to any third party, but only after that information becomes generally available to the public;

(2) the Contractor can demonstrate to have been rightfully obtained by the Contractor from a third party who had the right to transfer or disclose it to the Contractor free of any obligation of confidence;

(3) the Contractor can demonstrate to have been rightfully known to or in the possession of the Contractor at the time of disclosure, free of any obligation of confidence; or

(4) is independently developed by the Contractor without use of any Confidential Information.

32. Force Majeure - Force Majeure means a delay in the performance of the services

occurring other than as a result of the deliberate act or negligence of either party respectively, or which:

(1) could not have been reasonably foreseen, and

(2) was caused by an event beyond the reasonable control of each party respectively, and

(3) for the sake of greater certainty, shall include any one or more of the following:

of 596


(i) acts of God, the Queen or Her enemies;

(ii) civil war, insurrections or riots;

(iii) fires, floods, explosions, earthquakes, or serious accidents;

(iv) unusually severe weather, epidemics, or quarantine restrictions;

(v) governmental priorities or allocation regulations or orders affecting materials, labour, equipment and facilities;

(vi) fuel shortages or freight embargoes;

(vii) strikes or labour troubles causing cessation, slowdown, interruption of work or other similar events relating to a person other than the Contractor (or any Subcontractor) or to the Owner.

Financial difficulties experienced by the Contractor will not be considered an occurrence of a Force Majeure under the Contract.

33. Make Good – Make Good or Making Good means to restore new or existing work that

has been rejected by the Consultant or the Owner, damaged, cut, or patched during the Work. In addition, Make Good or Making Good requires the use of materials identical to the original materials, with visible surfaces matching the appearance of the original surfaces in all details, and with no apparent junctions between restored and original surfaces. Where original materials are not available, the Contractor shall propose substitute materials for review by the Consultant prior to ordering such materials or commencing Making Good. Making Good may require replacement of affected work in whole or in part.

34. Overhead - Overhead means those costs that cannot be attributed to a single task of Work and are exclusive of Construction Costs, Value Added Taxes, and profit. Overhead Costs include both general and administrative costs of the Contractor or Subcontractor together with any and all Project specific and office costs of the Contractor or Subcontractor. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, Overhead Costs include costs associated with general conditions, administration, head office, field office, management, supervision, coordination, scheduling, purchasing, security, health and safety, general labour, accommodation, subsistence, travel, storage, inventory, loading and unloading, computers and electronics, software, printing, general tools and equipment, standby costs and charges, vehicles, engineering, drafting, Shop Drawings, submittals, surveying, temporary facilities, traffic control, fire safety, sanitation, site clean-up, utilities and services, controls, insurance, bonding, heating, winterization, permits, inspection, regulatory fees, mobilization, demobilization, and other costs of a similar reasonable nature.

35. Personal Information - Personal Information has the same definition as in

subsection 2(1) of MFIPPA and includes an individual’s name, address, telephone number, and date of birth, whether recorded in printed form, on film, by electronic means, or otherwise and disclosed to the Contractor.

36. Request for Information (RFI) - Request for Information (“RFI”) means a standard

document typically issued by the Contractor to the Consultant, requesting a clarification of the scope of Work provided in the Contract Documents. The response to the RFI will result in a formal Supplemental Instruction where there is no modification of the original scope of the Work, or a Contemplated Change Order from which the Contractor may provide pricing for the revision to the original scope of the Work.

of 596


37. Substantial Performance Date - Substantial Performance Date means the date by which the Contractor shall attain Substantial Performance of the Work as specified in Article A-1 – THE WORK.

38. Statutory Declaration - Statutory Declaration means the form of the Statutory Declaration to be delivered by the Contractor upon applications for progress payment, release of holdback and final payment, being CCDC 9A – 2001 Statutory Declaration (latest edition available).

39. Submittals – Submittals are documents or items required by the Contract Documents to be provided by the Contractor such as: Shop Drawings, samples, models, mock-ups to indicate details or characteristics, before the portion of the Work that they represent can be incorporated into the Work; and, As-Built Drawings and manuals to provide instructions to the operation and maintenance of the Work.

40. Total Performance of the Work – Total Performance of the Work means when the entire Work, except for those items arising from GC 12.3 – WARRANTY, has been performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and is so certified by the Consultant.

SC 10. GC 1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1. Add new sentence to the end of paragraph 1.1.6:

“The Specifications are divided into divisions and sections for convenience but shall be read as a whole and neither such division nor anything else contained in the Contract Documents will be construed to place responsibility on the Consultant to settle disputes among the Subcontractors and Suppliers or as between them and the Contractor with respect to such divisions.”

2. Delete subparagraph 1.1.7 in its entirety and replace with the following:

1.1.7 If there is a conflict within the Contract Documents, the order of priority of documents, from highest to lowest, shall be: - Change Orders and/or Change Directives - The executed Agreement Between Owner and Contractor CCDC 2-2008 - Contractor’s Bid Submission Including Schedule of Prices - Addenda, as issued - Special Provisions - Supplementary Conditions to Contract CCDC 2-2008 - Definitions in CCDC 2-2008 Stipulated Price Contract - the General Conditions in CCDC-2-2008 Stipulated Price Contract - the Specifications - Drawings - Town’s General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders and Liability and Insurance

Requirements

1.1.7.1 Drawings of larger scale shall govern over those of smaller scale of the same date.

1.1.7.2 Dimensions shown on Drawings shall govern over dimensions scaled from Drawings.

1.1.7.3 Later dated documents shall govern over earlier documents of the same type.

1.1.7.4 In case of discrepancies, noted materials and annotations shall take precedence over graphic indications in the Contract Documents.

of 596


1.1.7.5 Architectural Drawings shall have precedence over structural, plumbing, mechanical, electrical and landscape Drawings insofar as outlining, determining and interpreting conflicts over the required design intent of all architectural layouts and architectural elements of construction, it being understood that the integrity and installation of the systems designed by the Consultant or its sub- Consultants are to remain with each of the applicable drawing disciplines.

3. Delete paragraph 1.1.8 and 1.1.9 in their entirety and replace with the following:

1.1.8 The Owner shall provide the Contractor, without charge, a maximum of six (6) copies of the Contract Documents to perform the Work. The Contractor is responsible for the provision of any additional sets required in order to complete the Work, at no cost to the Owner.

1.1.9 Specifications, Drawings, models, and copies thereof furnished by the Consultant are not the Contractor’s property, with the exception of the signed Contract sets, which shall belong to each party to the Contract. All Specifications, Drawings and models furnished by the Consultant are to be used only with respect to the Work and are not to be used on other work. These Specifications, Drawings and models are not to be copied or altered in any manner without the written authorization of the Consultant. Contracts, Drawings, Specifications, models, documents and copies thereof furnished by the Contractor or the Owner are and shall remain the property of the Owner, with the exception of the signed contract set belonging to the Contractor. Such documents and models are to be used by the Contractor only with respect to the Work and are not to be used on any other work. Such documents and models are not to be copied or revised in any manner without the written authorization of the Owner.

4. Add new paragraphs 1.1.11 and 1.1.12 as follows:

1.1.11 All Products, materials and equipment shall be in compliance with, but not limited to, current Occupational Health and Safety Act, Revised Statutes of Ontario, 1990 Chapter 01, as amended and Ontario Regulation 213/91, as amended and other relevant and current legislation pertaining to health and safety work practices on a work site.

1.1.12 Throughout the Contract Documents reference to the “General Conditions of the Contract” shall imply the inclusion of these “Supplementary Conditions”.

SC 11. GC 1.2 LAW OF THE CONTRACT

1. Add new paragraphs 1.2.2, 1.2.3 and 1.2.4 as follows:

1.2.2 The Contractor agrees that: .1 any action or proceeding relating to the Contract shall be brought in a court of

competent jurisdiction in the Region of Halton and for that purpose each party irrevocably and unconditionally attorns and submits to the jurisdiction of that court;

.2 it irrevocably waives any right to and will not oppose any action or proceeding relating to the Contract on any jurisdictional basis, including forum non conveniens; and

.3 it will not oppose in any other jurisdiction, the enforcement against it, of any judgment or order duly obtained from a Region of Halton court as set out above.

of 596


1.2.3 The Owner and the Contractor acknowledge and agree that:

(i) this Agreement resulted from a procurement process (within the meaning set out in Section 87.3 of the Construction Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. C.30 (Ontario) as amended) that was commenced, and the Agreement was signed, on or after July 1, 2018, but before October 1, 2019; and

(ii) amendments to the Construction Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. C.30 (Ontario) that are to be proclaimed and come into force on July 1, 2018 are applicable to this Agreement, but amendments to the Construction Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. C.30 (Ontario) that are to be proclaimed and come into force on October 1, 2019 are not applicable to this Agreement; and

(iii) the Contractor will incorporate into its contracts with Subcontractors and Suppliers, and ensure that all Subcontractors and Suppliers are made aware of, these acknowledgements and agreements.

1.2.4 The Contractor shall comply with all municipal by-laws as they pertain to the Town

of Oakville in respect of the operation of the Contractor’s business and the Work. Further, the Contractor shall, at all times that the Contract is in effect and upon request of the Owner, provide proof of compliance satisfactory to the Owner, at the Contractor’s own cost. If the Contractor fails to do any of the foregoing, the Contractor shall be considered to be in default of the Contract in accordance with GC 7.1 and the Owner shall be entitled at its sole discretion to terminate the Contract and to pursue any other legal recourse the Owner deems appropriate:

SC 12. GC 1.3 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES

1. Add to the beginning of paragraph 1.3.2, the following:

“Except with respect to the notice requirements set out in paragraphs 6.4.1, 6.5.4, and 6.6.1,”

2. Add new paragraph 1.3.3 as follows:

1.3.3 All rights and remedies of the parties for any breach by the other party of its obligations under the Contract shall be cumulative and not exclusive or mutually exclusive alternatives, may be exercised singularly, jointly or in combination and shall not be deemed to be in exclusion of any other rights or remedies available to the non-breaching party under the Contract or otherwise at law or in equity or by statute.

SC 13. GC 1.4 ASSIGNMENT

1. Delete paragraph 1.4.1 in its entirety and replace with the following:

1.4.1 The Contractor shall not assign the Contract, or any portion thereof, without the prior written consent of the Owner, which consent may not be unreasonably withheld. The Owner shall be entitled to assign the Contract to any person or other entity (the “Assignee”). Upon the assumption by the Assignee of the Owner’s obligations under the Contract, the Owner shall be released from its obligations arising under the Contract.


1.4.2 Neither the use of one or more Subcontractors to carry out part of the Work, nor the assignment of the whole or of any part of the Contract or the Work to be done under it shall relieve the Contractor of its obligations and liability to the Owner.

of 596


SC 14. GC 1.5 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1. Add new general condition GC 1.5 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITE as

follows:

1.5.1 The Contractor declares and represents that before tendering for the Work (if applicable), and in entering into the Contract with the Owner for the performance of the Work, it has either investigated for itself the character of the Work to be done and all local conditions that would reasonably be discoverable, or that, not having so investigated, the Contractor has assumed and does hereby assume all risk of conditions reasonably discoverable, that are now existing or arising in the course of the Work which might or could make the Work, or any items thereof more expensive in character, or more onerous to fulfil, than was contemplated or known when the tender was made or the Contract signed.

SC 15. GC 1.6 ENTIRE CONTRACT, AMENDMENTS TO BE IN WRITING 1. Add new general condition GC 1.6 ENTIRE CONTRACT, AMENDMENTS TO BE IN

WRITING as follows: The Contract Documents (including all properly authorized Change Directives and

Change Orders) constitute the entire Contract between the parties. Each of the parties,

.1 acknowledges that it is not relying upon any representation, warranty, promise, instruction, advice or information received from the other party or from any employee or agent of the other party, except as set out in the Contract Documents;

.2 shall not rely at any time in the future on any representations, warranty, instruction, advice or information purportedly received from the other party or any employee or agent of the other party, except as set out in a properly authorized Change Order, Change Directive or in an amendment as provided under this section.

1.6.2 The Contract shall not be deemed to be or construed as having been amended as a result of any oral communication between the parties or as a result of any practice of the parties, but all amendments to the Contract shall be in writing.

SC 16. GC 1.7 NON-DISCLOSURE AND NO COMMENT 1. Add new general condition GC 1.7 NON-DISCLOSURE AND NO COMMENT as follows:

1.7.1 The Contractor shall not disclose details relating to the Contract, Work or Project to any outside person not engaged in activities relating to the Contract, Work or Project, and shall restrain its employees from giving unauthorized information with respect thereto.

1.7.2 The Contractor shall refer all inquiries from whatever source relating to the works to be undertaken within the scope of the Contract to the Consultant.

SC 17. GC 1.8 PATENTS AND OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 1. Add new general condition GC 1.8 PATENTS AND OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY

as follows:

1.8.1 Where the Work or Project to be carried out requires the installation or use of any patented or other protected intellectual property,

of 596


.1 belonging to the Contractor, the Contract Price shall be deemed to include the grant of a perpetual license from the Contractor to the Owner to make use of that intellectual property;

.2 belonging to any other person, the Contractor shall obtain and assign to the Owner a perpetual license from the Owner thereof entitling the Owner to make use of that intellectual property, and the cost thereof shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price.

SC 18. GC 2.1 AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT 1. Delete from the end of paragraph 2.1.2, the following:

“, the Contractor” 2. Delete from paragraph 2.1.3, the following:

“against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection and” SC 19. GC 2.2 ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT 1. Add new sentence to the end of paragraph 2.2.2:

“The Contractor shall not be entitled to rely on such visits as a limitation of its obligations under the Contract Documents.”

2. Delete from the beginning of paragraph 2.2.7, the following:

“Except with respect to GC5.1 – FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER,”

3. Add to the end of paragraph 2.2.10, the following:

“and not more than five (5) Working Days after receipt of the written query unless otherwise agreed to by the parties.”


2.2.13 During the progress of the Work, the Consultant will furnish Supplemental Instructions to the Contractor with reasonable promptness, but not more than five (5) Working Days after receipt of a written Request for Information from the Contractor, or in accordance with a schedule for such instructions agreed to by the Consultant and the Contractor. If, in the opinion of the Contractor, performance of the Supplemental Instruction will result in an increase in the Contract Price or to the Contract Time, the Contractor shall, within five (5) Working Days of receipt of the Supplemental Instruction, provide the Consultant with Notice in Writing that there will be an increase in Contract Price and/or Contract Time. Failure to provide the Notice in Writing shall be a deemed acceptance of the Supplemental Instruction by the Contractor without adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time for which a Change Directive will be issued.

5. Delete 2.2.14 in its entirety and replace with the following:

2.2.14 The Consultant will review and take appropriate action upon Shop Drawings, samples and other Contractor’s Submittals which are provided in accordance with the Contract Documents.

of 596


6. In paragraph 2.2.17, in the second sentence of the paragraph, add after “, the Consultant does not guarantee”, the following:

“to the Contractor” 7. Add to the end of paragraph 2.2.18, the following:

“The Consultant shall ensure that all such warranties and documents submitted for approval and for the Owner’s records are in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the documents being forwarded”.


2.2.19 The Consultant or the Owner, acting reasonably, may require the Contractor to remove from the Project any personnel of the Contractor, including Project managers and superintendents. Such persons shall be replaced by the Contractor in a timely fashion to the satisfaction of the Consultant or the Owner, as the case may be, at no cost to the Owner.

SC 20. GC 2.3 REVIEW AND INSPECTION OF THE WORK 1. Delete paragraph 2.3.2 in its entirety and replace with the following:

2.3.2 If work is designated for tests, inspections or approvals in the Contract Documents,

or by the Consultant's instructions, or by the laws or ordinances of the Place of the Work, the Contractor shall give the Consultant and Owner reasonable notification of when the work will be ready for review and inspection. The Contractor shall arrange for and shall give the Consultant and Owner two (2) Working Days of the date and time of inspections by other authorities.


2.3.3 The Contractor shall furnish promptly two (2) copies to the Consultant and one (1) copy to the Owner of all certificates and inspection reports relating to the Work, and in any event no later than two (2) Working Days from the date of the inspection.

3. Add new paragraph 2.3.8, 2.3.9, 2.3.10 and 2.3.11 as follows:

2.3.8 The Contractor shall immediately inform the Owner and the Consultant of any notices, warnings or asserted violations issued by any regulatory or government agencies having jurisdiction relating to the Work.

2.3.9 No review of the Work by the Owner or the Consultant shall relieve the Contractor

from its responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2.3.10 Where standards of performance are specified in the Contract Documents and the

Work does not comply with the performance specified, such deficiency shall be corrected as directed by the Consultant. Any testing of work identified as defective in accordance with GC 2.4, including retesting required by the Owner to verify performance, shall be done at the Contractor’s expense.

of 596


2.3.11 The Consultant may conduct periodic reviews of the Work in progress, to determine general conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Such reviews, or lack thereof, shall not give rise to any claims by the Contractor in connection with construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, nor in connection with construction safety at the Place of Work, responsibility for which belongs exclusively to the Contractor. The undertaking of periodic site review by the Consultant or Owner and their employees and agents shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, nor make them responsible for providing a safe place for work.

SC 21. GC 2.4 DEFECTIVE WORK 1. Delete paragraph 2.4.1 in its entirety and replace with the following:

2.4.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct defective work that has been rejected by the Consultant or the Owner as failing to conform to the Contract Documents at the Contractor’s expense, whether or not the defective work has been incorporated in the Work and whether or not the defect is the result of poor workmanship, use of defective Products or damage through carelessness or other act or omission of the Contractor.

2. Add new paragraphs 2.4.1.1, 2.4.1.2 as follows:

2.4.1.1 The Contractor shall rectify, in a manner acceptable to the Owner and the

Consultant, all defective work and deficiencies throughout the Work, whether or not they are specifically identified by the Owner or the Consultant.

2.4.1.2 The Contractor shall prioritize the correction of any defective work, which, in the sole

discretion of the Owner, adversely affects the day to day operations of the Owner or which, in the sole discretion of the Consultant, adversely affects the progress of the Work.


2.4.2 The Contractor shall promptly, at its expense, Make Good the work of the Owner’s

own forces or of any other contractors destroyed or damaged by, and make any alterations necessitated by, the Contractor’s removal, replacement or re-execution of defective work. If in the opinion of the Consultant or Owner it is not expedient to correct defective work or work not performed as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may deduct from the amount otherwise due to the Contractor the value of such work as is necessary to correct any non-compliance with the Contract Documents. If the Owner and the Contractor do not agree on the difference in value, they shall refer the matter to the Consultant for a determination.


2.4.4 Neither acceptance of the Work by the Consultant or the Owner, nor any failure by the Consultant or the Owner to identify, observe or warn of defective Work or any deficiency in the Work shall relieve the Contractor from the sole responsibility for rectifying such defect or deficiency at the Contractor’s sole cost.

of 596


SC 22. GC 3.1 CONTROL OF THE WORK 1. In paragraph 3.2.1, after “construction means, methods, techniques,” add the following:

“schedules,” 2. Add new paragraphs 3.1.3 and 3.1.4, as follows:

3.1.3 Prior to commencing the Work and individual procurement, fabrication and construction activities, the Contractor shall verify, at the Place of the Work, all relevant measurements and levels necessary for the proper fabrication, assembly, installation and completion of the Work and shall further carefully compare such field measurements and conditions with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Where dimensions are not included or exact locations are not apparent in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Consultant in writing and obtain Supplemental Instructions from the Consultant before proceeding with any part of the affected work.

3.1.4 Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs 3.1.1 and 3.1.2, the Owner shall have

access to the site at all times to observe all aspects of construction. Such access shall in no circumstances affect the obligations of the Contractor to fulfill its contractual obligations. All work, means, methods, techniques and procedures shall be performed in strict compliance with current Occupational Health and Safety Act, Revised Statutes of Ontario, 1990 Chapter 01, as amended and Ontario Regulation 213/91, as amended and other applicable legislation as it relates to health and safety of work site, personnel, occupants, and public.

SC 23. GC 3.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS 1. Delete subparagraphs 3.2.1 and replace with the following:

3.2.1 The Owner may require the Contractor to enter into further contracts for work

outside the scope of the Contract and for which a Change Order will be provide and a cash allowance allocated.

2. Delete subparagraph 3.2.2.1 in its entirety and replace with the following:

3.2.2.1 Take all reasonable, practical and prudent steps to not interfere with the co-ordination of the activities and work of other contractors and Owner's own forces so as to not conflict with the Work of the Contract;

3. Delete subparagraph 3.2.2.2 in its entirety. 4. Add new subparagraph 3.2.3.4 as follows:

3.2.3.4 Subject to General Condition 6.1.1 Owners Right to Make Changes and GC 9.4 - CONSTRUCTION SAFETY, where paragraph 3.2.4 of GC 3.2 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS applies, for the Owner’s own forces and for other contractors performing work within the construction site limits identified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will assume overall responsibility for compliance with all aspects of the applicable health and safety legislation in the Place of the Work, including all of the responsibilities of the constructor as that term is defined in the Occupational Health and Safety Act.

of 596


SC 24. GC 3.3 TEMPORARY WORK 1. Amend paragraph 3.3.2, in the second line after the words “where required by law”, add

“or the Consultant”.

SC 25. GC 3.4 DOCUMENT REVIEW 1. Delete paragraph 3.4.1 in its entirety and replace with the following:

3.4.1. The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents and shall report promptly to the Consultant any error, inconsistency or omission the Contractor may discover. Such review by the Contractor shall comply with the standard of care described in paragraph 3.14.1 of the Contract. Except for its obligation to make such review and report the result, the Contractor does not assume any responsibility to the Owner or to the Consultant for the accuracy of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be liable for damage or costs resulting from such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the Contract Documents, which the Contractor could not reasonably have discovered. If the Contractor does discover any error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall not proceed with the work affected until the Contractor has received corrected or missing information from the Consultant.

2. Add new paragraphs 3.4.2, 3.4.3, 3.4.4 and 3.4.5 as follows:

3.4.2 The Contractor shall follow the procedures as set forth in the Contract Documents. All requests are to be formal, written, and tracked, beginning with a Request for Information from the Contractor. If the Request for Information results in a change to the Work as specified in the Contract Documents, the Consultant will then issue a written request for Change Order, as set forth in GC 6 - CHANGES IN THE WORK.

3.4.3 The issuance of Requests for Information by the Contractor shall not entitle the

Contractor to any increases to the Contract Price or Contract Time. 3.4.4 If, at any time, the Contractor finds errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the

Contract Documents or has any doubt as to the meaning or intent of any part thereof, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Consultant, through a Request for Information. The Contractor shall not proceed with the work until the Consultant has responded to the Request for Information, and in dealing with such error, inconsistency or omission the Contractor shall co-operate with the Owner and the Consultant in good faith to resolve such errors, inconsistency or omission so as to avoid any increase in the Contract Price or delay in the progress of the Work. Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for the consequences of any action of the Contractor based on oral instructions.

3.4.5 The lack of reference on a drawing or in a specification to labour or Products that

are required or normally recognized within the applicable trade practice as being necessary for the complete execution of the Work shall not constitute an error, inconsistency or omission.

SC 26. GC 3.5 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 1. Delete paragraph 3.5.1 in its entirety and replace with the following:

of 596


3.5.1 The Contractor shall:

.1 within ten (10) Working Days following the notice of award of the Contract, prepare and submit to the Owner and the Consultant for their review, a construction schedule that indicates the timing of the activities of the Work and provides sufficient detail of the critical events and their inter-relationship to demonstrate the Work will be performed in conformity with the Contract Time and in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall employ construction scheduling software that permits the progress of the Work to be monitored in relation to the critical path established in the schedule. The Contractor shall provide the schedule and any successor or revised schedules in both electronic format and paper copy. Once accepted by the Owner and the Consultant, the construction schedule submitted by the Contractor shall become the baseline construction schedule.

.2 If the construction schedule submitted by the Contractor is not accepted by the Owner and the Consultant, the Contractor shall, within five (5) Working Days, make revisions to the construction schedule until it is accepted by the Owner and the Consultant. Notwithstanding any other terms of this Contact, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any payment from the Owner until a construction schedule has been submitted by the Contractor and accepted by the Owner and the Consultant;

.3 provide the expertise and resources, such resources including manpower and equipment, as are necessary to maintain progress under the accepted baseline construction schedule or any successor or revised schedule accepted by the Owner pursuant to GC 3.5 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE;

.4 monitor the progress of the Work on a weekly basis relative to the baseline construction schedule, or any successor or revised schedule accepted by the Owner pursuant to GC 3.5 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, update the schedule on a monthly basis and advise the Consultant and the Owner in writing of any variation from the baseline or slippage in the schedule; and

.5 if, after applying the expertise and resources required under subparagraph 3.5.1.3, the Contractor forms the opinion that the variation or slippage in schedule reported pursuant to subparagraph 3.5.1.4 cannot be recovered by the Contractor, it shall, in the same notice, indicate to the Consultant and the Owner if the Contractor intends to apply for an extension of Contract Time as provided in PART 6 of the General Conditions - CHANGES IN THE WORK.

2. Add new paragraphs 3.5.2, 3.5.3, 3.5.4, 3.5.5 and 3.5.6 as follows:

3.5.2 If, at any time, it should appear to the Owner or the Consultant that the actual progress of the Work is behind schedule or is likely to become behind schedule, or if the Contractor has given notice of such to the Owner or the Consultant pursuant to subparagraph 3.5.1.4, the Contractor shall within five (5) Working Days take appropriate steps to cause the actual progress of the Work to conform to the schedule or minimize the resulting delay and shall produce and present to the Owner and the Consultant a recovery plan demonstrating how the Contractor will achieve the recovery of the schedule. If the Contractor intends to apply for a change in the Contract Price in relation to a schedule recovery plan, then the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with GC 6.5 – DELAYS.

3.5.3 An application for an extension of time as herein provided shall be made in writing by the Contractor to the Consultant through the Change Order process.

of 596


3.5.4 Any additional time granted for the completion of the Contract will be conditional upon the Contractor providing the Owner with evidence that all insurance, bonds or other securities, furnished to the Owner by the Contractor, have been increased and, if necessary, extended beyond the limit of the time extension.

3.5.5 Any extension of time that may be granted to the Contractor shall be so granted and accepted without prejudice to any rights of the Owner whatsoever under the Contract and all of such rights shall continue in full force and effect after the time limited in the Contract for the completion of the Work, and whenever in the Contract power and authority is given to the Owner or the Consultant or any person to take any action consequent upon the act, default, breach, neglect, delay, non-observance or non-performance by the Contractor in respect of the Work or Contract, or any portion thereof, such powers or authorities may be exercised from time to time and not only in the event of the happening of such contingencies before the time limited in the Contract for the completion of the Work but also in the event of the same happening after the time so limited in the case of the Contractor being permitted to proceed with the execution of the Work under an extension of time granted by the Consultant. In the event of the Consultant granting an extension of time, time shall continue to be deemed of the essence with respect to that extension.

3.5.6 Due to the time constraints regarding the Project, the Contractor shall maintain rigorous control of all elements of the Work for which the deadlines are indicated in the Contract Documents.

SC 27. GC 3.6 SUPERVISION 1. Delete paragraph 3.6.1 in its entirety and replace with the following:

3.6.1 The Contractor shall furnish a competent, qualified and adequate staff, who shall be in attendance at the Place of the Work at all times, as necessary, for the proper administration, co-ordination, supervision and superintendence of the Work; organize the procurement of all materials and equipment so that they will be available at the time they are needed for the Work, and keep an adequate force of skilled workmen on the job to complete the Work in accordance with all requirements of the Contract Documents. The appointed representatives shall not be changed except for valid reasons, at no additional cost to the Owner, and upon the Contractor obtaining the Owner’s written consent, which consent will not be unreasonably withheld. Further, the Contractor shall not employ or continue to employ on the Work anyone to whom the Owner may reasonably object.

2. Add new paragraphs 3.6.3, 3.6.4, 3.6.5, 3.6.6, 3.6.7 and 3.6.8 as follows:

3.6.3 The Contractor shall provide all necessary supervision and shall at all times have at the Place of Work, a full-time and competent construction superintendent who shall be capable of reading and thoroughly understanding plans and Specifications and of adequately communicating with the Consultant and its representatives and who also must be thoroughly experienced in the type of Work being performed, and who shall be the recipient of all instructions from the Consultant or its authorized representatives. No work of any kind shall be carried out by the Contractor or its Subcontractors during the absence of the construction superintendent. The Contractor shall be responsible for the Place of Work at all times.

of 596


3.6.4 The construction superintendent shall have full authority to execute the orders or directions of the Consultant without delay, and to promptly provide such materials, equipment, tools, labour and incidentals as may be required. The Contractor shall provide a superintendent regardless of the amount of Work subcontracted.

3.6.5 The Contractor shall provide the Consultant and the Owner with the telephone and

the email address of its appointed representative(s), who could be contacted on matters relating to the Contract, (e.g. urgent messages or emergencies), and who shall be available within reasonable notice, twenty-four (24) hours a day, seven (7) days a week, on matters relating to the Contract.

3.6.6 The Owner may, at any time during the course of the Work, request the replacement

of the appointed representative(s), where the grounds for the request involve incompetent or disorderly conduct or conduct which jeopardizes the safety and security of the site or the Owner’s operations. Immediately upon receipt of the request, the Contractor shall make arrangements to appoint an acceptable replacement at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.6.7 The superintendent shall not be employed in any other capacity at the Place of

Work. 3.6.8 The Contractor acknowledges that the replacement of the construction

superintendent or Project team members may have significant impacts on the Project schedule and quality of the Work; therefore, all measures will be taken by the Contractor in order to maintain the original team assigned to the Project. If replacement of any team members results in a possible delay to the Project, it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to make-up any such delays, at no cost to the Owner.

SC 28. GC 3.7 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS 1. Add to the end of paragraph 3.7.2,

“Failure on the part of the Contractor to indicate in writing such Subcontractors and Suppliers to the Owner, shall be deemed to be a failure or refusal to enter into the Contract."


“through a Change Order.” 3. Add new paragraph 3.7.7 as follows:

3.7.7 The Contractor shall not change any of the Subcontractors or Suppliers proposed by the Contractor in writing and accepted by the Owner at the signing of the Contract without the Owner’s written consent or execute any subcontracts for the performance of the Work without the Owner’s prior written consent.

SC 29. GC 3.8 LABOUR AND PRODUCTS 1. Delete paragraph 3.8.2 in its entirety and replace with the following:

3.8.2 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Products provided shall be new and as specified. The Contractor shall not provide substitutions for specified Products without the express written consent of the Consultant or the Owner.

of 596


2. Add new paragraphs 3.8.4, 3.8.5, 3.8.6, 3.8.7, 3.8.8, 3.8.9, 3.8.10, 3.8.11, 3.8.12 and 3.8.13 as follows:

3.8.4 The cost for overtime required beyond the normal Working Day to complete individual construction operations of a continuous nature, or work that the Contractor elects to perform at overtime rates without the Owner or the Consultant requesting it shall not be chargeable to the Owner and shall be at the sole cost and expense of the Contractor.

3.8.5 The Contractor shall neither permit nor allow (a) under aged persons contrary to Applicable Laws, nor (b) the introduction or use of alcoholic beverages, cannabis or illegal narcotics on or about the Place of the Work.

3.8.6 At the request of the Owner or Consultant, the Contractor shall remove from the Place of the Work, any person (whether employed on the Work or not) who, in the opinion of the Owner or Consultant, is incompetent, intoxicated or otherwise impaired, or who is conducting himself (or herself) improperly, and the Contractor shall not permit any such person to remain on the Place of the Work, nor to return to the Place of the Work without the written approval of the Owner or Consultant as the case may be.

3.8.7 The Contractor is responsible for the safe on-site storage of Products and their protection (including Products supplied by the Owner and other contractors to be installed under the Contract) in such ways as to avoid dangerous conditions or contamination of the Products or other person or property and in locations at the Place of the Work to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Consultant. The Owner shall provide all relevant information on the Products to be supplied by the Owner within the Contract Documents.

3.8.8 Where required by the Consultant or the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish a complete written statement of the origin, composition and manufacture of all materials to be supplied by them, and shall furnish samples thereof for testing purposes, if so instructed by the Consultant.

3.8.9 The Consultant's or Owner’s approval of changed materials shall not be considered as waiver of objection to the Work or materials at any subsequent time due to their failure to conform to the Specifications.

3.8.10 The Contractor shall furnish for the Consultant's approval, such material tests, mock-ups, mix designs and tests of items and/or materials manufactured or fabricated off the Place of the Work as the Consultant may reasonably request.

3.8.11 Specified Product by name, trade or company is regarded as the standard of quality required by the Specifications. No substitution shall be made by the Contractor without the prior written approval of the Consultant.

3.8.12 Specified trade contractors working in Oakville are required to have a valid business licence. Visit the Business Licensing page to review the requirements and find out how to apply for a licence.

https://www.oakville.ca/townhall/licensed-contractors.html

3.8.13 The Contractor represents and warrants that the Products provided for in accordance with the Contract are not subject to any conditional sales contract and are not subject to any security rights obtained by any third party which may subject any of the Products to seizure and/or removal from the Place of the Work.

of 596


SC 30. GC 3.11 USE OF THE WORK 1. Add to the end of paragraph 3.11.2 the following:

“or impact the structural or future material use of the Work”. 2. Add new paragraph 3.11.3 as follows:

3.11.3 The Contractor shall abide by and enforce directives and policies regarding signs, advertisements, safety procedures, fires and smoking at the Place of the Work as directed by the Owner.

SC 31. GC 3.13 CLEANUP 1. Add new paragraphs 3.13.4, 3.13.5 and 3.13.6 as follows:

3.13.4 All cleanup performed under items 3.13.1, 3.13.2 and 3.13.3 shall be to the satisfaction of the Consultant and the Owner.

3.13.5 Owner shall have the right perform the cleaning and to set-off the cost of cleaning to the Contractor, where items 3.13.1, 3.13.2 and 3.13.3 are not carried out after the Owner has provided two (2) Working Days written notice to do so.

3.13.6 The Contractor shall legally dispose forthwith of any debris and surplus material accumulated at the Place of the Work, and where requested, the Contractor shall provide to the Consultant a true copy of the original certificate approval from a waste management system and a true copy of the original certificate of approval from the place of disposal for all debris and surplus material disposed of by the Contractor under the Contract.

SC 32. GC 3.14 STANDARD OF CARE 1. Add new general condition GC 3.14 PERFORMANCE BY CONTRACTOR as follows:

3.14.1 In performing its services and obligations under the Contract, the Contractor shall exercise a standard of care, skill and diligence that would normally be provided by an experienced and prudent contractor supplying similar services for similar projects. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that throughout the Contract, the Contractor’s obligations, duties and responsibilities shall be interpreted in accordance with this standard. The Contractor shall exercise the same standard of due care and diligence in respect of any Products, personnel, or procedures which it may recommend to the Owner.

3.14.2 The Contractor further represents, covenants and warrants to the Owner that:

.1 the personnel it assigns to the Project are appropriately experienced;

.2 it has a sufficient staff of qualified and competent personnel to replace any vacancy, subject to the Owner’s approval, resulting from death, incapacity, removal or resignation; and

.3 there are no pending, threatened or anticipated claims that would have a material effect on the financial ability of the Contractor to perform its work under the Contract.

SC 33. GC 3.15 SECURITY

1. Add new general condition GC 3.15 SECURITY as follows:

of 596


3.15.1 The Contractor is responsible to provide and maintain the Place of the Work in a secure manner, free from public access, trespassing, or vandalism. This provision is to be maintained on a twenty-four (24) hours per day, seven (7) days per week basis and shall include fencing and/or hoarding and may require other measures as required.

SC 34. GC 3.16 INTERFERENCE

1. Add new general condition GC 3.16 INTERFERENCE as follows:

3.16.1 If the Work, in whole or in part, involves the renovation of, or addition to, existing and occupied premises: .1 the Contractor shall maintain normal business operations and traffic flow, with a

minimum of inconvenience to the tenants and occupants of the Place of the Work;

.2 subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall ensure that no essential services such as electric power, water supply or other public utilities are interrupted;

.3 in every case where an interruption to existing services or utilities is to occur during execution of the Work, the Contractor shall give the Owner five (5) Working Days’ prior written notice. The Contractor shall reschedule any such interruption, at no additional cost to the Owner, if requested to do so in writing by the Owner;

.4 subject to work restrictions set out elsewhere in the Contract Documents, any work that generates excessive or prolonged noise or percussion sounds shall not be carried out by the Contractor between the hours of 7:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. or on Sundays or holidays subject to applicable by-laws; and

.5 subject to work restrictions set out elsewhere in the Contract Documents, any work that generates excessive dust or odours shall be carried out by the Contractor between the hours of 7:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. or on Sundays or holidays as may be agreed upon between the Contractor and the Owner, subject to applicable by-laws. Lump Sum bid must include all costs associated with such work.

SC 35. GC 4.1 CASH ALLOWANCES 1. Delete paragraph 4.1.4 in its entirety and replace with the following:

4.1.4 Where the actual cost of the Work under any cash allowance exceeds the amount of the allowance, any unexpended amounts from other cash allowances shall be reallocated, at the Consultant’s direction, to cover the shortfall, and, in that case, there shall be no additional amount added to the Contract Price for Overhead and profit. Only where the actual cost of the Work under all cash allowances exceeds the total amount of all cash allowances shall the Contractor be compensated for the excess incurred and substantiated, plus an amount for Overhead and profit on the excess only, as set out in the Contract Documents.


4.1.5 The net amount of any unexpended cash allowances, after providing for any reallocations as contemplated in paragraph 4.1.4, shall be deducted from the Contract Price by Change Order without any adjustment for the Contractor’s Overhead and profit on such amount.

of 596



4.1.8 The Owner reserves the right to call, or to have the Contractor call, for competitive bids for portions of the Work to be paid from cash allowances.

SC 36. GC 4.2 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES 1. Add new paragraph 4.2.5:

4.2.5 Any contingency allowance specified in the Contract Documents, the Owner’s

Council resolution with respect to the Contract, or elsewhere, shall be deemed to be solely a budgetary authorization by the Owner. The Contractor shall have no right to draw upon any such contingency allowance for payment unless specifically authorized to do so by way of Change Order.

2. Add new paragraph 4.2.6:

4.2.6 In the absence of a contingency allowance being shown on the Contract

Documents, the Contractor is not to assume that there is one in place. The disclosure of any contingency allowances is at the discretion of the Owner.

SC 37. GC 4.3 PROVISIONAL AMOUNTS 1. Add new general condition GC 4.3 PROVISIONAL AMOUNTS as follows:

4.3.1 The Contract Price includes provisional items, if any, as stated in the Contract

Documents. SC 38. GC 5.1 FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 1. Revise the heading to read, “GC 5.1 FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED”. 2. Delete paragraph 5.1.1 in its entirety in its entirety and replace with the following:

5.1.1 The Owner and Contractor shall provide each other with timely Notice in Writing of

any material change in their financial ability to fulfil their respective obligations under the Contract.

3. Delete paragraph 5.1.2 in its entirety. SC 39. GC 5.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 1. Add to the end of paragraph 5.2.3, the following:

“The Contractor shall review with the Consultant and the Owner, at a scheduled time, the percentage of work completed for each item indicated in the schedule of values. This procedure shall be complied with for each application for payment prior to submitting the formal application for payment.”


“The statement shall include the Contract number, Project name and purchase order number.”

of 596



“Any Products delivered to the Place of the Work but not yet incorporated into the Work shall remain at the risk of the Contractor.”

4. Add new paragraphs 5.2.8, 5.2.9, 5.2.10, 5.2.11, 5.2.12, 5.2.13 and 5.2.14, as follows:

5.2.8 The Contractor must provide with each application after the first, a Statutory Declaration, certifying that all accounts for all subcontract, construction machinery and equipment, materials, Products, labour and other indebtedness which may have been incurred by the Contractor and for which the Owner might in any way be held responsible have been paid in full or will be paid with the proceeds from such application for payment, except for amounts properly retained as holdback or as an identified amount in dispute.

5.2.9 After the first application for payment and with each subsequent application for

payment the Contractor shall submit evidence of compliance with the applicable worker’s compensation legislation at the Place of the Work, including payments due thereunder.

5.2.10 Subject to the Construction Act and all other Applicable Laws, the Owner will pay to

the Contractor ninety percent (90%) of the amount shown on such certificates, less previous payments, less the amount of any liens or any written notice of a lien of which the Owner has notice, plus 25% for security for costs, less the maintenance security referred to in GC 12.3 – WARRANTY, and less any amounts that the Owner deems necessary to retain for its protection against claims or liabilities or for any claim or claims the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract, other contracts, or otherwise, and such payments shall not in any way be construed as, nor shall it constitute, an acceptance of all or any part of the Work or material under the Contract. Once the reason for the Owner being entitled to withhold payment of any amount has been rectified, the amount withheld due to that reason will be paid by the Owner to the Contractor.

5.2.11 The Contractor shall submit its formal applications for payment, including a

breakdown of approved Change Orders and percentage completed of each and all other required Submittals as stated in the Contract Documents, to the Consultant in a form satisfactory to the Owner. Deviation or incomplete submissions with respect to the approved breakdown will require resubmission of the application for payment

5.2.12 If any Work or item under the Contract is included by the Contractor in its progress

claims as partially or fully completed, but it is not completed in accordance with Drawings or Specifications, or is not completed to the Consultant's satisfaction, the Consultant shall omit the partial or total cost of such items from the certificates of payment and shall notify the Contractor in writing of its action and the reason for same, and shall withhold payments for such items, over, above and distinct from applicable construction lien holdbacks, until they are completed or corrected to its full satisfaction.

5.2.13 The Consultant and/or the Owner shall not be held responsible for any delays in

payment due to a disagreement in the amounts shown by the Contractor on their payment application as submitted to the Consultant for review.

of 596


5.2.14 The Contractor shall prepare current As-Built Drawings in electronic format during the course of the Work, which current As-Built Drawings shall be maintained by the Contractor and made available to the Consultant for review with each application for progress payment. The Consultant shall retain a reasonable amount from any progress payment for the value of the As-Built Drawings not presented for review.

SC 40. GC 5.3 PROGRESS PAYMENT 1. Delete from the first line of subparagraph 5.3.1.2 the words "calendar days" and substitute

the words:

"Working Days". 2. Delete subparagraph 5.3.1.3 in its entirety and replace with the following:

5.3.1.3 The Owner shall make payment to the Contractor on account as provided in Article

A-5 of the Agreement - PAYMENT on or before twenty (20) Working Days after the date of a certificate of payment issued by the Consultant.

3. Add new paragraph 5.3.2, 5.3.3 and 5.3.4 as follows:

5.3.2 If the Contractor fails to comply with GC 5.2 – APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT or GC 10.4 – WORKERS’ COMPENSATION, the Owner shall not be required to make payments to the Contractor until the obligation has been complied with.

5.3.3 All progress payments are not conclusive as to the value or quality of Work

performed, and are subject to reopening and readjustment, until and including the date that the Owner releases the holdback for finishing work under the Construction Act.

5.3.4 Certificates for payment may provide for retention of amounts as determined by the Consultant to ensure correction of deficient work done or unacceptable Products provided.

SC 41. GC 5.4 SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK 1. Delete paragraph 5.4.3 in its entirety and replace with the following:

5.4.3 Immediately prior to the issuance of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, the Contractor, in consultation with the Consultant, shall establish the dates for finishing the Work and correcting deficiencies.

.2 Add new paragraphs 5.4.4, 5.4.5, 5.4.6, and 5.4.7:

5.4.4 Within seven (7) calendar days of receiving a copy of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work signed by the Consultant, the Contractor shall publish a copy of the certificate in a construction trade newspaper (as that term is defined in the Construction Act) and shall provide to the Consultant and the Owner a copy of the published notice, the date of publication and the name of the construction trade newspaper in which the publication occurred. If the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Owner may publish a copy of the certificate and charge the Contractor with the costs so incurred.

of 596


5.4.5 Prior to submitting its written application for Substantial Performance of the Work, the Contractor shall submit to the Consultant all:

.1 guarantees;

.2 warranties;

.3 certificates;

.4 testing and balancing reports;

.5 distribution system diagrams;

.6 spare parts;

.7 maintenance manuals;

.8 samples;

.9 existing reports and correspondence from Authorities Having Jurisdiction in the Place of the Work;

.10 As-Built Drawings; and

.11 other materials or documentation required to be submitted under the Contract, together with written proof acceptable to the Owner and the Consultant that the Work has been substantially performed in conformance with the requirements of municipal, governmental, and utility Authorities Having Jurisdiction in the Place of the Work.

5.4.6 Where the Contractor is unable to deliver the documents and materials described in

paragraph 5.4.5, then, provided that none of the missing documents and materials interferes with the use and occupancy of the Project in a material way, the failure to deliver shall not be grounds for the Consultant to refuse to certify Substantial Performance of the Work. If the Contractor fails to deliver any of the materials required in subparagraphs 5.4.5.7 or 5.4.5.8, the Consultant may retain a reasonable amount or, where applicable, the amount specified in the Project Specific Supplementary Conditions from the payment of holdback under General Condition 5.5 - PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. Should any documents or materials not be delivered in accordance with paragraph 5.4.5 by the earlier of sixty (60) days following publication of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work and the submission of the Contractor’s application for final payment under paragraph 5.7.1 of General Condition 5.7 – FINAL PAYMENT, then the amount previously retained pursuant to this provision shall be forfeit to the Owner as compensation for the damages deemed to have been incurred by the Owner, and not as a penalty, arising from the failure to deliver the documents or materials, and the Contract Price shall be reduced accordingly.

5.4.7 Together with the submission of its written application for Substantial Performance

of the Work, the Contractor shall submit to the Consultant and to the Owner a Statutory Declaration setting forth in reasonable detail any then outstanding and unresolved disputes or claims between the Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier, including any claims allegedly arising from delay, which are, directly or indirectly, related to any then outstanding or anticipated disputes or claims between the Contractor and the Owner, and this disclosure shall, at a minimum:

.1 identify the parties involved; .2 identify the amount in dispute; .3 provide a brief statement summarizing the position of each party; .4 include copies of any correspondence or documents in support of either party's

position;

of 596


.5 include copies of any documents of any court or arbitration process related to the matter;

.6 identify the dispute or claim between the Contractor and the Owner to which the matter relates; and

.7 include a copy of any written agreement or a summary of any oral agreement between the parties related to resolution of the matter.

The disclosure requirements detailed herein are of a continuing nature and survive completion of the Work. Accordingly, the Contractor shall supplement the information provided with the original Statutory Declaration with additional materials pertaining to new or existing disputes or claims, as they become available. The Contractor shall not be entitled to recover from the Owner any amount pertaining to any claim or dispute referred to in this paragraph, if the provisions of this paragraph have not been fully complied with. For greater certainty, the Contractor is not obliged to make the aforementioned disclosure with respect to any dispute or claim that is not related to or does not touch upon any then outstanding and unresolved dispute or claim between the Contractor and the Owner.

SC 42. GC 5.5 PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK

1. Add new subparagraph 5.5.1.3 as follows:

5.5.1.3 Submit a statement that no written notices of lien have been received by it.

2. Delete “statement” from paragraph 5.5.2 and replace with the following:

“documents” 3. Delete paragraphs 5.5.3, 5.5.4 and 5.5.5 in their entirety. SC 43. GC 5.7 FINAL PAYMENT 1. Delete paragraph 5.7.1 in its entirety and replace with the following:

5.7.1 When the Contractor considers that the Work has been totally performed, the

Contractor shall submit an application for final payment, together with a written application for review by the Consultant to establish Total Performance of the Work. The Contractor’s application for final payment shall be accompanied by any documents or materials not yet delivered pursuant to paragraph 5.4.5 and, for purposes of the Construction Act, the remaining Work is valued at less than $5,000.

Should the Contractor fail to deliver any of the foregoing documents, the Owner shall be at liberty to withhold from amounts otherwise payable to the Contractor as security for the obligation of the Contractor to deliver the undelivered documents. The Contractor shall have no right to receive payment of the amount so withheld until such time as all required documents and materials referenced in paragraph 5.4.5 have been delivered.


5.7.2 The Consultant will, no later than ten (10) Working Days after the receipt of an application from the Contractor for final payment, review the Work to verify the validity of the application and:

of 596


.1 advise the Contractor in writing that the Work is not totally performed and give reasons why, or

.2 state the date of Total Performance of the Work in a certificate and Consultant to issue a copy of that certificate to each of the Owner and the Contractor.”

3. Delete “5 calendar days” in paragraph 5.7.4 and replace with:

“twenty (20) Working Days”.


5.7.5 Prior to the release of the holdback for finishing work under the Construction Act,

the Contractor shall submit:

.1 Contractor’s written request for release of the holdback, including a statement that no written notices of lien have been received by it;

.2 a Statutory Declaration; and

.3 a final Workplace Safety & Insurance Board Clearance Certificate. SC 44. GC 5.10 LIENS 1. Add new general condition GC 5.10 LIENS as follows:

5.10.1 In the event that a construction lien arising from the performance of the Work is registered against the Project lands, the Contractor shall, within ten (10) calendar days, at its sole expense, vacate or discharge the lien from title to the premises. If the lien is merely vacated, the Contractor shall, if requested, undertake the Owner’s defence of any subsequent lawsuit commenced in respect of the lien at the Contractor’s sole expense.

5.10.2 In the event that the Contractor fails or refuses to vacate or discharge a construction

lien within the time prescribed above, the Owner shall, at its option, be entitled to take all steps necessary to vacate and/or discharge the lien, and all costs and expenses incurred by the Owner in so doing (including, without limitation, legal fees on a solicitor and client basis and any payment which may ultimately be made out of or pursuant to security posted to vacate the lien) shall be for the account of the Contractor and the Owner may deduct such amounts from amounts otherwise due or owing to the Contractor. If the Owner vacates the lien, it shall be entitled to retain all amounts it would be required to retain pursuant to the Construction Act (Ontario) if the lien had not been vacated.

5.10.3 Without limiting any of the foregoing, the Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for all costs (including, without limitation, legal fees on a solicitor and client basis) it may incur in connection with the claim for lien or subsequent lawsuit brought in connection with the lien, or in connection with any other claim or lawsuit brought against the Owner by any person that provided services or materials to the Project lands which constituted a part of the Work.

5.10.4 This GC 5.10 does not apply to construction liens claimed by the Contractor.

SC 45. GC 6.2 CHANGE ORDER 1. Add new paragraph 6.2.3 as follows:

of 596


6.2.3 The value of a change shall be determined in one or more of the following methods as directed by the Owner:

.1 by quotation and acceptance of a lump sum, and all quotations must contain an itemized and complete breakdown of costs, including hours and hourly rates of labour, payroll burden, itemized costs of materials, quantity of materials, Products, invoices from subtrades and other receipts and all other costs to perform the change in the Work, including the mark-up disclosed in the table below, such that the quotations are capable of being evaluated by the Consultant. The Contractor shall require Subcontractors and Suppliers to supply similar information to the Consultant.

.2 by unit prices set out in the Bid Form or subsequently agreed upon by the parties. Unit prices shall include materials, labour, equipment, delivery, freight, handling, disposal, statutory charges, supervisions, testing, all applicable duties, brokerage charges, import charges, HST, bonding, Overhead, profit and all relative charges and expenses including, but not limited to, office administration charges such as disbursements, travel costs, printing and incidentals to the Contractor, and shall be the total cost to the Owner. Adjustment to the Contract Price shall be based on a net quantity difference from the original quantity.

.3 by the amount, net of all credits, of time, materials, Construction Equipment and Products expended:

.1 by a Subcontractor applying its labour charge out rates, together with the actual costs, without mark-up, of materials, Construction Equipment and Products utilized in the change, plus the Subcontractor’s mark-up at 5% which applies to materials, Construction Equipment and Product costs only;

.2 by the Contractor applying its labour charge out rates, together with the actual costs, without mark-up, of materials, Construction Equipment and Products plus the mark-up at 5% which applies to material, Construction Equipment and Product costs only;

.3 the Contractor shall be entitled to the Contractor mark-up of 5% on both

Contractor’s Own Forces the value of Subcontractor Work even where the Subcontractor is not entitled to a mark-up on its labour charge out rates pursuant to paragraph 6.2.3.3(1).

.4 the mark-ups described in paragraphs 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 include all necessary

supervision, general account items, general clean-up, small tools, As-Built Drawings and job safety necessary to perform the change. Additional bonding cost is excluded from the mark-ups but may be included as a cost, using the value declared for bonding by the Contractor in its bid to the Owner, unless otherwise agreed by the parties.

SC 46. GC 6.3 CHANGE DIRECTIVE 1. Delete subparagraph 6.3.6.3 in its entirety and replace with the following:

6.3.6.3 The Contractor's fee shall be as specified in GC 6.7 - EXTRA WORK, CLAIMS PAYMENT FROM CONTINGENCY or as otherwise agreed by the parties.


of 596


6.3.7.1 salaries, wages and benefits paid to personnel in the direct employ of the Contractor while directly engaged in the Work attributable to the change under a salary or wage schedule agreed upon by the Owner and the Contractor, or in the absence of such a schedule, actual salaries, wages and benefits paid under applicable bargaining agreement, and in the absence of a salary or wage schedule and bargaining agreement, actual salaries, wages and benefits paid by the Contractor while directly engaged in the Work attributable to the change, for personnel .1 stationed at the Contractor's field office, in whatever capacity employed; .2 engaged in the preparation or review of Shop Drawings, fabrication Drawings,

and coordination Drawings; or .3 engaged in the processing of changes in the Work.

3. Delete “and hand tools not owned by the workers” from subparagraph 6.3.7.5 and replace

with the following:

“exclusive of hand tools” 4. Add to the end of subparagraph 6.3.7.9, the following:

“, provided however that the cost included in such amounts shall be limited to the actual costs of the items described in this paragraph 6.3.7 changing “Contractor” to “Subcontractor” as necessary”

5. Add to the end of subparagraph 6.3.7.17, the following:

“not caused by the Contractor or anyone for whom it is responsible” 6. Delete “thereof when requested” from paragraph 6.3.9 and replace with the following:

“upon submission of any claim for costs related to the Change Directive” 7. Add to the end of paragraph 6.3.10, the following:

“The Contractor shall include all pertinent documentation as back-up with any claims for additional Contract Time and/or increase in Contract Price to the Consultant for review and approval.”

8. Add after “proposed adjustment in the Contract Time from paragraph 6.3.12, the following:

“and/or Contract Price” SC 47. GC 6.4 CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS 1. Add new paragraph 6.4.5, 6.4.6 and 6.4.7 as follows:

6.4.5 If the Contractor was given access to the Place of the Work prior to the submission of the bid on which the Contract was awarded, then the Contractor confirms that it carefully investigated the Place of the Work and, in doing so, applied to that investigation the degree of care and skill required by paragraph 3.14.1. In those circumstances, notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 6.4.1, the Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment to the Contract Price or to an extension of the Contract Time for conditions which could reasonably have been ascertained by the Contractor by such careful investigation, or which could have been reasonably inferred from the material provided with the Contract Documents.

of 596


In those circumstances, should a claim arise, the Contractor will have the burden of establishing that it could not have discovered the materially different conditions from a careful investigation, because of restrictions placed on its access or inferred the existence of the conditions from the material provided with the Contract Documents.

6.4.6 To the extent the Contractor has not investigated as referenced in paragraph 6.4.5, the Contractor willingly assumes responsibility for all losses, damages, costs, expenses (including all legal costs on a full indemnity basis), liabilities, claims, actions, and demands, whether arising under statute, contract or at common law, which such investigations might have avoided or reduced and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all risk which might make it more onerous and more expensive to fulfill or perform the Work than was contemplated or known when the Contract was signed, and for any and all liability, responsibility and obligations which the Owner may have to any third parties resulting from any failure to investigate.

6.4.7 If the finding made pursuant to paragraph 6.4.2 is that the subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions differ materially and this would cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost or time to perform the Work, and if the said conditions were otherwise discoverable by the Contractor in the proper performance of its duties and obligations under the Contract, all costs and expenses resulting from any delay (excluding, for clarity, the direct cost of remediating the said conditions) in the completion of the Work that is caused, or contributed to, as a result of the said conditions, will be borne by the Contractor.

SC 48. GC 6.5 DELAYS 1. Delete paragraph 6.5.1 in its entirety and replace with the following:

6.5.1 Subject to the next sentence, if the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by an action or omission of the Owner, Consultant or anyone employed or engaged by the Owner directly except for the town’s regulatory function and acting as authority having jurisdiction and the action or omission is contrary to the provisions of the Contract Documents, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant and Owner may recommend in consultation with the Contractor. Any delay resulting from the Contractor not obtaining or being delayed in obtaining a permit from the Owner acting as a regulator authority shall not be considered an action or omission of the Owner or anyone employed or engaged by the Owner directly. The Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner for reasonable costs incurred by the Contractor as the result of such delay, provided that the Owner shall not be liable for any other costs or damages whatsoever including, without limitation, any indirect, consequential, or special damages, such as loss of profits, loss of opportunity or loss of productivity resulting from such delay.


“, provided that the Owner shall not be liable for any other costs or damages whatsoever including, without limitation, any indirect, consequential, or special damages, such as loss of profits, loss of opportunity or loss of productivity resulting from such delay.”


6.5.3 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of Work by Force Majeure then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor.

of 596


The extension of time shall not be less than the time lost as the result of the event causing the delay, unless the Contractor agrees to a shorter extension.

The Contractor shall not be entitled to payment for costs incurred by such delays unless such delays result from actions by the Owner, Consultant or anyone employed or engaged by them directly, provided that the Owner shall in such instance, only be liable for reasonable costs incurred by the Contractor and shall not be liable for any other costs or damages whatsoever including, without limitation, any indirect, consequential, or special damages, such as loss of profits, loss of opportunity or loss of productivity resulting from such delay. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Contractor shall use its best efforts to minimize the impact of such event upon the performance of the Work and Contract Time.

.1 Subject to the foregoing, each party shall be excused from performance so long

as the Force Majeure persists, and shall not be considered to be in default under this section, if and to the extent that its failure of, or delay in performance is due to that Force Majeure.

.2 Where a Force Majeure remains in effect for more than ninety (90) calendar days, either party may terminate the Contract upon thirty (30) calendar days written notice to the other party, provided at the time when that notice is given the Force Majeure is then continuing.

.3 While a Force Majeure subsists which prevents the Contractor from proceeding with the Work under the Contract, the Owner may engage an alternate contractor on an interim basis, and the Work and the Contract Price will be adjusted accordingly.


6.5.6 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by an act or omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or anyone employed or engaged by them, directly or indirectly, or by any cause within the Contractor’s control, the Contractor shall devote such additional resources and take all steps necessary, all at the Contractor’s own cost and expense, to ensure that the dates for attaining Substantial Performance of the Work and Total Performance of the Work under the Contract as may have been amended in accordance with the provisions of Part 6 of the General Conditions – CHANGES IN THE WORK, are met. If the Contractor fails to attain Substantial Performance of the Work or Total Performance of the Work as aforesaid, the Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for all reasonable costs, damages and expenses incurred by the Owner as the result of any such failure, including, but not limited to, the cost of all additional services required by the Owner from the Consultant or any subconsultants, project managers, or others employed or engaged by the Owner.

SC 49. GC 6.6 CLAIMS FOR A CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE 1. Add new paragraph 6.6.7 as follows:

6.6.7 The Owner may make claims against the Contractor arising out of the costs incurred for additional services provided by the Consultant resulting from the Contractor’s failure to reasonably perform the Work in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract.

of 596


SC 50. GC 7.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK, TERMINATE THE CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO CONTINUE WITH THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT

1. Add before “OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT” in the title of GC 7.1, the following:

“SUSPEND THE WORK”

2. Delete paragraph 7.1.2 in its entirety and replace with the following.

7.1.2 If the Contractor neglects to prosecute the Work properly or otherwise fails to comply with the requirements of the Contract in a material way and if the Consultant and the Owner agree that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, give the Contractor Notice in Writing that the Contractor is in default of the Contractor's contractual obligations and instruct the Contractor to correct the default in the five (5) Working Days immediately following the delivery of such Notice in Writing.

3. Delete “however, if such cost of finishing the Work is less than the unpaid balance of the Contract Price, the Owner shall pay the Contractor the difference” from subparagraph 7.1.5.3.

4. Delete paragraph 7.1.6 in its entirety and add new paragraphs 7.1.6, 7.1.7, 7.1.8, 7.1.9, 7.1.10 and 7.1.11 as follows:

7.1.6 The Owner has the right to terminate the Contract for willful or persistent violation by the Contractor or its workers or Subcontractors it has engaged for the performance of the Work for such violations including, but not limited to the following:

.1 failure to provide the schedule when due,

.2 failure to commence the Work by the date provided in the Agreement or other such date as agreed between the parties in writing,

.3 failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the Contract to a material degree,

.4 failure to comply with the Specifications and Drawings as provided,

.5 violation of applicable relevant Acts or legislation (e.g. Occupational Health and Safety Act legislation and regulations, Workplace Safety and Insurance Board Act, and Regulation 309 of the Environmental Protection Act), or

.6 failure to maintain the critical path established in the schedule.

7.1.7 In addition to its right to terminate the Contract set out herein, the Owner may terminate the Contract at any time for any other reason and without cause upon giving the Contractor Notice in Writing to that effect. In such event, the Contractor shall be entitled to be paid for all Work performed including reasonable profit, for loss sustained upon Products and Construction Equipment, and such other damages as the Contractor may have sustained as a result of the termination of the Contract, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to be compensated for any loss of profit on unperformed portions of the Work, or indirect, special, or consequential damages incurred.

7.1.8 The Owner may suspend Work under the Contract at any time for any reason and without cause upon giving the Contractor Notice in Writing to that effect. In such event, the Contractor shall be entitled to be paid for all Work performed to the date of suspension and be compensated for all actual costs incurred arising from the suspension, including reasonable profit and for loss sustained upon Products and Construction Equipment, as the Contractor may have sustained as a result of the suspension of the Work, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to be compensated for any indirect, special, or consequential damages incurred.

of 596


In the event that the suspension continues for more than one hundred and eighty (180) calendar days, the Contract shall be deemed to be terminated and the provisions of paragraph 7.1.7 shall apply.

7.1.9 In the case of either a termination of the Contract or a suspension of the Work under

GC 7.1 - OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK, TERMINATE THE CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO CONTINUE WITH THE WORK, SUSPEND THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT or GC 7.2 - CONTRACTOR’S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT, the Contractor shall use its best commercial efforts to mitigate the financial consequences to the Owner arising out of the termination or suspension, as the case may be.

7.1.10 Upon the resumption of the Work following a suspension under GC 7.1 - OWNER'S

RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK, TERMINATE THE CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO CONTINUE WITH THE WORK, SUSPEND THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT or GC 7.2 - CONTRACTOR’S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT, the Contractor will endeavour to minimize the delay and financial consequences arising out of the suspension.

7.1.11 The Contractor's obligation under the Contract as to quality, correction, and

warranty of the Work performed by the Contractor up to the time of termination or suspension shall continue after such termination of the Contract or suspension of the Work.

SC 51. GC 7.2 CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE

CONTRACT 1. Delete paragraph 7.2.2 in its entirety. 2. Delete paragraph 7.2.3 in its entirety and replace with the following:

7.2.3 The Contractor may give Notice in Writing to the Owner, with a copy to the Consultant, that the Owner is in default of the Owner's contractual obligations if:

.1 subject to the other terms and conditions of the Contract the Owner fails to pay the Contractor when due the amounts certified by the Consultant or awarded by arbitration or court, except where the Owner has a bona fide claim for set-off, or

.2 the Owner violates the requirements of the Contract to a substantial degree and the Consultant, confirms by written statement to the Contractor and the Owner, that sufficient cause exists.


7.2.4 The Contractor's Notice in Writing to the Owner provided under paragraph 7.2.3 shall advise that if the default is not corrected within twenty (20) Working Days following the delivery of the Notice in Writing, the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Contractor may have, suspend the Work until the default is corrected, provided, however, that in the event of such suspension, the provisions of paragraph 7.1.10 shall apply. If the Contractor’s Notice in Writing to the Owner was given pursuant to paragraph 7.2.3, then, ninety (90) Working Days after the delivery of the Notice in Writing, the Contractor may terminate the Contract, provided, however, that in the event of such termination, the provisions of paragraph 7.1.10 shall apply.

of 596



7.2.5 If the Contractor terminates the Contract under the conditions set out above, the Contractor shall be entitled to be paid for all Work performed to the date of termination and be compensated for all actual costs incurred arising from the suspension, including reasonable profit and for loss sustained upon Products and Construction Equipment, as the Contractor may have sustained as a result of the termination of the Work, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to be compensated for any indirect, special or consequential damages incurred.


7.2.6 If the Contractor stops the Work or terminates the Contract in accordance with this GC 7.2 – CONTRACTOR’S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT, the Contractor shall leave the Place of the Work and the Work in a secure condition.

SC 52. GC 8.1 AUTHORITY OF THE CONSULTANT 1. Delete last sentence of 8.1.3 “If it is subsequently determined that such instructions were in

error or at variance with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the Contractor costs incurred by the Contractor in carrying out such instructions which the Contractor was required to do beyond what the Contract Documents correctly understood and interpreted would have required, including costs resulting from interruption of the Work” and substitute the following sentence:

“If it is subsequently determined that such instructions were at variance with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the Contractor costs incurred by the Contractor in carrying out such instructions which the Contractor was required to do beyond the requirements of the Contract Documents, including costs resulting from interruption of the Work.”

SC 53. GC 8.2 NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION AND ARBITRATION 1. Delete paragraphs 8.2.6, 8.2.7 and 8.2.8 in their entirety. 2. Add new paragraph 8.2.6 as follows:

8.2.6 When a dispute has not been resolved through negotiation or mediation, within ten (10) Working Days after the date of termination of the mediated negotiations under paragraph 8.2.5, either party may give a Notice in Writing to the other party and to the Consultant inviting the other party to agree to submit the dispute to be finally resolved by arbitration, pursuant to provisions of the Arbitration Act, 1991. If the other party wishes to accept the invitation to submit the dispute to arbitration, it shall so indicate by the delivery of a responding Notice in Writing within ten (10) Working Days of receipt of the invitation. If, within the required times, no invitation is made or, if made, is not accepted, either party may refer the dispute to the courts or to any other form of dispute resolution, including arbitration, which the parties may agree to use.

SC 54. GC 9.1 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY 1. Delete “property adjacent to the Place of the Work” in paragraphs 9.1.1 and 9.1.3 and

replace with the following:

“property adjacent, in the vicinity of or proximate to the Place of the Work”

of 596



.1 errors in the Contract Documents which the Contractor could not have reasonably discovered applying the standard of care described in paragraph 3.14.1;


9.1.2 Before commencing any work, the Contractor shall determine the locations of all underground utilities and structures indicated in the Contract Documents or reasonably apparent from the Contract Documents, or that are reasonably apparent from an inspection of the Place of the Work exercising the degree of care and skill described in paragraph 3.14.1.


9.1.5 With respect to any damage to which paragraph 9.1.4 applies, the Contractor shall neither undertake to repair or replace any damage whatsoever to the work of other contractors, or to property adjacent, in the vicinity of or proximate to the Place of the Work, nor acknowledge that the same was caused or occasioned by the Contractor, without first consulting the Owner and receiving written instructions as to the course of action to be followed from either the Owner or the Consultant. Where, however, there is danger to life, the environment, or public safety, the Contractor shall take such emergency action as it deems necessary to remove the danger.


9.1.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for securing the Place of the Work at all times and shall take all reasonable precautions necessary to protect the Place of the Work, its contents, materials (including Owner-supplied materials) and the public from loss or damage during and after working hours.

SC 55. GC 9.2 TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES 4. Add new subparagraph 9.2.5.5 as follows:

9.2.5.5 Take all reasonable steps to mitigate the impact on Contract Time and Contract Price and any further steps it deems necessary to mitigate or stabilize any conditions resulting from encountering toxic or hazardous substances or materials.


9.2.6 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree on the existence, significance of, or whether the toxic or hazardous substances were brought onto the Place of the Work by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible, or whether any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage to the property of the Owner or others, the Owner shall retain and pay for an independent qualified expert to investigate and determine such matters. The expert's report shall be delivered to the Owner and the Contractor.


of 596


9.2.7.4 indemnify the Contractor from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits or proceedings made, suffered or brought by third parties arising out of or resulting from exposure to, or the presence of, toxic or hazardous substances for which the Contractor is not responsible under GC 9.2 – TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES at the Place of Work. This obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity set out in GC 12.1 – INDEMNIFICATION or that otherwise exist respecting a person or party described in this paragraph.


9.2.8 If the Owner and Contractor agree or if the expert referred to in paragraph 9.2.6 determines that the toxic or hazardous substances were brought onto the Place of the Work by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible, that any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage to the property of the Owner or others, the Contractor shall promptly at the Contractor's own expense:

.1 take all necessary steps, in accordance with applicable legislation in force at

the Place of the Work, to safely remove and dispose the toxic or hazardous substances;

.2 Make Good any damage to the Work, the Owner's property or property adjacent to the Place of the Work as provided in paragraph 9.1.3 of GC 9.1- PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY;

.3 reimburse the Owner for reasonable costs incurred under paragraph 9.2.6; and as a result of the delay

.4 indemnify the Owner as required by GC 12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION. SC 56. GC 9.4 CONSTRUCTION SAFTEY 1. Delete paragraph 9.4.1 in its entirety and replace with the following:

9.4.1 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction safety at the Place of the Work and for compliance with the rules, regulations, and practices required by the applicable construction health and safety legislation and shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Work.

2. Add new paragraphs 9.4.2, 9.4.3, 9.4.4, 9.4.5, 9.4.6, 9.4.7, 9.4.8, 9.4.9, 9.4.10, 9.4.11,

9.4.12 and 9.4.13 as follows:

9.4.2 Prior to the commencement of the Work, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner: .1 documentation setting out the Contractor’s in-house safety programs; and .2 a copy of the Notice of Project filed with the Ministry of Labour naming the

Contractor as “constructor” under the Occupational Health and Safety Act.

9.4.3 The Contractor shall indemnify, defend and save harmless the Owner, its agents, officers, directors, employees, Consultants, successors, appointees, and assigns from and against the consequences of any and all safety infractions committed by the Contractor under the Occupational Health and Safety Act, including the payment of legal fees and disbursements on a solicitor and client basis.

of 596


Such indemnity shall apply to the extent to which the Owner is not covered by insurance, provided that the indemnity contained in this paragraph shall be limited to costs and damages resulting directly from such infractions and shall not extend to any consequential, indirect or special damages.

9.4.4 The Owner undertakes to include in its contracts with other contractors and in its instructions to its own forces the requirement that the other contractor or its own forces, as the case may be, comply with the policies and procedures of and the directions and instructions from the Contractor with respect to occupational health and safety and related matters. Prior to admission to the Place of the Work, the Contractor may, as a condition of admission, require any other contractor or the Owner’s own forces to sign a written acknowledgement in the following form:

Acknowledgement The undersigned acknowledges that the Work it will perform on behalf of the Owner requires it to enter a Place of the Work which is under the total control of a Contractor that has a contract with the Owner, pursuant to which the Contractor has assumed overall responsibility for compliance with all aspects of the applicable health and safety legislation, including all the responsibilities of the “constructor” under the Occupational Health and Safety Act, as well as responsibility to co-ordinate and schedule the activities of our Work with the Work of the Contractor under its contract. The undersigned agrees to comply with the Contractor’s directions and instructions with respect to health, safety, co-ordination, and scheduling and acknowledges that its failure to do so will be cause for termination of employment or of the undersigned’s contract with the Owner, as the case may be. The undersigned also agrees to have the Contractor named as an additional insured on any commercial general liability insurance policy, where such insurance is required.

9.4.5 Without limiting any of the foregoing, prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor shall have both a written occupational health and safety policy and program to implement that policy, and that all of its employees, Subcontractors and any other persons performing the Work shall be appropriately trained, licensed and certified, as required to perform the Work.

9.4.6 The Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with the Owner’s Corporate Health and Safety Manual, the Employment Standards Act, Occupational Health and Safety Act and all regulations thereunder, any other legislation governing construction or workplace safety, and all instructions issued by the Consultant or any inspector appointed by the Province of Ontario or Town of Oakville.

9.4.7 The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the work free from trespassers and for protection of the Work and the public from any loss or injury from commencement of the Work to Total Performance of the Work.

9.4.8 The Contractor shall comply with all applicable occupational health and safety requirements in force during the time when Work is being carried out, and shall provide at the Place of the Work, such equipment and medical facilities as are necessary to furnish first aid to anyone who may be injured in connection with the Work.

9.4.9 Before commencing with any Work, the Contractor, the Consultant and the Owner’s representative shall meet at the Place of the Work, and establish safe routes and routines for material deliveries, material storage locations, construction office location, and all other aspects of the execution of all Work.

of 596


9.4.10 The Contractor shall erect and maintain during construction, a dependable temporary fence, barricades, warning lights, and signage around the perimeter of the Place of the Work, all hazardous areas and excavations, and the Consultant may give reasonable directions to the Contractor as to the type and extent of the fence, barriers, warning lights, and signage needed.

9.4.11 The Contractor shall, at its own expense, shore up or otherwise securely support or

protect any buildings, walls, fences, pavement, boulevards or other structures at the Place of the Work, and on the adjoining properties which may be endangered or which may cause injury during the Work, and in case of damage, disturbance or injuries to any such structures during and attributable, whether directly or indirectly, to any work under the Contract, or to any extra work entering into the Contract, the Contractor shall at its own expense, repair, rebuild or otherwise Make Good all damage, injuries or disturbance to said structures and put all such structures in a condition the same as, or equal to, that existing previous to its beginning that work.

9.4.12 In the event of an emergency threatening health, life or property, the Contractor

shall take such action as may be necessary to save lives and protect persons from injury, and done to protect and preserve the property. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and the Consultant of such emergency as promptly as is practical under the circumstances.

9.4.13 The Owner undertakes to include in its contracts with other contractors and in its

instructions to its own forces the requirement that the other contractor or its own forces, as the case may be, comply with the policies and procedures of and the directions and instructions from the Contractor with respect to occupational health and safety and related matters.

SC 57. GC 9.5 MOULD 1. Add to the end of subparagraph 9.5.2.3, the following:

“and incurred as a result of the delay.” 2. Delete subparagraph 9.5.3.4 in its entirety and replace with the following:

9.5.3.4 indemnify the Contractor from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits or proceedings made, suffered or brought by third parties arising out of or resulting from exposure to, or the presence of mould for which the Contractor is not responsible under GC 9.5 – MOULD at the Place of Work. This obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity set out in GC 12.1 – INDEMNIFICATION or that otherwise exist respecting a person or party described in this paragraph.

SC 58. GC 10.1 TAXES AND DUTIES 1. Add to the end of paragraph GC 10.1.2 the following:

“The Contractor must prove to the satisfaction of the Owner that the Contractor will not benefit in any way by reason of any increase to the Contract Price.”


of 596


10.1.3 Where the Owner is entitled to an exemption or a recovery of sales taxes, customs duties, excise taxes or Value Added Taxes applicable to the Contract, the Contractor shall, at the request of the Owner, assist with application for any exemption, recovery or refund of all such taxes and duties and all amounts recovered or exemptions obtained shall be for the sole benefit of the Owner. The Contractor agrees to endorse over to the Owner any cheques received from the federal or provincial governments, or any other taxing authority, as may be required to give effect to this paragraph.

SC 59. GC 10.2 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS, AND FEES


10.2.4 The Contractor shall give the required notices and comply with the laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or codes which are or become in force during the performance of the Work and which relate to the Work, to the environment, to the preservation of the public health, and to construction safety. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with copies of all such required notices and related health and safety documents. The Contractor shall notify the Chief Building Official or the registered code agency, where applicable, of the readiness, substantial completion, and completion of the stages of construction set out in the Ontario Building Code. The Contractor shall be present at each site inspection by an inspector or registered code agency. If any laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or codes conflict, the more stringent shall govern.

2. Add to the beginning of paragraph 10.2.5, the following:

“Subject to paragraph 3.4.1,” 4. Delete paragraph 10.2.5 in its entirety and replace with the following:

10.2.5 The Contractor shall not be responsible for verifying that the Contract Documents are in compliance with the Applicable Laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or codes relating to the Work. If the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, or if, subsequent to the time of bid closing, changes are made to the Applicable Laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or codes which require modification to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall advise the Consultant in writing requesting direction immediately upon such variance or change becoming known, and no further work on the affected components of the Contract shall proceed until these changes to the Contract Documents have been obtained by the Contractor from the Consultant. The Consultant will make the changes required to the Contract Documents as provided in GC 6.1 - OWNER’S RIGHT TO MAKE CHANGES, GC 6.2 - CHANGE ORDER and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE.

SC 60. GC 10.3 PATENT FEES 1. Add before “hold the Owner harmless” in the second sentence of paragraph 10.3.1, the

following:

“indemnify and” 2. Add after “which was supplied to the Contractor” in paragraph 10.3.2, the following: “by the Owner”

of 596


SC 61. GC 10.4 WORKERS' COMPENSATION 1. Add after the words “Prior to commencing the Work,” in the first line of paragraph 10.4.1,

the following:

“and upon execution of the Agreement, again with each application for progress payment,” 2. Add to the beginning of paragraph 10.4.2, the following:

“The Contractor shall ensure that each Subcontractor complies with the workers' compensation legislation at the Place of the Work.”


10.4.3 Where a Subcontractor is not required to participate in the insurance plan provided

for under the workers’ compensation legislation, the Contractor shall require the Subcontractor to provide a sworn declaration of its exemption as a condition of the Subcontractor’s admission to the Place of Work. When requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall require the Subcontractor to provide a letter of exemption under the workers’ compensation legislation.

SC 62. GC 11.1 INSURANCE .1 Add new subparagraph 11.1.1.6(4):

11.1.1.6.(4) If any loss occurs involving damage to property in an amount greater than $25,000, bodily injury to any person, or damage to any existing structure, the Contractor shall, in addition to the other requirements set out herein, immediately provide a detailed written report to the Owner.

.2 Delete paragraph 11.1.2 in its entirety and substitute with the following:

11.1.2 Each of the policies of insurance shall also contain a provision requiring not less than 30 days' written notice to each named insured prior to cancellation or any change that would reduce coverage. At least 10 calendar days prior to commencement of the Work and upon any renewal, amendment, or extension of all or any part of the insurance, the Contractor shall promptly provide the Owner with confirmation of coverage and, if required, a certified true copy of the policies certified by an authorized representative of the insurer together with copies of any amending endorsements applicable to the Work.

.3 Add new subparagraph 11.1.9:

11.1.9 The parenthetical reference in CCDC 41 - INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS, paragraph 4 which reads: "(excluding flood and earthquake)" is deleted and replaced with the following: "(including flood, earthquake, testing, and Commissioning)".

SC 63. GC 11.2 CONTRACT SECURITY 1. Delete paragraph 11.2.1 in its entirety and replace with the following:

11.2.1 The Contractor shall, prior to commencement of the Work, provide to the Owner:

of 596


.1 a performance bond, in the form and the amount set out in the bid documents, covering the performance of the Contract, including the Contractor's requirements with respect to the correction of deficiencies and the fulfillment of all warranties; and

.2 a labour and material payment bond, in the form and the amount set out in the

bid documents, covering payment for labour, Products, or both. 2. Delete paragraph 11.2.2 in its entirety and replace with the following:

11.2.2 The bonds referred to in paragraph 11.2.1 shall be issued by a duly licensed surety

company authorized to transact the business of suretyship in the Province of Ontario, using the prescribed forms set out in the Construction Act, and shall be maintained in good standing until the fulfillment of the Contract, including the warranty period.


11.2.3 If approved changes pursuant to the Contract result in approved increase or cumulative increases to the Contract Price the Contractor shall, if requested in writing to do so by the Owner, promptly acquire additional Performance and Maintenance bonding at the Owner’s expense.

Where additional Performance and Maintenance bonding premiums are paid by the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly submit written confirmation that the premiums were paid to the surety and promptly provide the Owner with the original revised Performance and Maintenance bond(s).

SC 64. GC 12.1 INDEMNIFICATION 1. Delete GC 12.1 INDEMNIFICATION in its entirety and replace with the following:

12.1.1 The Contractor shall indemnify and shall defend and save the Owner, its elected officials, officers, and employees harmless from and against any claims, proceedings, fines, penalties, expenses and costs (including legal costs on a solicitor and client basis) that are incurred by, or made or instituted against, any of them or to which any of them may be liable by reason of, .1 the Contractor carrying out or failing to carry out any obligation to which it is

subject, or exercising any right to which it is entitled, under the Contract except to the extent that the same are caused by the negligence or deliberate wrong-doing of the Owner or other person entitled to indemnification under this GC 12.1, or

.2 any patent, trademark, copyright infringement or other breach of any intellectual property right of any person, for which the Contractor or any Subcontractor to the Contractor is responsible.

12.1.2 The right of indemnification granted to the Owner or other person entitled to

indemnification under paragraph 12.1.1 shall extend to any amount paid by that person in the settlement of any claim against it, and in entering into any such settlement, that person may exercise its reasonable discretion as to the amount to be paid, but that person shall serve prior notice of any intended settlement on the Contractor, at least 5 Working Days prior to agreeing to any such settlement.

of 596


12.1.3 The Owner may enforce the rights of indemnity conferred on the elected officials, officers, and employees of the Owner under paragraph 12.1.1 on their behalf and to the same extent as if they were parties to the Contract.

12.1.4 The rights to indemnity provided for in this GC 12.1 shall be deemed to be in

addition to any rights with respect to insurance in favour of the Owner, its elected officials, officers and employees provided under the Contract Documents.

12.1.5 The rights to indemnity provided for in this GC 12.1 shall survive the expiration or

any termination of the Contract. SC 65. GC 12.2 WAIVER OF CLAIMS 1. Delete GC 12.2 WAIVER OF CLAIMS in its entirety. SC 66. GC 12.3 WARRANTY 1. Add to the end of paragraph 12.3.1 the following:

“, unless the Contract Documents otherwise provide.” 3. Delete “one year” from paragraph 12.3.3. 4. Delete “one year” from paragraph 12.3.4. 5. Delete “one year warranty period as described in paragraph 12.3.1” from paragraph 12.3.6

and replace with the following: “warranty period” 6. Add new paragraphs 12.3.7, 12.3.8, 12.3.9, 12.3.10, 12.3.11, 12.3.12, 12.3.13, 12.3.14,

12.3.15, 12.3.16, 12.3.17 and 12.3.18 as follows:

12.3.7 Any material or equipment requiring excessive servicing during the warranty period (or free maintenance period, if applicable) shall be considered defective and the warranty shall be deemed to take effect from the time that the defect has been corrected so as to cause excessive servicing to terminate. Where an extended warranty is provided beyond the warranty period, and any material or equipment requires excessive servicing during the first fifteen percent (15%) of the extended warranty period (or free maintenance period, if applicable) the material or equipment shall be considered defective and the extended warranty shall be deemed to take effect from the time that the defect has been corrected so as to cause excessive servicing to terminate.

12.3.8 The final payment certificate shall not relieve the Contactor from its responsibility under this GC 12.3 – WARRANTY.

12.3.9 Following Substantial Performance of the Work, and without limiting the

Contractor’s warranty under this GC 12.3 WARRANTY, the Contractor shall assign to the Owner, to the extent assignable the benefit of all warranties and guarantees relating to the Work. The assignment shall expressly reserve the right of the Contractor to make any claims under such warranties and guarantees and such assignment shall in no way prejudice any rights of or benefits accruing to the Contractor pursuant to such warranties and guarantees.

of 596


12.3.10 Where required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner for the duration of the warranty period, a warranty holdback in the amount stated in the Contract Documents.

12.3.11 The maintenance security, which is at no time a part of the statutory holdback,

shall be retained by the Owner in increments from monies that would otherwise be payable to the Contractor, commencing so that by the date of Substantial Performance of the Work the full value of the required maintenance security has been retained.

12.3.12 Except as otherwise provided hereunder, the maintenance security, less any

deductions made therefrom as provided for in the Contract, shall be paid to the Contractor following the issuance by the Consultant of a final certificate at the end of the warranty period, provided that all defects and deficiencies in the Work have been corrected by the Contractor. No interest shall be payable to the Contractor on such funds withheld in accordance with 12.3.10.

12.3.13 The Contractor may apply in writing to the Owner at the time of Substantial

Performance of the Work to substitute for the monies retained as the maintenance security an alternative maintenance security of equivalent or greater value comprising: .1 one or more irrevocable letters of credit, or .2 another readily negotiable security.

12.3.14 Acceptance of any such alternative shall be at the discretion of the Owner. 12.3.15 Following receipt and acceptance of any such alternative, the Owner shall release

to the Contractor the monies previously retained for maintenance security purposes.

12.3.16 The Owner may, in its discretion, allow the total maintenance security to be made

up in part of monies retained under the Contract and in part of an alternative maintenance security as indicated in paragraph 12.3.13 above provided that the total value of such parts, as determined by the Owner, shall be not less than the required value as derived from the table set out in paragraph 12.3.10 above.

12.3.17 Such alternative maintenance security or the monies derived therefrom, less any

deductions made as provided for in the Contract, shall be released to the Contractor following the issuance by the Consultant of the final certificate at the end of the warranty period.

12.3.18 The Contractor will be responsible for extended warranty periods on equipment

and materials as outlined in the Specifications. Warranties shall be provided for all-inclusive replacement including all costs for labour and materials upon failure. Warranties shall be provided irrespective of the standard manufacturers, Suppliers and vendors’ warranties and are in addition to the standard construction warranty of one year for general construction, materials and equipment.

of 596


SC 67. PART 13 MISCELLANEOUS 1. Add new PART 13 MISCELLANEOUS as follows:

GC 13.1 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIALS

13.1.1 All Work and Products delivered and installed at the Place of the Work by the

Contractor shall be the property of the Owner. The Contractor shall remove all surplus or rejected materials when notified in writing to do so by the Consultant.

GC 13.2 REVIEW BY OWNER AND REVIEW BY CONSULTANT

13.2.1 Neither the Owner’s and/or Consultant’s receipt, review or approval of any

documents of the Work nor the failure of the Owner and/or Consultant’s to provide comments shall limit, waive or diminish the Contractor’s obligations, responsibilities, duties or liabilities under the Contract. The review or approval by the Owner and/or Consultant is intended only to ascertain that the document or the performance of the Contractor’s duties, liabilities, responsibilities, or obligations under the Contract including, without limitation, the Work generally meets the intention of the Contract and is not an assurance or confirmation of the adequacy, quality, fitness, suitability or correctness of the Contractor’s obligations, responsibilities, duties and liabilities under the Contract including without limitation, the Work, for which the Contactor is solely responsible in accordance with the Contract.

GC 13.3 USE AND/OR OCCUPATION OF COMPLETED PORTIONS OF THE WORK

13.3.1 Upon the Owners’ request, the Owner shall, at any time or times, have the right

of occupying and/or using any part of parts of the Work (including, without limitation, for the purposes of installing and testing fittings and equipment), whether partially performed or entirely complete, or whether completed on schedule or not, before the completion of the Work.

13.3.2 In the event the Owner desires to exercise the privilege of occupancy and/or use

of the Work as provided above, the Contractor shall co-operate with the Owner throughout in making available for the Owners’ use such building services as heating, ventilation, cooling, water, lighting, and telephone for the space or spaces to be occupied and/or used and if the equipment required to furnish such services is not entirely completed at the time the Owner desires to occupy and/or use the aforesaid space or spaces, the Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to complete same as soon as possible to the extent that the necessary equipment can be put into operation and use. Except where the Work was, pursuant to the Contract Documents, supposed to have been completed by the time at which the Owner desires to occupy and/or use the space or spaces, any extra costs beyond that originally required to complete the Work arising from such early occupancy and/or use shall be borne by the Owner. If the Work was supposed to have been completed by the time of desired occupancy/use, then any extra costs beyond that originally required to complete the Work arising from such early occupancy and/or use shall be borne by the Contractor.

of 596


13.3.3 In the event that the Owner exercises the privilege of occupancy and/or use of the Work as provided above, it agrees to do so, as not to materially interfere with the respective work of the Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers and under the understanding that the Owner will be occupying premises within a construction site which will require compliance with all normal construction site requirements including, without limitation, health and safety requirements.

13.3.4 It shall be understood, however, that the Owner’s occupancy and/or use of such

space or spaces of the Work shall not constitute the Owner’s acceptance of any Work, material or equipment which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, nor affect the warranty period under the Contract nor relieve the Contractor from his obligations, duties, responsibilities and liabilities to complete the Work, nor for responsibility for loss or damage due to or arising out of defects in, or malfunctioning of, any Work, material or equipment, nor from any other unfulfilled duties, liabilities, obligation or responsibilities under the Contract nor from any other duty, liability obligation or responsibility under the Contract including, without limitation, the Contractors’ warranty obligation. If however, damage results from any act by the Owner, the Owner shall assume its share of the responsibility for such damage.

GC 13.4 CONTRACTOR DISCHARGE OF LIABILITIES

13.4.1 In addition to the obligations assumed by the Contractor pursuant to General

Condition 3.7 – SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS, the Contractor agrees to discharge all liabilities incurred by it for labour, materials, services, Subcontractors and Products, used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Work, except for amounts withheld by reason of legitimate dispute which have been identified to the party or parties, from whom payment has been withheld.

GC 13.5 RECORDS/DAILY REPORTS/DAILY LOGS

13.5.1 The Contractor shall maintain and keep accurate Project records (which means

all tangible records, documents, computer printouts, electronic information, books, plans, Drawings, Specifications, accounts or other information relating to the Work) in its head office in accordance with requirements of Applicable Laws, but in any event for not less than four (4) years from Substantial Performance of the Work or until all claims have been settled. During this time, the Contractor shall allow the Owner access to the Project records during normal business hours upon the giving of reasonable notice. The Contractor shall ensure that equivalent provisions to those provided herein are made in each subcontract and shall require the Subcontractors and Suppliers to incorporate them into every level of contract thereunder for any part of the Work.

GC13.6 SET-OFF

13.6.1 The parties agree that the Owner has the contractual right to set-off against any

amounts owing by the Owner to the Contractor under this Contract, any amount owed to the Owner by the Contractor, whether such amount arises from this Contract or under any other contract between the Owner and the Contractor, irrespective of whether or not those contracts are related or arise at equity or law. This right of set-off shall be subject to the Construction Act, as applicable.

of 596


13.6.2 The costs to the Owner of sending or publishing any notice or document required by the Construction Act shall constitute damages to the Owner and may be retained by the Owner in accordance with its set-off rights.

GC 13.7 CONTRACTOR USE OF PERMANENT EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEMS

13.7.1 With the prior written approval of the Owner, the Contractor may make use of

elements of the mechanical and electrical systems or equipment comprising a permanent part of the Work for the purpose of providing heat or power to the Project during the final stages of construction. In such event, before making its written application for Substantial Performance of the Work, and again, immediately prior to final takeover by the Owner of such systems and equipment, the Contractor shall clean and Make Good, to the satisfaction of the Consultant and the Owner, such systems and equipment as it had been permitted to use. The Contractor shall pay any and all costs associated with such use, cleaning and making good.

of 596


APPENDIX B

PRE-RENOVATION DESIGNATED SUBSTANCE

AND HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REPORT

of 596

PRE-RENOVATION DESIGNATED SUBSTANCE AND

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ASSESSMENT

LOBBY RENOVATION PROJECT

OAK RIVERS COMMUNITY CENTRE

2400 SIXTH LINE

OAKVILLE, ONTARIO

Submitted to:

Nick Valerio, Senior Supervisor Capital Projects

Town of Oakville – Facilities and Construction Management

1225 Trafalgar Road

Oakville, Ontario

L6H 0H3

Presented by:

ECOH

75 Courtneypark Drive West, Unit 1

Mississauga, ON

L5W 0E3

ECOH Project No: 21214

July 5, 2019

of 596

ECOH Page 1

Town of Oakville, Facilities and Construction Management July 5, 2019

1225 Trafalgar Road

Oakville, Ontario

L6H 0H3

Attention: Nick Valerio, Senior Supervisor Capital Projects

Re: Pre-Renovation Designated Substance and Hazardous Material Assessment

Oak Rivers Community Centre

2400 Sixth Line, Oakville, Ontario

ECOH Project Number: 21214

ECOH Management Inc. (ECOH) was retained by the Town of Oakville and is pleased to provide the

following observations and recommendations regarding future renovations to be completed at the River Oaks

Community Centre facility located at 2400 Sixth Line, Oakville, Ontario. Mr. Travis Bico completed an

assessment of the Project Area on June 26, 2019. The assessment included a visual inspection and testing for

the presence of Designated Substances (asbestos, lead, mercury, etc.) and other hazardous materials (such as

mould, UFFI, PCBs, etc.) as required.

The Town of Oakville has informed ECOH of plans to perform lobby renovations at the aforementioned

facility. The intent of this survey is to identify designated substances and potentially hazardous materials,

which may be demolished, removed, or disturbed during the upgrades and installation work. Materials not

expected to be disturbed (i.e. roofing felts, mechanical gaskets, etc.) may not be assessed for the presence of

hazardous materials.

Details and Observations:

1. Areas of investigation included the following, herein referred to as the “Project Area”;

a) 2400 Sixth Line – Oak Rivers Community Centre - Lobby

Project Areas were determined based on project drawings provided by the Town of Oakville and are

limited to all areas impacted by the renovation scope of work.

2. The following reports were reviewed to determine the presence of asbestos and designated substances in

the project area, and supplemented by additional sampling as necessary;

a. “Pre-Renovation Designated Substances and Hazardous Materials Assessment, Rink B Renovations

Project, River Oaks Community Centre” prepared for the Town of Oakville by ECOH and dated

May 8, 2019.

3. Laboratory results for bulk asbestos and lead samples collected during this assessment are attached to

this report in Attachment 1 and 2 respectively.

4. General site conditions and asbestos-related information, as it pertains to the project scope of work,

includes the following:

a. Ceilings in the Project Area are composed of the following materials:

• Lay-in ceiling tiles (2’x4’ textured with pinholes). This material was observed to have a

manufacturer’s date-stamp of 2012 and is not suspected to contain asbestos.

• Texture finish. This material was sampled (21214-ASB-07A-C) and determined by

laboratory analysis to be non-asbestos.

b. Flooring is composed of ceramic tiles. Ceramic grout and mortar were sampled (21214-ASB-03A-C

and 21214-ASB-04A-C respectively) and determined by laboratory analysis to be non-asbestos.

of 596

Pre-Renovation Designated Substance & Hazardous Material Assessment




ECOH Page 2

c. Walls within the Project Area are composed of the following materials:

• Concrete block and mortar. Block mortar was sampled (21214-ASB-02A-C) and determined

by laboratory analysis to be non-asbestos.

• Drywall with drywall joint compound. Drywall joint compound was sampled (21214-ASB-

01A-E) and determined by laboratory analysis to be non-asbestos.

d. Structural components (deck, beams, joists, etc.) are composed of uninsulated steel.

e. Pipe fittings (which may include elbows, valves, tees, hangers, etc.) in the Project Area are

uninsulated or insulated with non-asbestos fiberglass insulation.

f. Straight sections of pipe in the Project Area are uninsulated or insulated with non-asbestos fiberglass

insulation.

g. Duct systems in the Project Area are uninsulated or insulated with non-asbestos fiberglass insulation.

h. Caulking was observed within the Project Area as follows:

• Grey caulking on doors. This was sampled (21214-ASB-05A-C) and determined by


• Beige caulking on display case. This was sampled (21214-ASB-06A-C) and determined by


Please refer to Table 1 below for a summary of the results for asbestos sampling.

Table 1: Summary of Asbestos Sampling

Sample Number Material Description Location Result

21214-ASB-01A Lobby Drywall Joint Compound None Detected

21214-ASB-01B Lobby Drywall Joint Compound None Detected

21214-ASB-01C Lobby Drywall Joint Compound None Detected

21214-ASB-01D Reception Drywall Joint Compound None Detected

21214-ASB-01E North Corridor Drywall Joint Compound None Detected

21214-ASB-02A Lobby Concrete Block Mortar None Detected

21214-ASB-02B Lobby Concrete Block Mortar None Detected

21214-ASB-02C Lobby Concrete Block Mortar None Detected

21214-ASB-03A Lobby Ceramic Tile Grout None Detected

21214-ASB-03B Lobby Ceramic Tile Grout None Detected

21214-ASB-03C Lobby Ceramic Tile Grout None Detected

21214-ASB-04A Lobby Ceramic Tile Mortar None Detected

21214-ASB-04B Lobby Ceramic Tile Mortar None Detected

21214-ASB-04C Lobby Ceramic Tile Mortar None Detected

of 596





ECOH Page 3

Table 1: Summary of Asbestos Sampling

Sample Number Material Description Location Result

21214-ASB-05A Front Vestibule Grey Door Caulking None Detected

21214-ASB-05B Front Vestibule Grey Door Caulking None Detected

21214-ASB-05C Front Vestibule Grey Door Caulking None Detected

21214-ASB-06A Display Case Beige Caulking None Detected

21214-ASB-06B Display Case Beige Caulking None Detected

21214-ASB-06C Display Case Beige Caulking None Detected

21214-ASB-07A Front Vestibule Texture Finish None Detected

21214-ASB-07B Front Vestibule Texture Finish None Detected

21214-ASB-07C Front Vestibule Texture Finish None Detected

-Shading indicates sample result positive for asbestos (if applicable)

5. Although no regulations exist in Ontario, guidelines indicate that paints and surface coatings that contain

0.5% lead concentration by dry weight (i.e. concentrations of lead at or above 0.5%, or 5000 parts per

million (ppm), which is comparable to 1 milligram per square centimetre (mg/cm2) when using an XRF

analyzer) is considered to be a “lead-based paint or surface coating”. Paints or surface coatings that

contain concentrations of lead greater than 0.1% by dry weight (1000 ppm), and less than 0.5% by dry

weight (5000 ppm), is considered to be a “lead-containing paint or surface coating”. Paints or surface

coatings that contain concentrations of lead at, or below, 0.1% by dry weight (1000 ppm) is considered to

be a “low-level lead paint or surface coating”.

The presence of lead in paint was assessed by the collection and submission of bulk material samples to a

professional laboratory for analysis by flame atomic absorption spectroscopy.

Please refer to Table 2 below for a summary of the bulk paint chip analysis results for lead.

Table 2: Summary of Lead Sampling

Sample Number Description of Material Location Results

21214-Pb-01 Beige Wall Paint Lobby <83 ppm

21214-Pb-02 Dark Beige Bulkhead Paint Lobby <81 ppm

21214-Pb-03 White Door Frame Paint Lobby <200 ppm

21214-Pb-04 Brown Door Paint Lobby <96 ppm

21214-Pb-05 Concrete Block Mortar Lobby <220 mg/Kg

-Shading indicates material is lead-based or lead-containing (if applicable)

of 596





ECOH Page 4

No major sources of lead or lead-containing products were observed during this survey. However, the

following should be noted; lead may be present in wiring connectors, ceramic tiles, electric cable

sheathing, and in solder joints on copper piping.

6. Fluorescent lamp ballasts and transformers present within the Project Area are assumed to contain

polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).

7. Mercury may be present in minor quantities within the Project Area in the following forms; as a possible

constituent of paints and adhesives, liquid filled bulbs in thermostats, and as a vapour within compact

fluorescent light lamps.

8. Free crystalline silica in the form of common construction sand is present in all concrete and masonry

products within the work areas.

9. Other designated substances including, Arsenic, Acrylonitrile, Benzene, Coke Oven Emissions, Ethylene

Oxide, Ozone Depleting Substances, Isocyanates, and Vinyl Chloride Monomer were not noted in

significant quantities or forms, if at all, within the Project Area.

Discussion and Recommendations:

The following recommendations meet requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Act. Asbestos

recommendations meet the requirements of the Designated Substance – Regulation respecting Asbestos on

Construction Projects and in Buildings and Repair Operations, Ontario Regulation 278/05. Based upon the

observations of this assessment, ECOH offers the following for your consideration.

1. As the materials present in the Project Area anticipated for disturbance are non-asbestos containing,

removal or disturbance of these materials does not require asbestos safety procedures. However, general

health and safety precautions, which may include dust suppression methods, should be employed.

2. During work of the project, if additional materials are revealed beyond what are described in this report,

and historic reports referenced herein (i.e. materials not identified or materials that are not homogenous

to those identified or materials that become revealed during the work), additional testing for asbestos-

content should be completed immediately and prior to disturbance of the material. Alternatively, these

materials can be assumed to contain asbestos and the appropriate level of asbestos safety precautions

must be implemented.

3. Renovation, demolition or general construction work involving the removal of materials containing only

trace concentrations of lead (i.e. lead concentrations below 0.1% by dry weight, or 1000ppm) can be

completed without lead specific safety precautions provided that:

a) Work does not include 'fume generating activities' (heat producing) such as welding, torching,

burning, high temperature cutting, etc.,

b) Work does not include dust-generating activities such as grinding, cutting or chemical stripping,

c) Dust levels are maintained below 3mg/m3, and

d) General health and safety construction procedures are implemented, which would include dust

suppression methods, proper respiratory protection (minimum of a 1/2-face respirator) and

protective clothing, as is appropriate for the work being completed.

4. If work requires the replacement of fluorescent light ballasts, all ballasts should be disassembled to

observe serial codes and then compared to standard PCB Identifier Code literature. Ballasts with

unidentifiable serial codes, or from manufactures who are not included in the standard PCB Identifier

Code literature, or are not clearly labelled as “PCB Free”, or no date is clearly visible (ballasts dated

1981, or afterwards, do not contain PCBs), must be assumed to contain PCBs.

of 596





ECOH Page 5

Ballasts and transformers confirmed or assumed to contain PCBs must be disposed of following Ontario

Regulation 362 of the Environmental Protection Act, O. Reg 347/90 and Transportation of Dangerous

Goods Act (TDGA) requirements.

5. The presence of mercury within assembled units (e.g. within wall-mounted thermostats and as vapour

within fluorescent light bulbs) should not be considered a hazard provided that the assembled units

remain sealed and intact. Avoid inhalation of mercury vapour.

6. Any work involving the disturbance of materials that may contain silica must be conducted following

recommendations detailed in the Ministry of Labour document Guideline - Silica on Construction

Projects, dated April 2011.

7. Other designated substances and hazardous materials, if present, would not be expected to be a source of

concern during work of this project and should be adequately addressed using general health and safety

precautions including, in part, the use of dust suppression techniques and appropriate respiratory

protection.

8. Should work be required in other areas of the building, beyond the area subjected to this assessment,

additional site investigations should be completed to assess the presence of Designated Substances or

Hazardous Materials.

Conclusion:

Due to the nature of building construction, and on-going building activities, some limitations exist to the

thoroughness of a building assessment. The field observations, measurements and analysis are considered

sufficient in detail and scope to form a reasonable basis for the findings and conclusions presented in this

report. The observations, results and conclusions drawn by ECOH Management Inc. (ECOH) are limited to

the specific scope of work for which ECOH was retained and are based solely on information generated as a

result of the specific scope of work authorized by the Town of Oakville. Only those items that are capable

of being observed and are reasonably obvious to ECOH personnel or have been identified to ECOH by other

parties, can be reported. ECOH has exercised a degree of thoroughness and competence that is

consistent with the profession during the execution of this assessment. ECOH considers the opinions and

information as they are presented in this report to be factual at the time of the assessment. The conclusions

are limited to the specific locations of where testing and/or observations were completed during the

course of the assessment.

It is important to note that work was completed with the utmost care and our extensive expertise in carrying

out assessments. ECOH believes that the information collected during the assessment concerning the Work

Area is reliable. No other warranties are implied or expressed. ECOH, to the best of its knowledge, believes

this report to be accurate, however, ECOH cannot guarantee the completeness or accuracy of information

supplied to ECOH by third parties. It should also be noted that any investigation regarding the presence of

hazardous materials in the work area is based on interpretation of conditions determined at specific sampling

locations, and conditions may vary between sampling locations.

ECOH is an Environmental Consulting Company and as such any results or conclusions presented in this

report should not be construed as legal advice. The material in this report reflects ECOH’s professional

interpretation of information available at the time of report preparation. Any use which a third party makes

of this report, or any reliance on or decisions to be made based on it, are the responsibility of such third

parties. ECOH accepts no responsibility for damages, if any, suffered by any third party as a result of

decisions made or actions based on this report. Should additional information become available that suggests

other environmental issues of concern beyond that described in this report, ECOH retains the right to review

this information and modify conclusions and recommendations presented in this report accordingly.

of 596





ECOH Page 6

Should you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact us at (905) 795-2800.

Prepared By: Reviewed By:

Travis Bico, B.Sc

Environmental Scientist

Beth Lovegrove, B.Sc. (Hons.)

Project Manager

Attachment 1: Laboratory Certificate of Analysis for Asbestos

Attachment 2: Laboratory Certificate of Analysis for Lead

of 596

EMSL Canada Inc.2756 Slough Street Mississauga, ON L4T 1G3

Tel/Fax: (289) 997-4602 / (289) 997-4607

http://www.EMSL.com / [email protected]

551907748EMSL Canada Order:

Customer ID: 55ECOH45

Customer PO: 21214

Project ID:

Attention: Phone:Travis Bico (905) 795-2800

Fax:ECOH Management, Inc. (905) 795-2870

Received Date:75 Courtneypark Drive West 06/26/2019 2:39 PM

Analysis Date:Unit 1 07/03/2019

Collected Date:Mississauga, ON L5W 0E3 06/26/2019

Project: Oak River Community Centre - 21214

Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized

Light Microscopy

Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous

Non-Asbestos Asbestos

% Type

21214-ASB-01A

551907748-0001

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Lobby - Drywall Joint

Compound

21214-ASB-01B

551907748-0002


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Compound

21214-ASB-01C

551907748-0003


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Compound

21214-ASB-01D

551907748-0004


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Reception - Drywall

Joint Compound

21214-ASB-01E

551907748-0005


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

North Corridor -

Drywall Joint

Compound

21214-ASB-02A

551907748-0006

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Lobby - Concrete

Block Mortar

21214-ASB-02B

551907748-0007


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Lobby - Concrete

Block Mortar

21214-ASB-02C

551907748-0008


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Lobby - Concrete

Block Mortar

21214-ASB-03A

551907748-0009


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Lobby - Ceramic Tile

Grout

21214-ASB-03B

551907748-0010


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Grout

21214-ASB-03C

551907748-0011


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Grout

21214-ASB-04A

551907748-0012


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Mortar

21214-ASB-04B

551907748-0013


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Mortar

21214-ASB-04C

551907748-0014


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Mortar

21214-ASB-05A

551907748-0015


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Front Vestibule - Grey

Door Caulking

21214-ASB-05B

551907748-0016


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Door Caulking

Initial report from: 07/03/2019 11:34:33

Page 1 of 2ASB_PLM_0008_0001 - 1.78 Printed: 7/3/2019 11:34 AM of 596

EMSL Canada Inc.2756 Slough Street Mississauga, ON L4T 1G3

Tel/Fax: (289) 997-4602 / (289) 997-4607

http://www.EMSL.com / [email protected]

551907748EMSL Canada Order:

Customer ID: 55ECOH45

Customer PO: 21214

Project ID:

Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized

Light Microscopy

Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous

Non-Asbestos Asbestos

% Type

21214-ASB-05C

551907748-0017


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Door Caulking

21214-ASB-06A

551907748-0018

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Beige

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Display Case - Beige

Caulking

21214-ASB-06B

551907748-0019


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Caulking

21214-ASB-06C

551907748-0020


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Caulking

21214-ASB-07A

551907748-0021


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Front Vestibule -

Texture Finish

21214-ASB-07B

551907748-0022


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Front Vestibule -

Texture Finish

21214-ASB-07C

551907748-0023


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Front Vestibule -

Texture Finish

Analyst(s)

Ioana Taina (5)

Kira Ramphal (18)

Matthew Davis or other approved signatory

or Other Approved Signatory

EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis . The above analyses were performed in general compliance with Appendix E to Subpart E of 40 CFR (previously EPA 600/M4-82-020 "Interim

Method"), but augmented with procedures outlined in the 1993 ("final") version of the method. This report relates only to the samples reported above, and may not be reproduced, except in full, without

written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations . Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. All

samples received in acceptable condition unless otherwise noted. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of

the federal government. EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction for all non -friable organically bound materials prior to analysis. Estimation of uncertainty is available on request.

Samples analyzed by EMSL Canada Inc. Mississauga, ON NVLAP Lab Code 200877-0

Initial report from: 07/03/2019 11:34:33

Page 2 of 2ASB_PLM_0008_0001 - 1.78 Printed: 7/3/2019 11:34 AM of 596

ConcentrationAnalyzed Weight RDL LeadClient SampleDescription Collected

Test Report: Lead in Paint Chips by Flame AAS (SW 846 3050B/7000B)*

EMSL Canada Inc.2756 Slough Street, Mississauga, ON L4T 1G3Phone/Fax: (289) 997-4602 / (289) 997-4607http://www.EMSL.com [email protected]

Attn: Travis BicoECOH Management, Inc.75 Courtneypark Drive WestUnit 1Mississauga, ON L5W 0E3

Received: 06/26/19 2:39 PM

Oak River Community Centre - 21214

Fax: (905) 795-2870Phone: (905) 795-2800

Project:

6/26/2019Collected:

551907740CustomerID: 55ECOH45CustomerPO: 21214ProjectID:

EMSL Canada Or

Site: Beige Wall Paint - Lobby<83 ppm6/27/2019 0.2414 g

551907740-0001836/26/201921214 - Pb - 01 ppm

Site: Dark Beige Bulkhead Paint - Lobby<81 ppm6/27/2019 0.2459 g

551907740-0002816/26/201921214 - Pb - 02 ppm

Site: White Door Frame Paint - Lobby<200 ppm6/27/2019 0.1020 g

551907740-00032006/26/201921214 - Pb - 03 ppm

Site: Brown Door Paint - Lobby<96 ppm6/27/2019 0.2090 g

551907740-0004966/26/201921214 - Pb - 04 ppm

The reporting limit is based upon the sample weight received.

Page 1 of 2Test Report PB w/RDL-2.0.0.0 Printed: 7/3/2019 8:02:20 AM

Rowena Fanto, Lead Supervisoror other approved signatory

*Analysis following Lead in Paint by EMSL SOP/Determination of Environmental Lead by FLAA. Reporting limit is 0.010 % wt based on the minimum sample weight per our SOP. Unless noted, results in this report are not blank corrected. This report relates only to the samples reported above and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. "<" (less than) result signifies that the analyte was not detected at or above the reporting limit. Measurement of uncertainty is available upon request. The QC data associated with the sample results included in this report meet the recovery and precision requirements unless specifically indicated otherwise. Definitions of modifications are available upon request.Samples analyzed by EMSL Canada Inc. Mississauga, ON A2LA Accredited Cert #2845.08; AIHA-LAP, LLC - ELLAP #196142

Initial report from 07/03/2019 08:02:20 of 596

http://www.EMSL.com


ConcentrationAnalyzed Weight RDL LeadClient SampleDescription Collected

Test Report: Lead in Soils by Flame AAS (SW 846 3050B/7000B)*

EMSL Canada Inc.2756 Slough Street, Mississauga, ON L4T 1G3Phone/Fax: (289) 997-4602 / (289) 997-4607http://www.EMSL.com [email protected]

Attn: Travis BicoECOH Management, Inc.75 Courtneypark Drive WestUnit 1Mississauga, ON L5W 0E3

Received: 06/26/19 2:39 PM

Oak River Community Centre - 21214

Fax: (905) 795-2870Phone: (905) 795-2800

Project:

6/26/2019Collected:

551907740CustomerID: 55ECOH45CustomerPO: 21214ProjectID:

EMSL Canada Or

Site: Concrete Block Mortar<220 mg/Kg6/27/2019 0.0900 g

551907740-00052206/26/201921214 - Pb - 05 mg/Kg

The reporting limit is based upon the sample weight received.

Page 2 of 2Test Report PB w/RDL-2.0.0.0 Printed: 7/3/2019 8:02:20 AM

Rowena Fanto, Lead Supervisoror other approved signatory

*Analysis following Lead in Soil/Solids by EMSL SOP/Determination of Environmental Lead by FLAA. Reporting limit is 40 mg/kg based on the minimum sample weight per our SOP. Unless noted, results in this report are not blank corrected. This report relates only to the samples reported above and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Results reported based on dry weight. "<" (less than) result signifies that the analyte was not detected at or above the reporting limit. Measurement of uncertainty is available upon request. The QC data associated with the sample results included in this report meet the recovery and precision requirements unless specifically indicated otherwise. Definitions of modifications are available upon request.Samples analyzed by EMSL Canada Inc. Mississauga, ON A2LA Accredited Cert #2845.08; AIHA-LAP, LLC - ELLAP #196142

Initial report from 07/03/2019 08:02:20 of 596

http://www.EMSL.com


Drawings

DRAWINGS:

INCLUDED AS A SEPARATE DOWNLOAD

ON THE BIDS AND TENDERS SITE AND FORM PART OF THIS RFT DOCUMENT

of 596